Bhattacharya_The_IBM_Selective_Sequence_Electronic_Calculator_Jan82 Bhattacharya The IBM Selective Sequence Electronic Calculator Jan82

Bhattacharya_The_IBM_Selective_Sequence_Electronic_Calculator_Jan82 Bhattacharya_The_IBM_Selective_Sequence_Electronic_Calculator_Jan82

User Manual: Bhattacharya_The_IBM_Selective_Sequence_Electronic_Calculator_Jan82

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 346

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

RC 9225 (#40521) 1/22/82
Computer Science 40 pages
THE IBM SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
ArupK. Bhattacharya
Columbia University
New York, N.Y.
Typed by: C.C. Copp'oia

Abstract: The IBM Selective Sequence Electronic Calculator (SSEC) was placed in operation
in January, 1948. It was partly electronic and partly electroinechanical.

It is of historical

interest, in part because of its capability of operating dynamically oil its'own stored instructions as data. This report includes a summary of its major functional units, its program and
value formats, and the manner in which it operated. This description is based primarily upon
information' cpntained in U.S. Patent No. 2,636,672, "Selective Sequence Electronic Calculator," issued6p,April 28~ 1953, to F.E. Hamilton, R.R. Seeber, Jr., R.A. Rowley, andE$.
Hughes, Jr.

Introduction

The IBM Selective Sequence Electronic Calculator (SSEC) was a large-scale electronic and
electromechanical machine with all the system components of a modern general-purpose
computer. It was developed and built in the IBM laboratory in Endicott, N.Y., in the period
from 1945 to 1947, moved to IBM corporate headquarters in mid-1947, and placed in service
with a formal dedication on January 27, 1948.

The SSEC performed its computations electronically, according to "lines of sequence"
(instructions) stored in the same memory and in the same word form as ordinary data.

Its

memory consisted of three levels in three technologies, in order of increasing capacity and
decreasing speed: electronic storage units (registers), relays, and punched paper tape. It was
capable of modifying any part of an instruction in memory, including the part that specified
the next instruction to be executed.

The SSEC contained 12,500 vacuum tubes, 21,400 electromechanical relays, and 66 paper
tape readers, and occupied the periphery of a room about 60 feet long and 30 feet wide. It is
of historical interest, in part because of its ability to modify its own program.

It was not

described in great detail in its own day (it was dismantled in mid-1952), and in order to
produce the equivalent of a programmers's description of the machine, a study was made of
U.S. Patent No. 2,636,672, "Selective Sequence Electronic Calculator," issued on April 28,
1953, naming as inventors F.E. Hamilton, R.R. Seeber, Jr., R.A. Rowley, and E.S. Hughes,
Jr., of IBM.
description.

That patent is the primary source of information that has been used in this

I,.

-2 -

I

CONTROL DESK
The Control desk is a manual switching center at which a duplicate o(:t~.ra.ctically every
control circuit in.the machine may be s'et up by manipulating switches and keys. The control
desk holds control keys such as start and stop keys; also sets of dial storage and the . switches
and keys for use in setting up an artificial line of sequence. A keyboard and connection are
also provided at the control desk for applying desired numbers to relay storage.

Cancel

circuits (clearing circuits) for the MDcalculating unit, the accumulator unit, the denominational shift unit, the electronic storage, the main commutator, the pilot units and every other unit
desired may be operated individually or together from the control desk as well as automatically.

-3II

ARTIFICIAL LINE OF SEQUENCE

The machine is started by an artificial line of sequence, which is manually set.

This

consists of S 1 or S2 data or both and is inserted in sequence storage under manual control, as
the starting instruction for sequencing of operations of a problem.

In other words, the

artificial line of sequence data provides direction as to where the first real set or line of
sequence data is to be obtained. By a real set of sequence data is meant such data as is called
out automatically from tape storage or relay storage or other source for sequencing operations
leading to the solution of some problem.

III
RECORD TAPES

The record tapes may be used to store values either for computatiollal purposes or for
program or sequence control purposes. Sequence data is made up of numbers which can be
handled .the same as the numbers involved in calculation.

Tapes which store numbers for

computation are called "value tapes." Tapes which bear programming or sequence data are
called "program tapes."

For both program and value tapes, the numbers are punched

according to the same code, binary coded decimal, in which a complete binary zone which is
called a column, is made up of four successive binary positions 8, 4, 2 and 1.

The record tape has the· width of a standard 80 index position card, but owing to the
space occupied by the marginal feed holes, 78 positions are allowed. In other words, tape has
a capacity of 19 and half digit columns, or sufficient capacity to be punched, if desired, with
representation -of :nineteen decimal digits and a sign. Hence, this row of 19 and one-half index
positions illustrated in Fig. 1 is called a "word."

VALUE TAPE

,,
S1 SEQ.

rnl
...-.."

t

(b)

S2 SEQ ..

Figure 1

Ul

:.. 6 PROGRAM TAPES

Programming or sequencing of machine operation is controlled by the program tapes
illustrative portions of which appear in Fig. 1 (a) and (b). Successive designation lines of the
program tapes bear sequence data which may be referred to as an "instruction word," or as
"sequence data." A complete line of sequence data is made up of two designation lines on a
pair of program tapes. One half of the line o( sequence data or one "word" is a designation
line on one tape and the other half is it designation line on another of the tapes. The values of
words are differentiated .as SI Seq. and S2 Seq. portions. So a program tape will be punched
with either SI Seq. data or S2 Seq. data.

Both SI Seq. and S2 Seq. data are similar with

respect to the arrangements of fields and subfields, but have certain differences with regard to
programming functions. SI Seq. portion is. made up of fields P, Q, R, SHl, OPI and SI (Fig.
l(a», whereas, S2 Seq. of portion is made of fields T, U, V, SH2, OP2 and S2 (Fig. l(b».
The fields Q, R, U and T may be used as either IN or OUT fields. Field P is always an OUT
field and· field V is always an IN field. An OUT field is one which calls for the

r~ading

out of

data from a selected tape or relay storage source to a selected electronic storage unit by way
of the out bus set fixed by association with the electronic storage. An IN field is one which
calls for transmission of data from a selected electronic 'storage unit along the corresponding
IN bus set to a tape or relay storage distinction. Each of the fields P, Q, R, T, U and V are
divided into three subfields, s, band r. Ps sub field comprises column 1, which is actually half
a column (2 bits) with decimal values 0, 1, 2 and 3 only, and is used to designate the operational sign which is to be applied for a number read from a source. A perforation in binary
position 2 designates operational" +" sign, Le., the number taken from the source named in Pr
(see later) is to be handled in calculation without any change of its sign. A perforation in
binary position 1 represents operational "-" sign, i.e., the number read to be operated upon
with an inversion in its sign. The absence of perforation in Ps represents "0," which is for
operational fixed" +" sign, i.e., regardless of the original sign of the number it is to be treated
as a positive number. Perforations in both binary 2 and 1 position represents decimal 3 which

-7means operational fixed "-" sign, or treating the number as "-" regardless of the original sign.
Pb subfield is the column 2, which may contain the decimal values 1, 2, 3 ... 8, designating the
electronic storage unit and corresponding out bus set involved.

Pr subfield is made up of columns 3, 4 and 5 bearing the hundreds, tens and units digits
of the Code number for the source from which a value is to be transmitted to the electronic
storage unit named in Pb.

When a sub field "b" in any program field P, Q, R, U, V and T is blank, it represents "0"
and calls for the field to be, in effect, skipped over, during a scanning sequence of the
.program line. When a subfield r in an OUT field is blank, then it calls for transmission' from
the electronic storage unit named in its b field to the electronic storage unit named in the b
sub field of an IN field, which may also be blank in its r subfield. Field Q may be used either
as IN field or an OUT field.

Subfield Qs is a complete decimal column, unlike Ps, and

occupies column 6, in which 0, 1, 2, and 3 have same designation as Ps. Additjonally, any of
these numbers in Qs characterize Q field as an OUT field.

Any digit in Qs higher than 3

makes Q an IN field. Besides the values 4 to 9 designate the tens denomination of a column
shift and whether the shift to be executed to the left or right. The value 4 in Qs thus designates Q as an IN field and also calls for a shift to the right with a zero tens order. A 5 has
same interpretation only with a shift to the left. The value 6 calls for right shift with a tens
order shift of 1. 7 calls for the same amount of left shift. The value 8 calls for a right shift
with a tens order shift of 2. 9 does the same for a left shift.

Subfield b, in column 7, is used to designate the electronic storage unit number to send or
to receive data, depending on whether Q is an IN field or an OUT field.

Qr is located in

columns 8, 9 and 10 to represent the source from which a number is to be sent to the
electronic storage unit if the field Q is an OUT field or to represent the receiving unit to which
the number is to be transmitted from the electronic storage unit if the field Q is an IN field.

-8Field 'R is contained in columns 11 to 15 and its subfields are similar to· the' field Q and
its subfield.

Field SHI in column 16 designates the units order amount of column shift to be executed.

Field OPl, in column .17 and 18 calls for the fundamental calculating operations to be
performed, such as accumulation, multiplication, division, etc.

The field SI is a two column field in 19 and 20 which designates the

~ource

for next left

half line of sequence data.

The right half line of programming, S2 Seq., has fields ·and sub fields similar to those of
the left half line, SI Seq. Generally, all fields and subfields of S2 Seq. correspond to those of
S 1 Seq. with the following exceptions:

1.

As mentioned before, field V is always an IN field while P is always an OUT field.

2.

The field T can be either IN or OUT field depending on the code in the field OP2.
When the latter field has the designation 01, it characterizes T as an IN field. In all
other cases, the field T is an OUT field.

It is important to understand the sequential nature of the scanning and execution of the
elementary operations called for in a line of sequence: The left half line, or word, is executed
first; then the right half line; then the next half line, etc. Furthermore, within a half line, the
fields are interpreted and the specified elementary operations executed also from left to right.

-9-

IV

ELECTRONIC STORAGE

The electronic storage units are used for the temporary storage of numbers, and may be
compared to the general arithmetic registers of a modern computer.

There are eight similar electronic storage units designated as ESl, ES2 ... , ES8. Each has
twenty columns (eighty bits) of decimal digit storage capacity.

Entry into the ES may be

made from the internal IN bus set or alternatively from the corresponding numbered OUT bus
set. Read out or exit from an ES unit may be into the internal OUT bus set or alternatively
into· the corresponding numbered IN bus set.

All control and timing signals of ES are provided by the eight correspondingly numbered
pilot units. Whenever any transfer occurs, the data are passed through .the electronic storage
unit.

All numbers on the OUT bus sets enter electronic storage on their way to selected

destinations.

All numbers on the IN-bus sets, with the exception of the artificial1ine of sequence from
the dial switches, are taken from the associated electronic storage units and directed to the
specified receiving units. The electronic storage units are numbered 1, 2, 3, ... , 8 and can be
. accessed by the use of corresponding digits in the single-column lib" sub field in the program
sequence.

- 10 -

v
REL~YSll0RAGE

Relay storage consists of sets of relay storage registers, also called relay storage units,
which receive numbers from the IN bus sets and store them until called out for transmission
.along the OUT bus sets. Certain of these relay storage units also serve to control the printing
unit, as will be explained later (in printing section).

There are ten sets of storage relays

designated as the 0, 1, ... , 9 sets. Each set has fifteen storage units and each unit has twenty
columns of storage relays, each column capable of storing a decimal digit. As the decimal 'digit
is repres.ented in BCD code, there are four relays in each column, which may 'be called "8,"
"4,""2" and "1" relays of a column. Each relay storage unit is identified by a three..;decimaldigit number, which may appear in the "r" subfield of any IN/OUT field. The digit in units
place is the number of the relay storage set containing that unit of storage. The two ·left hand
digits form the ;unit id.entification number. Thus in relay storage set "0," the fifteen units are
designated as 010,020,030, ... , 150; and for example, unit 159 is the 15th unit in the set 9.
The code numbers for selecting relay storage units are the same as the identification numbers
of these units except for certain special numbers relating to selection of relay storage units for
controlling record operations. As mentioned earlier, all the numbers on an IN/OUT bus set
from any source or to any receiving means are passed through ES (with the minor exception ()f
theaItificial Uneofsequence). Hence, when the program calls fora number to be entered
into or taken out from a relay storage unit, it is necessary to refer one of the ES also, which is
done by using the 'corresponding "b" subfield.

If only 10 .column numbers are to be handled, then each storage unit can be used as a
split storage device to store two numbers each with· 9 digits and a sign. Right and left haIfof
the storage unit can be reset and written independently. All these are done by plugging as has
been explained in the Patent.

- 11 VI

TAPE STORAGE

Tape storage comprises three banks Nos. 1, 2 and 3, each with ten tape stations .. Each
bank has eight group sets associated with eight OUT bus sets 1 to 8. Selection of a unique
tape storage location, therefore,' requires selection of a tape storage bank and selection of one
of its group outs. The selection of a bank is determined by the tape storage code number in
the r subfield and selection of one of the group outs from this bank is determined by the digit
in the adjacent b subfield. The code number for the tape storage stations run from 403 to 422
and 503 to 522 for bank 1; from 433 to 452 and 533 to 552 for bank 2; and from 463 to 482
and 563 to 582 for bank 3. It is clearly seen that the hundred order digit 4 or 5 identifies
tape storage, and of tens order digits 0, 1, and 2 identifies bank 1, any of tens order digits 3, 4
and 5 identifies bank 2 and any of tens order digit 6, 7 and 8 identifies bank 3. The following
section is not needed for programming purposes, but is included for better understanding.

TAPE STORAGE BANK

STATION
1

3

~

4

£

5

G

.9

B

~

B

j~

lBSS 2ASS2BSS 3ASS 3BS S 4ASS 4BSS SASS SBSS GASS GBSS

Figure 2

8

7

.J

~

8ASS

9

D

10

--l

1\
.
IiI L~J J D

9ASS 9BSS 10ASS lOBSS

- 13 Figure 2 shows the ten tape stations in one bank. Associated with each station there are two
outlets called station selector A and B. Each of th~ station selectors A comprise a gang relay
ASS and 'each of the station selectors B includes a gang relay BSS. The station relays may be
differentiated by a prefixed number corresponding to the

as~ociated

station, e.g., relays lASS

are associated with station 1. As there are thirty stations in: all there are sixty station relays
ASS and BSS. The tape storage code number calls.- for a 'p'articular one of these station relays;,
.~. ~,

As explained before, all tape storage code numbers

have,~' o.r5

in their hundreds order digits.

The distinction is that the hundred order digit 5 calls for the station tape to move afterbeing
read out while hundred order digit 4 calls for the station tape to remain

a~

rest after being read

out: Regardless of whether the hundreds order digit is 4 or 5, tens order digit 0, 1, 2 characterize code numbers for station relays in tape storage bank 1, tens order digit 3, 4 and 5 are in
the code number for the relays in bank 2 and tens order digit 6, 7 and 8 select the relays of
bank 3.

Units order digits which are odd relate to relays ASS and those which are even

related to relays BSS. The ten station relays in bank one identified as follows (ignoring the
digit 4 and 5 in hundred order places): lASS by 03, 2ASS by 05, 3ASSby 07, 4ASS by 09,
SASS by 11, 6ASS by 13, 7ASS by 15, 8ASS by 17, 9ASS by 19 and 10ASS by 21. The ten
BSS relays in bank 1 are identified as follows: 1BSS by 04, 2BSS by 06, 3BSS by 08, 4BSS by
10, SBSS by 12, 6BSS by 14, 7BSS by 16, 8BSS by 18, 9BSS by 20, and 10BSS by 22.
Similarly the relays lASS to 10ASS of bank 2 are identified by code numbers 4 or 5 in
hundreds order followed by 33 to 51 (all odds) and relays 1BSS to 10BSS in bank 2 by
numbers 34 to 52 (all evens). The relays lASS to 10ASS in bank 3 are identified by 63 to 81
(all odds) and the relays 1BSS to 10BSS by 64 to 82 (all evens).

There are two more relays MA and MB for each bank of ten stations which, when
energized, cause the tapes to move: Relay MA when energized allows any of the selected ASS
relays of the bank to transmit the effect of a move signal to the related move network. Relay
MB serves the same purpose in relation with the BSS relays. If the code number in the r field
for a tape storage station had the hundreds order digit 4 then neither the MA nor MB

- 14 -

actuates. But if there is 5 instead of 4, then relay MA will -be. energized if any station relay
ASS is selected or relay McB will be energized if any station relay BSS is selected. Thus, there
are three factors to be considered in this selection or nonselection of the move relay. One,
whether the .hundreds order digit is 4 or 5; another, whether the units order digit is odd or
even (Le., whether ASS orBSS relay, whether MA orMB) and finally with respect to the
selection of .a move telay from a particular storage bank, whether the tens order digit is in one
of the three mentioned group of digits.

- 15 -

VII

TABLE-LOOKUP UNIT

This unit is used to look up table values by comparing arguments punched in the tape
with the computed arguments received from electronic storage units. The table lookup unit is
used also to read sequence and value tapes.

This unit includes 36 tape stations which may· carry tapes bearing tables of arguments and
related function values. The tape argument may consist of from 1 to 5 columns of numerical
digits punched in the left portion of the tape, starting with binary position 3 but not exceeding
position 24. (3 and 4 contain the sign). The unit will handle up to 6 tables of one or two
tape width, which can be arranged by plugs and connections. A table may consist of maximum 36 tapes in length if the table is only one tape wide, with a limitation of maximum width
of 12 tapes wide.

The lookup operation is conducted by comparing the arguments portion of each successive word from tape with the computed argument. The argument selected is the last one that
does not go beyond the computed argument. This determination is facilitated by the inclusion
of a pair of reading stations. At that time the function value corresponding to the selected
argument is available for reading out from the electronic storage unit via its associated bus.

The code for a table lookup is one of the numbers 281 to 286 in an "r" subfield.

A

program for this operation is:

Ps

Pb

2

1

Pr
127

Os

Ob

Or

4

1

281

Rs

Rb

Rr

SHI

OPI SI

02

01

which calls for a transfer of a computed argument from relay storage 127 to the table lookup
apparatus (since 281 in "r" sub field represents Table 1) via ESt.

- 16 The selected functional value is positioned at the reading station of the selected tape unit.
During the lookup operation other computations may be performed following. the above line of
instruction. After such calculation, the following line may be used for reading out the selected
functional values.

Ps

Pb

Pr

Os

Ob

Or

Rs

Rb

2

1

281

4

1

Rr
126

SH1

OP1

S1

o

02

01

The selected functional value will be read out to ES lafter the execution of this line, and
stored in the relay storage unit 127.

- 17 VIII

DIAL STORAGE

Here, unlike all other storage, data can be set manually by the operator. A dial storage
bank consists of a set of twenty dial switches named as DS1, DS2, ... , DS20. Each dial switch
is manually settable to a desired decimal digit. Thus, twenty digits, i.e., a whole word, may be
registered by the set of dial switches. The switches are further identifiable as column 1 to
column 20 switches to conform with the numbering of the bus columns. If the code number in
an r subfield is "603," it calls for a value to be read out from the dial storage unit no. 3. The
corresponding subfield "b" selects the dial storage group out and electronic storage, depending
on which OUT bus set is to receive the value from the dial storage.

- 18 -

IX

PLUGGABLE STORAGE

Besides the. various memory storage units, the machine provides pluggable storage as a
convenient means for applying constants to the OUT-bus sets to be entered in electronic
storage. Several pluggable storage units are provided. Ten of these are designated by code
numbers 610 to 619, which may occur in subfield r of an OUT field of a line of sequence.

- 19 -

x
THE ELECTRONIC ACCUMULATOR UNIT

This is an arithmetical unit in the electronic computing section. When accumulation is
called for, the accumulator unit receives numbers successively in binary coded decimal form
(19 decimal digits) from the columns 11 to 29 of the internal IN bus.

Along with each

number, the internal IN bus set will supply the sign of the number to this unit. This unit can
perform simple accumulation of positive and negative numbers. Means are also provided for
rounding off up to a desired order of the result in the accumulator. The accumulator may also
perform a special accumulation operation called tolerance check which will be discussed later.

Associated with the accumulator unit is a so-called internal commutator which subsequences all the operations of the accumulator upon reception of certain signals from main
sequence.

A block diagram representation of the electronic calculating circuit has been attached
(Fig. 3). The accumulator has 29 orders, of which the 29th is a result sign evaluating order.
The internal IN bus columns 2 to 29 are connected respectively to entry means for accumulator orders 28 to 1. However, in the present case only the bus columns 11 to 29 may carry
significant digits since it is only these columns which receive digits from electronic storage.
These bus columns 29 to 11 are associated with accumulator orders 1 to 19 respectively. With
regard to orders 20 to 28, they will receive "0" entries from the bus columns 2 to 10. The
internal IN bus column 1 which carries the algebraic sign of the number to be entered in the
accumulator is connected into a "sign mixing" circuit.

The outputs of orders 1 to 28 are

connected to the internal OUT bus columns 29 to 2 respectively and that of the 29th order is
connected to the internal OUT bus column 1 to apply the sign of the result.

The· operation will consist, in general, in entering the number from the internal IN bus set
into the entry registers and thereafter from there transmitting· the number to the corresponding

r

AMPLIFIER: 29 COLS

I I
'i'b 0

BUS GOLS. l' TO 29
eOLS.
2 TO.29

-

-

BUS eOLS.
2 T029

eOLUMN SHIFT
UNIT: 28 eOLS

eol. 1

-

I
I

-

-

1

SIGN STORED

I

J

BUS GOl. 1

'.

. RESUL TSJGN REGISTER
eOLS.
16 TO . 29

DIVIDEND. ENTRY TO

BUS eOLS.
2TO 29

1 .
.

I~

I

TORDERSI
I.,
I

...

133 TO 19 !18TO Sl4 TO 1
PQ GaUNTER

~

eol. 1
\0..

FACTOR SIGNS MIXER

INTER NAL IN
BUS S ET

1
INTER NAL OUT
BUS SET

I
eOLS.
16 TO . 29

Me/DR COUNTER: 14 ORDERS

,,-

MP COUNTER: 14 ORDERS
eOlS .
.2 TO 29
ENTRY eOUNTER: 28 ORDERS
,,~~,

.

W

COL. .1
SIGNS MIXER

J

I
BUS .GOlS.
1 TO 29

-

EXIT COUNTER: 29 ORDERS
(28 DIGITS AND SIGN)

..J

:

,OUT BUS S ET 1
.eOLS. ITO 20

COLS. 1 &
11 TO 29

COLS. 1 &
11 TO.29

'.

;.;......-r~

-

T

1

E51: 20 COlS.
'f

J

/I"~

,..

·"'·our. 8US'SET.8

IN B US SET 1 .
.COL S. 1 TO 20
~
~--

I

I

ELECTRONIC STORAGE

'J

I"l"

I ..

-

=

---J: IN BUSSErS·

_____
ES_8_:_.2_0_C_0_L_S_._ _

,C.OLS . .1T020

eOLS.l TO 20

Figure .3

.....

- 20 orders of the accumulating registers. The first set of registers is called the entry counter. The
second set of registers, the exit counter, comprises the accumulating device per se and its
register orders are denominationally associated by carry means. Both" +" and "-" numbers
may be accumulated and an albegraic sum obtained.

All numbers are represented on the

busses in true, binary form if the operation sign is "+." But if it is "-," then tens complement
of the number in entry registers will be read out therefrom to the accumulating registers. The
sign of a number and the operational sign may be 0, 1, 2 or 3, as previously explained.

- 21 -

XI

ACCUMULATION

Assume a line of sequence data selected by S 1 and S2 numbers is as follows:

Sl Seq ....

S2 Seq ....

Ps

Pb

2

1

Ts

Tb

1

3

Os

Ob

Or

Rs

Rb

Rr

SH1

OP1

Sl

2

2

011

4

1

030

0

02

16

Tr

Us

Ub

Ur

Vs

Vb

Vr

OP2

S2

433

2

6

552

4

5

151

04

02

Pr
010

SH2
6

P is always an OUT field. The code number in this field calls for an amount to be read out of
relay storage unit 010 (Pr) to OUT bus set 1 (Pb) and without a change in sign. The Q field
is characterized as an OUT field by number 2 in OS and this number also specifies that the
number to be read out of relay storage unit 011 (Or) to OUT bus set 2 (Ob) is to be handled
without any change of sign. The R field is characterized as an IN field by the 4 in RS which
also calls for a shift to the right with a zero tens order. In its entirety, therefore, the R field
calls for the result to be entered into relay storage unit 030 from accumulator via IN bus set 1
with a denominational shift to the right of zero tens order.

The code number "0" in SH1

signifies the shift in units place digit will be zero. So it is clear that the denominational shift
will be zero. Code number 02 in OP field calls for accumulation without half correction.

In brief, the instruction given by P, 0, R, SH1 and OP1 fields are to send numbers from relay
storage 010 and 011 via electronic storage units 1 and 2, respectively, to the accumulator to
be accumulated without change in sign of the numbers and without half correction and for the
algebraic sum to be routed through the denominational shift unit without column shifting and
then via electronic storage 1 to relay storage unit 030.

The T field is classed by 04 in OP2 as an out field. 433 in Tr calls for the number to be read
from the tape at station 1 in the tape storage bank via the A outlet of this station via electron-

- 22 ic storage ES3 (Tb) and for the tape to remain at rest after the number has been read out. Ts
signifies that the sign of the number is to be changed. Field U is classed as an out field by2
in Us which signifies further· that no change of sign should take place. Number 552 in Ur calls
for the number to be read out of the tape at station lOin bank 2 via the B outlet of this
station through the ES6 (Ub) and for the tape to be moved after the number has been read
out. Field V is always an IN field, and 4 at Vs calls for a zero tens place right shift. Digit 5
in Vb indicates that the transferred should be through IN bus set 5 via ES5. Vr represents
relay storage 151 which is the 15th unit of set 1 and which is the destination of the result
from accumulator. Code 04 in OP2 instructs the machine to perform accumulator, with half
correction of the result.

In short, the instructions given by T, U, V, SH2 and OP2 are that the numbers from stations 1
and 10 of bank 2 be applied via their A and B outlets to out bus sets 3 and 6, respectively, to
be routed through electronic storage units 3 and 6; that the tape at station 10, bank 2 be
advanced after the number has been read; that the sign of the number taken from station 1,
bank 2 be changed; that the result be shifted by the denominational shift unit 6 places to the
right; that the half correction entry of 5 be made in the 5th order of the sum before denominational shift is completed and that the rounded off result be routed via electronic storage unit
5 to relay storage unit 151.

In the preceeding example, we have seen instructions for combining pairs of numbers in one
instance by addition and without half correction or shift, and in the other instance by subtraction with half correction and denominational shift of the result.

Suppose another line of sequence of data is:

SI Seq ....

Ps

Pb

2

1

Pr
012

Qs

Qb

Or

Rs

Rb

Rr

2

2

013

1

3

030

SH1
0

OP1

Sl

01

01

- 23 S2 Seq-

Ts

Tb

o

5

Tr
121

Us

Ub

Ur

Vs

Vb

Vr

1

4

151

4

1

122

SH2
0

OP2

S2

01

02

The code 01 in OP1 calls for accumulation without half correction of the accumulated result.
The interpretation of this program sequence is as follows. A number is to be taken from relay
storage unit 012 (Pr) and applied to OUT bus set 1 (Pb) without any change of sign (PS=2).
A second number is to be taken from relay storage unit 013 (Qr)and applied to OUT bus set
2(Qb) without any change of sign (QS=2). A third number to be read out of relay storage
unit 030 (Rr) to OUT bus set 3 (Rb) to be handled with a change in sign (RS= 1). These
numbers are to be entered successively to the accumulator (OP1 =01). The accumulated result
and sign are to be transmitted to relay storage unit 121 (Tr) via IN bus set 5 (Tb) as T field is
characterized as an IN field (OP2=01).

After executing one in field (Le., storing one result) the machine clears the accumulator
and proceeds to scan the rest of the sequence. The number in relay storage unit 151 (Dr) is
routed to accumulator via ES4 (Ub) with a change in sign (Us is 1). The number changed in
sign is to be transmitted via the denominational shift unit without column shifting (VS=4,
SH2=0) via ES1 (Vb) to relay storge unit 122 (Vr). This program shows the accumulation of
three numbers and utilization of T field as an IN field. Also it shows that other operations are
possible with multi word accumulation. If in this example we should use 02 for OP2 then T
field would be an OUT field. In that case the terms selected by P, Q, R T (OUT field) and U
fields would be accumulated and their result stored in the unit selected by V field. A single
line of sequence thus may call for successive accumulation of a maximum of five numbers. If
it is desired to accumulate more than five numbers, two or more lines of sequence may be
used. In that case, V field of each line except the last line will be left blank and will act as a
skip field.' The V field of last line will be the IN field to store the result of accumulation and
its sign. Obviously, any number of terms may be accumulated successively and directly in this
manner.

- 24 -

XII

MULTIPLICATION

If the code number in OP field is 10, multiplication without half correction is called for

and if it is 15, then multiplication with half correction is ordered.

A maximum of two

multiplications can be ordered by a complete line of sequence with each multiplication in one
half lines. An example of Sl Seq. of data calling for multiplication without half correction is
given below:

Sl Seq.

Ps

Pr

Pb

Os

Or

Ob

Rs

Rb

1

1

017

2

2

158

4

3

Rr
139

SH1
0.

OPI

Sl

10

01

The above program calls for a number from relay storage unit 01 (Pr) to be sent to ES 1
(Pb) and thence to the MD unit (multiplying and dividing unit) to serve as the multiplicand
and for the "- "operational sign to be applied to. the sign mixing circuit; for the number from
storage unit 158 (Or) to be sent to ES2 (Ob) and from there to the MD unit to serve as
multiplier and for the

"+" operational sign to be applied; the product to be noted through the

denomination shift unit·· without column shifting and .to ES3 (Rb) and transmitted from. there
to relay storage unit 139 (Rr) with the sign of the product being determined by the sign
mixing network.

- 25 XIII

DIVISION

The code number 20 in the OP field calls for division without half correction which may
be ordered by a half line of sequence. The code number 25 in the OP field calls for division
with half correction of quotient.

-

A sample half line of S2 Seq. for a division without half

correction is,

S2 Seq.

Ts

Tb

2

1

Tr
151

Us

Ub

1

2

Ur

Vs

Vb

Br

142

4

130

136

SH2

OP2

S2

9

20

02

This program instructs the machine to take the divisor from relay storage unit 151 (Tr)
and direct it via ES1 (Tb) to the MD unit without sign change; to take the dividend from relay
storage unit 142 (Ur) and bring it through ES2 (Rb) to the MD unit; to pass the quotient to
the denominational shift unit where it shall be shifted nine places to the right (VS

= 4, SH2 =

9), and to transmit the shifted quotient to ES3 (Vb) and thence to relay storage unit 136 (Vr).

- 26 XIV

COMPUTED OR MODIFIED SEQUENCE

For some problems the course and characteristics of the calculation have no deviations,
and pre-chosen program paths. and instructions may be used. For other problems, the course
or extent of. calculations varies according to computed results and completely preselected
sequence lines are not suitable.

Because simple, computable numbers have been used as

instructions, the lines of sequence may be computed to steer (a) the course, (b) the nature,
and (c) the extent of subsequent calculation. In this section we will show an example of the
first of the capabilities, computed selection of the sequence path. Let's consider a program for
finding the square root of a number N using Newton's formula
N
X(NEW)=(X(OLD)+ X (OLD) )/2.

As by this time we are already familiar with the way in which accumulation, multiplication,
division, etc. are accomplished in the SSEC program, we won't discuss those elaborately.
Instead, the terms shown in parenthesis in the program will carry the information about
calculations in progress.

P

s

Q

r
2 5 031
(X( 0) }
2

2
2

b

3

s

r
6 128
N

b

SRI

R

s

b

r

OP1 Sl
----

OP2

S2

02

21

04
5
.4 1 100
X(N)/10 5 =t (tolerance)

2.1

02

21

V

U

T

s

SH2

2 032
(N/X (0) }

8

25

22

2

2

2

r
3 033
5
4
(X(O}+N/X(O) )

2 4 614
4 5 129
(X(O)+N/X(O) )/2=X(N)

1

15

22

0

0

2

5

02

22

2

1

2
6
3
(t-d}=I+' or I_I

3 157

02

22

2

5
4
2 612 2
(262:5 )=31 or 21

4 153

02

21

2
5 129
4 5 031
(X(N) goes to unit 031)

02

53

2

4

5
1 4 031
4 2 034
(X (N) -x (0) ) =d (difference)
5 157
2 3 613
(27±5) =32 or 22

4

1 152

32
or
22

s

b

r

s

b

r

b

9

31
or
21

- 27 X(O)=X(OLD) is the first guessed square root which is preliminarily put into storage unit
031. The first calculated approximation of square root X(N) is to be used to obtain tolerance.
Tolerance is computed in the second half of the second line by dividing X(N) by 105, which is
equivalent to shifting it five places to the right. The second half of 3rd line computes (t-d)
and shifts the result to the right, 19 places to discard the numerical value of the result and to
leave the sign only, which is enough information to know whether the computed value is less
or greater than the tolerance. The

JI

+" or "-" sign is transmitted from ES3 to column 1 of

relay storage unit 157, which has been preliminarily plugged so that its two halves will be reset
and receive data independently.

The constant 5 is preliminarily entered in the right hand

column of the right half of storage unit 157 through pluggable storage. Hence standing in 157
is .±5. Pluggable storage has been preliminarily set to apply the riumber 27 to out bus set 3.
The Q field of the 4th line of sequence does that.

The same half of the 4th line does the

accumulation of ,±5 and 27 and transmits the result 32 or 22 in relay storage unit 152 during
the execution of the R field. During the execution of the second half of the 4th line number,
26 is directed from pluggable storage to the ES2 and hence to the accumulator after which ±5,
which was buffered in ES5 by unit 157, is applied to the accumulator and the result 31 or 21
is transmitted in relay storage unit 153.

Now present in relay storage units 152 and 153 are computed SI and S2 numbers. The
output hubs 52 and 53 of SI and S2 pyramid are preliminarily plugged to relay storage hubs
152 and 153, respectively. During the execution of the 5th line of sequence, therefore, the
next computed line of sequence is called out from relay sto"rage 152 and 153 and transmitted
to sequence storage.

The computed line of sequence just transmitted comprises SI and S2

numbers 32 and 31 respectively, if the first calculated approximation X(N) and the first guess
X(O) do n. 1, no. 2 and no. 3, respectively.

The

instruction to store in atape memory unit causeS th~~'tape punch on the tape unit to operate
after the number has been stored in one of

th~

two alternate relay memory units. While' a

number is being punched, the correct punching,!'of the previous number is being checked
against the number standing in. the alternate memory unit.

Thus, as we see from the above discussion, 40 units (16 units for card punch, 6 units for
tape punch, 8 units for printers and 10 units for card readers) out of 150 relay storage units
are used as auxiliary storage in connection with the input and output devices of the SSEC.
The rest of 110 relay storage units are solely memory units. Of course, those forty units can
also be used as memory, if programmed accordingly.

Whether they will be used as normal

memory, or for input/output transfer is established by programming, using the sequence codes
given in table No. III.

37

SEOUENCE

SUB
FIELD
(DIGITS)

FIELD

s
(1/2)
P
(only
out

b

!
VALUES'

0
1
2
3
0
1-8

(1)

field)

r
(3)

0-3
4
5

LEFT
HALF

s

0

6

(1)

7

(both
out
and in
field)

8
9

Operational Fixed Positive sign.
Inversion in the original sign.
No change of sign.
Ooerational fixed ne~ative sign.
Corresponding field to be skipped
Electronic storage unit and corresponding in/out bus
set (for in/out field)
Destination/source (for in/out field, as applicable) of
data or program word in storage including relay storage,
dial storage, tape storage, pluggable storage and table
look-up unit. (See Table No.2)
Same as Ps, in addition, any of them characterize the
field as an out field
The field is an in field and a shift to the right with a
tens order shift of '0'
The field is an in field and a shift to the left with a
tens order shift of '0'
The field is an in field and a shift to the right with a
tens order shift of '1'
The field is an in field and a shift to the left with a
tens order shift of '1'
The field is an in field and a shift to the right with a
tens order shift of '2'
The field is an in field and a shift to the left with a
tens order shift of '2'
Same as Pb
Same as Pr

b(l)
r(3)

0-8

s( I)
b(l)
r(3)

0-9
0-8

Same as Os (see note below)
Same as Pb
Same as Pr

0-9
00
01
02
03
04
10
15
20
25

Units order of column shift
No operation of the accumulator
Accumulation without half correction
Accumulation without half correction
Tolerance check
Accumulation with half correction of the sum
Multiplication without half correction
Multiplication with half correction of the product
Division without half correction
Division with half correction of the Quotient
Source for the next left half line of sequence data

s(1/2)
b(l)
r(3)

0-3
0-8

Same as Os (see note below)
Same as Pb
Same as Pr

set)
bO)
r(3)

0-9
0-8

Same as Os (see note below)
Same as Pb
Same as Pr

SO)

0-3
4-9

b(l)
(only in
r(3)
field)
SH2(1)

0-8

Not used, as they are not necessary, (see note below)
Same as Os with an exception that this field is always
an in field
Same as Pb
Same as Pr
Same as SHI
Same as OP I with an exception only when the code is
oI. which characterizes T field as an in field.
In all other cases T field is an out field.
Source for the next right half line of sequence
data.

R
(both
out and
in field)

i

-

-

i

SHl( l)

OP I (2)

-

SI(2)
T*
(both in
and out
Jield)

RIGIIT
HALF

INTERPRETATION

U
(both in
and out
field)
V

-

-

-

0-9

-

OP2(2)
52(2)

-

• Sec interpretation ?f field OP2.
Note: As the sign or result is already determined. digits 0-3 are invalid in '5' subfield of any in field.
TABLE I

38
, Type
of
Storage

Code
Number

INTERPRETATION OF CODE NO.

010159

Units digit identifies one 'of the ten sets of relay storage
units. The two left digits distinguish one of 15 units in the set.

281 to
286

Ad~ress

Station tape remains at rest after being read out.
Station tape is to be moved after read out.
ODD UNITS ORDER DIGITS
RELA TE TO ASS RELAYS,
IDENTIFIES BANK 1
EVEN UNITS ORDER DIGIT
RELA TES TO BSS RELAYS.
IDENTIFIES BANK 2

(2)

4**
5**
*0*
'*1*
*2*
*3*
*4*
*5*
*6*
*7*
*8*

Dial
Storage

6p3

Address of dial storage no. 3 (3)

Pluggable
Storage

610 to
609

Address of ten units of pluggable storage.

Relay
Storage
(1)

Table
Look-up
Unit

TAPE
STORAGE

-

I'

of Table 1-6 respectively.

,"

IDENTIFIES BANK 3

(1) For special use of relay storage, see Table 3.

(2) See Section VI also.
(3) Dial storage no. land no. 2 are used for artificial line of sequence.

TABLE 2
INTERPRETATION OF STORAGE CODES

I,:

39

CODES USED

I/O DEVICE

NORMAL
I/O
TRANSFER
RELAY
STORAGE
OPERATION

ALTERNATING STORAGE
NO I/O
I/O
TRANSFER TRANSFER

1. CARD READER #1

150 - 154

170 - 174

2. CARD READER #2

155 - 159

175 - 179

3. CARD PUNCH #1

130 - 133
140 - 143

180 - 183

190 - 193

4. CARD PUNCH #2

136 - 139
146 - 149

186 - 189

196 - 199

5. TAPE READERS: AS GIVEN IN SECTION VI AND TABLE 2.
6. TAPE PUNCH #1

134
144

194

7. TAPE PUNCHtJ2

135
145

195

8. TAPE PUNCH #3

115
125

185

9. PRINTER #1

120 - 123

160 - 161

126 - 129

166 - 169

10.

PRINTER~2

!
I

TABLE 3
CODES FOR SPECIAL USES OF RELAY STORAGE AS I/O BUFFER

..,.....

.

.

Sequenctl
, Sl(l"~

A

~

~

CD

2:

C.

B

'"~

[=:::::J=====~~~=:J st(}rage
Relay

~--r------T-+-~r--..J

,.+--;~ ISO t/nifs

JIll.""

N

.!IJ

....

~

1'$
Z

Pi '11
rn •

Units

.tl

!"1

~ :t
§ >

36Stotions

[>]

3:

~

j=

t'l

-I

(') 0

~

z
~ ~

Plu'9«11/,
stIJraj1t1

Blank Codt"k

(')

Pi/ot IInit ~

"

~ ~

>

-I
-I
o
;u

~

~

.

,

O~rlllli#Jr(/~

$ i !I" CIJIIr""

~

""~ Z

OPS"

Contr(}1

~~ <
~~i:!lJl'l
~.r

~~~;U
~I~
~

Desk

NZ

~~;;t:b

)I-

r=: r

8.C.

OVC

COMM

Dial

Storo!le

t......

~ ~

BANK'
BANK 2
BANK.!

Ta,b~

Stora9'e

•

IX)

Tapt' PtJnch

Units

T-ig_L

rn

8

0
::0

::s-

CD
CD

c+

~

CD
CD

c+
~

N

~

w

en

~

tj

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan: 19, 1949

.

148 Sheets-Sheet.2

P---I+--

I~Pb \
011

SI !

I

Pr

•

.

U

D DO

0

i 110 i o! D ui
D~ i 0
o ~ iii a! I i
O! DO i 0
o ~.T.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~__L·~O
CotS. i i
J b h t 8 9 10 11 12 i3 14 /5 I~ J7 Iii 19 io
o !I

Program

!~Tb!T-T-r~~I---~s-!U-b!U
O'

o
o

DO

.

I loi

Dj DO!

i i OUi
o· .

Co/S. t 2.

U! u

,

j

.

4

,

j

Ur

Tape - S2~efJ. /}ala

1;S!Vb!V

!
!

.

Vr

-!5HZI oPt.!

SZ!

.
,
6 '7 8 9 io i'1 1Z 13 14 (5 )6 17 18 19 i()

Code

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 3

S6

,
I
Ii

I (J.!,;
" 'f
,- :; IIp
I

1,-.

: r').~-'

I " II
I

Ii

: (J::
LtrU.-

I

I

Ie) :

t"'l:

:'"" I
------ -----.- ---- --.l~r.J

INVENTORS

FEIIAMILTON
'IlRSEEBEK,Jr., H.A.HOWlEY
E.$ HU6HE$.Jr.

8Y~y

ApriJ 28, 1953

·2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 4

~------------~-------------------WI~~~~~~1oN
IlRSEfBElYft !lA-KOWLEY
c.iJ.HlIG#ESJr.

8VOlh/-LLifATTORNE'y

April 28, 1953

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

2,636,672

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949
148 Sheets-Sheet 5

INVENTORS

EEMNILTtJN
IlICSEE8EK.J'Y, K.A.8atLLY
ES. tlU6HES,/r.

8Y~
O(FATTO~EY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 6

TAPE STORAGE BANI<

18

I1I?T
INVENTOR!t

F.E-HAIIIIL TON
IlR.SEE8£Vr, IUKtJWlEY
£.S.HU6HESJr.
BY~
ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

,F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19. 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 7

+1!iOV,-+_---if-----"_ _

OV=±==~===
v
-100

Sf .

!li.-o·---,

.47

.s,
!I
IZSN7

.47

.47

INVENTORS

EEHAMllTON
IlR.SEE8ER.Jr., KAKOWLEY
ES.H(J6HES,Jr.
BY ~Ji!:....
.

trr-ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 8

REGISTER

-100

u.
r=-.- j =.]5
::=J

REGISTER ORDER
I
{.c,
r.-c.
~~

c,

"f

TYPICAL CANCEL CIRCUIT
77.
·(}()()1

CQ'ha/
Oufpu t
-IOOC

.r
INPUT

CANCEL
CIRCUIT

I

-100C
OUTPUT

INVENTORS

F.E HAMIL TON
RH.S£[BERJr:J, R.A.HQWlEY
.

£~.H{/6HES,Jr.

BY \.aa.P..L-..

o "ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

l48 Sheets-Sheet 9

,41,1111'1 PULSE 6ENEIif,4TOR

so

EP

n.

'+'50

FRMV
11 PLATE

SSMV(toaJJ1t,ol grids 5(9)
SU)lpl"i!'ssor 0/5"

Suppressor o/!J
/IP(4j(C} from 5 - - - - - - -U
ii p (4Kc)I"~'" !I - - - -:- - -- ---'u
Suppressor.oF22J1

u
n

u

U

n

n'-_ _ _" - Co"trol 9,ic( 0/ 2.2 ....,..._..r---L..___.r---~__--.lrCP{2KC) a/5d sUJlfJ'Pssoro/"
M
M'-_ _ _ _ __

Cant ,.01 9,id fJ/ 30
EP (lIfC)__________

L

n.L-_---INVENTORS
RIlSEE8£Il.J~

BV

F.E HAMILTON
R. A. HOWLEY

E.S.HUGHES,Jr.

~NEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Ftled Jan. 19, 1949

148

Sheets-Sheet 10

ELECTRONIC CALCULATING SECTION

/"Ier"aloat
Bas Ser

"/oN R~islt>,.: '4 Ol'd~/'S
~-~-~(Fig.646J------.t
MPRegister:/t/Orders

Bus Co/s

~"""'R"-C"""""Re~'9-'1s""'"~-ers-:-29-0.l,-~-:r.s~ I
(Fi~

70)

Cots It /I 1029

to 29

.

Co/s./elll(J2?

£5 f: 20 Co/so

'S-Set 1

Co/s.llolO
ES 8: 20 Co/so
~8us-~t8

Cots /fo20
:Jn1)tntors

FE.HAMILTON
IlRSEEBEI?/r., HA-HOWLEY
E5.HUGHE5.Jr.

BY~

attorney

f"l. /n Jlus Co/.

ES COLUMN

.......

"'l

Out Bus~/ Co/.
.L

~
2=

CD

~

eo.

g

N

...co

...
CD

U)

en

I-'

~

w

~P.I
Q

...;J

I-t

til

"II

gJ •~
£)

~ >J:
P.I 1:
Q

F

f

-t

~ ~

0

:z:

~
>
r

I-t

Q
Q

i!=

....
~

l

_~

-

~

~

t

~

~ (see F/5'- BoA)

~
.~

l

~~ J.
.~"i~
'"-:s
~~~l~
~
...
li
~~N:S

,Uil.~ S"
s....~~ i:
;y~

ESC

gl
(.U U

U

u",

. 7" 8us-sBl Cpt
.'

CD
CD

~

.

-/ooc

c+

-:-IOOC.

·to

~

~
N

enW

c+

...0)
0)

I-'
I-'

tj

CD

Tjg·21.

g

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949
flf~ Out

11ft. Dr
8t.(s-~
-,

{Jigs-set CoIl

1111

:J:!m • £Sf L.
:5 'ttl/II r
~. rfllbl., L

~

J

;..

col.,

:; CO/. 2
.;;.
.;;.

'"

(from fJ'./dI.

~Co/.78

.;;.
~

.,.

(}fir ,4"s-SPI' I:

f rr r
11111111 n11 1111111
,~C~

, t()/Il

I

.,.

to/nt
S4~2

'Ti-om/Jllot
pn/t 2

-

r r rr

111111111 111111

.,.

c

fJ'I4vs-set Ii
Co/. 20

rff rOut .8M.,..s~tR
,

"..

CD/.

n..L I!!I

CpL 11/

.;.

.;.

"..

£'5 I

"..

UJll9

"r rrr

/'L>'..2

.;;.

.,.

Colli

.,.

'It ,.£52

: Co/. 20
"..

!

11 JJJJ,llll

~

-

Col. 19

.;;.

l l l l Ct1J:Nl ,ll CN.29

CoU/ llllll16.11 lL lLQ¥1Z
Co/. 2
Coil

rm

.~

I I I I J J JJ I I

;;;

J J H 1111 J JJ J 1111 J J J

unrt 1

/F/,.8111)

lid (oES2

01119

Colla

CoL Z

en 11 f f f( 0I112. frr( (A1.28rrr r CDI29rtffcoi 2Q
1111 1111 I " 1111
.
I II I 11 n I I I I 111

'(:;/. IIf [(

/Ilt iii ES) -...

:I

148 Sheets-Sheet 12

.;.

"..
"..

JK)

£S 2

.,.

)))JJ111 IJJJ 1111 JJJ
1111 JJJJ 1111 JJJJllll
llll " l l l l
' , llll
LL II
'
In /Jus-S6i 2:
7.

ELECTIC'ON/C

'"
Int toES,
~t

-

rrrr

an

1111111111111111111

!

sro.e/16-£

ffff

rorr

frrr

(Jut ~..s6i 7.

I

1111111111111111"

•

tnFS7
Co/. I

'in"tl (If

:; Col. 2

ES

7~o'Jlt'

7

5£7

JJ)) 1111 JJJTTTTI TI
llll -n" llll

~

-

/"I /oES8
OUitlES8

rrrr " rrrr
1111

IIII

1111111111

"f1 JJJJ
llll

rrrr

llll

"

llll'

rrrr

1111 1111 1111 1111

.,.

Co/. III

l.l',l

fit

Bus-set ~

±

rr'fI.(Jut Ats~t8
,

".. Co/,'O

Co/. 19

ES 8

-

:!J-l' .Il,

))JJ 1111 JJJJ 1111 JJJ

I,.lll,.

j

~

~~~~IJ~;:'!-:'IJ~~:~r,tr+-+-():'kJ
C'O~/.:...,j/L-+-O;... ...!::c.~o7.c:..'P.L...+O::-f

1111 JJJJ

1111 JJJJ 1111 JJJJl'"

llll

llll

, ..

J l In &t.s-.set t:j
I

II

.

INVENTORS

EE.HAHII.TON
IUHOWI.EY
~ S. HtA;H~Jr.
BV~

K./iSEE8EIf~

. ATTORNEY

+f50V

..,....

I

I.

r

P-

c..

r

os

DST

I

Col· 20

Col/

SET -#.3

r-~ -

~

------ ---

c 3 - :'r--'
IJ___
,--IL

'

•

.il

.,

_lr~_q!~y!!.. q'!.t-~)il-} --

fo ~ t+

~

--------

-

:-------------

~

~ ~

-_1 7-'-P!" - BU~~~-t.-!..-il-l~ __ ~ __ ,

~ ft

-

-

f.

1--

-------------

--t-i--

•

--------------,.--

.

~

ro

-- -.-

f

z
~

_

,II___ •

I-t:.

~~~

t~::t
~~

,

...flL
U.. U

.

1

l

~:-l:l' /

, ro,.~n" fi.,nd.1 ~/~/8/'
Out ~St!{ 6<~
1."O'p1/t7t (/nFra ('F/f.Bl6)

I'll
•

~ J:
z »
~ ~

~ 0~
z
o
~ ~
C'l

;1

~

J

I-_L
r _
- - -.-

~~~ ...

~~~~
:s~ C/)

[:1J

81~

4"- ..---- OuT.aVS'H(-6'7-1,-- 4" ~.; -4" -( 61\lb
,1----"'- -- ------.---- - - - .... -------- ____
r------:j-,Lt
~
~ .D-~~~ DS-GO-8~: -- -- -- -G;'Q~-Ov(8) --- -- -- --------------------- -- -- - ~ If,

,.

!
.0

!-II: 8f..J1
1-----

CIJ

;1 :'I

un
______ ____ _ ,.~•
____

L
~r~:;- of; -f;--t --- --------- -t--..---

~

- -l

I,

-6 6
IL __ J~05 o . - I (~F/?47c;) .C~ __ '-I-H'-

en

~

4

tls-60 I

: r -,

~

CD

H

81-p
_ _ _ _ _ _ :i-----C.u()

, 2.____ ____
_""'

_

-r - - - - - - - - -

N

SA

I-'

I)lAL STORAGE

-

g
....
to

~

r--

1

CD

CO/Z

I

>

I-'

DST

....
~

g!
CD
CD

c+

~

CD
CD

;

)0-

r

N

'(,)
CIJ

en

c+

''(,)

.....

~

C1l

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 14

SHRII

o---~~~------~--------~~-------+~--Q

S
H
I

F

T

t!

o
l

u
M
N

"4

OT4

----- INTERNAL

21
OUT BUS COLUMN--J

OTI

INVENTORS

FE-HAMILTON
RRSEEBEK,J,:; HAIIOWLEY
E.S.HlJ6HES,Jr.
8Y~

o U'--ATTORNEY

j

at . .t 3 IIf. INr~IWAL
a...
Z7 .

,T.J J ,TCOL 2
•

COL

,

IN 8tJS SET

agy 44Y 2.t ,t
2. ,

COL

a?. .?~ 19cOL

28

--~

SHfJ

~4

W

20-10--

"
,~

.,.2-

.,.

3

4
2-

40--

t:::
,
COL 2

~
f-o-1

-

.4

SHIFT
COL

4

~

'S/l.U

SHIFT
COL

SNOB

,8

4

40--

28

8

t4t2t 'et

cot. 2. 7
1"'1

•

A" •

SHIFT
CfJL

(/nunN9

c..

....

1

CD

w

!

~

I"«'La

f':'

B

8 SNjJ
4;"

r",

2<'~)
SNIUI
~
ACL 1.

lJ 'flNI1

'oJ

SHO

......,

I-'

H

;j '11
[{J ~
.0
•

:..:g2.5 _

1

N,.27c)

til·

:t

~

j=

z >
&j ~

SNI(OI

8~4~2~ 1~ COl. 29

~

~

d

;d ~

o

Oil

~

I !IT SHIFT
2ND SHIFT 3RI> SHtFT
5HCPuIscs A+ IH IA+- B+ IA+ B+- IA+B+IA+ B+ 1M' B+ IA+ R+ IA+ 8....
Df>SCtMti"'9 CO(Jl1ter I-- 3
2
1
0
rTl-SHCI
T2-5HCl
1""- NS
I1-SHC.3

~
~

~.~

~

rti

15"-SHC.3

_

~ z

a .f'II.:"i~p:j

::0 • ~litI""~

z

~~~o

~ ~~~~
~~~

~""~

:0,."'1\

BeL SIgI14.1
20-SHC3

L S H tJl"RSH Signal
19-5HCJ
18-SHC3
ACL 5lglu.l1
SHE Siyl14/

~ ~

T~6-

....

~
gl

CD
CD

c+

C"l

,..

~

r

g
!i6

N

~

~
0)

c+

~

CD
CD

I-'

C1I

ij

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

, F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949
148 Sheets-Sheet 16

SHe1

DESCEN[)ING

COUNTER

6

INVENTORS

F.E HAMILTON

R.RSE£8£R,Jr., RA.IiOWl£Y
£.s. HI.J6H£5.Jr.

8Y~

ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949
148 Sheets-Sheet 17

MCCS(fl'tllnhg 71e)

I

SHe 2

+

SOKe
SHe OSCILLATOR
AND
AMPLIFIER

£.

G

IA ..Il.....J

lill...r1.SHSA 1.

SHSK
b,kr

ACS81.
~ (f1'VNn fig 711)

7~

14,.,

SWCLI________ _________________________--

F

INVENTORS

F.E. HAMILTON
IlA.KOWl£Y

IlRSEEN/l,Jr~

c.S HlJGHES,Jr.

BY~J...:...-..

. a'7ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

2,636,672

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949
148 Sheets-Sheet 18
SHCU-

----- ----- ------T;---- ----- ---------SHe 3

1.

c

f=ig_cl

C_

INVENTORS
FE. HAMILTON
R.R.SEEBER,Jr.; /lA.ROWLEY
E.s. HUGHES,Jr.
BYCA/)JJ~

OO'"A"TTORNEY

lint"! fn

(J" SET 010

..,...-

"9"SET
lJnt't Out

lJl1d In

019

CD

tlnit Out

020

STORAGE tlNIT
020
Unit (Jut
020
Cols. I Cols.
I to 10 : 1/ to2D

1St)

Umi f"
029

029

Unit ()ut I

I tJl1tt bl

=
~

-

en •'1\

Ou/Cab/e

~1'>oC::Sa.
~ ~~~

'"

>

~

J:

3:

r

-I

0
~ Z

Co/s
1/ t020

z

H

n
n·

~

~
»

r

n

--

c+
til

::t:~S;2

[z]

n

en
~

.

ITI
,

c:
[z]
z
n

159
I
I
I

D

[z]

CD
CD

~~~;'
~

..........................

H

<
[z]

-i

..,.

""'~t:l
~~;t.



f·'

>-i
0

:::0

N

en
W
en
-..J
0)

N

~

,

RELAY STORAGE UNIT.

+sov

.L

:.::Joe :3_

.1

I

t...

:

~e/~ Stora¥e
I ----1,,/ l/nit Out

::s

Ilf~

.....

.CIO

<0

~_1~~~+-_WI~~1

.....

C11

P>

------~---+~~~--+-~~

I

(0

(.oJ

!
>-i

H

tii

:'I
fq ITI

~~____-4h~'i~4=±===~r~~'~~~~~
4..~

-

Q

En......... L ___,
'~--, I
I' i I I

I

N

<0

~

Sto,.a~

{/nit

t

0-

~~~_r--~~1~~!~·1~1--~~

Reloy

>

"z:1
.....
.....
(J)

~)

~ :r
~ »

______-++......_

~-r---------r------~

ro~-t-t~
(.Feer;~
I 81;....18t.---...;..-~

[zl

3:

~
[zl

!:j

Q
0
;d Z
0
z
H

B7t:tJ

A-I.-+-----i

Q
Q

~

~h

~

j

Q

~

;

~

.

~

~
(X)

~4~

I

~~!'>i

:-

~;";;t;

L

~~~u I

. ~~r::;

....
~~

1,'
.

Q

r

,J.

~~~~
'§:~~ ....

-[flit
L.._J

.

i

_..; __ .J'"
-

~
»

r

til

5
0

::u

::r

(J)
(J)

c+

N

en

(,)

::r

.

t,

(J)
(J)

c+

'"
0

(.oJ
(J)

(J)

t::J

/,051110AS

000

RS-Glp
CO/So

000

000 82
4000
o
2. 0 0 0 ' 000
1000000
1 2 3

RS-GIPP

181920

82.

000
000
000
000
2
0
000
000
000
1000

~

Co/s: .f

I

.8.1

o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o

2.3

---.J

5

RS-GIP 4000
2000
1000
Co/So / z. 3
8000

R $-GOP 4 0 0 0
~

j..
Q

~

~

u::

GIl

~

<

~

Co/So

!"'I~:tt

.

i~~~

. ~~:t=

~~;=::!

~~~~,~~~

......

2000
. '000

~",~~

I 2 3

Cols. I

1

000
O'00BJ
000
000
/8 I~ 20

I

2 3

000
000
000
000

000
0 0 0
000
000
18 1920

2

000
000
000
000

3

o

18 I!J 20

·OUT"

8 0-\1-0 0-i~ 0-+-0
4 0-\1-0 O-il-O o-iI-O
2 0-11-0 C>-:It-O o-If-O
1

000
000
000
000

1 2 3

18 192.0

14 0-0-0-0-0-0-0-0.
If}

t...

g

00
00
00
00

I

2.

CD
C1I

....

T

~

20

w

!

~

H

0-0-0-0 0-0-0-0 0-0-0-0

tij
~
£)

00
00
00 0 .
00

19 20

00
00
00
00
I

:z:

00
0082.
0
00
00

Z.

&i

0 0 0
0 0 0

0 0 0
0 0 0

0 0 0

0 0 0
161920

I 2 3

:z:

000
000
000
000

C'l

~

000
000
000
000

...
~
~
(I)

181920

7

000
000
000
000

RS-GOP

•

000
000
000
000
/

>
3:

~ 0~
~ z
o·
H
C'l

000
000
000
000

(II

C'l

19 20

5"

:rt

~ J:

8

0 0 0 6 0 0 0

CDIS.I 2 3

...

....

CD

Plugboard

18 0-ij-O
19 ()-jf-O
~o
0-it-O
C>-:It-o o-ff-O o--if-o
<>-ft-O 0-11-0 0-#-0
cHI-<> 0-11-0 0--41--0

N

!R

CH>-O-O 0-0-0-0 0-0-0-0

2 3 4
000 000 000 000 000
000 000 000 000 000
0.00 000 000 000 000
000 000 000 000 000

crJl-o 0-11-<> 0-4f-O
RS-GOPP

000
000
000
0-00 82
-I
0
000
000
000
000

7

6

8000

0-

0-0-0-0 0-0-0-0 0-0-0-0
0-0-0-0 0-<>-0-0 0-0-0-0

0-0-0-0 0-0-0-0
2. 0-0-0-0 0-0-0-0 0-0-0-0
I 0-0-0-0 0-0-0-0 0-0-0-0

1

(I)

18

R S-G I P P " 0-0-<>-0

jCJ.5D.

I

>

....
"'"

000
000
000000
3
0
000
000
000
000

8 0--0-0-0 0-0-0-0 0-0-0-0

·
r

..,

RELAY STORAGE GROUP
'IN" Plugboard

-J;iAar'y

2 3

8

(I)

<+

000
000
000
000
/I 192"

h

(I)
(I)

c+

....'"

e

~
->
r

1-:1
0

::0

.N

0')

w

0')

en
tj

"'l
........

TAPE STORAGE BANI<
stations,.--I

2

4

3

>

t

!.
c...

7

5

......~

G

()

8

to

....
~
stailol'l
Selectors

U)

en

w

!g
H

~ :wt
f'} 111
•

£J

. I

rS-Gop:oor:
. GROUP OUTS

2

6

5

3

7

~ 3:~

8

1.".1

~
C'l

!:j

0

z
~ ~
;1

o

f

OUT 8US-SET f

C'l

:..

i!= r
OUT 8US-SET2.
(
OW 8US -SET 3
OUT 8US-SET 4OUT BUS-SET 5'
OUT BUS-SET6

~

OJ

~

a~
.;f

~

~

......~~ .....

!'1~''1

~~"'i

~~~

~~~~
~~r::=
!)i....,~~

.os~~~
~"'C;

....

J

~

co

r-:

t

~

.<

G

OUT8US~ET7

j93J

Our BUS-5ET 8

-

c+

J

J
.<

b

G

G

c+

'"'"

~

~

N

enw
en
0')

~

TAP£.

>srOJeAtiE.

u

+15011.

BANK

(J~e F/~.

..,

>

....

9)

I-'

t

1

CD

Do

Co.

~{c2~~\ ~1~~1

118

...

..GO....

I-'

en
w

G

N

CD

~

CD

!
0
o-'J

H

~

(q

BFS

£)

,

~

cots.

~I

V

11020

TS-G()P;t

~

-< ~

>
~

,

!'Ir~
~z
(I)~",<

a:u~~~~

'!b; jCt:1'I

z

~~~o

,

~~~cn
1.~::t

~

;t~~:u

:'i

r __

TS-GOI'-t. __ J

~
fq

QI

'

.lJus 2-&01 f.
,

I'J~~ F/?,~4)

---

t"tfltl',&',sJ

r-j93Ea -

ro

~

~
l'l
o

;=
-I
0

z
~ ~
0

M()y~ Sill1al

-- ---

Out lIus-stlt'l
FrolVtI&nY ,J/?'UL/ ill/.s

""'/

V

Pl

;;J

(JOt

,81

.....

o

Cots. No2()

1
:t'" t, 1l

.---_~A'__-..

,

\ A..

1'1

~ >:c

(JeeF~.J4J
\.....

:rI

0

Col:r. I to 20
A

r'--~

82

'

p//ot.

(//1;'-

i!=

SMSI 1. hus 82

...

"----.."

~

T S-GOP 8

~_8fJLJL~---1

(F~. 8~6)

81

Out .bus-set 8

til
1:1'

CD
CD

c+

~
...

r>

~

::0

N
~
W

CD
CD

.

II)
(II

ij

0)
0)

-----'-------------------------------------------1

r

I

fTATT ~

+/50Y

HErR;
,
~
i

;1~

' MOVEG I p i '

:

!.OOM -

- ..,

IACt

jJ

.........."OJ

1I

,,
1

'

(I Sf

I

,

CD

I
.. '"
,4;174

~

~

I

Tej,,~,~

,
L __~O~_~~~i.!~qL'!: ___ _'

,I
---------'

~,

GOP
/

;J
zH0

~

>
a:II::I
Z

~

a

~r\~~~

g

~!"'jlll

~~'

Z
~;";~-I

......

",.'



'OJ

.....
CD
~

TS-GOP 2

TS-GOP I
80-00-00-0
.,. 0-0 0-0' 0-0
ASSP 20-00-00-0
f 0-0 0-0 0-0
I
Z
3
Co. Is.

8000
.0-00-0 b-o <1-000
0-00-00-0 2000
~~.~ f~ 00
23
0-00-00-0

000
000
000 If 82 00C)
00
000
o 0 0 (FS)(Ns)
000
000

161920

000
000
000
000

e.-

....

......

....
(l)

en
w

TS-GOP .3
000000
000
000
000
000
000
QOO

00

(l)

"'"

. TS-GOP 6
000
000
o 0.0 000
000
000
000
000

AMS o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o
TS-(ioP4

00

000
000
000·
000

00

TS-60P 7
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
I

2 3

000
000
000
000

III 1920

~
~

~ ~

~-

g

i

t::

,

8 r s o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o

~,:l~
.c,,~1"i
.
~

~~~=

I..J

• ::t;:s: .... "

[tl~~a

~""::tg
~"<: iii
:'/

,

00

~,4fSo-o-o-o-o-o-o-o

-r-

~

o-i
H

~

000
000
000
000

~

2

000
000
000
000

3

80-00-00-0
10-00-00-0
20-00-00-0
1.0-0 0-0 0-0

:'I
rrJ

~z

00

I:

2 >
~

~ z~

rS-GoP 8
000
000
000
000

;J
0
z

19 20
f8
0-00-00-0
0-00-00-0
8 SSP
0-00-00-0
0-00-00-0

~

H

00

0

r>

0

i!=

C"l

....
~

en
::>"

CD
CD

c+
CII

~

::>"

jg _34 -

-3

n J J1 JL
tJ---!-r'~_- rf--f~6'roL.:_~

llU-(ifl i ,.. J.

..

!

....
~

j

.
_________________ ,

-

.....

1:..--

'Ii

N

SJI

CD

r---'

S
~;r:t'~:.~;b)r- --- -----. -- n~~~.:. . - -- J[~l
iJJ19 IJROGtJ
~
~1/!

~~ ~~f:l~
-<

L~ -fi-lNASSJ

.~~, BP

.s/.9'U:~./

I

I~;:.q.l' ~II~~

Sill/ions I to s(i

211

~
r;:z IheUS-Set
.
I

InDus

Ta;6le

r

G

·-1

I

-lemj"o;:;,y-Computed
"rpu,",,,t S(orgp

21

R40,

i

....

Out :/JUs-set I

!"I

:I

>
~

~
o

z
~

)0

r

~

~

N

~

~
Q)

c+

'a2

CD
CD

'"
-4

t:j

>

"'l

.....
....
CD

iig·35a.

c..

g

TCA

' Station
Arguments

Tape
Stations
I to .16

""
1
Station selectill!J
points controlletllJ'y
ISS to 36 SS
~

,

stations ItoJ6
COHI/Jarison IJ./lits for
station selecfiol'l

..

t

I

i

~

-Z

~~~<
o:J .~:..~~

:II

Z

;I::.:t-~

~~~

~ ~~~~
.tt)",,~

~-.;;~

-

1t036

Clu.tches

* .,

~

[Il

0

H

Pi :'1

I

[q
r---

fI1

£)

to

ITO

~ >
~
J:

6TO

0

[Il

I

~ 0-4r:;d z
0

:z:

~
>
r

H

0

l' '
C~arin!

-

f--'- statiol'lS

Pili/gin!
IntrastafiOl'l Selection

~

..~
"i

en

~

0

Station Selector
Rela'ys ISS toJ6SS

~

-

(0

....

Computed
Argument
Storage CA

.~

N

!»

....'

CD
CD

c+

Rela'yS
R4otR41

en

t:>'

CD
CD

c+

'"

(X)

.,E

0
::0

..N
.

eft

~

eft
eft

tj

+15QY,

---:..~
r36ASSJ
11---81 I·

1
816~-------,
f/ASS
J

{j

+150Y

,-8is'~
rjsss- 1 L~
1

an

f-,

-

HOG

. 81 1
(

[$«

'->'

r----l-TLu-GJ
8
J
L _____

N06

4lD-'f,;L,
U:;---' -TL U-G08
:h'

)

)

. «/
'rorward S"I"

Out

~

:II

Z

111

-<

1;)l:!:tO
=to <:S;::::::II

~~~C/l

,Ci;~~

~~~

~
~
0

II

(Back 519"01)
J ~ Das-set 8

8 . SidAa/
t 8J :T
81 (Forwara

tzl

;

hu.-se .

~
:z:

{

/J

1-1

0

~'If TOC

0

hi

~

-.c

r~_35b-

d
1----1--1
TL
L- ____ ...1

.=-:i

,. ~::,.~~
a
'~:Ib!"i1l1
~;.~~

~

~

En 'h".-..I I .

?b

~ ~

~

C1I
W

..;J
1-1

~
~

U)

tzl
0

~~OV

.c"

......co

....

J }"RoltA
t!f.~.
c ____

2:

c..

r-----..

iJs(

81a cr,lIh

81.

~

CD

Co

___

<4

L ____ ...J

........"WJ

L-...,=>..II---411

r----1--6 TL

\.._----'

t I'c
ioI

r---::!--R40
'- ____ .J

....
~

gt
CD
CD

~

If

gl

-=

CD
CD

~

'"<0

:'I
f'1
:I

:>

i:
j=

-I

0

Z

,.~

r

E
..;J

0

::0

.
.

N
~

W

~

CJ)

-..:a
N

..........,

>

1

CD

Do

r-

Co.

G

N

!'J

....

....

j936

(0

CD

....

-

•

,

,
BOR.

,

IH"

A OR.

8IR

1

,

<

,

AIR.

~

(II

e

W

~

H

;] :'I
gj •111

.D

~ :t
>

o

t"l

3:

o
o

0

e z~

;J

~ ~

o

~

.It. E
C5

;It!

~

CD

J

~

l

~

CD

~~
!'l.:"i

~

Ci)~N

~
~

~~~I..I
~~~~

.(F/p. 77c1)

~~;::Ia
,v,
""1",,0
~ ..... ~C;:

>-

r

y6r

ySr

y4r y,3,.

y2r

~ r~

y/" ym

CD
CD

...
C>I

o

"

~

N

~

w
en

~

tj

r-

z~

.

IN

=-:g ,., ,
ri
I

S

.,0 0r-

-

i0 :or

51 CD' 19

'r!r
,

,

8(jS-~ET

~

7

-,
~.

,.

/ Col 2 0 ,
-<' S l lIC O / ' 19

'I

:

~

~

.
0,

c..

g

1 i1

II _ I I

II

Ii ,"I ._
II'. II

II _.
I'

..

N

00

....


"'.I
....
....
CD

IIII

II

II. I"I

I I " II . I I ' , I

II

I i

~

!
C'l

>i

H

Pi
ffl

+50 V •

r.

[~~~}L~l~j:!J~ ~~_l!~l~oJ [~!~J_l~J!JtJ.~j~l!lpl~_l~L~l~~l~~E~L~l~.l~·d!!l~~k~l

.~ ~

~

0'
;I

~

~~~
~

~t..f

s~l.
..... I~!
~ ':'oI~

~ ~'"
:oj

_

:5 !3

j

T

,
,

U

I

V

t:s44

',SH2,OPZ

I

S2

",r,,,sJ'
1.:_ - ,
I

T

r

;1

z

:z:
H

R" mpS2P 52G

,,

U

,,

V

,SH2,I OP2 ,I S 2

I'1AS
'
, --- J

~ Cols. : Co Is. : Co Is. ICol.: Cols. : Cols I
I CO/So : CO/So : Co/so ICol : Co/So : Cols. I
r--"
,
I
"
I
r--:o '
"
~~~!~_s..J_~!~{~.l!-''!~!!J!'6..1~~~J.!~~~J ~~rL!!o...f_.:..§j.!'!E_L!!!~!?..l!§~~l!~l!~~~J
52 5e~ 8 Side 81 Relays
82 St:'J. A Side AI Relys

d

C'l

~

C'l

)0-

~

r

~

.... ~
....
0

..

~---.rn~m-~'T.-.,--.J; '~l l----:~-~~~~:~-~--TTn:l:~~ J

II

r.t
0

~.JT-:-r -,.r-T-ir-l-il~--' ... J r :-r_~./--r_e~~-t.J~_-~J,-'{'f.I..~~-T--r-i--r-~--r~T-""--'''---'
,PS,PiJ ,Pr 'I: \. :OP/,SI :51 8S: IPs ,P.6 ,Pr :Pr,Pr IQs,Q,6 IQ"',QI"Qr'Ns IN" "fr,ll,. ,1l,.:SHtlOP1IOP1ISI :SI ~AS:
'
1 ' 1 , ' , I ___ I "
'"
" I
I
I
,
I
I
"
''- ___ J
ICD/lCo/IC,/:: \ ,Col leo/'CoI,
!(il :Co/:OJ/:Co/: CoI,Col IU: Co/I CoIl Col: Col,Col ,Co/:Co/lCo/,Colifo/,OJ/,Co/IClJI:

r-

,.

~

J

~

.'

SI SeCJ.. A Side Re/ays AI

IN BUS-SET 7

SI SefJ. B side
BIRela'y s

- JO.;;;;JL..J.

a

I I

•

~ :I
:z:
~ 3:

__ ~ __~ __ ~j L__~~_~~_~~__~'J L__ ~ ___I___~ ___ ~ __ ~___~_J

S 1 SelJ. 8 side Relays 81

Z.CI.

-----l

L_~~_~~_~~_~_'J L_~

:"I
1'1

£)

sa
~

:
c+
(II

....

;;0

..en
N

w
en

'Ch
~

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949
148 Sheets-Sheet 32

.....

~

~

~
~

"

t'\J
Cf)
~
CC1

O~

0

I

c::.

r-L,

~

to

to-

"I

I
I
I
I
I __ JI
L

"~

~

~
. . .
'.

II')

·m
IL-

C'\J

~

,
tJ
0
~

o~
~

......

""
~~IIQ

~

·Ul
IL-

II"

CI)

~

3nomtors

F.E. HAMILTON
IlH.S££8£R,J'r., H.A.RfJWLEY

E.S.HUGHEs"Jr.
.8~~

attomeg

f.2go4l.

AI orlJl or
AOP, orJ)opr
........ ~_{Tl
,
__ I
..:

I',

'~
' ~

I

\

,...~8-

..

l.. __ J

I

h_

I

, ... ,

"

, ... ,

, _•

.......

>

"l

1

-i

9

75.3

f

8

tJP2

6

4

H

0

2

cod~ ~I)fPut
s

r-

A()P or-_Iio-:
'-__

\:'I§~

8 (JP"" ,

oJ

II

II

'-fiol
' - - ....
r--'
~

Ti~~4~(l.

~

~

.

r--'
,8,
,- __ J

f-

Cols.

I Col.I

Co/so

t"l

i Co/.s'. I

~

r--,
,2,

,~~~

~--'

~~~t..I
S:~':o,=

,r---I
( ,
J

9'i
..... ~"
~~;::::;

L... _ _

60p-()/
'()pt)

0

~

Q

i'!

~

~

Z

~
>
,-

Q

......,.

~

CJ)

I

t

I
, J-,

~j

1 '1 '1 ']'1 '] l']output
'] '] F:·'J.'Jg44
1

5

~

::>'

/AOPrOrLJ()P)o/ flQ,RJ;~'I'V sv~Ft'e/a'$ r.:

"0" Ft.lte,.

;
z'

'

(I)
(I)

.

N

~
~
~

c+

'Q)

VI

tj

VI

April 28, 1.953'

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 34
XMa

/i"e

~ ,. 200c lint' .

A side
RSGP

1J;-9 .

(AoP)

1

ID

Ilo

c..

g

N

!»

....<0

station

~

r-,

Moye

'-__ I

X2(orY2)

o

>-i

Pi :rt

r2tt"k Ii,,~.

X5forYS)

~.

3

~
CII

~

>

o:l
-<

~ Z
~ . <
~~~1'11
... ~. z

!:'ii",""~

t~~
:oj

1

3

~

»
~

~

az

2' 1

~
;J

o

( ..u~ Irl'p.JS)

MBPP

o

{,' ;-',_~", >- PYl'dmid

.....

~
gl

r-,,? .32c)

ID
ID

~

T

)00

i!= r-

--tl-+--

~

.i9·4ic -

r

~ ~

Dial stort,ge
Unit #.1'

-

~ 'i~~~6
3l~:U.

I'll

2

(.J~e

~

-< ~

r?=1Jr

MAPP

111

t"l

1-_.1

Baltic

2

~ J:

r-l. .. __ ~ __ ~ ____ _

X4for'f4)

!
H

Pyramids

X6for Y6)

~
w

....

P,Q,N.Tor U
/lo,A SeQle

ID
ID

~

C>I

0>

+50'1

~

'0

:::0

N

(J)
W

0)

(J)

tj

{Jt!~

FI? 47C)

1

r 2tlOe j/he

....
.....
CD

>

"OJ

1

Co
c..,

G

N

!»

....

....

A orB side
/?Q, H, TorI)

(0

<0

en

....

w

!f
U)

!
Q
~

1-1

~

[q
~

:'I

.I'll

~~. ~~

~ ~
0
;J z
Q

:~s

..)' f

~ FID~32c fi.4.SPp
=~~~======~==t=-----==f====~~~;;==jI~~~~
..
.IJg",f

I

MSP),"

l~4.soP 0

~

1-1
Q

o,SIJ$

~

,.,22Q,S22

;lII

a

2

~

~a ~~~
i ~=~:::

~
III
-<

ilQ' j}QnA

z

~;a.l~

. '!::~~i

~§;:::C/I
!:"i~~

.~~:t

Me o,.SS2

'e3t»"S3

ASS t 855 Pyramids
(Ft:1r~a~e ..st'crA?e .3""c"',o" J'e/ect,ons)

4'1
I-~~_

0.._

.....

~
gl

CD
CD

c+

~
»

r

E

~

0

:;u

N

i
c+

(,)

~

~

CD

(,)
W

0)

">-

"'l

.........

r--,

,~~-I

t

!.
c..
g

IDL

~

-

....eD

'.rIMe

(D

en

i !
A sia't>

C"l

>-i
H

RELIIY STI)RII6E

;j

t/NIT OUTS
I? flJ?,T, or U

r-

il

ffl

o

=

z
~ ~

o

~ i ,/ ! -==::t:=±====±::l=~::l::::
~!
i
:::"11: L ___
I

L1i

I'I ___
t

~

! Qpz/ :

t~~i

J:

~ 0~

r-----'

.B Se:de pyr.omia's

,II

TIl

....

>
~

;1

r------,
I:

~~lt..l
~.~::I
~~~!

C"l

C"l

c___________

gf
~

~

•

l'l

B side

. 'II

"'II

C>

~

,.4 D.
I

w

.

....

58.-j

r--

L. __

JI
I

I

r--~-I

I,--J

'S4

~

~

&i ~

I I R/,. "

g

SU 'Rsup

Bside
l

>-

r

CD

c+

~

CD
CD

c+
C>I

OJ

N

~

w

CJ)

~

~

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheet.s-Sheet 39

f'i:

lS1l

Iii~
1.., i'~
I~
I I~
l~

riS!

I

'.O(

"
L.J

--.NIN'-.4

_-u-...........

r-i~

II~
LJ.._

fl i~ Ir,~ ]:-}~--.ItN"
~~. rl"s!...-.~~""""'"
~

11"--1

U~

INVENTORS

F.£. HAMILTON
IUtSEEBEK,Jr., R.A./IOWLEY
£.S. HUGHES,",r.

BY

~N~Y

ApriJ 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

---SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 40

......

~

~

.~
~
OQ

~
<:::)
~
I

~~

-q

"

~
'>

~

.~

~

.....

~

~
I:l...
......

IiU

~

~

\:::)

~

§-

~

Ib

~
.....

~

\I')

~

\!:)

l.'-J
~

Il.l

~

""

~

~

c:;:)

".. ~

J..,..

tI)

I.IJ

~

~"-

~

.-Q

m
~

.~

~

~

~

INVENTORS

FE HAMILTON
R.R.SEE.BER,Jr., RA.ROWLEY
£5. HUGHES.Jr.
BY
~~

(/ "ATTORNEY

..,
....CD....

S f(or SZ) Py,.a.1nlt/.s (/'" p""prt:Lm d4.t~ .seleet,olts)

>

t

Q.

c:..

ELX (.see F/9· 769')

g

N

!IJ

....

~


3:

~
c

-I

l'l

~

a
:II

z .

0
Z

c

>-

~

~ ~

~i

~

~

~

~

~

....:t--i
~~Jii:o

~""~
~-<:~
l'i

r-

~

CD
CD

z
~~~~
~~ Z

~ ~~~i'l

j=

o

~

-<

J:

c

l'l.

B Side
CJ3

w

T

r

ELycF/p. 761.)

ig _50

c+

~

CD

c+

....

I-'

N

e:en

en
tj

Ill? 7; (/ or V
Group- fA

b r -,

I:

I

l_!!,·~~ ~ .-~- ....

.

"rpu t til ~
T ,byr«IIr,tI
.

PZ

T

!I

"11

~·51.m41
1
A~

~R

st~

"

I

~

rJ

r

-J

BSiiietJ tJ
I

~

01

-<

~

)0

::f

o~

I

~

~
tn.:~!'Ii~
",'

~ ~'"

c::::~~~ .. ___

I r-"
~~~~@I

~ . C')<'tI"'O

I

....

en

~--~ I

.
I
t~';' 31 ~~ 1,~~J IF]

T 1

;

~ •~

~

~

01

01

:

>
~

~

r-

;;J
zH

z

0

r

0

0

Oi

0

r=
.... >'"'.i~
....
CD
CD

c+

I

~

If
en

::0CD
CD

c+

....

!\)

:I

o

tzl

~5iiie
_____:.....-.__'-J r---'
__ j--1'#Q

_

w

&J

en
t:r'

r-, r-l[
~,}J

(0

;;j "II

-=--l
.

.T

a:

c..

~

~ illl~-__

J..

+51)V

~

CD
Q.

Lt»A:-1.dJ

-

I

T.
""ay:
Gro,q,·r"
/Jyramiiis t

~r 7061t!'

,

........"'J

t~t!s

d

~
)00

0

"

..
.

N

0')

W

0')

0')

-..I

N

April 28, 1953

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

2,636,672

. SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949
148 Sheets-Sheet 43

'd

OJ

m

~

~~

~~

'1."
~."

~:§

~

~
~
~T--l
___ .J

r---,~

I

"

IS)

L ___ ~~

'~

~~--, ....
L ___ .J
"

I

i'-rL_..J
--.,

~"-

~

,I'

t/)

r';--, ~
~ IL-__ ,
~

'""

r~

,

~-,

I,, ___ .J

...

~

r----

,

---~

I

.~,

W
,
I

________ .JI

L. _ _ _ _ _ _

~

'§
~

INVENTORS

F.E. HAMILTON .

R.H.SEEBER,J1t R.A.ROWLEY

,

BY

. c..5.HUGHES~r.

Jk:bLJ..I~

OKTrORNEY

.

Ji
1._

iii

.

:1
"
I. ! I ,

-

,-1(,..,..

I

I

I

I

I

I

I
L... ..I

I

PRS (t(lFi:,.8I1)X

'L I

S2_)--;7t7()h

Aside

,.1/tJ.
,,.IIM
~-------------!
OP
I/. r-, . _, ..t
2

":"/p.

/'fle;-

u-",-

c..

g
......

$

n

)0

a
:u

-;ltj

~
tzl
Q

~

~

z

~~~s

Cn~"'Z

z .=:t:. ~g
~ ~~~:u
;t~~CII
~,...~

~~~
l'j

E
-1/

i

*

j=
-f

0

z

~ ~

>i!= ,..

----

n

>
:c:

Q

-

"'l

.........
CD

.
. .
",LJ ~-I'
y- I-t'
,---:,,L-..J
~... -J
,.8,,.KJJ ,.2J)J """ ,.2(J(J-' :,.4IJfJ
I

I

IJ'hNI?
I

r-1
"_J :1

til

c+

~

.--

y

CD
CD

T~_5cb-

£

::r

CD
CD

8 sIde

L_",

~

>
...;)

c+

+50 V

",.
~

N

'Q)

w

0)

'Q)

tj

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

Relay

RSU

148 Sheets-Sheet 45

Sfor [ge

<5 6 6 0 . 6

01

U,)/I Outs
0 6 6 0

o

0

3

RSUP 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 20
00000000000

8"0005
(5000'5
H"
1-9
0000 o
5'S'
0000
65'
I/J
0000 o

~

iJ2.

OOOOOOOOOOu

o oo-o-o-o~o-o-o-o t5

3

~

03

00000000000

-----2---------0 0 0
;O~~~~

o 0
~
0000
85'
III
000000
0000
()'$
95
99
000000000
0000
-----o 0 0 0 0-------0 0 0 0 0 . Tape storage s a ~
06
Bank f
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ASPP
- - - - - - - - - - - I
2.. 3
~
7 8
9 If)
o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ASP

5""

07

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO~

------

--------

I

2

3

-I

5

6

7

8

9

jOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
o _O_~_O ~_~.9_~_0 £>
Bank 2

o

09

1(1
.~

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OASPP
123~S"789fl..

o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

oASP
------- ------ OOooooooaOOOOOOOOOOO~~
f23-1-56Z4..2.1.J?
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOoouu~

fO

o 0 o. 0
Bank .3
11
00000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OASPP
If)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 6 6 6 6 5 6 5 ; OASP
12
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o BSPP
----------I
2
3 <4 5
"6
7 8
,
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 gesp
'3

o

0 0 0 o_~~_~_~-.?

0000000000
140000000000
RSU 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
15
RSUP 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
lJ iaj .Storage t./"if#3
.os pp o· 0 o· 0 0 0 0 0
123<#5678
LJSP
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

~---------------------

Table Look-Up
Group Outs

00000000
1234~678
00000000

Table Outs
000000
123456
000000

TLGO
TLGOP

TOP
TOPP

INVENTORS

F £. HAMIL TON
H.R.SEEBEIl,J":,. K.A.ROWLEY

(7,

c..S HUGHES,Jr.

BY .~.J....t.-..

ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

F.

e:.

2,636,672

HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 46

SGP(SI,52)
()$"

00000
000
15 0
o 0
00

R5G
RSGP

OJ

0 0
0 5
0 6
0 t3
0 5
0 B
0 8
0

B
~

3
-

o

Tape Storag,e Grou
Gosp6 ~ ~ 0 .

BANK'

GOS 0

0 0

0 0

00000000
BANK, 2.
00000000

R56 0
R5GP 0 0

----- - - -- - -------o 0 ~AN~P 0 0 0
00000000

--------~--~------~

b
~

003
o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
30000000000

..

51,52 Lales

~ELP

O$"

0000003
ft

~,~

0000000000000000~000

~000000000300oogoo03
S

.

as

30

3.9

00000000000000000000

~00000000080000go.008

3000ooooo 0 30000goo03

~ooooooooo~oooo~ooo~
~000000000~0000goo03
TAPE' 5TORAGE
BQI1~ I HAPP .

MAP

.

.

. I'1BPP
. M BP

~

0 0
0-0--0 0 0 0
90

'"

15

0
0 0 0 g
9'99
0 0 0 0 0 0
TSL I

t

------------------------- ------ B4/f1t1· . .
.
La/1f
MAPP 0--0-0
0-0--0
.
Banlc 2. MAP 0-0-0
0-0--0 BlinK Z ~lollf

----------- - --------------------

8. k

all J

MAPP 0--0-0
MAP 0-0-0

fifo

7~)

0-0-0 Bon/(J ~Lole6

o-o--c

Early

t L.llte

INVENTORS

.

F £. HAMIL TON
R.H.SEEB£K;Jr., !lA.HOWLEY
E.S. HIIGHES../r.
8Y~
O(J' ATTORNEY

April

28~

1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ETAL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 47

Relay stor~e Unit 7 Ins Relay storage Grou,b Ins
u~fo 6 0 t> . 6 6 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 ORSIG

----------------

0

02-

0
0
OJ
0
0
0"10

of
0
0

06

0
0
07
0
0
08

0
0

0<)

0
0

10

0
0

1/

0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0

0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0
0
0

·0 0
0 0
12
0 0
0 0
/3
0 0
/.,0 0
0 0
UPO 0
Upp/S
o 0
0

;

0

0
0

0
0

0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0

.3

0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0

0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0

~

~

6

'T

II

1

-------------~--

------

0 0
0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Z

o

0 0 0 0 ORS/qP
0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0
2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
----------0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0
3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- --- --- ----- ----0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0
4
0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0
-----------------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

UPPO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

5

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
--- - - - - ------0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0
6
0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0
----------------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0
8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

--

---------------------------------

Table Lool<- up
Grou/J Ins

0 000000 0
2
I
~ 6
1
3
0 0 0 ~ 0 0 0 (,

Table Ins

0

0 0

0

0

I

2

6

0
4

0

0 0
~
0

!J

TG
TtjP
TLP

TLPP

!I

INVENTORS
FE HAMIL TON
IlRSEEBER,Jr. IlA. KOWLEY
t.S HU6HE5.Jr.
8Y~

W-ATTORNEY

It~a trd

dia / 5wi felt

lions'

rc)

~
----. --'-- - - , /;.-- ~---..."
~/~
"

\

I

II

,

'

\(.

\.

"
"

OSIS· / \.
(tJ c.

I

19 'vis8
,r--,,

'.\

,
'

'.'

8'lii1'r4"~z1 876~'14~3'11

f'ro!!I Fig. 76d

,..--,

q.

fth

A~

7ZI tv'u~ s

,..--,

lD'
c..

g

L. __ -'

r--,

t-A

~

en
w

~b"de /r~ /vb"

!
Q

>-i

H

PI)''' ( U7ds
/ t".8
(F/'.~?, 11~

-

~.:"

OCO·

r
~
0
~ Z
t'l

Q

~ ~

to ES

Q

,,;;!!b
B
side

flh

CJI

,
y

J

'-(}s1

~I"ri~~

)

-.

C

) '-as8

-(j54

en
::r

-Us 8

#

... __ .J

0

>-i
0
:'11

CD

,..--.,
.-Rs8
,
t'

lor-oJ,

~:..

~ E

tI>-

(Xl

~

,- '

~

)-

i!= r

1/1;
. 7

O"'----:_Rs4

!,---'

~--.,

c:::

Tb

,r--,,

r--'",

r:ot~.

~~::t

>

3':

~

§y
7~
....;. .

,"'rt-.~

!'1

~

-<

.~

~
t'l

'\ Db

o
z

"/I

~ J:

.

OC-Ouf

::u

[,ij

ffl •

.;.

)0

<0

~

/e- F/f. flOe

4v

!'J

-

~

r

0-

<)
...... _...1

0PtlS'/

. \.

<)

,r--",
,

;i>

'., I"

tlr""1.1.9/r

zero f'ilfe,.§

c~

v.... ,
from Fig. 76 F

c·

-'

N

~

ffi

CD

..

CD

0)

c+

'0)

tI>-

-.I

en

N

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON £T AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Fl1ed Jan. 19, 1949
148 Sheets-Sheet 49

Ul
Ul

•

.~
~
lNVENTO~p

TrW

F.£.HA,.,IL ."

RRSEE89,Jr.. R.A.ROWL£Y

-e.SHUGHCS/r.

BV~

ifIATTcRNEY

..........,

...

>

1:

CD
Q.

Co.

g

dial swdeh

N

...00

....

secf'(JIIs 3

....

(0

f

.

8

h-

8 , DS2S

DS1S

-0

(3)

1

?

fr

<0

en

....

~

-.0

fa)

n

W

~
o-i
H

tv6~.s
.106.

n,.aot!

tij

o/~/..(
-V1."i'S

ffl

'-lo8

:'l

£I

1'1
•

~

>
::c:

~ J:

.
t,-o
~.

IC-£S fo In

.
c;

.

; az

~

i

c
c

'"

c

..'8
~~ oS-07J
" "s 7.

tzJ

II I I I I •

L

lICK.

ICr.,~

/CU., 0

III.

;1
0
z
H

(

'n
o.

(

0

c

~

(

c

~

TO

tIilD~.s

[ ~ r~·,.
CJI?II
~ CI)

)!

:I

IIz

Rn. Bot! t?f pI/of
T'
vhl',s/6.B

-

....
~

In

56.
~
~~
~'~~.
."'
..~~

~ ~;";t~
~~~~
!:'il~
~~i
~'<

III

,
27«.

, " , , , , , '",

•

R.8·/

~Rs4
.J

1 T.'
~
ZlF(
rrrr-'.J,I
tL.J
.. t

I []
i '

V's8

_~~_~._ _ _ __

...
v-

"rOM Flq. 76F

[]t..j

V'.4
<;J./

~

CD
CD

...
~
...
CD
CD

C1I

o

~

r>-

~

~

N

enW
a')

en
~

N

fromF~_._76_d
_________________

Ti g

( r..

r..

r..

r..

r..

r..'

..,....

~

I-'

CD

Co

2:

c...

t

.57.

N

.00....

....
CD

.

co
CI1
w

....

~

!

()

"'J

TO

"nI/J~

1/1

'/?

VIJ~

PIJ 0
-:"'-'(Pi~'bI:O-~-++11+++1lll1l-1-Hllt

7-8c

TBL

OC-ES lolnt

H

Ttl

Pi :-'l

~ r'I
~ J:

roDe

/9-sc HI
,c-/f· 7BL

.0
()

tz:I

ro

TlIIJt~J

>

i:

C 0r-t

21il--9911()e

tI/ ,Pi7iJt vndJ 1'1& 8

()

;d

0

z

H

()

z
~

>
~ r
()
()

1:11

~

.....co. "'J>fi

~

:< ~

>
~
o
:II
Z

111

-<

~

~

Q)

z

,t/s8

!'I~.., ~~

~~!"i~
~~~o
c:'\~~:11
~i;::(jt

II

~.

,tI\~~
~~::t

~
CD

\.V

v

v

v

V

from Fi!l.76F

CD

c+

·/l'.l~.,
L_-l
.

t

::s'

0)

CD
CD

c+

C11

I-'

0
:xl

..
..

N

CJ)

W

CJ)

CJ)

-..I

N

..........,

From Fig. 76 d

~

1

CD

~

. Co.

g

'N
...00

-

.....

<0

<0

en

.....

*

le-Int to ES
ItPC

"n1 /-ac-!',,,,.

?'J.)

W

~

tzl

n

>-i

1-1

til :'I

o

IIPC /08 t.. 4/!..F"9. 8t? o~~,/t1t

~

I'll

til

J:

£) . •

~"'.1 /~8

z

>

~ ~

IQC

~ ~
:d z
0
~ 0

z

H

8

,~~1t-C'tfllllllll::~:t':'~11111111~7~t1:n~
111111I1,,~{~~e
»
<
:;
<.
:;

< ""'"

?II

<

~ ~

~

. m·

)0

j
(3
:II

z

If'JI1 .,

.:lti_

r:-f'::,o~~

!:I)iltI",,'"
.~.

z

;to ~d

~ ~i~
~,...:~

t~"""~
""~

,

, '-

~

B
~

1

;

.

side

<

n
n

i!=

11111111

,

.....
~

~

CD
CD

c+

~

CD
CD

c+

01

'"

~
>
r

~
>

>-i
0

::0

N

(,)
W

0)

(,)

~

(F/f. ?~a) OP 2 II

'PI h(Fiq. 71a)

......

>-

"OJ

!.

1:

.

...

...OD

i

en
w

e.~

r~·5

OPi
~".J ':c-/'.77a)~
O

ro

C>P:1

.

c>P,
oP~

OP

oP/S

19

OJ
~: ...,-

FIIIO

·
~A

JPI

/
10 ,...

.

/,iA ~Side

OPI

lAnds
9

.- -

OPI

units
S

5"

um,

oJ

""

/

02 ~
.;..

~ z~

;J

IS ~

QI

-<

a

?I:I

~

~

z
,~ <

!"'I~~JI1
~. rtiz

~i~
~""I""

t!~~
:"t ::t

-

. ;,

21
99

.;..

0

~ ~

o

.;..

OP2Q.)(;

C>,P2lj

!
Pi
="
~ f'I
~ :J:
o >
t"l 3:

OPZ writs"
4- t,.ees
~

Of

2fJ

CD

~

~32.1()

0

....

-

r-

~ ~

It ~

r...
CD

...~
CD

CJI

(II

N

~
en
en
tj

>

~
......

1

CD

a.

f.!.:lo6D

'~"'

N

...00

....

......



::1
~

Ie '-1

Ie....., 1

1 I"'

.....,

1e

~. ~~~g
=t~~CD
~~

f~~
~~~

I

i

rf

.

~ 0~

,/P';i

1~~r--.p~~Jr--r

I I ~~~r.--.reB5ide

g.a 1~8 'it;8 IN 2~8 ~82r8
~

,:a

;(,18 ~.

FI,. 7~e

z
~. ~
~

0

'i

--r!
.

~.--./

Fi~

76c

In Code

I

>

C"l

I Us~,

si;-!
.T8~ ! UB

rrQI11

s:l-

!"l~~~
~~r~

Us8;

r---~~---

FriRs8

~

P1
•

:I

~ ~

IT .

2T'"
IU

~

I.ii

:z:

VIC

.

£)

fig·6L

YB

~
.~

i

g
CD

f

)0-

r

>o-i
~

N

(7)
W

1:1"

0)

c+

(7)

CD
CD

(J1

,t:.

~

"OJ
........CD

SH2

.tjib

Co

Oen(Jminllfi""Q/ Shift

a"its tli~it

fi

ISH
4SH
2SH

m:~)

l

\

N
00

.....

.........
CD

;r="'?64~

,SH

c...

I1l

~

CD

en

w

e
0
"i

I-t

~

Den(Jl17inati(Jltll/ Shilf

from

8
side
7l)

19f 7c:f~ r

t---'
",,,;:/ 1[
IZ

I

~, \.!
I

L ___

~~t

L __ ......

105H

'v

~

76&1.,

(lsI"

r--1

L __

"'U

I..Y

V"

u-

u- , / te,!s dtjif IIlttX directi(JlI,

~~ L

--

I

...

L _ _ -'

L __ .J

L __

i:

~

~

IJr--'
I

-<

;\)

I

:z:

I-t

~

ff ~

~

~

~

~

~ ~

o

1"Il~~1I1

z

:t:'~-i

::u
~

~~""z

c;::~ 0

~~~::u
~,...,...cn

t~~
:'i ::t.

l

0

(}

V

U

20SH
".

r ---,

A
side

l!=

....

•

.HUGHES,.,'I:

6Y

GNt?-LI-

(r'ATrORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

149 Sheets-Sheet 63

r ------------('"'-- --------------------- ----- - ---- --------I

\-oO(P-18flt order

:

216217

I

/stPQ

..

J3,.,

INVENTORS TON
F.E.HAMll
R.R.S£E.B£R,fr., R.A.ROWL£Y
·~.S.HUGH£S,Jr.

8Y~
.

ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

·2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sbeets-Sheet 64

R.ROI (FrOM Fi!l6SId
_/"---- "---------,....---------------------,--

Int Ol.Jt
Bu.s -set

18 tit
PQ-R

Col
16

INVENTOR

F£.HAMILTON
RRS££BE/i.Jr.. IIA.IifJWLE.Yr.
"
E.5. HUGHES,..,,.
B,(~
"ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-5heet 65

n
• I

I

[,"ernul
III. .hlJ5-sef

L--t:::======+===~_--o OO-RI1.
(from F/1'- 780)

Order 18

CoL
-ODE-

16

INVENTORS

TA ..,

F.E-HAMILtv,.

R.RSEEBER~

RA.RfJWLEY
£. S. NVfJNEs./i:

BY~

ATTORNEY

April 28, t 953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

/c26/IICCTR"l)

i
!

INVENTORS
F.E-HAMILTON
Nil SEE8EIf.J$ R.A.ROWLEY
c.S.HUGHESJr.

BY

~.t.:,..

ovl'XTTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949
tiCS

5 .

148 Sheets-Sheet 67
u.cs 4)

tiCS

1

I'TO F/? !~4e)

UCS5

UCS4

cstF 20

'hCORR
PtlLst5

d 51 Inter/ode.
e20
INVENTORS

.
F.E-HAMILTON
1lR.$EE8ERJr.. R.A.ROWl.£Y
£.S.HU6Ht:S,Jr.
BY~
g'ATtORNEY

o

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
riled Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 68

Tertiary
TER20

TERI9

TER 18

TERI7

TEl? 16

Timer

\c26

?e20
.

'.-

~.:~.

INVENTORS

,
F.E.HAMILTON
R.R.S££B£/(Jr.. IM.HOWLEY

£.s. HlJ6HES;.Ji

BY~""';"

O~iTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 69

Tertiary

Timer

C.lJI

t.c26

T~_65cl.

INVENTORS

F.E.HAMILTON
IUlS££8£R.Jr., R.A.ROWL£Y
E.5.HU6HES/r.
BY a..In1~

0" XTT"ORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 70
M-PI?E 1. (F/? 781'1)

dv

cl9

INVENTORS

F.E-HAMILTON
R.H.5EE8ER.J? R.A.ROWLEY
c.5.HUGHES/1:
BY~/~

D AnO-RNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 71

dv

my

A /,,,/se line .

8/Julse
lin.e

"

COMP

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19. 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 72

NPI(
·I
A

(tflFig. 640)

/llll

COMP

INVENTORS

F.E.HAMIL TDN

R.R.SE£BER"Jr.I-R.A,ROWLEY

c..S.NUGH£.SJr.
BY~
ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

PRJ

148 Sheets-Sbeet 73

d'S!

d4

COMP
. INVENTORS

F.E.HAMILTON
RA.ROWL£Y

RRSE£BERJ~

t:. .5. HIJ6HES,Jr.
BY~
ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON £TAL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 74

12',,1
r----

------------------------ ----------------------l
SOlJ.rce of SO I<.C A Olla 8 pulses

EXT F

-0----

I
I
I
IL __________________________________________________ _

.JIJ(st!e FigHf')

C-OP I (to Fig 611)

INVENTORS

F.E.HAMILTON
IlIlSEEBER.Jr., R.A.ROWLEY
E.S.HUGHES,Jr.
BV~
p' ATTORNEY

o

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

FUed Jan. 19. 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 75

Zs.

I
I
I

:... ------- - -- --MP/IJO
Sign -------------------Mixer
, ----~
-------------

INVENTORS

F.EHANILTON
R.ItSEEBER.Jr., R.A.ROWLEY
. 'E.S.HU6HES,JI.
BY~"--:­

(J

vATTORNEY

April 28, t 953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949
148 Sheets-Sheet 76

PQC
or (1.. .
DOq .-- -

(F/f, :
78A1N) ,

d ", Inter/Dele (F/f.
-Iooe 10
--------------------PQ Orders
6S/)

I

I
I
I

(Fig. 64ft)

PQ

I
I

-,

cancel

I

I

,,

I

I

,

I
I
.I
Conlrol
________________JI

Resu/f Cancel $ Readout
------------------ - ---------

I

L

lw

d42

. (/rt7mFlf. 6S"/1.

CPLT 1.

fTC F/----

Pas.

4----5 ------ .

1'-....-!3Z1-~

3

l'-_1311-~

4

l'---,~-..5

1'-....-.1.291--.. 6

6 ----7----- .

'I'-....-I28J---;~ 7

8

8 - ----

9
"l'-___I25t___JI 10

9 -----

'0- ----

"-----

~~=IX~~l1

~·~~~~rn_-'2

12.-----

1'--..1221--_'3
~_~c~~~-.~

13----~-~0-

14----- ~-~c:o­

.5----'6------

----~2

00
entry
rrom

:~~~;.::[ijB-.'5 I lit

~:--~~

In

.~~~~~~-. 16busco/~s
~~-4llr-::O-~
17
16

11-- ---

F+=l[flJ:=:!:=-!'8!.-+ 17
~~1ID::=!:..!'!!.9_18
?-=~:m::::::::!::~20~t-19

~~[ffi:=:!::12:.!..'---+- 20
~+-=[ffi:~~2~Z_21

~-..:nil=~23:L.+2Z
~+=I[ID:=!:~2"'L+Z3

26----1:7-.---.28----29----30-.----

~+-=I[1Qt:::::!:~25L+ a4~~m:~~26~04-25
"-=:..,:rn==~27L+ 26
~~"o_
U
~
::0--:0--'0_

~~;.::..::nn::~~29L.~28
'I'----I.5:J~--+29

INVENTORS

F. E. HAMIL TON
RRS££B£R.Jr.• .R.A.ROWL£Y
E.S. HUGH£S/r.
8Y~
ATTORNEY

50!(CfA pulses__
t8,Dlilses---

-.... ...... ... . .. .....

I r, r ,r,r irir
M-PRE ___ _-I-t
H 29T----- f
~~

HI6 ___ _

Zi1L---Hit!

-

,...
,...

I-

.....,

Moe

r:

fig_61

III.f ¥ ",ullijJ!y' bus

~"Urtl ;1111 fJ~

...l-

CIZIIC~1

...

co

:f
8pti",•
AP f'",~

NC-Rl___ _
MPC ___ _ MPYJl---- -

~AP/~"'tI S8P~""~Af?

Pi

,f"'ulli,Plit'1II~rOil C(J"'plt'te
IIexfMOC calfeel

I
.
r~tur",ui Ullol~,. eM/NIl

rM

r~t"r"tld ".Y

~"~ ~nreturlled P.Y lint
I
~- I~ re~u!,IIt1d '{hIM

~

CJ;l

~
(1)

-< ~

~

:1>
o

;u

~
~
;::.
., 
i!= r
o

.J1Jl.fl. P-

I-

~

0
~ Z

~1r£~~~Mri" ~Mn"nn
i-

....

1':1

o

I-Itlt Co/umlt Shift Skp

,

"'/I

~ >~
o

ft/, '1~""'"

.,L:...

!

W

H

MY~r:---- -

~

en
~

APf{",~,

-11--1

a.

...



~
:;'
g.

... E

;~
.~ ..e
~

N

•
c+

G')
G')

~

~

T- 9
i

+

Ex: 72000 000 000000

00 000 ottO 000200

Rightward Oenominationo/ Shiff 24 with

6B

CO.Ishii
P
lOS.

lj
Jj Jj

H.
U
00

••

3.1 32

?J 7J

11
NJ.1
8.
00
00
~

f

gz

26

0

0

b-R {,
lJ 24
0

~

2!J 22

0 7i

zt.
0

lj

£
0

0

i

;l:~;:::(/)

~~~

~ ~

t2:

""J

CD

o

C"jCS;t:u

.......

clJrrection

Co

Lz.o7f
2
fMC/OR

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 8 0
o 0 000 0 0 0 0 000 000
2
3
0 0 9 9 9 9 9·9 9 9 9 9 9 9 8
3
o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000 0
o
0 f o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
~
o
0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0·.0 0 0 0 0 0
4o
0
3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4o
0
3
9 9 9 9 9 9 f} f} 9 f} 9 9
4
o
0
3
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0
4
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
5
003
o
0
3
2
0
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5
o
0
J
.9
0
0
0
0 0 0 o. 0 0 0 0
5
o
0
3
40
0
0
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5
0
3·
5
0
0
0
0
0
0 0 0 0 0 0
5
o0 J 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5
~
0 0 3 6 9 9 9 9 9 999 9 9· 9
5
tJI
~
o0 3 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-< ~
5
o0 3 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6
m
12 correction
~
5
k z(}lI.oticlltO 0 3 6 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
~~~~Q{{()tltntafkr riel1omilJdtiMd/
/Jen shift Co/so
~~~a slull 0124 to right
Z

Y2

c..

a.

D. _____ L

0

0

()

7 ZOO

0

0-----0

7 2 0 0 0

0-----0

!4. t:l
7

~ IS

2.

7 ZOO

7
5
3
1
9
1
I
0
0
0
0
0
9
0
0

2
2
2
2
2
2

o·
8
6

42

0
8
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0

0

o----~:i)

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0----"0
0------0
0 ------0
0 -- --- 0
()-----o
0-----0
0-----0
0 -----0
0 -----0
0 -- - --0
0-----0
0 - ---0
0 -- ---0
0 - ----0
0-----0

0 0 0 0 0 0-----0
?{---~~ ~ ~ 3.- .z. L
----0 .3 6

ptl,
eyeI e

comp

true
comp
t,.u~
comp
comp
comp
comp
true

CD

CD

en

f

.. ~

w

H

;j "11
[;3 •
D

PI

~

l:

f

~

&J ~

COlnp

~ 0
o Z

conip

~ ~

COin!!

comp

(l

camp
trae

GO

...
-....

comp

CO/1/p

......N

G

r::

....

>r

~

~ ~
gt

.

CD
CD.

..•~

·CD



t

:t
e.-

8T41211

18~

ll:

.N

...

g,

QQ

...
co

ACCUMULATOR '

""

!

( 0.

~
o,J

H

;j
f:'}

ITI
•

o

>
~

~

[IJ

~

~
!iJ

~ 981

98

-0-0-

0.

~
H

RC
t!tC.
01
~

0
0

138

...

;I:J

17.4

~

~~

.c-OPr

~ -z

CD
CD

~

. ""~~~
~'i'of"lZ
~~~~

~~~~
r'I~::1

Sri"..c:s
~~:t

~
gJ

26 16
\.. COL'

sY<515{S
COL 2

.

SdtB8<5
COL 2 7
INT OUT
Y

8(.162fJ6

'

Bd)48J){S

COL 28
coL 29
BUS -SET

I I ACe-ROl.. ~
, ACC-RO AMPL ;:ell . yO
122A

7A

I/-'"
J

(?

CD
CD

<+
(Xl

CII

="

10

~

J:

j=

d
z
~
>

r

o,J

0

;lO

..N
e
0)

'Cft
tj

Apri128, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC. CALCULATOR
Flled Jan. 19, 1949
148 Sheets-Sheet 84

RCC "L(Fro", Fig. 71F)

ECC 1...

. (1/'(J1It Fij7/e)
.--------,

·1511

. 2Sh

- Si§h +Sigh
..r
..r

()jJNafi", S/~II
OutjJut

{Tl:1 "&"/1" 7/~.J

-

T

.

.

19-~-IJ

QINVENTORS

F.E.HAMILTON
RR.S££8£RJ,; RA./iOWl£Y
.
c..S-HUGHES,.!,-

.

.

\

.

BY

~~NEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CAl.CULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 85
29th ACCUMIJLATOR ORDER

(TOFI,. 71/)

CTLAj

22A

(71)

.

r/1

Tic)

INVENTORS

FE. HAMIL TON

R.RSEE8£R.Jr.~ R.A.ROWLEY

.
£.8. HUGH£5;Jr.
6Y~
ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

.2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 86
.,. 1..

eyer

1.

. {TO F/9-

7/:/l

.,J"l..

......-4-_ _....,.-4_--If-J(J'ee.F~ 7!J1

·101

""1

ARPl

CC-ST

Ace

.r

(from Fig. 7'.!)

I

osc

r=

AND

AMP

INVENTORS

F.EHAMILTON
R.RSEEBER,J$ HA.ROWLEY
c.SHIIGHESJr.

BY

~

vq,. TTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

P; E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sh.ets-Sheet 87

c- TL

(TD FIt!
7/C)

A+

~

_____________________________ ___________________ ___ J
~

~

INVENTORS

F.£.HAMILTON
ItH.ScE8ER.J$ H.A.HOWl£Y
c.S.HUGH£SJIr
BY OAAI.JJJ~
O~;;'ORNEv

April '28, 1953

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

2,636,672

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949
148 Sheets-Sheet 88

1720

API

(J~~
FIf·/8

-~.~~------------------------------------~------------t---1
(TI) Flf. 7/.1)

.'2.

HCCS

(rl) F19s. 27~

L
.,s. 7/~'
7",)

2530

2328

aJ r_N~.

71")

INVENTORS

F.E-HA MIL TON

R.RS££8£R,Jr., R.A.ROWL£Y
.
E.s. HUGHES/'BY
~

a -v ArioRNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
FUed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 89

~

'f

lj:QS 16°
105arl

)

.---

~7

I,x10 6 °°,1°
AP
...,

I,l 8
°

IsO ,l°o!- r:o 1300

'J.12

I,

' ( :>

~oo I~.
7 ~

Ji\-

10 4~ 4a

r-

o

1

rt'.o
00,1 ~TI
ftm

ljjtB~1 r '3
L-...J

l

-1-11,. HS 2J ({'INn Fi~ 7~'OJ

1. CY~Tftro", Fij.7Ic)

I(fro,"
9G{~ FiJ- 71/J)

10 -' FIf. 7'1)

I

..-J

009 00,101 IXoolfo ' .1

I:

C'RE":LflT

--..J

00
Il 14 l rI;Ol'l!oJ '1o1,)(.60 oOl

I

i

V!

II

.r..

1613

16

L-

v

..r.

1'ZZO
'

lIo,llm r~' 00]
18

,17 ITa

00 I·OO OOJ I ()( 24° 1
0
I~ 19 0'
J(

In

20

X

10

I

'-J

1.2.5"30

~

tt2~1~

21

~Z3Z8

:31~
T

,.2235

C

'-2324-

1

;. 2580
.;"

1;3~1 ~~
t

rrtP

~l~

r.C18

f(.T/"OI?? t

l~n!i~1

ACC-ST

(70 Flf. 7/6)

L)'
RCC

16.016.~
)31 103ll

L--

IL-...J

/928

00 06

I~ .35"

+HC
:r;

rt:~I~ ~
LAP

(TO F/f. 7/0..)

Flf· 781f)

C)1..

.r..

r-

3322/

~

6

~

-0

.r..

~

~
, 9

~281

U;025"1 (~

zo/t

(

~

ReeL

SHCA1.-

+ ~ ~tACSB

~C)

(from Ftg.27/J) (fofi9s.271J(716)
INV:::NTORS

,
F.E.HAMILTON
R.RSEEBER.Jr.. RA.ROWLEY
E.S. HUGHESJr.
BY
(L.Q.tfJ.t...;;.,

a ' ATTORr-:IEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

. ACC-I?() 1.
(Tf> F'f'

?tJ.J

INVENTORS

£E. HAMILTON

RRSEEBER"Jr.. R.A.ROWLEY
E.S.HUGHES"Jr.
BY~
( j ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148

ACCUMULATOR

o
SOI(C (A Pulses

tB

Pulses

Shee~s-Sheet

91

CYCLE

1 234567891011121314

n.. n.. rt. h. rw.. n. h.. n. rt. 1'1. rt. h.J h- n.. rt.n
~
~ II ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ W- ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
f)

16-Ftg.;/!cc 7imer.Contro/'
V-Pulse to /st()rder(fij69a)n

14-Fig: 71e,
IO-Fig.7Id
r r
BEP Pulses
10.
19.- Fig.7Id
7*Pulse to orders 2fo28(Fig. 7()} M
IS-Fig. 71d

.

~O-5"Pulse

ARP Pulses

~

h rL

to control resetof/5.IT,]
'..,

r

~

~

,.

r r

h M r,

r'

--

r

n Mn n
r

- I..n

/I-Flf· 7ld(Carry control)
8-Fig. 7/d
Corry Pulse C-OP,
6-Fig.

-

i-

71d

Complefe Signal eYCr

- '--

~

+4 illfo I?C {15(T/c) -F;g.6~'Q
BEP
-4 into

1st Re

-li"lo

Z"dRC
-0 info
IstRe

[15(l7C)-Ftg. 69a
BEP
'{ l5"rr/C}-Fig, 6gb

BEP
{IS(T/C)-Fig .694
BE?

-f--

r '..

" r'- "- -

~-

~jo

- --

~-

.1"1~

-.rr
. ..r --~r ,.

",.

-- - -- - - - - -

r
- - - - ..r- - - - _r~

!'

r'
.- --~- - '-. -

1'1r' I"i

~- ~ --~-

I

-...-

1'~~'

- -- I'~ ~ ~ -

~..r

~,.

- -. _.

r'~ ~~

INVENTORS

££. HAMIL TON
R.H.SEEBER"Jr.. RA.ROWlEY

E.S.HUGHES.J'-

8Y

~J.A..-

OfATToRNEV

ApriL28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 92

ACCUMULATED RESULT POSITIVE.

'A~c'!'1{jL~T~O RESULT NEGATIVE

INVENTORS

F.E.HAMILTON
R.R.SE£BER,Jr.. !lA.ROWLEY
.
E.SHlKiHESJr.
8V~

(J

"AnoRNEv

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19. 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 93

nC(AP
BP

u

2D-Fi17d
RIKJCS'~
31-Fil -719

20-Fi"9 71?

{

24-Ft~71e

27-FlI-7".e

3IJ-Fi,.7/e
31-Fi1-71e

I9-Fip7/J
23tiJ=27b

27-Ji1- 270
3IJ-1i127/J
29""I? 71'1

....
l.-

~'in'"
I'"

... .....

2"'-;:;9 71r
/6-1l?7H
ACCCYCL ~
8-Fi/7fT
7-Fif
f9-FtI 719

7/r

2Hi17t~

~",.Arr..;.RI. •

-I,.,

d

..

~.

ICf:.5

,.""

'/

ACL IJ" ',..""/A.'>JI '0/'sk/f ~",k. /"Fills' 2-1- 6 ~
SJiRI Ii, I
,Inl-I"d '" ./.J If} _~,. AC;U
I
~"",.1I"f .qJ./r"/ /F~d
)

-

.... I»r,.
I.-

_till. "A

I
'..,i. _.' ,r
__

~I'

la~~T"''''''

....
c;~6i'
~

", '-rftJ,.

./ ...- - , "-'--I.c1N:~K~

I

cancel.
.... El!iJJ'n/r

l5'-fi~ 7/tl
2f-Fi?71?

IHi~7/f'

1li!'s.J /,.... .;. ,- '+sim.

I..

12-Fl~7'r

/I-F'9 7Ir

~:7-NtJ .7/-/

,-,

J

19.fi~7/~

ACCCYCiE
'/ri"#-71T
35-Fi1-7f,
/I-Fi1 7tr

6,

~

I

'£of ~I'~~

S ,MI,.v JAto 1ilEl'..

'I~CIA;~ /" ..J'

/

;-

~"';CYCPT
I

I~thy( ';FiR

Err

;.----/.'1

i""I'1'/

~r; ;.HI,.III;I/

-

r

'CO-

:J_, .•

./ ,,,,.EC

"I

"'""s.

.L_·._:/~ ~

.,

I--

....

--::i.

~D,

n

I

J-.lArr-RO

INVENTORS
F.£.HAMILTON

R Ii S££8ER.Jr.~ R.A.ROWLEY
c. S: HUGHES,]r.
8Y~
CJ KriORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19. 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 94

t:S

m

~~ ....~O------------------------------------I

r;

1,..1

~

.~~

~

~

.~­

~~o.---+c-~__________~__________~____________~__~

~

~

~,..,

~'~ o·- - - - - '

~

r---------------------------~========~~

\~ 0-..-1"---1
\I)

~o.------------------~----~----~
~~

'"

,...,

~ ~~
~ .~~

~,

.I
I

:-"",.J

~~
. ~.

~~

~

~

~
-..;.;::

~

L.,

~.

~

~

-~
ii ~ C).-~----+o
i~~

~

....~

~

~.

-..;::

~

.,

~~~~~~--------------------------------~
~~
~,I
~ \JrJ
ro:J.~.
~I
'. ~ o......----T-+-'
L-__________________________________________--;
~
~"
~i

~
c.-:::

'-=

..,

INVENTORS'

~
.::'
l@
~

t

~

F.E-HAMILTON

.

R.RSE£BER,Jr.. R.A.IiOWL£Y
E.S.HUGH£S;Jr.
BY ~~~_

O1IATToRNEY

_.-

'l.'eI

~

r~J5b

2CF

AP1.---8~-[~·EO I
I
lSI

·0·

It °2°:tU

UZ1

.... ------- ------------- ---------I
1
I
I

I
I

L

[oT'JU
I

------- --

~

It O,t 0J
- - --

: AT DELAY

COUNTER

II

.

10

.......

"IIJ

I-ATJ
-4E I ISO
I

It66 °°01

,

110h 0°,1
11

It

0.

0

!

Itl/oj

aI

I

-

---- ---"r---------I
I
I

D

-

)0

.~
~ 2

2

c;;:. ~O

=I~"i~~
o
~~!'II2
:u . !t::lI.;t-f

11\

0(

.

~

1
I
I
I

1

10° ~,o\J.

Ul~2001

U!°3j Ool

1116,~ 0J
- - =. - -=---:==:-

. Ul2S0J

1!~1001

~

1;

1° II oJ

~

o

---.: .: -1

~.:'::.:-=-

r=:i

~

I

~~;:::CII

L

Ul 623°01
COUNTER

.U! 3}oJ

Ul '.,l °01
-

- --

[Pl L....._._._
STRI
Sf I ....

._._.-~

ill-.l3°J

i
~
...
CD
CD

11° .16° 'U

b

CD
CD

~~~

~

PI
:I

>
~

~ Z
0

10600J
1!..2I .

o

I

:'I

~ ~

_I

0

------- -----------. ------ - -- ----- -BPJ.L....-._. Cf. 1
Ie. .rc-I - - APl.._.. __
f~~·
:"i"<~
~~~:u

e
~

I
1110X °28060 1
11~61;:~
I
r ------ ------------ ---------- 1A E DELAY

°2S

"'"

<·~

w

Pl

!

I

...

co
en

H

1
;I)

N

...GD

....t;

~-1

0

i

!.
c...
B

,

--------

1

IlVo0 6.1
lG"0 ~60 °0 I

Illlo °23 6.1

-----------

1°6.1 0J

U! 6,/ OJ
.

~j-RI ·-SE.~
101
154

I lU 64 00°l

I·

lCo~I:91

7

·-CpiI'"VATOI . EP~
'174
r---------

...

co
en

I

~
>r

N

~
en

en
tj

{CleI

~P'L

BPI

CPt.

............

EPl

(7lI .nf. 'T7c)

.. ~~71
L

I' rhl,

r;-;ll

7

>

t

CD

AEr

g.

·ATJ

eo.

t;

I~

~

...

....

co

--------,

i
co

CD

en
w

!
~

M

f..:.9 7Sc

-,
I

3Cf

I

I
I

.-----

I,

liT

'.11

I

~

L _____ ·__

~

"'"

,-

J

I

YI

111
~

I

)0

~,llli

I ',4

5ttJ

o

II

I

Y I .

111111. ___ .1
IT II II r t "'-1

II r
i

~ ~

>
i!= r-

gt

126

.

STROl

tti~!"'iz

r

~ .:t~~d

-

l' I

·ti g

",,'"

~~~
~'<~

0

o
o

~ E

~.

~ ~I~!

e!i ez
o

~

~

J:

~ ~

I.

.~;~~z
::J

~

COUNTER

..J

~

I

t:j '1J
~.~

STR
DELAY

I

14

ICicr

:AP 1.

'BPI

STROZ

'r

8£1"
AES

•

i
CD

EP1

STRI·

-----.~~.------.

::0

CD

~

~

~

~

a)

'eft

tj

ICief

..,...

----STROl Sf]",

BPI

126

EP1.

-AEJ

rL

c..

STRI

g
(sec(. 16h, Zi.34J

NPRI

N

!»

...
!D.

....


:r:

~

l'l

~

a;=

~
~ z

air

~ .~

r:

n

(F,f·77t1)

a

~ ~

)0

... ~
~ ~

lur.

~

~

:

z

CD

a
~~~~
:a ~~~....

~ ~;':t~
0(

~~r:CD

(I)~~

~~:t

>r

.APl

BPI

.!"
~
0)

i
c+

CD

(r)

~

~

'APl.

BPI

._._-""'""'1'-

SEIJ IrAEI

CPl.

........
"'IIJ

.ta.:

CD

g.
Co.

~

~

...

:0

CD

....
cg

<0

!

en
w

~
H

Pi

'11

£)

!11

['f

fo Fig. 77d

0

~ >
:I:
~

o

l"l

~ 0~
z
~ ~
o
;1
o

X2.

o

)0-

i!= r

. . E"

~
~

OO~

)o~ ~

r

~
gI
CD
CD

~t ~~~~ ~ 9·75e
~i~~~~

-<

t;\~~o

~i;::~

~~~.
:'\'<~

c+

~

.

CD

c+

'A.." 1 . . _ .ll...t§'fI--._o

CPl.

EP"l

STRI

- - -SEJ.
-

#4£1'

<0
CD

~
"

N

~
0)

en
~

. "F. .ii
1- "

1_'15 f - .

CP • - -

6CF

'

LATE

EPJ

,~ ---::roLL
lNT1 jEN_'T_ _--,

...;!!
Coo

r---------

-...

I
I
L~

....

:0

I
I
I
I

~

G

------~---,

I

'y

i

1t

De/tly::

!

______ _

rTf)

F/9· 7~9)

CQ

en

w

~.
H

~

"II

~ ~

x-J

~ 3:~

P.I

~ ~

~ ~

o

~, ~

0,

~ 1!

1,0

111.:1:1

~

< ~

IfE:J

;u,

1£

S!! _
~

z . :t:~~o
!t~1'"

~~~

~~~

AP

~

166
SE0l..

~~~~

!:! i~;tiZ

;
CD

z

a .~~:'I\~
)0

i'

~ E
~

LATE
Tllk

'8P

·cp

CD
CD

s

i----

'ENT

ALL
ENT

...
l8

N

~
eft

'(,)

~

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

F~led

Jan. 19. 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 100

I

~

tnLL

m u

[; r.~
~.

.

. INVENTORS TO.,a.

F.E-HAMIL

,..

R.RS££8£R,Jr., R.A. ROWLEY

E:S.HtJGH£~r.

8Y~
ATTORNEY

BP--

s

S£Ol.£NTI
D

ALL

........"OJ

ENT

Co

>

1:

CD

c..

~

t;

....<0

....

.

~
<0

(,0

!

en
w

~

1-1

.;,j :rJ

~ f'1
~ :I:
o >
PJ ~

I~---------~---------------------------~

I
I

II
I

~ 0~

o

;J
Z
o

OO+I------~--------~

.~ ~

21

o

I
____________________________ -JI

01

-<

~

~ ~

;:1:1

ftI

~
~
~
~
<'" Z

CXI

~

...'II
CD

!"I~~<

~~!"i~

~~~-I

~i~~
~""""(/I

~,..,~
~~~
l'i

>

r

Tig_15

h_

8 CF

in
:::r

...
CD
CD

....
....o

~

N

~
0)
~

tj

..........,

.,t

CD

Or

2:

c..

~

N

!'J

....

.....
CD

(0

....

~
CD

Y

85111 _ "
4SII1
t() A side
Fi~

62
2"5HI

-,
~

IS#I

en

!

w

C'l
~

H

p:j 'TI

ffl •

c

~

C'l

l"J

f'I

:I:

>-

~

~ 0~

C'l

~ z

~ ~

LRSHR 0
A side Fiy.6J

C'l

;)-

i!= r

tOA5i~ ~t E
~

.;] Ftg.62
85712 0

en

45H2 0

go

.

~

rr
en
t>'

...
....
CD
CD

02

Ihl

1.62

10

16

0

II)

~

..N
..

~

W

~

~

r;j

lJi------ca ----.6:r~F!?:~ -....

..,

......
c..

i

.......

en

CD

g,

a

.....
N
GO

CD

~


t'l J:

&J

f

20SHIJ

.--

I =r-

~=r==

I--r--

~ ~

8SN2._\.

o

f:=

IOSHV

Fij,62

L..R5NU
01

~

ISHZ
l

~-

~ ~

o . YI~
!'lh~'"
:u
I"iZ

~.
-<

B side

;lb

~s

)0

~~~a

~~~:u

ti'j<::)sUl

~~~
~~~

...It
~

CD
CD

r>

~

0
~ Z
o

8 side
Fig-oj

l_i6b-

10 CF

.c+

t
::r

CD
CD

c+

tI

-.6

...

0
Col

>

r

~

::0

..
..w
N

0)
0)

0)

;;:J

April,28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheet8-Sheet 104

I

I
I

~
~

~'

.~

II:::
~ .,;:

.'"t ~
§
~

.

.

INVENTORS

F.£. HAMILTON
R.Ii.SEEBER~':J. R.A.8OWLEY
.
c.S.HUGHES,Jr.

BY

~.-IJ....-.

~'ATTo;NEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 105

I.

.

. . .

~

~

~
~' ....

e~ ~lc-i

;.;: ~\I)" ~~.
i;-o
~ ~ ~
\i

INVENTORS

F.£.HAMILTON

R.RS££B£R.Jr.. RA.ROWL£Y

E.8.HtlGH£5.Jr.

BY~..L-

0-" ATTORNEY

+150: .sJdt'-.-'-.-.--.-.~zl.

·rill"A [-~T'ln-"8·-·
T.iIuI"A Vzl1 . TOvI-8

...
1J

~L.._.....

"'J
........G

~

c..
~

N

2:

.jl.

....
co

!»

~

w

co

....

(0

en

!
~

H

Pl '"
[q
.
£)

r'1

tzl

3:

~ :t
o >

C
~
o 0

.~

z
~ ~
>r

o

~

1:11

"<

~
)0

O.
:a
Z

~

~

It

~

~
~
~

G
G

c+

i

~~~JII~
SI\.1"I.

!2 ~~~~
Sl!(~.
~"<

E
~

:;0

g!

z
<

~~IO

~~4t

,.'!

ct
c+

.L

( ----- r"..zFi ro"t"z(1 _fJ-zf1

!TiIl~

.b-l. tToy,"jJ
---

....
~

N

~
~

(,);

~

r~~6f~J
14CF

ffl

"<'] no.,,). rz'l T~tZfl ,z'l r.·6Pd)
_2
~

_3
~

~
~4

_5
~

-Tiud-S
b

.......

.tiL

"':I

CD

Q.

c..
@l
_6
~

N

-

....

!'J

....
:f

en
w

.CD
CD

U)

!
0
t-i

H

pj ."

8J .
PI
~ :t
o >

£)

3:

I.'l

C0~
o

~

z
~ ~

o >
i!= r

.It·. E
~
en
::r-

CD
CD
c+

rr

en
::r·CD
CD
c+

....
0

~

::>3

..
..

N

0)

W

0)

0)

~

........."OJ

.t2:

CD

Ilo

eo.

G

rY:::/PO> §
3r

~~tr
~3r ~
j
~Y"-r
.

I

f21

.....

en
w

(0

@ ~
~
j ~j
I

.

)o~ ~

\;. t '1T£f
_

.

!"\.:., r:l",
~

.

L

.

t.ATE

~~~
~~,..C/)
~~;:t~

~ .... ~

~"'~
:0;'<:

~

J ;

~ ~..

7£

:rsee njm)

-

...

I

¥8
~

~

¥8
~
j

(0

¥8 2
~
j YP:
e
r

~

0

tz:I

~

H

~

03

.

~ :'I

241

D

f'1

o

J:
>
3:

~

tz:I

ez

~

y4
(from

I

ij

<0

!Ie

YLAn

0

o

;d

~

0lFI9· 759)

gig::

N

!IJ

~ ~

~s:.

>
i!= r

0

~

1=".lg. ~6
_.J.

~(~~:~i

i#J

y5'

y;8}

(ra FI'f. 759)(

a J

15 CF

(

.

g
.

TOF1

'l.75h)7

...en E
•

til
tr

CD
CD

c+

t
tr

CD

CD

c+

.....
en
0

t-i

·0

"

~

en
w
en
...en
tj

"".I
....CD....

+130 V

I r

'I,

lit

>

t

Q.

____ 2f~1

c..

N

...

......co

....

en
w

G

U),

OP 00

o

~
14

o~-----....,

~O.
18

I~

~

':'

It

-10 V

~
(7)> Flf,78c)

+150 V 0/123

A CC

(koHl Flf' 59)

1.

OPOI

l"l

o

TOL

eKel

o >i!= r-

~

...$ ~
~

OP04,
aJ

~

~

r--bl
0
I"vf I I " Z

~I
:r:lY'11.cx. _
11~ ~. ~~'0 (fi:tr~;m~r:~/?-~.s~9)~=-~ -'=~r~~.~'
77~~
-<

o
>

z

:II

"'~~
~~~
~~,.

iii~~~
..",.
;t:1:S;::::cr>

~~~

,

if'15 c0

~

~ 0~
;J
z
0
~ ~

{TO FI,/, 76o..}

OPOZ

:tI

c~ .III
~ :I
o >-

----0

(TO F/1,78A)

OP03

!
~
1-1
tij

NO OPJ
Cod~

U)

~

HCS w

.

I'm F'f.

.

l

_

g!

(TO FI" 78"")

MY-Cod~l

_

CD
CD

c+

i
CD

16 -CF

c+

....o
CD

N

~
W

0)

~

tj

......,

(Jee r/f. 77~)

~

.....
CD

.----+1 lies It'

2:

Co

c.,

~

G

...
...

(f(JN"9 780)

//rom F/? 59)

!

I

!jJ

rhi

Irhi

o}

rk

Z~}

8
4 .

.

(TI) ,&'/f.

....

\0

CD

c.n

w

~

H

ti3

SIP

~ l:
&l ~

J7)

~

516

z
o
~ !1
;J

o

~

-<

~

~

""t",
~""i ~(..I

-

~~:.~
,..~:t~
"I~,..~

.a

~~~;:

Q

;;o .

o

~
~

CI)

~i~o
:"j

""1'..

e

00

(/rom F/f $7)

CJI

"'I

f;3 •;..
£)

SZG

o

(Tr()m F/f-J9)
,0

B

42

AMPLIFIER
AMPLIFIER

8

4

0
0

Ti9-11b_~ ~
en

S2P
(ro F/'l J9)

AMPLIFIER

20

>
r

17CF

;

CD

c+

~

CD
CD

.......

c+

o

::0

N

e
0)

en
t:J

fo )

(Fig.36

Y 7r
x 7r

.J.~_.l

t~

(8

......,

J C _

>

lCD

t

a.

Co.

t 1"1 ,.. •

-

G

..

N
00

.

I-

I

j

z

~
8

l
~~
::>b

~

~

,.,,~:-,

~

~ G!8 ~ ~ ~I ~I~I~I
l:::3

~ ~

l:!.::J

~

l!::J

~

l!.::J'

H

0
0

~

/;or

(F~

7.'d)

I~
(X)

en

::r

CD
CD

c+

If
en
::r

~:-.!"'i

CD
CD

~

~~~~

~

CJS;e~~

............

!:l

....
=

~~s.:l..1
;t:~;::::=
~
-

'!;;""'~'"

"'-~

>

j=

-I

0
~ Z

to
(Ftg,36

~

.

f'I

tz:I

o
o

horr

"'Ii

c+

~
>
r

E

o-i
0
::0

..en
..enen
N

W

tj

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19. 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 112

,

INVENTORS

FEHAMILTON
K.KSEEBEH,Jr"j. RA.ROWLEY
E.o:J.HUGHES,Jr.
BY
~
ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949
+151JV

+SIJV

148 Sheets-Sheet 113
START

+--+-+---q-l
. . ._____D_'aill
-~o !
OJ
STOP

sI"p

(toF'.! 77a)

stall
STL

.()z

.oz

P'QC~~a' 1...

~---o old

----------------~

--v-

to ES
/

(see Fly #Oa)
INVENTORS

F.E.HAMIL TON
RRSEEBER,Jr.. R.A.ROWLEY
EoS. HUGHES,Jr.
BY
~~___

U

'ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet'l14

M
fill Out ouses

lid 117 DlJSeS
2

1- SHRl

L

cS/W
CSF 1..

AP

M

L -_ _ _ _~.

To! CI(C
L

(F/f,774.)

r-

crl/?

SHNC

j::J-J

a

0._

INVENTORS
F.£HAMILTON
RIiSEEBER.J'i R.A.RONlW
£~HtlGH£SJf'-

BY~~

07ATTORNfY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

146 Shee·ts-Sheet 115

N
1...CSI

csv
CSF

Ri"'~
/'71> F"/Y. 78eJ

" ·I
T III.

.

INVENTORS

.

F.E.HAMILTIIN
R.RSEEBER..I!!t IlAIlOWID

EA). HUGH£V,.

BY~
ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 116

(FI,. 78.1)

SCMI

(Fi 76./)PI 1..
. /21 .. -t'n; F/(!J7I1L

p.

(F/f. 780

FCS

PSI

. ,eoej _

('51
---------- i~SV

..

AP

-----,

.'

s ------;;;::;;;;;F;,:s.,.8A~ Q.~,tf),

. .

OP/C r

OP.OC

(71J .c/? 78A) £TtJ'7?f 7 8 A I .

780.' '78,tf)

.

,

j.r::::J
~8
-. -

.

ZOP.BS

C

-

.

OP.tJC
1. - - - -INVENTORS
E£/lAMllTON

R.RSEEBER.Jr.,R.A.oROWW
.

£.$.HIJGH£S,Jr.

8Y~~
ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 117

Q

·
·

r-

0

~ I01:1«

0

31

)2.0

~

I

(SF
I-~

·

II! rs:l"
~

1:9°1,~~

f-'-

lAP

~

c .... f-p'OC 1.

~
Pil.oec

~

,..

toP

I

~

n:

·

~
~

II

0oJ

~21

I

I.

0

@l

35

--

~

~

I

MJo0llox 6

Pi/ICC

~

0

33

r.~

.......,
I

t---+--,

U; 6,,0 :l

,..,

I

I

lDzl.~z~

o0
15 1
c

-"

.

~ °16°:r.
/QEC",

00 0
I~ 19 -J,...

l~
..1

)( 122 oJ

.;.

",

LjJx
I

(~(Flfl- 80e)

iC"(FRp. 78£ (BlJe);C l

~

CS[,
CSV- V

Q2

QI

~l'r<1'- 786)

I

I~)( 00:U
23

l o°· 0, 11 rl
20

.

10

'Ott

ttl fJ.. . . .

024-

-" -'"

,,"-

I'a.oc
Of? Ie

}",f\.

,..,..

~}sl

0

'OP.BS

27

-

-'" .r.

'OROC L

INVENTORS

EE.HAMILTON
RRSEE8£R,Jr., R.A.ROWLE'I
E.5, HUGHES,Ir.

8Y~
ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
F1led Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-5heet 118

R
R I (npJ. 78L'~ 2
. 1.
.1

CST
I

c.sv

CSF

.

.

INVENTOR

F.£ HAMIL TON

IUiSEEBEK,Jr., R.A.ROWLEY
E.S.HUGHES;/r.

BV~
ATTORNEV

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19. 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 119

T
T'in',J

Zl

C?--(,Flf. 78/J)

T3

T2

T!

( FI1J · T8L, lJtJej I

Z( '(FIr. eo e)

Z

,

~

,

C5h
CSv- V

r--

0:;01,0
°
I lo'a

~

10

31

0

33

l!ill

II

0

JS

CSI).....

x

'C~

c\o1

~~.
----..

~

~
,

I

~O6°:l

0000

~ S
CSF-.

,

,.----,

0.01),(
9
f.1
~

./e¥'.o-

~oee,

Ui~,o

:JJ

I

re~lq2
t. ]2«

,
P,1~

Pi/.

~

AP"

,

L-

lifO O~
15

~o,60:r
PilJ!5f

PiIICC

R.IC

~

/?JC

,

to R,
I~oc)~~ oOJ

llf ~9' Jl

OPIC
.OPBS

OP.~~

°

.r...r...

,

'--.

/t(')T~

I#},

139, .)( 21

.--

7
O_~I~
T.IC
20

12<

jlz:l

l1~j:t

~

~J

.~ ~"2. . T~'
()I?IC~

I

1

()P.8Sr-.....r...

~

/()p.oc.....

J
I

.

INVENTORS

FE-HAMILTON,
RH.SEE8EH.Jr.. RA.HOWLEY,
E.5.HUGHESJr.

BY~
ATTORNEV

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTONET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 120

u
J (~rF/Jl

[~

..-...--0

I

:J.

~ace,
to

Pi/'

AP"'l.

1Zl

Z

~SV.;,

•
00

~~

1/.3
Z( rrF'r~e)

(/2
781.. (8oe) (

,-

fO",f....

I

I?I~ f.1/0:L ~ ~/~IJM

~

~ i/~ ~I
Pi/' ICC --.

Tole

toT,
'(T.oe)
1-12,

~

lUo~ ~;~ol-

i11 ~,o oJ

lfl

lii~OJ

oOJ

I~o
x 23

{j.rc..,...~

-

IL U:2~1~

I

1<15\. .... "

~(I#u.OC
. '4
"

.~',..

'

/fJP.1C,. ,..

;:::,..

~
25"

()PtJC,

•

,..-,..
..,
I

fJPIC h
tJP.8S r..

·

~/2l-

to (/,

/-1-.11

,.. ....

~

r-

•

•

-

~

-"""ORM

..

/Op.~

....

t
I

INVENTORS
F.E HAMIL rON

R. R.st:£BER,Jr.,. R.A.ROWLEY
E.o>. HUGHES~r.

BY~
ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 121

.

v

Vi.,,.r

VI
. CI,c-/?s,

(")-(~? 78iJ)

~

•
~

:t'/OI;f~

-0

31

78£

,aote)

0

~

n(Flf.8De

:>0

3

•

~ ~-

'I

IJ-, •

It"SV'"""

.

~~

~>]l

00

j

VJ

V2

~

~

•

•

I,~
Sc
0

~OO

117°6° oJ

CS!d

-.I

.-----.

~ o.0l.0~o

I

-

9,,,,9«
L'"

T

~oce . .

I~if~l~

fo

1------1

PIL

UJ1/5:1

I

/p,l/CC

•

u.oc, rtl~7 OJ
1.OP.1C ~

A"P'

ITt I~ I-

l~~3~
~

Ii02~OJ

IL 1~1~

.r.v'

'"'''''

•
/.,.7\..rv.-.

~V.OCl.JV'1·
-

I

I

.....

_LI Vole .........

to II...

l.(i2~~

·

,...,..

I-U:Op.K:' ~
~

I

·

.r.r.

1

tm

/1-1-$ to 1/,

Wl l2&l

JVi

.--

IIIC"-'\

•

I

"".!S'~
1..
°
2S

J

Ol? 85'"'

tta
_15h_

•

L/OP.«'..,n
"-'

INVENTORS

F£.HAM'LTON
R.R5E£B£R.J~ R.A.ROWUY
c.S HUGH£S#r.
8Y~

(f 0"

ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed" Jan. 19. 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 122

w
Pit IC

(Fi§.80Q)
~'/. tJC ~ P;/' OC

"

Pi/'
I

oce

Ft}:1JLJ" I

FC..r

AEIl1.
(Fn""

Fi!/7It;·
STRIJI

INVENTORS
FoE-HAMILTON
R.R.S££B£R,Jr., R.A.ROWLEY
£.S.HUGH£S~f:

BY~
ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET·AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
'Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 123

A 1..
.v;.-; I'lllt

~Jcp)

(IC"/~$)C)

.

INVENTORS

F.E.HAMIL TON

R.NSE£BER~r., R.A.ROWLEY

£.S.lIllGHES,Jr.

8Y~

ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ETAL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19. 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 124

{from

FL,. /4}}

rAP

J

. BPl..·

r;:::;;::;:;::t-:::"I

~/TD

F/?..s. 78D.I.Itf)

1;1, L
(F/t/. 7~-.)

I

a21..

1121..

INVENTORS

F.E.HAMILTON

H.N.5E£BER~r:,

RA.RtJWIJ)
E:S.NUGHE5,Fr.

8Y~
.

ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

Ace Code

l48 Shee.s-Sheet 125

hlk

)'

OP.OC

()

.0

1.

"[(/h1h1~?:iJ

OPIC
()

~ (?n~)

Jo"nm ~If 11.

OP.BSy;

r

() 1.

F'/?-?Be

71J

n,

APZ

78c)( ~

';f~~

Flf.

i'l'81f)

I

.....

tFzl
----

lJ:ilJ:11
(/h1 I11F/f ?Be)

0

ACCL
I

5HlJ..e

Ie

r~ °6 °!1

S

~

°

3

If;iU1

.....

L.v

(~rtI

I(,CC 1. 10

"'.L
-- . . . . . . .

~--F/f· 7 /£)

r--,

1013°1)::1

£1..

r.0oyo
tr1

l~
11

.~J1

.~4JI ~i~:
10:

F~

~

.....

..-.-

Let! 0,/ r- lll! °'5° ~I
X

D"!i:;9. 7/e)

rn

18
_
01 U!0ol

17

J(.

Al1'C~I
1....'"'

UI
J(

( hm

~'" "fr' ....

.

0
210 1

"

~~;

X

~~I:1
I

0

~)( °26~:1

CYiC,:!

~/91
............
23

t! ~7 :1
I

i~~

U!00:L

(-STII: °IJ9~

(7'tI /

7,

r7/~ U
')~.J

wJc1..
(TO
R.

29

-...

)( 30

9.

I

..--

~;,rj/~

.

0:l.

o o.
"7191~ 33

~I

o
I (J(

1l100j
x
n.

'1.

AG

2

0 '2

..

I.

JO 0_0
134
~

r--'

t! ~!:I-

~6~01~j~
~
20 Ie
~

I

1:2:1~ ~~

b1 1}&r1
28

I

l J}jf
-

lJtIOJ2L~~

'r-INVENTO RS
.
F. [.HAMIL TON
RR.SEEBEK.Jr., RA. ROWLEY
E.s./fUGHES.Jr.
8Y~
ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

.F. E. HAMILTON ETAL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19. 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 126

DVC
)

/

ORBS

OP.OC

. If/rom

DIV. CODE

F/, 78c)

z.
/70 Flf. '78C)

En/<. L
?.Tr~F'f'77. I

(/rom

F/f 78a.)

~--~~::::~~====~==~~~--~::~IN~VENTORS
F.£HAMILTON
HN.SEEBER,Jr.,RA.ROWlEY'
ES.HlJGHES,Jr.
8Y~
v ~TiORNEY-

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949
148 Sheets-Sheet 127

pt/lcr

OC-[s

to

Int

(fig.57)

8e

--- - - ---- --- - ----------- ----------- --OPSN

fROM
CPlRATIONAL
SIGN
COOl
CIRCUIT"
(fig.80)

INVENTORS

F.E. HAMIL TON
R.R.SEEBER.Jr.,HA.ROWLEY
£.5. HUGHE5.Jr.
BY~

(T'ATTORNEY

ApriJ 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19. 1949
148 Sheets-Sheet 128

AP BP
z
z

~~

MYC
OPOCS

. (F/?- "'lie)

[Ilk

.OP 8S 1.

L
(F/p.774../

1..
(Flf. 78,,-)

(F"/t/ 78c) .

L-----~~==~~==~~==~~----==~I~N~VENTORS
F.E.HAMIL TON
i 9 _7 8M R.H.S££8£R,J'l.t:::!lf~%

l-

BY ~./._.
lf~ A'T'TORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 129

(I) 2-Jet'~AM
(2)16 -4Cr-..~ AOR -18-4 ct'
~~~ ~'(4) Artiticol (lilt of setpJellce

·t

(J)J -J CI' - f l

AI+ AOP ot Jf,Sl (Fig. .5O}-----,

5f

(J)Sf(//tKey SKJ-IlZ-S. "R J/9f/al-IOZ
from·
(1)IO-.5CF- ,1/-IO-.5eF
COhlhllJtotor·

(6)!3N

(9)28-jCF-A'/iiA'N-22-.5C
•

.kf/INf%t'otr'iu{~":lt J/~fl(Jls

L..(d')

Moyt' relays

J W

(lO)lole ..delay .....r..
(fl) t.'(4,IJ,;I'O

(12)S

. .
tronSh1ISSl0n

delay-JCt'

fUms delay

STROII--- (1.3) 12-4CF

I

25mJ

dtlay

STROll..
(14)

CAIH-28-4CF

t dr(J~ I

9Z
IO~..r: '''; stops STn si,nal
l~W. restum I

I

L+',+W-I1Jftll.9J1'·
AP~fjW

I

---··+L+-1-6W.-.I-I1-~ /9 /If L.fII' .

AP----r--~

drops D' J/lno/
'--18W+"~·s/~ntt/
f
httlts----.-,
IIZ-+ a/ slf;nal-2(jZ (fJa)OiertIti(JII(J/Sipt'1b tiKIe Cin:uits(rigs.IIJR
(15J;j171ot UhilJJt/ecton trtt.J (/ipJl toJl)
Shiff co~ circuits (lip. Oltf6J)
(11)
•

(16)
APr+ f~A-SCH JiqRal

. he;'J'

) No Op Si,n.al~fJNO
~
Ink, f)eIOY(1if.78~I"aN(jY-18M

(PI Plromid.s (fi9- .5.9)

(19)

9X I

(18 :5Tk02 siqnal
~AP
(l 9Di2S tf {)i'J (in 5CP)
OCOI1

211 CondiliOl1s15NO
OCO : PS signals SPH:;" si9nalJ(1APpJlset)dt) I

(If) JI

OC01--12-l2a . Of

f}"r

(See fif. 79bb)

I

PRES{J PRES 7-+16 -160 +-r--+---------'
1[IS8 ICIS 7~J2-Jl(J.
(22)OCJ7.rigllal-------....,

(SeeJI)

L-25-2CP-21-1CP

t

blocKs Sf". AE

'J)PHll-+JO-JCP
r--------------.--------~

blocks AT and STR Sllmls
___

___

-.= 7 Sa.

_____

T-

.J

==:!-

-----'

~'haM

condifions ll-Jc.~

___

-

n) _
(.'JLI

.

•

INVENTORS
EEHAMILTON

RR.S££B£R.Jr., RA.ROWLEY
ES.HU6H£5,Jr.

BY

~

UUATrORNEY

,

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 130

-I

1JO-JCP (ZJ)

(ll)OCS1
SiftKIl

t

29-JCP

L

inJCP

l4d4

(Jf)

(l4a) 7-2CP fumedbJ fSR slinal

4/J;/cp-rorwant Si!hal (B)
forward signal delay~
(24/)) '-+-J"-2CP-29j2CP

AP rtsefs

4M~r~~~~~»1Ja~n

.

_-.J

AP---.-.. J/-2CP
L __-4 f(stores 25-2CP(22)

turns

(24b)

22!'CP ... ~tsetJ21 AP

Canal Slfnfll

~21-1CP

I

14-ICP~

.

rl

£~API fresets

Entry si~n(J1 OuttolS1

J2J/CP

'S

---

AP

L-LI·-f·~I==~====~~

entry from

Ovt bus-set 1 to,rE..:::.,;J1'----J'---__

ltrlCP
.4P.£!KU}-

fJ,ICP
A/oYI

(ljJ
19-:-fCP
AP "Jets I I

sifj1/(J15MS1•

Bp.rtstt.s

Sf

s~9nal

flSlts

lj-ICP
I

1

-+.rlsets l/,'CP(22)

1.-

At Jif}nlll

~--------~--------~

(17) 20t~Cf (F/j.1SIJ)
Al DtJ(JyCO#lnter~
All signal

rtsttJ
(! 4) ____
___
_ f9W
L....:....,
INVENTORS

F.E. HAMIL TON
fl. RSEEBER.Jr.. RA.ROWlEY
E.5. HUGHES.Jr.

BV

~--'-/A....~_

OCl"ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148

-~-

-

Shee~s-Sheet

-(21C:"tiRuedjr-

(lfemldYfFlj.7Ibb)
L--_---,uponllwreseffiM "'1BW-IBI1W

~~

~M22-.5(7 (i~):

.J1,-6Cr, 12'i2~-7Cf6-8g

.I.,%M(I)

dropped

(29)

'otSCf
%1(1)
drops

(JI)

27-5Cf'

reset
M(20-'1.f-"SWslgnal
stops
'fPS si/nals
restoltd
in5CP

oCo

(1+)

29-JCP

(2J)

(Su itemJ9)

.

dropped

SE Dell l'CF
(30) S[bSi9f1t11

'SgZ

J

19 W (tstoring (ll)

Alsijnal (lJ)

,(J,%4,A'~if(l(JrfIV

131

by AP

ICIS7
·-32-32a----I
(20)
Ie}7 sifnal ....20-JCP
• 24.-24 .of JCP~
RbL7 ~iqna}
.. 14 14alnJCP
t
f6-JCP-ESI foIn Signal

J

I

(JZ)ll-JCP-/l-.JCP---.J
t
(See2J)
TRS 7 signal
~

translliisslon from

ESlto In bus-set 7
and from there fo
nOlfopen 8sirJe(6)
Of

TR7 delay counter
in4CP
I
~storeJ

Sf Sef/ slfIuence

storaqe.

pulse TRO 7-~~ ....._ _ _
ES_7_to_L_n_s....:,'I"_'II_a/_e._'II_d_----I.

(JJJreset delay-4Cp(JJ) rL----IClC Si9n"I-+-~Clcra.1-4CF
ROl#J
~

~

restores Jo-rJCP (item2J)

AT

_l

pilot Signals

.

+

STH

_~_.

16-4C"---80R

(JeeS)

__ ,_,_
INVENTORS

_
F.£. HAMILTON
R.(?SC£8£R.Jr., R.A.ROWLE.Y
E.S. HIIGH£S,J1:

BV

~y

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 132

r

-

-~-

AT Ji1nal

STR plot SlIM/

(3J)

I

(3J)

L!...!r(,~'SIi.~i7n.~:f~ _ _-,

l (t5a)
IOZ

(J5)

IlL~STR comhlutator .....

(J7) J-Jcr

I

i------I

dropsA'l(J)
picks fIfJ Yl

. (38)

reevrns /6- 4i:p

siqnal

(.1J

I

..---_ _ _ _--11

•

(s) -

rtturn" If-SCF L
'J

2-2CF

~

(35)

Y/-IO-JCF(2J)

r1turns 28-5CF-Y2, YN-22-';CF

y2: I

(.9)

Lafe"'de/OY-+~
4Y~ ytf. Yd

ATdelaycounter

~

,./'rtn;,.BOn
,

returns 2-5 CF

~)

(J6 a

t-o

+

13M dl'lJfJ
AMellt'9Jlert
.

(28)

!

ATOsI911t11-restlJr~s 21A(.ke ifem21}
(.19) s tr4bSII11ssiOlJ dthy counf~r (u)

.

+

STRDlS

L2Z-4CF(SeeIJ)

STR02

f

14W-I8-(Iaw

t

(27)

-.r15W1l'esto"s 25W~I.J1I
---i
AP--16 W
17W drops·a"Si,ofl/

AP

: r'; 1

1],("

L

dro

'oS

.~

!

'Sets 2Q-.4CF+/3J.

I

rtstores 28 W

iSCM Sifh41

I

19W.

Lo
sil/hal

resto,",s 21L-/JI-ldZ (S~e 26-1)

toP
spot

SlfJlItII

I.

_

J

g

_7Cd
-.J. _

INVENTORS
FE. HAMILTON

R.R.sUB.ER"Jr., R.A.l«JWUY
. £.5.HUGHES.Jr.

BY ~J.L..
ulTrORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19. 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 133

(2t) PS Si,nal
(2~
f-(2iiiJ---~ P-f()P-2J~PISlillfLl-PIL. OC SIfm/I--PbO(OC)--------i

1
I'
I. !

p

I OC sf~p

restores 2JP

I

__

I

I

'---- 24P----J

2ft}.

OP.OCS/f1nal•

I

"

{NO--OP.BS J/"al

7'

ACC.C
MYC
O~

I
I
I

I

-

OPOCsignlll--':""-

•

'~slores Z/II

'I -i-toQs/?nal
:
'

I

:fcC
Dye

,

(24R) lll?- 'JR~Rf si91Kll-PIL.1JC signal-RIJO(OC}'------t
'Slo",lJR
L-24R·
.'

, :

!

R
: oe
~fep

R~eJ/.,nal

lIT"
I

..

~NO-OP'8SSlgna/

OP. OC si§na/~ :fcC
bYC

I

I

PdC SljnaJ

,

' .

-f--toPJ1fntl1
L..-..:...::ft.='SftJr...::....:.1.::.,.'J..........,111=--_ _ _ _ _ _ _--'
(20Q) llQ-.2Jo-Q/ si;nal-PILOCSipl--QbO(OCl-'-----I
Q
'~JfOm 2JQ I
• 14Q~
I oestep
]21R II
Q~C JifJlJal
[NO-OP.BS S/f1Kl1

I
I

.

-1. ___ toR

L...-.L.l<.K.L.l::to.u~e:.:.s.....o!2:.LI..!....T_ _ _ _ _ _ _____J

16R-1daR-J2 R-FR Sigml-16L r+iZ'l' ~i9n,~1"st0t,'P JOZ
J

{l6!}

I.o~ SI9.tllfJt S /t1f. '.1-conditions NO-NO OjJsI1nal-OPOO---OP2t(ASide)
.

L....-_ _ __ "

,,I T

(l~T) 127-23[- T:Sifnlll-PILtXSI9flal-T/J()(Oc)

ItKs!ep

I

t

"Slo"J2..
j2.IY·"

'.

24T II
. I
{
TOe S/9nal
NO--OP.BSSignlll
OP. OC slqndl- :fcC

rtsrO"S llU
bYC
'
i ---to T(l6V) 22Y-1Jr- UL sifnal--PIl, OCJi?IKlI--U/JO(OC)-----I
I

I·

U

i Qe step
I
t

I

~ fOres

r
I

i-~~--rou~

zv
I

II

• 14:U ..
UOC si9nfl/
OP. OC signfl/

r-~n=s~~O'~~=~~IV~________________J

:
. (16V) llV-2JV-VIJ/"qnal~PILOCsif}nal--VbO(O()----I
,
21 V
I
: V
rtsfo/tS 1. . V I
IOCsfep
. 21W- .
voe sifJnf1l-r~stort'sIlW(s~/Jtl}

t

,

I
J___ to V ~ restored by AP pulse

I
I

1Jfc
Dve

.

I

I

[NO-OP.BS si/nfll
C

I

•

.

•

rFC SI!"af+J

c

JOl-drops .01 Si!nfll {£6-1}
INVENTORS

F.E. HAMILTON
RR.S£E8t:J1,Jr.; RA.ROWLEY
E.S.HUGH£S,Jr.
BY ~~~
v ~TroRNEY

'{'TO F/f.s'
21,2"2.j

Int toES

~ to lS

~;'1.

-(..r~e F/PS.21'22)

~

1.

~

I-'

CD

2:

Q.

OClilt

At

I

c...

g:

!'J

....CD

.

I-'

!

N

(0

~

en
w

H

P3

"11

D

f11

~

»

[q •

~ ::t

[Il

~

01

-<

~

?II

Ci)

~
~
~~:-.,-

~<"'!"iz

~~~~
;;I::~:::.-"'"

c:>i~'-O

t~~~
:-s""~

~

j=

~
~

d

Q

)0

z

~ ~

.i-j 9_

F= r

ElD a.. se

E

;~
I-'

1 CP

CD
CD

Pille

c+

t

;CD

N

(7)
W

0)

c+

(7)

I-'

t:J

VI

of>,

April 28, 1953

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

2,636,672

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949
146 Sheets-Sheet 135

1
·1
I

I

1

1
1

1

I

1
I

1

"I

~I
'->1
~I

1
1
1
I

1
I

1
1
1

INVENTORS

£E.HAMILTON

RHSEEBEH.JSH.A.ROWL£Y
E.~.HtJGH£SJr.

8Y~

U-,FATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIYE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19, 1949
148 Sheets-Sheet 136
\

( <>(]r
~ ~)( ~
-

~

'1~

~.

-

--rt:""-

~tL., ~

~

~~{J

0 .....

~l
~ ~

0

~.

~)'i ~
~ )..~

~
~.

rfi1

~ ~
~x:

0::!t

o~.

~

.

.~

r-f~·~

.--~

0

L.,

...,J(

~

~

"....

- -

k1~1-

a...-....;;;.

L......-;;,

-

~1c ~~~

\\I

~,
q,;

~

~.

~~

L~

10'

10

>.;;

~

"'is

~

~

~II

:0-

~

o~

~

~~~~
. 'I-

....

II)

0--

~r-

.

~

~

0

6
II

l~llf
~olN-

:o:-e
o~

(

~r
~

0

lo~,
L...--....J

II

-"

.~

"~~~
'"

~

~ [

~

~ ~

~

~

19

0

~~ ~I

o~

~

0
I

~ ~1lI

~.

o~

r~~
~
0

I$l
~
~
........

{fa'to-"

to3

~

~

~

"
..
~cD

~

-'"

'-~

H

4-

\,.J
I::)

~

I

0
[(]

~~~o~

~

fO:'1

M

In

~j.;i'

0

~

o'Q.

°
~

......
~

"'-~ - ...

__ 1..._

~-

~

·L

.~
0

t-::-:-"

o~

~~
~

~
I':
__ leo-.

~
I;:;t..;;;

~
o~
0

tA

~

~

1\

'~

0

II')~

'"'\
.,q

g

D

I~
~

~~
~tt)
~.

~

0

's:

~. ~
~

0~

~

o..~

~, ~\t ~~.

~

~ f-

~

~

~~

I~

~

°~'Is

~

rai"

I~ ~

~

~

~~Lti

--1...--

!NV ENTORS

EE. IfAMILTrJN

R.R.SEfBERJr..IlA.ROWLEY
£.S.HU6Hfs,fr.

8Y~

QTl"ATTORNEY·

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E.-HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

L

'----

148 Sheets-Sheet 137

- -1
I

I
I

I

I
I . .

L___ _

I'
I
I

I _______
0
L
..I:
INVENTORS

F.£HAMIl TON

N.1lS£lBER.Jr., HA.RDWLLY

CS.HIJ6HESJr.

BY~y

April 28, t 953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sheets-Sheet 138

~~
,,~

INVENTORS

FE HAMILTON

IlRSEEBER,Jr., RA.I?OWLEY
ES.HUGHES,Jr.

BV ~.AO~J...A......-.
@'ATTOR"NEY

April 28, 1953

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

2,636,672

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19. 1949
148 Shee~s-Sheet 139

.

()C-ES

,I "--y-o......,.......,,..............---.--..--,--,-.,-,, "T""-r-..--r--r-r--r--:-1

I

I .1, I I
,
I
I

I

I

I

':

I

I

I

I

I

I
I
,
It,

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

,

I

I , ,,
I

P.I/,.OT,
IIIYIT.I
, , I
I

I

I

I
,

I I I
tfCP I(Fig. HOe)
:

•

I,

II

,

1

OCOI

I

I

IC/SI

I

I

,

Ie

I

I
I

.'

t#

Jilt
lRLJ'''''''F&..rr)

IH{L..JIV"

1

I
I

I

I

I
I

,I

,I
I

'I

I

:

:

:

;

I

I

I

I

II
~

,

II :'
I

,
I

,

I

I

:

I

:

I

I

I

I
I
I

t

PI(..fiT I UNIT
8
i
I

•

I

;

•

I

I

I

I

~ : : I : : : : : :

of CP (Fig.80ej

:

,
I

I

l

I

,i ·

I

ICQ8

I~-+-+-+4-+-4--+-+--I-+-+-+-!-~~
Y.

Com",ufator Signals
(F~J. ?lie "Co 78.i .·J~e ~/,. 8oe)

INVENTORS

F.E-HAMIL TON
RIlS£IBER,Jr.. R.A./iOWl£Y
C.s. HUGHC5.Jr.
BY~
CTI'ATTORNEY

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL
SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR

Filed Jan. 19, 1949

148 Sbeets-Sheet 140

I 'Bacle

: ~.&"/?.S.2

~
.CD

~11111

e.~

..

N

QI)

.co
.-

$

Clutch Control CJ

~


~

III

III

~

~

• ,. ,. .
III

~

;J
0
z
H

Back Signal Conlrol C13

(')
(')

Stgn Hold

C6

Emitter

EM

~

8

~ ~
~

7

III 1111

..

5

6

III

,. ,.
4

.1

,. III,
2

~~ ~

s
1111

9
~

~.

~

I

~,,~

0

::0

I:T

CD
CD

.01>-

PS~'1C/l

~

r>

1»
W

Ill'

~'I<

azF

.- g
CD
CD

!"1
.~

: '1"

="

rr1

•

G')

t:j

'I

/. It...,

,

(,1

(.£

(.~

f./U" 1

It

.........,
0.

II

Co.

g
~---.()..,If09

.,"-----CHKHJ
,_--..()-jH)1

ilt---<)-4~ be",

Itf) 1/llttltJ

_---<:)-4/-04

blip

'~---<)o,1-() ~

'H----Q-,I/-O I

Back
;
F(JI'ward

IU4·
rr-:.r-n
:l. __ JJ

Sigllal

Feed

tit/

( Lille

n---r,

'(Jti~

II

,c/f291

I,

II. ... _...JJ

f

ISTD

of,,,,

1

120 I 122
/Itt
126
(F'lf. . - - -

R2,
,
I

fi/~Lr

PRe

476)

If~-·

tr,

5TPS

flu.

LSM

~

F/?

87.6)

a)
~

-<

~

~

ell

~~~~

(I)

.

III

.~~~~50;
as;·:to

;t~~~ .
~ f50 V
" ~:u

Rt

~.
.

'.

I

n"

I

"rr't:..:.:_~!~r~:.:....'---iH

.. -_ _ _ _

~

I

r "1rll l
l

."

~ ~

~ :I
(') >

S SP t',J~~ F/,-.874J

/'~ fIJO!,.l'f!.!1', ~!f/!!.1)

l"l

~

f(')

0~

o
~

r

z
~ ~
~
o

>-

.. E
PHI PMI

PM

A

CD
CD

c+

i

0..

........

~~~~~~~~==JL--:JL--L---1---1-~~-

>-i

:::r £

L ~~

______________

~
~

J
.~14
100
~ __

I IIU4 II1(23
I f I2.S0NM
R£5ISTORRI3

STO

en

w
~

STPlllllIlt

lil

-'_ 1 0 - - - _

~

U)

H

rr--I-'j

f1a
f@
STSP

-1m

(JU

N

!IJ

....<0
....
<0

II
II
II. __ JI

CI:I

.t2:

CD

'-IV

CD

c+

I-'

N

~

$I)

....
0')

N

April 28, 1953

2,636,672

F. E. HAMILTON ET AL

SELECTIVE SEQUENCE ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Filed Jan. 19. 1949
148 Sheets-5heet 145
I

...Q

r
rf]

.

,

r--

•

....... :

J=l/

!L__ J

·91

r-'

:Nl
.. L__ J

~

r-i
I .... '

f'

"_-I

t:,,

'f
~

,,,

'f

~

!

,
,,I
,,
,,
I
,:

.

,r-,

:~:

L.._J

<:.

C\lt

J

,

:.

'f

r--"
, ,

t

,' .....,

r--1
. -.'!L..!NI
__ .J
t

,

,,
.!',
,
..

t
'f

.

~i"":

L __ .J

~,

,,,
,1

,-,
, ,
:~:

,,

, J

~

"1..,1

.. :
~--

r---.
:t'\I!
I __ J

'I:s-->!.
,.-

.--,

In

....

'---"

.,,..-- ...,,
' .......'

0-

""

,,

,,,
,,,

,,...-,'

,

t

000.

'O"lt lt
'-Iltlt
OI)"'lt

,
1
,,
,

..!" __J
T ,,

~

.....1.....---<0-,,;.

....._ - - - '

-"'_--'

i-~,

!fJl:

~

L __ ..I

'0

..'"
INVENTORS

.
F.E.HAMILTON
R.H.SEEBEH.Jr..IlA.HOWLEV
£.5. HUGHES,Jr.
BY ~ .tt
(To ~TTORNEY

..,
....CD....

UNIT 612

>

1
.00....

Q.

Co.

g

r

r--'

,.-100,.. L. __ .J

,.zoo.'-L_J
r---l

....

psp
610

U)

st(Jrll~(!

t 0

S(!(JiJence st""Q~e CtJl I

Pyrtlllfiti

.~.
~. a!5.
.
Nmif.

800
40 0
20 0
10 0
ell/. 1 2

00
0 '0
81
0 0
0 0

2

~

....
,.

o~

::II

Z
1"1
0(

6fJ

f'l

PSP

_~

~

.~

"

~-

... ~~
.~,~~I"I

~:a..~z
...... --1
~~~O
;::;~;:::::II

$II~~III

~~~

t

tIll

A'- __ oJ~ - - -

:PSG
61.1

+150V

000
o 0 81

lINIT61J

t __t

002
o 0 81

81

PSOP

I

--

,. -

-

:~_ --tr

--

PSG}
614'

- - ,,!

lINIT614

I

PL UGGABL£

r

~PSG

PSG.'
617

"618

lINIT617

- -

{l __ -,t'.PSG
619

IINIT618

STORAGE

r~.a B.

619

tPSPt
__ : '

L. _ . J

I

£J

IINir619

:-'1
(II
-

~ >
J:
:t

o

l'l

~ ~
z

00
;iJ

0

:z:

H

0

(J

r--~' ~Z 1,31~/2 ~ ..,~1 ~/lr ___ ~t 1'2~

L __ J

['1

1920

I

118
tPSP~

617

H

;j

OO~
'81

tLtrf2

Psp

Q

o 0
o 0

to

o 0

19 20
PSOP 7

!
>i

o 0

80
40
2.0

OOR
00

~

10
o 0
1
19 ZO
PSOP4

o 0

80
40
20
10
I

4
~ " 6 /PSP~~'
~

~~_":.'f

r'l

'

1

o 0
~~,

19 20
PSOP 5"

OI~

-<

80
40

o 0

80
40
20

10 0 0
1 19 20
PSOP .J

2 18 19 ZO
PSOP 1

A(J/'8sid~fQ.K.T(ld/ Pos

r

o 0

'80
40
20

Plu ~~Q"It'

q)

en
w

....

XZ",.Y2[] r~
~

N

o

i!=

....

~

~

CD
CD

c+

~
;:.CD

CD

c+

......

""

0>

~
)0

r

~

0

~

N

enW
en
~

t:j

----------------------------------------~-------------------------------------------------fr,IJ,S7I?S-CIP.J

T..:..=J-

80

0

40

0·t1f

2~
I·

_

:3 0 _.c.tl

.

I

',;lI?S-6IPI
80

0

0

·40

1"°
10

Cdl

20

')(l7RS - GOP S

~

"/0

o-J~

40

I I
D-j
I
0211

o--r o..t o-..J

oJ oJ oJ

2·

'~RS-6'IIP 7 MI?S-GtJP8~

>

"'IJ
~

.....
CD

1

Ilo

c..

g

80

~~

80

40

oJO..

J

40

...

2.0

.....

N

..GO

U)

(0

~

en

w

!
C'l

>-:J

H

1"'(15
80
40

[ij
:'1
fq (I'J

I .

£)

•

~ J:
z »
&l ~

2

~

!:j

0

C'l

;a z
0

(Re: Section 2~ Case I)

=

-<

71?S -GOP 7

?tI

PflS

71?S-60PP
/'0$

"(lS

!"1
C/l

0

0

80

"'8 0

0

0

-10

., 0

~

40

1: -

",,<'I:-.,z

~tb""~
::t.~::a:z
~~»

• Q\<::\

~a

~~;:::a
t!r-,
~(/I

:os"<:~

20
fO
Col 1

0
0

0
0

~

~. ~

7RS-GOP 8

80

,."

z

H
C'l

fig-gO

.....
,I:.
Q

-:J
0
::>J

:>"
CD

·f ..wenen
N

:>"
CD

s::

r

~ ~

()

;
2 3 4

f11
X

o

....
~

1

:rt

ad
;J z

00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
0000000000000000000
000000000000000000

"

ClI.

~

9RS-GOPP

7RS-GOPP

""
~

en
w

()

col

~ ~

-

~

)10

r

~

>
o-,J

~

N

h

("

41
c+

("

CD

....

A

(Xl

w

~

tj

2,636,672

Patented Apr. 28, 1953

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE
2;636,672

SELECTIVE; SEQUENCE . ELEC.TRONIC
CALCULATOR..
Francis. E; Hamilt'on,.Endicott~ Robert R. Seeber,
.Jr., S,carsdale, Russell A. Rowley, Binghamton,.
and Ernest S. Hughes, Jr;, Vestal, N. Y;, assignors to' InternllitionaI Business Machines
Corporation, New:: York, N. YA," iii· corporation
of-New,York
Application January 19, 1949; SerialNo. 71,642
110: Claims;

(CI •. 235-6.1) .

.. This invention relates to a computing apparatuS', particularly one of tbe sutJer.calculator

dass, and. more particularly one which is directed
byprogram.means.
.
A programmed super-calculator has been. dis";
closed in application Serllli No. 5'76,892 of
C; D: Lakeet aI., filed: February 8, 1945" now Patent No. 2,616,626.
The generAl objective of the invention is the
provision of a calculator which is. superior to the
calculator disclosed in the above identified application as well as to other' calculators in many
respectS', including speed, flexibilitY,memory and
productive capacity, and programming ability;
An outstanding object of the inv.ention is to
provide a calCulator including units which. perform their internal operations independently but
are. tied together externally by interchange of
electric Signals. According to the invention calculator elements, are broUght into operation cpnc)lrrently or successively and by. signal cross~ talk
among the elements arrived without collisions at
desired' calculation destinations.
The invention provides for interchange of signals among memory units, sequence means, and
calculation units to control the transfer of data
from memory to calculator units, performance
of' calculations and transmission of calculated
results to memory in a directed interlocked manner. Accor:ding to the invention, operations of
calculator: units may overlap and yet be directed
to desired intersecting ends by signal cross-talk
among the units.,
According to, the invention, cycles of operations
involving transfer. of data from memory to cal"
cnlatfon_ units., perform.ance of c.alcula.tfons on
received data and transmission of results to.
memory are· not carried. out in. fixed cycIfc times
but. a.re e1fe.cted· in sequence runs of variable
durations, determined by signal cr:oss~talk among
the calcwator units.,
The invention provides machine sequencing
means. having sllccessi ve .runs,. producing in each
run signals to initiate macbine operations and
which. may begin a new run. before all the opera.tions, initiated. in. tbe previous run are completed. In particular, the invention,provides for
selection of memory units to read out data befor,e calculations. on data. previously received
framrnemory have been completed or before the
results of these calculations have been transmitted, to memory. The .invention also provides for
e'ntries' at dai;afIom, selected memOl:y units, into
a calcuLator section to. be. manIa, before. thecalC.uIll-tel: ttansmits, the,. results, Qf calculations OU
previously entered data to memory units or while

li:

10:

15

20

25

30

3Ir

40'

45

50

55

such transmission is: taking place. 'With respect
to any memory unit selected to send data to the,
ca.lculator section and to receive the result· of
the calculation, the invention provides fora sig'"
nal interlock to indicate when the unit has completed reading out its data and to then allow
the unit to be conditioned'to receive data.
According to the invention, data may be en~
tered into a calculator section and a calculation performed thereon while the result of a
previous calculation is still in the calculator section or before or during th'e transmission to a receiving unit of the result of the previous calculation.
The invention provides for automatic signal'
control of single~timed' electrical transfer of data
between calculator units.
The invention also provides. for an autcmatic
resetting of a data receiving unit as an accompaniment to application of new data to said unit.
Stated' otherwise, each time en~ry' into a unit is
called for, the unit will be cleared for reception
of the new data as a result of Teceiving a resE't
signal either simultaneously or just beforeLhe
entry signal is applied to the unit, and automatic
sequencing of the reset and entry signals w~li
occur.
Another outstanding object of the invention Is
the provi'sion of a program means for a calculator apparatus which is more fiexible and selective and of greater capaCity than previous
program means.
The invention provides for the programming
of the program mefllns, itself. More' specifically,
the derivation of program data from a source
may be. programmed by means controlled by
other program data. According to the invention, the program data. may be obtained from
difierent sources and the application of program
data from one source ~o a progra~ing device
may be programmed by and according to program data in a;nother source. Further, the invention provides for program means to receive
program data and to control according to an:.
item or items of the program data the selection
of. future program data from the same or another source. Stated differently, certain program
devices have program data applied thereto to determine calculation programs and other program
devices have program dat'a applied thereto to select subsequent program data to be applied to
the, program devices.
Still another outstandiI;lK feature of. the invention is. the computation of sequence data. According to the invention, the progtam data are
numbers whi'ch can be modified, enter into cal-

2,686,672

3
r,ll' ation<;

4

ann. bl" (leri"ed from I"alcnJatlng means.
lator unit or the MD unit. All results obtained
T11e nrop-ram (lflta are arranp-ed in sets of inby the MD unit and the accumulator unit are
str1Jctions for se1er.tinn of l""'emor'r pnits to send
sent to the denominational shift unit and after
o"t nata, to rpcehTe data. of calculator units to
being shifted a desired number of places to the
perform calcuJatlon<;. selection of channels of 5 right or to the left are sent to selected electronic
commnnicatil"n betwpen meJ1"lorv units anti the
storage units. The results may then be transcalculator ser.tion. selpction of operatinnal signs
mitted from the electronic storage units to sefor nnmerical nat<'!, to he m~M. in calculj\tions. selected memory units by way of eight selective
le"t1on of amounts and direl"tfons of coJumn_channels called In bus-sets. The electronic storshH'f:imo: of results t.o be effected bv a coll1mn- 10 age units may be called rapid transit data memshifting unit. and of t.he source for the next set
ory units since numbers may be entered therein
of program data. The invention nrovMes for
at the speed of operation of electronic elements
com1'\utRtion~ of any one or more of these proand read out therefrom in a similar way. Siggram Instructions.
nals for controlling entries and transmissions
An obied of t.he invention is the,..rovislon of 15 from the eight electronic storage units are promefl.ns for l'hift.ln!! the colnmn9.l' relation of a
vided by eight associated pilot units which are
number being sent from one unit to another
composed of electronic circuits. The pilot units
through a number ofcohlmns ~I"'ected bv nroand other parts of the machine are sequenced
gram data. Further, thfl invention provll'les a
by a main commutator. Associated with the
column shift means which may shift a number 20 main commutator is a control frame for producto the right or to the left as directed by program
ing delayed control signals and performing other
instructions.
operations in a sequence determined by signals
Among manv other obiects of the invention
from the main commutator. Also associated
are: the provision of means to dire~t entries of
with the main commutator are calculation condata from memory units to a calculator sec- 25 trol commutators. These are the ACC.C 'comtionand to produce an entry comnletion signal
mutator controlling the accumUlator, the MYC
commutator controlling the MD unit to carry
which notifies seqUencing means that it may proceed tiD initiate subsenuent entries; the proviout a multiplication, the DVC 'commutator consian of means for directing transmission of data
trolling the MD unit to perform a dividing operto memory units and prortuction ofa signal noti- 30 ation, and the NO commutator which is used in
fYing the seauencing means that transmissions
skipping operations when no calculation is
have beencomnleted and that it may proceed to
called for in a sequence run.
initiate subseauent transmissions; the provision
Each number entering into a calculation is
of multiple program units for alternately reaccompanied bya sign and when the number is
ceiving program data and alternately coacting 35 applied to a calculator unit an operational sign
with the sequencing means in operating the calis also applied to the unit. The operational
culator apparatus through the programs defined
sign determines whether the number sign is to
by the program data; the prOvision of means
remain the same for the calculation or is to be
for directing data to be read out of record mainverted to the opposite sign or is to be ig. terial 'and moving or not moving the record ma- 40 noredand the number treated as an absolute
terIaI after data have been read out in accordpositive or negative quantity. The operational
Sign is sent to the calculator section 'from an
ance with the conditionin~ of move 'circuits for
response or reJection of move signals; the prooperational sign commutator sequenced by the
vision of signals from memory units notifying
main commutator.
the sequencing means that they are ready to
Memory units include 150 relay storage units
send forth or to receive data; and the provision 45 which have relay input and output gates through
of recording means controlled by program data
which data may be sent into or out of the reto record data after transmission of data to
lay storage units. There are dial storage units
memory units which read out their data to the
which may be manually set and which may send
recording means.
out data when relay output gates are closed.
Other objects of the invention will be made 50 Pluggable storage units also may read out numclear in the general and detailed descriptions of
bers to the selected Out bus-sets when related
the machine and be understood from the claims.
relay output gates 'are closed. Memory also includes three banks of record stations each bank'
1. A brief autline of the machine
having ten stations which may individually carry
Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram of most of the 55 record tapes on which data are represented to
units of the machine and of their relationship.
be read out through selected relay gates. The
A calculator section 'composed entirely of elecrecord or tape storage banks also may receive'
troniccircuits and devoid of moving parts has
punched tapes from punch units which will not'
three calculator units, an accumulator, a multibe discussed further in this application. Memplying and ~ividing unit (MD), a denomina- 60 ory also includes record or tape sections in a
tional or oolumn shift unit. These coact with
table look-up unit which is per se the subject of
eight electronIc storage units whiCh have indeapplication Serial No. 768,600, of F. E. Hamilpendent inputs and outputs in addition to the
ton et a!., filed August 14, 1947. Computed arIn and Out connections to the calculator secguments may be entered through selected retion (see Fig. 20). The units of the calculator 65 lay gates into the table look-up unit and selected functional values read out of this unit, also.
section are in communication through a single
data channel, called the Internal bus sets and
through relay gates.
which may be considered as having an Out side
Numbers may be recorded by punching or
from which data flows through an amplifier to
printing. In the present application only one
an In side. All numbers to be used incalcu- 70 of the printer units will be described. Numbers
lations are transferred from selected memory
which are to be printed are first sent to assigned
units through eight selective channels called
relay storage units from which they arp. applied
Out bus-sets to the ei~ht electronic storage units,
to the printing unit during a print cycle.
The interplay of the various units of the marespectively and then called out one at a time
from the latter units to the selected accumu- 7.5. chine is controlled by program means. The pro-'

~ DmaIls'

S

iJrcIUdElS t;w.o: ideni:1Cl11 units;. cldled
the A and B sides, of sectUEmce'storage: Program:
~. are' atter-nately' entered into: the' Pi' and" B
sides of sequence storage and these sides alter:..
~':'coa:ctr ~th: the; sequencing.: networK, which 5'
includes the main commutator; control: frame';.
calculation COlltroli commutators NO;. ACC:C,
U'i"'C, and: nv:c; the" ptlotr. unltsl andl1ll1e:.operational sign commutator. The sides of sequence:'
sborlige: alSo' control'tbe operation.oiT tlte:: desired 10:
ga~ betlweet1" memory· uniur an'd; the: aut bussetg' and. In' bus'"sets' according: to' prognamr data:
applied to the sequence) srorage sides: Pro'gmm
d8t9.. mar be; derived: from' any' of, the: memory
units at! selected by' program; instructibns :md~, Ii)
may also be calculated. All program.: d:retSi ex..
cel't 11he First artificiaL line are· routed: through
selectetl electronlcstorage units· to sequence: star..
age.
When, a' memory, unit. is ready to send· forth 20
data.: it applies It Forward. signal to ae pilot unit
selected by a program instruction. When- a:
memory unit or the printing unit· is read.y to receil\le" data it: sends a Back sif.mal to. B;) selected
pilot unit; The blank code pilot unit comes into' 2."
play wben the program data: does not select a
pilot. unit which. is· aSSOCiated. with: an electroniC'
storage unit.
The. s.equencing. network perfor-ms successive
runs. ot coaction with the sequence' storage' sides; ;;c
Iil each tun it sends signals to the pilot units 00'
control its application of signals to the electronic
storage. units;, Whenever the pilot, unit enters
data into an electronic storage' unit it sends out
a Move signal which may act on a selected tape ~"
storage station if the station· is. selected: by the
program to r.espond. The responsive station is
one which has acted to read out, data and it is,
conditioned to advance or not advance the record
tape at the station upon receiving tne Move· sig.- '"C'
nal Whenever a. memory unit is selected to recei've data it receives a Reset signal from a selected pilot unit when the pilot unit is signalfed
b.ythe sequencing network. to send forth the signal: The main commutator and the related pilot
units interchange signals whiCh determine the 4ij
Pl'O'gress of' a sequence run. There is also an in_
terchange, of' signals among the calculater units
antI' the calCUlation control commutators, and
the main C'ommutator~
By sequencing the. multiplying and. dividing 50
unit MD and the accumulator through the four
bitst~' calcuHltitms of' addition,. subtraction,. multiplication and diViden, the most complicated of
mathem-atical problems may be solved .. A. se...
quence of the machine through one or more of' 55
these' calculat;ons' performed in any oraer may,
be caned a calculation path.
A main pulse generator is provided for applying pulses to tne ttlaincommutator, the pilot units
and other electronic circuits, This main pulse 60
generator is shown in Fig. IS and diSCussed in
se'Ctior! 4 and' is per se the suJ)je"t of application
Serial No. 71,502 of P: E. Fox, flIed January IS;
1~9:
'
A control desk is provided with switches and 65
dlals which may be manipulated to simulate the
automatic controls' of the machine~ Beforestarting operations, cancer circuits for de-sired units
of the machine, inCluding the main commutator 70
pilot Units and other units, may be established
under control of SWitches at the control desk.
The speed of the machine may be gauged from
th~· fact that in the moon problem to compute'
tfle<. l'Osition of the moon at· any given time-- 75

8
n;ooo'. gccumullU.lons;, 90.00> multiplications•.. aud

2000 references to the tab1e,s:in;; the table look-up:
means; wer.e done. in: about '(. minutes;:
Memor.y units;.excep.t:.pluggable storage;. buUn'-'
cluding electronic storage.' units; have"a; capaeity,·
af; 19: digits, and: ru.. sign: in each unik. The: accumulating unit may'; and or,' subtract l'9,.digtt',
numbers: and prodUa.e:· a. 28-digit result and.its
sign in less than lAooo of a second. The.'ME) unit.
may multiply' two. 14.. digIt· numbers and produce
a 2S-digit product and sigJl:inabout . ~}ofa:,second;. Division' of. one'1:4-digit: numbe1"byanother
may prOduce a I4-digit quotientin·about·lko:of a'
secOnd:. Division: may: be carried. out to. as. many:
as 28 quotient digits;. Results to 28. digltsmay
be: read: ftom. the accumulating. unit. or the. MD
unit into the column. shift unit and: a maximum
of 19 digits may be readout of th.e'shift unit. into.
electronic storage.
The multiplYing: and dividing: unit is the subject of application Serial No. 71,641 oiRE. Phelps·
and G. E. Mitchell, flIed January 19, 1949,. now
Patent No. 2,604,262,.
Certain: elements of: the: print unit areJciaimed
in application Serial No; 70;575:of F.E. Hamilton;
flIed January 12, 1949,
Other objects of the invention will be: pointed,
out in the following description and claims· and
illustrated in the accompanying. drawings •. which.:
disclose, by way of example, the· prinCiple of the·
invention and the best mode, which has. been contemplated, of applying that principle.
In the drawings:
Pig. 1 is a diagrammatic' chart of the parts of
the maehinetlisclosedherein.and.shows.in a gen,-·
eral way the associations among these; parts~
Fig. 2. is a fragment, of a. value tape used in
tape storage and in the table look-up unit.
Fig. 3 is. a, fragment of a program tape- bearing successive left-half lines of sequence. data.
Fig~ 4 is a fragment of a,program tape. bearing.
successive right-haH lines of sequence· data.
Fig. 4a snows tIle code. used for design&ting.
numbers on the record tapes.
'
Fig. 5 is a partially sectioned side view of a,.
tape station in a tape storage. bank..
Fig, 6 is a rear' elevationaL view of the tape
station.
Fi'g'~ 7 is a section on liile T~l of Fig. 5.
Fig. S. shows the upper portion of Fig. 7 with
part,; in a difi'erent position.
Fi,g. 9 ~s a semi-diagrammatic chart, of tape
st~.tlOns In a tape storage banK" snowing, the.
dnve for these stations.
Fig. 10 shows a tYpical trigger circuit used
herein:
F~g, 10a'is a blocIrsymbO'I of" the trl.gger. ctrcuit.
Flg. II shows' a' typical tri'ode circuit switch.
used herein,
I0g: 11-12 is R block symbol of the triode errcmt
sWltcn [I;cd also of the tetrode circuit switch.
Fig. 12 shows a typical'tetrade cirCUit switcn
used herein'.
Fig; 13 shows a typical pentode circuit swItch.
employed herein.
FIg: 13a is a block symbol' of tbe pentode cir:cuit switch.
Fig. 14 Sl10WS a typical circuit of the I>o~caned
lock couple, constituting anether form of electranic switch.
F~g. It,!:(( is a block symbol' of the lOCK couple.
FIg. 15 is a partially dIagrammatic view of a
register order;
. Pig'. 15ais a; block diagram usedhereiil fu r.ep.resent the register order.
.
.

2,686,672

7

Fig. 16 shows'a typical cancel circuit used for

resetting trigger circuits.
Fig. 17 shows the block diagram of the cancel
circuit and also shows connections of the cancel
circuit output to triggers.
5
Fig. 18 is a diagrammatic circuit view of the
main pulse generator system.
Fig. 19 is a timing chart relating to the main
pulse generator.
Fig. 20 is a diagrammatic showing of the elec- 10
tronic calculating section.
Fig. 21 shows in block circuit form a column
of electronic storage the two sets of entry and
exit means associated therewith and also the pilot
signals for controlling a column.
15
Fig. 22 'shows several of the electronic storage'
units and their associations with the In and Outs
bus-sets with the Internal bus-sets and also the
pilot signals for controlling the units.
Fig. 23 is a d:agrammatic circuit representa- 20
tion of a dial storage set.
Fig. 24 is a block circuit view of a column of
the denominational shift unit.
Fig. 25 is a diagrammatic representation of
the denominational shift unit.
23
Fig. 28 is a timing chart of operations concerned with a denominational shift.
Figs. 27a, 27b, and 27c represent the circuit of
the internal commutator or sub-sequencing
means of the denominational shift unit.
:)0
Fig. 28 is a diagrammatic view of relay storage
sets or groups, each with fifteen relay storage
units.
Fig. 29 is a circuit showing of parts of a relay
storage unit and their connections to the In ;].)
and Out bus-sets.
Fig. 30 represents a plugboard for a relay storage group.
Fig. 31 is a diagrammatic representation of a
tape storage bank and its associated station se- i ')
lectors, plugg:ng, and Group Outs.
Figs. 32a, 32b, and 32e represent the circuits
relating to a tape storage bank:
Fig. 33 is a timing diagram of timers ( and 2
of Fig. 32b.
"13
Fig. 34 represents the plugboard associated
with a tape storage bank.
Fig. 35 is a, diagrammatic circuit showing of
elements of the table look-up unit.
Fig. 35a is a flow chart of the table look-up GO
unit. ,
Fig. 35b shows the circuits far controlling the
production of Forward and Back signals of the
table look-up unit.
Fig. 36 is a circuit showing of elements of v;)
sequence storage and their heating relays.
Fig. 37 shows the circuits of intermediate relays of sequence storage.
Fig. 38 is a block view of the intermediate relays for storing sequence instructions given by 60
the left half of a l:ne of sequence.
Fig. 39 is a similar view of the intermediate
relays controlled by the sensing of instructions
given in the right half of a line of sequence.
Fig. 40 diagrammatically shows dial switches 65
for setting up an artificial line of sequence (see
Section 16b).
Fig. 40a shows the circuit control relays for
bringing the circuit of Fig. 40 into operation.
70
Fig. 41 shows the circuit of a few of the operational relays in sequence storage.
Fig. 42 is a block diagram of the operational
relays for storing the left half of a line of sequence.
75

8

Fig. 43 Is a similar view relating to the'right
half of a line of sequence.
Fig. 44 shows the internal circuit of a "zerofilter."
Fig. 45 is a circuit showing of a code translating circuit called a tree.
Fig. 45a is a block symbol of a tree.
Fig. 46 is a circuit showing of a so-called OP2
tree.
Fig. 46a is a block diagram of the OP2 tree.
Fig. 47a is a diagrammatic representation of a
pyramid of trees in sequence storage for picking
up relay storage Group Outs.
Fig. 47b shows sequence storage pyramids for
table look-up Group Outs and for tape storage'
Group Outs.
Fig. 47c shows sequence storage pyramids for
station move relays and for dial storage Group
Outs, and Table Outs.
Fig. 47d shows sequence storage pyramids for
station selector relays ASS and BSS of tape
storage.
Fig. 48 is a diagrammatic representation, par- '
tially in circuit form, of sequence storage pyramids for picking up relay storage Unit Outs.
Fig. 49a shows elements of the relay storage
Group Out pyramids relating to the five possible Out fields of a line of sequence.
Fig. 49b shows the pyramids for controlling
tape storage Group Outs from all possible out
fields.
Fig. 50 represents the pyramids operated in
sequehce storage in accordance with the code
number in the S ( or S2 field of a line of sequence.
Fig. 51 represents sequence storage pyramids
for operating relay storage Group Ins and table
look-up Group Ins.
Fig. 52a represents sequence storage pyramids
for operating relay storage unit Ins 0 I 0 to 099,
and also for operating table look-up relays TL(
to 6.
Fig. 52b shows sequence storage pyramids for
operating relay storage unit Ins (DO to (59, and
also shows a circuit controlled by sequence storage and pilot units for applYing a start signal
to the printer unit (Sections 22 and 22a) .
Figs. 53a, 53b, and 53e represent the plugboards associated with sequence storage.
Figs. 54 to 58 show the sequence storage pyramids for the pilot units selection.
'Fig. 59 shows the sequence storage pyramids
relating to the OP ( and OP2 fields.
Fig. 60 ,shows the sequence storage circuit for
the operational sign.
Fig. 61 shows the sequence storage circuit for
the In Code control.
Fig. 62 shows the sequence storage circuits for
the SH ( and SH2 denominational shift selection.
Fig. 63 shows the sequence storage circuits
for the Q, R, U, and V shift selection.
Figs. 64a to 64j represent the circuits of the
multiplying and dividing unit MD.
Figs. 65a to 65k represent control cirCUits of
the multiplying and dividing unit.
Fig. 66 is a timing chart, showing the primarY
cycle of the multiplying and dividing unit.
Fig. 66A is a chart of the relationship of the
Internal buses to the multiplicand and divisor
register orders and to the dividend receiving
orders of the result register orders; the chart
also indicates the relationship, in different col':'
umn shift positions, between the two registers.
,_Fig: ,67;~ a timiIlg, ch~rtJ:ela,ting to ,controlling

e

'-0

P:jg.90 ds ,.a ,pluggj.ng,~~ ·relating;to
)1.di.scuSSlld in ;SectioD'24.

.,contoo11ed .operations ·.of tl:le multiplying cfl,tld
diviCUng IDlit.

1llustrates '.by~n .example ,the llrinoiple
~.dMding used rherein.
~. '69« and ·119b srepr,esent ,the circuits of the
f1mt c8IDd -.second ·order..s :of :the :accumulator .• unit.
lIlig.l101s a block.diagra,m -of ·the r.egiste:cs ;in
the 'accmnula:tol"uIiIt.
;P-igs. '7'la'to '71g ,represent the ,cincults of ,the
iniemli.loommutator 'or the.sub.-<,SequencIDg
means:of !the ,accumulatgr,unit.
Fig. 72 is.a-timing,cha'l't"showing the,accumulator 'Cycle.
.
1Fig. 73 ·is a timing ·chal't,sl10wing-the :\tarious
l'ligtlal times relating ,to :the ,accUmulating ,operatiionwhen'lihe resultis:positive (uppel':part·gf
the ~gul'e»and ,g,lso ·when "the ·l'e5ult -is -negative
newer-part of>t!hMigure-). .
Pig. 114 'is 'a ,timingchBirt indicating the 'ha!lf
89l'l'eetion .sequence·in ··the . accumulator .o,peration.
'Pigs .. '1-5aw'75h 'represent 'the 'circuits ·of ,one
})tIl't-ien'of ·the'Oontrol ,l"l'ame,·this ,portion
mainly 'involving ,various ·delay CiFouits'and 81so
heating· control circuits ,for sequence·storage.
Figs. 76a to 76g represent the circuits of an6I!her-J)ol'tion of'the-Oontrrol"Frame, ,this ,portion
maoinly'involv'ing heatingeontrol·circuits for ,the
p1!ot ,units·selectiQI1·pyramids·shown,in 'Figs, 54
to 68.
·¥igs.flQ a~nd ·17d 'i'ElPi'esent -cireui ts -of 'a 'thil'd
portion 'of-the 'Control 'Frame,this'portion mainly
involving start, stop, Drain 'circuits, also' val'ietIS eir'cuits "for·controlling-calculat-ion contPOI
cemmu1!atrors,-and 'alsoamplifier-and' inverter
circuits for sequence stor~ge control relays.
,.!'igs;"77-aa shows -partS·of·SOIne·circuits op~ra ted
at-ilh.e-control'desk.
'F'igs.'''i'Sa -t-o '78k-repref!entthe :circuits 'of ,the
main commutator. .
-'Fig. ''18L, in--the'BC~pOl'tion, represents the
cireutlis-of ·1;he 'blank ·code 'piltltunit,and, -in ·the
Ol'.SN:sectiop.,'rePres!IDts "the circuits ,of ,the
opera tiQnal'&ign 'routing ,elemepts.
'!'ig.''l'6A -representsthe·-circuit oftheaccumulating calculatiQp control c_ommutator.
'Fig.7'8Drepresents'the cirCuits of ·the Jiiyiding ~alculationcontrol commutator.
.F~g. _7.6Mr~presents·tlle circuits oftl].emy,ltiply.iqg' caaculatiop.qoptrol c,ommutator,
'l"igs."19ato '79d.arrd '7~l1bc,opstitute .,a,llow
diagram of operations describ,~d jp ~sectiop "1,6b.
,Fj,gs . . 80a to &.Oe r,epre&en.t th.e cir:clJtt.s Qf a
ptlot unit.
.Figs. _8la and :.tU;b show,tn '''lockfer;r:;n, pi,l,ot
trott,s:1 apJi:B Qf:tllcgrotlP of eigptpilqt lJni.~.
.'1"1-$. 82 ts.aVEll'tica~,llecttQnal view JhJ;:Qu$h the
printing ,uI!~t.
-Fig. 83shows:tll.e 9l'ive!l,nd clutc.p,'m~ns J.or
the main shaft of the printing unit.
Fig. 84 showslmee·di'fierent positions of the
ca.:UY~i/:er.o levers. of ,.the . ha,mme,r ·latclles in ,the

F,ig. -gQa ;is "an. ,ll.€ipitional,pluggiDg

f1ig. ;68

,e_

.
diagTaxnxe,.

lating:to ;an .• al1;e.l'nate :stepin .ease 'l.
iFigs. :9lJlnd:92 .show ,plugging useGifoIO~e:i:
:discussed in Seetiqll .'&4.
:Fig. )98 :sb0:w'splu,gging:.for Case:p .discussed in
Sectiqu24.
Fig. 94ah.owsplugging for,e:ase.6.discUSlledin
1'0 'Seetiolll :2'-.
-5

. ~ .-m8tQhj~ .~

,jt J~rg~-nl11:r;"b,er()freCQrp

·~-~i«.h;ll1~Y ~;~;W istQI'~ ·iV~~U~ .eitVj:lr
15 fQr c:W~~!it\tiQ:lla.Jp~r.PO~ .(gle ;Fig ..~),o:r J9r
pr~li~:w:~guen~e ,W,a,1~Q1' pW'-P9~s

,\se.e;F.lgl).

.13 :JiI,.J;lg.'.4;). ~9u.eJlCe q:8Itaj!>ma.c;lellP of :n.ugl~X:s

w);lJ~l) .c:;!l;J;l' Qe I;lp,mil,d &Qe,s~~_e '~!>~WllP,ers !~­
Y9Ive51jnj~~.~1_CuMtti911. :T.ho~ '!i.ape!lWhtch :stOl.7e
20 Y!Jiljle,ilJ'or .9Q~tl~t:!@ !l.li~y~ cal},e..p.yal\1C t;1llils
~ Q.HI;el1.@:ti~~ ~.~ J~r;OA1 :p:rqg:r~~ t:!1~s.;w-hi!lb
b~!.I!l",Qr-m~~n;~Il;},g'9rc~9.~Qmggll.:ta,·Th~ progl'.~~ ;,~~~re :j;~ ~t~:.5..Qtlr;!lEl~ io:f ,:;;e.qtl~nce .or
p;l(:Og;!,:aJiP'.ll!~I1Q;~~~'~S:99114\pg'j;p 'wl)!~l) ,Y.ge mll-25 ~y

!l.~l\U~ ~in

j:)e· :ixl.,.
,1;.4e ~~ ,~l;Qr~ge~cj;iQI1 ~l1i~l1 :CC;)Ill-

pri!l~j;hr~. ~imil~rJuw~ l,~, :~nc;l3 ..of ·.ten ~pe

35

!!Ul!ti9.n~e@.b(!!ee. FlUIIl. :1,:9,@<:1.3:1).Wihej;h§l"
~. tt\pe :ls. 4~ ~~or ~j;QxJl}g c:nMmb~l! to enterjnto
a ,'9PmIi):}lj;jt~W ,91'1<> 'J"e:pte~nt I~\ll:l:lli!e .~a_1;,a,
the :tl.u:mOOr)S!~l.!e ,puru:h1:!p.acc9r.WQg
tbe .l:!aIl1e
cq<;le ,;P3te:ffiJ:.ably (t~e J~jJ;la.:l:y -J;e'IJwcoqe, (&eefjg.
~IL) :.iIl ',w~h .:8. ~'C9mPJete [bma,rY:l;Qne,is ;tn,a.de :tlP
0;[ );fQur,:I'I,u~~~ l:li:Q~l'Y pO.lIitlo.m; :~,,4,_~, .a~d l.
§)l1p.eJtbe(_@9@:-:rtmr!Jli~ll~:atiQP·.ofl;l.;~ecIm~l:n().4\ti.ttIl ~ig~j;· i.$ ~o:ntai~~ApfSlJ.cb :?iQl'lC, 1t til ,.C@v:en!~nt ~tp ,rJ~J;~r),w ,1i.Qe fHlII.e.s:~s :cQlwrtns. .Ol}~

to

40

or more number signs may also be r.epresented
.A'de.&!gpatip-n Uu.e. ;A 'half-,Zone,or 'halfcolumn ,~n:t\Uning .binary ·:jlositiQPs.28,:nd 1 'is
suUicient ,for"~ i sign FeIlr.esentation. The desig.natjon~l in.a~half ..column 'l1epresents .-,- "and, the
designation:2 ,1:6Pllesepts ..+. ;Also, :with xespect
5JJ to ..a csign::1i~ in ,a,program';~~,iO ·(no .pe1'for8.-tioas)in,the-sign;field:cfJ,nd'B (1;be 2,andbperfol'ations)represent,'other '.stgn ,functions whioh
will:beexpla1ned;in:the, next- section.
'The,r.ecolld ltapefhas,~the 'width.of ,a. standard
Q5 80iindextpositiOn caJ.:(l. bjlt,.«:)wmg,to ,thel)pace
OCGUPiedjby;:the.,mal;JJinal·~d}holes, ,only· !78In-dex ;lIositions ,are allowed for. In other words,
tbe ~pe'fbas ,a"capacity,qf ';p,ineteen.,and-:a~half
digit-:columns,.ol';su,tficient:e:3d)acity:to.be·,punohed,
® lf~desired,  menjs.
mer.,laitcbe.s s.nd ,of ,;1$S,ocia,ted ~r:rrY-flierp Je,vers.
:>Eaoh,record .!tape lis,.;preferably 'joIned cat . the
.Fig .. Sa is.~;tlmipg~h~rt.for thc:printer,UIlit.
ends to oIOl'm ·ca.,continuous loop. The .tape ,is
F,ig.8.'ta repres~nts the 9ir.cuit ·of ,the printer
umt.
.
iIlterchal1g~bly"POSitionable.at :any,.of the ,tape
s,taiions,which willj,)e"desenbed,in.:Section:.2b.
~.,8,7b,:repre&en,1is r~4out ¢t:c1.tits·lfor're,a_gh~~
Q~t.a;.n\UIlQer, !rQIP,arEl!ay ,stor~geunitU1.to. the 70
'2a. T,he. pr!>.gram tap~8
PIUlt1J;l,g.,uni t.
,li'i,g •. ,a8fih..o.ws,tbe sefluenceistQfagepNraJll~d:for
gl~g,.a.ble,atoIWe.~l~tion.!l:elaYs.
..P~...a9.J;i;presel\ts ,~y.pi~~ cir~mil;slalldJb_elP~~­

·!iwarera;ted."L'huLlcit.cuit,mt'l9
:A'lso, 'upon return (to ;its pr-evilltHHstatus in \l,tllich
.be !l'.ef{Jr:red to as ta ,loCklCo.1lrl1e. .tB:e.th of 1;hetulge ir-:o 'Rgaiiniseontlucti\le, .i& 'negmive~in1pu1.se
tul!e sections ,must be rcut ':off lin ro~der rtD,1l.Jil0IWO'f·· abClUt'50v. ,'appeal'S at 'the >mit!point e ,of i:the
the.common;anode:line:tj)~.ttain,1ts'~ 'V.olt'anOl1e resistor tOr. '>It is ,'ch'a.racte'riStic ,'Of this
llIte ;level. ..If :both ~tube :iS8cliom; llilIl'e l'fit cut-cUT 20 trigger that it 'reacts ~'ensiti:Yely Ito ;a neglriive
IS.nti,'one'of'tlle,reaii0tts'.'js them'mnT the look CLluPIe.
'P1ilse,of'a;bout '40 'v. 'applied to ,the ttiggerinpt1t
!The lblook'SYmbdls"llWll :be (.employe'd ;lnfbhe ,2':, terminal a 'or 'h is e'ffecttve to 'reverse 'the trigger,
'c:trcuit ·.diagrams co'f :the .. m!lehilae. .n mlRYi\'Jebuta silI11la-rly '~pplied ,poSitive ~'PUlse of such
:om:ent!Olled )thl:ttihe ',hmmlsas tto tthe :~mtt tar'amplitude 'is not 'effective 'to 're:v.erse the ,tri,gger.
'ttiiuals of the 1tllbeS.m6yLbe''Ul'lJ)Hed,thm1Jgh.60)lAnegativ:e'ilnpu1se of Jibout 5'0 v. 'a11plletl 'cQ'll1'Ung',(lapaelllOlls Whlich:are'of vall'YbIg ~mpaciti.es
,currently to ,both 'a 'and'h "WiU:1re 'effective:to
depending.on tbe:dai;lred,J)UlSe,..sba;peto}be"tre.ns- :1{1 . reverse the 'trigger 'but a -positive impUlse:sJi :;the
,mitteirtly:thtlf~Oitor'i;o'the(inJlutrteTtni%JJlil.
same amplitUde and'SfrD:narlyapplied
'be
'Where;ft ';i5 1'lee'l'!ssary:;to .'elarlfteartion, I.Q'rrtlWS
inetIMttve. Reversaldf 'the 'tri,gger 'also:mi:\.Y"be
'w'fll 'lge uS'8dto'indicatew~r :signals "aTe
e'ffectedby directJy:.im,presstng:'adequ;:tt,e 'positive
coming "in or'golng outoffQ,mrcuft.
,patentia-l(a,bout J® 'v:) On the :grtd ';terrnlmJ:l
Where',9/etlt!Pling-wpaeitor 1is rlISed:iW ,wan.mrtt:,;; .of,thenon"'conductil)g'tUbe, df ,thetl'igger. "Where
'a pulse:.to a,~tia (jf:aJtUbe,''th'e.(eotQlling(.Q8l1lacitor
,an.iuwulse .sout:c.ets conne:cted ,to-on~y ,'()I}e ut
'is "nOt .;sbuntetl "by a ~'1'~.For ~i1!s1amlle, ~ if'~
,points a ,.or'h, the. other :point '.temiinates ,:'a:t 'the
ptllse1s"to i.be :appli.eti fto the ~~ ,(0f :the d;rioHe
+.150 v,line, "thiS ..adding,sta,bi1i;ty 'to ,the, trtgger.
snownin .• f1tg. 'lil :-tb'r'GUg)} Q !GlI!l'ttIffing ,l.I:SPBcitm:,.·Revers:aL Qfthett~¢r .aIsom~yb.eetrect~l:rQy
,the ''l'esistorc.ShOMlIin this CfigU~MI'S,$lmnting:<1Jhe ;40 an .. auxiIiaty . cir..cuitopera,ble "t,o .tirawcurredt
~I'9icftlor ~is 'emItted. ·''In~cins:tn.rums m Ege
through :ano:de _r,esiStor 'l'OrorI1rs,o as ';to ,demay be used as a cathode follower illl'wbich,,sase
pl'essthe,p:otential.atthe~ter.minlllcorJto,alJdut
~uitable resistance wilLbe~provided b.etween the
'liD y. ,'Such,aux:iliat;ycitcUitmay:take'theform
cathode of the ttibe ahu-avtiltage 'supply line. A
of ..an ,auxiliary tube. ,,For .ins'tance, :in Fig. 'l'Q,
'tUbe mgy be!biQse'd"nC:UnlQi1Wr.t0r~ or-:to,;con- i40 a, triQde,1 DAjs'indicated,as;havingitsanodecon·lluetiive 'conditiOll.'WhUtIe "it·~ in'elWSlSalY tto
ne.c'tibleto terminal:J af:ttibe.'fO. :If:tUbe'tOA]s
~ificfttion, ,tHe normGlly .'C'oZlfiuctive Ltube '~ll
relillered ,,~onductive, 'then It ;wm :foroe the ,po"be" ,tdeMifietl}by the sm!ill :letter '¢ rplnalld. lUelCIW
.tentUil.lit .terminal J, dawn, to about JiOv,., '. revers·the'fl'Y!ri~l k!4j:t~bility elecl1"O!iic trigger cir....
grid resistor of tube ;14. "A,P.ositive canceL 1m"etiit 'Which Wilr:belMlled,1sImPlY~a-:ttigger.. mae.", pulse will be applied at a desired 'time to 'the Tine
genera~ fi'ITm 'of:trni'SJ.triggerds shown hl:!B'iI; .•H1.
-lOOC to increase',its p~tenti~l to approximately
Typim\.l'eanstants care dudica:tel!l· mr 'lthe '.:Itticg;er
igr-OUnd-potential.· ,This !Will Jt.eset ,-.illre lti~g,geor to
lrut '{tis 'under-sti:loCi thaM)ther,-suttable,tcmtmnts
.the ':st9J1:le in· Which ,tile t1-lbe '-eon~tad ,to rtne
ma-ytle used. THistt·i~tI'r.:lSif:UHy id~d ,1 n
cancel ,.line, ';thrOllgh, the ,gr~d ,r-esistor, .,is"c.QnQ.u.c.ap,tlUea'tionBeti81 .'No. 569,a92 ,.:Of JPaJmi$r '.nd '10 !tiv.e.lThe 'r;eset..status Qf,,a,,tdgger ,is"deJ;J.Qt~cl;lw
"Phelps. -"fl.l~tl 'D~en\ber ':t;rT" ,!ron. iBriefW" iit :1»the:sm;all ,letter .'.:rradjacent,,tae,$ioo ,a.t•."hich ,:tlle
cludes 'two'tetroaC'ti:v~1'y:ooUPl~d ~ttibf!lS }IAlcand :ltA.
:t\lbelis'·'Cendueting rin"t,Ae,re.<>et .statu.s.
tn '.one 'State 'of'!!. tdgger, !tnbe ;1~ ':ts '~lldttve
'In;flf!Jffie ,instanees, the! grid ,r.esi.stor ,terulit1&J",gr
.and. its anode terminal f is at about 50 v.,.Wb.lle
Js~nn~ted,.toi,the.--tHlD,V'.,Jilae ..thr~h.an.,awdl'tube n lsnon-'cOnitttCt1V'e!nia'1t~vran~'termtnal i!tO 'ia:W ".tube ..E. .when .,tl1Jg ,auxil~l tube:Ls COR-

wtIl

,_enIl.

2,686,672

19

ductive it simply acts as a low impedance connection between the grid resistor and the -100 v.
line and allows the trigger to function in a normal manner. When the auxiliary tube E is
rendered non-conductive, its anode potential and
therefore the potential at the grid of the connected tube 14 rises above cut-off potential and
causes the trigger to assume the status in which
tube 14 is conductive. The auxiliary tube E may
thus be used to reverse a trigger. The block
symbol for the trigger is shown in Fig. lOa. The
terminals shown in dotted lines will be' omitted
in most instances in order to simplify the drawings and will be shown only where they are
utilized in controlling the trigger. The cancelled
status of the trigger will be considered as its normal reset status and the trigger will be spoken of
as being turned and returned or reversed and reset, it being understood that the reset or return
is to its shown cancelled status.

20

5

10

15

20

3b. The basic cancel circuit

Fig. 16 shows the basic cancel circuit operable
to cancel a group of triggers. A plurality of such
circuits are provided for various groups of triggers in the machine. The basic cancel' circuit
includes a normally cut off tube 15, a voltage
regulator tube 16, and one or a group of power
tubes 11, depending on the power requirement.
The output of 11 is connected to the cancel line
-lODe of a group of triggers. The constants of
the cancel circuit are such that 11 is normally
. conductive to sustain line --,-lOOe at -100 v. The
voltage of line -lODe may fluctuate slightly according to changes in the states of the connected
triggers. These fluctuations are counteracted
through the action of the voltage regulator tube
16 and its circuit. For instance, if line -lODe
goes slightly more negat~ve than -100 v., it causes
the voltage regulator tube to become proportionately more conductive so as to increase the negative bias on 11. As the negative bias on 11 increases, .its, output. voltage rises, increasing the
vbltage on line "-loDe to -'-100 v. When it is desired to cancel or reset the group of triggers, a
positive cancel signal is applied to tube 15 to
make it conduct and negatively bias 11 to nonconductive condition. The line -lOOethereupon rises to substantially cathode. potential, so
that the connected triggers are reset to the states
indicated by the x marks.
.
Fig. 17 shows the block diagram representing
the baSic cancel circuit and two methods employed by the cancel circuit to reset a trigger.
According to one method, the cancel circuit output -lODe is connected to the terminal cc of a
trigger (also see Fig. 10). According to the
other method, the line -lODe is connected to the
grid of an inverter tube I which serves, in the
manner of tube IDA in Fig. 10, to force a trigger
to its reset status when the tube becomes conductive. Thus, when a positive cancel signal is
applied to the input of the cancel circuit, its output line rises in potential and renders tube I
conductive to reset the trigger.
3c. The relays

25

30

35

40

coll l' to be initially energized; This coil f'
when energized, may then close' contacts fa;
establish~ng the circuit of the companion coil
which maybe called the hold coil h (see, for instance, Fig. 29). In some cases, the two coils of
the duo-wound relay may be independently energized (see relays RHR and LHR in Fig. 29).
The duo-wound relay also may be used as a delay
relay. In that case, the hold coil h will have its
ends connected to each other through a resistor
so as to form in effect a transformer coil. Upon
energization of the pickup coil 1', the induced flux
in the hold coil will be of opposite direction to
the flux in the pickup coil and will tend to delay
the operation of the common armature contacts.
Also, upon~he deenergization of the pickup coil
1', the flux induced in the coil h will tend to
maintain the armature contacts operated. The
relay produced by the hold coil in the operation
of the armature contacts will depend upon the
inductance of the coil and the resistance across
its ends; the higher the resistance, the greater
the delay. These delay relays may be used in
connection with arc suppression, as will be described for circuits shown in Figs. 36 and47a
(Section 11). It is to be understood that a relay
will handle a maximum of twelve single or double
pole contacts. Accordingly, if a group of 84 contacts is provided, then at least seven relays are
used for operating these contacts. For instance
associated with each relay storage unit (Fig. 29) :
is a Unit In containing 84 relay contacts. For
simplicity of illustration, only a single dotted relay coil U "in" is shown as operating these 84
contacts, but it is to be understood that actually
this relay showing represents. seven relays in
the same group. Usually, the relays of the group
will be connected in parallel to be energized
concurrently through a common circuit (see, for
instance, Fig. 48). Such group of relays maybe
referred to, for convenience, as a plural relay or
a gang relay.
4. The main pulse generator

45

50

55

60

65

The machine uses relays of the type disclosed
in Patent No'. 2,282,066 to Lake et al. These relays may either have 4, 6, or 12 armature contacts and may be referred to as 4, 6, or 12 position 70
relays. Two coils wound in the same direction
may be placed on the same core and operate the
same armature contacts. Such relay may be
termed a double coil relay or a duo-wound relay.
One coil of such relay may be used as a pickup 7,5

Fig. 18 diagrammatically illustrates the main
pulse generating system which generates pulses
called the AP, BP, ep and EP pulses, the timing
of which is shown in Fig. 19. The pulse generating system is fully disclosed and claimed in
application Serial No. 71,502 of· P. E. Fox, flied
January 18, 1949.
A brief description of the essentials of the
system follows: FRMV represents a free running
multivibrator, preferably one with provisions for
varying the frequency. The output of one side
of the multivibrator is applied to the control
grid of tube 2, Fig. 18. The output of the tube is
connected to the control grids of tubes 1 and B.
The tapped output of 8 is connected to both
sides of a trigger 6. For each negative pulse
produced by the multivibrator, tube 2 produces
a positive pulse which is inverted by B to a
negative pulse for reversing the status of trigger
6. Point c of trigger 6 is connected to the control grid of the tube 5. Point· t of trigger 6 is
connected to the control grid of a tube 9. It is
seen therefore that in one status of the trigger,
it conditions tube 5 and in the other status of
the trigger it conditions tube 9. Since trigger 6
is reversed in status for each negative pulse produced by thEfmultivibrator, it may be stated that
tube 5 is conditioned for one multivibrator cycle
while tube 9 is conditioned for the next such
cycle.
,.The .output of tube 2 connects to the contro~

2t

22

pfd~:ad:ut:le 1.!lIelme. :.tmk&vE!rw~v.e'pul5e
produced by 'the -.:multj,~1bratnr:¥.RMN', ;;tube :,2
)mlAiWfGS.,'anega.t1ve,p.ulse wlIich'jsilnverted:~ 1

to,a poS1ttv.etpulae. ,:Esch' positive-rpulse ;produced
tw 'Imts::through )8.'differentiator;circuit :to . cause 5
.a '.tube, l'I :toproduee:s. .;sharply !.peakednegative
)JUlIe. !Ji'he .,negative :pulses ,produced i.by ,tl ;are

rr

,,~ :to ,ll. cne-'SllOt (mUltlvibrator13SMVto
l'e\ft!ttle :lts:;sta;tus. Uponlluch Lraversnl,;thiSonegbdtfmtiltivibra.tor :applies ;a' pOSitive 'JjWse :toitre

'1'0

SUJ)preSSors,:'o!:tubes f& :lIl1d·9. J]gepentllng:on
w~Eir '15,or':)9: is ,eondlti'Oned, the ,'Output ipulse
bc:nn lSSMVls ,effective :to .:rentiertone "of ',these
,tubes ;:conductive,to 'produce :the 'PUlse PiP :or
m>. ~inee'trigger'o:jg:alterIlll.i€id w1tlY,WChlhegg.- l1i
tive pulse;prtldtroed:by ':FlRM.V, :it ',is ',understood
ihat tuDes 'Ii and (8 ''II;'l'e ,:conditioned :alternatively,
i!!e;ctl ,'of' these:tubes ,beingcondittoned:for il)lle
i1tilse:OYCle:6f thi!mult1Vibmtar~.lt is
clea.rthen :that 'tUbes1i ;and (11 \will .:'s,lternl1.tiVelW ZO
p're'tluce ·pulses.''l'he.width :.tif:earih 'pulse:18 :de-

temtinetlJ)y 'the ':sen--r.estoring :.time of:the ,une-

Shdt i rn.ttlt1Nibrator rSSMV.

':1t cis ,to be noted . that 'trig'ger i6 :5Uits'gt,:each
of points c and 'j:t;a ,lmlve'the:frequeney:of the 25
ealitrol ,plilses ,:derived ,'from the :free Tunning
rhultivibrator :,F'R;MV.Furttrer, 'thellUlses ~at!:
mte;lIfO'°:out'df'phase'wlth'th()se:at~:t. The single

tiui.t,tlm TOP" pUbies~l!lD to 'Pl"D'b4e'~
'of .:the ,'Same ;width:&.8 !.the OP :pulses, :.While ''$he
pUlses ;from f:Of ~~I!limit :tiI,to .'pl'otilme;.an tDutlNt;
pulse once :for:,e.very ':two ~ep (pulses. '!I'be .nutptlt
pulses ,from 3111 :are appliEGVto::an amlilifier {(iireuit
which'Pl"oouces ""/-'EP pulsES.
iltli'S:clear'irom ltbe :rforsgIllng ;de$crlption;1Qld
Flig.:19:thatoslFthe,pulses;Qe,:of:pul!;e. 'Th:e ;frequenQY>Of' the lAP 'MId
BP ~pulses v,iillbe geneniliy ;adjusted tnlWmltt
liI: dtc."whitrh :means!that the fOP pulsa; ,.aJre in
2Ja: ..• anii the:EP:pUlses;liI.1"~ at;l '!te.
'The :prope'l" starting iseqmmce of,pulslls ifJ.1om
the :main ~ptilse 1geneJTatar Us :nn ,tAP .1pulse,.!BP
pUlse,'.QP;pUlse.,'an'd E.P :pUlse:m:tb:e. Ol'deriname.n.
iF.o'insUre the proper ,;Starting seq,uentle,tri~
:6, ,:za.,·ami -3:1 ;ur.e:fu.stcanC'ellet:l ;to'slrown,lIitate~
In addition,it IS:n:e'C'eSllClXy::ti:Iat:the i'r'.$e'l"umiitfg
multivibrator FRMV start with ,Il. \pmdti~e LpWse.
The TalSon 'for':tllts :Is :that ;with ~6 inca:n.t:nmed
status .1tis conditroriing 5. 'Tl'ilS!rer (6tl:rerefo1le
must,:remain:in'this sta.tus 1n :order:tha:t :the lflrst
pulse';produced lby'SSM;.V'under:contr(i)l(of :~:v
be ':e1Iective. >,upon t5 lto :pmduce ,the ,'Jli.P:lJ].ilse.
MeSIlS fOT'attaining 'the ,pr~r :stnrting and
stopping ,'condition ·,tlf:F.BM\V are .:ding~fii.<.

olilly showncirt;'Fig . .:18. 'IDo:stoptFRMVl1ramc!Jm>)l'lHses 'dcenved. ftom ~MVto ,produce 'pulses 30 ducing :e1Iectiv.e 'pullres, s"switc'h, stOP~G:jg ,"Closetl.
so ,as to a:pply:potentia}jf~om';tlm'~150¥. :Une (to
tn'pha:se 'with the 'FRMV pulses; but of ' a "con,the ;controlgtid '.terminal b :'01 Js,:tiigg.er ?MVT,
tr'OUed'Width. 'The 'tubei8'serves :Rs"acoincitlence

tI~bmty mtiltivibmtorSSMV'is'controlled:bY' the

miXer' forthe"ptilses :from'SSMV' and c:of ,trigger
'.'The(SSMV ptitsesa,PPlled'to 5 determine the
"Wfd'th--of ,the "outlmt ,ptilses:o'f:& nndrestrlct the
output 'pulses' to>COintifae 'in phase with the
P&1tMV -pult'les. Tlle pu'lBes :'frome 'of 'trigger {6
futtl1er 'l'esttict::-5to'produeing its output 'Pllls:cs
a;t'a-'ftequencyhalf, that,'dfthe'SSMVan'd FR]\'[.V
purses; 'SimilarlY,tube 9 mixes the pulses SSMV
atril. th'e pulses from'poilitf' of trigger;S 'to 'produce pUlsesBP of the same shape cas ,theAP
pulses produced by 5 but :18'~ulses,'It is'clear'that'eaeh ';AP 'pulse a]JplIed
to "t'2 "tElstrtcts 'It 'to produce 'a' pulse' of thesatne
~fiith -a's Jttfe AP'pulse 'andat'tlre'same time as
:fttl~pulse,·whnethe'ptilses'from 13 'reiltficP2'2
to pro'ductng output:ptilses'atha.lfthecfrequency
of'ttfe A:P ltridBP 'pUlses.'Theontpu.t'pulses
'from '21 are appUed' to 'an amplifier Circuit'which
1S"'arrnnged to prodUce+CP pulses. ThisampU1ier'Ctrcu1t 1s'tapped at'an intermediate polrit''for
'1!'CP:pu:l~E!swhich'atemix~din tUbe '30 'with
'pUlses from 'trtgger;' L ':Trigger' 31 'is 'l'cversed
'E!lttih"tlme trtgger'f3ts 'tume'd"'fromits 'caneelled
t;tdtus. 'ThUs,'p6tnt ffOf i3I,'pro'dUtl"es' pulSE!sat
l'rIW"'the'ftequencY''6f'''tlie ~fJillses; 'It'is"seen
Y

ther,ebyestal::ilishmg :th.e:trigger ;hl:'Sho:wn:stitte,

In this ,state ~the :.trigger ~ets through lttttbe:;aO
35 to make a tube 10 conductive, therebY.tiepr.aSB1l1'g

the pulse output::termlnal:of,iPRM'V to a low and
ineffective potential. To .staI:t ,the ,puLse.,generil.ting system ':the,operatorma,y ,c10se"a switch, ,nun
G to ,apply the,'potentlal'irom"the +150.v:Jine'to
40 the grid 'termimil,Y of 'thetrj,gger :MVT,. ,thus ,r.eversingth'etrigger. In'the reversea."state Of the
trigger Jt causes 'tube 811 to cut ,oil' 'tube XlI,thus
allowing the pulse output 'terminal "afFRMV ,to
rise in potential to an effective Jevel. Rence1he
firSt ,pUise:produned 'by FRMV wiIl,.be, iii. ,posifi'lle
4i5 pulse. :By 'starting 'with 'prollirctiOn ,of ,apaSitiv.e
pulse and' by starting withtrtggers'1;23 ,and :31 ,in
shown 'State, 'the pulse genera:ting Ilystem 'is1'estiicted"toproducing-a "'Star.ting sequence 'U'!:p.u.lses
, , AP,'BP,'CPandEP in 'the '.order 'named.
50

55

60

'65

70

.5.. The"r,e,gister order

'Fig. '15 shoWs 'the :register orderused"here ,'in
the computing'units. This re,liister'ordeds,Siniilar'tothe one disclosed :in 'Fig. '30fa,m5licatiGn
Serial No.:'6'54,17:5 'oLB.E. 'PhIHps,liledNrarch n,
194'6. 'Fig.15a 'shows 'the blOck,alagram ,lortlre
regIster'order. Eachord'er'has four'trigger,stages
designated'L 2,:4 "and '8 and 'a'tr'io'tle tleSigna:ted
BX. ThedHHt'standing in9Jn'ortler'ls'ID.ven'by
the sum of, the reference 'numJ)ers:df 'the'reversed
stages.
Briefly, the order is in :,0 status when call 'the
tdggersare;in.cancelled sts;tw:;. I Operation,lif the
re:gister::order: may :be (effeeted ',bY la.pplymgneg'a..:.
tive entry pulses to terminals a and h of the,first
stage ,I. "Assumingthe.Qrder ,is ,initiallY .:at ~ll. a
flrstentrY ,pulse ,reverses ,stage ,I. The second
entry ,pulse returns stage 'I imd, upon its r.eturn.
stage I applies a negative pulse ,from,terminaI.e
to the'terni.ina.Is a and'hof sta,ge '2 ,to reverse,the
latter 'stage. A third entrY,p.ti1se,.againreverses
stage'l. .A' fourth entry ,pUlse .returns sta.ge 1
ca using it 'to return'stage '2. 'Thereupon,. E.t:a,ge
reverses"sta;g'e'4 . The fifths.nd sixth "entryptilli'es
eft'ect;athirtl ''Cycledf 'tltage "I1t1ln ~ -~ecuinl "1'e'.

'2

75

:3;888,879

23

versal of stage 2. The seventh and eighth pulses
effect a fourth cycle of stage I and a return of
stage 2. stage 2 thereupon returns stage 4 and
the latter stage upon returning reverses stage 8.
The order then stands at 8. With stage B re- 5
versed, its anode terminal f is at high potential
which is applied through resistance means to the
grid .of triode BX causing the triode to become
conductive. With .the triode conductive, it is effective to block stage 2 against reversal. A ninth 10
entry pulse turns stage t and the order stands at
9 (stages I and 8 reversed). A tenth entry pulse
returns stage I which thereupon returns stage 8
so that the order has been returned to its initial
o status. The return of stage I by the tenth 15
pulse is ineffective to reverse stage 2 because the
latter is now blocked against reversal by the con-'
ductive tube.BX. The return of stage 8 is effective to restore the tube BX to its non-conductive
status after a' momentary delay determined by 20
the capacitor n.
The value cycle of the register order through
ten steps from 0 back to 0 has been described.
Manifestly, the value cycle may start with the
register order in any other value' position and 25
at the end of the value cycle the register order
will be back in the same· position. The number
of pulses required to effect the 9 to 0 step of the
order is the tens complement of the starting digit.
For instance, if digit 6 is the starting digit, then :10
four entry pulses will step it from 9 to O. This
step is manifested by the return of the last stage
8 of the order to its reset status. As the stage B
returns, a positive carry out pulse appears at its
terminal c.
,'C!
6. Electronic storage

Electronic storage is part of the electronic
calculating section (see Fig. 20) and may be
considered as temporary number storage. There
are eight similar electronic storage units designated ESI, ES2, ES3 . . . ESl and ESB (also
see Figs. 1 and 22). Each unit has twenty columns of digit storage capacity, each column consistingof the four binary positions, as now understood.Fig. 21 shows a typical electronic storage
column. Triggers B, 4, 2 and I are the digit storage elements per se of the column. Entry into
electronic storage may be made from the Internal
In bus-set 'Or alternatively from the correspondingly numbered .out bus-sets. Readout or exit
from the electronic storage units may be into the
Internal .out bus-set or alternatively into the
correspondingly numbered In bus-sets.
There are eight pilot units (see Fig. 1) hereinafter designated PILI, 2, 3 . . . 1 and B. In a
manner described later, each pilot unit provides
five control and timing signals for the correspondingiy numbered electronic storage unit.
These signals are (Fig. 21): Cancel signal ESC,
two alternative entry signals Int to ES and .out
to ES and two alternative exit signals ES to Int
and ES to In. The cancel signal and the ES to
In signals are positive while the other three
signals are negative, as they come from the pilot
unit.
For entry into electronic storage from an Internal In bus column, there are four tubes Int
En 8, 4, 2 and I, (Fig. 21) conditioned respectively
according to the permutation of different potentials representation of a digit on the In bus column. For entry into electronic storage from an
Out bus-set column, there. are four tubes deSignated Out En 8. 4, 2 and I conditioned or not
conditi~ned selectively according to the permuta-

GO

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

24

tion of different digit potentials representative
of a digit on the .out bus-set column.
When an entry into an electronic storage unit
from the Internal In bus-set is called for, the
correspondingly numbered pilot unit emits the
signals ESC. and Int to ES concurrently but the
latter signal has twice the duration of the former
signal. The ESC signal operates two standard
cancel circuits (Figs. 17 and 21) such as previously described and which respectively effect the
resetting of the digit storage triggers in columns
1 to 10 and 11 to 20. The entry signal Int to ES
is inverted by t.ube 9, Fig. 21, to a positive signal
which operates the conditioned ones of the tUbes
Int En, causing them to reverse the related triggers as soon as the cancel signal ends. .
When entry into an electronic storage unit
from the correspondingly numbered .out bus-set
is called for, the correspondingly numbered pilot
unit concurrently produces the signals ESC and
.out to ES. The signal ESC resets the digit storage triggers while the signal .out to ES is inverted
by tube 10 to a positive Signal which operates
the conditioned ones of the tubes .out EN, causing them to reverse related triggers.
For exit from an electronic storage unit to the
Internal .out bus-set, four tubes Int Ex 8, 4, 2,
and I are provided for each column. The sup.,..
pressors of these tubes are respectively coupled
to the anode terminals t of the correspondingly
numbered triggers in the same column. When a
trigger is reversed, manifesting storage of ablnary digit, it applies increased potential to the
suppressor of the correspondingly numbered tube
lnt Ex, thereby conditioning the tube. If exit
from an electrOnic storage unit to the Internal
.out bus-set is called for, the correspondingly
numbered pilot unit produces the negative Signal
ES to Int which is inverted by tube 12 to a positive signal for operating the 'conditioned ones of
the tubes Int Ex causing them to apply reduced,
digit representing potentials on the related buses
of the Internal .out bus-set.
For exit from an electronic storage unit to the
correspondingly numbered In bus-set, there are
for each column, four electron tube lack couples
In Ex C and four respectively related tubes In
Ex. Each couple has its right hand tube (as
shown) connected to the grid terminal g of the
correspondingly numbered trigger .. Accordingly,
the tubes la, 2a, 4a and Ba of the In Ex C couples
assume the same conditions as the right hand
tubesof the correspondingly numbered digit storage triggers. When a trigger is in reversed condition, storing a binary digit, the related tube
la, 2a, 4a or 8a is cut off. When exit from an
electmnic storage unit to the correspondingly
numbered In bus-set is called for, the pilot unit
sends a positive going signal ES to In to the tube
II which applies the negative going counterpart
Into In to the tubes 8, 4, 2 to I of the In Ex C
couples. Those couples which have been partially
cut off by the· reversed triggers are now completely cut off,so as to apply increased potential
to the correspondingly numbered tubes In Ex.
These tubes become conductive and apply reduced potentials to the associated lines only of
the four comprising one column of the In busset. Thus the permutation of reduced and nonreduced potentials on the four lines represent
the digit stored in the Electronic storage column.
As may be understood from the foregOing description and now with reference to Fig. 22, all
the eight electronic storage units are connected
via their respective tubes Int En (Fig. 21) to the
common Internal In bus-set. However, entry

ZS

__ 'be made front tbill cotnmonbtls:.setmu,
one selectedtlllit" only upon receipt of an lnt to'
Ila' entry signal from· the corresponding pilot
unit. In short, only a selected one at a. time of
tbe entry signals (Fig. 22) Int toES', Int to ES2 6'
• • . Int to ESl iUld 1nt to EB8 will bE! applied to
ESI,1 ... 1 3,nd.S respeetively.
Likewise, all jibe eight electronic storage units
have cit connections via their respeet~ve Int Ex
tubes: (Fig. 21) to the common Internal Out bus 10
(Fig. 22) but only a selected one at a time of the
ex1t signaJs ESI to Int, ES:l to Int . . . ESl to
lIlt and Eal to Int will be produeed, so.that only
a aelected one of the electrOnic stoxage units at
a. time will read out upon the common In.ternal 15
OUtbus-set.
Each of the eight electronic: storage units has
lUI. en.try receiving connection: "VIa, its:, Out: Ein
tubes" 1;0 It cor:respond!n!lJy nUmbered one of the
~ht;Out:. bus-sets.
In· this case any I(!umber 20
Qf; tl!Ie entry. signals OUt to ES~, 2 ... 1
CPlg.. ») may be. produ~ed concur:rentl¥ so that,
nvmbers from the Out bus.;-.,ets may 1:l'e a,PPIi~d'
cotlcUlT!'ently to a pll1ralitY't;Jf the electl'oriic sOO1"age unIts. Liltewise the eight electronic' stOl'- 25
aege units have mdivfdu3Il exit connections via
t:tJ.e oouples in EX C and tubes IN, EX to' the cortespmdmg In b~-ge1jg ~ to If. Any number of the
exit t:imUlg' si.gnafs- ES'J to: In, ES2: to:rn . . . ESJ
ts. Dlc (JIig: 22J may' be applied' concurrently so 30
that a pftrrsllty' of' el'ectl'OOic' storage' units ma.y·
j)e,read out concurrently upon tfietr respectiVe

28

receive numbers frOm the 1ft bus-sets and soore
them until CliLlledout for transmission along. the
Oat bus-sets. Cetta.in of the relay storage units
also serve to control the printing unit, as will be
explained in Section 21. There are ten sets of
storage' relays, designated. the If, " 2 . . . 9 sets,
of which th-e 0: anel 9 sets are- diagrammaticallY
and partially shown in: F'l.g.., 28. Each set has fif"teen storage unitB and each unit has tvJentY columns 01 storttge' relays for sooting a nuniber 1h
binary decimal form.
The fifteen units in Ii. set which do the actual
storing are reSpectiVely conrtecta,ble to a common
In1Jut cable via the- points of fifte~i1· separate
Unit In telays generally deSignated U "in" (see
Fit. 29). which Unit In: relays are cOntrolled by
the program"M desCl'ibtkl later. The fifteen
units Of a relay storage set arE! also confi{ictable
respele· has' M iridividtHtl wires' which
In. l m s ' - a e W i '
a;tlf; nmnDeted I to 84, over which· t-he perniutaAe statedi JJTeviGual'y, in tl1-e'Gerreraf DeserfptiOn:s of voltage' COIiditlonS representative 0( tl:ie
tlon, all numbers on the Out bus-setseI1tel'" elec- 35 dlgitg to be stored are transmitted. WIres f to
~. I!taz.age' UnIts' 110 13e routed therethrough
00 pertain t"& the binary' positions Cif digit coltrfselei3te associated sackets
~m amL t~ sook-et,a, RS-GII'J? 00.. the wir.es
of, tae Input" cable.: of, the relay, stomge, set;, can,..
taming-, the se!ected::unit. 'Fha· reduced potential')
on the' wires: of, the. Input, cable ar.e-i fur.thar apPlied via. tbe, aotive: Unit In, to one; side: ofl the
pick~"coils, p, oL,. the- sel.entad, relay, unit and, tJ:>.e
oirouitaofJ. these IelaM ooiLs"are completed to. the
+150, "': line., Sinsa, thee volro,ge is: reduced, on one
side:ol. the"selectecLcoil&"thes6'particular,pick-llI)
ooi1& are., energizea fDHowecL l;Jy the, energJ,zation
oJ:; 1l:Iae, hold. aoils. h-" so that, thE, pa:l:ticumr: nwn':
bar entellad.in, the. .selected storage. unit .i&.stOl;ed
therein.,
.
In.a.manner, explained later iIt Section-ll,the
wagram, on sequencing means, may" call for; a
numbeJ: to:be·rea.tLoilt .. of. a.rela~, st9rageunit"by
bri~ging about the mergization of the. rela~(i.cl
Unit, Out.. Also;, the ,sgc.ll"enCQ. means wlll, br'll1g
8tQaut..theo energi"l;ation, at. a, Group"QutJn.acGorrt".
ance.with,whioh.electronic,stol'age. unit is. t.o. 1'.e,
Ce1l1-6 the Iilllmbm;, from, the_ selec.t'ed relay. storage
unit.. Ui:)ontlie.energ.izatioll,of the,seThctoo.. Uhit
Out: and Grollp' Out, a, forwarcL signar is, trans,.
mitted-.from the. -FI5I1v; som'ce" over. the dotted
I1be. (Fig; 29)~ and. through, the. Roints b~ Qfthe
unit'In (wIDen· cannot, be. energjzed"on read::'out)'
associated with. the selected storRge un.it and
t1terrce, via tfte contacts; til' of the Ulrit' Out made
active. by' tlte pn>grzm, to' the wire S't of' ttle ont
callYe of the' relllystorage:g;raup-, ann vi'a the. car'"
resgondlng:contacts ts af:th-e'a'ctive' Cftaup Out to
the lfus; rrt
the' a'SSUc!attrd Out. bus-set: Tfie
fUrwn;rd~ signa:r goes to',. tne- pjlbt: unit: associated
with. the eH~ctron1C storage unit' carresponaiITg' to
the act1ve Clraup Out' and.' the' comrected' 0ut
OtlS>-set. In. ai' manner whicijwllI Ire' expJhined
Slt&etIuent'ly; tlie'fonvaTdsigna:l notine8'the pilot
umt~ sa; 00" Spell,!:'; that'tHe- selected' relay storage
mit ~ reatijr·· to- transmit 11n& number. It' mnty
He notedesirc¢ Gl'oup

of'

30

(J:ttIU are! emIl'3iZe!t•... Re.adbut.mlXWita: are; tbEl1'~
upmJ., selectil'ely,

Y,{ SP.l.U'c~
the-:storamtunit,~'
sOO);ing: the, number: to b~r r.ead

closed:. ftomr t.he: +150:

via the closed points b of
('lased: pafuts> are
J,.

out•. the:, connected pointS', ot its: 'Onit:. Out" to

soolWt:s\R~P.E';plugWiresto.socket:s;

RS:-GQP

oUhe,bank related m;that seleetedGl',OUp Qut;,~d
via-,contacts:; of. the; latterr to- bus; columns 1 to: 211
of. t.he,.relatea, Out'bus,.~t-:. In' thia way, the'datao
w:. im. t-he~ fOl'm of. a llumbe:l': stored: in, a., relay stor·
age unit is/read .out as increased potentials'WRCod
on the selected permutation of btlSeS';, of . the seleeted Out bus-set (Fig. 21) and this number is
entered in the associat~d' electronic storage unit
Ui: when: the latter receives' its.: entr~' sigpIU Qui,: to
BS'.(as'descl:ibed ahQ:v:e;in;Secti.on6t.
TheJ'plugp.oa;r::d for ai relay. stOrag~· se.t;is, sho,w:n
in:: simplifie'd" diagnlIpmati.c; form in, E'ig .. 30.
There: ill: one: such plugboallQ'lforeach of 1;J:le' ten
ZIl relaY'stomge:st\.ts.;
'If.

25

:ro.

3~

4A}

46

00.

Gu,

00

66

7.0

1;5

Dial'.storage,
.

Besides: rel~ystor8.g#l (Section . n, and. ~a
storage. (section 9),) the mlloChiIle, pr,oyldessotller;
sources· for, values, Qnesuch. sour.ce,is,diaLstpl.1.age., Rep.resentative,of dial storAge Qf
dial sw.itches ate: G.onneetable through, contacta
a., of, dial storage: Qr.oup, auts "to" B: to' the Out
but-sets, 1 to: a, respectiv~, Fig. 23., indicates
th:e Group: Ouis:. 1" .. and; 8~ Each' GXOUR Ou~
includes:: ai ~up relaY.'. designa.ted DS;...cro and
contacts' a. operated by, the; relay" Ib: a. manner
which. Will, be:. explained· in·. Seetionl1" the. pro,.
!Il~m., Iilf sequence, means. may. select. any of. the
eight Groups Outs of. dial· stoi-ag~ set #3. fOIl
operatiQIll Assume, 101' instance; that Group
em I, is, selected; i. e•. r~ :D&-GOJ. is, energ:ized b¥ the. program.
Digit x:epresentlngpo,.
t.entials, thereupon will· be applied through. each
Glial switeh. o.olumn ta. the: corresponding column
of· Out bus"-set L For instance" if. the: column
a dial sWiteh: i&. ad.tusted to, 7".tben potenUal
wtll be~ applied' tn the 1, 2, and· 4, output .lines,. of
this dial' swatch and, thenoe' by, way' of the. 8$1";
soeia.iedconta.cts, a: ~,sYro+lp Out I.to< 1ih~ ~

'32

31

4; 3 and 2 1.11 column·2 of Out' bus..set I which
respectively represent binary #1, binary #2 and
biliary #4 (Fig. 4a).
'Along with the application of the digits, stored
in the dial storage bank, to an Out bus-set, a 5
forward signal is applied to bus 81 of this Out
bus-set. The forward signal starts from the
+150 v. line and is routed through the contacts
81 of the active dial storage Group Out to bus
81 of the related Out bus-set. The purpose of 10
the forward signal will be explained in Section
16b, Item 24b.
9. Tape storage

Tape storage comprises three banks 1, 2 and
3, each with ten tape stations. Selection of a
tape station is controlled by the sequence means
in a· manner described in Section 11. Fig. 31
diagrammatically shows the essehtial elements
for transmitting information from a tape storage bank to any of the Out bus-sets I to 8. Associated with each station are two outlets called
station selectors A and B. All the stationseiectors A are associated with a common set of
plug sockets ASSP. All the station selectors B
are' associated with a common set of sockets
BSSP.The information at a station may be
read out alternatively through its A or its B
station selector, as determined by the sequence
means; For each bank of tape storage stations,
there are eight Group Outs, each Group Out
associated with a different one of the Out bussets. Each of the Group Outs is connected to
a separate set of plug sockets Ts:-GOP. The
sets of plug sockets ASSP and Bsspmay be
plugged in any desired combination to the sets
of plug sockets TS-GQP, depending on which
of the' Out bus-sets are to receive information
from stations through their A selectors and
which of the Out bus-sets are to receive information 'from the stations through their B selectors. At this point, it may be brought out
that if each station had only one outlet, then in
order 'that a station in the bank be capable of
rea'ding out a number into any of the eight Out
bus-sets, it would be necessary to connect the
sensing brushes of the ten stations in the bank
through the one station outlet to all of the eight
sets of sockets TS-GOP. Under this condition,
it would be impossible to read out more than
cine station of a bank at a time in view of the
fact that selection of an outlet from one station and the concurrent selection of the outlet
from another station along with selection of two
Group outs concurrently, would result in the
reading out of the numbers from both selected
stations upon both selected Out bus-sets. But
it is desired to .be able to read out at least two
of the stations of a bank simultaneously upon
tw() different selected Out bus-sets. To attain
this object, each station is provided with the
two outlets, station selectors A and B. Only
one A outlet in a bank and only one B outlet
in the same bank may be selected simultaneously. The sockets ASSP or BSSP may be
plugged to all of the eight Group Out . plug
sockets T8-GOP, if it is desired to read out only
one' station at a time upon any selected Out
bus-set. If it is desired to read out at least
two stations of a bank simultaneously, then
sockets ASSP are plugged, for instance, to a
group of four of the sockets sets TS-GOP and
the sockets BSSP are plugged to the remaining
!oursets of plug sockets TS-GOP. Then, the
outlet A of one station and the outlet B of anbther station may be ,operated, simultaneously

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

and two selectedOroup Outs, one plugged,.to
sockets, ASSP and the other plugged to sockets
BSSP may be operated to select the Out bussets upon which the numbers from the two selected stations may be respectively but simultaneously applied.
As understood now, the selection of a station
in a bank to read out upon a selected Out bus'set requires the operation of one of its station
selectors A or B and the Group Out associated
with the desired Out bus-set. Each of the station selectors A comprises a gang relay ASS
(see Fig. 32a) and each of the station selectors
B includes a gang relay BSS. The station relays may be differentiated by a prefixed nUlD.ber corresponding to the associated station; e. g.,
relays lASS are associated with station I. Each
of the two relays ASS andBSS at a stationoperates contacts :; to 80 (Figs. 4a and 32a) wired
to the station brushes RB which sense index
positions 3 to 80 (Fig. 4a) in record colmnns
1 to 20. Each brush at the station is wired to
one side of a contact of the station relay ASS
and a parallel contact of the station relay BSS.
The other side of the contact of ASS is wired
to a plug socket of the ASSP bank. The other
side of the BSS contact is wired to a socket of
the BSSP bank. The correspondingly numbered
ASS contacts of all the stations are wired in
common to the same plug socket ASSP and
similarly the corresponding contacts of the BSS
relays of the stations are wired in common to
a corresponding plug socket BSSP. It is seen
that if the ASS relay of a station is active, then
its contacts connect the read brushes RB to
columns 1 to 20 of sockets ASSP (also see Fig.
34), while if the BSS relay of this station is
active, its contacts connect the read brushes to
the colmnns 1 to 20 of sockets BSSP (also see Fig.
34).
Each of the tape storage Group Outs includes
a gang relay TS-GO (see Fig. 32c) and contacts
operated thereby. Contacts 3 to 80 of the Group
Out (see Fig. 32a) are wired each at one side
to columns 1 to 20 of the associated sockets
TS-GOP and at the opposite side to columns
1 to 20 buses of the associated out bus-set. The
relays TS-GO and the sets of sockets TS-GOP
may be further identified by a sumxed digit corresponding to the associated Out bus-set; e. g.,
TS-G08 and TS-GOP8 are associated with
Out bus-set 8. The' relays TS-GO are selected
by the sequence or prograIIl meahs in the manner described later in Section 11. Such selection circuit ,w11l connect ground to that one of
sockets TS-GOSI to 8 (Fig. 32c) wired to the
desired relay, and the cirCuit will be completed
through the desired relay to the +50 v. line.
The grounding of socket TS-GOS I, for instance, will establish the circuits of gang relays
TS-GOI, the circuits being completed to the
+50 v. line. Only a few of the elements of
TS-GO I (several relays), T8-G01, and TS-G08
are shown, as illustrative,the others TS-G02
to 6 being in a similar arrangement and connected to sockets TS-GOS2 to 6 (Fig. 53b).
Likewise, the sequence means selects either the
ASS or BSS relayofa desired station. Considering, for instance, relay lASS (Fig. 32c) , the
sequence means will ground the socket IASPP
connected by plugging to IASP and a circuit
will thereupon be completed via a normally
closed relay point IACLa through the relay lASS
to the '+50 v. line.' Energized relay IASS will
shift the contacts IASSa so that when. the pick

33

--'"',

34'

UP .2cillltlihot:, :thet(l'lf1ay.:::;dmps;,11ihe: r:e],ays):will
lays/ACL and~ ,CCu:"for; controlling,: points -in the
momentartly:; ~rlWl8in 0 I,tQerCized ':,~ through: the
path ,fot.j',cthe: i ,fo.r:ward£ 'signal ',from" the' station.
sbiftedc:points IJand, a.cseries;ic:aJl&citor. It~w.ill
Eacru~of theseu,paths:.;also extends. through the
berecognized:..that.,,thEKpoints:: a;!oLJASS,:along
COl1tact\8 I .iof:;:eitmer~the, ASS:or"BSS relay aswlth:the::assodated (capac!tor,:and~'resi8tor :con-", 5: s(}f:iatedJiWithC:the;::station.,i,~Al1':ithepoints 8 I, of
stitutei~an,ara: &upp,ressor '8m'angvnent.
the\Telaysf,ASS:,care:',:conneeted in 'common to
"The,: dataudes1gnated,::e>n; a;,:1ine' of.the.:tape
SGIekEtsuAFS:'1itnd::ali::the ;points 8hof the,relays
under the;read::brushes:'of ;)ther:selected ,[station
BSS:;M'e::cOQ;l,munllt wired:.tcy the:sockets,BFS.
are :read:;out.~while,;:the'.record',.ta:pe:js: at,"rest.
,:d:niresponse,:.to"receipt of. a:forwa'rd signal; a
A' typiCal :readnut, ',d.reuit.;,is :':'fF!rom ,the +150' v ..l 10,( Ililot,:Ut1it"u,dl1:.BIDeratec:to 'proUucElthe, entry timline ;:(F,ig; : 32a }:: '1ihrqugh~,the,:QOmmon,. :brusht:;B,
ingrm,gnaLOUt; te;ES (see ;Figs, 21,;and 22) , causthe contact cylinder II b, the brush RE3 seIl$ing
ingi.:theinformatiun;applied from ,the 'record tape
a perforationJn ,binary PDsition,2, column l:~see
to,; the:,QmtdlUs-set:-tobe entered dnto the corF,ig; ..4a), ;then ,v.ia:;CI;on~ct ::iASS3,or,dBSS3 :,(der,C6Ponding::ele£trol'1ic\storage~,unit.
pending,:on~whether"the" "ASS:' or J:BSSxe}ay.: 15 .l.!Atter,: the'; pilot ,unik llas;~sent "forth the entry
has ,been,energiz~cD;: to.~::the.;;Pl~g, :rocket,', 2. ;:. in
signal" i:t.:s:ends:out .3, 'Move 'signal,:.generally .desigcolumn 1.0f-.,:ASSP~ {see,':Fig{ ':i4);,:ordo ,t,he' corIinted'/ 6MS. ;;'l'his.;:isi/;lnaLis a 'negative going
responding, SOCli;et.L',BSSP,:: ajc' piug;':;cQUllectiQn
Ilulse)Qnnthe,imsa8t:-of>the Out bus~set:associfrDm,:saythe. ASSP(l.ock~t,':to:the,.jQQrr~ponding
at-edylJiith.tha.alilot unit ..'[:Depending on the .. prosocket'.',of ,'TS~P I rufoJ;;:iJastance;;.Md '. via,::tbe,:r 20':; gxam; or·.:OOding,' ,the:;M0,vel ~igJ.ial will:or will not
contact$3.'.of .TS:..GOf, to.;'bus: 2•.~coIJlmn La! the
be,t.efi'e,ptive:·,to,praduce a~step_'olL advance of. the
out bus.-set '. •.
~ted 'staMon; "from:; whIch,i,the ,information
, ,The" abqve: i cil:oUit:,an~ies)jncr.ea$e(b potent~al
hasdJeen;'r.ead"out. hFor. each; tape: storage group.
to a. bus,. of the,.out bu&~~t.', ,'1i'hisi,ill~el'!.se4 pothe.re :are two ,ma:vrerelaySs MA:,and,MB (Fig. ,32c) .
ten tialc, is ,:@Piied :::to ::,:the:,:,supp~essor;ot:: a," tube:, 25:' IL'the lpr,Qgram::, calls: for, 'the.,., movement oithe
Out., En. (see" mg. ;,21) ~.:o{ ;t,h~, electroniC·,f;!tors,ge
tape'! :ohany:' selected t A ,station selector in the
unit., 8ssociated':wlth, :~the . . seleeted Out. PJl!!-set.
g:rQUp;, thel'1;~the:relay,jMk :wilL,.be, energized. If
In·. the ,foregQing manner;:~t:he ,infQtmati9n'.~t'td
th!e),prC)gnl,m c;:aJIs" for;!mo.vementlof .thetape to
out:of 8;'design~ijQn line.:,ofl,the';tapeat' the,seanU' :;;tationl'selector-B'im,the(group then. the relected station; is 'ireRresented ,'by) increJlsed ,. pO":. 3m lay(MR';will:!Jje:.'enermzed,,' £.Itds; clear that since
tentials"seleottv~y"f)pp.l~ntQ: the~,;tubes cput.';En
two; statiQl'lS!:>,in, a:,ygraup ,may be 'read . out oonassociated witb;theeleelroni:e stor~geunit fi,xe~ily
QI:H·Xe;o.tIY;"'Qne ;t.hrough its') A,station.selector
relateddto (:the ,_fltled .out; b.uSr-set.: (see:$ecanil.,th(;rPther; ·tbmugh;its: Bistation,selector; that
tion .6) .
bQth., the j\:rell'lys,:{MA;,3and :C'MB. . may, ,be .·simultaAt the"Sa.Ine: time r.,that dthe; JnfQ-lmatjon "IJ;'Ol!k 35'. neously energized. When the program-ccalls, for
the, l'eeord"taplb is"Il;PPlUld."to', tl1e ,selected,:Qut
n1Ovemant~o~·a;:.\tapei;at a',station which has been
bus~set, a 'fQ:rwa,rd#?igna}, i&lappl~d,to: Jhe Jjus·SI
r~d,oll~:jJll~OUgh.;its selectol'A~thenthesequence
of this'llame ,bus:-set. ;,AssunU.pgptPat. station I
met\PINU:lerates 'in Q,manner)deseribed in Section
is ,being l1ead. out: to,out;bus;,set, I,. ,the,forw3lrd
11 c,tQ" I\pply ;gil:ound ,to;, a,;sacket.· MAPP'" plugged
sig.nal pircuit ·extend!! f:r;'Qm; the +150 v. ·line,, 40' tQ<;'~rtt~el'!lby iestalilishingJthecircuit of rethrough, normally ·closed, ; is,npw,:,:to ibe,;'advanced a single
is ready to, be'·:~tered\intQ:::eJectronic .stot:~ge
s~p .. ,'J-the' plug socket
the forwardsigna:bfroDli elliChrot"th~Ften·stations
82Jfot::}TI.$~ I. ';' This; socltet"may, ,be 'plugged
of. a:ltalpe23to~ge .gllOUP.,£ Group Ins I and 3 assoas it is fUlly 'explained~ln:;:theaforement1oned
ciated With In'bus-sets I and S. ,'Ea'ch'Group
co-pending"allplication. '::It 'is:sufflcient::to'state
In includes a. gang' relay TLU':"GI and contacts 4.0 that when aTableOUt;relaY:1s:.energized it-comI: to· ,SO connected to columns 1 "to '20 'buses of
pletes, a Circuit-through the.,retay:"ASS,:or BSS
the related Tn bus-set. Thecorresporiding conof the station : (selected :by.::the internal operatacts l-to·:SO,.of·:·all eight! Group,:Ins are comtion of the- table, look,;,tip):.containing: the.semanly connected:tosockets l:to "SO,'of a group
lected tape:a;rgum:ent. and:funclionvalues ..' The
of plug sockets BP. ' These sockets are variously
selected'station.relay::eloses Jts;,:contacts: I:"to
plugged to plug.'sockets I :to"22 of the different 45 SO connected'to·:the::read"brUslres :.of..the-:tape
at the 'Statton -:selected, .It: is ,to: ,be noted
groups':of sockets' ·ITPt& '6TP.'E'ach group of
sockets TP - is: :connected ·through'·: contacts I
that each Table -Out·:inc:ludes:·. a; :set,:of:' Ai: conto 22' of a Table'In relaY'TL to elements of the
taets 3 to SO ,and a' Set :oLB ',:contacts Ito :'SO'.
teinpora'ry computed argument storage . device,
The contacts 3 to SO of all the station relays ASS
whichincIUde'relaiYs'T0AI to:22. The corre- 50 are connected in. comnron, to ,p01nts 3:to'SO;,respondlngcontacts I to"'22of the differentresJ)ectively, of the .dltrerent ...sets ..:'A:to'.6A'oplaysTL I to· TL5 are commonly connected to the
era ted by: the six Table' Out 'relays ITO. to· 6TO.
relay elementsTCAlto'~22', respectively.
Likewise,the .contacts' 3':'td SO:of, all:the statton
',Assume; for-instance; that a computedargu-:relays BSS are connected in: common .to,aU'the
ment isto be used ,to select ti tape argument from 55 B sets of contacts3toSO. The contacts 3toSO
table I 'and that: the computed argument 'is to
of each A and B'set terminate;at A,and B- sets,
beder1ved from electronic storage unit I. The
respectively, of plug socketsR03t080, These
sequence means'(Section 11) will cause the table
are variously pluggablei':'according',to requirelook';;UpGroup'In relay TLU.:.GII to be energized
ments to the sockets ROGI·w ROGS. Sockets
and' also 'will ·caUse,.the Table InrelayTLI'to 60 3 to SO in each set of socket!fROG:are connectbe energized.' The· computed argumerit is limited
able via contacts 3 ·to'SO"Of a'Group Out to
1nthe presentcase't6 a five decinialplacenumcolufims lt620·busesoftherelatedOut bus-set.
ber and a:sign, .. Sychdeeimal placenumbetand
Assume; fol"instance;'that station lisin-tuble
sfgnoecupy 22 binary' term' positions. 'Therefore, 65 fj and that a' selected ,value" iSJto' be'~read' out 'of
any' of thesockets'BPI-to' SO may be plugged to
station I through o'lltlet'tASs'and'uponOut busthe sockets tto22-of'the sets ITP to' 6TP .. After
set I. Further,assume that the 'table out- relay
the energization: of rela.ys: T110~GU and' TLI,6TO and tablel0ok~up relay TLU.:.aOI:have'be-en
the' 'coinputed:atgument present on the buses of
energized. Accordingly, readout circuits· wiHbe
In ,bus-set ,'wi1l··betransmitted;'aswill be ex- 70 establi'Shed from'the +150v.line through 'the
plained"further in·Sectiorf,'20, -by'way'of the
sensing means' for' station: I,'contacts 3 to"SO'of
contacts of.the:Group 'Inl to·'the:plug 'sockets
TASS, 'contacts 3 ttVSD'of--the6A'set'operated'by
BP and via.pIUggiOgto'socketsl'to22' oilTP,
'l'elay"STO,' thence to sockets"'RO"of'ti1e 6Aset
tbence::by way,ofthlf"contacts f to ':22'of'TLI
and'byp,lugging-:to"sd'Ckets f::t v. line thrOUgh the relay, a 'series reslsdescribed in Section8on Dial storage. Briefiy,
tor, the relay stick points a, and via ncrm:allY30 the internal wiring of a dial switch is such that a
Olosedpoints of a relay AIR, to ground.
decimal notation digit set up on the dial will
With respect to the duo":wound, 40r '6-posibe read out in binary decimal form. The wires
tionA! 'relays, their pick-up coils pare connect8, 4,2 and I coming from a dial DSI are asM directly via pOints aof AS to the :proper busessociated with relay contacts SfRa. There are
of In bus":set 1. An energizing :ch'cuit may be 35 four contacts for each dial and they connect to
oom:pleted from such bus, when at reduced paten-the buses 8, 4, 2 and I in column 19 or 20 of
tisl, Via a pOlhtASa through the piCk up coil P I n bus-set 1 or 8. As shown in Fig. 40, the dial
And to the +150 v. line. 'The compimion hold
DSI (tens) is set at 0, the dial DSI (units) is
coil h of the relay is then energll'Jed by 'a circuit
set at 1, and the dials DS2are set at 02. The tens
from the +50 v.line througbthe hold coil, the 40 and units dials DSI are respectively connected
-relay stick pOint «antinormnUy ClosedAlRa
through the contacts SIRa to the buses in colpaints to ground.
umns 19 and 20 of In bus-set 1. Similarly, the
When a relay AI is energized,it closes its points
tens and units dials nS2are connected by points
b, an Ulustrative pair of which are shown in Fig.
S2Ra to columns 19 and 20 of rn bus-set 11. In
41, to pick upalnultiple number ofrehl.Ys AOP. 45 order to enter the artificial line of sequence data
A typical pick-up eircuIt'extends froln the +50
into sequence storage, the operator closes
v.line through a pluraHtY'of relays Aop (inpar-switchesSS I and SS2(Fig. 40a) or either one.
alle1) and via a noW" elosed pair of pOints Alb to
The closure of the switch SSI establishes the
ground. A hold Circuit f-6r the plurality cf relays
circuit of relay SIR from the +50 v. line through
AOP ism:ade from the +50 v. line, through the 50 the relay and the switch to ground. Likewise,
plurality of relays 'and via -One or more of the
the closure of switch SS2 est,ablishes the -cirrelay stick points :a ,llelcondenser and resistor arrangethrough the switch arm of this dial, to the "7"
ment,as indicated for cine of the 'contacts in
'segment in the inner circle and thence to the "1"
each of Figs. 37 and-H.
60 output wire and the connected points S~Ra to
Porsimpllcity, onl.y a .few of the circuits for
bus I, column 19. of In bus-set T; another circuit
the AI and AOP relays in the S.lSeqA side of
would be established from ground through the
sequence storage have been .Shown, the othercirswitch arm, the "7" segment in the second circle
cutts being similar. There are duplicate sets 'of
and via the output wire ,2 and the connected
relays AI and .AOP Jor theS2Seq A side of se- 65P6ints SIRatobus 2, column 19, In bus-set 1;
quenre storage (see Figs ..39 and 43). However,
·alid a third ·circuit would be established from
it is understood that the relays AI in theS2Seq
ground via the switch arm, the "7" segment in
A sice are energized selectively under control of
the outer circle to the "4" output line and via
eieetl'Onic storag€ unitESB acting via In bus "set
1!onnected;points S~Rato :bus '4, column 19,In
:8. Also, the t-erminll.;ls S2G8, -4 and 2 andS2P8. 70 bus-set 1.
... 6ti1d. 2 (F;g.39) con'espond to the similarterIt is clear now that upon the ·closure 'of
minalll -S-IG and SIP {Fig. 37) . The terminals . switches· SSI and SS!, .reduced(ground;) _potenBI!O are connected to the amplifiers shown in
tial will be selectively applied to the buses of
Fjg. 77~ and the outputs of th~e ampijliers 'Rreeolumns 19and20o! In bus-sets 1 and B accordBirectedtothe terminals S2P;"
75. ingto thelS.1 andS2'data. set 'on the "dial sWitches

~,6S6,672

43

44

nSI and nS2. These reduced potentials may
and 4ci), of the Q field. Further, if reference is
being made toa sUbfield of anyone of a ·plurality
serve in the same way as the reduced potentials
of fields, the sequence storage relay may bl'! desigproduced on the buses under control of electronic storage units ESl and ES8 to enter the SI
nated simply by the subfield letter followed by
and S2 data into the A or B side of sequence 5 the order designation; e. g., r200 designates a restorage, depending on which side is open. Actuallay for storing 2 in the hundreds order of subfield
r of any of di1Ierent sequence fields.
ly the artificial line of sequence will be applied
As previously described in Section 2a, the T
to the A side and enter the intermediate storage
relays AI of columns 19 and 20 in the SISeq A·
field is an Out field unless the OP2 code number
side and the S2Seq A side of sequence storage. 10 is 01. To translate this code number into a conThe switches SS I and SS2 are closed only motrol for the T Out trees, the form of tree shown
mentarily by the operator since entry of the S 1
in Fig. 46.is used. This tree includes points a of
and S2 data is efi'ected very rapidly and after
the relays OP2-80, 40, 20, 10, 8, 4, 2 and I. It is
such entry it is desired that the switches be reseen that unless the OP2 code is 01 that the input
opened.
15 of the tree is connected in circuit with the tree
As stated before, the relays AOP provide the
output OPO. If the OP2 code is 01, then the
necessary contacts in permutation circuIts for
shifting of the points a of the relay OP2-1 directs
translating the coded sequence data intO the
the circuit from the input to the output. line
OP-O I. Fig. 46a shows the block diagram repredesignated control functions. Also, tlie relays
AI of columns 19 and 20 operate contacts in 20 senting this OP2 tree.
"early and late" permutation circuits. The BOP
Fig. 44 shows a so-called "0" filter circuit.
There is one such circuit for the r subfieldof
relays and the BI relays of columns 19 and 20
operate similar permutation circuits. In geneach of the sequence fields P, Q, R, T, U and V.
eral the permutation circuits fUnction· to efi'ect a
The purpose of such filter is to prevent certain
conversion from the binary decimal code system 25 operations when the code in a mentioned one of
the r subfields is O. It is evident that unless there
to the single-point decimal notation system. The
chief device for making the conversion is a sois a significant digit in the stated subfield, that a
circuit path will not be established from the
called tree. Although several arrangements of
the tree points are possible, they produce the
+150 v. line through the filter circuit to the outsame result and the choice depends largely on 30 put side of the circuit.
As is now· understood, sequence storage reease of wiring. A preferred tree arrangement is
shown in Fig. 45. This is a full tree and is made
ceives and stores numberscodally representing a
up of points operated by four AOP (or BOP or
line of sequence data.. This sequence data may
AI or BD relays storing the binary decimal terms
instruct the machine to take values out of sources,
of a digit of sequence data. The input to the 35 enter values into receiving means, perform caltree is adapted to be placed in circuit either with
culations such as accumulation, multiplication
the plate of a tube or with ground. When the
and division, efi'ect selected denominational shifts
tube is made conductive or the connection to
of results, and select the sources for the next line
ground is completed, the tree is said to be heated.
of sequence data.
There are ten possible outputs of the tree and 40
The sources from which values may be taken,
these outputs are designated 0, I, 2 ... 9. The
as disclosed here, include electronic storage (Secpoints are so arranged that if the sequence digit
tion 6), relay storage (Section 7), dial storage
is 0, a circuit path is established from the input
(Section 8), tape storage (Section 9), pluggable
storage (Section 23), and the table look-up unit
via the normally closed points la, lib, 4b and2d
to the output terminal "0." If the sequence digit .45 (Section 10). The receiving means for values inis 1, then points la are shifted, and a cIrcuit
clude relay storage and tlie table look-up unit
path is closed from the input via the shifted
and, also a recording unit Section 21) whiCh repoints 1a and the normally closed sides of Sa, 4aceives the values from an assigned relay storage
and 2b to the output terminal "1." As another exunit. Selection of sources for values is controlled
ample, if thesequellce digit is 7, then the points 50 by the Out fields of sequence data and also by
la, 4a and 4b and the points 2a, 2b, 2c and 2d
the SI and S2 fields. Selection of receiving
are shifted. A circuit path is then establIshed
means for values is controlled by In fields of sefrom the input via the shifted points la, the no"rquence data. Selection of. mathematical calcumally closed side of 8a, the shifted points 4a
lations is controlled by the OPI and OP2 fields of
and the shifted points 2a to the output terminal 55 sequence data. Selection of denominational shift
"7." Similarly, for ariyother binary decimal
amounts is controlled as to the units order by the
coded sequence digit, a circUit path is estabSlll and SH2 fields and as to the tens order by
lished from the input terminaJ of the tree to
the digits 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9 in the s subfields of
the output terminal cOrrespondingw the decimal
fields Q, R,U, and V, the even s numbers also
notation digit represented by the binarydecimal 60 determining right shift and the odd numbers left
terms.
shift (see Section 2a). The SI and S2 fields conFig. 45a shows the block diagram representing
trol selection of the sources for the next line of
a full tree. One or more of the output termlnaJs
sequence data. The P field always is an Out
of a tree related to a column of sequence· da.ta
field, the V field always an In field, the T field is
may be. connected to the inputs ofapluraUty of 65 an .Out field when the OP2. code is any number
other trees. Such an arrangement·· may bereother than 01 and an In field when the OP2 code
number is 01. The Q,. R, and U fields are Out
ferred to as a tree pyramid, which may be represented diagrammatically as indieatedin Fig; 50,
fields .if their respective subfields s contain 3 or
for example. Hereafter, the AOP or BOP relays
less and In fields if their respective subfields s
may simply be identified by the symbol designat..; 70 contain 4 or greater. The operational Signs aping the related sequence data field, sUbfield,~andPlyonlY to Out fields and are determined by the
order or column of· thesuofield .. For example,
numbers 0, 1, 2 and 3 in their subfields s.
the relay Qr200 represents a.. relay for stOring. the
With respect to an Out field, the r subfieldsebinary digit 2 in "the·hundreds order of sUbfield
.leets the value source. and the b subfleld selects
Qr (decimalnotatfon digitcolumn8;$eeFig's; 3 75 the electronic stotagetinltto which the value is

, '1;888;6'72

45

46

to be sent. ,'Selection Of 'the 'electronic-storage
' 'tactswm be closed if the Qr,:sub1ield contains any
unit involves selection of a GrOltP .out andthe'reof the code numbers 010 to 159. At this 'point, the
lated Cut bus-set and pilot unit, (see Figs. 80a to
c,ircuit hasasc'.Crtail1ed that relay storage has
e and 81). When the coding in.the rsubfield in'been called. It Temainsfor thecircuit-tose}ect
dicates that a value is to. be taken from the table 5 ,one of the eighty relay storage Group'Outs. This
look-up unit, the coding also selects the Table
,selection is determined by the digit in the bsubCut relay (see Section 1 0 ) . f i e 1 d a n d by the units place digit in thefsubfield.
With respect to an In field, ther sUbfield seThe b subfield determines which Cut bus-set is to
lects the value receiving means and the b subbe used and must - therefore -make a selection
field selects the electronic storage.unit from which 10 amono;;the eiGht relay storage 'Gl'OUpOtits I to a
the value is to be transmitted. Selection of the
'(-see Section 7). Thus, if the b code number is 1, it
electronic storage unit involves selection of a
:nrakesa, selecEon of Group Cuts I, each of which
Group In and the related In bus-set and pilot
connects to Cut bus-set I. There are ten Group
unit. When the coding in ther subfield relates
Outs #1, one for each of -the 10 'relay storage sets
to the table look-up unit, it also selects a Table In 150 to 9. Selection must be made 'Iiotonly of one
relay (see Section 10).
of the eight ::Jets of Group Cuts but also of a parVarious premutation circuits controlled .by seticular one of ten Group Cuts from the selected
quence storage for translating the numbers codal.set in order that a particular relay storage set
ly representing sequence data into directed selecbe connected to the .selected Cut bus-set. As
tions and operations will be described below. The 20 explained in (lection 7, the units place digit in the
first circuits to be described. are for the. selection
identification number of a relay storage unit
of relay storage Group Outs.generally designated
-represents the relay. st01~ageset containing the
RS-GO.
storage unit. Hence, the selection of a particular
Relay storage Group Outs selection.-·The code
one of the ten relay storage Group Outs from a
numbers for selecting relay storage units (Figs. 28 2,) selected set of these Group Outs is determined
and 29) are the same as the identification numby the code digit in the units order of the rsubbers for these units, except for certain special
field. Therefore, by combIning the control by the
numbers relating to selection of relay storage
b subfield with t.he control by the runits order
units for controlling recording operations. The
code num.ber, a particular relay storage -Group
identification numbers for the relay storage units 80 Out wHl be selected. Considering for instance
are 0 I 0 to 150, 0 II to 151, 012 to 152, 013 to 153,
the Q field, the control by its b subfield is effected
014 to 154, 015 to 155, 016 to 156, 011 to 15T ,018
throug'h ,a Qb tree (also see Figs. 45 and 45a).
to 158, and 019 to J59.When any of these code
The eight output lines I to 8 of this Qb tree connumbers 010 to 159 occurs in the r subfield of an
nect respectively to eight similar Qr units trees
Out field, it brings about the selection of a relay :3,; (8) to (1). Theile units trees (1) to (8) relate
storage Group Cut and the selection of the relay
to the eig'ht sets of Group outs I to-B, respectively.
storage unit.
Thus, according- to the number in theQb tree,
Fig. 47a represents the pyramids controlled by
one of these eight units trees (1) to (8) is sethe Q field in the A and Bsides of sequence storlected, thereby effecting a selection of one of the
age for selecting the relay storage Group Cut ,to eight sets of Gl"OUP Outs. Each of ,the Qr units
multiple relays as-Go. There are eighty of
trees has its ten outputs connecting through
these multiple relays, eight for each of the ten
plugging between sockets RSG and RSO'P (also
sets of relay storage (see Section 7) ,but only a
see Fig. 53b) to ten Group Cut gang relays. Thus,
representative number of the relays are shown.
according to the Qr units .digit, one 'of the ten
Fig. 49a diagrammatically represents the assem- ,j;;Group Outs from the selected set will be operated.
bly of all the pyramids controlled by the several
Considering, for instance, -the (1) units tree, its
Cut fields for selecting the relays RS-GO.
ten 'outputs are connected to the multiple relays
Referring to Figs. 47a and 49a and considering
BRS-GC f to 9RS-GC I. If this (1) tree is selected
the A side, at a time determined by the closure
of the several contacts XMa (see Bection 16b,
by the Qb tree and the Qr units dig,it is 9, then
Item 9), the circuits are tested for completion 50 the relay SRS-GO I will be selected.
The above explanation clarifies the remainder
t.hrough relays RS-GO. For each of the Q, R and
U fields, the circuit extends to contacts XMa by
·of the circuit. The circuit was traced before to
way of normally closed s8 and s4 contacts. If
the output. side of the parallel contacts QrI DO,
both these contacts are .closed, the number in the
QrSO, Qr40, Qr20 and QrU.From there; the cirs subfteld is' 3 or smaller, indtcating" that the field 55 'cuit continues, via X2a contacts, to the input of
is an Cut field. Since theP field always is an
the Qb tree and through this tree to the input
Cut field, the s4 and sa contacts are not needed
of one of the eig-ht Q1' units trees (1) to (8) . The
to test whether the field is an Cut field and the
circuit is completed via the selected units tree and
circuit goes from ground directly to }~Ma conplugging through one of the relays RS-GC assotacts. The T ·field is out if the CP2 coding is ,60 ciated with the selected tree.
other than 01. Hence, for the T field circuit, conAs a specific example; assume the code number
nection is made from ground to the input of an
in the Qr subfield is 159 and the code nwnber in
OP2 tree (also see ,Figs. 46 and 46a) and from the
the Qb field is 1. The circuit will be made, in
OPO output of the three to XMa contacts.
65 -the manner described, to the input of the Qb tree.
Considering now the Qfield and referring to
'As this tree is set to I,. the Circuit will continue to
Fig. 47a, from the XMa contacts the circuit prothe in'put of the Qr units tree (1). The Qr units
ceeds serially through normally closed contacts a
digit is 9, so the Qr units tree (1) directs the cirof Qr8(J0, Qr2l!O and Qr4.00. If all of thesecon-cuit to its 9 output line which is wired to plug
tacts remain closed, the hundreds order digit in 70 socket RSGI-9 (also see Fig. 5'3b)' This will be
the Qr sub field is not higher than 1, -which is a
plugged, normally, to the socket RSGP !-9 and
condition for selection of relay storage. From
the circuit will be completed through l'nultiple recontac.ts a of Qr4DO, the circuit extends to the
lay 9RS-GOI (Fig. 47a) to the +50 v. line. The
common side of parallel contacts a of Qr 100, QT80,
energization of relay !lRS-GOI operates the relay
Qr41l, Qr20, and QrUI. At least one 6f these con- 75 storage Group Cut I for the relaystomge set 9

47

48

'. (see Fig. 28), cOnnecting its Out cable "to output
' 0 inthe'huIidreds order of subfield T, the circuit
bus-set I.
continues through the normally closed contacts b
Each of the contacts XMa is shunted by conof rlOO to the input of the r tens tree in the 010
tacts XMOa (see Figs. 47a and 49a). Relay XMD
to 099 pyramid. But if the code number is I in
is of the delay type discussed in Section 3c and 5 the hundreds order, contacts c of dOO are closed
is in series with relay XM (see Fig. 36), so as to
and the circuit is routed to the r tens tree of
be controlled by the same circuit. Accordingly,
the 100 to 159 pyramid.
after deenergization of XlVI, relay XlVID is still
Assume that the r tens tree in the 0 I0 to 099
. energized and its contacts XMDa (Fig. 47a) repyramid has been heated; 1. e., the circuit to its
main closed to hold the circuit, if previously made, 10 input has been established. This tens tree feeds
through a relay RS-GO. The contacts XMDa
nine r units trees (1) to (9) and according to
are in series with a capacitor XMDC and as this
the tens order digit in the r subfield, one of these
. capacitor charges, the current decays to zero.r units trees is heated. Each of these units trees
Hence, when relay XlVID deenergizes, there is no
has ten outputs wired to plug Sockets RSU (also
arc across its points a. In this manner, the 15 see Fig. 53a). These are plugged to correspondarcing of any of the contacts in the circuits for
ing sockets RSUP which connect to the relay storselecting relays RS-GO is suppressed. The caage Unit Out relays U "out" (also see Fig. 29).
pacitor XMDC is discharged through the nor-Depending on the r units order digit, the heated r
mally closed points b of relay XlVID and a series
units tree will direct the circuit through the conresistor.
20 nected plug sockets and a multiple relay U "out"
The A sequence side circuit shown in Fig. 47a
to the +50 v. line.
has been described. The B sequence side is simiAssume, now, that the r tens tree in the "100 to
lar; its trees and r contacts are operated by
)59" pyramid has been heated. The outputs 0,
.BOP relays in the B side instead of by AOP relays
1,2,3, 4 and 5 of the tree feed five r units trees
in the A side. For the B side, the timing con- 25· (0) to (5), respectively. Each of these units
tacts YMa, YMDa, and Y2a take the place of
trees has ten outputs connected through the menthe contacts XlVIa, XMDa and X2a, respectively.
tioned plugging to relays U "out."
Energization of relays YM, YMD and Y2 will be
It will be observed that the circuit shown in
described in Section 16b, Item 36.
Fig. 48 includes, in effect, a pyramid made up
It is to be noted that the Qb tree is a feeder 30 of a hundreds order r tree (contacts of r800, r400,
tree for the Qr units trees. In other cases, a
4200 and rIOO), a pair of r tens trees fed by the
tens order tree may be used as the feeder for
hundreds order tree, and fifteen r units trees fed
units order trees relating to the same sequence
by the r tens trees. Such pyramid is effective to
field. Also, a hundreds order tree or its equivaredUCe a three-place number to a selection of
lent may be used as a feeder for the tens order 35 the element identified by the three-place numtree. Such an arrangement of trees constitutes
ber. Thus, the fifteen r units trees provide 150
a tree pyramid for translating a plural digit code
outlets, each connected to a different one of the
number into a single directional control oper150 Units Out gang relays U "out," each such
ation. A tree pyramid consisting of a feeder tree
gang relay being associated with one of the 150
superimposed on other trees may be shown dia- 40 relay storage units (see Section 7) .
In the foregoing manner, if the code number
.grammaticalIy in the manner illustrated in Fig.
49a, for instance. A tree pyramid may be idenin the r sub field of an Out field is 010 to 159, one
tifted by its function; 1. e., the pyramids shown
of the relay storage units is selected to transin Figs. 47a and 49a are R~GO pyramids.
mit a number to the Out bus-set selected by the
All the corresponding units order trees of the 45 RS-GO pyramid for this field (see Figs. 47a and
R~GO pyramids in the A and B sides of the
49a) •
P, Q, R, T and U fields of sequence storage conThe table look-up Group Outs selection.nect to common lines leading to the plug socket
Fig. 47b shows the A and B side circuits, of an
RSG, as may "be seen in Fig. 49a.
Out field of Sequence storage, for selecting a table
Relay storage Unit Outs selection.-Fig. 48 50 look-up Group Out (see Section 10). There is a
network such as shown in Fig. 47b for each of
illustrates the permutation circuit for selecting
relay storage Unit Outs (see Section 7), For
the Out fields but for economy of illustration
only a single one of the networks is shown. Each
economy of illustration, the showing in Fig. 48 is
not repeated for each Out field but represents
such network relating to a sequence storage field
the circuit which may be set up under control of 55 is connected to the normally open r200c points
any of the Out fields P, Q, R, T and U. For the
of the field (see Figs. 47a and 49a).
P field, the contacts bof s8 and s4 are omitted
The code for table look-up is one of the numfor reasons previously stated. Also, for the T
bers 281 to 286 in the r subfield. If the field is
field, the contacts b of s8 and s4 are shunted by
an Out field, a circuit through the A side will be
an OP2 tree, for reasons now understood. The 60 established when contacts of relays XIvI and X3
(see Section 16, item 10) close through one of the
circuit, on the A side, is timed by contacts XlVIb,
XMDc and X2b and on the B side by the cortable look-up Group Outs. A similar circuit may
responding contacts YMb, YMDc and Y2b.
be established through the B side when circuits
Considering the A side, upon closure of con-'65 of YM and Y3 close. There are eight of these
tacts b of XM and X2, the circuit extends from:
table look-up Group Outs and their selection is
ground through contacts b of s8 and s4 (for the
determined by the digit in the b subfield.
Q, R, or U fields) to contacts XMb or directly to
For Simplicity of explanation, assume that the
XMb (for the P field) or through an OP2 tree
network shown.in the upper portion of Fig. 47b
(for the T field). The circuit continues via the 70 is the Q field network. Assume, further, that the
normally closed contacts b of rSOO, r400 and r200
Qr number is 285 and the Qb number is 1. A
and thence via XZb to the common blade of
circuit may then be established from ground
contacts band c of rIOO.
(Fig. 47a) via contacts Qs8a, Qs4a, XlVIa, Qr800a,
As previously stated, the relay storage code
Qr200c, the (Q) r2DOc line (also see Fig. 47b),
numbers are 010 to 159. If the code number is 75 .and thence via contacts r400b (of the Q field),

~c;l: ~Ja ~ptlleinptl~

the

or'
via

•

49

of the b.tree (Qfield). 'l;'he
oU"cuit will be routed by this tree and by a plug
wire between sock'ets TLGO and TLGOP (Fig~
53a) through one of the eight gang relays TLUGO,I to TLU-GOB (also see Fig. 35).'
.
5
The, table outs selection.-As explained in
Section 10, concerning the table look-up unit, a
tape argument will be selected from one of six
tables. When this argument is to be read out,
the table out relay TO (Fig. 35) must be ener- 10
~ized" along with a table look-up Group Out.
Code numbers 281 to 21)6 resIJectively identify
iaj:>leslto 6.
.
. Fig. 47cshows the form of circuit for selecting
one of the relays ~TO to 6TO. For the A side, 15
input of the circuit comes from the XMa
rontacts of the related field and for the Bside,
th.e input comes from the YMa contacts (see Figs.
47a and 49a). The circuit continues through coniactsr81l0c, r400d, r200d, contacts b of X3. or Y3 20
(depending upon Whether the circuit is in the A
iIi the B sieie of sequence storage) ; thence
'-';'1 O~d, rBOe, and the r units tree to one of
the output lines 2BI to 286. The circuit is COIDpiete"d via plugging between sockets TOP' and 2:;
'i.opp (also see Fig. 53a) and normally closed
interlock contacts TOea through a table relay
'tg." tc) the +50 v. line. . . .
Tape storage Group Outs selection.-As describoo. in Section 9; there are three banks 1,2 30
l:J.!l.d, 3 of tape storage.' Each bank has eight
Group Outs associated with Out bus-sets I to 8
(see Figs. 31 and 32a) . Selection of a tape storage
Group 0~t therefore requires selec~ion of a tape
I;jto~.a,g~ Qan.k and selection of one of its Group 35
Outs. The selection of a bank is, determined by
the tape. storage code number in an r sub field
aiid selection of one of the Group Outs from this
bank is determined by the digit in the adjacent
b subfield.
40
The code numbers for tape storage stations run
from. 403 to 422 and 503 to' 522 for bank 1; from
433 to 452 an.d 533 to 552 for bank 2; and from
~63 to 4.82 and 563 to 582 for bank 3. It is seen
th.a,t the hundreds order digit 4 or 5 identifies tape 45
storage; that any of tens order digits 0; 1, and 2
identifies bank 1; any of tens order digits 3, 4,
anq 5 identifies bank 2; and any of tens order
digits 6, 7 and 8 identifies bank 3.
Fig. 47b shows the A and B side pyramids of ~o
the Q field of storage for selecting the tape'
storage Group Outs. The input of the pyramid,
in the A side, is connected to the Qr4110e line on
tlle A side (see also Fig. 47a) and the pyramid in
the B side. is connected to the Qr4DOe line on the 55
B side. The timing of· a circuit through the A
side "pyramid is controlled by relays "XM,' X4,
X5" and, X6 (see Section 16b, items 9 and 11).
The timing of a circuit through the B side lscontrolled by relays YM, Y4, Y5 .and Y6 (Section 60
1"~b, Item 3 6 ) , '
.
..
Considering the A side, the circuit path to and
through XM.a contacts (Fig. 47a) is as previQusly traced for the RS-GO pyramids. From
XMa,the circuit extends via QrSOOa and Qr200a 6:5
t.othe common blade of Qr40Da and Qr400e. If
a tape storage code is present in the Qr subfield, Qr4110 is energized and closing Qr400e. The
c~rcuit then proceeds to the input of the Qr tens
tree (Fig. 47b). The outputs 0; I and 2 of the tree 70
aFe commoned and lead via X4a to the input of
the Qbtree # 1 pertaining to bank1.0utput5c 3,
5 alliea.d via'-x:5atg the il1Put of the Qb
tree #2, pertaining to bank 2, and outputs 6,
j-'itlut 8 Of theQr" tens tie~aJl"leacitotlle input 75

.-a1'l4

~

qf ~lle, Qb, tre~ #3 relating to. banl5,~. Tllus,,4e:pending on the tens order digit of tlle Goqe ~UIJ:lber in the Qr subfield, the circuit will be. directed
to the input Of one of the three Qb tiees. The
eight outputs of the Qb tree #1 are connected to
the eight sockets qosP for bank 1 (see also Fig.
53b) . . 'l;'he outputs of the Qq tree #2. cOI).I)..ect
to eight sockets GOSP for !;lank 2, and the outputs of Qb tree #3 connect to eight socket.s. GOSP
for bank 3. Thus, depending on the Qb code
cijgit, tlle selected Qb tree will direct the circuJt to
one of the sockets in the related group of eigllt
sockets GOSP. The eight sockets GQS:p1 to B
for a storage bank are plugged to the eight socI,tets GOS l to, (Fig. 32c and Fig. 53b). The circult therefore will be completed through a gang
reiay 1'S-,OO (s.ee Fig. 32c) to the 50. v. litle. "
In the foregoing manner, one of the Group
Outs in a. tape storage bank is selected. .
,
It is understood by now that there are similar
A. :imo. ]3 side pyramids for each, Of theou,t ft~lqs
P, Q, R, T and U and that corresponding output
lines of their respective Qb trees are COI).nected
to the same plUg socl{ets TS-GOSP. Fig.49b
is included to make. this clear .. The inp,uts of
the 1;', Q, R, T and U pyramids in Fig. 49b. 'cclI).J)ect respectively to the Pr40De, Qr4DOe, Rr4DDe,
'fr40.ne and Ur400.~" contaqts in Fig. 49a. " - .
T«Lpe storage station relays selection.---cln Sec.tion 9, it was brought o~t that there are two" a1ternatively operated relays ASS and BSS for each
of the tape stations. As. there are thirty stations
in all, there are sixty station relays ASS and
]3,SS. The tape storage code number calls. for a
particular one of these station relays. AU tape
storage code nUIIlbers have hundreds ord~r digit
4 or 5. The tens and units order digits identify
a p~rticular station relay regardless of whether
the hundreds. order digit be 4 or 5, the distinction being that hundreds, order digit 5 calis. for
the station tape to move after being read. out
while hundreds order digit 4 calls for the station
tape toremain at rest after 'being read. out. Tens
order digits 0, 1, and 2 charact.erize code numbel'S for' station relays in tape storage bank 1;
ten.;;, Ol'der digits 3, 4, and 5 are in the code nUlllbers for. relays of bank 2; and tens order digits
6,. 7 and 8 are i,n code numbers for relays of
qa,nk 3. Units order digits which are odd relate
to relays, ASS and. units orqer digits which are
even relate to relays BSS. The ten station relays ASS in bank 1 are identified as follows, ignoring the hundreds order digit 4 or 5: tASS
(station I) by 03; 2ASS by 05, 3ASS by 07,
4ASSby 09, SASS by 11, 6ASS by 13, lASS by 15,
8ASSby 17, SASS by 19, and IDASS by 21. The
ten BSS relays in bank 1 are identified as follows: lESS by 04, 2BSS by 06, 3BSS by 08, 4BSS
by 10, SBSS by 12, 6BSS. by 14, lBSS by 16, BBSS
by 18, SBSS by 20, and IOBSS by 22. Similarly,
the relays lASS to I DASS in bank 2 are identified
by code numbers having 4 or 5 in the hundreds
order followed by the numbers 33 to 51 and the
relays lESS to IOBSS by numbers 34 to 52. The
relays lASS to IDASS inbi:mk3 are identified by
numbers 63 to 81 andtl1e relays lESS to l DBSS
py numbers 64 to 8 2 . '
.
Fig. 47d shows the form of tens and units order
Pyraillid for selficting relays ASS and BSS. 'It is
understood that there is,one such pyramid in the
4- a:t).d ]3 sides· of eil,eh Out field of sequence storag:e; L e., for fielqs :p, Q, R, T, and U. It is
furtller understood. tha~ tlle corresponding outle"tl> of a~l tpese pyramiqs, ~re cOII).moned i~ the

a

2,686,672

81

manner shown for the RS-GO and TS-GO pyramids (Figs. 49a and b) .
.
Assume for simplicity of description that the
pyramid shown in Fig. 47d is the Q pyramid in
the A side. A circuit may then make as follows: From ground (Fig. 47a) via Qs8a, Qs4a,
XMa(Q), the connected XMa line (also see Fig.
47c), (Q)rBOOd, (Q)r400/, (Q)r200e, the (Q)r200e
line (also see Fig. 47d) to the input of the (Q) r
tens tree. Since relay r400 is operated when the
hundreds order digit is 4 or 5, it is seen that the r
tens tree in Fig. 47d will be heated in either case.
The tens order digit in the tape storage code
number may be 0, 1, 2 . . . . S. Accordingly, the
nine output lines 0 to B of this tens tree are connected through heating contacts b of relays X4,
X5, and X6 (the A side is being discussed) to
the inputs of nine r units trees (0) to (S). Depending on the units order digit in the code number, the heated one of the r units tree will direct
the circuit to one of the Sixty sockets ASPP and
BSPP (also see Fig. 53a).
As a specific example, if the code number is
403 or 503, the r units tree (0) in Fig. 47d will
be heated and will direct the circuit to plug
socket IASSP (bank 1). This socket will be
normally plugged to socket IASP (bank 1) so that
the circuit will be completed via an interlock
point a of IACL (Fig. 32c) through gang relay
lASS (bank 1) to the +50 v.line.
The station move relays selection.-As described in Section 9, there are two move relays
MA and MB (Fig. 32c) for each bank of ten
stations. Relay MA when energized closes its
contacts a (Fig. 32b) to allow any of the selected
ASS relays of the bank to transmit the effect of
a move signal to the related station move network. Relay MB when energized serves a similar purpose in relation to the BSS relays of the
storage bank. If the code number for a tape
storage station has the hundreds order digit 4,
then neither the MA nor MB relays, in the bank
containing the selected station, will be energized.
But if the code number for the station has the
hundreds order digit 5, then the relay MA will
be energized if any station relay ASS is selected
and relay MB will be energized if any station
relay BSS has been energized. It has been explained that the ASS relays are selected by code
numbers with units order digits which are odd
while the BSS relays are selected by code numbers with units order digits which are even. Also,
any of the tens order digits 0, 1 and 2 selects tape
storage bank 1; any of tens order digits 3, 4 and
5 selects storage bank 2; and any of tens. order
digits 6, 7 and S selects bank 3. Thus, there are
three factors to be considered in the selection
or non-selection of the move relays; one, whether
the hundreds order digit is 4 or 5; another
whether the units order digit is odd or even; and,
finally, with respect to the selection of a move
relay from a particular storage bank, whether
the tens order digit is in one of the three mentioned groups of digits.
Fig. 47c shows the form of selecting circuit for
the move relays. The input for this circuit connects to the XMa or YMa line, depending on
whether the A or B side of sequence storage is
being considered. The XMa or YMa line is the
same as previously discussed in connection with
the Table Outs Selection. From the XMa or YMa
line the circuit continues through rBOOc to the
common of contacts r400d and r400g. If the code
number has 4 or 5 in the hundreds order, then it
relates to tape storage and relay r400 is ener~ized,

52
closing r400g. The circuit proceeds via r2001 to
contacts rIOO. If the hundreds order digit
in the code number is 5, then the code number calls for tape movement; relay r I DO is
5 energized along with relay r400, and contacts
rl DOe are closed, directing the circuit to the common of contacts ria and rib. If the units order
digit in the tape storage code number is even,
then sequence· storage relay r I will not be ener10 gized since the binary terms Of all even digits
are lacking the binaIy term 1. But if the units
order digit is odd, then the binary terms representing this digit include binary term 1 and relay r I is energized. If r I remains deenergized,
15 its points b are closed, leading the circuit to the
input of the· r tens tree in the BSS move tree. If
r I is energized, its points a are closed and the
circuit is directed to the input of the ASS move
tree. Depending on the tens order digit in the
20 code number, the selected r tens tree will lead
the circuit through a control relay point of X~
(or Y4), or X5 (or Y5) or X6(or Y6) to one of
the plug socket MAPPI, 2 or 3 or MBPPI, 2 or 3.
The sockets MAPP I, 2 and 3 are normally plugged
25 to sockets MAPI, 2 and 3 (see Fig. 53b) and
sockets MBP I, 2 and 3 are normally plugged to
sockets MBP I, 2 and 3. Fig. 32c shows the sockets
MAP and MBP of a relay storage bank. Assume,
for instance, that sockets MAP and MBP in Fig.
30 32c relate to bank 1 and that the ASS move, r
tens tree (Fig. 47c) has been heated. Assume,
further, that the tens order digit is 2, so that the
output of the tree is directed ·to bank 1 socket
MAPP, plugged to socket MAP in Fig. 32c. Ac35 cordingly, the circuit will be completed through
relay MA of bank 1 to the +50 v.line.
Both relays MA and MB of the same bank may
be concurrently energized, but under control of
code numbers in· different sequence fields. For
40 instance, field P may call for selection of the
station relay 2ASS in bank 1 and field Q may call
for selection of the station relay '6BSS in bank 1,
with the code numbers in each field also calling
for station movement. The move selection cir45 cuit of sequence storage field P will then cause
energization of the relay MA of bank 1 and the
move selection circuit of sequence storage field
Q will cause energization of the relay MB in
bank 1.
.
Energization of the relays MA and MB or either
50
of them, allows the move signals or signal to be
effective, in the manner described in Section 9.
Selection 01 dial storage unit #3.-If the code
number in an r subfield is 603, it calls for a value
55 to be read out of dial storage unit #3 (see Fig.
23). The b subfield selects the Dial Storage
Group Out, depending on which Out bus-set is
to receive the value from dial storage (see Sec·tionS).
Fig. 47c shows the form of selection circuit for
60
the Group Outs of dial storage unit #3. The
circuit connects to the XMa (or YMa) line, previously discussed, and continues through the
points rSOOd, r400/, r200g, rIOO/, and control con65 tacts X2c (or Y2c) to the input of the r tens tree.
Thus, the latter tree will be heated if the hundreds order digit in the r subfield is 6. If the tens
order digit is 0, then the r tens tree continues the
circUit to the r units tree. If the uriits order digit
70 is 3, then the r units tree heats a Qb tree. This
particular Qb tree will thus be heated only if the
code number in the r subfield is 603. Depending
on .the digit in the adjacent b subfield, the Qb tree
directs the circuit to one of the plug sockets DSP I.
11$ to ~ (lI.~so liiEole Fi? §~~). The sockets DSPI to 8

, 1tfl8ei-"

53

54

are· normally plugged to' soc~, DSPP:,.to 8: to
of' SOP; is plugged: to socket. B in the bank· l' sj!t
complete the circuit· through. the selected dial
of"sockets GOS. As: another example, if SI code
storage Group Out gang relay D&-GO to the
number 39 is to select S ISeq, data from dial stor+50 v.line. As shown in.FIg. 23and.explainedin
age, then socket SGP3.9 is plugged to socket
Section 8, each dial storage Group' out; connects 5 DSPP1; As a third example, if.Sl: code.number
the value register. dials of dial storage unit #3
'15 is to select S2Seq data from. relay storage set
to a dIfferent one oftheOutbus~sets.
9, then socket SGP15 is. plugged to socket
81 and 82 pyramids for. s.~q.uence data selec9RSGP8; i. e., to socket. g. in the pus &: group of
tion.-The SI and S2 fields of a line of sequence
soc.kets RSGP.
data select. the sources for the' next line of. se- 10
The sockets SUP of. the Unit.. Outs pyramid
quence data to be entered in the Aor B side of
(Fig, 50) are selectively plugged to· sockets RSUP
sequence storage. The sequence data may be
(Figs. 48 and 53a) and. socl:;:ets ASP and B;SP
selected from relay storage in which: case. the S I
(Flgs. 32c and 53a)· according to which unit .Outs
and S2 fields: of sequence storage must: sele,ct rear:~ to be selected by the SI and S2:code num.bers.
lay storage Group and Unit Outs; Sequence data 15 For example, if SI code number 01 is to sele,co
may be selected. also,. from tape storage. In that
S ISeq data, to be read out of st.ation If of tape storcase, the S I and S~ fields af, sequenc,e- storage
age~ bank 1 through the A. outlet of this station,
must select tape storage Group Outs and s.tation
the socket SUPtll CE'ig.53a) is plugged to socket 8
relays ASS and. BSS; Tl1e station relays' may be
oftha,bank 1 set of sockets AS:P. I!S2 code numconsidered as' tape storage' Unit Outs. In addi- 20 bel' 02 is to select S2:Seq data to be read out of
tIon, if movement of the selected stations ist.o be
station 9 of bank 1 through its B outlet, socket
effected after data' have been re?"d out therefrom,
SUPQ2 is plugged to eocket 9:: of tl~e bank 1. set of
the S I and S2 sequence storage fields must bring
soc.kets BSP. If, as another example, the code
about operation of the,required move relays l\fA
number 35 in S! is to select SISeq data from
and MB (Fig. 32c). Sequence 'data also may be 25 relay storage unit 019, which. is the first unit in
selected from dial storage and this requires the
storAge set 9 (Fig; 28) then. socket SUP35. is
selection of a dial storage Group Out.
plugged to socket RSUPO,! 9.
Fig. 50 shows .the form of SI and 82 pyramids
At this point, it may be mentioned that a twin
for selecting Group Outs, Unit Outs, and Move
plug jack is used wberever, it is required to plug
relays. Fig. 50 also shows a similar pyramid re- :)0 a .single socket, such as, one of the. sockets ASP,
lating to the "early and late" control subseto a pair of other sockets; s:ucll. as a, socket SUP
quently described;
and a socket ASPP. It. may ll.lso be mentiO}led
Each of the pyramids, in Fig. 50 is diagramhere,that plugging connections are provided bematically shown and consists of an SI (or S2)
tween the relay storage pyramids, tape storage
tens tree feeding ten S, (or S2,) units. trees, re- :35 pyramids, dial storage pyramiCl, et~., and the respectively. In other words, the ten outlets (I to. S
lRYS respeotively controlled thereby to insur~ :l
(also see Figs. 45 and 45a) of each tens tree are
bigh degree of fiexibilityin. the selection of the
connected respectively to the inputs of ten simirelaYS. For instance, the plugging between socklar units trees.. The ten. units· trees in a pyraek TS'-GOSP and TS-GOS (Fig. 53b) and !Jemid have 100 outlets which are individually wired 40 tween ASP' and ASPP (Fig. 53a) enables the code
to 100 plug socl{ets. The plug socl{ets connected
numbers in the band T sub fields of an Out.field'of
to the Unit Outs pyramid are designated SUPilO
sequence data to select am'
the tape stations
to 99 (also see Fig. 53a). The plug sockets asin any of the banks 1, 2 and: 3. Thus, while code
sociated with the Group Outs pyramId are des!lUmber 6 in subfield b and code number 403 in
ignated SGPOI} to 99 (also see Fig. 53b), and the ,.3 sub fields rare normaJIy assigned to. selection of
. plug sockets connected to the StationMQve pyrastation I relay ASS from. bank 1 to be read out to
mid are designated SMPOO to 99 (also shown in
Out bus7set 6, the plugging enables these code
numbers· to select, for instance, station 2 relay
Fig. 53b). FInally, the sockets. associated with
the "early and late" pyramid are designated
B!3S in, b::mk :3, to be read out to Out bus~set I.
SE:r.p (also see Fig. 53b). It is clear that each GO Hence, if bank- 1 is not in. running. condition for
of the hundred sockets GO to 99 of a pyramid resOme. reason; then the sequence coding need not
late to the corresponding code numbers 00 to 99
be,chp.nged but t,he plugging may be arranged to
any of which may be in S I or S2 fields.
select a, st?"tion from another bank.
The plug sockets SGP may be variously plugged
When the
or 82 coding selects a tape stato the relay storage Group, Outs. sockets RSGP 55 tion and it is desired to step· the station after
(see Figs. 47a and 5.3b) , or tape storage· Group
reading out its data, the sockets SMP of the
Outs sockets GOS (Figs. 32c and 53b) or to dial
Station Move Pyramid (Fig. 50) are selectively
stOl'age Group Outs sockets DSPP (Figs. 47c and
plugged. to sockets MAP and MBP (Figs. 32c and
53a). The plugging will be oiade in accordance
53b)" Thus, if S! c,ode number 01 is to select
with which Group Out is to be operated for a par- 60 S! Seq data. to be read out through ~,n ASS relay
ticular S! or S2 code number. The Group Outs,
of. a station in banI!;: 1 and the station tape is
as now understood, are associated, with the Out
to be advanced following th.e reading out of data,
bus-sets and, therethrough, to the electroniC storthen socket 0 f of the group of sockets S1\1P is
age units. As previously stated, it may be asplugged to the gang socket M4J' Qf bank 1 (Fig.
sumed that the. electronic storage units ESl alld_ 65 53.hL Consequently, the relay MA of this bank
ES8 are to. be used. for receiving SISeq and'
will be energized at the proper time and the
S2Seq portions of a line of sequence data, Acmove signal receiving means
bank 1. will be
cordingly, the plugging from socl~ets SGP will
effective to cause advance of the selected station
be to sockets for Group Outs 1 and It For, i~lin the bank, as dest;lribecl In set;ltion 9.·
stance, if SI code number 01 is to. select. SISeq 70, . The Unit.Outs, Grou.pOut,s, and. Station Move
data from a, station in tape storage bank l,then
Pyramids are hea.ted upon closure of timing cOn~ocket 0 I of SGP is plugged to socket 1 of the
tacts Xla on tpe A side and, of timing contacts
b.ank 1 set of. s.ockets GQS .. If,_ furtbel', the.S2
'¥I.a on the B, side. XID ~nd ~ID l!l5:l'ye . as arc
code. number O~ is to. select S2SeQ datil fr.om a
&uppression relays.
station. in. tllPe stQr~e Q!l.nk l,tben socktlt 01 7ft;
Thf:l "early I1.n4 late" I1.1U/fg;ing \YiU. be d,e-

or

S'

of

2,8,86,672

55

scribed later. It is to be understood that while
Fig. 50 shows only four pyramids in the A side
and four in the B side, there are actually eight
such pyramids in each side, four for the st
fields of sequence storage and four for the S2
fields of sequence storage in each side. It is "to
be understood further that the corresponding
SI and S2 pyramids on the A and B sides have
common outlet connections to the set of 100 plug
sockets associated with these pyramids. For
instance, the four SI and S2 Unit Outs pyramids on the A and B sides have their corresponding outlets connected to the same sockets
SUP. As an example, the outlets 99 of these
four SI and S2 Unit Outs pyramids are all wired
to socket SUP99 (Figs. 50 and 53a).
Relay storage Group-Ins selection.-Fig. 51
shows the A and B sides of the form of selection
network for the relay storage Group Ins (also see
Figs. 28 and 29), There is one such network for
each of the fields Q, R, T, U and V. Each of
the circuits except the circuit for the T field
connects from ground through parallel contacts sSe or s4e to contacts Xla. If in the Q,
R or U subfield s, the code number is higher
than 3, then the field is an In field. The V
field always is an In field and unless the field
is skipped, its subfield s will contain a number
higher than 3. All numbers higher than 3
include the binary term 4 or 8. Hence a corresponding sequence storage relay s4 or s8 will be
energized if the number in this s subfield is
higher than 3. The field containing this subfield therefore will be an In field and a circuit
connection will be closed from ground through
either contacts sSc or s4e to the contacts Xla.
As far as the T field is concerned, its subfield
s has only the two binary positions 2 and 1
and therefore this subfield s cannot designate
a digit higher than 3. Previously it was explained
that the T field is an In field if the code in
the OP2 field is 01. Accordingly, for the T
pyramid of the form shown in Fig. 51, the circuit
extends from ground to the input of an OP2
tree and from the outlet OP-O I of this tree to
the Xla contacts.
As stated before, the code numbers for selecting relay storage units are 010 to 159. If any
of these code numbers occurs in subfield r of
an In field, then one of the relay storage Group
Ins will be selected depending on the r code
number and the digit in the adjacent b field. The
circuit, on the A side, is timed by the closure
of contacts Xla (see Section 16b, item 3). Upon
the closure of these contacts a circuit may be
established as follows (Fig. 51): From ground,
through one of the paths previously mentioned,
to the contacts Xla, thence via contacts RBDOe,
R400h and R200h to the input of the b tree.
This tree serves as a feeder for eight r units
trees. The arrangement is the same as described
for relay storage Group Out selection (see Fig.
47a) and the units trees shown in Fig. 51 direct
the circuit selectively to one of the plug sockets
RSIG (also see Fig. 53e). There are eighty of
these sockets and each is associated with a correspondingly numbered socket RSIGP. Normally
the correspondingly numbered sockets RSIG and
RSIGP will be plugged to each other and if
the circuit is made to one of these sockets RSIG
then it is completed through the plugging to
the correspondingly numbered socket RSIGP
and a gang relay RS-GI"(also see Fig. 29) to the
+50 v. line. Assume for example that the circuit
shown in Fig; 51 relates to the Q field and that

56

i)

10

15

20

25

30

35

'JO

45"

50

55

60

65

70

75

the coding in this field is 5 in the sub field s, 1 in
the subfield b, and 010 in the subfield r. Upon
the closure of contacts Xla, a circuit will be
established from ground through contacts (Q)s4c
X7a, (Q) r800e, (Q) r4DOh, (Q) r200h to the input
of the (Q) b tree, thence from the output I of
this tree to the r units tree (1) and to the output 0 of this tree, and by way of the plugging
between the sockets 0 I 0 of groups RSIG and
RSIGP through the gang relay ORS--GII to the
+50 v. line.
In this manner, when Q is an In field, the
code number 1 in the subfield Qb and any code
number in Qr which is under 200 and terminates
in the units order digit 0 causes the selection of
the Group In I associating relay storage set 0
(see Fig. 28) to In bus-set I.
The A side of the circuit shown in Fig. 51 has
been explained. The B" side is similar except
that the sand r contacts and band r trees are
operated by BOP relays instead of by AOP relays
and contacts Yla are used in place oi the contacts X7a. It is to be noted also that contacts
Xla and Yla are shunted respectively by arc
suppressor contacts X1Da and Y1Da. It is to be
understood also that there are five such circuits
as shown in Fig. 51, one for each of the fields
Q, R, T, U and V and their corresponding outputs are commonly connected to the same sockets
RSIG.
Relay storage Units In seleetion.-Figs. 52a and
52b show the A and B sides of a Unit In network
for selecting the relay storage Unit Ins (also
see Figs. 28 and 29). There is one such Unit
In network for each of the possible In fields
Q, R, T, U and V, and their corresponding outputs are commoned in the manner now understood. Each network provides a path such as
described for the relay storage Group In network (Fig. 51) to and through contacts Xlb, on
the A side, and contacts Ylb on the B side. As in
the Units Out relay selection network (Fig. 48)
the Units In network (Figs. 52a and b) includes
two r tens trees (0) and (1). The paths from
Xlb to the inputs of these tens trees are such
as described for the relay storage Group GIn network. The same as in the Unit Out network, the
Unit In tens tree (0) feeds nine r units trees (1)
to (9) and the tens trees (1) in Fig. 52b feeds
7 r units trees (0) to (6). The outputs of the
r units trees in the Unit In network are connected
to sockets UPO I 0 to 159 (also see Fig. 53e). These
are pluggable to sockets UPPO I 0 to 159. Sockets
UPP are wired to the corresponding Unit In relays. As now understood, code numbers 010
to 159 identify the relay storage units and if any
of these code numbers is in the subfield r of an
In field, the corresponding relays in sequence
storage will establish a selection circuit for the
identified relay U "in," the circuit being timed
by contacts Xlb, considering the A side or by
contacts Ylb considering the B side.
For simplicity of explanation, assume the units
In network shown in Figs. 52a and 52b is the one
pertaining to the Q field and that Q1' contains
code number 010 while Qs contains code number 9. Considering the A side, a circuit will be
made from ground via (Q) s8d, Xlb, (Q) r80D!,
(Q)r400i, (Q)r200i, (Q)rIOOg, the (Q)r tens
tree (0), the (Q) r units tree (1), and plugging
between sockets UPO I 0, UPPO I 0 and through
the Unit In relay U "in" 0 I 0 to the +50 v. line.
As another example, assume the code number
in Qr is "123; relay (Q) r I00 will be energized and
open contacts g while closing contacts h. Ac-

coMiiJ:1g}y,~the ,~~u~t

Sf

58

'M!UI ~ ideWurt1d·,~o ,.~e
in.F'ig..·24. ,Sb¥t,Ulse retains trigger
TI and the counter thEm stands ,at 'S. The tenth
entry pulse turns trigger TI causing 'it to turn
30 trigger '1'2. As trigger T2turns,it'reversestriggel' T4. Upon reversal of :trigger T4, it resets
trigger TS. Thus, the ,tfiggersTI, '2 ,and ',4 are
now in reversed status,sothattlie counter stands
at 7. It is seen that ten ,entry pulses have effected
35 a descending value cycle of the units' order from
its initial "7" status bacik toa 'f7" 'status. Also,
during this value cycle, ,as the 1in1ts order:stepped
from 0 to 9, it effected asubtractiv'e ,carry of 1
from the tens otder. In a ,manner now clear,
40 seven more entry pulSeswiU bririg the units 'order
to "0" status. Thereupon, line·ZU goes to high
potential, which is impl'essed o'n the' cont];'ol' grid
of the tube 28,previouslY'conditioned by the line
ZT under control of the tensarderin"'O;'status.
45 The tube 28 thus becomes conductive when the
descending counter is at zeto and:appliesdecreased potential to tube .. 6a,causing 'output
line F to rise in potentIal. This brings 'about
termination of column shifting, .in a mann~r 'de50 scribed hereinafter.
The operation of the deSCending counter has
been explained above. The'm1nuend, whiCh is
the ,column shift amount, is applied to tubes in
the descending 'counter pi:iortotheapplication
55 of the positive ,entry signal Ink. ,This entry ,signal comes from the plate of a tube '5-'-SRC2 (Fig.
27b). The main sequence means operates at the
proper time to apply a negative csignal Ink to the
grid of tube 5 which thereupon, prodnces the
60 positive Ink signal, asa result of which the
column shift amount is entered :into the triggers
of the descending counter.
The direction of shift is determihed by the program means, ill a manner 'explf.i.ined'ln:ter('Sec65 tion 17,Item 11) . I f 'theshift·is'to'be to the left,
increased potential!s ,.present online ',LT (Fig.
27c), but if the :shift1st;O,be t:othe:right,then
increased potential IspteSent on line RT. Tncreased potentialon,line'LT 'c'onditions;9~SHG3
70 (:fi'ig.27c) ,whiIeincreased potential online R'l'
conditions j 1: Subsequently ,'the.positive signal
Ink renders the' conditioned 'one ' of :the tubes "9
andll conductive. .,If ::9 ':is '!C'onductive. 'it :turns
21 to the left', (itsfteitninal'fc'goes ,to'low'poten15 tial)andlf 11 is COD.a:uctiV'e,it ,tlwIis,2Itb the

1,888,871:

63

right (its tetminal f goes to low potential). If 2 1
is in its left status, it cuts off 25a, which is a
condition to production of the left shift signal
LSH at the proper times. If 21 is in right status, it
cuts off 25 which is a condition to production 5
of the right shift signal RSH.
The column shift means has its own oscillator
and amplifier source (FiG. 27b) of 50 kc. pulses
A and B which are 180 degrees out of phase with
10
each other.
After entry of the column shift amount into
the descending counter, main sequence produces
a negative signal SHCL(see Section 17, Item 22)
which cuts off 21-SHC2. Tube 21 thereupon applies a positive signal SHCL to the standard, 15
SHC cancel circuit (Fig. 27c and Section 3b).
The output of the cancel circuit resets those
triggers (except the triggers in the descending
counter) in the internal commutator of the denominational shift means which are marked 20
with the reset status symbol x. The triggers in
the descending counter (Fig. 27a) are in shown
states when the counter is at zero. This counter
is reset to zero by the column shifting operation,
to be described. The counter also may be reset 25
to zero from the Control Desk.
The positive signal SHCL is also applied to
the grids of .38 and 36 in Fig. 27c. In response,
38 cuts off 38a, to turn 39, which then applies,
through a capacitor, a positive impulse to 36a 30
which, in turn, through a capacitor, cuts off 40.
Tube 40 then causes P40 to produce the negative
cancel signal ACL which, as ex'plained before, is
impressed on all the triggers ASH of the shift
columns (Figs. 24 and 25). The positive signal :~5
SHCL is of short (one AP 1)ulse cycle) duration.
When this signal terminates, 36 and 38 become
non-conductive. As 36 becomes non-conductive,
it resets trigger 39. It is clear that the first
cancel signal ACL for the shift columns is pro- 40
duced under control o-f signal SHCL.
Concurrently with signal SHCL, main sequence
produces the negative signal SERI, which cuts
off 25a, Fig. 27b. Tube 25a then renders a tube
25 conductive to cause a power amplifier P25 to 45
produce the positive going entry ·SERI signal
which, as previously described, is applied to the
shift columns to effect the entry of the number
from the Internal In bus-set into the shift columns (see Figs. 24 and 25).
The apparatus is now ready for column shift- 50
ing the number which has been read into the shift
columns. The column shift is initiated by a
negative start signal SHS produced by the sequence means at the termination of the SERI
read-in or entry signal. This SHS signal has a 55
chance time relation to the 50 kc. A and B pulses
continually ,produced by the SHC oscillator and
amplifier (Fig. 27b). Fig. 26 is a timing chart of
pertinent operations which follow upon the oc- 60
currence of the SHS signal and based on the example of a column shift amount of 3 entered into
the descending counter (Fig. 27a).
The negative start signal SHS goes to the control grid of the normally conductive tube 5-SHC3 65
(Fig. 27c) and also to the terminal g of a trigger 6. This signal cuts off 5, forcing 6 to reverse. The signal is of short duration and at its
termination, the line carrying the signal returns
to high potential and thereby restores 6. Mean- 70
while, upon reversal of 6, it reversed II (also see
Fig. 26). The time of reversal of II is an indication of the time of occurrence of the start signal SHS. Upon reversal of II, it conditions 12,
Fig. 27c, to become conductive in response to the 75

64

next B+ pulse, thereby to reverse is. Reversed
15 cuts off 14a.· At present, 31 a also is cut off,
so 31a-14a is effective to condition 35 to respond to the next A+ pulse. This next pulse
causes 35 to .apply, through a capacitor, a negative pulse to 34 cutting it off, which makes P34
conductive to produce the negative BCL signal.
As. previously described, this is the first Signal
in the sequence of four signals occurring in each
shift step. BCL resets triggers BSH of each shift
column (see Fig. 24), as previously described,
preparing them to receive a right or left shifted
digit. When 15 was reversed at the B+ time to
cause the BCL signal to appear at the next A+
time, it also conditioned 15, Fig. 2'7c, to respond
to A+ pulses. The negative pulses produced by
16 are applied to both sides of 20 to alternate
its status. The first A+ pulse turns 20 which
thereupon cuts off 23a to condition 22 to become
conductive with the nextB+ pulse. When 22
becomes conductive, it cuts off 26 and 26a. As
explained before, if a right shift has been called
for by the main sequence means, trigger 21 is in
right-shifted position and cuts off 25. But, if
a left shift has been called for, then 21 is in leftshifted condition and cuts off 25a. Accordingly,
when 26 and 26a are now cut off under control
of 22, either 26-25 or 26a-25a becomes fully
cut off, depending on whether a right or left shift
is to be performed. If 26-25 is cut off, it works
through 33 and P33 to produce the positive RSH
signal while if 26a-25a is effective, it operates
through 29 and P29 to produce the positive LSH
signal. As previously described, the signal RSH
or LSH respectively cause the right or left shifted
digits to be entered in triggers BSH of the shift
columns.
When 22, Fig. 27c, became conductive at the
first B+ time in the 1st shift step, it caused the
shift signal LSH or RSH to be produced, as just
explained. It also reversed 19 which, in turn,
reversed 18. With 19 reversed it cuts off 28 to
make ala conductive so that 31a-14a will be
ineffective and the next A+ pulse will not cause
a BCL cancel signal to appear. Instead, the ACL
cancel Signal will be produced. This results from
28 conditioning 32 to respond to the next A+
pulse. Thereupon, 32 applies, through a capacitor, a negative pulse to 40 as a result of which
P40 produces the negative ACL signal. This
signal, the ,third in the sequence of four signals
appearing in each shift step, resets triggers ASH
of each shift column (see Fig. 24), preparing
these triggers to receive the shifted digits now
stored in triggers BSH. It may be noted that the
first ACL signal was produced in consequence of
the application of the signal SHCL from the
main sequence means, as previously described.
The next and successive ACL signals are produced by the internal timer of the column shift
means in the manner just described.
At the A+ time at which the ACL signal is
produced, 16, Fig. 27c, responds to an A+ pulse
and restores 20. Thereupon 20 cuts off 31 and
23. As 31 is cut off, it produces a positive pulse
which is transmitted via line C to tube 2-SHCI.
In response to this pulse, tUbe 2-SHC I produces
a negative entry pulse which steps the descending counter to diminish the count by 1. As the
descending counter in the assumed example
started at 3, it is now stepped to a count of 2
(see Fig. 26). In this manner the descending
counter is operated in each shift step to reduce
the count by 1.
The first three signals in the 1st shift step have

:(;5
tieenprodueed in the manrier just eXplained.
These first three signals are BCL at the A+ time
in" the shift step. LSH or' RSH at the succeeding
B+ time. and ACL at the following A+ time.
The. fourth and' final signal in the sequence for
each shift step is the SHE signal which, is produced .at the B+ time following the ACL signal. The SHE signal will cause the shifted
digits to be transferred from triggers BSH to
ASH. It was explained above that 2D-SHC3 was
res~fed by the second A+pulse in the shift step
aridthereuprin cut off the tUDes 31 and 23. The
tribe 31 thereupon caused the descending counter
todiliUnish the count by 1. The tube 23 when
cut off' conditions 24 to become conductive with
theriext B+pulse. When 24 becomes conductive
it cuts off 21. Tube 21a has already been cutoff
by the prevIously mentioned reversal of trigger
18' hi.lso see Fig. 26) which will riot be restored
until the endcf the last shift step. Accordingly.
when 24 cuts off 21, the couple 21-":21a is effective to make 3D conductive and thereupon
cause P3D to produce the SHEsigrial. This signa.l as previously stated causes the shifted digit
to be transferred from triggers BSH of each shift
ooluninto triggers ASH of the same shift column.
ThIs completes one shift step.
The "same sequence of signals BCL. LSH or
RSH, ACL and SHE, along with a step of descent
of the descending counter to I. is repeated in
the 2nd shift step. The 3rd shift step tal:es place
"in which this same sequence of signals is again
produced and half way in this 3rd shift step
the descending counter is stepped to 0. AS'previously described, when the descending counter
is at O,the tube ISa-SHC I applies increased
potential to the line F. The increased potential
on this line renders 8a-SHC3 conductive to restore II. With II restored, it conditions 10 to
operate in response to the next B+ pulse to restore 15. With 15 restored, it conditi:cns 13 to
become conductlve \vith the next A+ pulse and
thereupon to restore 18. It will be noted that
18 is restored at the termination of the SHE
signa,! in th"e last shift step. All the triggers
II. "15.20, 19 and 18 are now in resetstatus and
shift steps are terminated.
In :the foregoing manner, when the column
shift amount is 3,threeshift steps are produced.
Similarly. any other number of required column
shift steps are performed, the number of such
steps being given by the column shift number
applied to the descending ,counter.
At the tefniination of the steps of column shift,
the shiftednlimber in the denominational shift
unit (Fig. 25) is to be read out upon the Internal
Out bus-set. As .already explained, I a-SHea
(FIg. 27c) was restored at the end of the last
shift step. -As 18 restores, it applies a negative
goIng pulse to 14, causing 14 to apply a positive
going pulse by way of a line 14w (also see Fig.
27b) and a:capacitor to the control grid of the
nOfmallyconditioned tube 39-SHC2. Accordingly;39 becomes conductive' and tU1~ns the trigger 40. As 40 turns, it makes 36 conduct to
produce a negative going shift ccmplete signal
SHCP. This signal is utilized by the mainsequence, in a manner explained later. to apply
a negative read out signal SHRO to 32,-SHC2,
cutting it off. ThereupOn. 3lia becomes conductive and restores 49. Also 35 becomes conductive
and acts throughP35 to produce a positive going
SIiRO signal. As described before. this SHRO
positive Signal causes thei1uinber stored in the
trfggersASk Of the'shift colunins to be applied

to the buses of the ::i:nternalOutDus~set (see Fig's. "

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

is

24 and 2'5) .
When the colmun shift amount is 0, and a
number" is entered" from the Internal In bus-set
to the denominational shift unit, it will be read
out of this unit to the Internal Out bus-set with
no colUmn" shift. In' the event that the denominational shift amourit is 0, the descending
counter (Fig. 27a) mairitains line F at increased
potential to 'condition a tube" 7-SHC3. Then.
when the start signal SHS turns trigger 6, the
trigger applies a positive pulse through a capacitor·to the conditioned tube 1 to render it conductive; The Olltput of this tube is applied via
a :wi1'e 1ivandtl1eanbde resistor of 39-SHC2 to
thetrigger4il, tui'ning the trigger. The effect
Of thisistacause the shift complete signal SHCP
to oe produced in the manner" explained before.
Conseqi.lently, thefeacl" out sigrial SHRO will
beproduced,causing the number read into the
denominational shift unit to be read out without
a column shift.
Shift columns are numbered here to correspOnd
to orders of an amount whereas storage and bus
columns are numbered inversely to orders.
'Amounts will be entered in the shift unit only
from calculator units, as will be clear from Sections 17,18,and 19. The shift ,columns 28 to 1
will apply an amount to Internal bus columns 2
to 29 but as only bus columns 11 to 29 are connected to electronic storage (columns 2 to 20
thereof) ,it is evident-that only the amount in
shift columns 19 to 1 will be sent to electronic
storage from where it goes to relay storage. A
shift to the right or to the left therefore discards
from the amount in shift columns 19 to 1 the
given number bfright or left-hand places, so that
the shifted number in these columns is the one
whkh ultimately is received by electronic and
relay storage. It is understood, therefore, that
in speaking of the reading out of a shifted amount
from' electrontcstorage; reference is made to the
shifted amount in shift columns 19 to 1.
As an example. assume a 28-place number in
shift columns 28 to 1. A shift to the right of
10 places brings the 28th place of the original
number into shift column 18 and the 11th place
of the originaJ number into shift column 1. The
shifted amount to be read out is therefore the
result of discarding the 10 right-hand places of
the original number. If the 28-place number in
shift columns 28 to· 1 is shifted 10 places to the
left. the 1st place of the original number moves"
to shift column 11 and the 18th place of the original number moves to shift :column 28. The
shift columns 11 to 19: then contain nine orders
of the original amount and it is these nine orders
which constitute the shifted number to be read
into storage. This shifted number is the result
of "discarding the 10 left-hand places of the
amount originally in shift columns 19 to 1.
13. The electronic accumulator unit
This is an arithmetical ririit of the electronic
computing section (see Fig. 20). When accuniuhition is called for. the accumulator unit will
receive' numbers successivelY in binary decimal
form from the buses of the Internal In bus columns ,,11 to 29. Along with each number. the
Internal In bus-set will apply to the accumulator unit the sign of the number. As now unders~60d. a + Sign is represented by increased potentIal on bus 2 anda - sign is represented by increased potential on bus I' of column 1.
,~Theac~umulatcir llnitmay perform simpleac-.
cumulation Of positive and negative numbers.

2,686,679,

67

68

means are also provided for rounding off a de29th, does not include an entry· register EC but
sired order of the result in the accumulator.
includes a register RC. The devices EC and RC
Main sequence will contain 'a column shift numare each constructed as 'a register order such as
ber, obtained from the program means, which
shown in Figs. 15 and 15a.
will determine the extent of denominational 5
In general, the operation will consist in entershift of the accumulated result when this resing the number from the Internal In bus-set into
suIt is read out of the accumulator unit to a
the entry registers EC and thereafter transmitreceiving unit. The selected number of steps of
ting the numbers from EC to the corresponding
column shift of the result; 1. e. the extent of deorders of the accumulating registers RC. The
nominational shift of the result will be effected lO registers RC comprise the accumulating means
through the column shiLt means described in secper se and are denominationally associated by
tion 12. As there explained, column shifting
carry means. Both positive and negative nummay be to the right or to the left. When column
bers may be accumulated and an algebraic sum
shifting is to the left, then rounding off will
obtained. All numbers are represented on the
not be desired. When column shifting is to the 15 buses in true, binary decimal form and their
right, then rounding off is useful and will occur
negative or positive sense designated by the acunless suppressed by main sequence. The
companying sign, 1 for the - sign and 2 for the
column shift number set in main sequence will
+ sign. For each number entry, the program
select the ultimate units order of the columnmeans provides an operational sign. Whether
shifted result and thereby will select the order 20 the accumulating unit is to act uPQn a number,
to be rounded off.
as a negative or a PQsitive number is depend-,
The accumulator may also perform a special
ent not only upon the sign of the number but
accumulation operation called the tolerance
also upon the operational sign. The, sign of a
check which will be explained }ater.
number and the operational sign are applied to
Associated with the accumulator unit is a so- 25 the sign mixing circuit network (Fig. 71a) of the
called internal commutator (Figs. 71b to 71g)
accumulator unit. The operational sign may be
which subsequences all the operations of the ac0 or 1 or 2 or 3, as previously explained in Section
cumulator upon reception of certain signals from
2a. If the operational sign is 0, this means that
main sequence. All of these signals come from
the number is to be treated by the accumUlator
the accumulator control commutator ACC.C 30 unit as having 'a + Sign, regardless of its original
sign. If the operational sign is 1, then the
(Fig. 78A) except for a tolerance check Signal,
a rounding off or half correction suppression
original Sign of the number will be inverted and
signal and two reset signals, HCR and CTLR
the accumulator unit will treat the number ac(Fig.71g) which come from other parts of main
cording to the inverted sign. If the operational
sequence. With the exception of a few triggers 35 sign is 2, then the accumulator unit will act on
in the internal commutator, the triggers in this
the number according to its original sign.
commutator are reset as an initial operation by
Finally, if the operational sign is 3, then ,the acthe manually controlled cancel signals mencumulator unit will treat the number as having
tioned in Section 3b after which each sequence
a - sign regardless of its original sign. The
of normal accumulation returns these triggers to 40 mixed sign produced by the mixing network alcanceled status. Certain triggers in the commuso may be referred to as the operating sign. If
tator cannot be reset readily in the normal acthe operating sign is +, then the number in regcumulation sequence, due to timing conditions
isters EC will be transferred in true form to the
and special requirements, so that for these trigregisters RC.
gers the two reset signals HCS and CTLR are 45
But if the operating sign is -, then the tens
provided.
' complement of the number in EC will be read
The internal commutator has its own oscillator
out therefrom to the registers RC.
and amplifier source (Fig. 71c) of 50 kc. A and
The accumulator unit will be called in for
B pulses, 180 degrees out of phase with each
operation by main sequence acting through an
other.
50 accumUlation calculation commutator ACC.C
The accumulator unit has 29 orders, of which
(Fig. 78A). This commutator will produce cantbe 29th is a result sign evaluating order. The
cel signals ECC and RCC (Figs. 71e and f)
Internal ,In bus columns 2 to 29 are connected
for cancelling the registers EC and RC, respecrespectively to entry means for accumulator ortively, prior to entry of the first number into
ders 28 to 1 (see Figs. 20 and 70). However, 55 the accumulator unit. An entry signal ACC-RI
in the present case, only the bus columns 11 to
will be produced by the commutator ACC.C con29 may carry signific'ant digits and since it is
currently with the cancel signals but will be proonly these columns which receive digits from
longed past the cancel signals. This entry sigelectronic storage (Section 6). These bus colnal will cause the number on the Internal In
umns 29 to 11, respectively, are associated with 60 bus-set to be entered into registers EC. The
accumulator orders 1 to 19, respectively. With
entry signal also will cause the number sign in
regard to orders 20 to 28, they will in effect recolumn 1 of the Internal In bus-set and the opceive 0 entries from the bus columns 2 to 10. The
erational sign to be entered into the sign mixInternal In bus column 1 which carries the aling 'circuit (Fig. 71a). After the entry of the
gebraic sign of the number to be entered in the 65 number and signs, the commutator ACC.C proaccumulator is connected into a sign mixing cirduces a start signal ACC-ST (see' Fig. 71c) which
cuit included in Fig. 7la. The outputs of orders
calls into operation the internal commutator
1 to 28 'are connected respectively to the Internal
(Figs. 71a to 71g) of the accumulator unit. The
Out bus columns 29 to 2, and the output of the
internal commutator will then function to in29th order is connected to the Internal Out bus 70 itiate an accumulator cycle (Fig. 72) during
column 1 to apply the result sign to this column.
which, under control of the operating Sign, the
Orders 1 to 28 each include a digit indexing or
number or its complement will be transferred
entry receiving device or register EC (Figs. 20,
from EC to RC. At the end of the accumulator
69a, 69b and 70) and an accumulating device or
cycle, the internal commutator will send a comregister RC. The sign registering order, the 75 plete signal CYCPT (Fig. 71g) back to the corn-

Dltitator ACC.C. The latter wiiIthen signal
main sequence to apply a new number and its
sign to the Interrial In bus-set. Also main sequence will apply a new operational sign to the
sign mixing circuit. The commutator ACC.C
again will send out an ECC carmel signal 'but
this time the RCC cancel signal will be suppressed in the manner explained later in Section 17. The entry signal will be applied again,
causing entry of the' new number irito EC. A
second st'art signal is applied to the internal
commutator of the accumulator unit to bring
about the accumulation of the second and first
numbers. When the accumulation of the desired number of successive amounts has heen
completed, the' commutator ACC.C sends out a
result read-out signal R.ROC (Fig. 71g) to the
internal commutator. In response to this signal'the internal 'commutator tests the 29th order RC of the accumulator for 0 or 9. If the
highest order is at 0, it is an indication that
the algebraic sum in the accumulator isa true,
positive number. If the highest order RCis at
9, it is an indication that the algebraic sum is
a complement; 1. e., a negative number. If the
test finds that the highest order RC contains
9, a complement conversion cycle is effected
tinder 'control of the internal commutator.
During this conversion cycle the c,omplement in
registers RC is read out upon the Internal Out
bus-set and through the power amplifier P. A.
(Fig. 20), explained before in Section I, to the
Internal In bus-set. The internal commutator
also proceeds during the conversion cycle 'to
'cause the registers EC to be cancelled and then
to cause the complement on the lriternal In
bus-set to be entered into EC. Upon the completion of this entry, the registers RC are cancelled. The fact that a complement conversion
cycle has been initiated forces the sign control
portion of the circuit to be set UD for a complement transfer operation from EC to RC. The
internal commutator will then produce a start
signal which will 'cause the complement of the
complement in EC to be transferred to RC. The
registers RC will therefore contain the true figtires of the riegative number accumulated by
the ac'cumulator unit. Upon completion of the
transfer from EC to RC, a Proceed signal is sent
to the commutator ACC.Cby the internal lXlmmutator. The internal commutator also produces a read-out signalas a result of which the
number standing in RC and the sign of the number will be read out upon the Internal Out busset. '
If a 0 is sensed in the highest order RC register after accumulation, a complement convetsian cycle will not be effected and the read out
signal will be produced by the internal 'commutator to cause a positive number and its sign
to be read out from RC, and a Proceed signal
will be sent out at the same time to' ACC.C.
Fig. 69a shows the 1st or units order of the accumulator; Fig. 69b shows the 2nd order; and Fig.
71b shows the 29th, sign evaluating, order. The
2nd to the 28th orders are alike and differ from
the 1st order in that the 1st order omits the
tubes required for carry-through-9 purposes
which are not necessary in the 1st order. Also,
the 1st order includes elusive one entry means.
The 29th order, as stated before, does not contain an entry receiving register EC but only a
register RC.
The carry means.-Thecarry means includes
a trigger K for each order of RC except the 29th
6t'Sign'reg1Steriilg' bfdilr. -The carry ttlea.ns'~ill

be

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

4.0

is
5'&

55

60

65

70

15

70

describe'din detail with regard to the 1st
arid 2nd orders shown in Figs. 69a and b. When
an order of RC steps from 9 to 0 during the entry period, which may be taken as 0.5 to 9.5 of
an accumulator cycle (Fig. 72), it produces a
positive carry out pulse at the terminal c of
stage 8. This pulse iS,effective to render a· triode KV conductive. The triode thereupOn reverses the trigger K associated with the order
of RC which has advanced from 9 to or through
O. For instance, assuming that. the 1st order
of RC has stepped from 9 to 0, the trigger KI
will be in reversed state. Carry-through-9
means are provided for the intermediate orders.
By thIS means, when such order is at 9 and the
preceding order effects a carry, the carry will be
instaritaneously applil;ld not only to the first
higher order but also to the second higher order, . and so on. Considering,' for instance, the
2nd .order (Fig. 69b) , when it stands at 9, its
stages 'land 8 are in reversed status. 'With
stage I in reversed' status, its terminal c is at
reduced potential. Likewise the terminal c' of
stage 8 is at 'reduced potential. The J'educed potential at C of stage I is applied to a tube 65;
cutting it off. Likewise, the decreased poten":
tial at c of stage 8 is applied to a tube 65ahaving its anodecommoned with the anode of the
previously mentioned tube 65. Assume for in"'
stance that order 1 (Fig. 69a) has stepped from
9 to 0 so that trigger KI is reversed and that
order 2 stand at 9 at the end of the entry period,
so that the tubes 65 and 65a related to' order 2
are cut off. Further, with K/ reversed, it is effective via' wire I BB-A to cut off tube 65b (Fig.
69b) which has its anode commoned with the
anodes of 65 and 65a associated with the 19th
order. A fourth tube 65c has its anode commoned with the anodes of the tubes 65,65a and
65b associated with the 2nd order RC. The tubes
65e associated with all the orders of RC are
cut off except fora short period 11.5 to 13 of
an accumulator cycle (Fig. 72) for a reason
stated later in the present section. Accordingly, in the example' where the 1st order RC
has stepped from 9to 0 during an entry period,
K/ is reversed and has 'cut off 65b associated
with the 2nd order. Further, as the 2nd orderhas been 'assumed to stand at 9, the tubes
65 and 1i5a associated with the 2nd order are
also cut off. As the tube 65e also is cut off until
11.5 of the accumulator cycle, the lock group of
four tubes, 65,65a, 65b and 65e for the 2nd
order are all cut off. It is 'Clear that 65c is initially cut off during the entry period and remains so until after the entry period. Further, the tube 65b may be brought to non~con­
dUctive condition at any point of the entry
period at which the preceding order, the 1st
order, goes from 9 through O. When the 2nd
order stands at 8, the tube GSa goes to cut off
and when this. order steps to 9 the tube 65 also
goes to cut off. It is evident then that either
&5 or 65b will be the last orie of the group of
four tubes in the 2nd order, to be rendered nonconductive. Upon this tube being rendered nonconductive, the common anode potential of the
group of four tubes rises and renders a tube S5d
conductive, thereby reversing the connected
trigger K2. This reversal will occur at any mid
index pomt time of the entry period 0,5 to 9.5
of 'a cyCie(Fig. 72). If, in this same entry
period, the 3rd order is at 9 or advances to 9,
then the reversal of K2 (2ndordei) will 'cut off
'650 in the 3rd or,dergrOllP of lock tubes 65, 6Sa,
t5biritl '&5c; amt the'reu'POnthe 'tri~er 'K itl

a,eS6,e7a

71
the 3rd order will reverse. This chain of events
may continue through any number of higher orders at 9.
It is seen then, that by the end of the entry
period, reversal will have been effected of all
those triggers K associated either with RC orders which have stepped from 9 through 0, or
associated with a succession of orders of which
the lowest has stepped from 9 through 0 and
the higher ones are at 9.
When a trigger K is reversed, it conditions a
related tube KT. In the example the tubes KTI
and KT2 are conditioned. At the 12 point of
the cycle, a positive carry operating pulse C-OP
is applied commonly, along wire IlA-B (see also
Fig. 70) to all the tubes KT. Anyconditioned
one of these tubes will become conductive and
apply a negative going impulse along a wire
19B-A and through the anode resistor circuit
of a tube 16 associated with the next higher order RC to the input of this next higher order
RC. Thus, a carry entry will be made into this
next higher order.
In this manner, an instantaneous carry is effected into all orders of RC following orders
which have stepped from 9 to 0 or following
one or more orders which are at 9 at the end
of the entry period and are in turn preceded by
an order which has stepped from 9 to O.
As stated before, the tube 65e in each order
of the carry means above the 1st order cuts off
except between 11.5 and 13 of the cycle. This
prevents a carry-through-9 of an order if the
order has been advanced to 9 during the carry
entry period. For instance, if the 2nd order had
not been at 9 before the carry period, but instead had been at 8 and were advanced to 9 by
a carry entry from the 1st order, it would cut
off the tubes 65 and 65a during the carry period.
The tube 65b will also be at cut-off under control of the trigger KI in the 1st order. If the
tube 65e were not present or if this tube were
not 'conductive during the carry period, then the
common anode line of the lock group of tubes
in the 2nd order would be at increased potential and would operate through 65d to reverse
K2. Consequently, the carry operating pulse
would be effective to produce an undesired carry
entry into the 3rdorder. By providing the tube
65e and rendering it conductive for a period
starting before and ending after the carry period, such misoperation is prevented.
Assuming that accumulation has been called
for, the commutator ACC.C (Fig. 78A) is conditioned for operation. Assume further that the
first of a plurality of numbers is to be entered
in the accumUlator, and that half correction is
to be suppressed. Fig. 73 is a timing chart relating to the accumulator procedures when half
correction is suppressed. A negative half correction suppression signal HCS is produced by
main sequence, as will be explained in item 11,
Section 17. This signal is applied to I, Fig. 71g,
which acts via la to turn 5. Thereafter, the
commutator ACC.C concurrently sends out the
negative signals ECC, RCC, and ACC-RI. The
ECC signal functions through 20 and 12 in Fig.
71e to produce an amplified signal ECC. The
latter signal is inverted by I, Fig. 71a to a positive signal which is applied to the EC cancel
circuit. The RCC signal functions via 33 and
34 in Fig. 711 to produce the amplified signal
RCC. This is inverted by 2" Fig. 71a for operating the RC cancel circuit. Either cancel signal ECC or RCC also cuts off a tube 33 to make
it apply a positive signal to the carry triggers

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

415

GO

G5

60

65

70

75

72

cancel circuit, KC. Each of thesecaticel cIrCUits
is of the type shown in Figs. 16 and 17. The
output of the EC cancel circuit goes to the EC
registers (Figs. 69a and band 70), and resets
them. The output of the RC cancel circuit resets the RC registers (also see Fig. 71b). The
output of the KCcircuit resets the carry triggers K.
As mentioned before, for the second and successive number entries, the RCC cancel signal
will not be produced. The ECC signal will be
produced, however, each time an entry is to be
made and will always bring the KC cancel circuit into operation along with the EC cancel circuit.
Prior to the production of the cancel signals
and the entry Signal, ACC-RI, the number to be
entered in the accumulator will be present on
the buses of the Internal In bus columns 2 to 29,
of, which columns 2 to 10 will always contain
zeros, and the sign of the number will be present
in Internal In bus column 1. The digit in each
Internal bus column is represented, as now understood, by increased potential selectively present on buses I, 2, 4 and 8 of the column. The
buses I, 2, 4 and 8 of each column are coupled
to the suppressors of entry tubes ECEI, 2, 4 and
8 respectively 'of the related accumulator order.
It is to be noted that the bus columns 2 to 29
are thus respectively associated with accumulator orders 28 to 1. The tubes ECE of the accumulator orders will therefore be selectively conditioned according to the binary terms in the decimal notation digits of the number on the Internal
In bus columns 2 to 29. The negative ACC-RI
Signal produced by the commutator ACC.C, along
with the cancel signals ECC and RCC or along
with the cancel signal ECC only, functions via
35 and 36 in Fig. 71e to prodUce an amplified
signal ACC-RI. This is inverted by an amplifier
(Fig. 70) to a positive signal which is applied via
line IA-IB to the control grids of all the ECE
tubes. Thereby, the conditioned ones of the ECE
tubes are rendered conductive. The outputs of
the tubes ECEI, 2, 4 and 8 of an accumulator
order are coupled to points c of the trigger stages
I, 2, 4 and 8 of the register EC in the order.
Hence, as soon as the cancel signal ECC terminates, the conductive ones Of the tubes EC reve'rse
the related trigger stages of the EC register. In
this manner the number on the Internal In busset is applied to the entry registers EC.
The entry signal ACC-RI also causes the number sign and an operational sign to be entered
in the sign mixing drcuit which is shown in Fig.
71a. Buses I and 2 of Internal In bus column 1,
which carries the number sign, are respectively
connected to the suppressors of tubes 8 and 1 in
Fig. 71a. The operational sign 1 is represented
by an increased potential signal OPSNI, the operating sign 2 is represented by the increased
potential signal OPSN2. These signals ,respectively condition tubes 6 and 5. It can be seen
that the tubes 5, 6, 1 and 8 will be selectively
conditioned according to the number sign and
the operational sign. The amplified negative
read-in signal from Fig. 71e also is applied to the
sign mixing network where it is inverted by a tube
P20 to a positive signal which is applied to the
control grids of the tubes 5, 6, 1 and 8. Accordingly, any of these tubes which has been conditioned by increased suppressor potential will be
rendered conductive by the positive read-in signal. Tubes 5, 6, 1 and 8 are coupled to the triggers 13, 14, 15 and 16, respectively in such man-

~,636,672

73

74

ner that when any of these tubes is rendered
conductive, it reverses the associated trigger. If
the operational sign is 2, trigger 13 will be reversed. If the operational sign is 1, trigger 14
will be reversed; if the operational sign is 3, trig- fi
gers.I.3 and 14 will be reversed; if the operational
sign is O,triggers 13 and 14 will remain in cancelled status. If the number sign is
then the
~rigger 15 will be reversed and if the number sign
is ---:, then the trigger 16 will be reversed.
10
The various examples of number and operational signs are given below:
Example 1.-Assume the number Sign is + and
the operational sign is 2. Accordingly, the triggers 13 and-15 will be reversed. With 13 and 15 1,5
reversed, 21 is rendered conductive. As 21 is conductive, it cuts off 31 and 31 thereupon conditions the suppressor of 39. With 14 in normal
state; it cuts off 30 which accordingly conditions
the control grid of 39. As both the suppressor 20
and control grids of 39 are conditioned by increased potentials, 39 becomes conductive and
cuts off 37. With 37 cut off, it conditions the
suppressor grid of 4. The positive read-in signal
ACC...,RI which is applied to the control grids of 25
5; 6, 1, and 0 to render any of these conditioned
tubes conductive, also is applied to the control
grid of tube 40a making this tube conductive so
as to render 4 and 12 non-conductive until the
termination of the rea.d-in signal. When this 30
read-in signal terminates, 40a again becomes
non-conductive and applies increased potential
to the control grids of 4 and 12. In the present
example, the suppressor grid of 4 has been conditioned. Accordingly, when 40a becomes non- 35
conductive, 4 becomes conductive and cuts off
the power tube 36 which thereupon applies increased potential to the output line 2sn to serve
as a representation of the
operating sign. The
line Isn remains at decreased potential so as not 40
to manifest the - operating sign. In the present example this result is obtained as follows:
With 14 in normal status it is cutting off 22, 23
and 30. With 16 in normal status it is cutting
off 24. As 23 is cut off it conditions the control 45
grid of 32. Also, 24 being cut off conditions the
suppressor of 32. Hence 32 conducts and cuts
off 40 to apply conditioning potential to the suppressor of 38. Since 30 has been cut off it is
applying conditioning potential to the control 50
grid of 38. Therefore, 38 is conductive and deconditioning 12; The latter thereby remains
non-conductive and sustains the power tube 28
in conducti.ve condition so that its output, the
line Isn. remains at low potential;
55
Example 2.-Assume the number sign is
and
the operational Sign is 1. This operational sign
is to cause the inversion of the number sign. Accordingly, the mixing network for this example
should produce the - operating sign. It is un- 60
derstood now, with the signs assumed for this
example, the triggers 14 and 15 are reversed.
With 14 reversed, it cuts off 29 which thereupon
conditions the control grid of 37; With 13 in
normal status it cuts off 21 which thereupon -6,5
conditions the control grid of 31. Trigger 16 reJllaining in normal st!J.tus cuts off 22 so as to condition the suppressor of 31. Hence 31 is conductive and cuts off 39 to apply conditioning potential to the suppressor of 37. Since 29 is apply- 70
ing conditioning potential to the control g·rid of
3-1, the· latter becomes conductive and deconditions 4 with the result that the output line 2sn
will remain at ineffective, low potential. 14 and
15 .beill~ in rever~ed status, render 23 conductive 75

+,

+

•

+

so that 23 cuts off 32. Since 32 is cut off, it makes
40 conduct whereby 38 is cut off. As 38 is cut off
it conditions the suppressor of 12. At the termination of the read-in signal the ,control grid
of 12 is conditioned and 12 becomes conductive
so as to operate through 28 to produce the increased potential on line Isn, representing the
- operating sign.
Example 3.-Assume the number sign is - and
the operational sign is 2. Accordingly, triggers
13 and 16 will be reversed. Reversed trigger 13
cuts off 29 to condition the control grid of 31.
14 in normal status cuts ·off 22, 23, and 30. 15
in normal status cuts off 21. With both 21 and
22 cut off, 31 is receiving increased supPressor
and control grid potentials and is conductive,
thereby cutting off 39. Accordingly, 39 conditions the suppressor of 37. Also, 29 being cut off,
conditions the control grid of 37. Hence, 37 is
conductive and 4 is deconditioned so that the
tube 35 will remain conductive and the
operating sign, line 2sn, will remain at ineffective
low potential. With 13 and 16 reversed, 24 is
conductive cutting off 32 which through 40 cuts
off 38. Accordingly, 12 is conditioned to operate
upon the termination of the ACC-R! pulse so as
to cause 28 to produce the effective increased potential of the - operating sign, line Isn.
Example 4.-Assume the number sign is - and
the operational sign is 1. Accordingly, triggers
14 and 16 will be reversed. 13, in normal status
cuts off 30 so as to condition the control grids of
38 and 39. Trigger 15 in normal status cuts off
23 so as to condition the control grid of 32. 13,
in normal status -cuts off 24 so as to condition
the suppressor of 32. Accordingly, 32 is conductive and cuts off 40 to condition the suppressor
of 30; Since the control grid of 38 is also conditioned, it becomes conductive so that the operating sign will not be -read out. Since 14
and 16 are both reversed, in this example, 22 is
conductive thereby cutting off 31. As 31 is cut
off it applies conditioning potential to the suppressor of 39 which is also at increased control
grid potential. Hence, 39 becomes conductive
and cuts off 31, with the result that the line 2sn
will be at high potential at the termination of
the read-in signal as now understood.
It is seen from the above examples that when
the operational sign is 2, then the operating sign
is the same as the normal sign, but, when the
operational sign is 1, then the operating sign is
the reverse of the number sign.
Example 5.-Assume the operational sign is 0.
Accordingly, 13 and 14 will remain in cancelled
status. With 13 and 14 in this status, 29 is conductive and cutting off 31. Hence, at the termination of the read-in si.gnal ACC-RI 4 will be
rendered conductive and 36 non-conductive to
produce the effective increased potential on the
line 2m, such potential manifesting a
operating sign. It will be noted that with 13 in cancelled status, it cuts off 3D to condition the control grid Of 3S. Also 14 in cancelled status cuts
off 23 conditioning the control grid of 32. 24 is
also cut off by 13 and conditions the suppressor
of 32. Accordingly, 32 will conduct and through
40 will condition the suppressor of 38. Since the
control grid of 38 also has been conditioned, 38
conducts so that 12 will not be conditioned and
the - operating Sign Isn will remain at ineffective low potential.
It is seen from this example that when the op~
erational sign is 0, a
operating sign will be readout, regardless of the number signs.

+

+

+

9,8S8,67~

15

16

Example 6.-Assume the operational sign is 3.

Accordingly, 13 and 14 are both reversed, causing 30 to become conductive. With 30 in conductive status it cuts off 38 and 39. 39 thereupon
conditions the suppressor of 31. With 13 and 14
in reversed status, 29 is cut off conditioning
the 'control grid of 31. Hence 31 is conductive
while 38 has been cut off. Under this condition,
as now understood, the line 2an will be at ineffective potential while the line Ian will be at effective potential for representing the - operating
sign.
It is seen from this example that when the operational sign is 3, the operating sign will be regardless of the number sign.
As explained above, the + and - operating
signs for a number entry into the accumulator
are represented by increased potential selectively
present on lines Ian and 2sn (Fig. 71a) , respectively. The conditions of these lines will be
unchanged until a new number entry is made.
Lines Isn and 2sn connect to the internal commutator of the accumulator and according to
which of the lines is at high potential the internal commutator will control means for transferring either the true number or its complement
from registers EC to RC. Specifically, high potential on line Isn or 2sn renders IT or ITa in
Fig. 71b conductive to set a sign storing trigger
21 in - or
sign storing state, respectively.
The
state is the shown state while the - state
is the reverse state of 2 L Depending on whether
21 is in - or
state, it cuts off 22 or 22a, respectively. If 22 is cut off it acts via 33, Fig. 71b,
to hold a line neg at low potential which is Inverted by an amplifier (Fig. 70) to increased potential on the line 5A-5B. If 22a (Fig. 710) Is
cut off, it acts via 29 to hold a line pos at low
potential which via an amplifier (Fig. 70) provides increased potential on the line BA-6B. Line
5A-5B connects to the suppressors of pairs of
tubes 9 and 13 (see Figs. 69a and 0) of which
there is a pair in each of the accumulator orders
1 to 29 (also see Fig. 71b). Line BA-BB connects
to the suppressors of ,pairs of tubes 10 and 14,
each of accumulator orders 1 to 28 including one
pair of these tubes. Thus, depending on whether
the operating sign is - or +, the tubes 9 and 13
or 10 and 14 in the accumulator orders will be
conditioned. With 9 and 13 conditioned, the
complement of the number in EC will be transferred during an ensuing accumulator cycle (Fig.
72) to RC, but with fO and 14 conditioned, the
true number will be transferred during the accumulator cycle from EC to RC.
The accumulator cycle is initiated under control of a negative start signal ACC-ST produced
by the commutator ACC.C (Fig. 78A) one AP
pulse cycle after the entry signal ACC-RI (see
Section 17, item 150). This start signal will take
effect, however, only if a proper determination
of an operating sign has been made. Assuming
that the
operating sign is being manifested,
then ITa, Fig. 71b, is conductive and in addition
to insuring that sign storing trigger 21 is 1n +
state (the shown state), cuts off 30 and 34a. If,
instead, the - operating sign is manifested, tube
17 is conductive and besides establishing trigger
, 21 in - state, also cuts off 30 and 34. With 30
cut off, it acts via 31 to cut off 35. Thus, if
either or both operating signs are manifested,
then 35 will be cut off, but if neither operating
sign is manifested, 30 will be conductive and
through 31 will maintain 35 conductive. If either
operating sign alone is manifested, then either

+

+

5

10

15

20

25

30

+

35

40

45

50

55

60

+

65

70

75

34 or 34a, but not both, will be cut off, and the
output of 34-34a will remain at low potential so
as to cut off 35a. If, by misoperation, both operating signs are manifested, then both 34 and 34a
will be cut off and 35a will be conductive. From
the foregoing, it is evident that the couple
35-35a will be cut off only if a proper operating
sign determination has been made.
Assuming couple 35-35a has been cut, off, it
acts through 36, Fig. 71b, to place terminal SNI
at reduced potential. Low potential on terminal
SNI cuts off 21, Fig. 71c, to condition the suppressor of start control tube 35. Upon termination of the entry signal ACC-RI, the negative
start signal ACC-ST is produced, as previously
stated. This Signal cuts off 36a to condition the
control grid of tube 35. Hence, if a proper operating sign determination has been made, the
start signal causes 35 to become conductive. 35
thereupon acts via 36 and 18 to reverse start
trigger 15. Reversed trigger 15 conditions 10 to
be made conductive by the next B+ pulse and
thereupon to reverse 16. With 16 reversed, it
serves via 18a to condition 20 to respond to A+
pulses. The output of 20 is effective via 28a, 31
and 32 to cause negative pulses, in phase with the
A+ pulses, to appear on line Ctr-In. This is the
common input line for the accumulator timer
(Fig. 71d). The fourteen stages of the accumulator timer are designated TO to TI3 and perform a complete ring of operation in response to
fourteen input pulses at A+ timing. The accumulator timer, acting through associated tubes,
sequences operations of the accumulator unit
during the 14-point accumulator cycle (Fig. 72).
It is evident that the first input pulse turns TI3
which reverses stage TO. The succeeding input
pulse resets TO to cause TI to be reversed, and
so on. The stages TO' to TI2 are thus reversed,
each for a cycle point, at the "0," "1" ... "11"
and "12" times of the cycle, while TI3 is turned
at "0" and reset at "13," completing the ring
operation of the timer.
During the accumulator CYcle, a series of ten
positive pulses BEP (see Fig. 72) is applied at the
mid-index times "0.5," "1.5" ... "8.5" and "9.5"
to the line 9A-9B connected to the control grid
of the tube 16 in each accumulator order (see
Figs. 69a, band 70). These pulses BEP are inverted by IB, if the latter has been conditioned
by increased suppressor potential, to negative entry pulses applied to the input of the stages I. 2,
4 and 8 of the register order RC. Also, during
the accumulator cycle, ten positive pulses ARP
are applied to line 4A-4B connected to a tube 12
in each of orders 1 to 28. These pulses ARP
occur at the cycle pOints "I," "2" . . . "9" and
"10." Tube 12 inverts the applied positive pulses
to negative entry pulses on the input of the stages
of the register order EC. As previously explained
in Section 5, ten pulses applied to a register order
effect a value cycle thereof. A number of pulses
equal to the tens complement of the digit standing in EC advances it from 9 to 0, causing stage
8 to produce a positive carry-out pulse at its
terminal c. Assuming that the true number is
being transferred from EC to Re, then the pair of
tubes 10 and 14 in each of orders 1 to 28 have
previously been conditioned, as explained. The
carry-out pulse from an EC order is applied
through a suitable coupling capacitor 8C to the
control grid of 10. With 10 conditioned, the
carry-out pulse renders it conductive to reverse
the trigger 15 (TIC). Hence, when a true number is being read out,this trigger will have been

7:7

~versedE\ tacycle ·point designated by tnenum.
ber which is the tens complement of tliedigit
initially in EC. For instance, if· the EC order
initially stood at 4 (see Fig. 72), trigger 15. wiii
be reversed at the "6;'· point of the accumulator
cycle. Also, when the true number is being transferred, 14 in each of orders 1 to 28 has also been
previously conditioned. At the "10.5" time of the
cycle, a pulse is applied via. line lA-,lB to the
control grid of 14, causing it to become conduc~
tive so as to return trigger 15 to its initial state.
During the interval in which trigger IS .was reversed, it acted through 19 to .condition 1.6 to
respond to the pulses BEP. The number of these
pulses passed through 16 to the input of RCwill
be equal, when the true number is bein'S trans":,
ferred, to the digit initially in EC. Thus, in the
ass.umed example, where EC isini tially at 4, trigger.15 is inr.eversed state from "6" to "10.5" of
the accumulator cycle and during this interval,
tube 16 will. produce four negative entry pulses
in phase with the BEP pulses. These four pulses
will enter digit 4 into the register. order RC. ..
Assuming instead that the complement of a
nmnber in EC is to be transferred to RC, the tubes
13 and 9 in each order have previously been conditioned. With regard to the 1st or units ord.er
(Fig. 69a) a positive "0" pulse is applied, via iine
IDA, to the control grid. of 13 causing it, if conditioned, to become conduct.ive. 13 thereupon acts
through the anode resistor of l!l to reverse I 5.
The carry pulse· from the EC order is effective
talrough the capaCitor BC to render 9 conductive,
if· conditioned. Upon 9 becoming condpctive, it
restores 15. It is clear that as far as the units
order is concerned, the trigger 15 will be in rev;ersed state from "0" of the accumulator cycle
to a point of the cycle corresponding to the tens
complement of the digit in the re~dster order EC.
During this interval, 15, acting through 19 will
have conditioned 16 to pass the BEP pulses to
register RC, thus entering the tens complement
Of tp.e digit initially in EC into RG. As an example, aSS 11me the units order EC 'initially stands
at.4 (see Fig. 72). Trigger ".5 in the units order
therefore will be in reversed state from "0" to
"6'.' of the cycle. During this interval, 16 in the
units order wm pass six BEP. pulses to register
RC, entering 6 therein. With regard to the orders
above the first order, a "F' pulse will be applied
via line 8A-SB to 13. so that if 13 is conditioned,
it will become conductive and reve1"se 15 at the
"1" time of the acc"mulator cycle. The carry~out
pulses from. the EC orders act through 9 to rest.ore 1,5 at the. point of the cycle cor-responding
to the teniS complement of the digit initially in
EC. Thus, the trigger 15, of each order above the
first, will be in reversed state for. a number of
cy.cle po;nts equal to the nines complement of
the diNit initially in EC. As an example, if EC
in the second order initially stands at I! (see Fig.
72) then the related trigger 15 will be in reversed
state from "1" to "6~' o£ the cycle. During this
interval, 15 will be conditioned and will Dass
thrmlgh five pulses BEP to the input of the rel~.ted
rev,iiSter order RC. In this manner the nines complement of the digit in EC of the second order will
be transferred to the correspondin" order of register RC. The entry of the tens complement
the l1nits order digit into RCand the entries of
the nine complements. of the digits in the other
orders has. the effect of transferring the tens
, the next run of accumulation. The ,positive Big-

• t*

2,636,672

87

nal'CTLR, from the main commutator, is inverted by 3, Fig. 71g, to a negative signal CTLR
which restores II, Fig. 71/.
It is to be noted that if, In the complement
conversion cycle, a carry is effected to the 29th,
order (Fig. 71b), this order will advance from 9
to O. Such occurrence is an indication of a misoperation or that the capacity of the accumulator has been exceeded. The carry pulse to the
29th order is applied to its terminal 19A and not
only operates through 26a, 32, and the anode resistor of 16 to produce the carry entry into the
29th order RC but also is effective to restore the
trigger 23, Fig. 71b, to its cancelIed position.
The trigger 23 in this position is operative
through 3 Ia to apply increased potential to the
line RS23. This increased potential acts on the
suppressor of 10, Fig. 71/. Subsequently, when
trigger II, Fig. 71/, reverses under c'ontrol of the
cycle complete signal CYCT, it applies increased
potential to the control grid of 10, Fig. 71/.
Accordingly. this tube becomes conductive and
acts through 4a. and its output line 411 to render
II, Fig. 71g, conductive. Hence when the proceedtrigger 19, Fig. 71g, is subsequently reversed
to cut off 14a, the conductive tube II prevents the
common anode line of 14, II, and Iia from rising
in potential so that the Proceed signal is not
produced. The result in the accumulator is read
out, however, in the manner described before but
the main sequence means receives no Proceed
signal and the machine operation is interrupted
as an indication of misoperation.
The main sequence means may calI for a tolerance check operation, in a manner described
in Section 17c. This is an operation for checking the accuracy of a computation. For instance,
a· computation may be effected in one way and
the result stored. The same computation may
then be effected in a different way and its result
stored. The two computation results may then
be sent to the accumulator one as a negative and
the other as a positive number so that the accumulator will obtain the difference if any between the two computation results. This difference is then read out of the accumulator and reentered therein as a negative absolute number.
The main sequence means then selects the source
for a tolerance number which has been set up in
storage. This tolerance number is the allowable difference between the results of two computatlons of a particular type. This tolerance
number is entered into the accumulator as a
positive number. It is apparent ·that if the tolerance number is equal to or greater than the
actual difference obtained between the two com-.
putations performed in different manners, that
the computation results are within the tolerance.
On the other hand, if the tolerance number is less
than the difference between the two computatlons, then the computation results are not within the tolerance. In other words, if the 29th
order of the accumulator is at 0 at the end of the
accumUlation of the tolerance nUmber and the
difference between the two computation results,
then. the computatiOns are within the tolerance,
but if the 29th order of the accumulator stands
at 9 at the end of the accumulation, .then the
computation results are not within the tolerance.
Prior to the tolerance check accumulation, main
sequence applies a negative tolerance check signal ToL.Ck to the tube 6a, Fig. 71g. This signal
cuts off the tube. As a result tube 14 is made
conductive so as to reverse the tolerance check
trigger 22, Fig. 71g. With this trigger reversed,

88

it is cutting off 24a so as -to tend to render the
interlock tube II a conductive. If tolerance
f)

lU

1;:;

SU

z;;

3;)

3;;

4U

if)

60

55

60

65

70

75

check accumulation ends with a 0 in the 29th
order of the accumulator, then the O.CK signal
produced by the sign test of the 29th order is effective through 1, Fig. 71g, and 6a to render IBa
conductive 50 as to reverse the Proceed trigger
19, Fig. 71g, and ·the readout control trigger 23.
Since a complement conversion cycle has not been
effected, the trigger II, Fig. 71/, remains in shown
status and renders 23 conductive. - The output
2324 of 23, Fig. 71/, is commoned with the output
of 24a, Fig. 71g. Hence, even though the tolerance check trigger 22 has reversed and cut
off 24'a, the common output 2324 of 23, Fig. 711,
and 24a, Fig. 71g, does not rise in potentIal because 23, Fig. 71/, remains conductive. Accord-ingly, Ila, Fig. 71g, stays in cut-off condition and
does not interfere with 'the production of a Proceedsignal ·to main sequence.
If the tolerance check accumUlation cycle ends
with a 9 in the 29th order of the accumulator,a
complement conversion cycle takes place in·the
same manner as explained before in connection
with Fig. 73. After the completion of the conversion cycle, trigger II, Fig. 71/. is reversed. Consequently the tube 23, Fig. 71/, is cut off and since
24a, Fig. 71g, also is cut off, the output 2324. of
these tubes is at high potential so tul:!e Ila, Fig.
71y, becomes conductive and blocks the production of a Proceed signal. This is an indication
that the computations are not within the desired
tolerance.
The description of accumUlation thus far· has
considered half correction of the result as suppressed. When the program calls fora desired
receiving unit to .receive .the result, it also calls
for a desired column shift of the result into the
receiving unit. The column shift number in sequence is applied to the descending counter (Fig.
27a) of the denominational shift unit described
in Section 12. Unless suppressed, half correction
of the result will be made. It is understood that
half correction is suppressed unless the column
shift called for is a shift of at least one column
to the right. The column shift number determines the order of the result to be rounded off
or half corrected and, thereby,. determines the
sub-units order into which the half correction
entry of 5 is to be made. If the SUb-units order
of the. result is 5 or higher, the half correction
entry of 5 acts through the carry means of theresult accumulator to add 1 to .the final columnshifted result.
All numbers transmitted to a receiving unit
from the computing section are to be in true
form. Accordingly, if the accumulated result is
negative, a complement conversion cycle will precede the half correction sequence. But if the re:suIt is positive, the half correction sequencewii!·
start directly after the detection of the positive
result indicant 0 in the 29th accumulator order.
The half correction sequence is under control
of the internal commutator of the accumulator
unit. This commutator calls for the accumulated
result to be read out of the registers E.C (Figs.
69a, band 70) and brings the denominational
shift unit into operation to receive the result and
to effect column shifting thereof fora number of
steps less by 1 than the column shift number
entered by sequence into the descending counter.
This shift brings the sub-units order of the result
into shift column 1 (Fig. 25) ; hence, for convenience, this shift may be identified as the subcolumn shift and the thus-far shifted result may

89

_ called the sub--ahifted lelSult. Meanwblle,. ~
IIltenlilJ commutator of the accumulato~ unit
C&tJI5eS the EC and RC registers to. be cleared and
*hereafter produces an entry: of. 5 in. the 1st order
me followed by a true transf.er of the 1) into the
1st order Re. When this 1) entry and the sub~
tmits column shiit have both been completed, the
internal commutator o.f the aa:cumula.tor causes
the sUb-shifted result to be .true added into:
registers RC. The accumUlation of the subdUfted result with the half conection entry of 5
1Ji'the 1st order RC effects the rounding off of tbe
ult1m&te result. This is the final stage in the
balf correction procedure performed under controlof the internal commutator of the accumulitor unit. At this stage, the units order, rounded
off digit of the ultimate result stands in the 2nd
order RC. Upon completion of this final stage
the internal commutator sends a Proceed signal
to main sequence. Main sequence then. tunc\ions, in the manner described later in Section
17,.. item 20, to direct the result from l'egisters
RC to the shift columns and to cause the denominational shift unit to resume operation.
Since the descending counter (Fig. 27a) now
atandsat 1. the' denominational shift unit will
perform the final shift step which brings the
Units order of the ultimate result into shift colwnn 1. Thus, the total. number of shift steps
called for by main sequence has been effected and
the shifted resUlt is a rounded off result .
. Fig. 74 is a timing chart indicative of the half
correction procedure. Since it is assumed that a
halr correction suppression signal HCS has not
been received by I, Fig. 7lg, the trig'ger 5, Fig. nv,
remains in shown state. With the trigger in this
state, it allows the potential on certain control
lines to remain at high or low potential, as the
case may be, and these lines are marked HC+
or HC-, indicating respectively high or low potential on these lines during the half correction
procedure.
As mentioned before, the commutator ACC.C
(Pig; 78A) applies a negative going start signal
ACC-ST to the internal commutator of the accumulator unit. This start signal initiates an
it.ccUmulating cycle. The first signal ACC-ST is
effective when half correction is not suppressed
to reverse a trigger 20, Fig. 71/; as follows. This
signal ACC-8T, besides being applied to 38a, Fig.
'llc;iS also applied to 32a, Fig. 71t, cutting it off
to apply increased potential to the control grid
of 28. With trigger 5, Fig. 71y, in normal status,
it serves via 9, Fig. 71y, and line 928 to apply
conditioning potential to the suppressor of 28,
:PIg. 71/. Accordingly, when the control grid of
21 is raised in potential under control of the signalACC-BT, 28 conducts and turns 20, Fig. 71/.
Turned trigger 20, Fig. 71/. acts via line 2011 to
render 11. Fig. 71g, conductive. This serves as
a Proceed signal block until trigger 20, Fig. 71/,
i8t'eset, which will not occur until the half correction sequence has been completed, as will be
d.cr1bed.
Accumulation of a plurality Df numbers iseffected in the manner already described. After
the last accumulator cycle in the accumUlation
run has been completed, commutator ACC.C
. (Flg. 78A) produces the readout control signal
R.ROC which causes trigger 31, Fig. 71g, to reverse, as previously explained. Upon reversal of
If, it acts via 28a to reverse the sign test initiating trigger 20, Fig. 71g. Assume the sign tes'
tlnds a positive result in the accumUlator, so that
positive signal O.CK Is produced. When half
correction was suppressed, tube 1, Fig. 71g, re-

90

llUlined: c_itioIW1 un.d:~r eontrol Qf re.~~4C1
tt~... 5, ~. 71g. aoll\og lIi. 10. f'iog. 'Uq',. ~~
O.O1{· sig~a.l wlUt then effecti~. W ma~e 1. F~,
7tq. conduct a~ a r.e~u1t of' wbiclJ, t~i PtQe~
:, tr~gger til I'\ud tb~ rea.d QUt QQU~l ~r~gg~r N
wera reverseQ. HoweveJt. it: n~!i. no;\'I ~el); Ii!!'"
sumed that half correction is not suppr~~. IN,
that 5, Fig, 'li1O', is not t~rn.ed. "nq 1 is not ~Qn­
dltlone.d. Accordingly, thlt O,C~. signal wUl nQi
ftl ca.use a. Proceed. .!ligna} 1:.9 be prod by the re:lated a~i ..
fier (Fig. 70) to. the p(lsUive ACG-RO :;ign~l ou
line UA.~22B. Consequently, the w.gi~ ~d
sign in the RO or.ders 1 tQ 29 are appH~d Iil.S re.duced potentials on the buses o~ the Internal
Out bus columns 29 to 1, respectively. The aIIl'"
plifier (Fig. 20) inverts these potentials to. in ...
creased potentials Qn the corresponding ~u!leli o.f
the Internal In bus colum~.
During the three AP pulse period of reveual
of 21, Fig. 71e, it makes 23 conductive to prod\lce
a negative signal aCCS. This signal acts v1,lJ,
2511 and 25 in Fig. 71b to assure the setting of
21, Fig. 7lb, in true add condition, Which ill its
cancelled condition. The signa,l FleCS also ini.
tiates operation of the denominationll tube 15. Fig. 71g, but since trigger 31,
Fig. 71g, is still in turned state, it functions. via
28a to maintain 15 at cut-off, whereby a complete
signal CYCPT to main sequence is blocked. Upon
restoration of T, Fig. 71/, it returns 12, Fig. 71/.
As 12 returns, it restores 20. Restored 20 acts
via line 2011 to cut off n. Fig. 71g. This re- .
leases l1a for subsequent operation, under control of the next complete signal CYCT, to cause
a Proceed signal and a result readout signal to
be produced.
Meanwhile, the denominational shift unit has
been column-shifting the accumulated result previously directed into the shift columns (Fig. 25).
For each column shift step. the descending
counter (Fig. 27a) is stepped to diminish the
column shift number by 1 (see Fig. 26). When
8,11 but the last step of the column shift steps
called for by main sequence have been performed,
the descending counter stands at 1, 1. e., only
stage TI is in reversed state. Under this condition, the tubes 8, 12, 20, 24, 32 and 36 are all cut
off. The trigger 3D, Fig. 27b, was turned after
the accumulated result was entered into the shift
columns, as previously brought out. Trigger 30,
Fig. 27b, remains in turned stateuntiI reset under
control of the next cancel signal SHCL from the
main commutator. With 30 turned, it is effective via line G to cut off 31, Fig. 27a. It is seen
that when half correction for an accumulated
result is taking place that the common anode line
E of tubes 8, 12, 20, 24, 32, 36 and 31 will rise in
potential as soon as the descending counter stands
at 1. The increased potential on line E makes 8
Fig. 27c, conductive to reset trigger II-SHC3.
is to be noted that except in the half correction
procedure for an accumulated result, the trigger
II is restored when the descending counter goes
to 0 as explained in ,Section 12. Restoration of
I t is followed by restoration of 15 and then by
18 in Fig. 27c. When 18 is restored, it cuts off
14 to cause a positive going pulse to be applied
via wire 14w to tubes 4, 38 and 39 in Fig. 27b.
In the normal column shift procedure, this pulse
makes 39 conductive to reverse 40 with the effect. of sending the shift complete signal SHCP
to the main commutator. When column shift
under control of the accumulator unit is taking
place, 3D, Fig. 27b, is in reversed state and deconditioning 39. Accordingly, the Positive pulse
on wire 14wis not effective to make 39 conductive and the complete signal SHCP is blocked.
Instead, a complete signal SHCA is sent to the
internal commutator of the accumUlator, to direct it to continue the half correction procedure
and at the same· time, the sub-shifted result i~
r~l.!.d, Oll,t to· the Int~rnal p.uses. ,!,Q provide these

It

55

60

65

70

75

e1!~ts,tumed ft,

93

94

Ji"Ig. 27b, cOnditionsSS whlch
creased l'Otentfal on the &node Ur1e of' 114 8Zl4't
beeomes' oonduettve upon receiving the posItive
maintains n conductive, whereby the S1l.pt)INICJr
pwse, via a capacitor, from wire J4w.
ot 2l is held to. cut-off. AcCOrdingly, when t1:l,....
Wben 38 becomes conductive; 1t reverses 31.
ger (:9 is turned, it does not make 2J conduct, toReversed IT serves: 'tis n to produce th~ nega- 5 produce the Rec cancel signaL
ttve, .complete s1gnal SHCA. Reversed 3:1 alSo'
Trigger 19 is reset by the next AP pUlse ..!ter
aOC6 11a 144 and PS& to prodmle the positive Bigits reversal. Upon return of 19, it tuTn:8 It.. III
lIa] SHRO' wh1ch cause.s the number in the shift
the complement conversion Sf!(ft,le!lCe, t.ut'IiIM 2'f
colUmn<; to be aJlPUed to, the Internal OUt buies
was effective to make condittoned I, Fig. 71ft con.and thence via the amplifier (Fig~ 20:) to the: In- Hr ductlve, as a result of whieh trigger at, Fig. 71b.
mWlll Il1 buses.
was set in complement ently cOl1trol positioli.. ltI.
It ~ namber at c:olumn sb1ft steps called for
the halt carry procedure, the su.ppressor Of f. FlI~
bI' main sequence 8nd entered in the descend,.
71/, is held to cut-off by turned 35" Pig. 71j, alld.
iU& coumter is. simply one step', then the stgnal8
therefore;, the complement conditiOning' of t~...
Sl:iCA and SHRO are produced as soan as 30. 1;" ger 2:1. Fig. 7117, dot!S not occur. Instead, .. tubll
Pig. 27o,. is turnee. .At that point, tube' 31 in Fig.
fa, Pig. 71t•. is made coIlciuctive b1 the turning Of
~1. will be c:ut CiltI IUld.line E will rise in poten,..
24, the tube 26 being conditIOned bY'the increased
tml The tube 8, Fig'. 27c, will: become cODducpotential existing now on the ~()mmOD output; of
"'VB and block 'I from reversal by the trigger 6
21 and 3 L When 2& becomes conductive. it QetIJ
"'hen the latter turns Wlc1er control of the shift 20 via 31 a and 30 to produce the negattve going 11g.
Slut pulse SHS.Fa1IUre Of. II to' reverse pre..
nal ACSB. Tbl!s is a back signal ro the I.nterna.t
vems wi·tiatlion of column shift ste~, and trigger
commutator of the denominational shift unit aM
18 remains normal.. Hence, tube 14. is effective
also serves vila 2:6a, Fig. 71b, and 18a ta ins~e the
via line 14w to maintain tube 4. Fig. 27b, condisetting ot 21. Fig. 'llu, in true add status. Reotianed. Accordingly, UpDD the rise in potential ::) ferring'to Fig. 2717. signal ACSB acts via· 32a to
of.li.Jle. E .. 4, Fig. 27b, becomes: conductive and apmake' 34 conductive, foreing trigger 31 to retu:tn.
pDes a turning pulse by- way of the anode reThis terminates the complete signal SHCA sent.
sistor of 38 to trigger 31. Hence. the signals
~ 33 to' 36a. Ffg'~ 71t,. of the interna:l commubtOr
SHRO and SHCA are produced.
of the accumulator unit.
'l'henegative complete signal SHCA goes to the ;-"
Res.tm:ation of. 24, Fig.. 711 by' the next AP pal.se:
Ii]:kt of 3Ba. Fig. 7lt, and cuts off this tube. The:
results in the reversal' of 1&,.. Just 11$ in the eomnext AP pulse cuts off 36. and 36-36a thereupon
plement, conversion proeedmre, reversed t8 acts
make 3.2 conductive, so as. to turn 35, Fig. 711. It
via la. Fig.. 71y, and 2 to produce the positivestg.·
has been explained that 20. Fig. 711. is turned off
nal CC-8T which causes an accumulator cycle, to
when the aecumulator cycle for entry of 5 in the ;;;i take place. During this cycle, the SUb-shifted
1st. onder RC has been completed. Trigger 35,
accumulated. result. in EC 18 transferred to. RC.
Fig. 71/. may be reversed by the signal SHCA
being added. therein to the half correctton 5 txt
either before or after 20 is returned, depending.
the 1st order RC. This means that the registers
on. the number of column shift, steps which pre:e.G now cantain the'munded off reslillt in arcierl
Ced& the production of, signal SHCA. Only when ,10 a to. 29.
21 has been returned and 35 also been reversed..
As' now understoOd, 8, Fig. 711. is tUl'med at
is the half correction procedure continued. by the
completion of the accumulator cycle and returned
internal commutator of the accumulator unit.
by. the next AP pulse, causing 1 to tum., for one
Returned 20 is effective via 21 to cut off 2la, and
AP pulse cycle. When turned. 1 is stm ill:effaereversed 3'5 cuts off 31. The common anode line
tive to produce the c(}mplete signal CYCPT beof 21a and. 31 thereupon rises in potential and 4u cause 31, Fig. 71y. is still in turned status, ROW'..
renders n conductive, turning 13 for one AP
ever, just as in the complement cOIW'ersion propulse cycle. Attention is directed. to the fact
cedure, turned 1, Fig. nt, along with turned 18· Is:
tha.t this same trigger (3 also is turned., but under
effective to make 3, Fig. 711, conductive, When,
control of g. and 4, during the complement. con..·
3. becomes conductive. it acts· via. wire III to cut
versiOn sequence (see Ffg. 73,.. Just as in the 5'0 off f7a,Fig. 71g. This results: in the turning of
nt,tter sequence, the triggers 14 and 1'8 in Fig. 71/
Proceed trigger 19 and readout. control trigger 23.
are turned when t3 is restored; 14 is retu.rned by
When 7, Ypg. 71t, is returned by the AP pulse
the next AP pulse and turns Ui which, upon its
following its. turning, it, restores l&.
retnrn by a following AP pulse. resets IB. Just
. As already explained, the reversal at 23, Pig.
as tn the complement conversion sequence, 14 and 55 ny·.. causes tube 21, still conditioned under emIr8', while in. reversed state. respectively cause the
tro} of the R.ROC signal, to' become. condneti~
gJgnafs ECC and ACC-RI to be produced. Signal
cutting off an. This acts. via as to' produce the:
ECC cancels the registers EC and signal ACC-RI
ACC-EO signal. Th€ signal ACC-RO cMlS6lS' th~
Ca.uses the number on the Internal In buses to be
rounded off result along with the sub-units; order
e'ntered in registers EC. In the half correction 60 dlgi.t. to be read out of the aecumula.tor and onto:
setIuence, the 5 standing in the 1st order EC is
the Internal buses. The Proceed signal. in a mal~tcanceled and the sub-shifted accumulated result
ner expl8,iJiled in SecHon 17,. Item 20•. causes main
iSsued from the shift columns is entered in the
seq:uence toO' ccmpletetlle half conectton: J,)r.oce-.
regtsters EC.
dure.. This involves the entry of the nstift, tead
.' 'Upon, the return of lB. it turns 19 •. as in the 65 out. of the aeeunmlator, into the' shfft columm
complement conversion procedure. In the com.(Fif{. 2&) and the initiation af coliunn shifting
plement conVersion procedure,. the reversed trigaccoraing to' the procedure outlined in Section
ger 19 was effective to cause 21 to conduct and
produce the negative goingRCcancel signal RCC.
12~ A new column shift number is not entered
In the half co.rrection procedure,itis not desired 70 in the descending counter (Fig. 27a) which reto cancel' registers- RC, but, instead, to retain the
mains set at 1 to which it was brought by the
half correction 5 in the, 1st order Re. As previhalf correction procedure. Acco.rdingly, the.deousty explained. the common anode lin.e of 21a
nominatiomtl shift unit will effect the flnaladd1and 31 is now at increased potential owing to,
tiona! colmnn shift step; dlscarding thesula-unJ.ti
a befng reset and 15 being turned. The In- 7'5' order digit of the result and briilgmg the rounded

2,888,872

95

96

multiplicand facters. The register PQ serves dur:ing a dividing computation to receive a dividend
mulator, into shift orders 1 to 27. The trigger 35,
factar in orders 5 to 18 and thereafter serves to
Fig. 71t, is restored under cantrol of the posicompare the divisor with the original dividend
tive signal CTLR from the m.ain commutator.
This signal is produced at the time the accumu- 5 and successive dividend remainders so as to form
the quotient. The multiplier register MP, the
lated rounded off result is entered into the deregister MC-DR and the dividend receiving 'Ornominatianal shift unit (see Sectian 17, Item 19).
ders 5 to 18 of PQ all have their entry means.
Signal CTLR is inverted by 3, Fig. 71g, ta a negaassaciated with the buses in Internal In bus
tive reset signal far II and 35 in Fig. 71t.
The abave descriptian 'Of the half carrectian 10 columns 16 to 29.
Entries of the numbers an these buses will be
Sequence has cansidered the accumulated result
selectively made inta the different registers and
as pasitive. If the accumulated result is negaregister 'Orders accarding to whether multiplying
tive, the D.CK signal is nat praduced when the
'Or dividing camputatian is called far. The MD
sign test is made, sa that 26, Fig. 71e, is nat
turned and the half carrectian sequence is de- 15 unit alsa has a sign mixing circuit (Fig. 65;)
which mixes the aperatianal signs with the factor
layed. The negative sign of the result is stared
signs and praduces a result sign thraugh the cirby triggers 20 and 23 in Fig. nb, and a camcuit shawn in Fig. 65k. The result sign will
plement canversian sequence (see Fig. 73) is
be applied ta Internal Out bus calumn 1. The
effected in the manner previausly described.
When the conversian cycle is campleted, 8, Fig. 20 result number, quatient 'Or praduct, will be read
aut to 28 places from 'Orders 33 to 6 'Of PQ and
71/, turns and restores 6 which causes II ta turn,
applied to calumns 2 to 29, respectively, 'Of the
all as described befare. When II turns, it cuts
Internal Out bus-set, as indicated in Fig. 20.
'Off 23a, causing a positive pulse ta be transmitMultiplicatian will be effected during a run
ted via line 2328 ta the cantral grid 'Of 28, Fig.
7le. Since the half carry suppressian trigger 25 'Of sequence far multiplicatian (see Sectian 18),
while division will be effected during a run of
Ii,Fig. 71g, has nat been reversed, the line, 928
is at high patential and canditianing 28, sa that
dividing sequence (see Section 19). During the
multiplying sequence, the multiplying computaupon the turning of II, Fig. 71t, 28, Fig. 71e,
tion cantrol cammutator MYC (Fig. 78M) is conbecames conductive and reverses 26 and 21. This
starts the half carrectian sequence which is ;;0 ditioned far 'Operation ta apply signals to the
MD unit. During the dividing run, the dividing
effected' in the manner already described.
Ta camplete the descriptian 'Of the accumulatar
computation control commutator DVC (Fig. 78D)
is conditianed for aperatian and applies cantral
unit, attentian is directed ta the fact that if the
sign test at the campletian of the accumulatian
signals to' the MD unit. The MD unit includes'
of a plurality 'Of numbers finds neither 0 nar 9 "n its awn subsequencing means which may be
in the 29th accumulator 'Order, neither the D.CK
called the internal cammutator of this unit and
nor 9CK signal is praduced and the Praceed sigis illustrated in Figs. 65a ta i. The internal comnal is nat sent to main sequence, nar is the remutatar includes its own source (see Fig. 65i) of
sult read aut. The failure ta sense either 0 'Or 9
50 kc. A and B pulses for cantrolling aperatians
in the 29th accumulator 'Order is an indicatian of t;O of the multiplying and dividing means. Only
misaperatian in which is included the passibility,
the positive A and B pulses are effective pulses
remote as it may be, that the sum 'Of the numas used herein and it is ta be understaad' that
bers entered in the accumulatar exceeds its capacreference to these pulses is to the positive pulses.
ity. It is to be nated, alsa, that even thaugh
The MD unit includes, in its internal commutathe RC registers are cancelled under cantral 45 tor, three electronic cammutators or timers.
'Of the internal cammutator 'Of the accumulatar
called the primary, secandary and tertiary timduring ~e camplement conversian and half carers. The primary timer (Fig. 65h) is used in
rectian pracedures, the sign 'Of the result is nat
multiplication or in division ta define what may
be called the primary cycle (see Fig. 66), During
cancelled because it is stared by the trigger 20,
Fig. 71e, which is reset under cantral 'Of signal 50 this cycle a number in the register.MC-DR may
be transferred to the result register PQ. This
CTLR, as previausly described.
transferred number is a multiplicand number if
14. The multiplying ana aiviaingunit
multiplication is being performed and is a divisor
This is a unit of the electranic camputing secnumber, if division is being performed. The sectian diagrammatically shawn in Fig. 20. The 55 ondary timer (Fig. 65g) is used 'Only ina multimultiplying and dividing means per se of this
plying calculatian and cantrols stepping of 'Orunit are 'Of the same general type as the multiders of the register MP far the initiation 'Of priplying and dividing means disclased in applimary cycles. The tertiary timer (Figs. 65e and
catian Serial Na. 704,914, of Dickinsan et aI.,
d) is used both in division and in multiplicatian
filed Octaber 22, 1946, with certain novel changes 60 ta determine the column shift pasitions. The
and additians which will be described hereintertiary timer has thirty positians. During multiplication 'Only the first fourteen positians are
after.
The multiplying and dividing unit includes a
used and multiplication is terminated upan the
14-arder register MP (nate Fig. 64b) far receiving
end of the 14th calumn shift step 'Of multiplla multiplier factar when multiplicatian is called 65 catian. In division, the first calumn shift posifar. The multiplying and dividing unit, heretion which is used is positian 2 and the last
inafter abbreviated as the MD unit, also inwhich may be used is pasition 30. Half correccludes a 14-arder register MC-DR (nate Fig. 64b)
tian 'Or raunding off may be effected in 'an 'Order
far receiVing a multiplicand factar when multi'Of PQ selected by the denaminational shift numplication is called far and for receiving a divisar 70 ber in the pragram means.
factar when divisian is called for. The MD unit
The multiplying means will now be described:
further includes a register PQ having 33 'Orders
14a. The multiplying means
a few 'Of which are shawn in Fig. 64h. The regMultiplication
is effected here by repeat addiister PQ functians during a multiplying camputatien te ferm the product of the multiplier and 76 tian of the multiplicand. The multiplicand dur-

off result read out of orders 2 to 28·of the accu-

,.,~

"
,in,. ~ ..~rLEl§ Qt .1JJ.w.til¥i~~
f#ps Hl rmt~ec;lJfOO!l
r
.MC~~~ t,pto 9F.ge. S @i ,P~~l~~~ ;b¥,~1HD¥l

~ill

.
pe,ltppliep. to ..the5
'J:.llllltl§ of Internal
In bus

iri~~~dr6a!id
.~:.e~ic~:~~~scif~~ii;i:Sp!~~
" . ' .. ' . . . .
.
.

~iPP!,L,q.,¥,;-,
.~ t4!t~~~Y~JAUl~~~4a,!;J9R- ~eps.
,]:,P!)
~iv:ely.

';rheIp:un~plican,q. entry signal MC-RI
i> will then be applied causing the condi.tioned tubes
~~ ~1ept~g ,orq.e,r;so;f .P<9 ip ,~$~~;t;l ~it,t
,M9I to· Qe.cpme .cop.ductive and cut off the correpositiop. J§,~te;rw~~w tl¥l ,4igit ~~R\j,'W~
)?ponding. t1l.QesMC;e:. Tl}.:ereupon. the tubes MCE
tb.emlll.!i~~li.er w~r ~iCll ,j,s ~'~1j1gp,t!n!AJl!w~-cause the related triggers of register MC-DR to
trol i,n tb~ \P~rtic.1;l:larc9~~ ;Shi{tpo¥H,qp.
,be reversed. so~i liP i'epresent or register the
~en :tJ:;le m¥lt:i,plj,c~llil ~.s ~n,!j1ntwep. ~~:p.~ 10 multiPlic,and fac,tor.Sirnilar1y, for m~king the
selecte9 ,Qr~ers Qf PQ!~ :;p.Ul'A~er P} M~~?,~S,~9~1~p
entry of ..the m,ul.ti);?Iier iac,tor. the multiplier fac:the ¥Calue .Qf·!!:\I,e!ile(}~Jll(}t~MW1c;l.!1lii,J; ~~!tR-,,tor willb,e appli.ed\o the Internal In bus-columns
ingio. tJjJ,~,~~mt.rollW ~\ier 9f~. ~ 1¥¥;\tiPJixa'"
}6 to 29 Jifter }yl1.i«h the entry signal MP-R;I will
tion stepjs ,oYce,r \~ ·j;Aepwmp't.l :.sl)if~tl~.~ "h'>
.be applied to.tuQe$ MPI causing .the conditioned
st.erort:lingly •.the tubesMCI2 and
sho.'Nn .in·Fig.~b,f:tIui.~ 'J;&t, .:Jt1:Jlh,. Jll~tl;1. l~~I,1.~of prqer 1 and tpe tu,bes~I~ .and4 of order 1
31st and S3nd Qr~rsiW"P~ ~r£)aQ~)'.>.!njn:E.ig.:p'Vl: ...25 are .conditiQned. The ¥C-RIsignal will then
It.is -understood :that ~Oh.:$~i~t.tlr J~r:d,~r j~ (~
render .the tubes Me12 and 4in order lconducthetype,discusS6d.in;~.tiQn;5 ~d f!l}~WJ;ljtlF,igstive. so as to cut' off tl1etubes MCE2 and 4 of
1<5 ,and J:5a.
.1;11is order.A,s ,a result..~he .triggers 2 ,ltnd 4 of
''Ilhe ,multiplicand .,sud ,:ID\tl~~p.Utlr ~J:9-lilS ,~-e
the fir:storder of register MC-DR are reversed.
applied,onea;ta time (to;ube'lJJ,ter:ool ,I'!li.bus~9l- 3,0 'The ,first ·9rderof thIs rigisteris the~ storing
umns 16;to -29,. Deing .Ilepre8flnte(lJp!'!~l1~ry 4~ithedigit,ti.
..
mal Jor.m, ,as nowunder,Stoo.d.. by seJecti;:v.e l~Jg~
.. \Vh€m mVltipUcatiqn is called ,for by the proand "low,potentials ,Qn rthe ibll&eS I, J. (!1. ~,t),(l JI::Qf
gram. a multIplication .calculation control comeach of i:olumns .II!) to'29 Lof tbelnter:t;\al ;In)puslnutB,tor. MYC(Fig. ~8M) is conditioned :for opset. Tbe ,buseslof··columns i16 to :I9,Qith,e:lnter,-35 .eration. in the mahIJ.er later .described ill Section
nal 'in ·bus...,set .,are :connected rtOCQl'r.e1ll10:pQiflg
18. This commutator ,produces signals for conorders :14 to J ,of iresp,ecttlre'lpultipU-canil,841.d
,trolling ..the lmu~tiplYihg procedure. The first
.~ig~l p'rQdyced qy~~e.coi:mnUt~t9r is the .negamultiplier .entry,means. ,as cindicated inlRig. ~~
(also see ,Fig. (20). 'The centr.ylroeaus .for ;~a.Qb
tive signal.M-Presense. ,This SIgnal cuts off the
.order of MC-"DR ine1udesifour.,gate tupes:~MG.IB, 40 Ilqrmally cOnducti"etube.s H2B .and H21 (Fig.
4, 2 ,and :1 .and Ifour ,;associated .;~ntry i~.ectini
65e). The ,tube H,2.~ais .at cllt-off. unless a pretubes ·MCE1I, 4,'.2 .,and J .'TQeLenk-y ID.eeItiS }{Qr
v~QusIl).ultiplYilJ.gQr ,\lcti9n.3b!ind.serves to,.l'eset the
in)~~g,,~O .(:~~ ~c~!op,:~~ ."tor~y~~~~.e;;~l~~
con,tl'ol. tr~ggers . ()f th,e;~D ~Jl£el'p.al ,.commuta.t;r~ggel',s !wl;l~ ,~t~e. ;;~s ,JHie';I(,ll,lt r¢' :,:1t l.is~,~!~~r
. tpr .,e.x;ce,:pt,.f()i> ,tho§'e}p. .' F~s.,6.5a .arid 'b. Tp.e
. iIlQ~~t~t, fpr~~~.~{~~nt~.y,eft,a 3R~llB:PlJj:,Wil.d
duratIon of the cancel,,sjgllal is lilllited to .four
:~~t9r. ,~1!e ~!l1~~!ql:\I¥i'f'feswetj~,~,;.~~s., 15:~"O\*~. ~.p:y~ ~~~~s'pj [fh~;,~celL timing ,{:ir,cuit

n~n;l~er¢ tilPe~ ~p..e ~uJMpl~can,9ds ~ter~4 Jpt9

• __

_

__

~

_

L

'.

'

-

~

I

_

99

100

which compri~es triggers HID, HII, and Hl2stag~s PRO to PRI3 and is driven by negative
(Fig. 65e). when HI5 was turned to release the
A phase pulses on the input PRIo Each series
pancel timing counter for operation, it also
of 14 such pulses produces a cycle of the primary
brought the cancel control triggerHIS into opertimer. The first pulse reverses PRI3 to cause
ation. HI5 also cut off H13. HI3a is already 5 reversal of PRO. Upon reversal of PRO it apc,tit off under control of H 14. With hoth Rl3 and
plies a positive pulse to A 18 (Fig. 65h), initially
HI.3a cut off, H9 is conditioned to respoIid to A
conditioned by All, causing AI8 to become conpulses and produces negative, A-phase pulses
ductive and turn A5. A5, now turned, condiwhich are applied to the cancel timing counter.
tions A3 to respond to B+ pulses. A3 acts
The first pulse reverEes HID. The second pulse 10 through AI to produce positive MC-RB pulses
returns HID and HID thereupon reverses HIt.
in phase with the B+ pulses. The first of these
The third and fourth pulses effect a second cycle
pUlses MC-RB is produced at 0.5 of a primary
of HID to return HII. HII upon returning, recycle (see Fig. 66) . At the "9" point of the
verses H12. H12, when it turns, restores the
cycle, stage PR9 of the primary timer is reversed,
cancel control trigger HIS, thus terminating the 15 thereupon conditioning A23 to respond to the
cancel signal. The next four pulses applied to
next B pulse at "9.5" of the cycle. A23 therethe cancel timing' counter result in H 12 being reupon becomes conductive and reverses A22. With
stored. As HI2 restores, it turns H14. HI4
A22 reversed, it conditions AI5 to respond to the
thereupon makes HI3a conduct, thus decondinext A pulse at "10" of the cycle. AI5 theretioning H9 to render it unresponsive to the A .20 upon restores A5. It is clear that A5 is in repulses so that the operation of the cancel timing
versed status from the "0" to the "10" time of
counter ceases.
the multiplying cycle and in this interval ten
When HI4 is turned, it acts via connection
B-phase MC-RB pulses are produced (see Fig.
1431 to cut off D31 which is the cancel interlock
66). These MC-RB pulses are appli'ed commontube. With this tube cut off, it does not prevent 25 ly to all the tubes 208 (see Fig. 64c) of which
the multiply start signal which is subsequently
there is one for each order of register MC-DR.
When PRO was reversed at the "0" time of the
applied, from functioning effectively.
The next signals produced by the MYC comcycle, it conditioned AI9 (Fig. 65h) to become
mutator (Fig. 78M) are the negative cancel conconductive in response to the next B pulse at the
trol signal MCC and a concurrent negative can- 30 "0.5" time and thereupon to reverse All and
cel control signal PQC. Signal MCC cuts off 22,
A12. With AI2 reversed, it conditions AI3 to
Fig. 64a. It may be assumed that interlock tube
respond to A pulses. AI3 is capacitatively
23 is also cut off. Hence, couple 22-23 now apcoupled to AI4 and the output Of AI3 is inverted
plies a positive pulse to the input of the MC-DR
by AI4 to positive A-phase pulses MC-RA. At
cancel circuit. Register MC-DR (Fig. 64b) is 35 the "10" point of the cycle primary timer 'stage
PR lOis reversed and conditions A21 to respond
thereby reset to zero status. The PQC signal is
effective to cut off 3, Fig. 65k. Interlock tube
to the next B pulse at 10.5 of the cycle. A21
3a, Fig. 65k, may be assumed to be off, so the
thereupon restores AI2 and A22. The restoration
couple 3-3a now applies a positive pulse to the
of AI2 terminates the production of the MC-RA
input of the PQ cancel circuit which operates '10 pulses. In the interval from "0.5" to "10.5" of
to reset all the orders of PQ (Fig. 64h).
the cycle, 10 positive A phase pulses MC-RA are
Just prior to cancellation of the registers
produced (see Fig. 66), starting with the "1"
MC-DR and PQ, the multiplicand factor is appoint of the cycle. The MC-RA pulses are· applied to Internal In bus columns 16 to 29. After
plied to the tubes 209 (Fig. 64b), of which there
the MCC and PQC cancel signals have been pro- 45 is one for each order of the MC-DR register.
These tubes are normally conditioned and in reduced, commutator MYC produces a negative
signal MC-RI which cuts off 19 (Fig. 64a). The
sponse to the applied pulses produce negative A
phase entry pulses to the orders of MC-DR and
interlock tube 20 is also at cut-off. Accordingly,
the couple 19-20 becomes effective upon the reeffect value cycles thereof such as explained in
ceipt of the negative signal MC-RI to produce· 50 Section 5. A number of these pulses equal to the
the positive signal MC-RI which is applied to
complement of the starting digit will cause stage
the control grids of all the tubes MCI, causing
8 of a register order to produce a positive carry
the multiplicand factor to enter the register
out pulse. This carry out pulse is applied
MC-DR, in a manner eXplained before. Folthrough a line 21 D (also see Fig. 64c) and a suitlowing this, the commutator MYC produces the 55 able coupling capacitor to the control grids of
multiplier cancel signal MPC which is effective
tubes 211 and tubes 212 associated with the
to cut off 15, Fig. 64a. The interlock tube IS,
same MC-DR register order. During multipliFig. 64a, is off at this time, so the couple 15-1 G
cation, only the tubes 211 are conditioned. The
is. now effective to apply a positive cancel conconditioning potential is applied by a line TR
trol signal to the input of the MP cancel circuit. 60 which connects to the output of a tube J4 (Fig.
As a result, the register MP is reset. Prior to
65i). Since line my is at increased potential
the resetting of MP and after entry of the multiduring multiplication, as previously described, it
plicand into MC-DR, the multiplicand is remakes J8 conduct, causing J4 to be non-conducmoved by operation of the main sequence means
tive, so that line TR is at increased potential.
from the Internal In bus-set, after which the 65 Hence, a tube 211 (Fig. 64c) upon receiving a
carry out pulse becomes conductive and turns
multiplier factor is applied to columns 16 to 29
of this bus-set. Following this, the register MP
the related trigger TC. As soon as the trigger
is reset, after which the commutator MYC proturns, it conditions the connected tube 208, to
duces a negative signal MP-RI which cuts off 12
which the B-phase MC-RB pulses (also see Fig.
(Fig. 64a). The interlock tube 13 is also at cut- 70 66) are being applied, as previously explained.
off at this time and hence the couple 12-13 proIt is clear that each tube 208 is conditioned by
the related MC-DR register order at a cycle point
duces the positive signal MP-RI which causes
the multiplier factor to enter register MP, in the
which is the tens complement of the multiplicand
manner already explained.
digit in the order. For instance, if the multiThe primary timer (Fig. 65h) has fourteen 75 plicand digit is 6; in the 14th order of MC,then

'to!

" ,pU:!sesM;C-RA will~ausethere1ated t~~er
'.causing the 'hitter tOPJ:qduce '9, :.pqs~ve '''10:1>''
TC to be r-eversedand thereupon to .condition:pulse. "This -pulse is :a,ppJieC;lto·:the ~CQntr(jLgdds
the associated tube 208 at the "4" point (Fig.
of the tubes 22-0 :(Fig.64C),WhiCbare'being'ctmdi.66) to respond to the six pulses Mc.,.RB at "4.5,"
tiohed by 'the increa'Sed potentia1present on the
"5,5," "6,5," "7.5," "8:5:' and "9.5." The tube 5 line TR ,dutingt,lfe'lrtultlplylng c'alcu!ation,.as
288 iscapacitatively coupled to atube2f3. AcptevioUslyexplained. Accordingly, 'tlfe "10:5"
cordingly, tube 213 (14th order),in the example,.positive:pulse applied ,to 'the tubeS'UO 'renders
'will produce six positive B phase pulses &-:-B
them condUctive to return tlfe triggersTe.
,upon the wireC2 (also see Fig. 64cl). These
As descrIbed 'abO~e, 'pulsesJl,(rC-Ri\ will be ap,pulses ,are applied through a coupling capacitor 1'oplicd,in each primary cyCle '(FIg.'66) "t'o the inputs
to the control grids of a set ofttibes C2T, which
of tlfeMC-DRotdet.,s. A'numberdf'these:pulses
,are Jurther controlled by the column shift meansequaLto the ·teIis :COIt1plcmentof'tlfe digit'stand-so ,as to be successively ,conditioned in the seingin ,\i,nMC-DR otderwill CaUSe this order to
.queritial column shift positions. Similar means
reverse thetelated trigger-TC. 'ThetriggerTC
,associated with the i3th order of MC-DR .pro- 1'5 \vill'there1ipdnrender the:associated'tube20Bef-duces pulsesR-B representing the multiplicandfecttve ',t'o'ptodu.celnlIsesR-Bin ~esponse'to the
digit in this order. These .pulses are applied to
'MC":'RB pulses. Thes'e llUlses'Will'act'on a set 'of
,the control grids ofaset cifttibes C3T. SiIllilartubesC2T 'toCI'S'!', 'accorcl1rtg'toWlltch order of
:Jy, the control grids of tubesC4T, CST ... CIST
MC-1jRis b'eirtgccinsidered.Il1'suc'cessive'colunm
're~ve the~B .pulses from the 12th, 11th ... 20positiorts 1 to ;l'4,th'etu1:.ies,1 'to 14 ofeMhset'of
l-st ,orders of' MC-DR.Thetubes C2T toC 1ST
tUbes' C2T to C f5T' will be 'conditronedtorespond
,are 'conditioned selectively according to column
to' the pulses R-B artdpro'duce' a 'corresponding
s~if,t positions to respond to the pulses ~B and
number of ,entry .control pulses for the PQ Orders
related to these tubes. Themultiplicann will
·produce negative B-phase .entry pulses for orders
QfPQ. Fig. 66A isa chart [dving thecolumnar2'5thusbetrartsferred in e:ach piimal'ycycIe'fl'om
r~lation of the Internal In blis~sets to the MC-DR
'11:C":'DRtoorders :of ,p~ selected by the'column
andPQ orders and also indicating the relation
shift means.Tlfe 'entty into PQ 'will 'be t:ompleted by "10" of the cycle.'.I'he'nmnber'of'such
·between the·orders·o{MC-DR and PQ in the se.quential column shift positiOns. In effect, the
cycles performed ill :each column 'shift 'position
,tubes C2T to C 1ST are the interrelating means 30 is determined by the digit 'in the MP 'order selected by thecolurrtnshiftPosition, 1n,a'l!ianner
between the MG-DRand the PQ orders in the
different column, shift positions, and these tubes
described later.
are ,presented by small circles in Fig. 66A. The
Catry Ineans are rteeded between the 'orders of
dotted lines indicate which of these tubes is
the PQ register. The:.Carty mealls used her is of
oonditioned in each column shift. position. The :.>5 the same Iia'tUreas'thatdes'cribed1nSeetion1'3
'full, light lines indicate the tubes receiving pulses
as used in the accumulator. 'Briefly, 'the carry
R-B from the different orders of MC-DR, and
means includes a trigger K (Ftg.64g) ·foreach
the full heavy lines indicate the output connecorder of PQ.When an "order 'of 'P'Q (Fig.'64h)
,tions of these tubes to the PG orders. Itean be
steps from ,9to"0 during the entry ,period it 'proSeen from Fig. 66A that there are thirty tubes 40 duces a positive carryotl.tp'Ulse :at'the terminal c
C2TI to 30 receiving pulSeS Rr-B from the 14th
of stageS. This pulse isappliedto'awireBcw
order of MC-DR and that in column shift pdsiand is effective to render a triode KV (Fig.'64g)
tion 1 the tube C'2T-1 is conditioned to respohd
conductive. The triode :thereuponteverses the
to th~se pulses and produce negative, B-phase
trIgger Kassociated with the order ofPQ which
entry control pulses for order 32 of PQ. Itcan _ has advanced' from 9 to 'or through O. iFor inbe seen, further, that all the tubes C2T-I, 4D stance, asSumihg that the 17th order of PQhas
CIT-I - .. CI5T-1 are conditioned in the 1st
stepped from'9to 0, 'the trigger :Kll will be iIi
oolumnshift position and, iIi response to pulses
reversed state.
,~B from orders 14 to 1 of MC-DR prodlice enWhen an order of PQ (Fig. 64h), say the 18th
,try control pulses for orders 32 to 19 of PQ. In
order, is at 9, its stages I and 8 'ar.e in reversed
,o.ther words, in column shift position 1, the factor 50 status. With stage I in reversed status., its ter'in'MC-DRis transferred to orders 19 to 32 of
minal e is at reduced poteIitial. Liltewise the
PQ. In column shift position 2, all the tubes
terniinal c of stage :S is atteduced potential.
The reduced potential at'c'of stage I is applied
C2T-2, C3T-2 ... CIST-2 are conditioned and,
in response to the R-B pulses, produce entry
via wire Icw to the tube 6S (Fig. 64/), cutting it
control pulses for PQ orders 31 to 18. During 55 off. Likewise, thedecteasedpotential' at 'c of
stage 8 is ,applied via wire Sew to 65a (Fig. 64/)
multiplication, the last column shift position is
having its anode commonedWith the anode of'65.
·14. In this 14th position, the tubes G2T-14 to
'CUiT-I·" are conditioned and,inrepsonse toR-B
Assume,further, thatPQ6rder ,17 has stepped
,pulSes,produce entry control pulses forPQ orders 60 from 9 to 0 so that trigger KIl (Fig. 64g) is re19 to 6. The negative, B-phase entry control
versed. With KIl reversed, it 1s effective, 'Via
f>Ulses produced by the tubes C2T to C 1ST are
connection kIT, to cut Off the tube' 6SO (Fig. 54!)
which has its anode comm6ned with' anodes of
.transmitted via lines 21S and suitable coupling
eapacitors to capacitativelycoupledPulse shap-55 and65a associatedWitll 'the 18th order. ,A
ingtubes 216 and 211 (Fig. 64h) which apply 65 fourth tube 65e has its anode commoned with
the shaped negativeentrypul$es to the PQ registhe anodes of tubes$S, 65a, and 65b aSSOCiated
tel's.
with the same order ofPQ. The tubes 65e assoThe 'triggersTC (Fig. 64c) are reset at "to.5"
ciated with all the orders .ot:PQ have their. grids
'of. the cycle. ,As previously explained, stage PR 10
commonly connected to a wire 123. This wire is
''Of'the primary timer (Fig. 65h)Js t'Urneci at "10" 70 cohnectedtothe anode of tube J23,(Flg.·65i) conof the cycle so ,as to condition A2 I for OPeration
trolled by 'a tube "couple .J 19-.1 19a.,J 19 is nor'by the next B pulse. Thereupon, A2 I becomes
. mally cut off. The grid .. of J ISa. is .. connected by
oondtictive and restores AI2 '.and 'A22,asmenwire jl9a to the plate of,tube:.AS3(Fig.65h)
I,tione B.2I:a conducts and. p.l'~~nts mo:' from
being conditioned tn,turn BU' at-th&:nexteB:pulse
time. Hence. Bi21 remains conditioned'. and
Pl:imar:y' cycles will. not be: initiatacL 'TIhee' turn,iog; of: B22: is eIT.ective;, as befol'fri to. cause. BJ,3
to: turn,B.'14'at, saidnex·t Bpulse time, s{),B23wjll
restore B.22. at the' iollowing"A.pulse:.time, causing
Bt5i to, restore' B+4, at the succeeding, R pulse. time
(see' Fig. 67)'. Upon restoration of, BI4., it.. resets
B.4tcso:that high speedeA".phase:·puls£lRmay be. r.eaRPlied, to: BZl which· has, remained· conditioned.
This, occurs at the second B: Dulse time, following
the' step.ping of the: seco:nrlary;· timer' f.rom 9 to: 0,
anG' as a' result· of, w.hich. BaB was, tUl'ned ... At
the: first· :following B pulse time;'e thee turned. tl'ig,~
ger,. BSS: allows :85:4: to produce the: pulse CSM
under: control of which, the. ter,!;iIlll"Y timer'is: advanced·to its. next positiorr. At the second, following: B·, pulse time".Bt: is reset, so.' that A.,.phase
pu1:3es·may he reapplied" to., conditiG:c.ed, Btl.. It,is
seen, mer.efore, that, when an: MP ord~'I1:' stands
·at 0; it is advanced through a cy.cle: at high; speed,
that, at the next B, pulse time; the tel~tiar:ytimer
is: adv:anced to select the next ME' order, and that
aften 30' skip of one A pulse. cycle, the: high, speed
advance of this next MP order: begins (see Fig.

mn.

30

3,)

40

4;;

5il

a5

60

65

70

h

75

In the,fol'egoing marmer, the. multiplicand will
be transferred tosuccessivel:y lower orders. of· FQ
iR successive column shif·t positions.. When the
multipliea.tion, operations in. the. l&th~ column
shift· position have, been completed" a" pulse. an
will.e ter will be eifecti\(£l to restore, the stage
'l1ERI4 (Fig. 65d).
Upon its restoration,. TEl?. 14, .te.vel'se& stage
TER 1:5. This stage thereupon cuts off. a tube
E I:B: to prodUce a positiv:er grunge pulse. on·. wir.e
etB,. 'l1his pulse· is applied: through a, capacitor
to: the control grid of a tube C 19, (Fig. 65e) which
is normally conditioned w:nen multiplication has
been called, for, as a, tesult of the, increased, pO.tential, on the wire my. AccordinglY"e the pulse
applied to, the control grid ot: cn is iILvertede to
a negative impulse by this tube., and is applied
along a· wil'e c!.9c tn the, trigger. DU (Fig. 65j,) ,
restoring. it. As previously explained, this trfggel' was· reversed, unaere control of a multiply
start· signal MY-ST. It may bel:eca1lflQ that this
ul'igger- D3.3 when. reversed" initiated operation of
the secondary timer and, thereby initiated, the
pel'formance'of the multipJieation operation after
the fadors have been read. into. thei;r: respec.tive
l!e
28 will conduct and 3e will be cut off to enable the

116

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

,q

,q

'A

70

'T

75

signal CPLT to be effective to render 33 conductive so as to emit the negative complete signal
R-CPLT. In response to this signal, commutator MYC (Fig. 78M) produces a negative result
readout signal R.RO. This signal is applied to
36, Fig. 65k. The same signal also is applied to
8 and 9 in Fig. 65k which apply a positive signal
R.RO to the control grids of all the sets of read- .
out tubes PQ-R (Fig. 64i), There is a set of
four tubes PQ-RI, 2, 4 and 8 for each of orders
6 to 33 of register PQ, which are associated with
columns 29 to 2, respectively, of the Internal
Out bus-set, as may be understood from Fig. 66A.
It should be noted that orders 1 to 5 are inactive
during the multiplication operation and, in any
event, are not read out to the buses. The suppressors of tubes PQ-R are respectively coupled
to the terminals / of the stages I, 2, 4 and 3
(Fig. 64h) of the assocIated order of PQ. The
number standing in an order of PQ is represented by the stages or combination of stages
which have been reversed. When a stage is reversed, its terminal/is at high potential and
conditioning the related one of the tubes PQ-R'
(Fig. 64i). It is clear now that there are 28 sets
of readout tubes PQ-R which are selectively conditioned in accordance with the amount standing
in register PQ. The positive readout signal
R.RO renders the conditioned ones of the tubes
PQ-R conductive to send out negative going
binary digit representing impulses on the buses
of the Internal Out bus-set columns 2 to 29.
These digit Signals are transmitted to the denominational shift means explained in Section
12. The product sign is read out as decreased
potential upon bus I or 2 of column 1 of the Internal Out bus-set. Assuming that the product sign
is +, trigger 21, Fig. 65k, is reversed and conditioning 35. The signal R.RO applied to 36
cuts it off and causes it to apply increased potential to the control grid of 35. Consequently 35
becomes conductive and applies a reduced potential to bus 2, column 1, Internal Out bus-set.
This reduced potential on this bus represents a
+ sign. If, on the other hand, 29, Fig. 65k, has
been reversed, then it is conditioning 31 and
the readout signal R.RO, acting through 36,
makes 31 conduct to apply reduced potential to
bus I of column 1, representing the - sign.
The negative readout signal R.RO, from com.;.
mutator MYC (Fig. 78M) is also applied to a
tube D34 (Fig. 65/), cutting it off so as to restore
the trigger DU. Upon restoration of D42, it
restores the control interlock trigger D43, so
the interlock line d51 returns to low potential.
The half correction-The number of digits in
the product is either equal to or one less than
the sum of the digits in the multiplier and multiplicand factors. The column shift amount is
chosen according to the number of digits of the
product to be ultimately transmitted through
the column shift means to a receiving unit. For
instance, the product may be a maximum of 28
digits but the receiving unit in the present case
is designed to receive a maximum of 19 digits'
plus, of course, the sign. Therefore, when the
product is 28 digits in size, at least the nine
right-hand digits must be discarded through the
operation of the denominational shift means
(Section 12). In such case, the column shift
amount will be at least nine and the shift to the
right will be signalled for. The maximum
column shift amount when column shift is to
take place to the right is a shift of 27. It is
seen therefore that the column shift amount may

t17

vary from 0 to 27. The last right-hand order
to be transmitted to the receiving means is
rounded off, unless a half correction suppression
signal is received by the MD unit. As ul'.derstood, the half correction, or rounding off operation, consists in adding five to the order of the
product at the right of the last right-hand order
to be transmitted to the receiving unit. For convenience, this right-hand order will be called
the transmitted units order and the order to the
right thereof and to which five is to be applied
for rounding off purposes will be called for convenience the sub-units order. The column shift
amount determines or selects the transmitted
units order and therefore selects the sub-units
order. This follows from the fact that the last
right-hand order to be discharged is the subunits order and the discarding of this order is
eifected through the column shift means de. scribed in Section 12. Actually, rounding orr of
a product result will be called for only in connection with a column shift to the right. The
nwnber of digits to be discarded is equal to the
column shift amount to the right. This means,
for eXample, tha.t if the nine right-hand digits
are to be discarded, the column shift amount \vill
be 9. The sub-units mder of PQ is the last one
which is to have its result digit discarded by the
column shift means. As indicated in Fig. 66A,
PQ orders 1 to 5 are not connected to the Internal Out bus columns and are not read out. In
effect, therefore, PQ order 6 is the Imrrest units
order which is read out. Thus, in relation to
the Internal bus columns 2 to 29 and the 28··
place result which may be applied thereto by
PQ, orders 6 to 33 of PQ correspond to result
places 1 ro 28. Therefore, if one right hand
place of the result is to be discarded by the denominational shift unit (Section 12) then order
7 of PQ will be the one which carries the ultimate units order result digit and order 6 will be
the sub-units order. In other words, to arrive
at the PQ order number which carries the subunits place digit of the result to be read out of
the denominational shift amount, 5 must be
added to the column shift aml)unt. For instance, if the column shift amount is 13. then
the sub-units order of PQ is orrler Hl, R!1.d the
transmitted units order is order 19. Clea;rly
then, the column shift amouut selects the subunits order. The column shift a..'1lount is originally represented in its binary decim<:tl form.
It was also explained in the deScliption of the
column shift means that the column shift
amount was applied to Hnes MNI, 2, 4, 3, l!l a.nd
20 {Fig. 27a) . These lines connect to corresponding lines MMN (Fig . .65a) in the control
section for the multiplication means. Referring
to Fig. 65a, the increased potentials selectively
present on these lines, are applied to the suppressors of tubes CSAI, 2, 4, 8,10 and 20. When
the negative signal MC-RI is produced to cause
the multiplicand factor to be read in, the sign.al
also is applied to a tube 64, Fig. 65a. At this
time, the control interlocl~ line as I is still 8,t
low potential and is cutting off GIla. Vihen Gil
Is cut off by the signal MC-RI the couple 64-'34a
Is effective to make 63 conduct which in turn cuts
off 53 to apply increased potential to the control
grids of all the tubes CSAI, 2, 4, S, Hl and :el1.
Those tubes which are conditioned according to
the column shift amount by increased suppressor
potential become conductive and reverse the related triggers CST I , 2, 4, 8, 10 and 20. These
trjggeJ.'S function through interpreting circuits

118

to translate the binary decimal terms of the

5

10

t5

20

25

30

33

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

column shift amount into electrical representations of the equivalent amount in a decimal notation. Assume for simplicity of explanation
that the column shift amount is 21. According"ly,
the triggers CSTI and CST20 are reversed. With
CSTI reversed, it applies increased potential to
line cst! I connected to tubes G3, G2, GI (Fig.
65a), G9 and GID (Fig. 65b)' This eliminates
the 0, 8.. 6, 4 and 2 groups of units order column
shift amount interpreting tubes from consideration in the application of the rounding off pulses.
At this point it may be stated that there are
ten interpreting groups of tubes, the groups being designated UCS:!, I, 2 . . . 9. These groups
select, for receiving the five rounding off pulses,
the PQ orders whose order numbers have, in
the right-hand place, the interpreting group
digit plus 5. For reasons now understood, the
interpreting group number is less by 5 than the
actual sub-units order of PQ. Thus, the group
UCSO will select those PQ orders whose order
numbers have 5 as their right-hand dirsit; i, e.,
orders 5, 15 and 25. The group UCS i selects
PQ orders 6, 16, and 26. The group UCS3 selects PQ orders 8, 18 and 28. The group UCS4
selects PQ orders 9, 19 and 29, and so on. The
selection by an interpreting group is effected by
its conditioning the suppressors of tubes HCE
(Fig. 64e) individually associated with the possible sub-units orders selected hy the group.
One of the conditioned tubes will receive the five
rounding off pulses and pass them to the entry
means qf the desired sub-units order. For example, if the column shift amount is 13, the selected sub-units order is 1,8. The interpreting
group UCS3 will be rendered effective, in a
manner described soon, to condition the three
tubes BCE associated, respectively, with PQ
orders 8, 18 and 28. Subsequently, five roundinC( eff pulses will be applied via line TCS Ill· to
tubes HCE associated with PQ orders 15 to 24.
Of these tubes, only the tube !-ICE associated with
order 18 has been conditioned and will pass the
roundin<; off pulses to the entry means for the
18th order of PQ. In this nBnner, when the
column shift amount is 13, five rounding off
pul<::po; will he applie1 to PQ orner 18.
The effective output potential of the USC
groups (Figs. 65a and b) is an increased potential. If any tube in a group is rendered conductive it prevents the group from producing effective increased output potential. As already explained, the trig-gers CST are reversed aCCOrding
to the binary decimal terms of the column shift
amount. The tri[l:gers CST I, 2, 4 and 8 will determine in accordance with their status which
of the UCS groups is to be effective. For instance, if only the trigger CSTI (Fig. 65a) has
been reversed, then only the group UCS I (Fig.
65b) will produce effective output potential. The
other groups will have one or more tubes which
will be maintained conductive under control of
one of the four triggers CSTI, 2, 4 and 8. Groups
0, 2, 4, G and 8 will be made ineffective because
reversed trigger CST I places increased potential on line cstJI which renders conductive G3
in UCSCi, G2 in UCBa, GI in UCS6, G9 in UCS4
and GIG in UCS2. The group UCSl will be made
ineffective because Gil will be maintained conductive by trigger CST2 in reset status and also
because tube. G27a will be maintsjned conductive by the unreversed trigger CST4. Group
UCS9 will remain ineffective because G35a is
being held conductive by unrev~rsed trigger

9,636,679

119

CSTS. Group UCS3 will be ineffective because
unreversed trigger CST2 is holding GISa conductive. On the other hand, the group UCS I will
be made effective because tube G IOa will be cut
off by the decreased potential, on line cstn I, produced by reversed trigger CSTL Tubes GITa,
G33a and G34a will be cut off by the unreversed
triggers CST2, 4 and S respectively. The increased potential produced by group UCS I on
its output line ucs I will be applied to the suppressors of tubes HCE associated with orders 6,
16 and 26 of' PQ. As another example, if the
units order of the column shift amount is 3, then
triggers CST I and CST2 will be reversed and
group UCS3 will be effective to condition tubes
HCE of orders 8, 18 and 28 of PQ.
The binary terms representing the tens place
of the column shift amount will be translated
into the selective conditioning of either of three
tubes G52, G50 and G49 in Fig. 65b. If the
tens place of the column shift amount is 0, it
does not result in reversal of either CSTIO or
CST20 (Fig. 65a). If the tens digit of the column
shift amount is 1, CST I 0 will be reversed and if
the tens order digit is 2, then CST20 will be reversed. Assuming both of these triggers are in
canceled state, they are apply:ng cut-off potential, via lines cstjlO and 20 to G43 and 051 (Fig.
65b). Consequently, this couple is applying conditioning potential to 049. If CST lOis reversed,
its output line cstnlO is cutting off 043a. At
the same time the trigger CST20 will not be reversed and will be cutting off 051a. Accordingly,
couples 043a and G51a will be applying conditioning potential to 050. Similarly, if CST20
has been reversed, it will be applying conditioning
potential directly to 052. It is clear that G49,
050 and 052 are condit:oned selectively according to whether the tens order digit of the column shift amount is 0, 1 or 2 respectively.
It has been explained that at completion of
multiplication, the trigger D33 (Fig. 65!) is restored. Upon its restoration, it reverses a trigger
D50 unless 024 (~g. 65b) has been turned by a
half correction suppression signal. If 024 is
turned, line gS is at low potential and cutting off
D29 (Fig. 65!). The output of D29 not only
conditions D49 but also makes D36a conduct and
block reversal of D50. If .the HCS signal has
not been given, D36a remains at cut-off and
allows D33, upon restoration, to turn D50. D50
thereupon cuts off a tube D36. In the absence
of a half correction suppression signal, and its
result:ng signal MHCS, tube D29 remains conductive and cutting off D28. Hence, when D36
is cut off, the couple D2S-D36 is effective to
condition D27. The next B pulse makes D27 conduct and reverse a trigger D26. D26 then conditions D 18 to respond to A pulses. The negative A phase pulses produced by DIS are applied
to a tube D IT and also to a trigger D II which is
the first stage ·of a five-pulse counter. D 11
which receives the negative A phase pulses produces posit:ve A phase pulses on its output line
d 11. These pulses are applied via this line to
tubes G49, 050 and 052 (Fig. 65b). The conditioned one of these tubes responds and acts
through a related tube to produce positive pulses
on output line TCS units 10 or 20. The output
line TCS units connect to control grids of the
tubes HCE (Fig. 64e) associated with orders 5
to 14 of PQ. The output TCS I 0 goes to the tubes
HCE associated with orders 15 to 24 of PQ and
the output line TSC20 goes to the tubes HCE
for orders 25 to 32 of PQ. In this manner one

120

of three groups of tubes HCE receives half correction pulses, such group being selected in accordance with the tens order digit of the column
shift amount. Further, only one tube in the se5 lected group will be conditioned depending on
the units order digit of the column shift amount.
It follows then that only that tube HCE which
is associated with the selected sub-units PQ
order will be conditioned and also receive the
10 half-correction pulses. This tube will produce
negative pulses on its output line 215. This line,
as already explained, leads the pulses via a capacitor to the entry tubes 216 and 211 (see Fig.
64h) for the selected sub-units PQ order. In
15 this way the rounding off pulses are transmitted
to the selected sub-units PQ order.
As described, the rounding off A-phase pulses
are indirectly derived from DIS (Fig. 65!) which
applies a pulse to DII for each rounding off pulse.
20 The first two pulses effect the turn and return
of DII and a consequent reversal of DU. The
third and fourth pulses effect a repeat action'
of DII and a return of D12. Upon DI2 return-'
ing, it reverses D 13. The fifth pulse turns D I L
25 At this point, DII is cutting off D20 and DI3
is cutting off D20a. D20-D20a then conditions
D 19 to become conductive in response to the
next B pulse and thereupon to return D26. With
D26 returned, it renders DIS ineffective thus
30 terminating the production of rounding off pulses.
It is to be noted that upon D26 returning, it restored D50. It is clear now that the number of
rounding off pulses is limited to five.
As understood, five rounding off pulses applied
:::5 to a sub-units order, if this order registers 5_
or higher, must produce a carry to the next
higher order, which is to be the transmitted'
units order of PQ. This carry to the units order
is the rounding off entry.
'i ,)
During the entries of partial products into PQ,
the carry control and carry operating pulses
were produced under control of the primary
timer (Fig. 65h) which is now out of operation.
Accordingly, during half correction operation,'
45 other means are provided to control the production of these pulses. When D26 (Fig. 65!) is
in its reset status, it is maintaining C24 conductive. D26 was reversed to initiate the production
of rounning off pulses and was restored to limit
50 the rounding off pulses to five. Upon restoration.
of D2S, it renders C24 again conductive.' Upon .
C24 becr,~njng conductive, it reverses ca which
then conditiocs C4 to produce negative A-phase
pulses in response to applied A pulses. The first
55 A-phase pulse from C4 turns C16. The second'
A-phase pulse from C4 returns C 16 which causes
C8 to return and DS and D21 to turn. D21 in
reversed condition renders D28 conductive, causing D4 to be cut off and apply a positive pulse,
60 via connection d4 to JI9 (Fig. 65i) causing J23
to be cut off. Thereupon the output 123 goes
to increased potential with the same effect on
elements 65e (Fig. 64/) as previously described
in connection with the carry means. When DS
65 (Fig, 65!) is reversed, it acts through D 16 to
condition D 14. The next A pulse renders D 14
conductive to cut off D5. The increased potential on the output d5 is applied to J20 (Fig.
65il with the result that J20 becomes conduc70 tive and cuts off J24 to produce the carry operating pulse C-oP (see Fig. 64/). In the manner'
described before, this pulse causes the carry
means to operate if carry is called for. As just
described, DI4 (Fig. 65/) was conditioned by
75, reversal orDS to become conductive in response ~

121

to an A pulseQttd Cause the production Of the
carry operating pulse. Further, DI4 upon becoming conductive, reverses Dl. D7 then acts
through 022 to condition D6. The nextB pulse
makes D6 conduct and turn D9 and return 5
DB. With D9 reversed, it works through D I to
condition D3. The next A pulse renders D3
conductive to restore DT and D21.
Upon the restoratiOn of D21, it applieS a positive gOing pulse by way of a capacitor to D3lia. ro
D34a becomes momentarily conductive and re~
verses "complete" trigger D42. As described before. the effect of reversing D42 is to cause a
coznplete signal R-CPLT (see Fig. 65k) to' be
sent back to the sequence means. The sequence 15
means in response. returns a result readoUt
&ill11al R.RO. The product is then read out in
the manner described before.
14b. Dividing means

20
The dividing means uses much of the same
structure as the multiplying means, as will become clear in the following description. The
dividend, to a maximum of 14 places. will be
entered from the Internal In bus columns 16 to 25
29 into the PQ orders 5 to 18 (see Figs. 64h and i
and 66A). The divisor will be entered in MC-DR.
also from Internal In bus columns 16 to 29. In
dividing, the starting column shift position will
be column shift position 2. so that in this posi- 3d
tion the divisor will be routed to PQ orders 18
to 31 (see Fig. 66A).
The plan of dividing is similar to that employed in application Serial No. 704,914 of Dickinson et a1.. filed october 22. 1946. Briefly. in 35
each column shift position the divisor wiil be subtracted one or more times from the dividend or
divd.end remainder. Subtraction is effected by
addition of the tens complement of the divisor.
In order to establish the proper number of 40
places in the complement. 9 is entered in the
PQ order to the left of the order associated. in
the particular column shift position, with the
14th order of Me-DR. such entry being controlled by a special circuit D-T/C (Fig. 64c). 45
It is clear then that in each colUmn shift position. a group of fifteen PQ orders will be selected to receive the complement of the divisor
from the 14 orders of MC-DR and from a special
true-complement control D-TC. 1f the divisor 50
is smaller than the amount in PQ from which
it is being subtracted. then the addition of the
complement of the divisor to such an amount
will result in a carry to the PQ order Which is
at the left of the group of 15 orders receiving51S
the divisor and the supplemental 9. In other
words. a' "gO" condition is manifested by a carry
entry to the, order at the left of the group of
orders of PQ receiving the complement in a
column shirt position. This carry entry is. in 60
reality; a unit quotient entry into the PQ order
which is serving as the quotient receiving order
in' the particular column shift pOSition. On
the other hand. a "no go'; condition is manifested by failure of such carry entry. It is seen M
then that in each colUmn shift position, a numbel' of carries. equal to the number of units in
the quotient digit, will be applied to a quotient
receiving order to the left of the group of 15
PQ orders selected in the column shift position. 70
Whenever a "no gO" condition is found, as
determined by failure of carty into the quotient
receiving order. in a column shift position, then
the true vtdue of the diViSor is entered into the .
"lH~

IP'OUJ) of PQ Ol' the~highest ordet;;.grouin of:'it5;. tut tis: also' con"':'! ,
sive:column.,>hitt:positions,l;n:.the sam~lnrome.'ti~;':·' neetedJto:.the,'suPllressdt"of ,65' !RSsadAted"witlf1"'
explained:,for ther:,tu~s',:!3':r::, ThUS\:, in: column:';',~, thi.i:"highes~,'Qrder. ::. This.',tube-i.1j 5dntherefdre is;,',
shJtt;4)OS1tion'!1, :the:, tuJu!\i :'.23..1 ~32"jg conditioned 'I, he}ddlt cut '"On tb,iprevetit its' pulsing::tube't5b iof,;.'
as.-ell ~the iube':230":;';232~ ;Hene~ lfin :Mlumn:::i otheiqUbtientordeIl, i:ln';other·-wordsi"!f ,it llootdd!(',
pOlWon:c2, a "na:go""'cond1t1on is.,toumfr:so ·that'
hapiolElfi that/the quCIl't1€nt:'recl!iving·, ordetl'abfliVtF:'~
in ·theunanner·-deserlbecti the :OUtp1lti '11·" is at",im;:' saicJ;'.'lllgheSt:, order,.jn: the': 'Selected, \graup,:"of'115c;:.
creased!;potent1911;';.the 'Conditlonecl,,:,tube:!'2U':-:'U :\, is at \I, during;·the,trUe:add;,.cyele;"then',thei'cal'!IY"':~"
wiR::bei "'ender-ed, :conductive cand:dtsc,outp:ut ;:::232;:;; thrcu~'~9' to'· thisiJiqubtient "ordet"'will (·not "bs,;:'
wi}1:,;be:a. t :decteasecl' potentiaI;:.: As .a resu}t;ithe;'15 ,~ffected'; This), ;preventS ;,an; :incorrect •: qUotient::'.';
tube:i&5dl;; (Fig','tf)4g) :.of:the': assool9.tacr.o :order ');32';\,' frorrv.heing:.ilegistelleG:.".,'.
wUJ.:;'be lout 'off·; for'Ta :reasort.:':Wh1eh::..wHLbe:':ex-;;,::,
Atd'12't.: of, the, 'tru~,add :.'Cycle-, So positive: pti1sel;~,
plafDelt.: be!ow;< .Also':the,.dea.-iS conly :deSired,' as:a',: ced~atrue';add,lllyele.(:i Since',J' 14,1's ·no'W::-re-i~:·
resmt of 'Q: ~igo'~:: conatti()~FWhlch:Jsnot :the (case::c tUFnedi 'it, )is .:.:tlecondttiom_, i J lOt aDiiMnstendr,is
whetai.::the: :true':diVJ'Sor;: is:entered'" int().( PQ. ,;; The:; condltibning::,J HI Ther.efore;,',.thel <',~.13~~;.ipulse'on:':,
carmt·' ',from 1.tthe ,highest ;order,.:of: tha,:'~electedL:; line;'a50 is 'effective tOll'ender.':J II "eonductiWi soW'
grOUp;Qf 15:. 1s :suppressed;',pecauS6",t;UbIV2 a:4I~Fig""'3i5:;,as ito ~r.estm:e:'Jl\ 'UpOn:;resooratlon:tif.'IJl'i,t, cuts:j..:i
64O'):.related.'.to':thig',ordet','is ;being;: keptitonduc.;;:! ofti)J8a,;',8cHtha.t:.lJ8~8a'Jis then efilective"via.;]cJ.4,:",
ti\te'{tln~r.:control :of. a ,.tub'e;~23 •. '; (FIg'.' 64-jf;as,':,;,
to(retuxn';the\line':!I'R effectiVe,; ',' tur-n'of loJl, it: applies . s.' J:lega;tIVe pulse'to J2which,';:i
to iaPll4Y1.:incr.eased:; potentta;r;~to; the" eontro}:·4:trl(f.: ..405 'in, tmn','sendS'l()ut a ,posit1\1,e"pu1Se l along.:.Ji:ne/.'12'i'!;
ofla 1e~d'tube:85aj(Fig;)li4!7H'sotha.t th~t1atterl');: toths'tube CUWFig':165eH Thts'tub'eibein~ool,j\J!!
wovldtproa:ucs.!l. nega;tiveq:rLtlserever.s!ng trigger.J;~ concii.tiol!ietl i :dUl'lng dividi~, becomes conduoti:Wl ;ji
K -I9!.the higlW~:order; .:~'This:,same,.negatW.e pUl$Ei ';2 an~j.dut'$lfgff leu'ISO! as) to' caUse'iC2 I: "and, 'C26, fuw
alS(),:lig appUed, :to thei tuba' .&5b~ of· the::sti1l 'higl'leil~'
prOduce: :s;negati1v6 pUlse ,CSS ons: the .'i.nput !l1ne~'·.!'
ordtr t :and':cuts:.Off',.th1S,;tube;::Sh6uMithi:S::latter i::\iO"ter:of1the,telltiar:y,:,:(coIUtnn shIft) 'titner.,HtherellyiJ,Y
adlfancingllthe.lcoIuml1::·shlft !means\~to·.lts::;ned,;\:;
ordel!,',-also be:.at,J9, :Us: . triggel' K·'woU>Mc:be;:r.e- c
veftlrcIJ;:, D1ll!ing:J a.ccyc1e:.' :1n:- 'which::·:tntnsfe:Jil' is.";: positi.on,:::;·Accol'.cl1ngly,.:durillg', ther.nexti::antli·tol;"'c
belng:effedted·of:a true:diwSor "to;PQ;':t11l!lltne:.2nY~ low~g:cy(lle or: .cyOleg.;the: ;divisor·:·will .be1tr~nS'jJ,:,"
aslDC~ with :the, highest:, ordeti of:ths':!JrOllP,):';
ferrad,:w',ta; gr.flup'-off.15PQ'Ol'ders:to ,:the; lligfi1j:Qf:'{,
of 15 receiving the divisor is at low potM1ti~r.!lhs;,~5 "the fgroup::of;,15, :<>roers :'I*llectett::inlthei precedintt=-:::;
prellouslyt deSCl'ibeCl.am'l:.effective "Via 2.31~.a,IlQi 2!34
collllml'l.: ~hiftl 'pOSition:;')'.
to 'Pl'ElVent'J:eversal. of 'the:related'eat'~ trim;et:X)2:.
It;; shoUld, ':bealOted?itha.t '? each {-tiMe:;'. a :pulse.f'\
Th'fSl' :of: ;Itself., wowld,noteing:.tnade cconductivs>:by·;,C22 ·,beinj'NiCut,mffrn.!
stOO(i'a.t:'9.: ,The: ';high~at ... ordel' Of"th~(8eled~dI:!I0"a tube,' C26,ia18Q; iiSmade ;eonduotiveito:Ill'<>d\lt&",·y
gr.ut& of 15, ·would,;ilneVioo.bly :'pass: 'througttl':l9
a negative ;'pu1SEViHC;C"I:R:.1'or'Ja·reason'i1Which·.,~,.t
dUti'lngrlthe; trtle; ,ada'dyOle: If a preeediriirdrd-er ii, will he made clear later.
goe~ :Jrdm- gto' 0 at "that "time'" or !:pridr·'tlierl!ti1 'i',
Wnetv'tlolumll".'shiiftr.poSiti€ln' 19)18.reachad, . thi
order$!~\8tab4i atJS.~,

in;the(j.ycle;:thebth~tubes65,(65a)t5b'QUd·'6o:Of~i( "p.ivlS'Otr~nti"ltrwilr he'(:madl!·;1ntd;'PQ':'C1r~l'Sl""'to:r".:

sai6;highes,t ordet"WOUId/'unl-ess prevenMd;·,reft.'.,::,j)5 15 :,i(see "Fig',ti.66Al. :: Inj~he;;tie*t ·;columti/,~shm,:f:~
doo'tube:'65tf:oI'this,ordel' onn1fuctWe;Jj'Alttiouglr:' pO!iitlOh 20;,:;:th~F'diVis'ot;rwilyibe~lentered·
the' quotient' brder ,',; This :sartte'e1Iebl"WdUld 'be"15 "thlftwthe''m.!OOtti\lm' IiUlt11:J~'tbf 'llilfdes"1i'l 'th~'m;;""

2,636,672

131

tegral portion of a quotient is 14. The .integral
14,.place portion of the quotient will stand in
PQ orders 20 to 33. During the entry of· a .
quotient digit into PQ order 20, the column
shift means will be in pOsition 15. It follows :)
that the quotient digits obtained in the lower
PQ orders will be the digits of a decimal fraction. In column shift position 20, the quotient
receiving order is order 15, which means that
the quotient digit in order 15 is of magnitude 10
k10- 5 • Thus, any possible error resulting from
the dropping of the units order of the divisor
from consideration in the dividing operation in
column shift pOsition 20 will make no appreciable difference in the ultimate quotient result. 10
It is clear further that in column shift position
21, the units and tens places of the divisor will
be. dropped from consideration in the dividing
operation and so on for the successive column
shift positions, as far as column shift position 20
30. where only the four highest orders of the
divisor will be used in the dividing calculation.
However, to minimize the error, no matter how
inappreciable, in dropping the lower places of
the divisor during the successive column shift. 25
positions starting from column shift position
20, the tens complement of the remaining portions of the divisor are entered during the complement add cycles. As long as the units digit
of the divisor is being transferred to a PQ order, 30
the tens. complement of the divisor is taken care
of. by reversing the trigger TC (Fig. 64c) associated with the first order of MC-DR, at the
"O~' time of the complement add cycle. After
the units place of the divisor is dropped from 35
consideration in the dividing operations, the
tens complement of the remaining portion of
the divisor is taken care of by an elusive one
circuit. Referring to Fig. 64e, when column
shift position 20 is reached, the increased po- 40
tential on column shift line CS20 is effective
to· render a tube 240 conductive thereby reversing a trigger 241. This trigger will remain
in reversed status until reset under control of
the cancel circuit MDC (Fig. 65e) at the be- 45
ginning of the next multiplying or dividing calculation. With trigger 241 (Fig. 64e) reversed,
it is cutting off 242. During the complement
add cycles, the line TR is at reduced potential,
as. now understood. This line has a connection 50
to the tube 243 and cuts it off. The couple
242-243 is therefore effective to condition 244
during complement cycles, occurring in the 20th
and further column shift positions. With 244
conditioned it is responsive to a "0" pulse on 55
line all and becomes conductive so as to apply
a negative pulse to the first order line 215-1.
This line carries the negative pulse to the tube
216 (Fig.64h) associated with the first PQ order,
causing the latter to be cut off. As a result the 60
related tube 211 becomes conductive and applies
the elusive one· entry pulse to the first order of
the PQ register.
The sign mixing operations for the dividing
calculation are the same as for the multiplying 65
calculation and need not be described. The
termination of the dividing calculation is under
control of a column shift number registering
counter ncs (Fig. 65a). The control varies
according to whether or not half correction is 70
called for. Termination of the dividing calculation also may be effected under control of a
so-called disappearing divisor detecting means.
When the divisor has been shifted so far to the
right that the portion thereof which is ente~

t5

132

into PQ orders is zero, successive carries will
be effected to the quotient receiving order in
the particular column shift position and a "no
carry" condition will not be reached. In other
words, if the divisor is 0 its tens complement will
be entered and will produce a carry into the
quotient receiving order. Actually, this will be
produced in the following manner. Ten pulses
will be applied to the first order of PQ and nine
pulses will be applied to the orders to the left
of the first order. Since the first .order goes
through a value cycle, in response to the ten applied pulses, carries will be effected to the succeeding higher orders and each of these will be
advanced to 0, with the result that the highest
order of the group of selected orders in the holumn shift position will go frQm 9 to 0 and produce a carry into the quotient receiving order.
If this occurs 13 times in succession, 1. e. during 13 successive complement add cycles in a
column shift position, then it is a manifestation
of a disappearing divisor. In order to count
the number of complement add cycles occurring
in a column shift position, a counter shown. in
Fig. 65e is used. During the complement add
cycle the line COMP is at high potential and
renders C2 Fig. 65e, conductive thereby cutting
off C6, C6a, Cl and Cla. so as to release triggers
C9, b I0, C II and C 12 of the counter for operation. The increased potential on line COMP
is also effective to condition the entry tube CISb.
At the "10" point of each cycle a pulse is applied to conditioned C ISb to cause it to apply
an entry pulse to C9. In the now familiar manner every two entry pulses will turn and return
C9 causing it to reverse C IO. Every two reversals of C I 0 will reverse C I I while every two
reversals of CI I will reverse CU. When 12
entry pulses have been applied to C9, thenCff
and C I 2 will be in reversed condition while C9
and C I0 will be in cancelled condition. With
C 12 and C I I reversed, they are cutting off CIS
and CISa respectively so as to cause CI5-CISa.
to condition C 14. Upon the reversal of C9 in
response to the 13th entry pulse, it applies a
positive pulse via a capacitor to CI4 causing it
to become conductive and thereby to apply a
negative pulse by way of the anode reSistor of
C f9 to line c I 9. This pulse is effective to restore the main start trigger D33 with the effect
of terminating the calculation if half correction
is not called for. If half correction is called
for, the return of D33 conditions the MD section
for terminating the calculation after the half
correction has been made, all as explained in
Section 14a.
In section 14a, the entry of the denominatiQnal shift number from lines MMN (Fig. 65a)
into the triggers CST was explained. The same
entry occurs during the dividing calculation but,
in addition, the denominational shift number
is also entered into a counter ncS. If half
correction is not called for then the number of
steps of dividing column shift will be equal to
28 minus the denominational shift number in the
counter ncS. If half correction is called for
then the number of steps of dividing column
shift will be one greater than when half correction is suppressed.
The denominational shift number is represented by increased potentials selectively present
on the lines MMN (Fig. 65a). In addition to
the increased potentials on the lines MMN I, 2,
4,8, 10 and ZO selectively conditioning the tubes
CSA, they also condition tubesCSDI, 2, 4,.,8, 10

133;::')

2.~,.}:

134:,

an_Il•. ~resPlM1,*y~,t;i WIeIit\tt~\;dwis~~\'en"'! reIIJ61Jlsl1n'~llellld'TStatus:amt:does>nat. euU::
signal DR-RI is produced by the control COlIV-';"
off':srSFiEadl:tinte':stage-:::tof'th';collnterl!ElQS;'f1:
(Fitfl 6Sa)!. t~preV:e'l'Sed:;e:1t,:apPlies£eut,,;oft;potent1alil'
mUtllitoY''DVO: (Fig.,~8D},',itis 'applied in Fig~
65a:!t;o' thtlsamtHin8'ag;;the)'Sigli~1 'W:O:-RFwas: by'w~y\of,a .cof:lllecttt:m.!:' 16:'toC'the tuberG fiIJ. '
apjtlled!dllring multlpllt'atiOD,.oTlie slgitntl .BR-RI 6 Wl«ln j ,the':OOClnt'.1i$<2S'; thi:ntube$i:rGU':lIind GGo!!:,
caWJes:;thetulJeij'S4~ &4'aJ' 6SiHind.°'53:,ih,:Fig;"65i1/.. '
are cut off in the manner explained I:b~ '"
to 'lltD~' allositi~'puIse;i:foroperatirig "the'
Uptmi1!hltcappUd9Jtfi:)n ()f~>thEhnext 'Pulse;,H~
comftttbined 'Ones of' the tubeS,OSN-'and'CSO; 'The'"
to'th~>cottn1ieil.;, ..stage ';'1 is: r€-rersed Jltnd:.tl1ei'e.;,;;t,·,
tuM'CSA'ccontroF-the' enttY '6f"the 'derloiniria"..:,' updlri euts:'()ff':'t7 fi;)J.; It ,Iis:'ev1\1ei'lt;:: therefOlle~:,th-at'J;
tioM shift i'number·· irit()·'th~>triggers"CS'P't' be~"
cUlation will ternt1nate;'.'aftier"hidfcorrecl!ioRlluWF,~I,'
eomiilgCl'onttilttlve itrevtmieS'the"COiTespondirig';;'20 ,beenC.l!ffected, in,th'e"same manner'as has-,'been
lynumtlerett S'tagEi"of'1;hEl' colltlter'DCS, so"thiit" .'. desCl'fu€lci i'-of :.,.
effE!btea .bythedertOnlinational' shift unit '(SecEacnof ,~the.se "pilot.,unlts .. iS ,alike,andiitls,suf..,0..
tioll: 12,), ;eac'h "of the':lnptlt''pl,Jls'Eis increases this.
ficienUo show the cirelli t of.one.OUhe. pilot .Units '.'
coti!:it'by.one:· . Whert the'totarcotlnt 1828, the" ;,5 in Figs.BOd·to . e. . All :.tiniing.4)igil.al& required,bi
stligeg"S'and' '20" are' reversed C'status; . stage 8' an .. electronic; storage ,. Unit" are. ,generated .iIlc..lts'Jip
thm"acts>to'apply"cut~bff'potent1a;l by .way of
contrcillllig,pilot.unit. ,,' Tliese signals -!'!l:equiresriherpmductioR:::of,. a;'ctree~*nakanci a ~'.; pleted.-:;~. The. :detaiied;:construetion 'and features
t:<~Beam»n~Jlianal ,which: when~mixed. will result: in ,,:.: of:. the,. pilot.: units .:will ::bel"brought :out: ,in, subse·... :,quent sections.
...;.~produciion!of:,ihe ¢gnali ICI.
,', tT~,prQduce!.:the:1~quisite.:tree signals, ·.for : the
·16a.' The main commutator
;.>;.j)ilokuDits which,.are se.t,. tppilot:'&equence;data, ri
:. a pair,.o.f,diaLswitchesDSHS.and DS2S(Fig;,55)
The ·maincommutator:CFigs;·.·78ato ,k) is a
,.;.'.ar~,prov.ided.,.~;Each .. of these:· switches. has three
network of. ·electronic elements which performs
•• I:Sections fJi.\gs·; 5t, 55 and '561 or. stacks ofc.ontacts
a· round of: operations ,for .. causing :'. theinstruc.',':and;(commoply .operatect;.; switch ... blades .. , The :.tionsgiven •. by a.lineof:sequence data to.be carH&\\litch DS{S: is.set aceor@lg'to which pilot. units 10 riedout·as-:anordered process., The .main: comf"and:relatedelectronic:storagemnit:areto ,be..used . ,.mutatorand the sequence means, ·including the
.. :,for. S~ 8.eq,·d.ata· while·switch.DS. 2S. is. adjusted :.·sources, of ~uence.data ,and ,sequence' storage,
>"',8ccorctjng:towhich.pj,lot1:unit ·and·:related.,e}ecmay be referred to as main', aequence;meansias
.<.tronic:atorage.mnit.areused.for,,~eq:data; It
. distinguished from .the: sub-sequence. means of
may be assumed that switch DSIS is setto..7·and l;», the ,multiplying",dividing:.unit. the;accumulator
.·",'Switch,DS2S isset . to 8. ·.Referl'ing: to'Fig;' 54, it·.:unit"and the,denominationalshift··unit.( An.ex.' is:,,:aeen "that· sections I.:· of,,·switches· DS I 8., anddension. of ,the . 'main ·.commutator is a so ..called
", DS2S. are-connected" to ,the.outputs. of: ,the··.OC- ."Control lilrame'. (Figs .. 75ato h, .76a to. g; and :7.7 a
·,·,Out,·to·ES trees.. With.:DSIS ,set.. at. 7, it.·trans- :, ,,:·to,d) which is a,· network of electronic circuits
;).:D)it",'Lground: petential to. ;the.line; OGOl: and·.with. 20 having: functions' ,which'wiUbe described subse:\.'~switchDS2S:set to 8. it . aPplies·gr.ound potential
". quently..·,The. main; commutator may, also .be.con,,-to ·0008., i. Inothel~i. w:or-ds.dilec:tions 1 .of, these
sidered.as including,calculation,control.commu;·';.switohes, as. a;djusted.in.the·exaxnpltkproduce.tree '" tators ,ACC.C "(Fig;: 78A)..,.MY:C, .·(Fig;i:78M}"and
'i.,f;1snals·QC01,.a.nd 8. : Signals OCOI and S,cut,ofi
DVC (Fig. 78D), and the no-calculation: eom·,;tubes.,U-5CP,·(I!'ig;,; aOe).: iQ" pilot;units .1 ;anti 8. :o:;;, .. mutator NO (Fig, 78c),
.·"Referring:to· ;Fig!55"with, . diaJ'switches.,DSI S
. . ·.. Asstated ,·above;·.the ;main· commutator fWlC·:,·c and, DSts; set at 7 .and 8,c respec.ti vely.•: they.· aPply
.... tions to perform a'round, of operations for carry,., .erouoc,t·,potential! to,. thedines:PRESland 8.' In:, iPg; into efiect;1nstructions given by a line. ·of
,,'.Elthel'l words.,. the tree ·.signals-PRESl. and 8>are, seqeunce ,'or.program· data .. ,'Suchinstruetions
. ,,..produced:and:cut'off the tubes·. Ii-SCPo (,Fig,· aOe) ;;;1; normally "includedirectioDsgiven by:thepmgram
.in . pilot. ,units J·and 8.,The.scanning.signalSPR . -fields P; Q; R, .T, U and V :(see Figs. 30apd 4'and
. .·.will,be,·,ejjeetivedUl'ing;·each .run . of· Sequence to "'Section '2a) ,.for' transferring;. data from' selected
., out,:..ofi ,·Ua: in:th~ pilot,units which:. have ..their ,,; 'BOurces;to .the ,electronic ·.storage 'units and . for
.;:.-:switobes, :5SQ·;,se~·;la~.:.pesitions, seq, ·.and.·. so ;.·these
.transmi tting: results:frolD; electronic. storage units
,,(pilot-.units willrpmduce:the.,signals·PRE.
;);;.00- selected recei:vlngunits .. kset: of .Instructions
,l Referring,i·to .Fig;' 56~,.with<.,the dial switches
. ,::alsa mormally.·includes, direc.tions given. by..the
:.t;)Sla and~S2SJ5etat 7,,·Slld 8.reapectively;their
···program11.eldS! OP1 andOP2.for'the performance
.".8ectiona a produce:.the.t,ree.signals,.ICISl and 8 ., of', mathematicaloperations:,.::among:\vhichT:'are
, "which .cut·; oif·,.the,tube.s . 32~5GP,.in .pilot. units. 1 ; ::multiplications, ?: division: 'and ,·accumulation.:' A
.i~, and 8'(Fig,· ,80e) ••,i>ul'inll::eacll run, o!·sequence,J.IJ 'set of.instructious.'further includes directions for
. ,,,:tha;main.commutator which is
applied to all the pilot units and enables the pilot units selected by seauence st.orage to prrduce
their signals ESC and Out to ES. All of these
signals, which lead to the entry of data via the
Out bus-sets to the electronic storage units may
thus be produced simultaneously by the selected
pilot units. As will be brought out in subsequent sections; the OCO main commutator signal is not suflicient of itself to cause the selected
pilot units to produce the signals ESC and Out
to ES. A Forward signal must also have been
received by a selected pilot unit from the source
which is to read out its data through the Out
bus-set to the electronic storage unit. As previously explained, this Forward signal must be
received by the pilot unit as an indication that
the source of data is in condition for transmitting data to the Out bus-set and is not in a condition for receiving data from an In bus-set.
Further, the OCO signal and the Forward signal will be effective only if the selected pilot unit
is not then storing a condition for piloting transmission of data from the corresponding electronic storage unit.
Although the entries via Out bus-sets to electronic storage .units may occur simultaneously,
the transmission of the entered data from electronic storage units to the Internal Out bus-sets
and into a selected calculating unit must occur
singly, 1. e; from only one electronic storage unit
at a time. This is evident from the fact that
the Internal In and Internal Out bus-sets (Figs.
20 and 22) provide only a single channel in association with electronic storage and this single

140

ij

10

Iii

20

23

30

a"

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

channel can handle the data from only one elec.;.
tronic storage unit at a time. It follows' that
the signals ES to Int for directing the transmission of data from the electronic storage units
to the calculating units by way of the Internal
Out bus-sets must be produced successively. In
other words, while the Out fields may be so interpreted by the machine as to cause the numbers from sources selected by these fields to be
entered concurrently into electronic storage
units, on the other hand the transmission of
these numbers from electronic storage to a selected calculating unit can be effected only successively, from one electronic storage unit after
another.
The In fields must be so interpreted by the
machine as to cause the transmission of calculated results from the selected calculating un'its
via the Internal In bus-sets to electronic storage units and thence to the selected receiving
units. Since the Internal In bus-sets provide
only a single communicating Channel, the sig';;
nals for· causing the transmission of data along
the Internal In bus-sets to electronic storage
units must be produced successively. With regard to the transmission of data from electronic
storage to the In bus-sets, such transmission
may occur simultaneously or in overlapping time
relationship from a plurality of electronic storage units in view of the fact that the In bussets provide· a plurality of separate channels.
In order to control the pilot units for producing the signals ES to Int and Int to ES successively, the main commutator includes a series of scanning spots P, Q, R, T, U and V (Figs.,
7,Sc to h). These spots, it will be noticed are
designated the same as the fields, P, Q, R, T,U
and V of a line of, sequence data. This' is becauSe the scanning spots function to control the
pilot units for producing the signals which are
required to carry out the instructions given' by
the corresponding program fields and which' in:'
,
volve passage through electronic storage.
The spots P, Q, R, T, U and V come into operation successively, in the stated OJ,'der, each,
except the P spot, under control of the preceding spot. The P spot is put in operation under
control of a signal PS produced by the main
commutator at the same time as the signal OCO.
When a program field is an Out field its corresponding sc~nning spot is conditioned to perform an Out code step, abbreviated as the OC
step, but when a program field is im In field, its
corresponding spot is conditioned to perform an
In code step, abbreviated as the IC step. Since
the P field always is an Out field, the P spot is
always conditioned for an OC step. The other
spots must be conditioned to perform IC steps
when their corresponding program fields are In
fields and this is effected under control of the
In code sequence circuits (Fig. 61) as described
in Section 16b, Items 15b and 39 and Section
17, Item 6. It may be mentioned now that when
a program field is blank in its subfield b, the corresponding scanning spot will produce a Signal
which is effective in the blank code chassis BC
(Fig. 78L). On the other hand, when a program .field has a significant digit in its sub field
b the corresponding scanning spot produces a
signal or signals which are effective in the pilot
units. .When a scanning spot is conditioned for
an OC step, it operates during a tun of the com:'
mutator to produce a signal identified by the
reference letter of the spot and the numeral 1.
Thus the signals PI, QI, RI, TI, UI and VI are
OC step signals. These Signals. as now under-

';: . t42

':,:1'41

~~~Ii;'l~C: ._~n!1rse-'1JRlltt.lDlhJ::QQDUD\~f!3toe:wiu MsQ ~o~t~lhc;'gs,ig­
otlr,~:p,;;,~.·;Ri·_T.;;l];:~n¢;V:,~~e

·:;.ntllItJ3Pll~APq SW;'for;1~tromPg ~e;;smMed

which is' produced' concurrently With the signal
the
:'11.~ IlPOb4or.c~!iueing ,th",·p bsignal, (see S~tion

•'n!il.u~nCe qat!tctJZf.)m:;the:)~_~eeted; e~etrofli~§:to~ge
5,;UJlit~;to~-.;th~:, t-hen;open:std~ Q:f ·&~qUeno~:sto:r.iI,ge.

quence

8cann~t:AWl~ce,i~ .. h;u~tjl4.:bY jb~ signal PS;c,. m~t 'unit&~:in :pilotiPg;::tntllSQli~ion-of;>~.h~N;e­
,t~

oeo. '~e':slgrialftPS{·bl'ings·iflt():-:.'Operaticin

,::;~e::,m!l-in\cpmmutator: proQuoe::!:. pres~mse, &ig-

J~~:;[tem,~) .;·AS$mning':-;that;,~ subfl.el(t:Pb;!m~I:LS~a.. j,'!,pg',N)?R"aim1.1lt.aneo:usl y:-(see:' t>~t«Jn
.ls not blank, the signal':':PI. aets"upon' the' pilot
..;;~t!.b, . .:;If\em ;21) .. ;:';Ithe::m:ese.nse·~gllal:,J~:rR;: is
~!~.t;to.amse":which ot. ;them ,}tas ,been;. selected
~";;qtiHli1a&l~p~d' its, ,piloting.' 'of' an ,'entry ,:via. 'the
,::l5. !: TJ:l~_p:t:~~se ,;~jgpa;l :m?R ilt:aPIlUed. to;·.~he
:..,.... .d "~t~"bU8!'Set ',to the·.;nMatedr,.elecj;ronic
Pi:lot:.w;Uts .to ,~se ,wmch:oLtbembas ,b.een:se~.ato~geounib: ~eQted'"by' the" Pb:.,subtield· a,nd '15:Jeeted by;,jln:,:m'jield wbleh ·',ca,lls;;{or:::j;f.lnfmis'''''~ientry. ie\und~,cl)n-trol.'of';the;:OCQ,8ignal.
;,;;§Wn;,.to.· E!i'::t:~ei)jng; ;llnik::·.;Pbe.:'P.l:'~nS~.i;"jgnal
~AlMerlxall -Mle ·,o~tions,'.attendant':uPon." .•he,.5:i!ffitab:lisbes;:,i:Q.:~P~. pilok-uPit>, (me: of:,:thlti ~di­
~~iQn';'\lnder,controlrofthe';ESto\[nt:s1gtions for causing ~p.edtijot~ unit·tQ<'pr,tNtlcf:::;~he
'.nal resulting from the,Pt':$gnaLhave, been-'com - "::kllm~mjll§ion:jsigna,l):;Ea :tQ:i In.,:: Also" ill; cpntunc,~p~ed:.'-thethis .pilot •unit

to

,f~g':l. th~,~mlssionL'of ,:~ta. from,·eiec~~.':\.m'"t~wr,to ,~h~'Wiot~rJWitS:;(se~ *Qtjpp: 1fiQdj;~m
.'~.' ~1..rage,.tOtith~i-iIDtemal'bus-,eets."r'Fhe'NI
31).
~naJ>:~'h~er".~as> a·l.purpose. in,conjul)ction
.:'::J)u~imr !J,.:J.'un,.oLthe,:,ctllJUn"~tor~,Vi.i.th'~8pect.
,.Mtl\~th~"blank':,code:1'Cha'Ssisjncompletlng."'.~he
),,::tcJ a Jine:ot ~~uf;)noej qttta;:;the~gnal :'QCOrun,:~~;6~nCei,~eev.seetion l6b;:JItelm 26V)·. 35 4er:.e.Ont r oLof :wbl.cb thft(~ntrjes,:.'lJ.r~. ~.ae; iiwm
",:::cllll\Q!ea .....JSCant'ling-,'-epo~ i&:eonditioned, to>per- '::Jh~ Qutgu§~~~,lnt9.elect~nic;;§tfl.1'ag~ iUl(hthe
·~.11Wl~Ie-st.ePiiti.hmctitmS dtUinga.'seanning::(~jgflal PS.wtupl);jqjth!,te:;; ,th, ~~aMj;ng'i!§e~ce
\!1'Ie~~et 1:or:~e;,'thi&,.s.el~(led,pilo~· unit.;l)n~'of,;the .; ::,i).r~Wg:,Un~· ~;:seqReJ;lCe d~ta;'h~ve,~en:::tWm­
t~~i9ns.,f{)I\~epi~ot"upit.-to .~iti eit3 .~gpal'i~,PJ~~d .. :_61JCn;::~mpleUpn, i::;, m~nifffiteq rby!::;jhe
,:~A,··tQ':IQj;~ee,,~ti9n17~ !~m :;14). ·,'£he\otlaer 6[j·t~lmUcaMon;:;to:,the ;com:routatorot:Jhesjgp!l-l:AT
1'1 QQJ;Id!;i!iDt\$., ",re,j;he:, appli@tton of" a':~Il~~~g ·."iwm~h; (lOIneS" fmm.: the'ptiot::'units; ,\ll'he:'A't!.signP!lli,by..,t.l1e {11l3lni ~Rm1ut", tor'tQ,Mle :pilot::Jllii ts .; ;lp.al'j;will:-;be.: ,i'oUo,wed bY,o',all' AJTI;::$igna}ab,out
''''''P~ :tlltl41PP,JJIl8;t;io:n;ot S:; ~ac~;~jgna~by ,;ibe,1"se. ,I' l.&:::lJ.)!:!;.,la ter" i>9,rljlllctisfy; t,he, J.o:uI]th'QOndj:ti.Olh:tor
j".,J~(J.i,f.~.el,.}\:iJ1g u.nit,.teI th~ptlot 'i.unit.,~~e.edi!ec.:ij~Pl.'9I1uct~Pll by, tl,1eCQlllm ~j;;1,~of:tp.epr~~nse
i~~tl(m J 7.. ,lt~~ ..2~, ~nd. 2~).
Tit .slgnals, ..'rJ;)US.·lflrior, to", thej,.procl:uctipn;.ot, .,the
."':'''''i:tn,,r~a.rd,;teI>the sequ~nce(4",ta,. ,the; JIUlin •. P),'~ns(l §J:gQ~ls, .it. j!?,.P9~si1:>le"that}the,:pre.v19us
,,:.'~~u~ tor.Wi!l.nr.Q. The Back signals
from the units which are to receive the data
resulting from the scanning of the new line of
sequence data may also be effective upon the
pilot units prior to the production of the presense oj
signals. The lCI signals and the Back signals
are two of the conditions required for causing
selected pilot units to produce the transmission
signals ES to In. The third condition involves
the presense signals. Thus. it is possible that 10
the presense signals may be the final timing
control for transmission from electronic storage
to the In bus-sets. Hence, under certain conditions such transmission from a plurality of
electronic storage units to the In bus-sets may 15
occur simultaneously. This is permissible since
the In bus-sets provide a plurality of separate
data transmitting channels.
The SW signal is produced by the commutator
at the time the OCO signal is dropped (see Sec- :~o
tion 16b, Item 3D. The oeo signal times the
entry of data from Out bus-sets to electronic
storage and when all such entries have been
completed during a round of the commutator,
the all-entry signal AE from the pilot units is ~5
applied to the commutator and initiates operations which lead to the termination of the oeo
Signal and the production of the SW signal. The
latter signal in conjunction with the presense
signal SPR will cause the sequence data in elec- ;)0
tronic . storage to be transmitted to sequence
storage (Section l6b, Item 3D.
The main commutator also functions during
a round of operations to cause the Control Frame
to control the alternate closing and opening of ,,,'
the A and B sides of sequence storage, the alternate heating of the A and B sides of sequence
storage circuits and trees, and the production of
a plurality of time delay signals all of which will
be explained further in subsequent sections. ThelLi
calculation control commutators and the NO
commutator are selectively conditioned" according to the setting of the sequence storage pyramids OPI and OP2 (Fig. 59). The OPI pyramid
is heated for the first half of a scanning sequence
which involves the successive operation of spots 4.5
P, Q and R while the OP2 pyramid is heated for
the second half of the scanning sequence which
involves successive operation of spots T, U and V.
Positive AP and BP pulses from the main
pulse generator (see Section 4) are applied to 50
the main commutator where they are inverted
and amplified by tubes I, 2, 3 and 4in the Z
spot (Fig. 78k). The resulting negative AP
pulses are utilized by the main commutator, including all the calculation commutators, while 55
the resulting negative BP pulses are utilized only
by the calculation commutators MYC and DVC
(Figs. 78M and D) . .
Details of construction and various operations
of the main commutator will be brought out 60
fully in the subsequent sections. The first run
of sequence will be described in the next Section
16b. This is a run of sequence which is required
to call the first real line of sequence data into
sequence storage. When power is reapplied to 65
the machine after it has been shut down, the
operator at the control desk first operates the
manual cancel keys which cause the resetting of
the various ti'iggers in the main commutator and 70
elsewhere as previously mentioned in Section 1.
An artificial line of sequence, consisting only of
S I and S2 data, is set into the dial switches
Osl and DS2 (see Fig. 40 and Section 1D. This
artificial line of sequence will select the first 75

, 1'44

real line of sequence data in the carrying out of a.
succession of programmed operations.
16b.

The fiTst run of sequence

The sequence of events in this run is given' in
Figs. 79a, b, bb, c andd. The numbers in parentheses denote items of the present section,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Relay AM.-With the machine cancelled,
trigger 2-5CF (Fig. 75e) is effective via tube elements 11 and I to place increased potential on
line am. Consequently. 11-19CF (Fig. 77d) conducts and its output line amT (also see Fig. 36)
drops in potential. causing current to fiow
through relay AM to the +150 v. line. Thereupon, relay AM is energized' and its points AMa
close and make the circuits of the plurality of
relays AS (see SectionlD, thereby opening the
A side of sequence storage.
2. Relays AOR.-In cancelled condition of the
machine" triggers 16 and 18 in 4CF (Fig. 75d)
cut off the lock couple 15-1 5a to apply high
potential to 13-4CF. which brings line aOT to low
potential. The low potential on line aor is Inverted by 9 to 12 and 41 in 19CF (Fig. 77c) to
increased potential on tubes 13 to 39. These
tubes conduct,' and their output lines aCTT drop
in potential. Each of these output lines connects to a group of relays AOR (see Fig. 36,
where an illustrative number of these relays is
shown) . Upon lines aOTT dropping in potential,
current fiow through relays AOR to the +150 v.
line occurs. Energized relays AOR open their
points a (Fig. 41), so as to break any existing
stick circuits of relays AOP (see Section 11).
The relays AOR are called the A operational reset relays since they serve to clear the. A side
sequence storage operational relays AOP of any
data which may previously have beenstoted
therein.
;3. Relays X7.-With the machine cancelled,
trigger 3 in 3CF (Fig. 75c) holds tube 2 in 3CF
off and line xl at increased potential so amplifiers I, 2 and 3 in IBCF (Fig. 77c) produce low
potential on lines X1T (also see Fig. 36). A relay
Xl and delay relay XID are in series between
the +150 v. line and each of the lines xlT (an
illustrative pair of relays Xl and XlD appears
in Fig. 36). When lines xlT drop in potential.
relays Xl and XID are energized. Relays Xl are
the timing relays and relays XID are the arc
suppression relays for the A sides of' the In sequence' storage pyramids shown in' Figs. 51, 52a
and 52b. Since all these pyramids are at zero' in
the first run of sequence, the' energization of
relays Xl and XID has no effect during the
first run.
4. Entering the artificial line Of sequence.-The

artificial line of sequence was explained in Section
11. Such Une of Sequence consists of S I or S2
codes, or both, set on dials DS (Fig. 40). The
setting of these dials is made according to where
the first real line of sequence for a program of
operations is to be obtained. Havingcancelied
the machine, the operator now closes switches
SSI and SS2 (Fig. 40a) to cause the predetermined artificial line of sequence to be applied to
sequence storage, as described in section ll.
Since the A side of sequence storage now is open
(see item 1), the SI and S2 code numbers set
on the dials DS I and DS2 are applied to relays
AI (Figs. 37, 38 and 39) in the S/ and S2 colUmns
19 and 20 of the A side of sequence storage. 'rhe
energized relays AI close their points b (Fig. 41),
establishing the pickup circuits of the corre~

145

1'46

siSbndlng groups of relays AOF. In this manner,
A sides; by the clos.ure of. points X I a (Item. 7l.
the SI and 52 data are stored in the S ISeq and
Depending on the setting ot these pyramids and
S2Seq relays AI and· AOP of sequence storage
the plugging, described in Section 11, the sources
columns 19 and 211. (see· also Figs. 42 and 43).
for the next line of sequence are selected and
Thus, the very first artificial line of sequence is 5 the. next line. of sequence is applied to Out busentered in the A side of sequence storage so that
sets. In.the present example, it. is assumed that
the st, S2 pyramids (Fig. 50) are set, on their
the SI and S2 code numbers (Fig. 40) in the SI,
A sides, in accordance with the SI and S2 data
S2 pyramids (Fig. 50) are 01 and 02, respeccontained in the artificial line of sequence.
tively .. Assume, further;. that code numbers 01.
5. Start key switch, commutator signal STR, 10 and 02 are to. select the SISeq'and S2Seqportions
dropping AM and AOR.-The operator next closes
of the. next. line of. sequence from tape storage
a start key switch SKS (Fig. 77aa) at the constations. I and 10 of bank 1 (Section 9), with
trol desk picking up a relay SKR, the point a
station I to be. read out through its ASS selector
ot which connects the +150 v. line to point g of
and station. 10 to. be read out. through its BSS
tl'1llger 5, Fig. 77a, so that the trigger turns and 15 s.elector. Assume, further, that SISeq data are
cuts off 4 to bring line SPST to increased potento be applied to Out bus-set 1 and S2Seq data
tial. The increased potential is applied to tube
to Out bus.-set a .. Finally, assume both stations
rkZ (Fig. 78k), making the tube cnnduct and
are. to. be moved after reading out a line of data.
turn trigger 11Z. With 11Z turned, it applies
The plugging in tape storage bank 1 will be beinereased suppressor potential to 1·3 which is al- 20 tween sockets ASSP (Figs. 31, 32a and 34) and
ready conditioned plus by trigger 10 as is (reset).
sockets T&-GQPl and between BSSP and
The series of tubes 13Z, laZ, 12Z thereupon proTS-GOP8~ The plUgging for selection of tape
duce a negative going STR commutator signal
storage Group Out 1 by the 01 setting of the SI
which goes to the control frame (Fig. 75a) where
Group Outs pyramid (Fig. 50) is between SGPOI
it is inverted by 4-ICF (Fig. 75a) to a positive 25 (Figs. 50 and 53b) and TSGOSl of bank 1. The
going STR signal, on wire 10 I, which is transmitplugging for selection of the tape storage Group
ted to tube 3-5CF (Fig. 75e). This tube produces
Out 8 by the 02 setting of the S2 Group Outs
a negative going pulse applied to both sides of
pyramid is between SGP02 and TSGOS8 of bank
trigger 2-5CF, turning it (see item 1). Accord1. For selection of lASS and I DESS (Fig. 32c)
1ngly, wire am drops in potential, and relays AM 30 of bank 1 by the 01 and 02 settings of the S I and
S2 Unit Outs pyramids, sockets SUPOI and 02 are
and AS (Fig. 36) are deenergized. Meanwhile,
the artificial line of sequence has been applied
plugged to IASP and IDBSP of bank 1, as shown
to relays AI and AOP (Item 4). The positive
in Fig. 53a. For selection of Move relays MA and
STR signal on wire 10 I also makes 24, Fig. 75d,
MB (see Fig. 32c) of bank 1 by the 01 and 02
conductive so as to turn 16. Consequently, re- 35 settings of the SI and S2 Station Move pyramids
lays AOR are deenergized (note Item 2), and
(Fig. 50), sockets SMPO I and 02 (Fig. 53b) are
their points a reclose to establish the hold cirplugged to MAP and MBP of bank 1, as shown.
cuits through the energized relays AOP. In every
With the illustrated plugging, the heating of
case, after the relays AM and AS have served
the Unit Outs, Group Outs and Station Move
their purpose of opening the A side of sequence 40 pyramids (Fig. 50) by the closure of contacts
storage to an entry, the relays AM and AS and
X Ia establishes the following circuits:
AOR are dropped under control of an STR signal.
Tape starage Group Out 7 (bank 1) .-From
6. Relay BM.-With trigger 2-5CF (Fig. 75e)
ground (Fig. 50) through an Xla contact the
turned, it acts through 11 a and Ia to increase
S I Group Outs pyramid to the socket sapo I ,
the potential on the line bm, whereupon tube
plug connection to TSGOSl (Fig. 32c) (bank 1),
12:...f9CF (Fig. 77d) conducts, its output line bmr 45 and through the Group Out gang relay TS-GOl
(also see Fig. 36) drops in potential, so relay BM
(Fig. 32c) of bank 1 to the +50 v. line.
Tape storage Group Out 8 (bank H.-From
is energized. Relays BS pick up via points a of
BM, opening the B side of sequence storage to
ground via Xla contact (Fig. 50) the S2 Group
subsequent entry of the next line of sequence. 50 Outs pyramid to socket SGP02 (Fig. 53b), the
Each 8TR Signal switches the status of 2-5CF,
socket GOSa (bank 1), and through gang relay
so that relays AM and BM alternately are enerTS-GOa (Fig. 32c) of bank 1 to the +50 v. line.
Station selector 1ASS (bank 1) .-From ground
gized by successive STR. signals and the A and
B sides of sequence storage alternately opened to
via. an Xla point, the SI Unit Outs pyramid (Fig.
sequence data.
50) to the socket SUPOI (Fig. 53a) sQcket IASP
7. Relays Xl.-The positive. STR signal also 55 (Fig. 32c) (bank 1) and through an interlock
aets through 11a-5CF (Fig. 75e) to turn trigger
relay point IACLa and the gang relay lASS (see
'S-SCF. The trigger now cuts off 9 of the couple
Fig. 32c) of bank 1 to the +5(}v.line.
9-9a. Tube 9a is being held off by trigger 10.
Station selector 10BSS (bank 1) .-From ground
Accordingly, the couple now serves through 8a 60 via an Xla point, the 82 Unit Outs pyramid to
and T in 5CF to cause the potential on line xl
socket SUPIl2 to socket 10BSP (bank 1) and via
to rise. This makes 21-19CF (Fig. 77d) conduct,
an interlock point 10ACLa through gang relay
so its output line xlr (Fig. 36) drops in potential
10BBS of bank 1 to the +50 v.line.
and relays XID and XI are energized. Points
Move relay MA (bank 1) .-From ground to an
Xla (Fig. 50) now heat the A sides of the SI and 65 Xla point, the SI station move pyramid to socket
S2 Unit Outs, Group Outs, and Station Move
SMPOI (Fig. 53b) to socket MAP (bank 1) and
pyramids. It is clear that after entering sethrough relay MA (see Fig. 32c) of bank 1 to the
quence data into the A side of sequence storage,
+50 v. line.
the A sides of the SI, S2 pyramids are heated.
M01Je relay MB (bank D.-From ground via
8. Selection of the next line of sequence.-The 70 an Xla point, the S2 station move pyramid to
A sides of the SI, S2 pyramids (Fig. 50) have
socket SMP02, socket MBP (bank 1) and through
been set (Item 4) according to where the next
relay MB (Fig. 32c) of bank 1 to the +50 v. line.
 .
The control by signal oeD of the pilot units was
explained in Item 22. Control of the pilot units
by signals SPR and NPR will now be explained.
30 Either the signal SPR or NPR will be applied to
the tube 116a, Fig. 80e, of a pilot unit, depending
on the position of the pilot unit hand switch 5SQ.
If the pilot unit, such as Unit 1, is being used to
pilot sequence data, then its switch 5SQ is set
35 to the seq POSiti0ll, but if the pilot unit is being
used to pilot other data, then its switch is set to
the norm position. Inthe full line position of the
switch, it conducts the signal SPR to tube 16a
of the pilot unit, while in the dotted position of
40 the switch it conducts the signal NPR to the tube
16a. In the example under discussion, pilot unit
1 is being used to pilot sequence data. Therefore, its switch 5SQ is in full line position and
the negative signal SPR cuts off 16a, Fig. aOe.
As previously described, the companion tube I 6 is
45 also cut off since wire PRES1 is now adjusted to
ground potential (see Item 20). Accordingly,
upon 16a being cut off, the couple 1'6-1!6a is
effective via 15 and 13 to produce a positive PRE1
signal on the wire 133. This signal renders 35,
50 Fig~ 80c, conductive, causing it to turn 30.
The turning of trigger 30, Fig. aoc, under control of the PRE signal causes 29-3CP (Fig. aOc)
to be turned. With 29 turned, it cuts off 24a
of couple 24-24a, for a reason which will be
55 explained in Item 31, dealing with the transmission of sequence data from an electronic storage
unit to sequence storage.
Further, reversed30-3CP (Fig. aOc) applies increased
potential to 35 and also, via switCh 4SQ,
60
in seq position, to tubes 35a, 23a and 11. Tube
11 is thereby conditioned for a purpose brought
out in Item 32. Tubes 35 and 35a are rendered
conductive to cut off tubes 44 and 45, respectively.
65 This prepares tubes 44 and 45 to produce the
negative pilot signals AT and STR when 3D-3CP
later is restored (Item 33). Tube 23a, by being
rendered conductive, blocks turning of ID-3CP
which otherwise would occur when an RDL sig70 nal is produced in a manner described in Item
31. The turning of I D would produce a reset signal on bus 82 of In bus-set 1 which signal has
no purpose in connection with transmission of
data to sequence storage.
75
24a. The forward signal delay counter.-It was

151

explained in Item 8 that S'ISeq data 'bas been
applied along with the forward signal to .out busset I.. The forward signal is applied to bus 8,1
of the Out bus..,set 1. This signal which originates at the +150 v. line (see Figs. 23,29,32a
and35b and Section 9 ) goes to a grid of .switch
tubell-ZCP (Fig. SOb). In order for the forward &gna.l to render tube 13 conductive, the
tube must have been previously conditioned under control of a signal FSR. Referring to Fig.
781, .the signal FSR is produced each time a trigger 2tW is turned. This will normally occur fol_
lowing the fulfillment of three conditions: (1)
The completion of the scanning sequence of com·
mutator spots P, Q, R,T, U and V (Figs. 7Bc
to7Sh); (2) The production of the AED signal
which occurstmder control of and about 16 ms.
&fterthe AE signal (see Item 27); and (3) The
production of .the signal STRDj which follows
theSTR signal by about 10 ms ..(see Items 12

158

5

10

l5

20

and 39).
In the initial situation which characterizes the
first .run of sequence, the trigger 29W is turned

at the very start under ,control of the first AP
pulse within the main commutator. This pulse
turns24W which causes 29W to turn and thereupon the latter acts through lW to produce a
positive FSR ·signaL 24Wremains .turned, but
2tw is restored by the .next AP pulse. The signalFSR, one AP pulse cycle in duration, is transmitted to I ~2CP ·(Fig.BOb) of each pilot unit
causing 'I II to become conductive so as to reverse the triggerl-2CP. Asa result, the turned
trigger 1 conditions tube 13. Hence, when the
fOTward csignal is applied to this tube .it becomes
conductive and cuts off 20 of couple20-2Da
rendering the couple responsive to AP pulses
·eontlnually applied to 20a. The couple now acts
through 22-2CP to transmit negative ,AP phase
pulses to the input 132 of the FS (forward signal)
delay counter. As now understood, the first five
pulses effect a cycle of elements 14, 15, 16,11 and
lB. As til restores at the end of this cycle, it
turns 23... 2CP. A second ,cycle .of the counter -is
effected and at the completion of this cycle the
negative pulse from I 8 restores 2.3. 1>.8 .23 restor€S it .producesa negative signal 'FSD whkh
may 'be called the Forward delay sig-nal. This
.signal turns ·S. The following BP pulsere.~tores
II ,Which thereupon restores J-2CP which ,has heen
turned under control of the sirrnal FSRacting
through 'It-1CP. Now with 1 restored, it deconditions 13 so that .20 becomes conductive and
interrupts transmission of AP pulses bv the couPle2~20a to the forward sign~.l delav co"nter
whtah will remain 'in ,its restored status at the
end of the second' cycle. 'TheFS delay counter
provides a delay in the order of 2 ms. from.the
Forward signal to the delay signal FPD .
The signal:FSD also turns :3lh2C:P, 'which
thereupon renders :29 conductive. causing 2fl to
.turn. The next AP pulse resets 211, causing it to
tum34.Tl'med34 cuts off U.Tube.33a iSC}lt
ot! unless the .pilot unit ha<: been operated to
store a transmission .control signal leI (see Ibem
32). In the instant situation,it IT'ay be safely
assumed that 33a is at cut-off when 33 is cut
of'!. 'The couple33~33a becomes effectiyetoRPply increased potential to the suppre~sor of~2,
It'hasbeen assumed that the OGS signal as timed
by the OCO signal preceded the delay signalFc:oD
and has already turned 25 and is conditionin<>:
32 :(Item. 22) . Hence .when the snppressor of :32
receivesincreasedpotentialundrr ,contr01·oft?e
limlalf'SP, 32~onducts and turns 31.. 'I'.he next
AP pulse restores 31 which thereupon resets 25.

25

:::0

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

AswilJ be brought out in the next ~rn (2~),
when 25 is reset itbrjngs abouttbe production
of a cancel signal and entry signal for the ele,ctronic storage unit. The delay signal FSP may
occur before,atter, o;rsimultaneously wtth tbe
OCOsignal and its resulting mixed sigpal OCS.
This depends on varying fnctors whiCh enter jnto
the production of a forward signal.' The production of a forward signal, as now ul1derstood,
accompanies the application of digit signals from
a selected. data .source to an Out bus-set. The
selection of a data source is made .by Out sequence storage circuits, when these circuits are
heated by the closure of contacts of b~ting re- .
lays XI, X2 . , . X6 or YI, Y2 . . . Y6. Upon
the sequence storage circu.its ~ipgheated,they
piCk up groupapd unit out :rel~y!! or iptnecase
of dial storage, pick up group out relays ~1011~
(see Sec.tionB). The group and unit out relays
may be called the read-out relayS and these clos!"
their points to establish paths for the digit signals and the Forward signals to the selected Out
bus-sets from the selected data source5. 1:n the
case of relay storage and dial storage or the like
the data sources -are in conditiop to transmit
the digit signals and the Forward signals as soon
as the group and unit out relays close their
points. In the case of tape storage, a tape may
be still in motion at the time that a group-out
and station selector clo.se their relay points ·and
the readout circuits will not be establisbed until
a designation line of the tape 'arrives at the sensing 'position. The Forward Signal in that case
may occur a varying time after the operation of
the group out and station selectOr relays. In
the cas!" of the table look-up operation, special
means are provided a1) will be explained in Sec~
tion ~2 to produce a For-ward I)ignal whep a desired tape argumel1t ba:;; peen lookedUpanq
checked. The Forward Signal in that case 'may
occur a chance time later than the operation
of the heating relays for the table look-up group
outs and table outs. Itis clear then that the Forward Signal may occur at varying chance times
after the operation of the heating relays for the
Outsenuence storage circuits. The operation of
the heating relays XI, X'2 and XM occurs upon
the producticn of the 8TH 'sirnal. The operation of the heating relays X3, X4, X5 and X6 occurs SOIr'e two AP pulse cycles after the STR
Signal. It is seen, therefore, that a Forward signal from a'selected "o"rce may occur at a variable
time after the PTRsignal.
The OCOsignal 'and the si~nal OCR timed
thereby OeOl'l' about a millisecond ,after the
STHDlsignal which follows the 8TH signal by
about ten ms. (see Item 21) . The Forward sig.nal delayed pulse FSD, wbich follows the Forward signal by about 2 IT's., mav occur prior to,
simultaneously with,or subseauently to tl}e oes
signal. If, as assumed before, the OCSsignal
comes first, it causes 25-2CP (Fig. BOb) to turn
and it also causes 32 to be conditioned. The
signal FSD then coming along will cause 32 to
conduct and through 31 return 25, as previously
described. On the other hand, if the SignalFSD
comes before the OCS signal, it acts through 35
and 29 to turn 28 which thereupon f1.'nctions to
make21la conduct and apply a negative impulse
via the anode resistor of 26 to trigger 25,turn .
ing this trigger to cal.!se theSE and AE returp
sigpals to be blocked. Also, as ,betore,2S i,s,restored by the next AP pulse and turl1S 34 to cut
off .33al1dwit;,h ,3~aalso cutoJ~, 3"211),coIldi,HoI).ed.
The OCS signal coming along later, w1llrendet

g,6S6,67la.

159

160

32 conductive causing 31 to turn and the next
entry signal does not become exclusively effecpulse, returning 31, causes the latter to restore
tive until I AP pulse cycle later or 3AP pulse cy25. If, as may possibly happen, the OCS signal
cles after the FSD· signal. The forward Signal
and the FSD signal occur simultaneously, then 25
accompanies the application of digit signals from
is turned under control of either signal. Two AP 5 a selected value source to an Out bus-set which
pulses later, 31 functions to reset 25. The effect
transmits the digit signals to the entry tubes
of resetting 25 is described in the next item.
Out En of the corresponding electronic storage
24b. The sequence data entry into electronic
unit. The" forward signal circuit and the digit
storage.-In the preceding item it was explained
signal circuits are made through relay pOints.
that 25-2CP (Fig. SOb) was turned and returned 10 The exact concurrence of the closures of differunder jOint control of the signals FSD and OCS.
ent relay points is difficult to obtain and, hence,
Upon 25 restoring, it applies a positive going
the forward signal may occur as much as nearly
pulse via wire 132 to inverter 18-ICP (Fig. SOa)
2 ms. before the occurrence of the digit signals.
which thereupon turns 22 and 14 in ICP.
Nevertheless, the entry signal Out to ES does
The electronic storage unit cancel signal.- 15 not become effective, as explained before, until
When 22-1 CP turns, it renders conductive ISa
about one ms. after the FSD signal which folof normally non-conductive couple IS-ISa,
lows the Forward signal by some 2 ms. This alcausing it to act through an amplifier 4 to prolows a minimum of about 1 ms. between the
duce the cancel signal ESCT (see also Figs. 21
closure of the digit Signal circuits and the oc'"
and 22) as a result of which electronic storage 20 currence of the entry signal. In other words,
the entry signal (Out to ES) will not be applied
unit T is canceled.
The electronic storage unit entry Signal Out
to the entry tubes (Out En) until at least about
1 ms. after the digit signals have been applied
to ES.-When 14-ICP is turned, it cuts off normally condl'ctive tube T-ICP, which, through
to these tubes. This is more than sufficient to
amplifier I-I CP, produces the negative signal Out 25 allow electrical transients and talk across the
to EST (Fig. 22). This signal is inverted by an
buses by the digit signals, to die out before the
amplifier tube 10 (see Fig. 21> to a positive Out
entry timing Signal is effectiVe. Such tranSients
to EST signal which is applied to the control grids·
may momentarily fail to condition the proper
tubes, while the cross talk may momentarily con.
of all the entry tubes Out En (Fig. 21> of electronic storage EST. Those entry tubes which 30 dition the wrong entry tubes (Out En). By delaying the entry timing signal until the tranSients
have been conditioned by digit representative
and cross talk have disappeared, incorrect enpotentials on Out bus-set T, thereby become contries into the electronic storage units are preductive and reverse the associated digit storing
vented.
triggers of EST as soon as the cancel signal ESCT
terminates (see Section 6). In the example un- 35
The move signal.-Going back to Fig. SOa,
der discussion, Out bus-set T is carrying the
the restoration of 21-ICP which was explained
SISeq data applied to it by'station I, tape storbefore, in addition to restoring 14 to terminate
the entry timing signal (Out to EST) turns trigage bank 1, as described in Item S. Accordgers 13 and 20. With 13 turned, it serves through
ingly, the entry tubes Out En of EST are being
conditioned by Out bus-set T according .to the 40 normally conductive tube 8 and amplifier 2, to
produce a negative going station move signal
digits in the selected SISeq data. These condi·,
(SMST). This signal is applied to bus 82 of the
tioned tubes will be made conductive by the posiOut bus-set related to the pilot unit. In a mantive entry timing signal Out to ES T and the S I Seq
data will enter EST, when the cancel signal ESCl
ner which has been described in Section 9, the
.1.) Move signal'is effective to cause the selected tape
ends.
The cancel signal (ESCT) started with reversal
storage station, which has read out its data upon
the Out bus-set, to be advanced one line space,
of 22-ICP (Fig. SOa) upon restoration of 25-2CP
at AP pulEe time. The next AP pulse restores
In the example under discussion the Move signal
22, terminat;ng the cancel Signal. As 22 reSMST is applied by pilot unit T to bus 82 of
stores, it turns 2T. The next AP pulse returns 60 Out bus-set T; and station I, tape storage bank
2T which thereupon restores 14, terminating the
1, which has read out a line of data to Out
entry timing signal (Out to EST). It is seen
bus-set T, is line-spaced under control of this
Move signa1. It is clear from the foregoing that
that the cancel and entry timing signals start
the Move signal and the resulting line spacing
simultaneously but the entry timing sirnal outlasts the cancel signal by one AP pulse cycle. Ac- 56 of a tape storage station occur after the data
. from the tape station have been entered into the
cordingly, the conditioned entrv tubes Out En
selected electrOnic storage unit.
(Fig. 21> remain effective, after the unit has been
25. Production of SE and AE return signals.reset, and cause entry of the related data (SISeq
data) into the electronic storage unit. .
Under control of the OCO signal, 2 I-I CP (Fig.
It is clear from the foregoing that 25-2CP GO SOa) was turned (Item 22) and rendered tubes
(Fig. SOb) of a pilot unit has to be reset to ini33 and 33a conductive to reduce potentials on
tiate the cancel and entry signals for the corlines se and ae, so as to block the SE and AE
return signals to 'the main commutator. After
responding electronic storage unit. One factor
in resetting 25-2CP is the OCS signal timed by
entry of sequence data into electronic storage,
the OCO signal (Item 22). The other necessary 65 it is to be transmitted therefrom to the then open
factor is the delay si~nal FSD produced by the
side A or B of Sequence storage. At this time,
the B side is open (Item 6), so the sequence
FS delay counter in 2CP about 2 ms. after the
Forward signal. As explained in Item 24a, if the
data will be transmitted to this side. TransOCS signal should come first, electronic storage
mission will be initiated by an AE return signal,
reset and entry still will await the forward delay 70 produced upon the return of high potential to
line ae.
signal FSD. If the forward delay signal FSD
should come first, electronic storage cancel and
The line se is under control of the two pilot
entry signals will await the OCS signal. In any
units (1 and 8) which are being used in conevent, resetting of 25-2CP occurs no sooner than
nection with sequence data and both of these
2AP Dulse cycles after the FSD signal, and the 75 Dilot units must have detected the termination

161

162

of the entry of sequence data. into the respective
EStree i$nQt he!lte4 (~ee +te~ J,lltl). TIle heating
electronic storage units (] and B) befaretbeUne
at tl!.e le-Int .to lilS trees i:;; not pertinent to the
se can be returned to hlgh potential. The Une
nrst run of ~equence. 'rne heating of the OC-ES
ae is under control of all the pilot units and
to lnt t.reeS ,result~ in the production of tree
will remain at reduced potential until all the 5. signals PtlO. QtlO. RtlO. TbO, UbO and VbO.
pilot units have detected completion of entries
These signals cut off tubes 1. B. II. 16, .15 and
into their respective electroniestorage units. In
IB in theblauk code .chassis BC (;pig. 78L) for
the initial situation. only the pilot units 1 and
a .reason which will pe~ade clear in the following items.
B are active. since only the entry and transmission of sequence data are under consideration. 10
Also. the al signal peate.d the A side of the
A,ccordingly. when pi1{)tunits land B have deOPI pyramid (Fig. 59) as explained in Item 16.
tected completion ·of sequence data.. entries into
Since this .pyramid.iS at zero status. trigger IBNO
ES1 and B. they will bring about the concurrent
(Fig. 7,8C) was turne4 Under control of the No
return of high potential to linesse and ae, and
Op and the SCM signals ancI is conditioning
amplifiers 3J and3S thereupon will become con- 15 2.5NO (see Item 17>.ln other words with the
ductive to produce the SE and AE return signals.
OP tree set at ze.ro, the "no operation" comThe restoration of 14-JCP, in pUot unit 1,
mutator .NO is cond.itjoned, fO),' action.
which terminates the Out to ESl entry. timing
.26P. 'J'heP spot operation.-'rlle PS signal
signal . after the P$ S~gna.,ly 23 acts through 4.
turned at tbesame t1.m.e that II-lCP was re- 2;5 and 2ii and 2&, in pa.l:allel. to produce a negastored. The next APpulse .restOl'es20 WhiCh
tiv.egoing PI signal, Also with 23 turned,
thereupon turns .9. The following AP pulse reit applies conditioning potential toa grid of 24.
stores 19 which turns .25. The next .BP pUlse
The negati.ve pi st/i:I1al go.es to all the pilot units,
restores 25. which .restores 13-ICP to terminate
including units I to a (Figs. land .80a) and
the Move ,Signal SMS7. Further. as 25 returns, 30 blank Code :pilot unit Be (fig, ·78:L). to test for
it restores 2,1-ICP (see Item. 22) to reduce the
the ~U1e selected by .3 ptlsignal from the Pb
potentials on 33 and 33.4 of pIlot unit 1. Assumbranch of theOC~:m$ t9 ·Int trees (Fig. 57).
ing similar action in pUot unit .B,lines .seand
In pilot units I to. II. ,s~gnal ,Pi cuts oft'tubes 2.
ae now return to biih potentials, and amplifiers
Fig ..S-Qe, but as none Of the signals ·Pbl t08
31 ,and 311 prodUce the negative SEand .AE signals 35 ha.t beel,) PrOd'.lCe,d, .ibe tt1.l:>es2a, Fig. 80e. are
which respectively notify the maIn commutator
not cuto;fl', so tl),!)"t none .of th.e .pilot uJ;lits reacts
that sequence data. entJ.7 and .allentries have
to signal.:PJ -In th.e:aC pilot lJnit (Fig. 78L)
signal PI cutso;ffla. ·.Element 1 already is
been completed. Signals such as AEand BE from.
the pilot units may .be referred to as pilot
cut otl', .as explained .in Item 26a, under control
signals.
40 O-f the .PbO (O·C) .groul,)dstgmLl from the OC-ES
26a.Scanning the pilot units.~While.a new
to Iut tree .(Fig.p7) . Acc.o,rdingly. 1-1a upon
line of sequence data is "beIng entered into ele.creceiving the PI.signa,lacts through 11 and :1
tronic storage. the main commutator spots.p.
to proguce ,a PPsitive .Pll!.OC si/i:na:1. This sigQ. R, '1\ U .and V ·(Figs. 78c to 78h,) act suc.cesnaJ goes to the W !3pot ('Fig.7ai) and is inverted
by4.aW t.P.8 nega,tive JlUlse which tunis 3. The·
siveIy to .scan the pIlot units for their s.election
by the pilot units selection tre.es (Figs. 54 to 4;;; ne.xt .AP pl1:1s.e .rest9reS :3 which then turns 2.
58) whicbare set in accordance with the digits
The following .liP pulse restores ~Wp:utn;leanin the 0 subfields of thepr.eced,in~ line of sewhile :When t.P-is trigger WaS .turned it applied .a
quence data. The 'preceding line Uf sequence
negativegbjng impllise to 1 whiCh produced a
data is the one which is stored, .in the present
PQsitive.going$ignal.I"lL.OCC.This·signal. which
situation• .in the A side ofsequenee storage 1md 50 occurs.about % mil. after the 'PIIJ.OC signal,
the new line of sequence data is the one whieh
goes .t.ogrids ot aU· the cqincidence tubes 24 in
is.selected by the A side according·to the at and
the .P,. Q, a., '1', tT WIld Vsppts Of the main .comS2code .numbersin thepr.eceding line of -setnut.ator(see Figll.18c .to "iSh) ; As 24Pjs th.e
quence data. The ,uew line of sequence data
on·ly one "'h' ... 's c dl·tl·"T! d t thO
t'
the
.manner
expla·m·
ed
in
Item
5.5
: ..." ~C~<.1 .0U. """,,.e a :. lS olme.' ne
·
was entered .m
PIL.'oCC Signal js eft'e~tive only on .this ~ube.
24b .in electronic storageUIiits ES1 and ESB.
causing it .to prod,l,lc~ ;:t ;negative P.OC signal.
This new ,Uneofsequence data .istp .be transThis signallums~JQQ!:.ig.7M), whiCh may be
mitted from .electr.onic .stor.age .to the other slde
c;1"Hed ,the .gate of :the Q ,spot.
B of sequence storage. Scanning is .iuitiatedby 69
When ,UQ turns. )t ~,cts t})ro,ugh ·2.5Q to prothe PS .sig·nal. ,prod:uced .concur.reIitly with.the
duce anega:tiYG.sig,n.:;t,l 0.):>.0:0 .. Thisslgnalis
OCO signal lld JR • .in ,parallel, t9 .fl J>psitj:vepulse whicl)
L'

163

164

renders the conditioned tube 25NO conductive,
pulse restores 22, causing 23 to turn. 23, turned,
causing it to tum 2INO. The next AP pulse
conditions 24 and through 2, 30 and 31, produces
restores 21NO causing it to tum 22. The followthe RI signal which cuts off I.Ia-BC (Fig. 78L).
ing AP pulse restores 22 but, meanwhile, the
II already is cut off by the Rb (OC) signal. Aclatter when turned applied a positive pulse to (; cordingly, 1'~lIa is now effective through 18
26, rendering it conductive to produce a negaand 3 to prodUce the PIL.OC signal. As before,
tive back signal OP .BS. This signal is applied
this results in a PIL.OCC signal which acts on
to the triggers 21 of spots Q, R, T, U, and V.
the conditioned tube 24R (Fig. 78e) to render
As only 2 IQ has been turned, the back signal
it conductive producing a negative signalR.OC
OP.BS restores only this trigger. Upon 21Q 10 which turns 21 T (Fig. 78j), the gate of the T
restoring, it applies a negative signal "to P"
spot of the main commutator.
(turn off P) to 23P, restoring it to terminate
As 21 T turns, it applies a positive going pulse
the P I signal and the conditioning of 24P,
to the tube 25T which prodUces the third OP.OC
thereby terminating the scanning step of the P
signal. Again this signal causes the NO comspot. The restoration of 21 Q also initiates the 15 mutator (Fig. 78c) to produce the OP.BS signal.
scanning operation of the Q spot.
This signal restores trigger 2 IT. As 2 IT restores,
It is seen from the foregoing explanation that
it emits a negative signal to R, which restores
with subfield Pb at zero, the PI signal from the
23R (Fig. 78e), terminating the R spot operation.
commutator spot acted together with the PbO
26-1. The a2 signal.-The successive oper;'
(OC) signal from the OC-ES to Int group of 20 ations of the P, Q, and R spots of the commutator
trees (Fig. 57) to cause the blank code pilot unit
in performing the OC steps have been described.
BC to produce the PIL.OC signal immediately.
In effect, these operations succe.ssively scanned
Under control of this signal, the gate trigger
the P, Q and R fields in the SI Seq portion of a·
21 Q of the Q spot was turned. When 21 Q was
sequence data line. The progress of the p, Q,
turned, it caused an OP.OC signal to be emitted, 25 and R steps was determined by which of the calto test the calculation operation control comculation control commutators ACC.C, MY.C,
mutators for conditioning. Since the "no calcuDV.C and NO was conditioned under control of
lation" commutator NO only, was conditioned,
the OPI pyramid (Fig. 59). The OP' pyramid
was heated by the ·al signal (Item 16). Now that·
it responded to this OP.OC signal to send out,
after one AP pulse cycle, an OP.BS back signal 30 the p, Q, and R commutator steps have been
which restored 21Q to terminate the OC scancompleted, the a I signal is to be terminated. The
ning step of the P spot and initiate the scannext series of steps will. be steps performed by
ning step of the Q spot. In effect, therefore, when
the T, U and V spots of the commutator with
no calculating operation is called for, the OP.OC
respect to the S2Seq portion of the line of sesignal. is followed with a minimum delay by an 35 quence data. The progress of the T, U and V
OP.BS signal which calls the next commutator
steps will be determined in accordance with the
setting of the OP2 pyramid (Fig. 59). In order
spot into operation. In brief, under the stated
to bring this OP2 pyramid into control, it will
conditions where the subfield Pb is at zero and
be heated under control of an a2 signal which
no calculating operation is called for, the P spot
operation is momentary and is followed almost 40 will be produced upon termination.of the al sigimmediately by a Q spot operation. This amounts
nal. The OP2 code number will then be read
to skipping the P sequence step.
out to determine which of the calculation control commutators is to be conditioned. The proSimilarly, under the present conditions, the
operations of the Q, R, T, U and V spots will be
duction of the a2 signal and the termination of
momentary and equivalent to skipping steps 45 the a I signal is under control of the trigger 23R
of the R spot (Fig. 78e). It will be recalled that
which follow one another in quick succession
this trigger is restored at the end of the R spot
and skip the Q, R, T, U and V sequence steps.
operation (Item 26R).
These operations will be explained briefly below.
As 23R returns. it applies a positive going im26Q. The Q spot operation.-When 21Q (Fig.
78d) is restored, it also turns 22Q. One AP pulse 50 pulse by way of a capacitor 135 to the normally
cut off tube 26 of the couple 26-26a in the R
later, 22Q is restored and turns 23Q. 23Q then
spot. rendering 26 conductive. The element 26a
IS effective to condition 24Q and also through
is normally cut off by 15R. Accordingly, upon
2Q, 3DQ and 31Q to emit a negative QI signal.
26 becoming conductive. the lock couple applies
This signal cuts off 8a-BC (Fig. 78L). Element
8 has already been cut off by the QbOCOc) sig- 55 a negative pulse to 32R which produces a positive going FR (flnish of R spot operation) signal (see Item 26a). Accordingly 8-8a pronal. The signal renders 19NO (Fig. 78c) conduces a positive impulse which through 12a and
ductive causing it to produce a negative pulse for
3 emits the PIL.OC signal. As before, this sigrestoring 18 from its previously turned condinal is utilized by the W section (Fig. 780 of
the commutator to produce the PIL.OCC signal. 60 tion (see Item 17). Accordingly. tube 25NO is
deconditioned. In short. upon the finish of the
This signal is effective to operate the conditioned
scanning of the SISeq half of the sequence data
tube 24Q (Fig. 78d) which produces the Q.OC
line. the commutator NO is deconditioned.
signal. The signal is negative and acts to turn
The positive signal FR also acts through IP
21R, the gate of the R spot. As 21 turns it
applies a positive going pulse to the tube25R 65 (Fig. 78c) to tum 5 which is the first trigger of
the Ink delay counter. In other words. the FR
which produces the second OP.OC signal. Again
signal starts the Ink delay in operation again to
the tube 25NO is rendered conductive and iniproduce the Ink signal (see Item 17). One purtiates the operation of the one AP pulse cycle
pose of the Ink signal is to test· the different
delay circuits 21 and 22. As before, the delay
circuit through 26 produces the OP.BS signal 70 commutators NO, ACC.C. DVC and MYC for conwhich restores 2 IR. As 2 IR restores it emits
ditioning by the OP I and 2 pyramids.
a negative signal to Q which restores 23Q, terThe positive signal FR also goes to the Z spot
minating the Q spot operation.
(Fig. 78k) and is inverted by 25a of this spot
26R The . .R spot operation.-Upon 21R (Fig.
to a negative going impulse which turns trigger
'18e) restoring, it also turns 22. The next AP 75 26Z. 26Z now renders 19a conductive.terminat-

9,888,878
i~g

165

the al signal (see Item 16>' Further; 2IZ
is now applying cut off potential to 21 of the
couple 21-21a. The element 2la is already cut
off under control of 3DZ. Accordingly, when 25
turns to cut OIT 21, the couple 21-21a becomes 5
effective to apply increased potential to 28 ren~
dering it conductive to produce the negative a2
signal. This signal is inverted by 2 and 8 in 9CF
(Fig. 76a) and applied to 32, 33, 34 in 9CF and to
I to a, 8 and 9 in I eCF (Fig. 76b). These tubes 10
become conductive, heating the A sides of the U,
V, and SH2 shift code combinational circuits
(F'igs. 63 and 62) and also of the OP2 pyramid
(Fig. 59). As this pyramid is set atO(), again a
No Op signal is produced (see Item 17), as a re~ 15
suIt of which UNO (Fig. 78c) is again conditioned.
26T. The T spot operation.-At the end of
Item 26R, it was explained that 21T (Fig. 7S/}
was restored, terminating the R spot operation. 20
Upon restoration of ~fT it turns 22T. The next
AP pulse restores 22T which turns 23T. With
23T turned, it conditions 24T, and serves through
2, 3D and 3,1 to produce a negative TI signal.
This signal cuts off !Sa in the Be pilot unit (Fig. 25
78L) . Element 16 alread~ is cut off by the
TbO(OC) signal (Item 26a). Accordingly, 1616a in BC now beeomesefl'ective through 12
to cut Off. 3 which again produces a PIL.OC signat As before, this signal is acted on in the W :)0
section (Fig. 78i) to produce the PIL.OCC signal whIch renders the conclitiQned tube 24T (Fig.
78/) conductive to apply n turning pulse T.OC
to 2.IU, the gate of the U spot (Fig: 7Sg). As
UU tums, it acts thrOUgh i5 to produce the 3.5
OP.OC signal. As before, tl;le condttioned NO
commutator (Fig. 78c) responds and sends baclc
an QP.BS sign. As 2lVturns, it acts through 55
25 to apply an OP.OC signal to the NO commutator (Fig. 78c) which sends back an OP.BS signal, restoring 21V. Upon 21V restoring, it emits
~ signal to U which restores. 2,3U, terminating the.
u: spot. operation.
00.
26V. Operation o/the V spot.-When2IV (Fig.
78h) restored, it turned 22V which then was re:stored by an AP pulse and thereupon turned 23:
to: cQndition 24V. Also 23 througb.2, 30; and 31
pr()duces the negative VI. signal. This. cuts off 05.
f9a (Fig. 78L)' 19 already is. cut: off unde.r control of the VbO (OC) signal crtem 26a). Accordingly, 19~19a becomes effective through 18a.
and 3 to produce the PIIi.OC signaL This'is.inverted· by the W spot (Fig. 780· to a I'IL,.OCC 70;
signal which renders the conditioned tube 24V
(Fig,78k) conductive to apply negatives1gnltl:
v;oc-to HW and·21-W (Fig; 78i). Trigger 11W;
which was turned before (see Item,. 14), is now:
reetoTed;bythe-signal ViCC. Trigger-21;iS turned' U;,

a

168

by the impulse received from 24v. The nel[t Ap
pulse restores 21W causing it to produce a nega~
tive signal "to V" for restoring UV to terminate
the V spot operation.
26-2. Commutator finish operations.-Trigger
11W (Fig. 780, upon restoration (Item 26V) ap~
plies a negative going impulse to IW which pro~
duces a positive signal FC. This is inverted by
29a in the Zspot (Fig. 78k) to a negative going·
impulse which turns trigger 30, dropping out the
a2 signal (see Item 26-1) .
Further, with 11W (Fig. 78i) restored, it cuts
off 18W, establishing one condition for start of
a next commutator run. Another condition is
established under control of an all~entry delay
signal AED which follows· the all-entry signal
AE (Item 25) by about 16.ms. As now understood, signal AE is emitted by the pilot units
when all entries into electronic· storage called for
by a line of sequence data ha.ve been completed.
One of the functions of the AE signal is to initiate operation of delay means to produce the
AEDsignaI, as described below.
The positive FC signal also is applied to tube
19a in Fig. 78c. The tube
becomes conductive and through the plate circuit of I!I applies
a negative pulse to the gate trigger 18 of the
commutator NO, restoring this triggerUtem 17)
from its previously turned condition; With 18
restored, it renders 21 conductive thereby deconditioning 25. In short, at the finish of the pres.ent commutator scanning operation. the commutator NO is deconditioned.
27. The all-entry delay signal AED.~The negative all entry-pilot: signal AE (Item 21» goes to
the X spot (Fig. 781> of the main commutator,
where the signal is amplified by IDa and 12. to
be sent out to Fig. 700 as a negative commutator
Signal AE. This commutator signal AE is in,verted by 6-ICF (Fig. 75a) to a positive. going
signal AE on wire liD. The posttive signal is'
inverted by 19 in 2CF (Fig. 7'5b) to a negative
impulse which turns 2t. %0 thereupon cuts off
26 of the loek couple 26-2.6a, making the couple
responsive to, EP pulses continually; aeting on
2Sa. Aceordingly, the lock couple now is effe.ctive, through 25 to apply negativ.e- EP phased
pulses to the ,common input-line of the prim8iry
order of the All-Entry Delay Counter.. 'This
counter includes, as its primary order, the. triggers 31, 32, 33, 34 and 35. In the now familiar
manner, at the end of the first cycle of this: order,
it turns 36 to turn 30. Thenext~ cycle restores:
30 which turns 24:. The third cycle restores 24,
causing 23 and 29< to turn. The next. EP pulse:
restores n, which turns 28. At. thiS point, 28
serves through 21' to produce a positive AED sig,nal on wire 15 L Trigger 28lis, returned: by the
next EP pulse. A fourth cycle of the· primary:
order resets 23; which restores. 36 and: turns 22.
The next BP pulse resets 22, which, restores 2.0,
ending operation of. the deRty counter.
The positive AED·signal on·wke 151 isdnverted
by 2-ICF (Fig. 75a) to a negative signal AED
called the all-entry" deray signaL This, sfgnal
goes to the W spot (Fig'.. 781} of the main commutator and acts through cascaded tubes. 20a
and 20 to restore 19 (hote Item, 14:) . .Tri'gger 19<;
now' cuts off IDa, which is another condition for
restarting the operation of the commutator. A
previously discussed' condition- is, the. cutting off
of 18 as a commutator flnsh.operationUte1l1'
26-2). When both 18 and Ula:are!a.t.cut,.otr, the
couple I B-I'8a conditions. 14W" As a; final· oondition to' restarting· the- commutatw;: 14W' willi

.Sa

2,686,612

167

168

rendered ineffective and so a. subseqUent STR
have to be rendered conductive by the turning of
commutator signal will not be produced until
trigger 23 under control of. an STRD I negative
another start key operation is effected.
signal. The first such S'rRD I signal was pro30. S entry delay signal SED.-The positive
duced (see Item 12) under control of the first
STR pulse which resulted from operation of the 5 SE signal also is inverted by 13-8CF (Fig. 75k)
start key (Item 5). Trigger 23W was turned by
to a negative going impulse which reverses 14.
the first STRD I signal and restored shortly after
Trigger 14 now cuts off 20 of couple 20-20a,
(Item 14), The next STRDI signal will be promaking the couple responsive to the applied EP
pulses. The couple now acts through I 9 to
duced after transmission of sequence data out of
electroIiic storage has taken place. Such trans- 10 apply negative pulses to the common input of
the ring of triggers 25, 26, 21, 28, and 29 of the
mission is initiated under control of the all-entry
signal AE (Item 25) and will be explained in
SE delay counter. As now understood, a first
series of five pulses operates the ring to reverse
Section 31.
28. Dropping XM and X2 and X3, X4, XS and
30, which reverses 23 and 24. The third pulse
X6.-The positive going signal AE (see preced- 15 of the second series restores 21 to turn 28 and,
ing Item 27), in addition to bringing the AE
also, to reset 23. As 23 resets, it applies a positive pulse to 21 to produce the negative SED
delay circuit (Fig. 75b) into operation, also acts
via. inverter 23-5CF (Fig. 75e) to turn 22. With
Signal on a wire 166. There is a delay of approximately 8 ms. between the SE signal (Item
22 turned, it renders 21a conductive, releasing
the couple 21-21 a, to cause deenergization of the 20 25), and the SED pulse. The SED signal will
relays XM and X2 (note Item 9), At the same
restore 10 and 22 in lCF (Fig. 75g) and 16 in
time, the turned trigger 22 cuts off 21 of couple
16 and 6CF (Fig. 75f) if these triggers are
21-21a. Since trigger 2B-5CF is now also in
turned, which is not the case at present. The
turned condition (Item 9), it is still keeping 21a
triggers 10 and 22 in lCF may be selectively
conductive, so that the lock couple does not serve. 25 turned when "late" operations are performed
(see later Section 21).
as yet to bring abOut the energization of thl'
In the now familiar manner, 24-8CF (Fig.
relays YM and Y2.
The positive AE signal on wire 150 also goes
75h) is restored and turns 18 at the end of
to 30-6CF (Fig. 75f) to be inverted to a negative
the second cycle of the ring circuit in the SE
going AE pulse on wire 152. This negative pulse 30 delay counter. A third cycle restores 18 to turn
resets la-6CP, 12 and 24 in lCF (Fig. 750 and
11. A fourth cycle r,estores 17 to turn 16
6-8CF (Fig. 75k). Accordingly, the relays X3,
which is returned by the next BP pulse and
X4, X5 and X6 are de energized (note Items
thereupon resets 14 to terminate operation of
the delay counter.
10 and 11).
29. Dropping Xl :-The negative SE pilot sig- 35
31. Transmission of sequence data from elecnal (Item 25) which in the present situation
tronic storage to sequence storage.-The negative all-entry pilot signal AE (Item 25), in
was produced by the pilot section at the same
time as the all-entry signal AE, goes to the Z
addition to its functions explained in Items 27
and 28, also initiates operation to bring about
spot (Fig. 78k) of the main commutator where
it is amplified by 5a and a to be sent out as 40 the transmission of the sequence data now in
a negative-going commutator signal SE. This
ESl and ES8 to the open side of sequence storsignal is inverted by 5-ICF (Fig. 75a) to a
age, this open side being, at present, the B side.
Referring to Fig. 78j, the AE pilot signal acts
positive SE signal on the wire 154. The positive SE signal operates 11-5CF (Fig. 75e) to turn
through tubes 10 and IOa to restore 5X, ter10. With 10 turned, it renders 9a conductive, 45 minating the commutator timing signal OCO
(Item 21> which initiated the events leading
releasing the lock couple 9-9a, as a result of
to the application by the selected pilot unit 1
which the relay XI is dropped (note Item 7>The points a of XI re-open and cease to ground
of the entry timing pulse Out to ESl to the
the A sides of the 81, and S2 pyramids (Fig.
entry tubes Out En of electronic storage unit
50), these having completed their function of
1 (see Item 24b) ~ Restoration of 5X also tercontrolling the section of the next line of se- 50 minates the PS signal (Item 21) which initiated
scanning operations (see Item 26a). Further,
quence data to go into the B side of sequence
as 5X restores, it turns lX, which through 3X
storage (see Item 8).
The SE pilot signal also operates through· 5a
and an amplifier 35-36 produces a negative
and 5 (Fig. 78k) to return 9Z which previously
signal SW. The next AP pulse restores lX,
was turned (see Item 14). With 9Z returned, 55 terminating the SW signal. Meanwhile, the
signal SW goes to 5CP (Fig. 80e) where it cuts
it deconditions 14. This prevents a stop signal,
off tube 32a of couple 32-32a. Element 32 of
which is a down signal on wire SPST, from havthis couple has already been cut off (Item 20)
ing any effect at this time in stopping the comby ground signal ICI81 through section 3 of
mutator at the end of its present run, but it
will have the effect of stopping the commutator 60 dial switch DS IS (Fig. 56), set to position 7.
Accordingly, upon 32a now being cut off by the
at the end of its next run. In otlier words,
8W signal, the couple applies increased poafter the SE signal is given, the stop signal is
tential to 39-5CP which becomes conductive and
ineffective for the present run. Trigger 11W
remains turned and conditioning 13. The next 65 cuts off 34-5CP to produce a pOSitive ICn
signal (Fig. 79c). This signal renders 21i-3CP
STR pilot signal will return 10Z which will op(Fig. 80c) conductive to turn 20-3CP and also,
erate conditioned 13 to produce a new STR
commutator Signal. The subsequent STRD I
through switch 2SQ, in seq position, to cut off
signal will turn 10Z and 9Z. Assuming that
24 of couple 24-24a in 3CP. The turned trigger
the stop signal on wire SPST is present, then 70 20-3CP cuts off 14a of couple 14-14a in 3CP.
The ICn signal initiated by the SW signal and
14Z will be conditioned and so upon 9Z being
turned it will apply increased potential to conthe ICIS signal (Item 20) has thus caused
24 and 14a in 3CP to be cut off. Element 24a
ditioned 14Z .to render 14Z conductive so as to
return IlZ. Accordingly, the means for prohas been cut off previously under control of
ducing $Ilother STR commutator signal will be 75 trigger 29 (Fig. 79c) and the presense Signal

2,,636,,672

169

SPR (Item. 23). The SPR signal as described
in Item 23, mixed with the signal PREs to
produce the signal PRE. Under control of signal PRE, trigger 30-3CP turned and caused
19 to turn, as a result of which 24a-3CP is
cut off. Under control of the later ICI signal,
24 is also cut off. When at the next BP pulse
time, 27ais cut off, the common anode line
of· 24-24a--21a rises in potential and makes
18 conduct, which turns 33. Turned 33 cuts
off 26a to produce a positive RDL signal. This
signal, through HI, turns trigger 13 to cut off
14 of couple 14-14a. Since element 14a has
also been cut off by turned 20, as explained
above, 14-14a now is effective via 1-3CP to
turn trigger 16. Trigger 16, turned, cuts off
normally conductive switch tube S-3CP to emit
a. positive pulse which causes arnplifier tubes 3
and 3A to produce the positive transmission
timing pulse ES to In (also see Figs. 21 and 22:).
In the mannel' described in Section 6, this positive pulse ES to In emitted by pilot unit 7
causes the value in electronic storage unit ES7
to be applied through the In Ex C couples and
tile In Ex tubes, as reduced digit representative
potentials upon In bus-set 7.
In the assumed example, ES7 has received
the SISeq sequence data (see Item 24b) which
are now transmitted to In bus-set 7. In the
manner described in Section 11, the SISeq data
on In bus-set 7 are entered in the then-open
A or B side of sequence storage.. At present,
the B side is open (see Item 6) since relay
BM (Fig. 36) is energized. Therefore, the SISeq
data now enter the B side of sequence storage,
and the BI relays (Fig. 37) are selectively energIzed in accordance with the SI.Seq data.
Relays BI close their contacts b (Fig. 41).
establishing the pick up circuits of relays BOP
for storing the sequence data SISeq.
While operations have been described in detail
with respect to pilot unit 1 and the SiSeq data,
It is to be understood that pilot unit a acts
similarly, under control of commutator signal
OCO, to pilot the S2Seq data into electronic
storage unit ESa and, under control of commutator signal SW, to pilot the transmission of
data from tilis storage unit to the S2Seq relay·s
131 and BOP.
The relays Dr and BOP set the B sides of the
various trees, pyramids and permutation circuits
(Figs. 4'?a to 63) according to the new, first real
line of sequence data which was obtained from
tape storage stations I and 10 of bank 1 (see
Item 8) in the assumed example.
'L'he positive RDL pulse,. which initiated the
transmission signals ES to In, occurred upon
the turning of 33. The next AP pulse returns
33, causing it to restore 29, which has served
its purpose in impressing the stored presense
signal upon 24a which Was a factor in producing the RDL signal.
it should be noted that control of a pilot unit
for piloting transmission of sequence data is by
commutator signals SW and SPR (presense).
As will be brought out in Section 17, Items 22 to
24, the control of a pilot unit for piloting transmission of data other than sequence data is by
the "3" signal of a scanning spot (see Section
16a) , thl) pre sense signal NPR, and a Back signal
from the data receiving unit.
32. The t1"la1lsmission detay.~As explained in
the preceding item, the trigger I G-3CP (Fig. SOc)
was reversed to cause the signal E5. to .In to
~ produCed for timing the transmission of the

170

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

'10

'15

50

SISeq data to the open side B of sequence storage. The reversal of the trigger 16 also,. through
2,. applies increased potential to nand 11 in 3CP.
11 has been conditioned. already by the nowreversed trigger 30-3CP (see Item 23),. Accordingly, when trigger 16 reversed to start the transmission from electronic storage and, through 2,
applied increased potential to tube i 1, this... ube
became conductive. Tube 17 then cuts off SWitch
tube i'2-3CP, which has been held conductive by
unturned II. II can be turned only upon return of 10 .. But 10 is blocked from turning (see
the end of Item 23) and hence will not have a
return action. Accordingly, II will not turn and
Will hold 12 conductive until cut off upon 17
becoming C011ductive. At that point 12 produces
a positive pulse TItS to start the 7 % ms. transmission dela.y. The pulse TRS is inverted by
1-4CP (Fig. SOd) to reverse 2-4CP whiCh thereupon cuts off Sa to render couple 8-Sa. responsive to the CP pulses continually applied to S.
The couple a-sa now acts through 1 to impress
negative pulses on the common input of triggers
f3, r4, 15, I G and 11 of the Transmission Delay Counter in 4CP. In a now familiar manner, each series of five pulses effects a cycle of
these five triggers, the trigger 17 being restored
at the end of each cycle. The first time n
restores, it reverses 18. In turn, 18 reverses 12.
The second time 11 restores, it resets 12, which
turns 6 to also turn II. The counter goesthrough a third cycle and this time n, upon
restoring, resets 6', which turns 5 and the latter
thereupon returns II. The fourth cycle of the
counter causes 11, Upon its restoration; to restore 5, which turns 4 and restores I B. The next
BP pulse restores 4. As 4 restores, it resets 2
to stop operation of the counter.
At the end of the third Cycle of the counter,
~ I was restored. Thereupon II produced a positive TRD pulse. This pUlse is inverted by rSa3CP
(Fig. SOc) to a negative pulse Which restores 16,
terminating the ES to In signal. The delay
counter in 4CP has permitted' 6 in 3CP to remain
conditioned for approximately 7 % ms. which is,
therefore, the duration of the ES to In signal.
This exceeds the time required for relay pOints,
such as those of sequence storage relays BI,
to ~hift from one position to the reversed position. To provide sufficient tolerance, 7 % ms. is
allowed for transmission of data from electronic
storage unit to a receiving unit such as sequence storage or relay storage.
33. The reset delay and pilot signals STR and

53 AT.-The positive RDL signal in conjunction
with signal IeI turned IS-3CP to produce the
ES to In Signal (see Item 30. The RDL signal
also initiates the operation of a Reset Delay
Counter in 4CP (Fig. SOd). The pulse RDL is
GO reversed by 19-4CP to turn 2O~4cp, which then
cuts off 2Sa to make the couple 2S-26a respond
to the EP pulses applied to 26. Through 25,
the couple then impresEes negative EP-phase
pulses on the common input wire of the triggers
65 31, 32, 33, 34 and 35 of the reset delay counter.
The first cycle (5EP pulses) of these triggers
produces a pulse which turns 36, which reverses
33. The second cycle restores 3i1. Upon restoration of 3D, it turns 24 which thereupon
70 turns 28. The third cycle restores 24 and 2S. As
2S restores, it produces a positive RDL #2 pulse,
which has no real function when a pilot unit is
used to pilot sequence data. When a pilot unit
is used for piloting other than sequence data,
75 trigger lO-3CP may be turned to produce a

2,686,679

171

Reset signal for resetting a relay storage unit.
The RDL #2 pulse will then cause 10 to return
(see Item 24, Section 17), When 24-4CP restores, it turns 23, which reverses 29. A fourth
cycle restores 23 and also 29. As 29 restores,
it produces a positive RDL #3 pulse. When 23
restores, it resets 36 and turns 22. The next
BP· pulse restores 22 causing it to reset 20, terminating operation of the reset delay counter.
The positive RDL #3 pulse, produced at the
end of the fourth cycle, is inverted by 34-3CP
(Fig. 80c) to a negative impulse which is applied
via a switch 3SQ, in seq position, to 15-3CP,
turning it. The next AP pulse returns 15. As
15 returns, it turns 21. A following AP pulse
returns 21, which causes the inverter 21 to
apply a negative impulse to 13, 20, and 30, restoring them.
It may be noted that the RDL #3 pulse occurs
some 20 ms. after the RDL signal, while the
transmission signal ES to In lasted some 7 Y:z ms.
(see Item 32) after the RDL signal. Accordingly, it is understood that triggers 13,20 and 30
are restored after the transmission from electronic storage has taken place. With 20 returned,
it is ready for control by the next ICI signal (Item
31) . The return of 13 conditions it for response
to the next RDL signal (Item 31). With 30 returned, it is prepared for operation upon the
production of the next PRE signal (Item 23).
Further, when 30 in each of pilot units 7 and B
restores, it returns 35 and 35a in 3CP to cut-off
condition. .None of the tubes 35 and 35a in the
other pilot units have been switched from their
normal cut-off condition. Accordingly, when 35
in pilot units 7 and B is returned to cut-off condition, the single tube 44 common to all the pilot
units becomes conductive to produce a negative
AT (all-transmission) signal. Similarly, return
of 35a in pilot units 1 and B causes common tube
45 to produce a negative STR (S transmission)
signal (see Item 12), The plate circuits of tubes
35 of all the pilot units are commoned and if
any of the tubes 35 remain conductive, then tube
44 will remain cut off and the ,AT signal will not
be produced. The plate circuits of tubes 35a of
all the pilot units also are commoned, but only
the tubes 35a of the two pilot units used in connection with sequence entry and transmission
are placed by their switches 4SQ in control of the
STR signal. At present, only pilot units 1 and B
are active and set for control of sequence data
entry and transmission. Accordingly, that pair
of tubes 35 and 35a of pilot units 7 and B which is
last cut off causes the AT and STR pilot signals
to be produced, simultaneously in the present
situation, to signal that all data and sequence
data transmissions are completed.
34. BOR.-Trigger 1X (Fig. 78j) was turned
(Item 31) to produce the SW signal which, mixed
with the ICIS signal  tlle tubes 11 ttY [8 and 2'0, fl, and 23 ih Fig.
7m;. theretJ:r heatingtlre B sides of the Q, Rand
mn shIft code- eombfnatfonaJ circuits shown in
JPIgs:. 67 IIInd 83 andalao h~ating the B Side at the
OPt: pyramId shown in :Fig. 179;
SUMMARY

To start with, the A side of sequence storage
open (Item. 1) , and the relays. AOR and. Xl
were eXl.ergized (Items. 2 and :n. The artificial
liJ:le Qf sequence was then. entered under manual
control (Item 4) into the open A side of sequence
sUlrage. After this W'a.& done, the ·star.t key
switc:lt SKS (Fig. naa} was cklsed to cause the
fil:H oommubtOT signal STR to be produced and
as a resl.llHhe relays AORe (It.em 2) and.gaterela.y
AM of ~ A side GIt sequence storage were de. energized (Item· s,).. With Eelays AOR deenergized.,. the stick. cix.cuits of. the. selected AOP relays
Wilr;e clO$ed., At the same time- the STR signal
caused the gate relflY BM of the B side of se/lUenee /itQrage. te be energized, thereby (}pening
the :B aide of seqUeIl(!e stars ire (Item 6). The
S'l'R signal also- caUl"led the relays XI to be energj{red (Item, 'n !liS' a result of. which the 8'1, 52
ltl1l1am.:iiili (Fig .. 50) wel1e heated so; as to apply the
llE12t. 1411e ef equelJ.cll' data. from . Sf, 82 selected
liIQUllees tg seleeted· Out b\.18-sets. 1 and 8 (Item 8),
Along with the application of the sequence data
t& the Olit buse8j. forward signall15. ,vere applied. to
their buses 81. Also, the SI, S2 pyramids, in the
assumed example~. se:lected and caused' en€rgization of the Move relays associated with the tape
.stCJra.ge banl~ 43 and . Under control of these signals RDL and ICI,
subsequent initiation of the operation of the 30 these pilot units produced the transmission sigTR transmission delay counter (Fig. SOd).
nals ES to In for causing the new line of seSubstantially at the same time as the Move
quence data in electronic storage units 1 and
signals were terminated, the pilot units 1 and
8 to be transmitted to the then open B side of
8 became effective to produce the SE and AE
sequence storage (Item 31>. After a transmisreturn signals Utem 25). The signal SE mani- 35 sion delay 0 which me.ans that 6 in Ub will sele<:t Out, b'llllJ>'DUd" (Fie. SIH •.
set G· 110' recelve a number. Number 2 in Us; f.ur17. A. sequence run' jar accnmutation
ther signifies. that the numb€r is to b.e h.andlOO
Assumft, that the' first real line of sequence' data
without a. change in sign., Number 552: iIt.Vr
_eeted b;y; the· S I, and.: 82. uumbers: in. the A side
calls for the number to be read out Qf:the tape
gf Hfluence.stQl'age;and. ent-ered int.o the 13 B.id.e 35 at station 10 in bank. 2 via the B· outlet of. this
(If, ssq,uemre storage'" during the first sequence
station,. and for the. tape to, be moved after the
nUl (8eettiOl'l' t6b)" oonsists. ot. the rollowing:
number has been read out.
SlSllqi
Field. V is classifi~d by 4 in Vs a~ an. In ~~d
PI Pb Pr Q&' Q/i. Qr; Ra. lUl Rr' SID. (!)pl St.
and· this number-in V$'also;indicate,sthateQ~
a' I:
om~.
2; 011 4.
1;
oao: 0; 02: 16
4.0 shift, if any, of the result is to be tJQ, t~, :right
SZSeq
and. of less than. 10: celumDS in extent.. Digjt 5
'1r~ 'I1lI T,., U.l1 Ult U,., v. Vlt v". SH~' Op2 8,2'
in:. Vb· calls. for' iii numper. to be applied: to In buti'1.
3'.
433 2
6
552: 4:
5,
m~,
0:4
02
set 5 via- eiectrenic' sto.rage Unit. 5. Code nu~r
'Ilhe I!Il.gnificance: or the code numbers is clear
15,! in Vr- represents relay storage unit 151:, which
ft:om Sections' 2'a, 7 and n and also will be .43 is, the 15th such unit in. set I.
brought 0ut in the,toUowing portions ot the: presCede. number 6 in SH2. designates the units
ent- section.
digit, of the.: denomiinatiQnal shift II.l.'ll.ount.. 'l'his,
together with the. fact that. Vs. bear.S digit; 4,meaUS
P al'Ways i~ an OUt field,. and the code numbers b:l: thlli' 1teld can fmr an amount ta be read
that the denominational shift i:s to be: 6, eoluJU)lS
out of relay storage unat8lt.e: CPr)' to· Out. bU5~;i'J to· the· rig:h.t ..
..t f( (P1}) Mld' f'ar the' amount to: be· handled
Code number 0'4 in QP2 instruets t:he machine
wiCl'1out a change lnsigft, since COde numJ).e;r
tQ' pe.rrorm: a.ccumulation with haLf co:rrectiQn of
J (P~)' designates- the; + operational: sign Osee
the result.
.
seCtion 2a-).' ..
In shor.t .. the instl'uctionsgiven by fieldfJ T~ t1.
The< Q neldis cUe;racterized as an out. fieletby ;j;, V•. 8m and.O?a are: that number.s· .from s.tlltio~
R1ml()er% in Qs: and'· this number: also indicates
I tlind 1:1t: of bank 2 be a1'>plied ,(ia. their It ano. B
Chat the amount to be read out 011- relaY' storage
QU.tlets to. Out bus-sets 3 and' i·, ~spectiyelY:; to
unit- DiU (iQr); to Out bus-set 2 (Q~) j:g: to be
be· routed thlrough electronic sto.rage units. 3, and
Jaw:IdJed' without 8 change in sign.
i to: the 'accumulator, tha:t the tape at station: fO,
The. R fIie:tc is. characteriZed, bY' 4. in its s- sub- IiO bink: 2 be advanced after the number has been
iteM. as an III field. Further; this number' in
re8i£l: out of. the tape. that: the sign of the tel;m
.R$: caIl's for a: shift. if any; til' the right of less
taken: from sta.tian [, bank 2' be changed', that
than 10. coIoams.. Cl1ld~ number oan; in Rr l'epth~ sum be shifted, by the.' liienominatiroual shUt
:resents. relay storage unht· Ola,. III entwety,
unit ft. pla,ces to. the right, that the halJl COl!l'ilCt.h.erefore,. the: R field calls for IA. result.: to be (ii, tion entry of 5 be made in the' 5th order. of the
entered. inl'elay stora.ge unit O:3C from In 1m3;..
swn. before the. denominational shift is: comset t (Rb.) with a.. denominational shift
less
pleted and' that the rounded off' result be routed
than 10· columns' to tbe right to be e1!ected .by
via,electronic storage unit 5 to relay'storage unit
*he delWmil'llttioo&! E;hift; unit: (Section 1ak
15:1:..
The code number 0 in S'H I: siguifiesthat the 7:0
Code number 02 in 82 together with the pl'ug_
units; place: cUgit of' the denomlnat1onal IJhift
gihg given in Seetion};6b, Item S, selects! the
.amount'. IS zerO'. Since the cocde' number 4; in
tape a;t station I'll, bank 1 as the source for the
Rsr indicates zero in. the tens pl8Jce of the de·next 828eq. data and calls fOll this tape to be
lWmtnattonal shin amount, it i~ clear that the
liitle-spaced: after the' data' has been: read out of
denominational Iltitrt· is'. tio- be zero-.
7;5 the tape.

0'

183

Reference to the summary given at the end of
Section 16b shows that after the transmission of
sequence data from electronic storage to the B
side of sequence storage, the STR pilot signal was
produced and caused the A side of sequence storage to be reopened Tl~
I;utline RTSH would be 'open and instead the
tacts Vs4j to 'output wire VIC. 'The loW :pot-e'ntiais
eircnit to the output line LTSH would b'e clOsed.
on the output lines RIC and VIC are appl.ied to
Referring to Fig.78a, j.f reduced potential were
tubes iT and 29, respecLvely, i-n ·Fig. rrBb, 'cutting 20 present 'on line 'IOSH" then tube 18 would be
, 21, 22, or 17, tespecif the 'commutator ACC:Cha'dl!leen condltioored
t!vely, causing increased ,potential to lippear en
in tIre .p~e'dirtg sequence ·run. As llodei'stoOEi,
the 'outJ;jtit line MNI. 2; 4, or 8 (alsO see section
the tlaieulatiOri 'ci)ntthl eom:me.tat&h:!iU'e~12 a.nd Fig. 27a). In the present example; the 7'0 tfveiy eOl'HUti'ooed. in the fi1.ist .naIf of :a!reQtle~
field SRI 1s blank: therefore norta of tHe lines
r\4-n aceoroing to the oodenuiil'l3er fn fieI'd OPt
ISH. 2SH, 4SH and aSH in Fig. 62 is reduced iii
an{i fa~ \e0ndifti~nW fn 'tfi!e seeo'ftdh:itlf ~t a -se..
potential. and none of the lines MN I I 2; 4; and.
ijueneenin aci:6W'1mg to. th~ cOde ntiIrt'b~r ih 'f.te}(l
is 11'lcrliased in potentia'!.
ON, At the beginnfng of 'tn-eftrst Mlf 'Mit ful'i
Ei lll!6 the code number in the B sioe of the its t5 tlI!e sIgna! SC~ cSU8esthe ;tri:~ 5f\ to
B.The .heating at bsignaltimeoftlreiB :side

.ttir&:

2,636,672

188

187

At the end of this first half of a sequence run,
the signal FR acts similarly to the signal SCM
to turn 5P. Hence, if the accumulator commutator ACC.C has been conditioned during the
second half of 'a previous sequence run, it will
be de-conditioned by the signal SCM at the beginning of the next run. If the commutator
ACC.C has been conditioned for the first half
of a sequence run, it will be de-conditioned under control of the signal FR at the end of the
first half of the run. When 5P is turned as described above, it cuts off 3a. Unless field T is
an In field, the tube 3P also will be cut-off and
when 3a is cut off, upon the turning of 5, the
couple 3-3a is effective to make 8 conductive,
causing it to produce the negative signal HCR.
This signal as previously described in Section 13
resets the half correction suppression storage
trigger 5 and the tolerance check storage trigger 22,both in Fig. 7lg. It is seen that these two
triggers are reset at the beginning of a sequence
run, under control of the signal SCM. At the
end of the first half of a sequence run, the signal
FR causes 5P (Fig. 7Sc) to turn and as a result the signal HCR again is prodUCed for resetting triggers 5, Fig. 71g, and 22, Fig. 71g. Thus,
the trigger 5, Fig. 7lg, is reset at the beginning
of each half of a commutator run, in order to
prepare this trigger to be selectively turned· or
left unturned for each h'alf of a sequence run
according to whether the codes in fields OP I and
OP2 do or do not call for suppression of half
correction to attend an accumUlation calculation.
13. The b I signal also heated the B side of the
OPI pyramid (Fig. 59), Since this pyramid is
now set at 02, cut off potential is applied to
77a, non-conductive causing the tubes 22 and
22a to become conductive. The tube 22 then
cuts 011 30, which causes tube 24 to produce
a negative ACC Code signal. This signal is sent
to tube I in the accumulator control commutator ACC.C (Fig. 78A) and cuts off the tube, which
then applies conditioning· potential to the suppressor of 2.
The OP02 signal also causes the tube 22a, Fig.
77a, to be made conductive, as described above.
Tube Ua then applies reduced potential to line
HCSw. Consequently, 30; Fig; 77b, is cut off,
causing 24 to prodUce a negative signal HCSS.
This signal cuts off 3D, Fig. 78a. Subsequently
(about ¥.l Dis. later) the signal Ink will be produced (see Item 14) and will cut off 30a. . If 30
has been cut off by the signal HCSS, then the
couple 30-30a will make 29 conduct so as to produce the· negative Signal HCS. As described in
Section 13 this signal acts through I and la in
Fig. 71g to turn 5 so as to store a half correction
suppression command with respect to the accumulating operation.
14. The signal ECM has initiated the operation
of the Ink delay in Fig. 78c as pOinted out in
Item 12. The signal Ink is produced by the Ink
delay circuit Y2 ms. after the signal SCM. The
Ink signal times the following operations:
a. The tubes 11 and 29 in Fig. 78b have been
cut 011 as a result of the R and V branches of the
In code sequence storage circuits (Fig. 61) being
set to represent the In codes in the subfields Rs
and Vs.This has resulted in the lines RIC and
VIC being reduced in potential, at b signal time,
so as to cut off the tubes 11 and 29 in Fig. 78b
(see Item 9). The Ink signal which occurs about
~ ms,la.ter cuts off ITa and 2~a. Hence, the

I)

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

couple Il-Ila acts through 18 to turn 19 caus1ng
20 to produce a positive R "in" signal. Similarly,
the couple 29-29a acts through 30 to turn 31
which causes 32 to produce the positive V "in"
signal. It is seen that the triggers 19 and 31
have been turned to store the fact that theR
and V program fieldS are In fields. These trig~
gers will not be restored until the scanning· sequence has been completed as manifested by the
signal Fe (see Section 16b, Item 26-2). The signal Fe will then render 26, Fig. 78b, conductive
causing it to return any of the triggers IS, 19,23;
21 and 31 which may have been turned to store
In conditions of the fields Q. R, T, U and V respectively.
As described above the positive signals R "in"
and V "in" were produced upon the occurrence of
the signal Ink. The signal R "in" goes to the
R spot (Fig. 78e) and renders I and la conductive. Upon I becoming conductive it turns I.
This conditiOns the R spot to perform an IC step
during which the signals R2 and R3 will be produced at sequential times as will be described.
When la is made conductive it cuts off 18. This
prevents 18 from being rendered conductive at
the end of an IC step of the preceding spotQ
(Fig. 78d). If the tube 18 were not de-conditioned under control of the signal R "in," then
if the tube 18 should receive a signal QIC from
spot Q as would be the case at the termination
of an IC step of the Q spot, the tube 18 would
be made to conduct and cause trigger 23R to
tum. Turned. 23 would act through 2 and 30
and 31 to produce the signal R I . This signal is
to be produced only if the R spot is conditioned
to perform an OC step. When a spot such as the.
R spot is not conditioned for an IC step and the:
preceding spot performs an IC step, then the
turning of 23R is effected by rendering 18 conductive in the manner described above. If the
preceding spot is performing an OC step, then
its signal, as Q.OC, turns trigger 21R. This trigger is reset by the next OP.BS signal. causing
22R to tum, which turns 23R.
The signal R "in" also renders 21R (Fig. 78e)
conductive so as to block the reversal of 23 which
otherwise might take place under control of triggers 21 and 22. The reversal of 23 would cause
the Signal R I to be produced during the scanning sequence at the end of the step of the Q
spot, and this signal is to be suppressed when
spot R is conditioned to perform an IC step.
The signal V "in" similarly acts in the V spot
(Fig; 78h) to condition this spot for an IC step
and to block its production of a VI signal.
Briefiy, the signal V "in" makes I and la in the V
spot conduct. When I is made conductive it
turns 5 which prepares the V spot to perform an
IC step. When la conducts, it de-conditions 18
so as to block the. production of a signal V I at
the termination of an IC step of the U spot if
the latter step has been called for. The signal
V "in" also renders 21V conductive to block the
turning of 23 so as to prevent the production of
the signal VI at the termination of an OC step
of theU spot should the latter be called for.
b. The signal :Ink renders the tube 5, Fig. 27b.
non-conductive to produce a positive Ink signal
as a result of which the denominational shift
amount. if any. manifested by increased potentials on the lines MN in Fig. 27a, is entered into
the descending counter of the denominational
shift unit,in the manner described in Section 12.
The positive Ink signal from tube 5, Fig.' 27b,
also renders .the conditioned tube 11. Fig. 27c

189

'191

\_ Item. U} contJucth"e so uta (cause the trigthe !3'Osittve pnot signal PiLOC. As lang :as:ttc is
... 11 1'4 be Placed in ita dght-sh1ftstatus. In
cutoff, 'it bJocks .the pilot signal ESto.Int 'wh1cib
1ilIe1]l"epara.tionfor the llrst half of the present
is the signal for timingtransntission :from the;re.
rua,mne of the lines MN bas been placed at
lated electronic storage to the Internal -Out :bus.
kll:reasedpotential :(see Item 11) and the de- 5 set (see Section6L The tube IS-ICP in a pilot
IIIlIIDding counter in Fig. ~7a,remalns atze:ro.
unit will be .cut o1I bya signalOC Int ,produced
" c.Tbe negative slgnRl Ink ,also is applied to
when this pilot unit receives a "1" 'Signal from
the scanning spot corresponding to the out ,setube JII in 'theoommutator ACC,.C {Fig. 78A)
ootting it otI so as to apply increased potential
quence field which has sleeted the llilot unit,as
tit theoontrolgrid of the previoUSly conditioned 10 will be 'described in Item 16. When the trigger
21-ICP of this p.i1ot unit Is returned, whichoctallel '(see Item 13). ,Accordingly. tube 2 becurs after entry into electronic~ora:ge has 'been
Clmes 'COlldactive and :reversestrtgger B which
effected (see Section l6b, Item 25) , the tube .lId
~ lie called. the gate ofthecommuta.tor ACe.C.
is cut off. Only then can the cuttingotI·of 'lobe
'Dle trigger 6 in tm-ned ~a.te cuts o1Itubes 4
MIIIll. TUbe 4 conditions tubes tn and H. The 15 companion tube 15 by the ·signal OC Int be
effective to caUSe thePil!OC signal and the Etc
eemmtl!tattlr ACC.C is now conditioned for opfntsignal to be produced. It is seen, then.. that
entiaD.
alillot unit selected by an Out sequence ':field
' L The Inkslgnal cuts off :3'011, Fig. 78'a. .As
will be 'conditioned, under control of a Forwllmii
30 also has been cutotratem 13)" thesig:na;l
HC.'S is produced, 'causin(~ trigger5,71g" to turn 20 signalrecelved thereby or under control '01 :&
signal OCS produced in the pilot unit at the
aDCiBtorethe lmlf COITection suppressionslgnal.
time determined by the commutator signalOCO"
lliiI:t. Trigger 13X (Fig. 78;) turned at AP pulse
toblook transmIssion .from the related electronic
titlae 110 causeslgnalSCMtobe produced (Item
storage unit to the Internal bus-sets until the
12),. "l1leuextAP pulse resets 13X which causes
IX to tIOm (see Seotion 1Gb, Item21L :9x is 25 entry of 'data from a source selected by the Out
field .has been comllleted into theelectronie .rtarN!8IDIIed !by the following AP pulse and thereupon
age unit.
tams IX and flX, which 1>l!oduce the commuThe above considerations allplY,:in the ,present
tator signals oeo and PS.
example, to llilot units t, .2, S, and 6 seleetecJ.b,150. The commutator ,signal oeD senses the
pilot units foI: ,thetrseIeet1on by the tree signals 30 Out fields 'P, Q., T, .Rnd U. With respeetto pilot
units 1 and 8, which are set to ptlotsElqtlEmce
OCO. These tree :signals cut off selected tubes
data, the signals ES to In,t are not needed and.
12...5CP (l"ig. SD-e) in tbe pilot units. In the
are not pl'oduced, since the 8e4uence data :is
P1'8SeJ1t example, tbetree signaisOCOI,2, 3 and
transmitted from the electronic stol'ageunits' J
llla.ve been lll"Odaced, at b,signal time (see ltelo
10), because fields P, Q, T and Uare Out fields 35 and 8 to sequence :storage:and not to the .Internal
bus-sets. Hence, in pilot units 1 andl, the block:..
I2Dd their SUbfie1dsb contaln digits 1,2, 3 and G,
ing ofsi'gnals ES tolnt and Pil.OC1stne1'ely
rapeettveJy. The dial switches
Sand DS2S
incidental since these signals will not be pro.~:not readjusted.and their sections I cause sigduced in any event.
nals 0001 and 8 to be produced (see Section 160,
'When trigger 25-2CP (Fig . .80b.) in:a pilot unit
ItiI!!m 2<he signals oe04 ,2, 3, G, 1 and 8 40
is reset, which occurs after this unit has pl10duced
OIlt ott the tubes 12-1CP (Fig. :.8Oe, for example)
both signalsOCS and FSD, it renders fa-ICP
tnptlotuntts 1,2, 3,6,land I, respectively. The
(Fig. BOa) conductive, causingl4-lcp and 12-tCP
collmlutator signal OCO now tlutsoffan -the tubes
to turn. Upon 22 turning, it serves throughUu
ia...&Op. 4tcordingly., couples 12-12a in ,5CP
of1l< units, 1,1, '3,6, 1, ,and 8 are effective to 45 and 4 to produce 'the cancel signal ESC. Wben t'.
is turned, i't cuts off 1. caUSing I to prodUCe the
cause the signals oes to be produced by these
negative entry Signal Out to ES. One AP pulse
pOet 'units. These pilot units also have received
eycle after 12 is .turned,it iSTesetanden&i the
FbrwaMsignals (see Items 1,2,3, 4, and 7) . If
ca.ncelsignal. Upon the return of U,itturn$
the delay signal FSD ·of such pilot unit hM been
~uced prior tG the signalOCS, it will have 50 21 which 'is reset by 'the next AP llu1se and.tlu:l.reup'on returns 14 to end the entry signal. ' .'~:re­
o.;used t~CP :(Fig. 'SOb) tG tum, and one AP
turn of 21 also causes 13 and 20 to turn. TUrned
Pulse cycle later,the suppressor ·of 32-'2CP will
13a'cts throughBand 2 to·liroduce the.'i\ega.tiive
have ~en .cOtaditioned. The signal OCS will then
f'[love signal SMS. One AP pulse cycle a.fter U
cause 32 toconduet and turn 3f which will be
returned by the next AP pulse and thereby will 55 is turned, it is reset and turns .t.The next AI"
pulse resets 19, which ,causes 25 to turn. The
met 25. Ifa pilot unit has produced the Signal
next BP pulse resets 25, ~a:usingit to retUrn U
OOSpriortotheslgnalFSD, then the signal
and .2'. . The return of f3 terminates ·the Move
OCS wlllhave caused U..:2CP to tum and 32-2CP
signal. The return ·of 21 releases ~ 5a-1 5· for
~ 'be «md'l:tioned. The .signal FSD will then act
to canse S2-2CP toeondUct,whereupon 31 will 60 operati'0nby an OC Int Signal and also re~
the pilot unIt from blocking control 'over the AE
torn. The return of 31 by the next AP pulse
return Signal. In the<:.ase of pilot units land
will cause 2& to 'be reset.
8, the return vf their triggers Z'I-tCP· al90 reWl!xerl 25..:.2CP of a pilot unit is in turned
moves theSe pilot' units frombloeking control
status, it a'cts through I Ba-ICP (Pig.SOa) to
tmn 2.-tCP. With 21-ICP turned, it renders 65 ~r theSE return signal,as weUas the AE re;.
tutn signal.
U4 eonductive to block the all-entry signal' AE
.- In the above manna-, .the pilot ·unitsl, 2; 3, 6, '1
(Seeti, Item 22). In .pilot units 1 and 8,
and B have produced the cancel signals Esci;
switches lSQ' al"e In ,seq positIons and, therefore,
1,3, 6, , and 8; the entry signals Out to ES 1,2.
tubes 3J-I Ct=' also are conductive upon the turniilg oC21-10P, thus also blocking the sequence- 70 3,6,1 and '8; and the Move Signals 8MS 1,2,3,
6,1 ,and i, respectively. Accordingly, the number
en.trY sIgnal BE.
and .sign iIi relay storage unit 111 Dare entered
,Fnttber, turned 21-ICP renders 1Sa-ICP conin ES I (Figs. 20 and 22) , the number and .sign
dlietive. NMmany, 1'S-tCP also 'is ,eonductive.
With either ISa or 15 conductive; tubes 2B and
in relay Storage unit 111 areenwred in'Est, the
D\! a~ em 6ft.: A:s'lOng'fts'HlB''Cut'oft;it Weeks 715 number and sign read out ufa IlneOft:he ta~

DB.

2;888,872

191

at statton I, bank 2 are entered iil ES3, the number and sign read out of a line of the tape at
station I 0; bank 2 are entered in ES6, the sequence data S.I Seq in relay storage unit. 0 14 are
entered in ES1, and the sequence data S2Seq are
read out of a line of the tape at station 10, bank
1 and entered in ES8. The Move signals SMS I,
SMS2 and SMSl are ine:IIective in this example
because the pilot units I, 2 and 1 are now piloting data from relay storage units. The Move
signal SMS3 is not e:IIective because the move
relay MAof bank 2 has not been energized (see
Item 3). In order to allow for reading out of
station I in bank 2 through its A station selector
to Out bus-set 3, under instructions of the sequence data, the sockets TS-GOP3 of bank 2
will have been preliminarily plugged to sockets
ASSP (see Figs. 32a, 34 and Section 9). Further,
the Move signal receiVing circuit in bank 2 and
associated with Out bus-set 3 will have had its
socket 82 of the bank 2 set TS-GOP3 plugged
to a socket AMS (see Fig. 32b). Inasmuch as
the relay MA of bank 2 has not been energized
' As a. result, Sa is cut 0:II to prepare for subsequent energization of heating relays XI (Section 16b, Item
,7') under control of ,the next STR Signal. Returned trigger 10 also renders 15 conductive, causing relays YI t() be dropped (see Section 16b,
Item 36).
15d. When all the entries into electronic storage have been completed, the negative Signal AE
is sent by the pilot units to the X spot (Fig. 781)
of the main commutator. In the manner described in Section 16b, Item 27, the commutator
signal AE is produced and sent to the control
frame where it ini~iates operation of the All-

'192

Entry delay counter in Fig. 75b.

,j

10

15

20

25

30

n;)

';"

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

The delay sfgnal AED is produced after about 16 ms. The
signal AED goes to the W spot (Fig. 78i) and acts
through 20a and 20 to reset 19W. .This trigger
is turned every time 15W is. returned. As explained in Section 16b, Item 39, 15W is turned.
when all three prerequisites to a new commutator
run have been satisfied. The next AP pulse resets. 15W which causes 19W to turn (also see Section 16b, Item 14) • The trigger 19W stays turned
to render IB.a conductive until one condition for
a new commutator run has been satisfied, this
condition being the signalling of completion ot
all entries into electronic storage, followed by
about 16 ms. delay, as manifested by the signal
AED. Thus, 19W, which was turned at ,the beginning of the present run, is now reset since the
mentioned one of the three conditions for a new
run has now been satisfied.
.
The AE signal also acts through 23, Fig. 75e.
to return 22. which was turned by theprevioWi
AE signal (see Section 16b, Item 28).' With 22 in
its reset status. it renders 21 conductive, as a result of which heating relays Y2 and YM are
dropped (see Section 16b, Item 36). .The return
of Ualso cuts off 2 Ia to prepare for subsequent
energization of relays X2 and XM under control
of the next STR signal.
The positive AE signal on wire 150 in the con.,.
trol frame also is inverted by 3D, Fig. 75t, to a
negative signal which this time resets 24, Fig. 75t.
18 and 30 in Fig; 75g, and 1,2 in Fig. 75h (see Item
38, Section 16b). Asa result, the heating relays
Y3, Y4, Y5 and Y6 are dropped (compare Item
28, Section 16b).
The negative AE pilot signal also acts through
tubes 4 I and 41 a in Fig. 80b to turn trigger C2,
which is returned by the next AP pulse. When
42 is turned, it cuts o:II43 to render tubes 19a.2CP, of all the pilot units, conductive. As a result, all ,the triggers l-2CP are forced back to
canceled status, This insures the reconditioning
of all the Forward signal receiving circuits (Section 16b,· Item 24a) of the pilot .units to nonreceptive status prior to the next commutator
run.
Finally, the AE signal initiates operation to end
the oeo and PS signals and to bring. about the
transmission of sequence data (see Section 16b, '
Item 31>' In brief, the pilot Signal AE'acts
through 10 and IDa in Fig. 781 to restore 5X,
which ends the oeo and PS signals. As 5X
restores, it turns lX, as a result of·which the sequence data transmission control signal SW is
produced for one AP pulse cycle. The'signal SW
is mixed in pilot units 1 and B with the cut off
signals ICISl and B. still acting on tubes 32-5CP
(Fig. 8'Oe) since dial switches DSIS ~nd DS2S
have been left in positiOns 7 and 8, respectively
(see Fig. 56) . . In the manner described in Section 16b, Item 31, the sequence dltta now in ESl
and ESB will be transmitted to the now reopened A side of sequence storage (Section 16b.
Item 35).
16. At the same time that the oeo commutator signal initiated the operations leading to the
entries being made into electronic storage of
numbers taken from sources selected by the Out
code fields and SI and S2 fields, thePS signal
initiated ,the oe step of the P spot (Fig. 78c).
In the manner explained in Section 16b, Item
26P. the PS Signal causes the P sPOt to produce
the PI signal and also to condition UP (also
see Fig. 79bb).
164. The PI signal Is eifective to cut off Ia-

~(Pflf.

194

1:93

'78L). Previously the tube 3 has been
cut off 'by tree signal 2P (see Item. 8). The PI
signal therefore renders 3-3a effective through
6l 2ta, 20 and a power amplifier and inverter 20b
to· produce. the positive operational sign signal
OPSN2. Thus, with the subfield Ps bearing code
number 2, the operational sign signal OPSN2 is
produced during the OC step of the P spot. The,
OPSN2 signal conditions tube 5, Fig. 71a, which
is in the sign mixing circuit of the accumulator
as described in &lction 13.
16b. The PI signal is also applied to the tubes
2-&CP of all the pilot units to test the pilot units
for selection by branch P of the pilot units selectlontrees OC-ESto Int (FIg. 57). With subfield
Pfj containing digit 1, the Pb trees are set at I,
'and signal Phi has been produced (Item 10).
This signal has cut off 2a-5CP of pilot unit I.
Accordingly, the PI sfgnal upon cutting off 2:"'5CP
of pilot unit I renders the couple 2-2a through
fa, I and 9 in 5CP, of this pilot unit, effective to
produce the negative signal OC Int. This signal
cuts off 15-ICP of pilot unit I. As previously
deseribed in Item 15b, the tubes 15a-ICP remain
conductive under control of trigger 21 turned
dllring the entry of data into electronic storage
and thereby blocks the ES I to In t signal and the
Pil.OC signal. After the entry and upon termination of the Move signal at a B pulse time,
trigger 21 is reset in the manner which has been
described in Item 25 of Section 16b. When 21
is: reset, it returns 15'a to cut-off status. Thus,
provided that entry into electronic storage unit
I has been completed, the cutting off of tube
t5:...ICP under control of the signal OC Int in
pllot unit I renders the couple 15-15a effective
,to render 28 and 28a conductive. Tube 28,a
thereupon .serves through 9 and 3to produce the
timing signal ES'I to Int (see Figs. 20, 21 and Section 6). This signal causes electronic storage
unit.EBI to apply decreased potentials selectively
to the buses of the Internal Out bus-set. In
this manner the. number in ESI is applied to the
Internal Out. bus-set. It should be noted that
the algebraic sign of the. number is present in
colUmn 1 of ESt and is applied to bus column 1
of ,the Ihternal Out bus'-set. The digits present
in columns 2 to 20 ofESI are applied to bus columnsllto 29 of the Internal Out bus-set. The
n1UJlber and its sign in relay storage unit 0 I 0
have now been transmitted via ESI to the Internal Out bus-set.
The decreased potentials on the Internal Out
bus,.set. are inverted by the amplifier of the electronic calculating section (Fig. 20) to ihcreased
potentials on the corresponding bus columns of
the. Internal In bus-set. At thil'; time then' the
tubes I, 2, 3 and 4 in each order of register EC
of the. accumulator section (see Figs. 69a, 69b
and 70) and the tubes 5, 6, 1 and 8 in the sign
mixing circuit. of the accumulator (see Fig. 71a)
erIe all selectively conditioned according to the
dlgits and the algebraic sign taken from electronic. storage unit I and according to the operational sign derived from Section OPSN (Fig.
7SL).
17a. As described in the preceding item, tube
2.aa:-ICP (Fig. BOa) of selected pilot unit I was
rendered conductive at a B pulse time to cause
the signal ESt to Int to be produced, ·as a result
or which the number and its sign present in ES I
were applied to the Internal bus-sets. At the
same time as 2S'a-ICP was rendered conductive,
tube 28 also be.came conductive, producing a nega~ signalPttOC. This' signal is inverted by

5

10

15

20

25

30

3G

40

45

50

55

60

65

7D

7ti

3.9; Fig; 80a, to a: positive. signal which renderS
4W (Fig. 781) conductive. Accordingly, 3W is
turned;. just as it was turned under control of
the signal Pi I.OC from blank pilot unit BC (Fig.
78L) during the first sequenced run. The next
BP pulse resets 3W, and as a result a signal
PiLOCC is sent, half an AP pulse cycle after the
ES to Int.signal, to thet.ubes 24 of all. the scan:ning spetsof·the commutator (see Item 16P, Section l!3b and Fig. 79bb). Only tube 24P (Fig.
78c) is now conditioned. and responds to the
Pi LOCC signal. so as to 'produce the signal P.OC
which turns.21Q(F1g. 73d). Upon 21Q turning,
it causes the. signal OP.OC to be produced. This
signal goes to all the calculator control commutators ACC.C, MYC, DVC and NO to test
them for conditioning according to the OP code
number. In the present example, the OPI code
number 02 has selected.ACC.C (Fig. 78A) and its
trigger G has been turned, causing 4 and 1 to be
cut. off (see Items 13 and 14c). With 4 cut off,
it. is conditioning tUbe. IO~ The OP.OC signal
makes this. tube conductive, which causes 14, 18
and 22 to turn and 26, if turned during a. previous accumulator run of sequence, to be restored.. As 14 turns, it turns 15 which acts via
12.a to produce the. negative cancel signal RCC.
Turned. 18. acts via 20 to. produce the negative
cancel signal ECC. Turned 22 serves via 20a
to produce the negative accumulator entry signal
ACC-RI. In the manner described in section 13,
dealing with the accumulator, the cancel signals
ECC and RCC reset the registers EC and RC and
the carry control triggers K (Figs. 69a, 6gb, 70
and. 73) and also the sign entry receiving triggers 5; 5, 7, and II in. Fig. 7la. One AP pulse
cycle after triggers 15: and f 3 were turned under
cO.ntrol of the OP.OC signal, an AP pulse resets
these triggers, ending the EGC and RCC cancel
signals. As 1.8 returns, it turns 17. One AP pulse
cycle later,.anAP puLse resets 17 which restores
22, ending the ACC-RI Signal. The latter signal
is thus prolonged one AP pulse cycle past the
cancel Signals and causes the number on the Internal In bus-set to be. entered in registers EC
and the operational sign and algebraic sign to
be entered in the mixing circuit (Fig. 71a) which
produces the mixed, operating Sign, aU as described in Section 13.
It may be noted that the Pil.OCC signal is
produced half an. AP pulse cycle after the occurrence of the exit signal ES I- to Int. The signals
ECC and ACG-RI are produced' one AP pulse
cycle after the 1"iLOCC signal. The ACe-RI
signal becomes. effective upon the termination of
the cancel signal EC.C. to produce the entry of
the number on thE) Internal bus-sets into the
registers EC. It is. evident. then that the effective entry into registers. EC occurs one-and-a,..
half AP pulse cycles later than the application
of the number from ele.ctronic storage to the Internal bus "sets. This gives sufficient time' for
cross-talk. to be dissipated,. i. e. for transient signals on the entry tabes for the registers EC to
die· down. In this manner, incorrect· entries a.re
avoided.
.
17b.. Wh.en22-ACC.C (Fig. 73A) is restored
to terminate the entry signal.ACG-RI, it. tUrns
2 L The next. AP pulse resets 21, causing it to
turn .25.. Turned 25. renders 29 conductive to
produ.ee the negative start signal ACC-ST which
goes to 3'6a. (.Fi;g. 71c) of the internal commutator of· the accumulator and initiates an acCllmulat0r· eycle, 'as . explained in Section 13 (also

:3,686,67:3

195

see Figs. 72 and 73). During the accumulator
cycle, the number in registers EC is transferred
to registers RC. At the end of the accumulator
cycle, the internal commutator of the accumulator produces the "cycle complete signal"
CYCPT at AP pulse time (also see Fig. 7lg).
This signal cuts oft' 28a-ACC.C (Fig. 78A). The
first effective AP pulse cuts off 28, caUSing 28-28a
to act via 29a to restore 25, terminating the
i~CC-ST start signal.
As 25 restores, it turns
26 which causes 2T also to turn. Turned 26 cuts
ot! ~4a to condition 24-24a for operation under
control of an In code signal OP.IC should this
occur next. Trigger 2T is restored by the next
AP pulse but, meanwhile, it renders 19 conductive, causing it to cut off Ta. Tube 1 is in cut-off
condition as long as the commutator ACC.C is
conditioned (see Item 14c). Accordingly, as Ta
is now cut off under control of the accumulator
cycle complete signal CYCPT, the couple 1-1a
becomes effective through 3 to produce the negative OP.BS signal. This signal, after amplification, goes to the triggers 21 of all the commutator scanning spots to restore the turned one
of these triggers. In the instant situation, 21 Q
is the one which has been turned (Item 17a)
ar..1 is now restored by the OP.BS signal. In the
manner described in Section 16b, Item 26P, the
return of 21Q causes the PI signal to terminate
which is the end of the P .OC step. The return
of 21Q also initiates the Q.OC step (see Fig.

196

trol of this signal, the P .OC step was ended and
the Q.Oc. step was initiated.
In general, after a number from a source selected by an Out field is entered into the elec5 tronic storage unit selected by the Out field,
the number is read out of the electronic, storage
unit upon the Internal Out bus-sets and a return signal Pi I.OC signal is sent to the main
, commutator. Under control of this signal, an
10 OP.OC signal is produced to cause the conditioned one of the computation control commutators MYC, DVC, ACC.C and NO to operate.
In the case of the commutator NO it sends out
an OP .BS Back signal immediately so as to
15 cause the next scanning spot to be placed in
action. In the case of the other calculation control commutators, they operate in response to
the OP .OC signal to send out cancel and entry
signals to the related calculating unit. At the
20 end of the entry signal, the operative control
commutator produces a calculation start signal
which initiates a calculation cycle. Upon completion of this cycle,· a return signal goes to the
operative calculation control commutator, caus25 ing it to produce an OP.BS Back signal for the
main commutator. This signal causes the OC
step of one scanning spot to end and the next
scanning step to be initiated. The essential distinction between the sequence produced under
30 control of the NO commutator and the other
control commutators ACC.C, MYC and DVC is
that where the NO commutator is in operation,
79bb)'
the scanning steps are successively effected with
With the end of the P I signal, the OC Int signo pause for calculations whereas when one of
nal (Item 14b) and, hence, the ESI to Int signal terminate. Accordingly, the tubes Int Ex 35 the other commutators is in operation, the scanning steps are successively effected with delay
(Fig. 21) associated with ESI return to their cutin each step dependent upon the calculation beoff status, so that the number and sign on the
ing performed.
Internal bus-sets are removed. Also, with the
19. As described in Item 17b, the trigger 21 Q
end of the P I signal, the OPSN2 signal produced
40 (Fig. 78d) was restored, at the end of the P.OC
under its control (Item la) terminates.
step, to initiate the Q.OC step. The return of
18. In recapitulation, a number and sign from
21Q turns 22Q which is restored by the next AP
relay storage unit 0 I0, selected by subfield Pr
pulse and thereupon turn 23Q. As a result, 24Q
was entered in ES I, selected by subfield Pb.
is conditioned and the QI signal produced. This
Meanwhile, the P.OC step was initiated and the
45
signal
cuts off Ta-OPSN (Fig. 7SL). Tube T
signal PI produced. This signal caused the oppreviously was cut oft' (Item S) under control
eratbnal sign 2, selected by subfield Ps to be
of the Q branch of the Operational Sign seapplied to the mixing circuit (Fig. 7la) of the
quence storage circuit (Fig. 60), the Q branch
accumulator. The signal PI also was effective
being set at 2. With T-Ta in OPSN (Fig. 7SL)
aHer entry into ESI was completed to cause
pilot unit I to produce thE' exit signal ESI to 50 cut off, it is effective via Sa, 20a, 20 and 20b to
produce the operational sign signal OPSN2
Int which caused the number and its sign to
which is applied to the sign mixing circuit (Fig.
be read out of ES I and applied to the entry
7la) of the accumUlator, as in Item 16a.
tubes of the registers EC of the accumulator.
The QI Signal also tests the pilot units, by
At the next AP pulse time after ES I was read
out, the signal Pil.OCC was emitted and caused 55 cutting oft' their tubes 3, for selection by the subfield b of the Out field Q. In the present exthe P spot to produce the P.OC signal which
ample, pilot unit 2 has been selected by code
acted through 21 Q to produce the OP .OC signumber
2 in Qb, as manifested by the signal
nal. This signal operated on conditioned comQb2 (Item 10). The signal Qb2 cuts off 3a-5CP
mutator ACC.C to cause it to produce the ECC
and RCC cancel signals and the entry signal 60 (Fig. SOe) of pilot unit 2. The QI signal now
cuts off 3-5CP of all the pilot units. As 3a-5CP
ACC-RI. Consequently, registers EC and RC
of pilot unit 2 has been cut off, the couple 3-3a
were reset, after which the number received by
in
5CP of this unit acts via 4, I and 9 in 5CP
ES I from relay storage unit 0 I 0 was entered in
of this pilot unit to produce the Signal OC Int.
EC and the sign of the number received by ESI
from this relay storage unit was mixed with the 65 This signal in pilot unit 2 is effective after entry into ES2 has been completed, as manifestoperational sign to produce the operating sign
ed by the return of 21-ICP (Fig. 80a) of this
(see Section 13). Upon termination of the enpilot unit, to cause the pilot unIt to produce the
try signal ACC-RI, the commutator ACC.C sent
signal ES2 to Int (note Item 16b). The signal
out an accumulator cycle start signal ACC-ST.
An accumulator cycle occurred during which the 70 ES2 to Int causes 'ES2 to apply the number
therein to the Internal bus-sets. In this way,
number was transferred from registers EC to
the number received by ES2 from relay storage
registers RC. At the end of the cycle the acunit 0 II (see Item 15b) is applied to the Internal
cumulator unit returned a complete signal
bus-sets.
CYCPT to the commutator ACC.C which, in reThe signal Pil.OC again is produced (see Ite~
,sponse, produced the OP.BS signal. Under cqn- ,75

f 97

I,~e~'~

i

17a), this time under control of pilot unit 2-.

Under oontrol of this signal, conditioned 24Q
(Fig. 78d) becomes conductive and produces the
Signal Q-OC (see Fig. 79bb) , turning 2 IE (Fig.
78e). Ur;on 21R turning, it produces the OP.OC 5
signal which causes conditioned tube lO-ACC.C
(Fig. 78A) to become conductive. As in Item
17a, when tube 10 becomes conductive, it turns
18 and 22, under respective control of which the
cancel signal ECC and the a~cumulator entry 10
signal ACC--RI are produced. Unlike the situation discussed in Item 17a, tube 10, when it
becomes conductive does not turn 14, since 14
is already in its turned state and has not been
reset. Accordingly, trigger 15 will not be oper- 15
ated and therefore the cancel signal RCC will
not be produced. It is evident then that after
entry of the first number of a plurality of numbel'S to be accumulated, the signal RCC is not
produced as a preliminary operation to the entry 20
of a number into the accumulator. Thus, the
number previously entered (Item 17b) in the
registers RC of the acculator remains in these
registers. It should also be noted that when
tube ID-ACC.C becomes conductive the second 25
time, it is effective to restore 26 which was
turnecl. under control of the previous accumulator cycle complete signal CYCPT (see
Item 17b). In the same manner as explained
in Item 17b, 25 again is turned, at the end of 30
the entry sig-nal ACC-RI, whereby the start signal ACC-ST is produced by commutator ACC.C
and initiates the second accumulator 'cycle (see
Figs. 72 and 73). During this accumulator
cycle, the second nt'mber which in the present <15
example is the nnmber from a source (relay storage unit 0 II) selected by the Q field, is transferred from EC to RC of the accumulator in
the manner described in Section 13. At the
end of the accumulator cycle the signal CYCPT liD
(see Fig. 71g) again is effective to cut off
28a-ACC.C (Fig. 78A). An AP pulse cuts off
28, and 28-28a then causes 25 to be reset which
results in the turning of 26 and 21. With 26
turned, it cuts off 24a. 27 stays turned for one 45
AP pulse cycle and causes the commutator
ACC.C to produce the back signal OP.BS, in the
manner explained in Item 17b. The Signal
OP.BS is effective this time to restore 21R (Fig.
78e). Upon restoration of 2 IR it terminates 50
the Q.OC step in the manner explained in Section 16b, Item 26Q. The signal Q I ends and
terminates the exit signal ES2 to Int and the
operational sign signal OPSN2. This removes
the operational sign, designated in subfield Qs, 55
from the mixing circuit in Fig. 71a and the
number, along with its sign, derived from the
source selected by subfield Qr, from the Internal
bus-sets.
At this stage of the commutator run, the num- 60
bers from the sources selected by the P and the
Q fields have been accumulated in the registers
RC of the accumulator unit.
20. The return of 2 IR also initiates the scanning step of the R spot (Fig. 78e). This will be 65
an In code step, because of the fact that field R
is an In field and has conditioned the R spot
in the manner explained in Item 14a. When
21R 15 restored, it turns 22 which is restored
by the next AP pulse, as in the OC step. But 70
this time upon restoration of 22 it is ineffective
to turn 23. This is because 23 is now being
locked in cancelled position under control of
the signal R in acting through tube 21, as de~~ed in, Item 146-;
Inasmuch as 23 fs'notT5

"198
turned, it does not produce the RI signal which
is characteristic of the ROC step, and 24R is
notoonditioned to respond to a Pi I .OOC signal.
When trigger 22R was turned, it acted through
9a to restore trigger 5 which has been turned
under control of the signal R "in." Upon the
restoration of 5, it turns 6. With 6 turned, it
serves through 10 to produce a negative OP.IC
signal. This signal is inverted by' 21lNO (Fig.
78c) to a positive OP.IC signal which renders
conditioned II-ACC.C (Fig. 78A) conductive.
Note may be taken of the fact that the OP.IC
signal is applied only to the accumulation calculation control commutator ACC.C. II-ACC.C
was conditioned previously under control of the
OP I code number 02 (see Item He). I I now
becomes conductive and turns 23 which thereupon cuts off 24. 24a has already been cut off
under control of trigger 26, turned under control of the last CYCPT'signal (Item 19); hence
24-24a becomes completely cut off at this time
and acts through 3'1 to turn 3~. Upon 3D turning, it is effective via 32 to produce the negative signal RROC. Under control of this signal
the internal commutator of the accumulator
unit functions to initiate a test of the sign of
the accumulated result~ If the sign is positive,
then, the result read signal ACC-RO and the
Proceed signal are sent out at once (see Section 13 and the upper portion of Fig. 73). If
the sign is negative, then a complement conversion cycle takes place, which is followed by
the signals ACC-RO and Proceed (see the lower
portion of Fig. 73). The Proceed signal 1scoincident with the start of the readout signal
ACC-RO. As understood from Section 13, the
signal ACC-RO causes the accumulated numbel' and its sign to be applied to the Internal
bus-sets. The Proceed signal goes to the commutator ACC.C (Fig. 78A) and operates through
36a and 36 to turn 33. The next AP pulse restores 33 causing it to turn 34 and also to reset 23. 34 is restored by the following AP pulse
and turns 35 which is itself restored by the next
AP pulse. Upon restoration of 35, it restores
3D, thus terminating the R.ROC signal. The
termination of the signal RROC causes the accumulator readout signal ACC-RO to end, as
described in Section 13. Upon the termination
of the signal ACC-RO, the accumulated result
and its sign go off the Internal bus-sets. The
return of 35 also resets 14, in order that the
cancel signal RCC may again be produced (see
Items 17a -and 19) in a new accumulation sequence run~
21. The accumulated result, and its sign, of
the numbers from sources selected by the Out
fields P and Q were applied to the Internal bussets by the signal ACC-RO produced under control of the signal R-ROC, as described. This
signal was produced by commutator ACC.C as
a result of its receiving the signal OP.IC from
the scanning spot R during its IC step. The
Proceed signal was sent, at the same time as
the, signal ACC-RO started, to the commutator
ACC.C and under control of the Proceed signal,
the scanning spot R will continue its IC step.
During the continuation of this step, the R spot
will initiate the operation of the denominational shift unit (see Section 12) to receive the
accumulated result and shift it the programmed
number of steps. The sign of the accumulated
result is not received by the denominational
shift unit per' se but is stored in special triggers'2Mantl 8M (Pig'. 78a} . Thus; when -a' nunr-

199

ber and its sign have been applied to the Internal Out bus-set and the number is to be
routed through the denominational shift unit,
the sign is stored in the special triggers and will
not be read out until the denominational shift
steps have been completed and the shifted number has been read out. It is necessary to preserve the sign during the operation of the denominational shift unit, as otherwise it would
be lost since the signal, as ACC-RO, for reading out the sign from a calculation unit is only
a brief signal which terminates before column
shifting starts. .
22. Two AP pulse cycles 'after commutator
ACC.C (Fig. 78A) received the Proceed signal,
35, Fig. 78A, was turned (see Item 20). When
35 is turned, it acts through 31 a to cut off lao
The companion element 1 has been cut off be,fore (see Item 14c) as a result of the commu,tator ACC.C having been selected and conditioned for operation. Now, when la is cut off, the
couple l-la acts through 3 to produce the negative OP.BS signal. This signal is effective to
restore trigger 6R (Fig. 78e), terminating the
oP.rc signal.
In brief review: the first OP .BS signal was
produced by the turning of 21, Fig. 78A, under
control of the first cycle complete signal CYCPT
(Item 17b) . The signal OP .BS then functioned
to return 21Q which terminated the P.OC step
and initiated the Q.OC step. Tae next signal
OP,BS was produced again by the turning of
21, Fig. 78A, under control of the second complete signal CYCPT (see Item 19) and caused return of 21R to terminate the Q.OC step and
initiate the R step. The return of 21R caused
22R to turn for one AP pulse cycle but since the
R spot has been conditioned for an IC step, 23R
does not turn upon the return oj' 22R and the
signal RI is not produced, nor is 24R conditioned
and operated later to produce a signal R.OC for
turning 21T.
When 22R was operated, in consequence of
the return of 21 R by the second OP .BS signal, it

5

10

15

20

25

30

25

4.0

~;~iC5~ig~~~S~~i~~ ~oa~~:: ~~~ ~~~~~a\~~ 45
ACC.C to apply the readout control signal R.ROC
to the accumulator unit. This initiated operations of the accumulator unit which led to its
production of the signal ACC-RO to cause the 50
accumulated result and sign to be read out to
the Internal bus-sets. Concurrently with the
accumulator unit producing the readout signal
ACC-RO, it sent the Proceed signal to commutator ACC.C. The effect of the latter signal on
the commutator was to cause the trigger 55
35-ACC.C to turn, as a result of which the signal
OP.BS again was produced. This signal did not
act, as it did before, to terminate an OC step
and initiate a next scanning step. Instead, the 60
third signal OP.BS returned GR to end the OP.IC
signal (which initiated the reading out of the
accumulated result from the accumulator unit)
and to cause the R.IC step to continue, as follows:
Upon the return of GR, it turns II R. When
IIR turns, it operates through 12 to produce 65
the negative signal CSl. This signal is effective
through 4a and 4 of the commutator spot N (Fig.
78b) to turn triggers 2N and 3N concurrently.
The next AP pulse returns 3N causing it to re- 70
verse IN. The following AP pulse restores IN
which thereupon restores 2N. Upon the reversal
of aN, it cuts off 14a. Tube 22a is also off because line 24m is at low potential under control
.9ftdgger 24M (Fig. 78a). Hence, the cutting o1f71$

of 14a, lab, causes the couple 14a-22a: t6 act
via 6N to produce the negative cancel control
signal SHCL. The trigger 2N, reversed at the
same time as 3N, causes 5N to produce the nega~
tive entry control signal SHRl. The signal SHCL
is applied to 21, Fig. 27b, of the internal commutator of the denominational shift unit. In
the manner described in Section 12, this signal
SHCL operates to produce the signal ACL, which
applies a capacitatively fed resetting impulse, to
each of the triggers ASH (Fig. 24) in the shift
columns. The negative entry control signal
SHRI acts via 25a, 25 and P25 in Fig. 27b to produce the positive entry signal SHRI, which is
applied ,to tubes IT in the shift columns. These
tubes are already selectively conditioned according to the accumulated result applied to the Internal bus-sets under control of still effective
signal ACC-RO. These conditioned tubes IT
are made conductive by the positive signal SHRI
and turn and hold turned the related triggers
ASH, blocking these triggers from being canceled
by the signal ACL. In this way, the accumu.lated
result is entered in the shift columns.
The signal SHCL also initiates the operation
of the SHC cancel circuit in Fig. 27c. The signal
SHCL also is operative through tubes 4a and 4
in Fig. 78a to apply a negative capacitatively fed
cancel impulse to the triggers 2M and GM.
The negative signal SHRI, concurrent with signal SHCL, also operates via 8M (Fig. 78a) to apply
increased potential to the control grids of 3M
and 1M. One of these is conditioned according to the result sign represented in Internal
bus column I. If the sign is +, then bus 2
of column 1 of the Internal in bus-set is at high
potential and conditioning 1, but if the sign is
-, then bus I of this column is at increased potential and is conditioning 3. Whichever one
of the tubes 3 and 1 is conditioned, becomes conductive under control of signal SHRI and reverses its connected one of triggers 2 and G and
blocks cancellation of the reverse trigger by the
momentary impulse derived from the Signal
SHCL. Trigger 2 may thus store the - sign, or
trigger 6 the + sign, of the accumulated result.
It is to be noted that the entry control signal
SHRI and the cancel control signal SHCL start
concurrently at a time determined by the turning of trigger 35, Fig. 78A. One AP pulse cycle
later 35 is reset, causing the signal R.ROC to end
and thereby end the signal ACC-RO as described
before. Thus, one AP pulse cycle after start of
signals SHCL and SI-IRI the accumulated result
and sign are removed from the Internal buses.
The signal SHRI thus has one AP pulse cycle
entry time for causing the accumulated result
and the sign to be entered into the shift column and sign storage triggers. This is sumcient because the effect of signal SHCL is momentary inasmuch as it is appled through capacty couplings to the entry receiving and storage
triggers, while the effect of the signal SHRI is
more lasting because it is applied through direct
coupling to the entry receiving triggers. Also,
it should be noted that the entry signal SHRl
is produced two AP pulse cycles after the number
and its sign are applied to the Internal bus-sets
under control of the signal ACC-RO. This allows
suffiCient time for cross-talk and tranSients to
disappear before the actual entry of the sign
and number is effected under control of the signal SHRI.
The signal SHRI renders Sa, Fig. 78a, non-

2,888;8'72.

201

202

coPductive. Upon termination· of this signal 8a
mutator ACC.C (Fig. 78A) may be de-condlr.eturns to. conductive condition and applies a
tioned and the instructions read out from the
negative, turning impulse to· trigger 13M, which
SH I and R shift· code sequence storage circuits
is restored by the next AP pulse. During its
and from the OP I pyramid may be discarded.
turned status 13M, acts through 12. to produce the 5 In other words, the heating, under control of
negative signal SHS which, as described in Secthe signal b I, of the OP I pyramid and the SHI
tion 12, acts upon, 5, Fig. 27c, to cause the denomiand Q and R shift. code circuits may be terminational shift unit to perform the number of
nated. Also, preparation may now be made. for
shift steps determined by the shift program and
tlie heating of the B side of the OP2 pyramid
entered into' the descending counter. (Fig. 27a) 10 and the B sides of the SH2 and U and V shift
as described in Item 12a. At present" the shift
code sequence storage circuits.
program is the one determined by the subfield Rs
The above results are accomplished under conand the field SH I and, in the example, calls for
trol of the signal FR which is this time p~ozero shif.t.
duced in consequence of the restoration of IIR
When trigger 13M (,Fig. 78a) is turned, in 15 (Fig. 78e). This trigger IIR was restored about
a;ddjtion t{) causing the start signal SHS to be
one AP pulse cycle after the accumulated result
produced, it acts through 20 and 15 to produce
and its sign were read out from the denominathe' positive signal CTLR. This signal acts as
tional shift unit and the sign storage triggers
described in Sec.tion 13 to cause the sign storage
to the Internal bus-sets. Upon IIR restoring,
trigger 20, Fig. 71b, the trigger 23, Fig. 71b, the 20 it turns I5R which thereupon makes 26a contrigger II, Fig. 71t, and the trigger 35, Fig. 71t,
ductive so as to. cut off 32 which produces the
to be restored (also see Figs. 73 and 74).
PQsitive signal FR.
.
. When the denominational shift. unit has comSignal FR acts through IP (Fig; 78c) to turn·
pleted its allotted number of shift steps, it pro5P which is. the first trigger in the Ink delay
duces the negative complete signal SHCP (see 25 counter. Upon 5P turning it serves, as preFig. 27b and Section 12). This. signal cuts off
viously described, to cause the signal HCR to'
14N (Fig; 78b), causing it to make ION conbe produced for resetting the half correction
ductive. As a result ION turns 9N. With 9N
suppression storage trigger 5, Fig. 71g, and also
turned,. it cuts off liN which becomes effective
the tolerance check storage trigger 22, Fig. 21g.
at AP pulse time when II a is cut off to render 30
When 5P is turned it makes 9P conduct so as
IDa conductive so as' to produce the negative
to decrease· the potential on the output line
signal CSRD. This signal reverses lN (Fig.
of the latter. One AP pulse cycle later 5 1"1
78b) and also 10M (Fig. 78a). The reversal of
returned and again cuts off 9, causing its output
10M is effective via 23 and 14 to produce the
line to rise in potential and produce the positive
positive signal SHRD. This is inverted by 9 35 signal ACCL. This signal makes 5, Fig. 78A,
to the negative signal SHRO which goes to 32,
conduct and thereupon restore 6-ACC.C. This
Fig. 27b, and causes the shifted number in the
terminates the conditioning: of the commutator
denominational' shift unit to be applied to the
ACC.C.
Internal' bus;..sets as described in Section 12.
The positive signal FR also is inverted by
The positive signal SHRD also is applied to the 40 25a of the Z spot (Fig. 78k) to a negative imcontrol grids of 1M and 5M (Fig. 78a). One
pulse which this time returns 26Z. Note that
of these is conditioned depending on whether
26Z was turned under control of the pn;vious
the - sign storage trigger 2M or the + sign
FR signal (see Section 16b, Item 26-0 . Upon
storage trigger 8M has been reversed. If 1M
the return of 26Z, it returns 23 to a conductive
has been conditioned, then the signal SHRD 45 status and as a result the heating control signal
causes it to apply reduced potential to bus I,
b I is terminated. At the same time restored
column 1 of the Internal Out bus-set, so as to
trigger 26 cuts. off 31 a. The tube 31 already j~
manifest the - sign. If 5 has been conditioned,
cut off under control of trigger 3D which was
then the signal SHRD causes it to apply returned by the previous finish of scanning seduced potential to bus 2 of column 1 of the In- 50 quence signal FC (see Section 16b, Item 2).
ternalOUt bus-set so as to manifest the +
Since both 3.1 and 31 a are now cut off, the tube
sign; The shifted number and its sign are now'
32 is made to conduct and produce the negative
on. the' Internal. bus-sets.
heating control signal b2. The signal b2 is inTrigger lN (Fig. 78b) was reve.rsed·. by the
verted bY'4 and 10 in Fig. 76« to a positive pulse
signal CSRD as. described' above. It is reset by 55 which makes tubes 24 to 30, and 32, 33, 34 and
the next AP pulse and causes 9N to restore and
35 in Fig. 76b conductive. Accordingly, the B
BN to turn. TUrned 8N acts via 12N' to prosides of the. OP2 pyramid and of the SH2 and
duce a positive signal CSV. This signal is inU and V shift code' sequence storage circuits
verted by 12aR (Fig. 78e) to a negative imare heated.
pulse which restores IIR which was turned when 60
Since in the assumed example the field OP2
Sa was restored under control of the last issued
bears the code number 04 which is now stored
OP.BS signal. The turning of IIR initiated the
in the B side of the OP2 pyramid, the heating
entry of the accumulated result into the shift
of the B side of this pyramid causes it to procolumns and the sign of the result into the sign
ducedecreasedpotential·on the output line OP04
storage triggers 2M and 8M in Fig. 78a. Now, 65 (see Fig~ 59). Reduced potential on line OPO"
one AP pulse cycle after the shifted result is
cuts oft.' 29, Fig, 77a, causing 28a to conduct and
applied to the Internal bus-sets, the trigger IIR
cut off 30. This results in 24 producing the
is reset.
negative signal ACe' Code. This signal, as deAtthis stage, the.calculation instruction stored
scribed before in Item 13, prepares the comin the B side of the OPI pyramid (Fig. 59) and 70. mutator. ACe.c (Fig; 78A) to be conditioned
the shift instructions stored in the B side of
about two AP· pulse cycles later by the Ink signal
the. SRI sequence storage' circuit (Fig. 62) and
(also see Item 14e).
the' B side of the R shift code sequence storage
The signal HCSS. (note. Fig; 77d) is not pro ..
circuit (Fig. 63) have been. carried out. Ac"·
duced. this. time. as: it was under control of. the
cor.dinab·;. tha ~lectedQilcUlatlop:: .controLcom,.. 75paJc\!lat.iQn: ctldQ ll1UDb~r .Q,2" in field.OPf. . M-·.

13,636,679,

204

203

eordingly, the trigger 5, Fig. 71g, will remain in
its canceled status so that half correction of the
accumulated result will be effected in the manner described in section 13.
The heating of the B side of theSH2 circuit
in Fig. 62 causes the output lines 4SH and 2SH
to be reduced in potential since in the assumed
example the SH2 code number is 6. The heating
of the· B side of the V branch of the shift selection circuit shown in Fig. 63 results in reduced
potential being present on the output line RTSH,
since the code number in sub-field Vs is 4.
- The lines 2SH and 4SH, being at reduced potential, increased potential is produced on .lines
MN2 and 4 (see Figs. 78a and 27a and Item 11).
Also, reduced potential on the line RTSH causes
the line RT (see Figs. 78a and 27c) to be at increased potential. Subsequently, the Ink signal
will . cause the selected denominational shift
amount 6, as represented now by increased potentialon the lines MN2 and 4, to be entered in
the descending counter (Fig. 27a). The Ink
signal also will cause the shift direction control
trigger 21 to be placed in its right-shift status
as selected by the increased potential on the line
RT (note Item 14b).
In the foregong manner the commutator ACC.C
(Fig. 7SA) is conditioned for the second half of
the scanning sequence and the denominational
shift unit is conditioned for carrying out the
denominational shift of 6 columns to the right,
as ordered by the S2Seq portion of the sequence
line under discussion.
23a. The result of the accumulation ordered
by the S ISeq portion has been applied by the denominational shift unit to the Internal bus-sets.
The result is ready to be entered in electronic
storage and then transmitted to the selected
receiving unit.
Trigger IIR (Fig. 7Se) was reset one AP pulse
cycle after the result was applied to the Internal
bus-sets by the denominational shift units. As
IIR reset, it turned 15R. One effect of the turning of I 5R was to produce the FR signal, as described before. FUrther, 15R when it turns acts
through 3R and 32 and 33 to produce the signal
R2. This signal senses all the pilot units for
selection by the R branch of the IC-Int to ES
trees (Fig. 58). Since the heated B side of the
R branch is storing the code number 1, the signal
IRC I is being produced (Item 10m). This signal is cutting off 43a-5CP (Fig. 80e) of pilot unit
I, thus selecting this pilot unit for producing the
signal, Int to ES I, which is to bring the result
of the calculation into electronic storage unit I.
The time for producing this signal has now arrived, as manifested by the production of sensing signal R2. Signal R2 cuts off tubes 43 of
all the pilot units. Since the tube 43a of pilot
unit I also is at cut-off, couple 43-43a of this
pilot unit becomes effective through 44, 41, and
33 to produce the pilot unit negative signal IC
Int. This signal cuts off 35-ICP (Fig. 80a) of
pilot unit I. Tube 35a-ICP is cut off except
when transmission is taking place from electronic storage unit I to the In bus-set I. As
such transmission is not taking place, the tube
35a-ICP of pilot unit I is at cut-off and when
35 is cut off by the signal IC Int, the couple
35--35a becomes effective to render 30 conductive. As a result, 29 is turned and causes 23 to
turn. When 29 is turned it cuts off II which
causes 5 to produce -the negative signal Int to
ESI (see Figs; 21 and 22 and Section 6). When
23-ICP (Fig. 80a) of pilotUIiit I is turned. it

J

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

acts through 16 and 4 to produce the' positive
cancel signal ESCI. As a result of the production of these signals ESC I and Int to ES I, electronic storage unit I is canceled and the number
and sign present on the Internal bus-sets are
entered into this storage unit in the manner
described in Section 6. Trigger 23-ICP is returned by the next AP pulse, so that cancel signal
ESC I has a duration of one AP pulse cycle. When
23 returns, it turns IT. The next AP pulse returns IT, which causes 29 to return. Thus, the
entry signal Int to ESI lasts for two AP pulse
cycles.
In the present example, the number and sign
on the Internal buses are those of the accumulated result which is being applied to the Internal.
buses under control of Signals SHRO and SHRD,
as described in the preceding' item. The tubes
Int En (Fig. 21> of the electronic storage units
are now being conditioned according to this accumulated result. Two AP pulse cycles after
the signals SHRO and SHRD were issued, the
trigger 15R (Fig. 78e) was turned to cause signal
R2 to be produced. This signal, in turn, caused
the selected pilot unit I to produce the ESC I and
Int to ES I signals. The Int to ES I signal renders
the conditioned tubes Int En of electronic storage
unit ESI conductive, causing these tubes to turn
the related storage triggers and to block them
from being reset under control of the cancel
signal ESC I. As the signals ESC I and Int to
ES I were not issued until two AP pulse cycles
after the result signals were applied to the Internal buses, cross-talk ariSing from the result
signals will have died out before the signal Int
to ES f is applied to the set of tubes Out En of
electronic storage unit ES I.
When trigger 29-ICP (Fig. 80a) turned to
cause the entry signal Int to ESI to apear, it
also made 30a conductive to cause the negative
signal Pil.IC to appear. This signal made tube
40 (Fig. 80a) , common to all the pilot units, nonconductive, so as to produce the positive signal
PiLIC. The signal Pll.IC makes 12W (Fig. 780
conduct, causing it to turn IIW for one AP pulse
cycle. Upon the return of IIW, it turns lOW
for one AP pulse cycle. Upon the return of
lOW, it makes 9W conduct causing it to produce
the negative signal PlLICC. This signal is applied to the trigger 15 in each of the scanning
spots Q to V (Figs. 7Sd to h). As only the trigger
15 of spot R (Fig. 78e) is in turned condition, the
signal PiLICC is effective' only on this trigger
and restores it.
23b. The signal PiLICC was produced in the
manner described above two AP pulse cycles after .
29-ICP (Fig. Soa) was turned. Trigger 29 was
turned under control of signal R2 to initiate the
entry from the Internal buses into electronic
storage. Two AP pulse cycles later, the Signal
PiLICC restoresl5R (Fig. 7Se), ending the R2
signal and also the FR signal. The return of 15R
also turns I 6R. The next AP pulse resets 16R
but meanwhile, 16R cuts off 20a to produce a
negative signal CSF on a line common to spots
Q to V. The signal CSF is effective through Iia
and II in Fig. 7Sa to restore 10M, thereby ending
the SHRO and SHRD signals. Theaccumulated
result thus applied to the Internal buses by the
denominational shift unit is removed from these
buses two AP pulse cycles after the entry signal
Int to ESI was produced. In other words, the
accumulated result is removed at the same time
as the entry signal ends.
When 16R (Fig. 78e) was turned, it also acted'

~e8ft.ellll~,

20S

206

through' "and.al and 35, to produce the, negatiYe,
by the commutator in, iii manner: which is clearsignal'RS.
from. Section l6b, Items 21 and 38, and the. last.
The shifted. accumulated result, including its
part,of the summary in Section 16b. Briefly, in,
sign, has, now been entered, into electronic stor;..
addition to the three conditions for causing new
age unit I and is. to be transmitted therefrom to 5: aco andPS signals to be, produced and transIn bus-se.t I and thence to selected relay storage
mitted (see Item 15a). a fourth condition is necunit., 830. (see Item 5), There are three condiessary to the production of the signals SPR and
tions for transmission of data from electronic
NPR (subsequent, to the first "Artificial" line'
storage to an' In bus-set.
run). This, fourth condition is the return of the
23c. One of these conditions is the production 10: trigger 21X (Pig. 781) by an ATD signal which
~ a. commutator spot which has been condifollows by'some 16,ms. the. AT signal. This latter'
tioned for an IC step, of its~ "3" signal after ,this'
signal manifests the completion of all da tatrans-,
spOt,has produced its "2" signal. In. the present
mission called for by a program, line and. carried
example, spot, R is conditioned for an IC step
into effect during a commutator run. In the
and has produced its signal R2 to cause pilot 15; "Artificial" line comm.utator run (Section l6b),
unit I, selected by subfield Rb, to pilot the result
the signals STR and AT were produced conCUr..
on the; Internal bus-sets into. elec.tronic storage'
rently (see Section 16b, Item 33). Also, in this
unit, I. After. the entry of the result into elec"Artificial" line run SFR and NPR were pro~
tronic storage unit I. was completed, the spot R
duced prior to AT. In subsequent runs of the
produced the signal R3. Production of this sig- 20. commutator SPR and NPR are produced only
nal. satisfies one of the' conditions for transmisafter ATD resets trigger 27X, to thus evidence
sion from the storageun1t to the related In busthat all data has been transmitted. Accordingly,
such SPR and NPR signals will follow the OCO
set.
It,should be. noted that ·for the. transmission of
and PS signals. The signals SPR and NPR are
sequence data, the main commutator, under con- 25 of one AP pulse cycle duration.
trol of signal AE,. produces the signal SW (sec
With regard to th.e transmission of. the seFiis. 781 and 80e and Item.15d) which takes the
qpence data, per se, selected by the fields iSI and
place of. the "3" signal from. a commutator spot.
82 in the first "Real" line of sequence taken as
23d: Another condition for the. transmission
an example, the signal SPR. is mixed with the
of.·data from· electronic storage to an In bus~S'et 3D signals PREST and B to cause the pilot units 1
is the. production. of the signal PRE. This signal
and 8 to produce their signals PRE (see Section
is produced' by a selected pilot unit as a resuit of
l6b, Item 23). Under control of these signals
the mixing of a tree signal PRES with the comthe tubes 24a-3CP (Fig. 80c) of the pilot units 1
mutator signal NPR (in the. case of transmission
and 8. are cut off, conditioning the couples
of data other than sequence data), or the signal 35 24-21la of these pilot units to be made effective
SPR (for the transmission of sequence data).
under control of the signal SW, in. the. manner
23e. A third condition for the transmission of
described in Section 16b. Item 3l.. The transdata from electronic. storage to an In bus-set is
mission of sequence data will take. place this.
the receipt, by the. selected pilot unit, of a Back
time to the A. side of sequence storage which has
signal when the unit which has been selected to 40 been o~ened to receive sequence data (see Secreceive the transmitted result has been condition l6b, Item 35), while the B side has been
tioned to receive data from a selected In bus-set.
barred against receipt of data. The third seIn the example, relay storage unit 030 has been
quence data line, therefore, will be. transmitted
selected by subfield Rr ja
as tr-e signal SPR, is effective upon those pilot
to be conductive and via switch 2SQ in norm
units which are set with their respective switches
5-SQ (Fig. 20e) in norm position, to cut off their
position to maintain 24 (Fig. 80c) at cut-off.
This satiSfies a third condition for transmission 50 respective tubes Illa-SCP. In the example, the
under control' of pilot unit I. Similarly, relay
tree signals PRES' and 5 have been' produced
storage unit, 151 has been selected byfield V to
(Items IOe and IO!). 'I'hese signals respectively
ma'ntain tubes IS,-SCP (Fig. 80e) of pilot units
receive data from In bus-set 5 and a Back signal
is. being applied to bus BI of this bus-set. 'This
I and 5 at cut-off, and thus select these. pilot
signa;! makes 23-3CP of pilot unit 5 conductive 55; units to respond to the signalNPR. Upon this.
signal cutting off tubes Ilia-5CP, couples t6-16a
with. the result that U of. this pilot unit is cut
off.
of pilot units I and 5 become effective to produce,
It should be not.ed that in the case of transthrough tubes 15 and 13, the respective presense
mission of sequence storage a Back signal is not
signals PRE of these pilot units, These presense
received by the pilot unit selected for piloting 60 Signals, which are positive, act through 3G-3CP
such. transmission. Such pilot unit, however; has
(Fig. aoc) of pilot units I and 5 to turn their
its switch 2SQ (Fig. 80c) set in seq p,i~~Vesj.~q!i-J~·IQ~§ ap.pHed ~o the
c9n~rol ~J'.i4 9JIBT (F~¥,7fJf) " Since the spot T
the turning Qf trigger Hi I'&t ithe time ;it PJ'odlj.ce,s
the transmiBslons~gnal.The tt'lmllm~ion sij" 5 b,a.~ !J.9t beJ1.e<>n4ltiMe9 19J' all. Ipstep, the suP~
nalcannotoecur befOl'etbe lUlsets~n~J bec,a.~
pre~r 9f Ill'+' h~.s r~m!l$n~at conditioning pothe Back signal and theNPR ~sffiSe s~~al ;flre
lenti"l,. 4Wcor4j~W! at ~QZllpl~ioIl. .of tlle IC
required as Will! as the .l>CanIling .sigllal a,J, .A.'t
s~,ot tpe;R s!lOt!.~~paJ S.Ie;:: re~er!> 1ST condu.cti¥#,~ing Jt to turp J~T. Tl;1is conditions
best then" tbe Reset andtransmi&sioD..sig'nals ~af
occur simultaneously. When:it :pilotlj.nit .~s ~d l~ 241' ~tid .~l,sQ ca~ses si,¥nul '):'1 tC;l .~ produced.
to pilot sequence ~ta,tbetur.ningQf",6·to Jlf,o,.
T.~ MgAAJ;se~ ·t~ pilot ~ts,for .a ,selection
duce the transmission signal a~ts yiiL 2t9 .reI¥l~
byt~ ··or fie14· .It). tAe~~~mpl.e, the T field hf;ts
11 conductive ,which is ronc!l.itioned :jJy ,t.U~ H
s~~dpUot ,1,lPit.~. Tl.1is~e~ept~9n reslllts from
when switch 4SQ is in Seq p~iti()B. Whm tAAae
tr~ si~.Jja.l 'r.b~\(It.em l()/J,) :wPiC(hcuts·off Ga.,.,5CP
11 becomes conductive it 0ut/SQf! ~.2 ~Pr~upe 15 \Fi~ . .a..Oe) ·of p~.l~tJll»t 3. The ~ignf;tl TI now
the TItS -slgnaif{)r initie.t~tntl opev.at~n,Qf tbe
cj.l~/s .o,ff {l)e t1J,~6·~9:PQf.a:ll ~l,le pilot l,lnits ...As
7¥2IDS. transmissiQll delay 09unte.r T~ jn4CP
6~~.5C;Pofpil9t lMJ,~t 3 ~lso.i/S'9.l,l.to~, 90uple 6--.,.6.a
(Fig. BOd). At ,theendotibistTamnlssi9n~.
oJ ~l.ot ty;j.j.t, b.ec~~~tiv.EH:ia 1,1 .and 9 in
lay, the ~iliatat1ilJ'!,n
~aJ ;<':l:hl,l~ttl.!l ;p.Hot
:3·tppr9 duc e the s;ig ...
sequence data, tube U-3CP (Wig. 8Oc.~;\S ;lil9t.eppIt2,l ~ tQ J;p.t, V;o,~er ~OI);W91.Qf ..s.igp.al ES3to
ditionedbecause 5wiJ;cl;). 4SQ{)ftbls:PH~t~it
Ip,~, ..~.c!la~a re9 eived !xo,m .tapestqrage stat~oIl
is in ;norm pOSition. A~r.ding~Y",tlhetr~~i$.l.~ ,~~~ ~ .~~I;tl;o.I1lc stClr~e!lI,lit 3 (see Item
sion delay doesnot:start'sole1y UJilder .ee&trpl d 2;5 1.!W) iSAOW fl.pplie~t9 tJwln1;E!rn.!J,l]:)us-sets. ,A
the tUl'Ding of 1,6 when itinit.latest~ :tranQ~I'g.QC ,~g~ is ~lltat ~he same time to the
sion .signal. Instead, .it ,stwtll.\V~tn ~ 'r~t.J.mjl,ot
cQ.tJ;l,m:Ll-j,~r ,spot W ,(Fig. 7.8i). ·This is fQll9Wed
10-3CP iUld theterminat~o).il eOf;the .'r.es~t:s~.
qy!~~'pU.QPC~g~l ~~~1it&lP,~~.a) wp.ic~ClJ.us\l.s
The return of JQ, :a,s ,dflSOl'ibe.t:1 ~bov:e,ill etl~t.e.(l
c~d~ti9);\esl.~IITW:W· 7~f)tP::pr~)(11,l?'ltlw ,sign:;tl
when the ,coincidence t\lbe22 is made ,to con- 3.0 T.OC. The latter signal turns2JU (Fig. ·7Sg) ,
duct undertbe jaintcontr.eloJ t);)'e RDL#~
c.lJ.j.J$iJ;l.g,i,t *,0 PJ9~U.Ce lJ.nPPPC /SigI,lal: As
signal and the turning .of'f;6 'when.·it:stari~ tlJ:e
IIl:uta~9r,ACC ..C C1:'4g. 7.~A)h~s li!:g;~n beeI,l ,contransmission signal. Upon .therestor!;J,tiQnof .11
dJJ:iiQ~d~I.teIIl 2~) ,t~is ,cp'~Ijn:u~a~w respollds tp
in ,the above manner, it turns ,II. This cuts off
tlle .&ig~l OJ)'OC ~n~lprp'~l,U;:tlstJ;:\esigIla:ls ECC,
12 to produce the signal TRS for initiating'QPer- 35 ace:, ,l1J;l.d,ACC:"'~. :C,~m6eq"'1~Atly,. the' number
ationof ,thetransmissipn ,uelay cotmterTR In
a~lQ,.~IfnP.W ~AA~t .9:ntJ}e)::nt£,rnal b~ses.are
4CP. .At the end ,of tnisde!.lliy., .tn,e :pull>€ TR:O
e!1telie,c,l ;ip. ·i~ep,cYwn~!l-tor)lllit. The T:lsignal
is produced.. T.hispulse.fs .inventeg'by 4B~CP
a.l~hWl ,c~wse9. .ttIe ppel',a tim.w.9p ,s:1 to I~e apto a negative pulse w,hichjrurns J5 :and ..l1e~tor~s
plied,j;o"tlleIm.i~1l+g.. .Q~rqwt ,(;Fig.71(L). Adetaiied
~6. The restoration of .16termiQljit.ell thetr~s- 40 d.escr~ptiOl1 cOf tllese .pper,atloIlS is unnecessary
mission signal. .Thus, wh~n·a ;pilot '@it :ls :.us~.d
s.~ce1they ,~lle ;s@~4ItrJo ;tl::l9se ·90I,ltrolled ,by the
to pilot data·.other,than sequenqe,data,;tbe t.ranl!"
P.1~ign~l ~n,tw.s,~~;m\:Pl;e (n.9t.e IteJ:ris lSa,1.7a,
mission signallasts at leallt 7Y:z,ms. JOllger "th.a,n
a.n>1.1~~!),:W:,l:1en,the.jl,cc1Wlulatoroycle ·hasbeen
the Reset .signal. When ajPilot ,.unit isu~.:f.or
comPlE\tecl, ·~h.~,.qomiPu4t.or)\.¢9...C":produpes the
piloting sequence data,the ~et ,delaysmua,l 4;,) ~;na,l Q~.;aS ,w~cl).,G.~~s~s ,2 I·p to:retJIl'n, Hl;1JS
RDL#30ccurring5 ms ..,aftertl:\e Rm;~t ~elay
e~g tlleA:',QP,&~P ,~rw. ,~Qi.1~ia~~g,theV ,QC
signal RDL ;#2, ,causes J5-o,acpto tJlr:n (see .([tem
st~.J;)!ll'~rt.l¥! ~j;~rl:&.~ejJ,~l;li;l.signltlUi ~pro,.
33, Section 16b). But when a P:UQt.uui:t Cis,~
quql\d'~ncl'Gaus.e.s ...l{he·.QP~l'.aJ4on;:tt&lgn2to be a,p.for piloting o,ther data Ulan :sequenQedata,tl)e
plj~~t.o ...t.l;lej~!~~g'.circ\l~t·{Fig:'Ha).and the seswitch 3SQ is:in :nQrm positiQn:and :therefol!e :the 5.0 l~tect lPU.oJ;,W1it::!i:to··:QI':Qduge ·.tbesignal ES6 to
RDL :#3 ,pulse has :I1o.effect. 'Inst~ad J 5 -is ;turned
l;qt. '. 'r~~s ~~u.ses )t~ data "l'ooeived ;by ·electronic
concurrently with the Teturnof ll6.·at the,emLaf
st~H'~sY.nik6 ~I':Qm:tll.Pe storage.station ·1.0, :bank
the 7Y2ms. transmission . delay. 'L'rigger iU ,is
2 [Q~Ql,.15P);to d~e\~pplied ,to ,the Internal buses.
reset by the next AP 'pulse and .,turns'21 which
l\no~b~nPil.GC sign.al .is'.,produced ,and ·results .in
is restol'ed by the folloWing :A:P .pulse. ·'When'~·1 5.5 the no.w~ to turn. As
21T turns it produces the third signal OP.OC 60
which caused the commutator ACC.C to produce
the signals for e1fecting the entry of the third
number into the accumulator to be accumulated
with the other two numbers in registers RC.
At the end of the third accumulator cycle the 65
commutator ACC.C is again operated to produce
the signal OP.BS which this time returns 21T,
causing the R OC step to terminate and the IC
step of the T spot to begin.
The return of 21T ends the R OC step by caus- 70
ing 23 R to return (see Section 16b, Item 26R).
Signals FR is produced by the return of '23R (see
Section 16b, Item 26-1). This signal causes the
al signal to cease and the a2 signal to appear.
Signal a2 heats the OP2 pyramid (Fig. 59). As 75

22()
this pyramid is set at 01, the signal ACC code
again is produced and applied to the commutator
ACC.C (Fig. 78A). The signal HeSS also is
produced, as before. Signal FR also turns· 5P
(Fig. 78c) to initiate the Ink signal delay.
When 5P turns, it cuts 01f 3a but since signal
T "in" is maintaining 3 conductive, the signal
HCR is not produced and does not reset the
trigger 5, Fig. 71g (Section 17, Item 12) which
remains in turned, half correction suppression
status in which it was placed for the first half
of the present scanning sequence. The reason
for blocking the Signal HCR at the beginning of
the second half of the scanning sequence, when
T is an In field is explained below.
Upon the return of 21T, it not only reset
23R to cause signal FR to appear, but it also
turned 22T to cause the turned trigger 5T to
be restored. The restoration of 5T reversed 6T,
causing signal OP.IC to appear (see Section 17,
Item 20). Since commutator ACC.C (Fig. 78M
still is conditioned at this time, it responds to
the signal OP.IC and produces the signal R.ROC.
This signal initiates the sign test of the accumulated result. If trigger 5, Fig.;71g, had been allowed to return, the sign test would have initiated
the half correction procedure described in Section 13, but this procedure is not called for when
the accumulator unit is used and T is im In field.
Signal HCR therefore is not produced in this
run when 5P (Fig. 78c) is turned by signal FR
because the positive signal T "in" is e1fective to
block the signal HCR. Trigger 5, Fig. 71g, therefore remains in turned state and suppresses the
half correction procedure.
The sign test initiated by signal R.ROC causes
signals ACC-RO and Proceed to appear at once
if the sign is positive; but if the sign is negative,
then the complement conversion procedure intervenes (Fig. 73).
The Proceed signal initiates operation of
counter 33, 34 and 35 in ACC.C (Fig. 78A) by
turning 33 (see Section 17, Item 20). The turning of 35 occurs two AP pulse cycles after the
Proceed signal. If the Proceed signal follows
the detection of a positive sign in the accumulator, the turning of 35 occurs two AP pulse cycles
after signal R.ROC which is concurrent with
signal FR, in this sequence run. If the Proceed
signal follows the complement conversion procedure, the turning of 35 occurs more than two
AP pulse cycles after signal FR. The signal
FR has initiated the operation of the Ink delay counter (Fig. 78c) by turning 5P. One AP
pulse cycle later, 5 P is returned and signal ACCL
appears (see Section 17, Item 22) and deconditions ACC.C.One AP pulse cycle later, the signal
Ink is produced. Since signal ACC Code has
since been reapplied to ACC.C, signal Ink reconditions ACC.C. The turning of 35-ACC.C
occurs at the same time or later for reasons explained above. By then ACC.C has been reconditioned, so upon the turning of 35, it produces
signal OP.BS. One AP pulse cycle later 35 is
returned and resets 14, so as to prepare ACC.C
to produce signal RCC.
The signal OP.BS this time causes 6T (Fig.
78/) to be reset and thereupon to turn liT.
Signals CSI, SHCL, SHRI and SHS are then
produced in the manner described in Section 17,
Item 22. These signals cause the accumulated
result, now applied to the Internal buses by
signal ACC-RO to be entered in the denominational shift unit, and in the sign storage triggers
2M and 6:M: iU Fi~. 78a, and the denominational

221

222

of the shift unit, the tranater of Ute Shifted"reshift unit to perform the seleeted number of
suIt to the selected electronic storage unit and
shift· steps. The denominational shift- unit then
the transmission of the result to the selected relay
produces the complete signal SHCP which goes
storage unit 122.
to the N spot (Fig. '73b)· and initiates operaThe accumulation of three numbers has been
tions leading. to production of readout signals 5
described in this section. It is evident that five
SHRO and SHRD. These signals cause the
numbers may be accumulated in a commutator
denominational shift unit and the sign storing
run by using fields P, Q. R, T and U as Out fields
triggers to apply the accumula.ted result and sign
and V as the only In field.
to the Interna.l buse&~
It should be noted that in the preceding run
One AP pulse cycle. after production of the 10
{Section 17), an accumulation called for by the
readout signals SHRD and SHRO, signal CSV
appears and returns ItT (Fig .. 'lSI}' causing 15T
S2Seq portion of the first real line of sequence
to turn. This results in productIon of signal T2.
was carried out. The accumulated result was
transmitted to relay storage unit 151. Now, in
Signal T2 renders selected couple .~45~ in 5CP
(Fig .. SOe) of pilot unit 5 effective through 44a, 15 the present run, the accumulator unit was used
41 and n to produce signal 10 Int in this pilot
to receive the number from relay storage unit
unit. AS in section 17, Item 23a~ pilot. unit 5
151 and to apply it with inverted sign to relay
then produces signals. ESCI and Int to ES5, so
storage unit 122. The result now is in both relay
that the number and sign on the Internal buses
storage units i51 and. 122, with the result sign
is entered in ES5. At this time, pilot unit. 5 20 in one being opposite the sign in the. other unit.
also causes signal Pil.IC to appear,. and. this
Thus a single quantity in a. unit may be put, by
signal is followed by signal Pil.ICC which reseveral commut:1tor runs. into a plurality of units
and the sign of the quantity may be different in
sets 15T.
Upon return of 1ST, it turns I &T for one AP
each receiving unit.
pulse cycle. The turning of 1ST causes si6'11a1 25
When a quantity in one unit is to be transmitCSF to appear and terminate the readout signals
ted, with or without column shifting, to '8 pluSHRO and SHRD, 'as in Section 17, Item 23b.
rality of units and to stand with the same sign
The turning of 16T also brings about the producin each unit, a single commutator run may be
tion of signal T:t. Assuming that selected relay
used. The next section explains such run.
storage unit 12'1 has applied a Back signal to 30
17b. InseTting result into plurality 01 units in
selected pilot unit I[ and that a presense signal
one run
has been produced, the signal T3 completes the
Suppose
the
following
line of s.equence to be
conditions for transmission of the accumulated
in sequence storage to be acted on in the present
result. with sign from ESI to relay storage unit
35 run.
121.
The accumulation .of the numbers from sources
SI8eq
selected by Out fields P, Q, and R has been comP. Pb Fr Q3 (,lD Qr Rs l>"b R. SRI OPI SI
2
010 7
2
Oll 5
3
012 0
01
01
pleted and the accumulated result has been entered in the unit selected by In field T.
S2Seq
'1'8 'fb 'fr Us Uv Ur V., Vb Vr
SH2 OP2 S2
The trigger 16T (Fig. 78j) which was turned to 40
(}
4
013 6
.5
1}l4 G
6
015 5
01
02
produce signal T3 is reset by the next A'P pulse
and turns 19T for one AP pulse cycle. The turnCode number 01 in OPI and in OP2 calls for
ing of 19T causessigllaJ. T.le to appear. Since
accumulation without half correctIon and the
the U spot (Fig. 7Sg) is not conditioned for an IC
number in OP2 also characterizes T ,as an In field,
step, 18U is conditioned to respond to signal T.lC 45 as in the preceding section.
and to tum 23U. Signal UI is produced and
In the above line of sequence, P is the only Out
causes selected pilot unit 4 to produce the signal
field~ The fields Q, R, T, U and V are In fields.
ES4 to Int, so that the number and sign which
The digit 7 in Qs not only characterizes Q as an
has been sent from selected relay storage unit
In' field but also calls for a denominational shift
151 into ES4 is now applied to the Internal buses. 50 to the left of ten places, to be effected during the
Also, the operational sign 1 is applied to the sign
first half of the commutator run. The digit 5
mixing circuit of the accumulator. A Pil.OC sigin Rs characterizes field Ras an Infield and also
na.l is produced by pilot unit 4 and is followed by
confirms the instruction given by Qs for performthe signal Pil.OCC which causes conditioned 24U
ing a shift to the left. The digit 6 in Us characto produce signal U,OC which turns 21V. As 55 terizes U as an In field and calls for a shift of
21V turns, it produces the signal OP.OC which
ten places to the right to be effected during the
causes conditioned commutator ACC.C· to issue
second half of the commutator run. The digit 6
the signals EGC. RCC, and ACC-RI, as in Secin Vs designates V as in an In field and also calls
tion 17, Item 17a. The number.derived fromsefor a shift to the right of ten places. The digit
lected storage unit 151, and now on the Internal 60 5 in SH2 calls for a shift of five places. The total
buses is entered in registers EC (Fig. 70) and the
shift to be effected during the second half of the
commutator run is therefore fifteen places to the
sign of the number is entered in the sign mixing
right.
circuit to be mixed with the opera,tlonal sign.
Briefly interpreted, the above line calls fol' a
Commutator ACC.G then produces signal ACCST and an accumulator cycle ensues in which the 65 number from relay storage unit 0 I 0 to be transferred. by way of the accumulator, to the denomitrue number or its complement is transferred
national shift unit to be shifted; during the first
from EC to RC depending on whether the mixed
half of the run. ten places to the left and then
sign is
or - (see section 13). The cycle comsame number transmitted. to both the relay storplete signal is given and causes AGC.C to produce signal OP.BS which, this time, resets 21 V. 70 age units Of land 0 j 2. During the second half
of the run, the number in the denominational
Since the V spot is conditioned for an IC step.
shift unit is to be shifted fifteen places to the
the return of 2 IV causes 5V to reset. Just as in
right and then transmitted to. each respectively
Section 17, Item 26, the V IC step controls the
of the relay storage units 013, 014 and OIB.
transfer of the accumulated result to the denomiOnIy operations ,which. are of particular connational shift unit, the initiation of operations 7fi

+

2,638;872

223

cern to an understanding of the present run will
be described here in detail.
The manner in which the pilot units are selected, and relay storage units are conditioned
to send and receive quantities is described in 5
preceding sections and need not be re-explained.
The manner in which the commutator spots
Q, R, T, U and V are conditioned for IC steps
is also clear from Section 11, Items 9 and Ua
and from Section 17a.
10
The manner in which the denominational shift
unit is conditioned for performing a shift to the
left and the manner in which the shift amount
of 10 is designated on the lines MN (Fig. 78a
and Fig. 77a) are clear from Section 17, Item 11. 15
The commutator ACC.C (Fig. 78A) is conditioned in the same way as described in the preceding section.
Just as in Section 17, Item 1 and 15b, the signal OCO and the Forward signal combine to 20
cause the selected pilot unit I to pilot the quantity
from selected relay storage unit 010 into ESI.
The OC step of the P spot (Fig. 78c) occurs
and the signal P I acts as in Section 17, Item
16b, to cause the quantity in ESI to be applied 25
to the Internal buses.. The Pil.OC signal is given
and turns 21Q (Fig. 78d), as in Section 17, Item
17a. This produces signal OP.OC to initiate operation of commutator ACC.C (Fig. 78A) for
bringing the quantity on the Internal buses into 30
the accumulator unit and causing the accumulator cycle to ensue.
Briefly, the signal OP.OC causes conditioned
10-ACC.C to conduct and turn 14, 18 and 22
and to return 26 which has been left turned by :\;5
a previous run of accumulator sequence (see, for
instance, Section 17, Items 17 a, 19 and 20). The
return of 14 effects reversal of 15 so that the
signal RCC is produced. The turning of 18
serves to produce the signal ECC. The turning 40
of 22 causes the signal ACC-RI to be produced.
The next AP pulse resets 18, turning 11. The
following AP pulse returns 11 in order to reset
22. Upon 22 being reset it turns 21. The next
AP pulse resets 21 causing it to turn 25. Upon 4;5
25 being returned it produces the start signal
ACC-ST. The signals RCC and ECC via 111
and 11 e and 11 a cancel the registers RC and EC
(Fig. 70). The signal ACC-RI causes the quantity now on the Internal buses to be entered 50
into registers EC. The signal ACC-ST initiates
an accumulator cycle during which the number is transferred from EC to RC. At the end of
the accumulator cycle the signal CYCPT goes to
ACC.C (Fig. 78A) and renders 28-28a effective 55
to operate at AP pulse time to restore 25,-ending
the signal ACC-ST. The return of 25 turns 26
which causes 21 to turn and produce the signal OP.BS.
This signal via Figs. 78c and 78d returns 21Q60
(Fig. 78d) so as to end the P OC step and
initiate the Q IC step. Briefly, the return of
21Q causes 22 to tum for one AP pulse cycle.
Upon return of 22 it restores 5 which causes 6
to turn. The turning of 6 produces the signal 65
OP.IC which renders conditioned II-ACC.C (Fig.
78A) conductive to reverse 23. Reversed 23 cuts
off 24. As tube 24a is still cut off under control
of 26 turned by the signal CYCPT given during
the P OC step, the couple 24-Ua becomes effec- 70
tive, to tum 30 so as to produce the signal R.ROC.
Under control of this signal the accumulator
unit functions to produce the signals ACC-RO
and the Proceed signal. The quantity in the
accumulator unit is now applied to the Internal 75

224
buses. The proceed signal initiates the operation of the counter 33, 34 and 35 in commutator
ACC.C. When trigger 35-ACC.C turns it causes
the signal OP.BS to be produced (see Section 17,
Item 22). One AP pulse cycle later 35 returns
and resets 14 and 30. The resetting of 30 ends
the R.ROC signal. The resetting of 14 allows
signal RCC to be produced when a next accumulating sequence is called for. The return of 14
also has a special function in the present run,
as will be made clear.
The signal OP.BS which was· produced when
35-ACC.C turned is effective to restore 6Q,
causing it to turn IIQ (Fig. 7M).
Briefly, the turning of IIQ causes signal CSI
to appear. This turns 2N and 3N in Fig. 78b.
3N is returned by the next AP pulse and turns
IN which is reset by· the next AP pulse and restores 2N. When 2N is turned, it causes signal SHRIto appear and enter the number, now
being applied to the Inter]:lal buses under control of signal ACC-RO, into the denominational
shift unit. The signal SHRI also causes the
sign of the number to be stored in 2M or 6M in
Fig. 78a. 3N (Fig. 78b) was turned at the same
time as 2N and cut off 14a. Tube 22N also is
at cut-off and 14a-22N now functions to cause
signal SHCLto appear. This signal resets that
sign storage trigger 2M or 6M which is not being
held turned under control of the conducting one
of the tubes 3M and 1M. The signal SHCL also
causes the instantaneous signal ACL to appear
and reset those triggers ASH (Fig. 24) which are
not being held turned under control of the conductive input tubes IT. Thus, the number and
its sign have been read out of the accumulator,
the number has been entered in the denominational shift unit, and the sign· has been stored
in 8M or 2M (Fig. 78a).
When 2N (Fig. 78b) returns, it ends signal
SHRI. This allows Sa, Fig. 78a, to turn 13M
for one AP pulse cycle, giving the signal SHS.
The denominational shift unit now shifts the
number ten places to the left, as instructed by
the shift amount 10 in the descending counter
(Fig. 27a) and by the left-shift status of 21,
Fig. 27c. For each step of shift, the number in
the descending counter is reduced by 1, as described in Section 12. In the present case, the
descending counter is brought to zero status
at the tenth and last step. Upon completion of
the shift, signal SHCP is produced by the denominational shift unit. Under control of this
signal,9N (Fig. 78b) is turned to cause the signal
CSRD to appear at AP pulse time. This signal
turns 1N and 10M. Turned 10M produces signals SHRD and SHRO, as described in Section
17, Item 22. Signals SHRO and SHRD cause
the shifted amount and its sign to be applied
to the Internal buses. 1N is restored after one
AP pulse cycle and causes aN to turn for one
AP pulse cycle. Turning of 8N produces the
signal CSV which restores IIQ, causing 15Q to
turn, whereupon signal Q2 appears. The selected pilot unit 2 is controlled by this signal
to produce signals Int to ES2 and ESC2, so
that the shifted number and its sign now on
the Internal buses are applied to ES2, in a manner clear from Section 17, Item 23a. The signal Pil.IC appears and is followed by signal
Pil.ICC which resets 15Q, causing 15Q to turn
for one AP pulse cycle. As 16Q turns, it produces signals Q3 and CSF. Signal CSF resets
10M to end the signals SHRD and SHRO. Signal Q3 causes selected pilot unit 2 to pilot the

225

226

QUanttt:v (lncl11diDg sign) !rom ES2 to. ·selected

WQuldbe tranmnitted to the. unit (812) selected
relay storage Wltt UJ,- in a manner eXplained
by subfield Rr. If the signal SHCL.werenotsup..
m Section 17,_ Item 24.
pressed and. the signal ACC-RO were suppressed.
then the shift unit. would be. elearedand anum.·
In brief, the quantity from relay storage unit
I';D has been passed .through the accumulator i.i ber would not enter the 13hift· unit~ If the signa.l
SBCL were. suppressed and the signal ACC-RO
unit and then 1llto the denominational shift· unit
were not suppressed, then the number from the
where it has been shifted ten. places to the left,
accumulator unit would enter the shift unit and
after whIch the shifted number anQ its.sign were
mix with the shifted number to produce a hap'transmitted to relay storage unit DII.
U);)on the return ofl SQ,. it turns 19Q;for one 10 hazard number. It. is seen, therefore, thatbot.h
the cancel signal SBCL and the readout signal
AP pulse cycle" When 1'9Q twns, it causa- poslu:ve signal Q.IC. to appear. This .sigl'lal acts ACC-RO must be suppressed when the R ICstep
follows a Q IC step.
Utrough 9R (Pig; 78e) to reset 5R. Note that in
The R Ie step W1IiS initiated by the. return of
\he scanning .sequence coveredln Section 17, 5R
.... reset under control of the signal Q.OC ,(see LJ 5R (Fig. 78e). Upon the return of 5R, it turned
6R,as a result of which the. signal OF.IC is proSection 17, Item 2(}). The return of 5Blniti'ates
duced. This signal causes II-ACC.C (Fig. 78A)
the Ie stepo! the R spot~
to turn 23 which cuts off 24.. The. trigger 2& still
It Is 'Seen that the R IC step is tooecur il'lthis
is in turned status, having been set.:in this status
l!tln, directly after the Q IC .step. During the
Q.Ie step a signal R.ROC wuprodueed by ACC.C :W under .control oCthe signal CYCPT; last given
during the. P OC step. Since a signal OP.CC bas
(Fig. 78A). This signal initiated operation of
not fallowed, H.has remained in tumed state and
:&he accumUlator unit to produce. the signals

ACC-RO and Proceed. Under control of signal
.ACC-aO the number in 1I1e accumulator unit

was -readout to the Internal buses. The.Proceed

~J

signal initiated operation of ACC.C to produce
thesiBnal OP.BS and to resett4-ACC,C. The
a1gDal OP.BSmltia.tedoperat1ons for producing
b slllZQlJ,a SHRI and SBeL fotlow.ed by the mgmal; SltS. AcconliJlgly, the nmnber from the _RC- ~o
4UIIltdlltmr unit which was being -applied to the
'lDtemalbtJEeS Ul'1der control ofsigrml ACC-RO
wu entered: into the. denominational lihiftunit
aid the nmnbeir was then shifted ten places to
ttbe left. Attthe enddif the sbiftthe .descending ~
-co1.Dter (Fig.'lJlI1.) w&sstepped back to O. At
eompleticm of the sbift :theSl.gnalSBCPinitiated
-eperatiol:ls for.ca-usimg- the slUfted number to be
.rea.d out of ,tire cShUtunit,after which. it .wa.z;
frllDllm.it£ed to the sdtlcted relay storage unit OJ.I .40
'Ehe Q.IC step ended and the R .IC stepw8S
initiated. It is desired in this run to. transmit
the same number from the accumulator 'unit,
.ner it lms been shifted ten places to the left,
into relay storage unit 0 I 2 d'Uring the R IC step 4..,
8$ well as into relay storage unitef (during the
.Q IC lltep. It is not possible,hQwever.to fonow
thesa.meprocedure forshiftlng the Dwnberfrom
tbe'8.conmulatordur-iDg theR Ie step as.'W8SIOl~wed .during -the·Q Ie step, and which procedure
:in_va ,the clearlngufthe denominationa! :shift 50
unit, the entry of the number .from thea1:cummatar:into the shUt unit. and the performance by
t.:be Bbift unit'lf a .shift of ten places as dir.ected
by the shift value 10 in the deseendlngcounter
eng" 27aJ. This procedure cannot be :fonowed 55
during the R .lC step becall5e the .descending
oounter has deseendedto 0 status as a 'result of
the shif·t .effected during the Q Ie step.Therefore, in the RIC .atep, when it follows the Q IC (;0
step, it is necessa.ry to retain the previously shifte6t n\lDlber in the denominational shift unit and
to .transmit this shifted number from the shift
unit into the receiving unit (~.12) selected by the
sUbfleld·Rr. In order to reta1n the same ·shifted

number in the deno.minational .shlft ,unit, two

H5

things -are necessary. One is the suppression of
the shlftunit cancel controlsig·na.J.· SBCL,and
the other is the suppression of the accumulator
readout .signal ACC-RO. If these two signals are 70
not suppressed, then the previously shifted number would be cancelled from the shift unit .and
the number from the accumulator uIiit would be
entered in unshUted 'relation into the shift unit.
SbIIcethe descending counter is now at O,shift
8teps wotildnotoccur :and the umihiftednumber 70

has continued to cut off 24.a:.. Previously, in the
Q IC step, when 24-24" was cut oft' it produced
the signal R.ROC. This. signal caused the. 00cumulatorunit to produce the signal ACC-RO.
Under cantrol of thiB Signal the number m the
accumulator unit was. applied to the Internal
buses.
Also, concurrently with the Signal
ACC-RO, the signal Proceed :wasappl1ed to
ACC.C to initiate the..o,perations f~ .continuing
the scanning sequence. For the :reasons ,explained abov.e, it is desired .during the R IC
step to suppress the signal ACC-iRO. Accordingly, it is necessary to 'suppress ·thesignal
R.ROC.
During theQ ICstepthe Proceed.signal initiated the operation at counter-33, 3. and 35,in
ACC.C. This resulted in theretum of I'-A.CC.C,
as well as in the..application of the signal OP.BS
to the scanning spots of the commutator. With
14 in its reset state it is maintaining t9a conductive. Now, in the R [Cstep, 'U-...;2Ia has been
completely cut oIfbutas J!a .is conductive, the
common anode line 01 I Sa, 24 and 24a does not
rise in potential. Consequently, 30 .does not tum,
so that signals RROC, ACC-RO and Proceed
are suppressed.
It is seen then during the first Ie 'step a signal
OP.IC is effective to cause ACC;C to Ill'oduce
RROC. A Proceed signal then retumsto ACC.C
.and causes 14 to return and a signal OP.BS to
be issued Jor initia:ting the ~ntlXt scanning step.
If this next step is also an IC step., then 'the signal
OP.IC is next produced .and ~has the effect of
turning 23 but inasmuch .-as ":has been reset,
the signalR.ROC is noti.ss:ned.
With 14 now reset, it also cuts off !3. With
23 now turned undercontrbl of the OP.IC 'signal,
it also cuts off ISa. The couple 12-'--13a is then
effective to cause 9to 'produeea negative signal
SRNC. Also, couple lI-f3a causes 9a to aet
through the anode resistor .of '31 to turn ,33. The
tuming of 33 initiates the operation of the
counter of 33, 34 and 35 in ACC.C. -TIms, the
action ·of cauplel3-13a in this instance substitutes for the Proceed signaJ .in initiating the operations for continuing the scanning sequence.
'Upon the return of U it resets 23 but meanwhile
the signal SHNC has been produced and cuts
off :lila. (FIg. 78a). As28a is 'cutoff, it renders
%8 effective to turnttigger :24M. With 24 turned.
the line 24m rises inpotentia:land renders 22a,
Fir:. 78b, conductive. As a restilt,thecouple 14a
nnd -:l1.a will be ineffective to cause 6 to conduct
and produce the signal SHCL.

'227

'228

In the' rila.nner explaiiled before,' the trigger
.is necessary when R performs an OC step"and
JI-ACC.C is turned two AP pulSe cycles after. the
T and IC step, as in Section 17 a. The return of
turning of 33, and acts through 3 liz, and Ta and
5P .causes signal ACCL to appear and decondition
ACC.C.
3 to produce the signal OP.BS. This signal now
resets 6R (Fig. 708e) which thereupon reverses 5 . The Ink-signal is given, two AP pulse cycles
IIR. The reversal of I IR causes the reappearafter initiation of the Ink delay by FR, .:and
ance of signal SHI which turns 2N and3N in
causes entry of the new shift number 15 into the
Fig. 78b. The turning of 2N causes signal SHRI
descending ciunter (Fig. 27a) and the plaCing
to appear but inasmuch as a number and sign
of 2 I, Fig. 27c, in right-shift state (see Section
have not been applied to the Internal buses, the 10 17, Item 14b). The Ink signal also reconditions
denominational shift unit will not receive a new
ACC.C (see Section 17, Item 14c).
number in response to the signal SH~I nor will
When pilot unit 3 produced signal Int to E.S3
a new sign be applied to the storage' triggers
for causing the left-shifted number and its. sign
'2M and &M in Fig. 78a. During the first IC step
to enter ES3, the pilot unit also produced signal
which followed an OC step the turning of 3N 15 PH.IC. This is followed by signal Pil.ICC which
was effective, by cutting off 14a, to cause the
resets 15R, causing 16R to turn and producesigcancel signal SHCL to appear. This signal, if
nals R3 and CSF. Signal eSF, via I la and I I in
'allowed to appear during the second of two sucFig. 78a, resets 10M, ending the SHRD. andSHRO
cessive IC steps, would cancel the shifted number
signals. The,negative pulse from II also resets
in the denominational shift unit. For this reason 20 24M whiCh was turned before to suppress ca;ll(~el
the trigger 24M (Fig. 78a) has been turned,
signal SHCL. "
under control of the OP.IC signal produced at
The tUrning ofl 6R al1;o produces signal R3
the start of the second IC step and thereby .has
which controls. pilot unit' 3 to send out· signal
rendered 22.a conductive to prevent the signal
ES3 to In (see'Section 17, Item 24), whereby the
SHCL from being produced. Accordingly, the 25 quantity in ES3 is transmitted to relay storage
number which has been shifted ten places to
unit 012.
.'.
the left during the Q IC step is left undisturbed
In the first. half of the run, a quantity from
in the denominational shift unit during' the ~ R
0 10 was entered in the accumulator and transIC step. .
ferred therefrom to the denominational' shift
When 2N returns, signal SHRI ends and Sa, 30 unit, where it was shifted ten places to the left.
Fig. 78a, conducts and turns 13M, giving out the
The . :purpose·ofsuch shift, as is clear from Secsignal SHS. The latter signal initiates operation'12 is to produce for transmission to storage
tion of the denominational shift unit. Since
a 'shifted number which results from dropping
the number in the descending counter has been
the ten left-hand digits of the original number.
reduced to {) in the Q IC step, the shift unit 35 Assume .the origiiui.l number has nirieteen digits,
immediately produces the signal SHCP.Thisso its 19th'place enters shift column 19 and its
signal causes 9N to turn and produce signal
1st ,place eriters shift column 1.' A shift of ten
.CSRD at AP pulse time. Signal CSRD causes
places to the left' brings the 1st place digit into
TN and 10M to turn. Upon 10M turning, it pro-shiftcohtmn 11 'andthe 18th place digit into
educes the readout signals SHRD and SHRO. 40 iliiftcolumn 28, so that the 19th place digit Is
,The denominational shift unit now applies' the
lost. The 9 right hand numbers' of the origshifted number to the Internal buses and the
inal 19 digit number now in shift columns '19
sign storage triggers 2M and 6M apply the sign
to 11 are then transmitted to columns 2 to 10
of the number to the Internal bus columns 1.
of relay storage units 0 II and 012 during the
Trigger TN is reset by the next AP pulse and 45 Q IC and R IC steps.
turns 8N for one AP pulse cycle. 'Upon the turnWhen the 18...;place number in shift columns 28
ing of SN, it produces signal CSV which resets
to 11 is later shifted 15 places to the right, the
I IR, causing 15R to turn and .produce signal
five right-hand dlgitsare dropped; leaving' 13
R2. The shifted number and its sign now on
digitsstandihg in shift columns 1 to 13. This
the Internal buses is entered under control of 50 shortened :itumber will be transmitted to relay
signal R2 into ES3.
litOrageuIlitsOl3; 014 and 015 during the second
The turning of 15R also produces signal FR
half of the present prOgra·m. . .
.. . '"
(see Section 17, Item 22)., SignalFR ends the
. 'Trigger 'I&R,' which 'turned to produce tiaii~:"
heating of the SHI, Q, and R shift code sequence
misSion control signa,lR3, is reset .by tlie"next
storage circuits (Figs. 62 and 63) andoi the OP I 55 AP pulse and causes 19R to turn and produce
pyramid (Fig. 59) and initiates heating of the
sfgnaiR.'IC,· as"ih Section 17, Item 25 .. Since
SH2, U and V shift code circuits arid of theOP2
spOt T is condi'tioned for an Ie step, signa;} R.IC
pyramid. Accordingly, the shift value 10 on lines
crnises 5T to return. This starts the T ICstep
MN (Figs. 78a and 27a) and the shift direction
which is similar to the R IC step, except for the
on line LT are removed and a new shift number 60 ilroducti(ni'(Ji'signal FR which is apart of the
and direction applied to these lines; also the code
It steP only. Briefiy, upon return of 5T, trigger
number 01 in OP2 is translated into a repeat
6T turns arid applies signalOP.IC to ACC.C. As
issue of signal ACC Code. The new shift numin the R ICstep, signals R.ROC and ACC-RO
ber is 15, since the code number in SH2 is 5 and
an~., Tl!ile se:lectar: ~not unit woc.1.cf respond 'to
II'
3' tW
r VI lIT- f i ' r
02' ~
70 cGmmutatar s~g2iral ~; and it;'l triggers' ~~ Fl.'g',
'. "
S2Seq
.
~,aUd U,' Flg~. ·8o.a,wO~,
1.
«.
0,
fl3 00
, ~"''''r
," 11I en"":\,,
+-'"
. I
. ' tn
,'/V'""""" ·emalnJ
Inter
oct{ c-ondiUow
In~hlt ~bG.e' lme., ie. isass~ed that m:ay ~_ which 25, Fig. BOb, and II:,
are tU~ed'.
stwaglt uwts &:if add·
eontam mzo ~. to I a AceOl'dillldY,. ~I, Am; woultl l1'ellUrin' bfucll!ed: by

"""lfl'lL

ea'U

q;..!'

"J

_.OOtt.,

:2,6,,6.812

231

'232

the pilot unit. Also, with 21, F'ig'.SOa, turned, it
delay counter. One of the initial funcUonsot
would block production of the signals ES to IntUle Ink 4elay counter is the production of the
and Pil.OC by the pilot 'unit~ The instructions
signal HCR for resetting the half 'correction su~
given by the program field would not be carried
pression storage trigger 5, Fig. 7lg, and thetph
()1.lt. and the scanning sequence would be inter-J erance check trigger 22, Fig. 7lg. The nex.1i.funcrupted. For these reasons, the OC-Out to ES
tion of the Ink delay counter is to cause .the
trees are heated through zero filtering. An exsignal ACCL to be applied to ACC.C for decon:'ample of an Out field which is blank in subfield
ditioning it. The Ink signal subsequentlyoccur.s
r but has a digit in subfield b in the field U of the
and completes the conditioning of the R an4 V
(present program. The U tree of the OC-Out to 10 spots for IC steps; also completes the condition~
,ES group will not be heated .because the U zero
ing, of ACe.C; and'times the productionoi:,the
filter circuit remains open when Dr is blank. Acsignal HCS for turning trigger 5, Fig.7lg,:to its
,cordingly, .signal OCO I will not be produced and
half correction suppression'sOO tus.
'signal OCO will not operate pilot unit I to place
' The OCO and PS signals a're produced.. The
,it in entry interlock condition.
Iii OCO signal causes the numbers and signs, from
The IC Presense trees (Fig. 55) also are heated
relaY storage units 01& and 131 and fromdiarl
,through zero filtering. This is to prevent an In
storage unit. #3 to ,be entered in ES3; 2 apd ::6',
,field which is blank in subfield r but not in subrespectively. The P~ signal initiates the scanlleld b from seiecting a pilot unit to respond to
ning sequence. The PI signal is given and causes
presense signal NPR. If the designated pilot unit ,2.0 ES3 to apply the number and sign 'from' relay
were allowed to respond to the presense signal,.
storage unit 016 to the Internal buses andf!;lso
its ,trigger 3D, Fig. 80c, would turn and block the
:causes the
operational sign to be applied to
signal AT. This trigger may be reset only at
the sign mixing circuit of the accumulator 'unit.
,the end of the transmission delay. But since subThe Pil.OC signal is produced and turns 21.Q
.field r of the In field is blank, a Back signal wi1lZ.5 causing signal OP.OC to initiate operation ,of
not be applied to the pilot unit named in the reACC.C to produce the signals RCC, ECC' and
lated subfield b. Accordingly, even if trigger 3D,
ACC-RI. Accordingly, the number from relay
Fig. SOc, were turned, the lack of a Back signal
storag'e unit. 0 16 and its sign are entered in ,the
will prevent the pilot unit from producing the
accumulator.. An accumulator cycle ensues and
transmission signal, and trigger 30· would remain ao causes the entry of the number and sign into
in, turned state, blocking signatAT. For this
registers RC (Fig. 70), The complete signa}
reason, the IC Presense trees are heated through
CYCPT is applied to ACC.Cwhich produces the
zero filtering. In the present program, field R
signal.OP.BS for resetting 21Q. The QI'signa~
is an In field with a blanksubfield r and with
is given and causes the number and sign derived
subfield b containing I. The R tree of the IC a5 by ES2 from relay storage unit 131 to be applied
Presense group is not heated because the Rr zero
to the Internal buses and 'also 'causes the '- bp"
filter is in open condition. Accordingly, signal
erational sign to be applied to the accUmulator
PRES I will not be produced and pilot unit I will
Sign mixing circuit. The 'Pi1.0C signal again' is
not respond to signal NPR. Trigger 39, Fig .. SOc,
given- and causes 21R,to turn. " This produces
of pilot unit I will not tur~ and block signal AT·;l.U the signal OP.OC wl)ieh'initiates operation of
. The IC-ES to In trees (Fig. 56) also are heated
,ACC.C for causing the number derived 'from' relay
through zero filters. If this were not done, the
storage unit 131· to be subtracted in the- aCCUIDUtree set accorciing to the digit in subfield b of an
lator unit from number derived from' relay stor:"
In field would select a pilot unit for response to
age unit 0 16. The signal OP.BS then isprbduced
.the "3" signal from the related scanning spot
and returns 21R. Since the R spot has been
everi .if the In field were blank in its subfield r. 45 conditioned for' an IC step, it now produces the
As result, the trigger 20, Fig. 80c, of the pilot
signal OP.IC. This signal causes ACC.Cto pro~
unit would turn and produce the signal TR Ink.
duce the signal R.ROCwhereby the result' and
,This would disable the pilot unit from piloting
sign are read out of the accumulator. unit and
entry into the electronic storage unit either from
a Proceed signal is returned to ACC.C. ThePro"
the Out bus-set or from the Internal buses (see ';;0 ceed signal initiates operation of ACC;C to reset
Sections 17 and 17a) in a next commutator run.
trigger 14 and to produce a Signal OP.BS:· The
Since this pilot unit will not produce its transsignal QP.BSresets6R;causing HRto tum. In
miSsion' signal ES to In, its trigger 2D, Fig.80c,
a manner explained in Erection 17 this Initiates
would not be reset· and signal TR Ink would remain effective. The pilot unit will not produce a6i; operations for sending the number.' from the actransmission .signal· if for no other reason than
cumulator unit through the denominational shift
that it will no't receive a Back signal.
unit and storing the sign of the number. At the
, In the present program, fielu R is an In field
completion of the shift; which in this case is 0,
and its subfield.r Is blank but its subfield b con..
I.IR is reset and turns 15R. This ptoducesthe
tains digit 1. Since the zero filter for the sub- 60 signal R2 in consequenc'e of" which, the' reswt
field Rr is open, the R tree' of the IC-ES to In
and its sign are entered in' ES I. The signal
group will not be heated and Signal ICRI will
Pil.IC is given and returns 15R whereupon 16R
not be produced. Accordingly, pilot unit I will
turns and produces the signal R3. luas,much
not respond to signal R3 and the trigger 20, Fig.
as the subfield Rr is blank, the signal R3has no
8Oc, of this pilot unit will not turn to produce the 65 effect, for reasons explained before in this sec'signal TR Ink.
tion: The difference between the two answers in
.The heating of the operational sign storage
relay storage units 016 'and 131 is now in ES I.
circuits (Fig. 60) prepares fOr the .operational
The FR signal was given upon the turning of
signs in the P, Q, T and U fields to be applied;
15R. ,Under con~rol-of this signal the oPt py;raat the P, Q, T and U steps of the sCanning se- 10 mid is'heated, and the operation of the Ink delay
quence, to the accumulator unit. .The heating
initiated.
of the OPI pyramid causes the signal ACC Code
The heating of the OP2' pyramid causes'reto be applied to ACC.C and prepares for the produced poteritial to be applied to outputHn~ OP03.
duction of the signal HCS.
Referring to Fig. 77a, reduced potential on line
The SCM ~ignal initiates operation of the Ink 75 OPOI cuts off 25 to renuer 26. 26aand 28 'con'::

+

a

233

234

'CIil!leratesaft :ACC.e to :ca.uae
ft, liP, ptQduce. tbe,sigmd OP:BB.. This aimla.l
~ 'lleturns:2 nT:. A13a :result '5V .is reset and
lta :is conductive,it !produces Teduced. ,J)atent;ial
611' Ijstumed. Thetu:rnill!1g of :6V produces tho
em wJire.HCSw;caus.tng a8and 14 in :F'ig~, IlIv Ito
Jl('oduce the signal HCSS. When 18 in Fig. '7'l4: Ii signal :OP..IC'. Uneler :control of this signal.
ACC.C 1lIJIJllies 1hesignall'l..&OC to the,accumn-ia 'eonductiveit ,acts through Ua and 16 'to ,pro1.a:korumt. JIn ,8 ,mannerexvlainedbefal'e m
dooethe negative signal TOl.CmC. Thill' ;sigDa1
c.uta offU, Fig. 78tI. When, the 'liik,1iig,na1 js:
Sec.tion U,the mgnal RB.Oe hUtiates the :lim
test. BriU!.y, if 1tb.eresult 'Sign lspositivetb.eg
gtven(about 2 AP ;pulsecycles after 'the heating
ef the OPf pyramid },it:cuta Qff S2/:t, mig. 'Us, 10 tibe, Wbe ;U a;. Fig. "ltg. remains at :cut-oil. arui
ea.wiilD.g J2-4~ato ad through ;Ufar iJJl'QdIacwhen the~oc.eed trigger til, Fig. ~n.g~ :turns.1t
is e1Iacti.ve ,to produce ,th~ ,Proceed signal. On
ing the signal Tal;CK. This signallgoes 1:0 ;Fjg.
the other hand, if the sign test ShowcS that the
'Ugand acts through 6 and 14 to turn the tolerance .,check signal storing triggertl,Fig. 'Ilg.
result ,sign.is ne~tive. ,a ccmplement conversion
Withth1strigger reversed the ace.'WIIt1lll1ator is Hj cycl.e ens.ues,and tube ria, 'Fig. 'ny. bec.omes conconditioned to perform .a,1Olera.nce :ehedlt,lin,tb&
ductive .under the combined control of thereversed .cllecktrlgger '2t,Fig. "llg, ,and the comm8l!lnerdescribed.inSection 13.
The Ink signal also completes the reOOlDlllitillnplement .conversion c;yc1e -trigger n .Fig.nt.
ing of ACC.C, and times the sigruillICS.
W.Ith t'Ia" Fig.7ly, 'Ccnductive the tmn~ of
Following the temiinatinn of, :the iSil!n81 B.3, 2.0 the Proceed 'trigger :is not effective to produee
tbe T :spot performs its OC step; 'The,signal Tt
the signalPro,ce:ed. Tbe readout Signal ACC-,R'O
is .given and causes the ',tOlerance number,.
is not interf:ered 'with, however, and the result
med 'from dial storage unit '3 • ..to beapPIied. by
and sign areappIiedto the Internal buses so
ES6to the .Internal btlS,es.TheTt 'signal:also
that 'it maybe transmitted toareceiving unit
causes the
operational :sign '.to :be i,a;pIiliedto 2:> if 'so desir.ed. If the 'P,roceed 'signal is given th.en
the sign mixing 'circuit ,of :the aecmnulator ',unit.
it acts on ACC:C to ca.usen to produce the'sigThe Pi1.OC signal is given 'and turns ltu 'ca.u&nal OP.BSand to restore i'4-ACC:C. The 'Sigq 1tto ,send out the signal OP.OC. Thissip6l
na:IOP;BSth'Is time restores '6V causing I.tV to
initiates operation Qf ACC.Ctoproduce ,the l!igturn. Upon the turning of ltV operations are
J:l&)s :required for effecting the ,entry lof ',the tol· 110 initiated !or routing the number now applied to
er.ance number,in a 1'JOSitivesenre. !into 'therethe Internal 'buses by signal ACC~RO through
BWt'regjsters ,RC ,of the accumulator ;unit. UJlQtl
the denominationalsliUt -unit. 'The ACC-:RO
C1l2IlPletion of thea,ccumulator cycle in which
signal lasts ,for thl'eeAP 'Pulses and 'therefore
this entry .is 'made, ACC.CproduCllS thesign&l
the ,number is removed from the Internal buses
OP.BS which returns J IU. T.he.u 00 step ~tar:ta 35 after it has been enter.ed into the denominational
and the signal VI ,is given. Under :control of tbis
shift unit. 'Upon completion of the shift, wh1eh
ligna,}, electronic storage unit l, "which ~
m this case is 'tI,f IVls reset and CAUSes tSV to
the. Rstep rece,ived the answerdifterence. Qturn. Inasmuch as the subfleld Vb is blank, the
p.lies the answer ,difference to the ,Internal 'buses.
signa;! V2has ,no eft'ect on any of the pilot units.
Also,. ,the a.bsolute -operational sign is :ttpplie.Q 40 'l'hesigna.lVf,. however, goes to ,the blank c,ode
io the sign mixing ,circuit of ,theaccumulatar
ptlQtunit (Fig. 'l8'Li) an'Cl cuts otr tla...:BC. At
uDit ,since the code number in U" is-3.Tbe
the time the -signal 'SCM was given for starting
Pil.OC signal is 'again produced and ,ca:asesZ IV
the comnmtator run the 'Pilot units selection trees
to turn. This produces another signal OPDC
were heated. 'The 'heatmgof ,tbe V branch of ,the
under control of which the commutator ACC.C 45 Ie-Int to ES 'trees (Fig.S8) has produced cutproduces the signals ECC, Acc..:m and ACC-ST.
o'ff potential on ,the output ,!in,e IVCO. AccordThese signals control the accumulator unit to :reing'\Y" the tube H-'BC '(Fig.78L) 'has been cut eOfl'.
ceivetheanswer ditference fromES1and 'Sub!'foW'; when the Signal 'V2 cutsotf f1a..:BC, the
tract ,ft from the tolerance number ,pr,evio.uslv
couple et1-'ITa becomes efIectivethroughfOa and,
entered in :theaccumulator during ,thaT OC 50 fa to -prodnce .thesi-gmtl PiUe which ,renders
step. Itshotild be noted that regardless of ,the
12tt,Fig. '78t, conductive" causing 11W to turn.
sign of the answer ditference as it stands 'meleeThis 'results 'in the -production 'Of the stgnal
tron1c storage unit I, its compIement 'is:transPiLICCjust as when Ii W .is 'turned under .conferre,d from EC to RC of ,the ,a'Ccumulator .umt.
tro] Qf·the signalPiI.ICf.rom thepil0.t units.
This is because the absolute - operational ,sign 55
The -signal 'Pil.ICC returns 1'5V causing ltv
3 has been applied to the sign mixing -circuit
to 'turn and 'produce ,the signal V3 which has no
andtherefor.e causes the accumulator unit to
effect 'because 'the -subfielda' Vb andVr are mank.
treat the number as a negative number regardThe 'sl-gnal 'Y.IO wUlbegh-en. followed "by the
less ,oflts original sign. In ather words, tbeallsignal Fe 'which is a 'man.>iestation of comlllestllute value of the answer ditferenee'is;slibtraetetl 60 titm of thescann:lng 'Sequence.
from the positive tolerance number.
ff the resttlto! -thetcrlerance check is neEaIf the absolute value of theans.wer .'CIifterenoe':U
tive ·then 'the turning of the Proceed trigger Will
less than or equal to the tolerance number, 'then
not eausetbe 'Signal Prcreeedto be 'produced.
the result ,is positive, but if the answer -oiffereDoe
Henee, '8 signal OP.BS wi'll not be sent out by
is greater than the tolerance num:bertben the 65 AOC.C to cause the return 'OfaV. Since 'tV is
result will be negative. In a manner explained
not returned II V is not turned and signal V2 1s
in Section 13, if the result of theto1erancecl:!.e~
notprodru:ed. Consecnrently ,thesig1).a1 'P11.:rcC
tspositive then the Proceed signal ',wiD 'be 'JJl'O-o
wfll not be 'produced and the operation of the
duced. On the other hand, -if the result ;i5ne,...
spot 'v '1iherefore'stops. Accordingly,the 'F'Csigative the Proceed signal 'wlUbe suppressed.
'W nalwUl not be 'produce(f and one of 'the ,condi'The spot V is condItioned 'for an IC step :m
tions for starting the 'next commutator -run 'has
order to test whether or not the Proceed ,$ig!m;1
not beensatisfted. It is seen then that the tnais 'being blocked. At the end of the accumulator
chme'stf.!ps 'if the 'result of the tolerance dlleck
c,cle in which the ,answer Iliff el'ence '1ssubtraeted
is negative.
"
tmmthe tolerance check number, 'the cycle ,com- 7:6,' ,:As -stated 'before. the ·toreran~ :check ma}" be

duathre. When 2,8,u conductive itae.ts ,tblo1.1lJ'h
3D a.tlfluto pro(lucethe s1gn~ ACC~, ~bell

+

~ 'eYCFil' ~m

235

236

used for other purposes .than to..check ,accuracy
the.IoW-erUmit+.OOlof the table to be computed;
of answers. For instance, it can be used to stop
The machine 'operations then will continue .. '
computations when a table of lex) has been comI!. , in ,the first half of the scanning sequence,
puted between the limits of +.001 and +.0075.
the check result is negative, then the scanning
To check the lower limit, a tolerance number ;:; sequence will stop after the signal R.ROC is
given by ACC.C under control of the OP.IC signal
-.001 may be used and each lex) value added
from the R spot. In the absence of a Proceed
thereto. To check the upper limit, the tolerance
signal, ACC.C will not produce the OP.BS signal
number +.0075 may be used and each lex) value
for continuing the R IC step. If the Proceed
subtracted therefrom. This check may be made
after'ilach computation of lex>. A typical line 10 signal is not given in the second half of the
scanning sequence, the V IC step will be interof sequence for ordering the check is:
rupted in the manner described before.
p,. PII Pr
Q8 Qb Qr R, Rb Rr SRI OPI 81
In Section 17, a program for accumUlation of a
00301
2 1 012 1 2 0 1 3 4
pair
of numbers, .• in one instance without half
T. Tb Tr U. Ub Ur V, Vb Vr SR2 OP2 S2
15
correction
and' in the other instance with. half
2301422
4
00302
correction. was explained.
The upper tolerance value of +.0075 is in reIn Section 17,a, a program for accumulating
lay storage unit 012 (Pr) and the lower tolerance
three numbers and utilizing the T field as an In
value is in relay storage unit 014 (Tr). The value
field was explained.
of I(x) obtained by the last computation is in 20
It is to be understood that the machine may
relay storage unit 0,13 (Qr>. Since number 03
be' operated to accumulate directly any desired
is in fields OPI and OP2, the tolerance check
number' of terms. Four terms selected by the
ineans will be used in each half of the scanning
P, Q, E, and T fields may be accumulated and
sequence. The signal oeo will time the entry
theiT sum entered in a receiving unit selected by
of the upper tolerance limit into ESI (Pb) ,the 25 the U field. Five terms selected by the P, Q,R,
value of I(x) into ES2 (Qb), and the lower tolT,and Ufields of a line of sequence may be acerance limit into ES3 (Tb). The P OC step will
eumulated and their sum entered in a unit
cause the 'upper limit to be transferred from
selected by the V field. A single line of sequence
:E:S I to the accumulator and there will be no
thus ,may call for successive accumulation of a
change in sign (Ps is 2). During the Q OC step, 30 maximum of five terms. If it is desired to acthe value of I(x) will be taken from ES2 and encumulate directly more than five terms, two or
tered into the accumulator, with a change in
more lines of sequence must be used. In that
sign (Qs is 1). If the value of I(x) is equal to
case, the V field of the first line will be left blank,
or less than the upper tolerance limit, the result
and the V spot will act as a skip field, as in Secof the accumulation will be positive and a Pro- 35 tion 16b, to signal the end of the scanning
ceed signal will be given during the R IC step.
sequence. With other conditions for a new comIn this case, the R IC step functions the same
mutator run having been met as well, the second,
way as the V IC step to test the result of the
line of sequence may then be run off and five
tolerance check. If the Proceed signal is given,
more terms may be accumUlated. If a total of
the result in the accumulator will be read out 40 ten terms is to be accumulated successively, then
to the Internal buses and into the denominathe V field in the second line of sequence will be
tional shift unit in the manner described for the
an Iri :field; Obviously, any number of terms may
first case ill this section. The commutator
be accumulated successively and directly in this
ACC.C also will be conditioned to produce the
manner.
RCC cancel signal in the second half of the se18. The multiplication sequence
quence run. It may be mentioned that. the R2 45
signal will mix with tree signal IRCO from trees
One or two multiplications may be ordered by a
IC-Int to.ES (Fig. 58) in chassis BC (Fig. 78L)
line of sequence, each multiplication in one half
to produce the Pil.IC signal for allowing the first
the .line. If the code number in the OP field is
half of the scariningsequence to continue to
10,. multiplication without half correction is
completion if the Proceed signal has been given. 50 ordered. If the code number is 15, multiplicaAssuming as above, that the value of I(x) is
tion with half correction of the product is ordered.
not greater than upper tolerance limit +.0075,
An example ,of SISeq data calling for multiplithe second half of the scanning sequence will
cation without half correction of the product ls
be started. .In the T OC step, the accumulator
given below:
will. be canceled arid the lower t()lerance limit 55
p, Pb Pr Q8 Qb Qr RI Rb Rr sm OP1 81
will be transferred from ES3 to the accumulator,
'1
1
017 2 2 1 5 8 4 3 1 3 9 0
lO
01
withQut being changed in sign. During the V OC
step, the value of I(x) will be transferred from
Simply interpreted, the' above program calls.
ES2 to the accumulator and no change in sign 60 for a number from relay storage unit 011 (Pr)
will be ,made. It should be noted, that the conto be sent to ESI (Pb) and thence to the M-D
ditions 'for this U step are similar to the condiunit (see Section 14) to serve as the multiplicand,
tions for. the U step in the line of sequence exand for the - operational sign (Ps) to be applied
to the MC-DR sign mixing circuit (Fig. 65;); for
plained before in this section, except that. the
abm'SOel.ute - operational sign is not used this 65 the number from storage unit 158(Qr) to be sent
ti
to ES2 (Qb) and from there to the M-D unit to
If the value of I(x) is not smaller than +.001,
serve as the multiplier, and for the + operathen the addition of this value to the lower
tionalsign to be applied to the MP-DD sign mixtolerance number ~.001 will produce a positive.
ing circuit (Fig. 65;); for the product to be
resiilt. But if the I(x). value is less than +.001, 70' routed' through the denominational shift .unit
its addition to the lower tolerance number -.001
without column shifting and to ES3  'resUlts in reduced po- 3"; signal RIC. Accordingly, trigger f9 is :turned
ttm'tlaI bemg present on the 'output wires IP and
and the .signal R '''in''appears and 'conditions
rQ. Accordingly, tubes' and 1 in the OPSN
the R spot of thecammutawr for an rc step, as
st!Cltion ofFfg. 78Lare cut otT.
in Section 17, Item 14a.
The heating of 'the In code sequence storage
The Ink signal also cuts off 'Sa, Fig. 78M.The
cil'ewte'(Fig. SDplaces reduced potential on .~.() tube.S has already been cut ·offby the signal
the wire RIC,so thetnbe 11 inFig. 78b is cut off.
MY-Code. When 8 was cut off it applied eonThe heating of the pilot units seleetfon'trees
ditioningpotential to 1. Now, when8a is 'cut
("hrs. 54 to5S) causes the P branches to produce
oft'by the Ink signal It renders theeonditioned
tbesignalsOCOI and Pbl for selecting pilot unit
tube 1 conductive, causing it to reverse II. The
Ito pilot 'the entry of the multiplicand into 45 trigger II-MYC may be milled the gateot 'the
ESlfrom relay storage unit 0 IT ,and then the
multiplicand contro1 commutator MYC. When
9PpHcation of the multiPlicand by ESlta the
II is in reversed status, it is conditioning this
Internal buses. The Q branches produce the
commutator for operation. Reverse n mains1mflar signals OC02and Q'b2 for selecting 'pilat
tains 2 and 16 at cut-off. With 2 cut off, it mainunit 2 to pilot 'the receptIon byES2 'of the mtilti- 50 tains6 conditioned, and '5 conductive. ConpUer factor fromrelaystorageunitl5'S and then
ductive5 produces the Regativesignal M-PRE
the 'application ,oJ themultiplierfaetor by ES2
(seeFig~65e). This signal cuts off InB-.:H27 'in
to the Internal buses. TheR bnmchesofthe
Fig. ;S5e so as to cause the "up multiplier" plus
pfiotunits 'selection trees produce the signals
my to be set at increased potential, 'as explained
PRES!, IRCI, and ICR3 for selecting pilot unit 55 in Section 14a. The M":'PRE signal also brfngs
3to presense a transmission', and to ptlot the
into operation the cancel means shown inF'ig..~
Product from the calculating unit (M-n tnthis
for resetting the control triggers of the Interrud
csse}1nto thedenomfnationa:l shfft unit and
commutatordf the M..:.D '1lllit, except for 'the
:rrmn theretaESI 'and 'thence .to selected relay
triggers shown in FIgs. '65aandb (see Section
storage unit 1'19.
60 14a).
The heating of the R branch 'of the shift code
The OCOcommutator 'signal appears two AP
sequencestoragecircutt (Fig. 63) and the lleatpulsecyc1es after the signal SCM '('see Se:etIon17
Ing ottheSHI shift code, sequence storage cirItem 15a). This signal operates the selected
ctrtt fFig;62) 'hasm> real effect in the present
pilot units I and 2 to produce thefrsignaIs OCS~
pnygrambecause a'shirt is not calleEI for by code 65 The latter signals are effective in conjunction
number 4 in Rs1tIIdbecause SRI Is blank.
.
with F10rward signals rec.eivedbytbeseplIot
lTheheattng of ,the 'OPI 'pyramld,(Fig. 59)
units to cause the pilot units toproduce.the
CftUsesreduced' potenttal to be present on the
signals for entering the multiplicand :and mtiltiotttptttline OPIO. Referring to Fig.7'Ta,thereplier!actors from relay storage units on .and
dUced P'Otentia1 on line OPID 'cutsoft' Iso as' to 70 Isa into electronic storage units ESI andES2
render 2 and2aconductive.Th'e output o!2a
respectively.
"
is 'connected 'to the 'wire HCSw so that the
Commutator signal PS, which in simultaneous
signal HCSSwill be 'produced 'and,wfllcut off n,
wlthsIgna]OCO, initiates thescnnning sequence.
P.\g; 'f8a.W1th2, l'1g.77a,condnctive, It clitso'ff
The 'signal PI cuts 6ffla-"OPSNC'Fig. '78L). 'The
.... Jlausing.tDproduae thenegativestgnal 7/'.: tubeJ..;()PSN has 'been 'cut otT by the tree signal'
Ia;sQm:e ,the

,PIg.

239

IP: AecordinglY, the signal PI now is effective'
to render" ,~t(Jeffective t~ough2; 4a and 4b

240

nalOP.OCmakes 6-'MYC (Fig. 78M) conduct.
The resulting negative pulse resets 19, ending
to produce the - operational sign signal OPSNI.
the first OP.BS signal. Upon ther.eturn of 19,
This signal is applied via the line Is in Fig. 65;
it turns 23, causing 21 to conduct and produce
to. the MC/DR sign mixing circuits.
5 . the negative signal MPC. The signalMPC resets
. The signal PI also mixes with the tree signal
the multiplier factor register MP (Fig. 64b) and
Pbl. to cause the selecteq pilot unit I to produce
the MP/DD sign mixer triggers (Fig. 651), as
its signal OC Int (see Section 17, Item 16b).
described in Section 14a. TheBP pulse following·
The pilot unit I produces the signal ESI to Int
the turning of 23, Fig. 78M, resets this. trigger;.
and the signal Pil.OC. .The former signal causes 10' ending the MPC signal. The operational sign'
the' multiplicand to be applied by ESI to the
signal is still effective after the termination of.
lnternal buses. The Pil.OC signal is followed by
the signal MPC and now enters the· operational
the. signal Pil.OCC which occtirs at APllulse
'sign into the MP/DD sign mixer. ,. Upon the
time and causes 2.1Q to tum, whereupon the
return of 23, Fig. 78M, it turns 21, which is'reset
first,negative signal OP.OC appears and is in- 15 by the next AP pulse. When 21 is reset, 'it,turns
'lerted by 29, Fig. 78c, toa positive signal OP.OC.
22, causing 25 to produce the signal MP-RI.,
This positive signal. is effective now to render
Under control of this Signal, the multiplier factor;
conditioned tube 6-MYC (Fig. 78M) conductive.
now being applied by ES2 to the Internal buses,
As a result, trigger 10 is turned and causes 14
is ent.ered in the register MP. Also; the signal
to tum. Upon the turning of .14 it renders 9 20 MP-RI enters the sign of the muitiplier into
and 11 conductive. Conductive 9 produces the
the ·MP /00 sign mixer. The signal MP-RI lasts
signal MCC, while. conductive 11 produces the
for one AP pulse cycle since trigger 22-MYC was
turned at AP pulse time and is reset by the next
signal PQC. In a manner described in Section
14/l, signal MCC resets the register MC-DR (Fig.
AP pulse.
641)') and the MCjDR' sign mixer (Fig. 65;L 25.' When 22-MYC is reset, it turns 31-MYC, makSignal PQC resets the register PQ (Fig. 64h>'
ing 20a conduct so as to cut off 16a.. Oonsequent.. The.next BP pulse following the turning of 14,ly, a second signal OP.BS is produced which this
Fig. 'l8M, is effective to return this trigger, .thus
. time resets 21R (Fig. 78e). This ends the Q OC
ending the .cancel signals MCC and PQC. Upon
step and initiates the R IC step. UPon terminatermination of signal MCG, the multiplicand 30 tion of theQ OC step, the signal QI ends, whereoperational sign enters the MC/DR sign mixer
by signal ES2 to Int also ends and the multiplier
(Fig. 651). Upon the return of the trigger 14,
factor and its sign are removed from the Internal
~g. 78M, it turns 18. The following AP pulse
buses. The ending of signal QI also ends the
returns 18, caUSing it to tum 15. Upon the turnoperational sign signal OPSN2 which Was applied
ing of 15 it renders 13 conductive to produce the :lii to the MP/DD sign mixing circuit. '
signal MC-RI. This signal causes the multipliWhen 21 R was reset by the seoo'nd OP.BS;
cand, now on the Internal buses, to be entered
signal to end the Q OC step, it turned 22R for
in register MC-DR (see Section 14a). Also, the
one AP pulse cycle. Since the R sPOt is conditioned for an IC step, 23R is blocked from turning
signal MG-RI causes the sign of the multiplicand
to be entered into the sign mixing circuit MC/DR 40 and the signal R I is suppressed, as' explained
(Fig. 65;).
in Section 17. The turning of 22Rresets IiR
The trigger 15, Fig. 78M, was turned at AP
which makes 6R turn.
pulse time to prodUce the signal MC-RI. The
The R IC step was initiated upon the return
next AP pulse resets 15, terminating the reading
of 21R by the second OP.BS signal. This signal
signal MC-RI. Upon the return of 15 it turns 4,fj resulted from the turning of 31-MYC, and thereby initi-:
produce. the negative signal OP .BS· which goes
ates the multiplying computation, in the' manner
to all of the triggers, 21 of the scanning spots.
explained in Section 14a.
The signal is effective this time to restore 21 Q.
Upon completion of multiplication, the internal
This terminates the P OC step and initiates the 55 commutator of the MD unit produces the signal'
Rr-CPLT (see Section 14a and Fig. 651d. This:
Q QC step. Since the P OC step has terminated,
the sigmil ESI to Int also ends and the multisignal cuts off 28,. Fig. 78M. When 28a is cut .
plicand and its sign are removed from the Interoff by the next occurring AP pulse, the couple"
nal bUses; also the operational sign for the multi28-28a makes 26 conduct and return. 30, thus'
plicandis removed. '
60 ending the MY-ST signal. The return of 30 also,
.. When 21Q returned, it caused 22Q to turn for
turns 34 which causes 35 to turn. TUrned 34'
one AP pulse cycle. Upon the return of 22Q, it
makes 33 conduct and produce the negative read- ,
turns 23Q to cause Signal QI to appear. Signal
out signal R.RO.. Under control of this signal,:
Qlcuts off 1a-OPSN (Fig. 78L) and since 1 also
tubes 8 and 9 in Fig. 65k produce the positive sig-,
opera- (i5 nal R.RO which causes the product to be 'rea.d,
is cut off by the free signal 2Q, the
tional sign signal OPSN2 is produced, as in Secout of the result register PQ onto the Internal.
tion 17, Item 19. This Signal is applied to line
buses. The· negative signal R.RO from the .com28 in Fig. 651.
mutator MYC also operates via 36, Fig.65k,to .
. Signal Q I also mixes with signal Qb2 to cause'
cause the product sign to be read out. .The nega- ,
selected pilot unit 2 to produce its signal ES2 to 70 tive signal R.RO also causes D42 (Fig. 651) to be
Int, as in Section 17, Item 19. Under control
reset, all as explained in Section 144.
of this signal, the multiplier factor is applied
Trigger 35, Fig. 78M was turned at the AP pulse
by ES2 to the Internal buses. The Pil.OC signal'
time at which the signal R.RO was initiated. The'
again occurs and this time causes 21Rto turn'
next AP pulse resets 35, caUSing it to t1im 36 for'
a~d ?roduce the second Signal OP.OC.The Big-, 75. one AP pulse cycle. Upon 36 turning, it makei

+

242

241

24'conduetLandlcut:off.' 164:S1noe .ala:lsD:'ls';a.t
cut-off, couple 16-16a now operates via 12',: ti>
producetbethird:OP;BS'signllJ.
The third OP~BS; stgna], resets 6R: (Fig. 78e)
causing .IR: to turn; Just,; as in Section 17,
the turning of II R" causes: thee number on - the
Internal buses to De, entered;~in. the denomina;.
tional shift unit; In'-the:present!case, _this,num,.
ber is a product being, read out of: PQ by- signal
R.RO; Thesignofithe;produ.ct,is stol'ed,atthis
time by the trigger' 2M or 6M, in Fig, 78a" (see
Section 17; Item 2U • After- the product: has
been entered I in the denominational shift; unit,
and its sign' stored;, the, shift stltrt signal SHS
is given- and -causes the shift unit -to shift, the
product the desired: nmnbe!" of; steps." ,In the
present, program. the shift, amount is 0, s() the
shift'-completeSignal,SHCP is"gtven ' at onoo to
indicate that shifting, i$ complete: This -causes
the -signalS "SHRD '- and' SHRg to be produced,
as in Section 17, Item, 22.: Under· COntrol Of
these SignalS, the prOduct nurnoor is applied':~y
the shift unit to the Internal bUSes, and, Its
stored sign, is applied to, column 1: of' the In..
tern al- buses;
When 3$-MYC (Pig. 18M)' was turned' (at
AP' pulse time), it produces, the third OP :BS
signal which causede 11&: to turn and; initiate
the SHRI and SHcL signals fOr enteriilg the
product into the shift' unit, The entry signal
SHRI lasted for two, AP pulse cycles, Trigger
36-MYG was turned;for one AP pulse cycle and
upon its return; it'turned 32 for oneAP pUlse
cycle. When 32. returned; it restored 34 , thereby
ending the readout sigilal·· R.RO; at the same
time as' the entry signa,lsHRI, ended, AlSo;
it shoulclbe noted that the: signal R:RO occtired
upon the turning of' 34 aile AP puise cycle before U·tumed,to'iilitiate theoperatkms leading
to the- entry' sig-nar SHRI and the conourrent
cancel signal' SHCL. This is sufficient ·time for
cross-talk, to os' dissipated: before entry can' be
effected:
When 32, Fig. 78M; returned to end the· signal
R.RO, it also returned triggers I D and I L The
return of II deconditi6ns' commutator MYC.
The return of 10 enables the CCHnmutator, when
next reconditioned, again to prOduce the Signals
MCC and PQC when caned fOr by the- OP;OC
signal.
One AP pUlse cycle- after the shIft unit and
sign stoting triggers have been controlled by
the readout signalsSHRD and SHRO to apply
the product and its sign to tHe'Internal buses,
the signal CSV is produced, as in section 17,
Item 22, and returns HR which causes I&R to
turn. Operations such as described in Seetion
17 occur for causing the product and sign' to
be· entered in ES3 and transmitted to selected
relay storage Unit, 131;
If the code number in the OP field is 15~ then
multiplication and half' co-rreetion of product
is called for. The tree signal OPI5 will cut
of! 13; Fig. 77a,. causing 12 and .. to' produce
the signal MY-Code. The.signal HCSS will not
be produced. Accordingly, half correction of
the product will follow the. completion of the
multiplying computation, after. which the complete signal R-CPLT will. be. given (see Sec,..
tion 14-).
19. The'DividinySequence

Oalli fot:'divil;lon: With Half: 'Obrrection- of the
quotient~ it- saIllPle' half, line of. sequence .~or
a dividing' calcQlatioo, withOut half, correctlOn
is,
Ii

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

5.0

55

6.0

()[j

7.0

A dividing sequence may be ordered by 8,·11a:1f
line of sequence'. The code number 20 in: the
OP field calls for' diwding' without half cor:-reetion. The code number 25, in'. the, Ol' field 75

T8 Tb Tr'
2
1 ; 151-'

Us' Ub:-Ur
L

2'

Vi' Vb - Vf
3 - 136

142 4'

B-B:2 OP2 82
9

20

02

Briefly; this progrnm ihstructs the machine
to- take the- divisor from relay storage unit
15 hTt) and direct' it' via ESi(Tb) to the M-D
unit' (SectiOn 1.4);: to take the dividend from
relay storage unit· I 42'md . and' bring it through
ES2"to the M"-Ihmit;t6 pass the quotient to the
denominational shift' urut;, Where it shall be
shifted nihe places to the: right (VS is4 and
SH2 is in ; and tb~. ttimsmit. the shifted' quotient
to ES3 (V7J)' anti tHene-e. to- relay storage unit
iH'(Vr).
Assume' the. program' is,in the' heated side of
sequence stOrage and' the sCM .sigilal has been
given. This slgmU'li11tiates the operation of the
Ihk delaY'cbunter_ (Fig . .78t),' to produce the Ink
signat The Ihk: sig-Ml' conditions the V spot
for an te-' step; as- in section 17, Item 14u.
The oeo ancI'PS s!gnalsoccur, as.in Section 17,
!tem 15a: TIle oeo' signal operates selected
P.ilb.t_Uhits I and 2. assuming they have received
ForWard'signals, to pilot·tHe divisotand dividend
into ]lSI' and ES2: Tl'le PS signaunitiates the
scanning- sequence.. Towards the end of the
fli~st. haif of. the scanning· sequence, the signal
F'R is produced anci'Ii1itiates operation of tlie
lfik cielaytd prOduce theseCbnd'Inksignal. The
ER signal. also. -Causes the: heating signal for
the OP2pyramidand ofthe sHift sequence storafte circuits 8HZ'; U' and: V' ttL appear. The
shift .amount of 9 is applied to lines MN (Figs. 78d
aild'27a)' and'the tiglit-shift direction is applied
to line RT (Fig. 'maL, 'fiieshift amount also is
appliMto iirtes MMN' (Fig. 6Sa) for thepurposes
eXIllaitled'itl Section. 14li. Two: AP' pulse cycles
later., the. Ihk:. signal' causes tHe shift amount
to' enter the deSCeilditig coUnter (Fig. 27a) and
sets trigger 2'i; Fig. 2.7c,. HL figHt~sliift· status.
Upon the heating' Of the 6P2~ pyramid, the. line
OP20 is, reduced in potential and cuts off 25,
Frg, 77b';causing,28,'and2Sa to condUCt. As 26a
coildU:cts,. the signal. HCSEris prOduced to com)jifie with tater signaUnk In prOducing the half
CCittectibn SuppresSIon signal. WHeh 26 COnducts,- it acts via 30aand 31' to produce signal
D!v. CMe; TIl.ls sigj,'ia! acts through S:"'DVC
(Fig, 78D) to condition. 1: Tlie later Ifik signal
cutS.,Off' !fa to render 1 conductive. This causes
gate trigger II ofthecohlmutator :OVC to turil.
With, II turned; it maintains i aild 16 nonconductive. Non-cohductive_ 2' Conditions 6 aild
also serves via 5 to prodUce the. sllstained, presehSeslgnaiD-PREwhfch ii:happlied, tQ I-Ull and
:an-Ii iIi. F'Ig', 6'5'e for causlniUhe "up divide bus"
to De P.,lacied:at: increased pOtential (see Section
14b) , aild;. tor. initii~tihg oPeration Of the MOC
cancel, circuit"
Outiilg the, T. de' step,. tlie.. signal T I· is given
and' operatas.seiectect:pi!ot, unit .. L to produce- the
signal ES'I to Int, s6 that tne divisor is applied
to' the~ Internal I ooses:. The- piLae.- signal occurs and is followed by the signal Pil.OCC which
causes' conditioned- 24T tb turn' 21 u. T'his' produces' the- firSt' OP';()C' Signal in' tiie- Second naIf
of tHe" scanning: requenoo;
This first- Signal OP.OO' causes' conditioned 6,
Fig; 78D', to turn- 16: which turnS 14, TUrned
11': makes 9 oondiI6t 00-, produce signal DRC'.
'PHis ,sigIial iC'aU.ooS :the,reglste1.·NIC~DR-' (Fig., 6417)
1;Ol b!s:; reset., (SEiI!£ SMion'. '14bf'.._ The next BP

2,636,672

244

243

pulse resets 14, Fig. 78D, ending the signal DRC
and tUrning lB. The next AP pulse resets 18,
which turns 15. Turned 15 acts through 13 to
produce signal DR-R!. This causes the divisor
now on the Internal buses to enter register
MC-DR. Trigger 15 is reset by the next AP
pulse, ending the signal DR-RI and turning 19.
Thereupon 20 is made to conduct and cut off IBa.
As 16 is cut off when commutator DVC is condi tioned, the couple I 6-16a now acts through
12 to produce the Signal OP.BS. This resets
21U, ending the T OC step, whereupon the divisor is removed from the Internal buses. The
return of 21U also initiates the U OC step during which signal UI is produced. Signal TIl
operates selected pilot unit 2 to cause ES2 to
apply the dividend to the Internal buses. Also,
a. signal Pil.OC is produced and causes 21V to
turn, whereupon a signal· OP.OC appears and
acts via 6, Fig. 78D, to return I9-DVC. Upon
the return of 19, it turns 23 which makes 21 conduct and produce the signal DDC. This signal
cancels the register PQ (Fig. 64h), as explained
in Section 14b. Trigger 23 is reset by the next
BP pulse, ending signal DDC and reversing 21.
The next AP pulse resets 21, causing it to turn
22, whereupon 25 produces the signal DO-RI, so
that the dividend now on the Internal buses is
entered in the dividend orders 5 to 18 of the register PQ (see Fig. 66A). The next AP pulse
returns 22, Fig. 78D, ending the Signal DD-RI
and also turning 31. Turned 31 renders 20a
conductive to cut off 16a, whereupon the signal
OP.BS is given and returns 21V. Since the V
spot is conditioned for an IC step, the signal
OP.BS resets 5V, which turns 6V.
One AP pulse cycle later, 31, Fig. 78D, is reset and turns 3D, causing 29 to produce signal
DV-ST which initiates the dividing computation (see Section 14b). At the end of the dividing computation, the MD unit applies the signal R-CPLT to the commutator DVC (Fig. 78D).
The signal cuts off 2B. At the first effective AP
pulse, 28a is cut off and 28-2Ba is then effective
via. 26 to return 30.
Upon the return of 30, signal DV-ST terminates and, also, 34 turns. Upon 34 turning, it
makes 33 conduct and produce the signal R.RO
which causes the quotient to be read out from
PQ to the Internal buses.
When 34 turned, it reversed 35. The next AP
pulse resets 35, causing it to turn 36. The following AP pulse resets 36, caUSing 32 to turn for
one AP pulse cycle. Upon the return of 32, it
resets 34, ending the R.RO signal, and also l'esets 10 and II, restoring commutator DVC to
initial, decopditioned status.
When 36-DVC was turned, it made 24 conduct, cutting off 16a, so that the signal OP.BS
was produced. In the manner explained in Section 17, this signal now resets 6V and the V Ie
step continues. During the continuation of this
step, the quotient is shifted by the donominational shift unit 9 places to the right and transmitted via ES3 to relay storage unit 136.
20.

scribed with reference to Figs. 47b, 47c, 51,.and
52a.

;)

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

Operations relating to the table look-up

The .table look-up apparatus was described
briefiy in Section 10. Portions of the circuits
for reading a computed argument into the ap- 70
paratus and for reading out selected functional
values from the apparatus were also described
in Section 10 with reference to Fig. 35. In Section 11, the selection of table look-up Group Ins
and Outs and of Table Ins and Outs were de- 75

Fig. 35a is a block diagram indicating relationship between elements of the table look-up
apparatus. As mentioned in Section 10, the
table look-up operation is initiated by the energization of relay RII (Fig. 35). Under control
of this relay and in a manner described in application Serial No. 768,600 of Hamilton et 11.1,
filed August 14, 1947, the computed argument
storage means CA (Fig. 35a) is reset. Also, under control of and after the energization of relay RII, the relays R40, and R41 (Fig. 35a) are
deenergized. When the table look-up operation
is completed, these relays again are energized
and remain energized until another table lookup operation is initiated. After computed argument storage CA has been reset under control
of RII, the computed argument enters therein
under control of temporary computed argument
storage TCA (also see Fig. 35). The computed
argument is compared with station arguments
by station comparison units which are arranged
in accordance with the arrangement of stations
in the various tables I to 6. This comparison
selects one of the stations, in the selected table,
from which the computed argument is to select
a tape argument. This selection is effected by
the energization of one of the station selector
relays ISS to 36SS. The selected station relay
controls circuits to bring into operation the
clutch drives for the selected argument station
and companion functional value tape stations.
Further, the selected station relay operates
means for closing contact pOints between sensing elements of the selected argument station
and an intrastation selection comparing means.
The intrastation selection comparing means
compares the computed argument with tape arguments on the selected argument tape. Tllis
comparison selects a tape argument and its companion functional values. After this selection
is checked, the relays R40 and R41 are energized.
The selected functional values are now in sensing positions and may be read out as called for by
the program. The selected station relay in conjunction with a selected Table Out relay and in
accordance with plugging, causes energization
of one or two of the relays ISS to 36SS and IBSS
to 36BSS, one of the selected relays being a BSS
and the other an ASS relay. The selectedstation relays close points in the readout circuits
for the selected functional values, as described in
Section 10 (also see Fig. 35) .
The functional values selected to be read out
are routed into Out bus-sets and thence, in the
same way as other values, into electronic storage.
The entries into electronic storage are piloted by
the pilot units, in the manner described in previous sections. Before a pilot unit can produce
a signal for timing entry into electronic storage
from an Out bus-set, the pilot unit must receive
a Forward Signal from the source of the value
to be entered. In the case of the table look-up
apparatus the Forward signal is not to be given
until and unless a tape argument and its companion functional values have been selected and
are ready to be read out. This selection is manifested by the energization of relays R40 and &41.
When relay R4D is energized, it opens its points
c (Fig. 35b) to break the circuits of any of the
relays TOC which may have been previously
established during a table look-up operation. As
a .result of the deenergization of the relay TOe,
its points a (Fig·. 47c) close so as to permit the

Beq'l!ell'OOsrorage circuits to' De 'selectively ;estab;..
lished; in·accordance with the program, through
theccorrespomiing one of the table Out relays
ITO to 6TO. The energized relay TO closes its
contaet'5 c 8'la·andb(Fig.35b) which are pOints
of· the' Forward signal circuit for the table lookup apparatus. Other points in' this circuit are
contacts of the' selected station relays IASS to
36ASS and IBBS to 36BSS. still other points
of the Forward signal circuits are contacts 81 of
the' table look-up group Out relays TLU-GOcI to
8; The' plugging wHlbe r.:J.ade between socket.s
ROGSI and sockets ROBia and Bib in accordance with which of the station readout relays are
to be·used 'for reading out functional values; Assume, for instance; that readout relay lASS ·is
to' be energized when' a certain functional' value
in table I has been found. Upon energizatioll
of table out relay ITO and a selected table lookup group 'Out; fO'rinstance, table look-up group
Out I; a. Forward signal path will'be closed from
the +150 v. line via a point 81 of IASBand point
Bla'of ITO; plugging betweenR081a and ROG8·1
associated with contact S I of TLU-GO I, and 'via
the -latter contact to bus 81 of Out bus-set I.
The 'computed argument will be transmitted
to the table 1001~-l1p apparatus from electronic
storage under control of a transmission signal
ES·to In produced 'by a pilot unit: Oneo£ the
conditions for a pilot unit to produce a transmission signal is that the pilot unit first receive
a Back signal from the unit which is to receive
the transmitted value. If the table look-up apparatus is selected to receive a value, then it will
function to produce a Back signal if the apparatus is not in the process of looking up a value.
If the apparatus has completed the process of
looking up desired values in accordance with a
selection by computed argument, .then relays R40
and R41 are energized. The relay R41 then
closes its contacts bs (Fig. 35b). The selected
tablelook-up-relay alw closes its 'points .81, and
a Back signal path is then established from the
+150 Y. line through the contacts bs of'R41 and
the . contacts 81 of the selected relay TLU-GII
to B,to the bus BI of the corresponding In
bus-set.
A'program for a tablelook~up operation is given
belovr:

246:

interpreting theabl)ve:.program,the'·signa;lOCO

5

10

u;:

20

25:.

30

35

40

45

50
PI Pb PT. Q8. Qb Qr
2112741281

R8

Rb. . Rr

SRI. QP1 ..81·
0201

The P field calls for a computed argument to
be'read out of relay storage unit 121, via Out
bus-set I ,to electronic storage unit E81. The Q
field is an Infield 'since 4 stands inQs. TheIn
field Q .calls for the computed argument which
has been entered in ES I to be transmitted therefrom to the table look-up apparatus, since the
code number 281 in Qr represents table I of the
table look-up apparatus. This means that the
table look-up gang relay ITL will be ·energized.
SinceQb contains I, table look.;.up Group~lngang
relay TLU'::'Gllwillbe energized, in the manner'
ex:plained in Section 11.
The energized relay TL closes its· contacts-d
(Fig. 35b) so as to establish the circuit of the
pIckup coil p'of the corresponding relay TOe.
The"ciI'cuit of the hold coil' h of the relay is establishedvia the stick contacts band the' normally closed contacts cof R40.
Tlrecodenumber 02 in OPI·calls for thecon~
ditioning·ofthe accumulator control commutatorACC;C . (Fig. 78:A) ,in the manner explained
in;Secition 17. During the commutator run for'

55

60

65

70

75;

arcts.in conjunction with:a:E'orward:!)ignal from
electronic storage uniLl21' to ·cause .pilot unit I
to produce the signal Out'.to ESI for entering
the computed argwnent into ESI: The signal
PSstarts the scanning.sequence; TheP I signal
is.·.given andcontrols.pilot unit.Ltoprodtree the
sig'nal ESI to Int, wherebyESI applies the computed arugmentto the Internal buses. As this
occurs, pilot.lllit I producesthe,PiLOC signal
which causes 21Q (Fig. 78d) to turn. Consequently, the signal OP.OC is produced and.operates .on conditioned ACC.C to cause it to produce
the signals RCC, ECC. and' ACC":'RI.. The computed argument now· on the Internal buses is
entered.. in .registers' .EC of: the.ae.cumulator. An
accumulator cycle ensues and the computed argument is tra:nsferred to registers RC·oftheacculUulator.unit: At completion of the accumulator
cycle, the sig'nal CYGPT operates on ACC.C to
cause it to. produce the signal.OP.ES;· This ·signal resets 2lQ (Fig. 78d), causing 22Q to turn
for one AP pulse .cycle. Since.. Q is .an In field,
the Q. spot has been .conditioned for an IC step.
ina manner explained in Section 17b. Accordingly, 23Q is prevented from .turning when 22Q
returns. Instead, the return .of 22Q restores 5Q.
which thereupon turns 6Q. When. 6Q. turns it
produces the signal OF.IC which operates on
ACe.C to cause it to produce·thesignal:R;ROC.
Accordingly, the signals .ACC-RO and Proceed
are produced. Signal ACC-RO causes the accumulator unit to apply. the computed .argument,
entered during the P OC. step' to the Internal
buses; Proceed signal acts on ACG.C to. cause
it to produce another signal OP;BS. This signal
now restores 6Q which results jn the turning of
I 'Q. In the manner described in the preceding
Sections 17, 17.aand 17b,the.turning of'trigger
Uof a scanning spot of the commutator initiates
the operation of. the denOminational shift unit
to receive the, number on the Internal buses,
while the sign of the number is stored in 2M or
SM, (Fig~ 78a). The denominational shift " unit
proceeds to shift the number' the selected amount,
and at the end of this'shHt the complete signal
SHCP is returned to the main commutator 'and
causes it to produce the signals SHRD and SHRO
for reading out the shifted number and its sign
to the Internal buses. One AP pulse cycle later
the signal CSV is produced which returns IIQ,
causing. 15Q to turn. This results in the Production of signal Q2 which controls. selected pilot
unit I to pilot the computed argum'Cnt· and its
sign, now applied to' the Internal buses by the
denominational shift unit and sign storage triggers, into ES I. As this is done; the pilot unit
produces the signal Pi LIC which causes 1'5Q
to return. Upon the return of 15Q it turns 16Q
for one AP pulse cycle. When fSQ is ill turned'
position, it produces the signal Q3. This signal
is one of the conditions' for the initiation of
transmission from selected electronic storage unit
ESI, as rnay be understood from'Section 17. Another condi tionis the Presense .signal' NPR. A
third condition is the Back signal from the selected receiving unit, which in this case is the'
table look-up apparatus. This Back signal is
produced in :the manner'exphiined .before in this
section (see Fig. 35b)' Since pilot unit I has
been selected, the Back Signal will be applied to
this pilot unit. The Backsignal,actingjn conjunction with the Presense signal NPR, causes
the .pilot unittoproducethe'Resetsrgnalin the
manner' described in Seeti'on 17, 'The Reset'sig'-

i,ea.e,e7i

247

nal in this case is applied by bus 82 of In busset 1 to the now closed points 82 (Fig. 35) of
TLU-GII and thence via the points a of R40
(energized since a table look-up operation has
not yet been initiated), and from there through
the pickup coil p of relay RII to the +150 v.line.
Upon energization of coil p of RII, it closes its
contacts a so as to shunt out the contacts R40a.
Under control of relay RII, when energized, relays R40 andR41 (Fig. 35a) are deenergized, as
previously stated.
Assuming that the Back signal, the Presense
signal and the Q3 signal all have been produced,
the selected pilot unit I produces the signal ES I
to In which causes electronic storage unit I to
apply the computed argument and sign to In
bus-set I. The computed argument is transmitted via this In bus-set to the contacts of
TLU-GII (Fig. 35) plug sockets BP and ITP,
and contacts of ITL to temporary computed
argument storage, as explained in Section 10.
The table look-up operation then occurs in the
manner previously explained. At the end of this
table look-up operation the relays R40 and R41
are deenergized and functional values, selected
in accordance with the computed argument, are
positioned at reading positions of the selected
tape stations.
During the process of looking up the desired
values under control of a computed argument,
other computations may be and are as a rule performed in accordance with instructions given by
lines of sequence following the line which includes the program such as given above for directing a table look-up operation to be performed.
After a variable, desired number of lines of
sequence have been interpreted, following the
line which called for a table look-up operation,
another line of sequence is used to direct the
functional values selected in the previous table
look-up operation to be read out. Such line of
sequence may be, for example, as follows:
P.

Pb

T. Tb
2

3

SlSeq
Q. Qb Qr R8 Rb Rr SHI OPI S1
212812228100201
S2Seq
Tr Q. Qb Qr V8 Vb Vr SH2 OP2 S2
281 2
4
281 4
02
02

248

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

Pr

45

It is assumed, for this example, that two sta-

tion readout relays have been selected by the
table look-up operation, one being a relay ASS
and the other a relay BSS (see Fig. 35). It is assumed further than two functional values are
recorded on the selected line of the tape to be
read out via points of the selected relay ASS and
two other functional values are recorded on the
line selected to be read out via pOints of the
relay BSS.
For this example, the plugging. in the Forward
signal Circuits (Fig. 35b) of the Table look-up
is from the pair of sockets R081 a and R081 b
associated with points 81 a and SI b of ITO to
the sockets ROG81 associated with points 81 of
TLU-GOI, 2, 3, and 4.
When the table look-up operation has been
completed, the relay R40 is energized, so that
its point c (Fig. 35b) is now open and the relay
ITOC is deenergized.
Assume the last-given line of sequence is now
in one side of sequence storage and this side is
now heated. Since the code number 281 is in
the subfield r of fields Q, R, T, and U, and since
point ITOCa (Fig. 47c) is now closed, the Table
Out pyramids for these fields all pick up gang
rela.y ITO (also see Section 11). Also, since the

50

55

60

65

70

75

code number. in the subfields r of these fields is
.between 200 and 399, the Qb, Rb, Tb, and Ub
trees in the table look-up Group Out pyramids
(Fig. 47b and Section 11) are heated. As the
Qb, Rb, Tb, and Ub trees are respectively set at
I, 2, 3, and 4, the table look-up gang relays
TLU-GOI, 2, 3, and 4 are energized.
Forward signals are then applied from the
+150 v. line in Fig. 35b, via contacts 81 of the
selected ASS relay and the selected BSS relay
to the contacts 81a and b of relay ITO', thence
via the plugging from sockets R081 a and b associated with the latter contacts to sockets ROGSI
associated with contacts 81 of TLU-GOI, 2, 3,
and 4. The circuits continue in parallel via the
latter contacts to buses 81 of Out bus-sets I, 2,
3, and 4, whereby Forward signals are applied
to pilot units 1,2,3, and 4.
The energization of the selected table look-up
relays ITO and TLU-GOI, 2, 3, and 4, as well as
of the ASS and BSS pair of relays causes the
four functional values from two selected tapes
in the table look-up means to be applied to Out
bus-sets I, 2, 3, and 4. The readout plugging,
for this example, may be from, say, sockets 3
to 40 of group IA (Fig. 35) to sockets 3 to 40 of
ROGI, from sockets 43 to 80 of group IA to sockets 3 to 40 or ROG2, from sockets 3 to 40 of
group IB to hubs 3 to 40 of ROG3, and from hubs
43 to 80 of IE to hubs 3 to 40 of ROG4. In this
way, four nine-place numbers and their signs may
be read out from two selected functional value
stations in the table look-up to columns 1 to 10
buses of four Out bus-sets.
After the heating of the Out sequence storage
circuits, the signal SCM is given. At the same
time, the heating signals appear for the pilot
units selection trees (Figs. 54 to 58), the In code
and Operational Sign sequence storage circuits
(Figs. 61 and 60), the SHI, Q, and R shift code
sequence storage circuits (Figs. 62 and 63) and
the OPI pyramid (Fig. 59). Two AP pulse cycles
later, the Ink signal occurs and completes the
conditioning of ACC.C (Fig. 78A) since OPI contains code number 02 (see Section 17), and also
completes the conditioning of the V sPOt (Fig.
78h) for an IC step.
The signals OCO and PS are given at this time.
Signal OCO and the Forward signals control
the selected pilot units I, 2, 3, and 4 to produce
the signals for entering the functional values
selected by the table look-up unit into ES I, 2,
3, and 4.
The PS signal initiates the scanning sequence,
and signal PI is given. Since field P is blank, the
signal PI acts through the blank code pilot unit
Be (Fig. 78L) to produce the signal Pil.OC. This
causes 21Q to turn and produce signal OP.OC.
As commutator ACC.C is conditioned, signal
OP.OC controls this commutator to produce the
signals RCC, ECC and ACC-RI. Since there is
no value now on the Internal buses, no entry
occurs into the accumulator. The cycle complete
signal CYCPT is returned to ACC.C which produces the signal OP.BS, causing return of 21Q.
This initiates the Q OC step, and signal Q I is
given.
Signal Q I causes selected pilot unit I to produce signal ES I to Int, so that the value received
before by ES I is applied to the Internal buses
and a Pil.OC signal is returned to the main commutator. This signal now turns 21R giving an
OP.OC signal. Signal OP.OC !lets on ACC.C to
cause it to produce the signals for bringing about
entry of the va.lue on the Internal buses into the

,2;686,672

'249

250

accumulator. After this entry has been made,
'~earlyand late"means provides, specifically,'for
-ACC.C produces signal OP.BS which returns 21R,
two stations in a bank to read out a next line of
terminating the Q OC step and initiating the
sequence data after which two other stations in
R OC step.
the bank may be read out,all ,in a single comThe R OG, T OC,U OC and V IC steps are per- 5 mutator run. To plug a bank for reading out to
formed sequentially in the manner covered in
four Out bus-sets, sockets ASSP (Fig. 32a) must
previous sections. It is to be noted that in the
be.plugged to sockets TS-GOP related to two of
V IC step, the accumulator will be read out and
the Group Outs and sockets BSSP must be plugs Proceed signal given. Accordingly, ACC.C Willged to sockets TS-GOP related to two other
be reconditioned to produce the signal ReC in a 10 Group Outs for the same bank. Further, the
next accumulator sequence. The sum of th,:)
relays ASS and, BSS, for one pair of stations and
functional values mayor may not be transmitted
the ,Group outs selected for these stations must
to storage, depending on the instructions record-beoperated first and after' entries from these
ed in the V field. In this exanwle, the V field
' stations into electronic storage have been' comis blank in subfields band T, so the sum of the 15 pleted, then only may the relays ASS and BS8
values will not be stored. The purpose of this
and selected pair of Group Outs for, the other
run has been merely to enter values from the
pair of stations be energized.
table look-up apparatus into electronic storage
Assume, for example, as in Section, 16b, Item
, and the commutator ACC.C has been selected to
8, that stations I and (0 of bank 1 are to be read
produce the back signal" OP.BS for enabling the 20 out via their A and-B selectors,- respectively, to
scanning sequence to proceed to completion.
Out bus-sets land a.Assume, further, that
If desired, values may be entered via Out bus-stations 3 and 4 are to be read out via. their
sets into electronic storage during a commutator
A and B selectors, respectively, to Out ,bus-sets
run in whIch none of the commutators ACC.C,
I and 2. If all f{)ur stations are to be read,out
MYC, and DVC is conditioned. The program 2,) in the same commutator run, then gang relays
data controlling such run will not include an ef,·
lASS and I DBSS and Group Outs 1 and· a must
fective In field. When the V field is blank, the
be operated first and their data entered into
V spot is conditioned to perform an OC step,
ESl and a. After completion of. this entry, the
as in Section 1Gb, Item 26V. Accordingly, the
relays lASS and IOB8Sand Group Outs 1 and a
scanning sequence may be completed in the man- 30 must be dropped, and then relays '3ASSand
ner described in Section 1Gb. An illustrative line
4B8S and Group Outs land 2 may be operated.
of sequence ordering entry from Out bus-sets
In other words, the heating of the Out sequence
into electronic storage, without the use of the
storage circuits for the selected "early ,and late"
. commutator ACC.C or an In field js:
tape storage bank must be deferred until after
1'8 Pb PT Q. Qb QT Rs Rb RT 8H1 01'1 81
35 the sequence data entry completion signalSE
2
1
281 2
2
281
01
(Section 16b,Item 25) has been given. This is
done by delaying -the pick up of heating relays
'1'8 Tb TT U,j Ub UT V.. Vb VT 8Hz 01'2 82
X4, X5, orXG, depending on which tape storage
2
3
281 2
4
281
0 2 , bank has been selected for "early and late" operSince the OP fields are blan!{, the commutator 40 ation.
NO (Fig. 73c) will be conditioned, as in Section
If "early and late" operation of a· tape storage
16b. During the scanning sequence, signals PI,
bank is to be effected, the "early and late" 81,
QI, RI, TI, m and VI will be given. Signal PI
S2 pyramids (Fig. 50) are plugged according to
will act through chassis BC (see Fig. 781, and
the SI andS2 code numbers to the gang socket
Section 1Gb, Item 26P) to produce signal Pil.OCTSLI, 2, or 3 (Fig. 53b) according to whether
for causing21Q to turn. The resulting' signal 40 the bank to be so operated is bank I, 2, or 3.
OP.OC will act. on commutator NO to C2,use it
To continue with the previous example,sockets
to produce sigm,l OP.BS for returning 21Q to
SELPIlI andD2 are _plugged to socket TSLI.
initiate the Q OC step. The signal QI will be
Socket TSLI is wired to line Late 4. This line
(also see Figs. 76g and 75g) is coupled to the grid
given but since pilot unit I has been selected
by Qb, the signal Pil.OC will be given by this 00 of S.Fig. 75g.
pilot unit and cause 21 R to turn. Signal OP.OC
The "early and late" S I, 82, pyramids
will again be produced and go to commutator NO
(Fig. 50) are made up of points of-intermediate
for causing it to produce signal OP.BS for resequence storage relays AI, on the A side, ,and of
setting 2!R. The RI signal will be given and
pointsofrelaYsBI,ontheBside(seeSectionU).
cause selected pilot unit 2 to produce signal 65 The intermediate relays are energized earlier
Pil.OC, and so on. In this way, the signals for
than the operational relays (AOP or BOP) of
continuing; the scanning sequence will be given
sequence storage. Energization of relays AI (or
by the selected pilot units, the blank code pilot
BD is. effected when the sequence data is transunit, and the commutator NO.
mitted from ESland S. The relays AI then
21. The "early and late" operation
\)0 close points to pick up the operational relays
AOP (or BOP). The STR signal, given- at com'As explained in Section 9, only two stations in
pletion of sequence data transmission (see Secthe same tape storage bank can be read out
tion 1Gb, Item 33) drops the AOR (or BOR) resimultaneously, one via its A station selector
lays so as to provide stick circuits for the ener(Fig. 31) and the other via its B station selector. (i0 gized AOP (or BOP) relays. TheSTRDI pulse,
some 10 ms. later, energizes the AIR (or BIR)
Normally, therefore, a line of sequence may direct
a tape storage bank to read out only two of its
relays (see Section 16b, Item 39) to drop the AI
stations to two Out bus-sets. To make greater
(or ED relays. When the STRD I pulse has
use of a tape storage bank, "early and late" means
been given, when the scanning sequence also has
are provided to enable four stations in the same 70 been completed, and when the all-entry delay
bank to be read out during a single commutator
pulse AED also has been given,. a new commurun. Two of these stations· may be read· out
tator run for interpreting the sequence data just
concurrently to two Out bus "'sets after whiCh
'transmitted to sequence storage may begin. Be,two of-the other stations in the same bank may
tween the time ofenergization of the AI (or'BD
:beread out to two other Out bus.;.sets.The75relaysbythe STRsignal time, and the deenergi-

2,686,672

251
zationof these relays some 10 ms. later by the
STRDI pulse, the "early and late" SI, S2 pyramids (Fig. 50) function to set up a delay in the
heating time for the Out sequence storage circuits
of the selected "early and late" bank. The delay
is terminated when, in the new commutator run,
the sequence data has been safely entered in
electronic storage. The terminating signal in
this case is the SED signal (see Section 16b,
Item 30).
In the assumed example, when relays AI (or
BI> have been energized according to a new line
of sequence data, the S I, S2 pyramids are set according to the code numbers 01 and 02. The
SI, S2 Station Move, Group Outs, and Unit OUts
pyramids are heated by points of relays XI (or
YO energized at STR signal time (see Section
16b, Items 7 and 36>' The "early and late" S I,
S2 pyramids are heated at STR signal time, as
follows. The STR signal acts via 23a, Fig. 75e,
to turn 2 B, cutting off 21. With 21 a already at
cut-off under control of 22 in reset state, 21-21a
produces increased potential on wire x2w. The
increased potential on this wire conditions a grid
of II, Fig. 75/. The trigger 22, Fig. 75e, will be
turned by a next AE signal (see Section 16b,
Item 28). The next STR signal will return 2B,
Fig. 75e. Accordingly, increased potential will
then be applied by couple 2l-21a to the wire of
y2w, causing 10, Fig. 75/, to be conditioned. Thus,
either the tube II or lOin Fig. 751 is conditioned
at the STR signal time depending on whether
the A or B side, respectively, of sequence storage
is to be heated. The STR signal also acts, as described in Section 16b, Item 10, via 5, Fig. 75/,
to turn the first trigger 4 of the ''Late Delay."
Upon this trigger turning, it applies increased
potential to grids of 10 and II. One of these
also is receiving increased potential on its other
grid, at the STR signal time, as just described.
Accordingly, when 4 turns, it renders one of the
tubes 10 and II conductive. If II conducts, it
acts via 5a to place· increased potential on line
x LATE, but if 10 conducts, it acts via 15 to cause
increased potential to be present on the line y
LATE. Increased potential on line x LATE
makes 3 and 4 in Fig. 76g conduct to apply decreased potential to the line ELX. Increased
potential on line y LATE makes 5 and 6 in Fig.
76y conduct to place decreased potential on line
ELY. The line ELX is the heating line for the
A side of the S I, S2 "early and late" pyramids
(Fig. 50) while the line ELY is the heating line
for the B side of these pyramids.
In the above manner the proper side of the
"early and late" pyramids is heated at STR signal time. Upon tlie heating of these pyramids,
they apply cut-off potential, in the assumed example via SELPOI and 02 and TSLI (Fig. 53b),
and via line Late 4to 8, Fig. 75g.
Two AP pulse cycles are allowed for sensing the existence of an "early and late" plugging. This delay is provided by the "Late Delay" in Fig. 75/. At the end of the delay, trigger I, Fig. 75/, turns and is effective through
8 to produce cut-off potential on line Late Ink.
The cut-off potential. is applied by this line to
8a, Fig. 75g .. Since 8 .also has been cut off, couple 8-8a acts now via 9 to turn I 0 so as to block
II and 11 from becoming conductive. The trigger 12 or 18 is also turned. at this time, as qescribed in Section 16b,Items 11 and. 28.. ,Briefiy,
if line x2w has been previously raised in potential, at STR signal time as explained before, it
renders 29 conductive to cut ot! Ua. Fig. 75/.

252

Two AP pulse cycles later, the decreased potential on line Late Ink cuts off 21, whereupon
21-21a causes 12 to apply a negative impulse
vi'a line 102 to 12, Fig. 75y, turning it. In a
5 similar way, 18, Fig. 75y, is turned if line y2w
has been increased in potential. If the "early
and late" pyramids were not plugged to Late 4,
then 10, Fig. 75g, would not be turned at Late
Ink time. The turning of 12 or 18 at this time
10 would then render II or 11 conductive, so that
heating relay X4 or Y4 would be energized.
When, 'as in the assumed example, the "early
and late" pyramids are plugged to line Late 4,
then 10 and 12 or I B are turned at the same
15 Late Ink time. The turning of 10 prevents the
turning of 12 or 18 at this time from rendering
II or 11 conductive, so that relay X4 or Y4 is not
energized.
The relays X4 and Y4 are heating relays for
20 the A and B sides, respectively, of the bank 1
tape storage Group Out trees (Fig. 47b), bank
1 move relay trees (Fig. 47c) and of the bank 1
station selector ASS and BSS trees (Fig. 47d).
Thus, when X4 (or Y4) is not energized, the bank
25 1 pyramids and trees cannot function to pick
up Group Outs, Move relays, and ASS and BSS
relays.
The trigger 12 or I B in Fig. 75g is not reset
,until an all-entry complete signal AE is given
30 (see Section 16b, Item 28). In the "early and
late" operation, the sequence data entry complete signal SE 'and its delay signal SED are
given before the AE signal because Forward signals from the required units of the bank selected
35 for "early. and late" operation are delayed. The
signal SED (Section l6b, Item 30) resets trigger
10, Fig. 75g. This allows the trigger 12 or Ill,
still reversed, to render II or 11 conductive, so
that the heating relay X4 or Y4, as the case may
40 be, is then energized. The bank 1 pyramids
may then function to pick up the desired Group
Outs, station selector relays ASS and BSS, and
Move relays, after which Forward signals are
applied to the selected Out bus-sets.
45
Similarly, the "early and late" S I, S2 pyramids
(Fig. 50) may be plugged to line Late 5 01' Late
6, if four stations are to be read out during a run
from bank 2 or bank 3 of tape storage. The
Late 5 line if selected will cut off 20, Fig. 75g ..
50 and the line Late 6, if selected, will cut off 2,
Fig'. 75k. If 20, Fig. 75g, is cut off, the Late Ink
signal when it cuts off 20a, causes 20-20a to act
through 21 to turn 22, whereby 23 and 29 are cut
off. This prevents 24 or 3D, whichever is turned
55 at Late Ink time, from rendering 23 or 29 conductive so that relay X5 or Y5 is not energized
and the heating of the bank 2 sequence storage
circuits is delayed. If 2, Fig; 75k, has been cut
off, the Late Ink signal when it cuts off 2a,
60 causes 2-2a to operate through 3 to turn 4;
whereby 5 and II are blocked from being made
conductive by turning of 6 01' 12 at Late Ink
time. Thus the relay X6 or YG, as the case may
be, is not . energized and the bank 3 sequence
65 storage circuits are not heated until the signal
SED is given. This signal restores 4, Fig. 75k,
. and 22 and 10 in Fig. 75g.
The next BP pulse after turning of I, Fig. 75/,
resets,lt, whereupon 4 is reset, terminating the
70 heating of the "early and late" S I, S2 pyramids
(Fig. 50) . . This may be safely done since the
test for an "early and late" plugging has already. been made and the Late Ink Signal has
already been given to cause trigger 10 or 22 in
75 Fig.75fl oJ." 4 ip Fig, 75". to turn so as to delay

:253

:the.:heating .'df tape ,storage 'bank. 11, :2,:or '3sequence storage relays.
An illustrative program 'for which the "early
and late" operation may. be used. is:

294

:::trom: four~T:ela.y storage units",m-::mJlt'int;:e1ght,,9-

:.digit ,'numbers, and their. eightiSgnS,' as:r:ea.d out
.:from:the halves ofthe,four~stomge;units. The
lIJrintingunit:alsohas.sufficienticapacity to pro;jvideapproptiate'separation. between the. numbers
Ps Pb Pr Qa Qb Qr RsRb Rr SHI OPI SI
;printed along ·.a line.
2
1
505 2 . 2
010 2 3
011 7
15
01
:The: print structure is, except for certain::difT. 'l'b Tr U. Ub Ur V. Vb Vr SH2 OP2 82
'ferences which will.be indicated, .of'the kind dis2
4
50S 2 '5
012 4 6 013
15
02-closedjn.prior.Patents2;079~418;;.2,199;547 '.and
Assume the code numbers Oland 02 in SI and 10 2,042;324. Referring. to: Fig.: 82, theprinting.unit
S2 'are to select .stations ,I and 10 of bank ,1 to
,includes:a platen roller.:!2p. 'The.';work sheet is
read out sequence data to, ES1, and S. The code
,:brought around the :platen and' ov.er aJ)m';'feed
number 505 in,Pr calls for data to be readout ofwheel.,295,.then ..over :a.·,cover:.plate :296. .Behind
of station 2, bank 1 via its A station selector, and
,the platen '.roller 'are eighty-nine ',parallel,.verdigit 1 in Pb calls. for· the data to go to ESI. The 15 :ttcally disposed type carriers 93p.:Eaeh type carcode number, 508 .in Tr directs. data· to be read
·.rier '. mounts, ,one ,above the other ,eleven :. type
out of station 3, bank I,via its B station selector,
,slides :94p bearing;types which: are, :from 'top' to
and digit 4 in Tb calls for the· data to go to ES4'oottom, 9,0, 7,6, 5, 4, 3, .2, 1, -,0 .. ~he types are
Assume the above program has been set in the
inverted.in order that the:recarded ..characters
A side of sequence storage. The last given STR 20 Ji)trinnprig'ht position for Yiewing:by'an observer
signal has caused relay XI to be energized, so
When.the printed portion,of thecsheet is on:.or in
the SI, S2 pyramids on the A side are heated
front of cover plate 29B.Each type carrier is
and cause relays lASS, ~OBSS, '1'8-001 and 8,
.:connected at the bottom:·toa'linlt:91ppivoted'st
and Move relays MA and,J.\.IB, all in bank,1.to be
98p, and connected:bya spring:!9p to a,common
energized, as in Section .16b, Item 8. The "early 25 bar lOOp. Bar I BOp is fixed 'between arms 10 I p
and late" pyramids (Fig. 50) have been heated,
and .fast to a shaft 102p.. Connected by links
on the A side, atSTRtime,b:ecausetube'II"Fig'104ptoarms 10lp is.a restoring bail ID3p over75t, has been rendered ,conductive. Accordlying all the arms 91p.
ingly, line Late 4 has been reduced in potential
. Fixed to the shaft 102p is,an, arm I05pwhich
and has cut offS, Fig. 75g. Two, AP pulse cycles 30'is connected by link 10Bpto a.cam follower 101p.
later, the signal Late Ink appears and cuts off
The ',cam follower follows a:.pairof complemen&a, Fig. 75y; so that trigger lOis turned and blocks
tary cams I09p and II Dp which are fixed to a
II. Trigger 12,Fig. 75g; also is. turned at Late Ink
cam.shaft I lip. Duringeach'revolutionof the
time but with II cut off, the relays Xii. are not
'cam shaft the cams I09p and IIOposcillate.the
,energized.
35 cam follower IOlp. Upon the ,counterclockwise
In the enSUing commutator run,'.the oeo sigmovement of follower 101P, shaft '02p and arms
nal operates on selected~pilot·unitsESl and 8
t.lllp move clockvlise.Restoringbar 'IG3p also
to cause it to pilot the sequence data from stamoves clockwise while the springs' 99p: force the
tions I and 10 of bank 1 into ESl and 8, as in
arms 97p to follow, elevating the ,type carSection I6b, Item 2.4b. The SE signal is given 40 riers 93p.
after the sequence data have been entered and
The type carriers maybe individually arrested
stations land 10, bank 1, havebeen:advanced
.in ,different positions to present selected types
under control of Move signals from pilot units 1
at print position, The arresting means includes
and 8. The SE signal causes XI to be deenergized
.ratchet teeth II!Jp provided on each type carrier
(Section 16b, Item 29). Accordingly, relays 45 and spaced similarly to the type slides 94p, exlASS, IOBSS, TS-G01, TS-G08, MA and MB,
cept for the last, 0 type slide, which has no corall in bank I are dropped. Some, 8 ms.later "sig:responding tooth 119p but is presented to printnal SED appears (Section 16b,. Item30),and.r.eing position when the type carrier rises to its
sets I D, Fig. 75y, whereupon, relay X4is enerlimit. Arranged to coact with'the ratchet teeth
gized, heating the bank l'sequencestoragepyra- 50 ,of each type carrier isa pawl I t8pheldby armamids. Thereupon, relays lAAS,3BSS, TS;.;.GOI.
ture latch I flp of a magnet PM from engaging
TS-G04,andMA andMB, all inbant. 1.are
the ratchet teeth. When the magnet ·is enerenergized. Forward signals now appeal' on Out
gized the latch Illp is released from pawl 118p
bus-sets I and 4 and combine with ..the: still. active
which springs into arresting engagement with a
OCOsignalto .cause selected.pilot:units.land ;4'51) tooth H 9p of c, tn~e cartier. There is one, such
to pilot data from'stations 2 and 3 of bank 1
arresting means including a magnet PM for each
into ESI.and .4.
type carrier.
When all the entries called for by a. line 'of
When a type carrier is· arrested, the associate
sequence have .been safely '.made, signaLAE is
arm91p stops and theconneetedspring 9Sp
.' given and terminates signal OCO (see 'Section 'w stretches while the actuatinganns I nip and re16b, Itemal).
storing bail IG3p continue to rock clockwise.
22. The pri:riting means
'After the period during which the type carriers
Results or other information stored in the mamay differentially be set in printing positions.
chine may be recorded' by any of several units as
the print hammers 95p'are tripped at 196 degrees
and when called for.bY the.program. One such  Pr
0
0

Q8 Qb Qr
2
1
151

R8
6

Rb
2

Rr
161

SRI

T. Tb Tr
2
3' 010

UB Ub Ur
2
4
on

VB
4

Vb
5'

Vr
012

8H2 OP2 82
5
15
02

o

OPI 81
02
01

5

This program assumes that numbers. to be
printed are. already in relay storage units 120, 10
122, and 123. In carrying out the program, the
number in relay storage unit 151 (Qr) is transferred after a shift of ten places to the right to
relay storage unit 121. (Rr being 161) and the
printer is. called into operation to print the. nU..'!l,..
bers in units 120, 121, 122, and 123. The seccnd 15.
half of the program schedules a multiplic8.tion,
with half correction (see Section 13). The multiplication can take place while. the prillting cycle
is being performed.
20
A third example is:
P~.

2

Pb. Pr
1
120

T. Tb Tr
4
162

o

Q•. Qb Qr
2
2
121

RB Rb Rr
2
3
123

SHl OPl 61
0
01
01

U8 Ub Ur
0
0

V8

SHZ OPZ S2

o

Vb

Vr

o
01
02
25.
This program calls for accumulation of the
terms in storage units 120', 121, and 123 and
transmission of their sum to relay stomge unit
122 (Tr is 162), in the manner described in Section 17b. Printing will take place under control 3D
of code number 162 in Tr after the sum has been
transferred to storage unit 122. The terms in
relay storage units 120, 121, and 123 will be
printed alongside the sum in unit I ~2.
35
A fourth example is:
Q

p, Pb Pr

Q~

2

2.

1

010

TB Tb' Tr
2
4
121

Qb Qr
2
011

Us Ub lIr
2
5
122

0,

0

on

R8 Rb Rr
4
3
120

o

V.
4

SHZ OP2 SZ
o
10
02

Vb

Vr
163

SH1

02

Sl
01

The first half of this program calls for addition
of numbers in units 0 10 and 0 II and entry of
their sum in 120 (see ,Section 17). The second
half of the program calls for multiplication (see
Section 18) of factors from 121 and 122 and entry
of the product into 123 (Vr is 163). Since Vr is
163, the sum in 120, the factors in 121 and 122
and the product in 123 will all be printed on the
same line. This fourth example will be explained
below in greater detail.
When signal AT is given to. signal the fact that
all transmissions called for by precedL'lg program have been completed, heating relay Xl or
Yl, as the case may be, is energized (Section 16b,
Item 37) and closes contacts to heat. the In code
sequence storage circuits (Figs. 51, 52a and 52b).
Referring to Fig. 52b, the heating of the relay
storage Unit Ins pyramids causes the R pyramid
set at 120 to pick up Unit In I:aO, in the manner
described in Section 11. The heating of the V
pyramid, set at 163, also causes relay storage
Unit In 123 to be energized, since the output line
163 is connected to the output line i 23.
For each of the five possible In fields Q, R, T,
U, and V, a printer start sequence storage circ:1it
is provided to select the printer for operation
under further control of a pilot unit signal Prst
(also see Fig. SOc). The left-hand side of Fig.
52b shows one such sequence storage circuit. as
typical. Assume this is the circuit related to
field V. In the present example, the code number 163 is in subfield Vr. Accordingly, with contacts Xlc or Ylc made, a circuit r:ath is closed'
between the apex of the Vb tree and a line PRS,
as follows: Fl'om the apex of th.e VO tree, via say

40,

45

50,

55

60

G5

70

7.5

Xlc, now~closed contac.ts s4t (Vs is 4), contact'
rSOOt, r40llt, and r200t all closed because the code
number in Vr is not as high as 200; thence via
contacts rI OOt, r40t, and r20t now all closed because the code. number in Vr is 163 which is between 160 and 169. The circuit path continues to,
line. PRS via riOt, rBt, and r4t, all remaining
closed because the. code number inVr is not above
163. It is seen that the. above circuit path is
closed when the code number in subfield r of an
In field is 160; 161, 162, or 163.
The line PRS· is common to the printer start
sequence storage circuits of all five possible In
fields.
.
The relay storage units 120, 121, 122, and 123,
when select_ed for sending or receiving data do
not produce, Forward or Back signals directly in
the way described in Section 7. These four relay storage units may each send out a Forward
or Back signal only if printer #1 has not started
a cycle. The central blade of contacts bs of each
of these four storage units is not connected directly to the +150 v. line, but is connected to. a
line bsp indic.ated as a dotted line in Fig. 29.
This line connects to one of the lines bsp in
Fig. 37.a. If the printer has not been started,
then a path is closed from the +150 v. line (Fig.
87a) via cam contacts C 13, normally closed relay contacts R2a, certain safety contacts which
need not be explained here, and via plugging to
the four lines asp and throug-h contacts bs (Fig.
29) , if shifted, of Unit Ins j 20, 121, f 22, and 123,
and through contacts bs of the selected Group
Ins to buses aI of the related In bus-sets. Relay storage units 1211, 121. 122, and 123 also cannot produce a Forward signal unless the printer
has not started operation, because the Forward
Signal path has to be made via the central blades
of the bs contacts for these storage units.
Assume the printer unit is in condition to allow
Bac', signals to be produced and that Unit Ins
j 20 and 123 and Group Ins 3 and 6, in the selected example have already been energized because of the heating ·of the In sequence storage
pyramids. Back Signals will be applied then to
pilot units 3 and Ii. Assume the Presense signal
also has been applied to the pilot units. Accordingly, in the manner described in Section
17, Item 23t, the trigger 33-3CP (Fig. 80c) in
each of pilot units 3 and 6 is turned,cutting
off 2Ga-3CP to produce the signal RDL. At the
same time, 2Ga-2CP acts through I 9-3CP to tUrn
. 0-3CP and IS-3CP. The turning of 13-3CP
cuts off 14-3CP to prepare the pilot unit for
transmission response to the "3" signal from a
scanning spot. The turning of 11l-3CP cuts off
9-3CP, so that 5 produces the negative Reset
Signal. The Reset signal cancels the selected relay storage unit. The RDL signal initiates the
operation of the R.eset Delay counter in Fig. BOd.
This counter produces, after some 15 lOS., the
pulse RDL #2 in order to turn 2B-3CP for conditioning 22-3CP.
When I Q-3CP turned, it cut off 9-3CP. This
caused 5-·3CP to produce the Reset signal. At
the same time, 9-3CP made 1-3CP conduct and
produce the negative signals Prst. In this way
selected pilot unit·s 3 and 6 produce signal~
PrSt3 through contacts bs (Fig. 29) , if shifted, of
Unit Ins 120, 121, 122, and 123, and through contacts bs of the selected Group Ins to buses BI of
the related In bus-sets. Relay storage units 120,
12 , 122, and 123 also camlOt produce a Forward
signal unless the printer has not started opera~
tion, because th.e Forward. Signal Path. has. to IJe

:3,686,672'

263

made via the central blades of the bs contacts
for these storage units.
Assume the printer unit is in condition to allow
Back signals to be produced and that Unit Ins
120 and 123 and Group Ins 3 and 6, in the selected example have already been energized because of the heating of the In sequence storage
pyramids. Back signals will 'be applied then to
pilot units 3 and 6. Assume the Presense signal
also has been applied to the pilot units. Accordingly, in the manner described in Section 17,
Item 23/, the trigger 33-3CP (Fig. 80c) in each
of pilot units 3 and 6 is turned, cutting off
26a-3CP to produce the signal RDL. At the same
time, 26a-~CP acts through 19-5CP to turn
10-3CP and 13-3CP. The turning of 13-3CP cuts
off 14-3CP to prepare the pilot unit for transmission response to the "3" signal from a scanning
spot. The turning of IO-3CP cuts off 9-3CP, so
that 5 produces the negative Reset signal. The
Reset signal cancels the selected relay storage
unit. The RDL signal initiates the operation of
the Reset Delay ,counter in Fig. 80d. This counter produces, after some 15 ms., the pulse RDL
#2 in order to turn 28-3CP for conditioning
22-3CP.
When IO-3CP turned, it cut off 9-3CP. This
caused 5-3CP to produce the Reset signal. At
tho same time, 9-3CP made 1-3CP conduct and
produce the negative signals PrSt. In this way,
selected pilot units 3 and 6 produce signals
PrSt3 and 6. These Signals are applied to the
correspondingly numbered inputs at the bases of
the b trees in the printer start sequence storage
circuits, one of which is shown in Fig. 52b. These
trees are set according to digits in the subfields
b Of the fields Q, R, T, U, and V. Depending on
the setting of these trees, they route the signals
PrSt to the apexes of the trees. In the example,
the trees b for storing the digit in subfields Rb
and Vb are set at 3 and 6, respectively. Accordingly, the signals PrSt3 and 6 are routed
through the Rb and Vb trees, respectively. The
contacts Xl or Yl, as the case may be, are closed
so that they allow the Signals to go further. The
contacts slit of the R and V printer start sequence
storage circuits are closed. Accordingly, the signals PrSt3 and 6 are routed to the r contacts in
the R and V circuits. Only number 163 in the
subfield Vr is one of the printer code numbers
160, 161, 162, and 163. Hence, only the V printer
start sequence storage circuit passes the signal
PrST to line PRS. This line connects to the same
designated line in Fig. 87a. The signal Prst is a
reduced potential on the line PRS and hence, a
circuit is completed through start control relay
RI, to the +150 V. line which energizes this relay. The relay RI closes its points a to establisH
a pick-up circuit through a relay R2. Relay R2
closes its contacts f, which together with cam
contacts C2, establish a stick circuit for relay R2.
Relay R2 opens its contacts a in the Back (and
Forward) signal feed line but before this, the
relay RI closes its contacts b to maintain the signal line closed. This is done to enable Forward
or Back signals to be produced by any three of
the relay storage units 120, 121, 122, and 123
which have not been selected by printer codes
160, 161, 162, and 163. The relay storage unit
selected 'by the printer code may prodUce its Back
signal before the other relay storage units produce their Back of Forward signals. The relays
RI and R2 therefore may be energized before all
the required Forward and Back signals have occurred, and it is desired to maintain' the Back

264

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

(and ForWard) signal' feed line, associated with
the printer unit, closed until. sufficient time has
been given for all the Forward and Back signals
from relay storage units 120, 121, 122, and 123
to be sent to the selected pilot units. For this
reason, RI when energized closes contacts Rib to
shunt the contacts R2a opened when R2 is energized.
The relay R I will be dropped upon the ending
of the signal PrSt from the pilot unit selected
by the field which also selected the printer for
operation. As explained in Section 17 Item 24
when all the conditions for transmis~ion hav~
been produced in a pilot unit, the Reset signal
lasts at least 15 ms. It is terminated under conjoint control of turned triggers 28, Fig. 80c, and
16, Fig. 80c. The trigger 28 is turned by the 15
ms. delay RDL #2 pulse and 16 is turned to
produce the transmission signal ES to In. .When
both 28 and 16 are turned, 22 conducts ·and resets 10, Fig. 80), thus ending the Reset signal.
At the same time, the return of 10, Fig. 80c, ends
the signal PrSt, so that relay RI (Fig. 87a) is
deenergized.
In the example, signal PrSt6 has caused relay
RI to be energized. When the V3 signal is given
by the scanning spot V (Fig. 78h) , the remaining condition for causing selected pilot unit 6 to
produce transmission signal ES6 to In has been
met. Assuming pilot unit 6 also has produced
its RDL #2 pulse, the signal PrSt6 ends, so that
r~lay RI is deenergized. At this stage, the scannmg sequence has been completed, the accumulation scheduled by the first half of the program
line has been completed and the sum transferred
during the R Ie step into relay storage unit 120.
The multiplication called for by the second half
of the program line has been completed and the
transmission signal has been given to' transmit
the product into the relay storage unit 123,
selected by code number 163 in subfield Vr. The
return of 10, Fig. 80c, to end the Reset and
PrSt signals also has turned I I to initiate operation of the TR delay counter in Fig. aOd.
After a 7Y:a ms. delay, this counter ends the transmission signal, by which time the result has been
safely entered in the selected relay storage unit.
Relay RI (Fig. 87a) was dropped 7Y:a ms. before t~ansmission ended, as described above.
The prmter unit operates at the rate of 150 cycles.
a minute. so that more than 50 ms. elapses between start of a printer cycle and the "9" readout interval, which is the first in the cycle. Accordingly, it is safe to clutch in the printer for a
cycle when relay R I is dropped.
The clutch magnet circuit is established from
ground via cam contacts C3, now-reclosed con-',
tacts Ric, now-closed contacts R2b, now-closed
contacts STDad, and through clutch magnet
PRM, to the +50 V. line.
. A print cycle now occurs to cause the results
m relay storage units 120, 121, 122, and 123 to
be printed, in the manner described before.
Several lines of sequence may be run off during the time taken by the print cycle. However
if the next line of sequence following the on~
which called the printer into operation also
s.chedules the printer for operation, such next
line of sequence will not be completely run off
until .the printer has finished setting the types
to prmt the results last put into storage units
120,121,122, and 123. This is because the Back
Signal feed line from the printer will be open
after relay R2 has been energized and relay R I
dropped. At that point, the print cycle also be-

265

pn. Neither Back nor Forward 'signals now can
be produeed by storage units no, 121, 122, and
in. Cam contacts C2 open at 18 degrees inde:x:
time, so that the stick circuit of R2 breaks. But
cam contactsC 13 in the signal line open before
relay R2 is dropped, so that closure of contacts
RIa doos not reestablish the Back and Forward
's1gna;1 feed path. At 162 degrees of the cycle,
after the types for printing the results have all
been set, contacts C 13recloseandallow the
signal feed path tOreclose. It is possible now to
send Back signals ·from stor-age units 129, .121,
12~,and 1:23 to the pilot units. The pilot units
may, in response, send new Reset signals to these
'Ullitsand a selected one of the .pilot units may
-send out a signal PrSt. The storage units may
be safely reset at this time because their data
lmvebeenread 'outand the types have been set
accordingly. ,New data may be read into these
units now. The new signal PrSt may operate now
·to pickup R I. The clutch magnet circuit will
be .opened when camcontactsC3 remake at 210
degrees ,index time, and so the printer unit may
oontinue to perform a second cycle for printing
the new data entered into anyone or all of the
storage units 120, 12.1, 122, and 123.

26'6

5

10

15

20

25

'23. Signal data, the drain circuit, control desk,
and the pluggable number stomge

Three signals are necessary to restart of a commutator run. These are theall-entry delay signal AED, sequence transmission delay signal
STRD I, and the scanning finish signal FC.
The signal AED (Section 16b, Item 27) .-Signal
AED indicates that some 15 ms. have elapsed
'Since stgnal AE was given to manifest the fact
tha.t all entries into electronic storage were completed during a commutator run. The STRDI
Signal is given approximately 30 ms. after the
.start of sequence transmission. Sequence transmiBsion, as described in Section 16b, Item 31, is
timed by signal SW which is initiated under control of the signal AE. Therefore, signal AED
precedes Signal STRDI by approximately 15ms.
and in no way affects the time of commutator
restart. The 'purpose Of 'using Signal AED as a
condition to commutator restart is to provide an
early check against operations involving the phasing circuits for the heating relays X2 to X6 and
YI to YI of the Out sequence storage circuits.
By the phasing circuits is meant the circuits for
controlling the alternation in operation of the A
side relays X2 to X5 and the B side relays Y2
to Y6. The phasing circuits for these relays involve the. triggers 22 and 28 in Fig. 75e. These
trigflerS must be in rela.tively opposite states in
order to cause the A or B side heating relays for
the Out sequence storage circuits to be energized.
To begin with, both triggers are in the reset
status. The first STR signal turns 28 (Section
16b, Item 9), and the triggers 22 and 28 are then
'in such relatively opposite states as to conjointly control the phasing circuits to pick up the
A side relays X2 to X6. The next AE signal
reverses 22 (Section 16b, Item 28) and the triggers t2 and 28 are then in the same, turned
state, with the result that the X2 relay is deenergized. Also, the AE signal causes the heating relays X3 to X6 to be deenergized. The following 8TR signal returns 28, Fig. 75e (Section
16b, Item 36). Now, both 2Z and 28 are in relatively opposite states which are also reverse to
the previous opposite states. Consequently, the
phasing circuit is in condition to cause the B
f,\de rela)'s Y2 to yt to be picked up. It is evi-

M

3;;

40

dent that both the AE and .8TR signalsarenecessary to the proper control of the alternation or
phasing of the heating.relays for the Out sequencestorage 'circuits. It is necessary to have
some assurance that these signals have reached
the control frame. If the signal AE is lost at
the control frame, .it is dear that the phasing
circuits will not operate ;correctly even if the
STR signal later reaches the control frame. If
the delay signal AED were not used asa condition to commutator restart, then the STRDI
signal 'and the FC signal would conjointly restart the ·commutator 'although an error had occurred.Byutilizing thesignalAED as a condition to commutator .restart, the fact that the
signal AEis lost at the control frame would producea block on commutator restart.
Signal STRDl (Section 16b, Item 12) .-This
signal is a timing signal for commutator restart
as well asa check signal. It occurs about 10 ms.
aftersigna;l STR.At the time the STRDI signal
is produced, the AE' signal is expected to have
dropped 'out the heating relays for the active side
of the Out sequence storage circuits and, consequentlY,all the old Forward signals have been
removed. Also, the STR signal has occurred and
has caused the heating relays for the other side
of the Out sequence storage circuits, including
the heating relay for the SI, S2 pyramids, to be
energized so that new Forward signals will be
issued. Therefore, it is safe now to produce a
new signal OCO {which follows commutator restart) for acting in conjunction with the new
Forward signals to time the piloting of entries
into electronic storage from Out bus-sets.
Signal Fe (Section .160, Item 26-2) .-This signal is an indication that the scanning sequence
performed by thecommuta,tor spots P, Q, R, T, U,
and V (Figs. 78c to h) during a commutator run
has been completed. Therefore, as far the scanning sequence is 'concerned, a new commutator
run may start.
Presense signal NPR (Section 16b, Items 21
and 23) .-As the name indicates, this signalaf-

fords advance conditioning of a pilot unit selected
45 to pilot transmission from electronic storage to a
selected receiving unit. Signal NPR lasts for only
a single AP pulse cycle. But the effe.ct of the
signal is stored in the selected pilot unit by reversing triggers 29 and U in 3CP (Fig. 80c) of
50 the pilot unit. The stored llresense signal in
conjunction with the Back signal from the
selected receiving unit initiates operation of the
pilot unit to produce the Reset signal for re55 setting the receiving unit before the pilot unit
.normally is ready to pilot the data transmission
to the receiving unit (see Section 17, Item 24) .
The presense signal is given under control 'of
theall-transmission delay signal ATD (see Sec~o tion 16b, Item 38) no sooner than two AP pulse
cycles after the start commutator signal SCM
(see Section 16b, Item 21). Prior to this the
signal AT will have dropped out the heatin~ relay Xl or Yl of the In sequence storage circuits
65

~::e~:~:~~~~'n~\e:;c~ ~it!e:e~l~~:~k~~::

nal to control the selected pilot unit for producing the Reset signal and to condition the
pilot unit for transmission in response to the "3"
70 signal from an Ie scanning spot of the commutator. The start commutator signal SCM
originates thea or b heating signals for the pilot
units selection trees. The Fresense signal does
not ,occur sooner than twoAPpulse .cycles later,
75 which provides adequate time for dissipation 01

267

cross-talk prodUced upon the heating of' the
'Presense trees (Fig. 55).
Signal FSR.-As indicated in Section 16b, Item
24a, this signal turns all the triggers T, Fig. 80b,
to condition the Forward signal delay counters 5
to respond to Forward signals. Normally, the
'signal FSR does not occur until all three conditions for commutator restart have been met
(see Section 16b, Item 39). When these three
I;oaditions are met, 14W (Fig. 780 conducts, and 10
not only turns 15W, but also returns 24W from
i';~ previously turned state (see Section 16b, Item
24a). The next AP pulse again turns 24W, causing it to reverse 29W, for one AP pulse cycle,
so as to produce signal FSR. Obviously, a For- 15
ward signal is not usable until the signal STRDI
(one of the timing signals for commutator restart) has been given, as the Group and Unit
Out relays selected upon the heating (timed by
the signal STR; see Section 16b, Item 36) of 20
.the Out sequence storage circuits may still be
in the process of picking up. Therefore, until
the Forward signal line (bus 81 of an Out busset) is expected to receive a true Forward signal,
the Forward signal delay counter is held ine1fec- 25
tive to accept a voltage on the Forward signal
li~~e as a Forward signal. By rendering the Forward signal line ine1fective to actuate the Forward signal delay counter until at least the signal STRDI has been given, the possibility is 30
reduced of an advance of the Forward signal delay counter by a stray pulse that might appear
on the Forward signal line concurrently with an
AP pulse. If the delay counter were allowed to
advance under control of an extraneous pulse on 35
the Forward signal line, the desired delay between the appearance of a true Forward signal
and the production of the signal FSD would be
shortened. By holding back the signal FSR until
after the signal STRDI has been given, suf- 40
ficient time is provided for transients on the
Forward signal line to disappear before the Forward signal delay counter is ready to accept a
Forward signal.
Should the scanning completion signal FC ap- 45
peal' after the STRD I signal, as may be the case
if a large capacity calculation such as multiplication .or division is performed, the Forward sign~!:; associated with the next line of sequence
may arrive at the pilot units before signal FC
is given. If the Forward signal delay counters 50
were in condition to accept the Forward signals,
then the Forward signal delay pulses FSD would
be produced and would turn 25, Fig. 80b, so as to
set up the entry interlock (see Section 16b, Item 55
24b, and Section 17, Item 15b). However, the
signal FSR will not be given until all conditions
for commutator restart have been met, including the condition that the signal Fe shall have
been produced, so that the Forward signal delay
counter will not be in condition to accept For- 60
ward signals even though such signals may have
been applied to the pilot units as a result of the
.STR signal having been given before the signal
FC. In the absence of this precaution, the entry
interlock would operate to prevent the signal TI65
or U I, for example, from functioning to produce
the signal ES to Int required fOr a yet uncompleted scanning sequence (see Section 17, Item
26) .
70
It may be noted that the signal FSR operates
on all eight pilot units to turn their triggers T,
Fig. 80b, while the return of these triggers by
.the Forward signal delay counters is on an individual pilot uint basis. Hence, if a pilot unit 75

268

is not used in one run fOr piloting Out code data
but is to be so used in a subsequent run, its
trigger T, if left unrestored, would allow the Forward signal delay counter to accept stray pulses
as Forward signals. To a void leaving any triggers
T in turned status, the signal AE acts to reset
all the triggers T (see Section 17, Item 15t!).
Therefore, the Forward signal receiving circuits
are open to acceptance of signals only for the
period starting with signal FSR given shortly before signal OCO and ending with signal AE
which indicates that all entries required for a
commutator run have been made from the Out
buses to electronic storage.
SiGnal AT.-This signal has been discussed in
previous Sections 16a, 16·b, and. 17. The signal
AT may be delayed if transmission called for by
an In field during a run has not been completed
because of a lagging Back signal, for example.
Thus, if a printer cycle (Fig. 86) is taking place,
a new commutator run may have set up two of
the conditions for a new transmission to a storage unit which is associated with the printer
unit. However, until the cam contacts CI3 reclose at 162 degrees cycle time, a Back signal
will not be given (see Section 22a) and so the
third condition for transmission (Section 17,
Items 23 and 24) will be lacking. Therefore, the
signal AT will be delayed. Meanwhile, a new
commutator run may start (see the last portion
of Section 17). However, the pilot unit which
has been locked up for transmission will be unable to produce signals Out to ES, ES to Int,
or Int to ES because the signal TR Ink will still
be e1fective (see also Section 17a).
Although absence of the signal AT required by
a commutator run does not prevent a next commutator run from starting, it does prevent a
second next run from starting. This is because
the signal ATD is required in order for the
presense signals SPR and NPR to be produced
(see Section 16b, Items 21 and 38) for the new
run. Since the signal SPR is not given, sequence
transmission during the new run is delayed (see
Section 16b, Item 23 and Section 17, Item 23/).
Hence, a new signal STR will not be given and
the delay signal STRDI will not occur, and so
this condition for a following run will not be
present. In this way, the commutator is prevented from getting too far ahead of transmission .
The drain circuit.-This circuit may be used,
when desired, to stop the machine if signals STR
do not follow one another within a chosen limit
of time. The signal STR indicates that a new
line of sequence has entered sequence -storage.
The time between successive signals STR varies
.according to the source of the sequence data and
according to the nature of the calculations being
performed and whether or not printing is being
e1fected. Elapsed time between signals STR
usually is from about 20 to 40 ms. but if print:"
ing is taking place, the elapsed time may be
about 400 ms. It may be desired to stall the
machine if the elapsed time between STR Signals
exceeds, say, 15 seconds. For this purpose, the
drain circuit may be put into use.
The drain circuit includes a gas tube 8, Fig. 77~,
which is shunted by a pair of parallel 5 mf. condensers, suitable resistance being provided between the anode of tube 8 and the condensers,
and between the tube anode and the +150 v .
line. The constants of this circuit are so chosen
that the condensers will be charged sufficiently in

269

270

CNC is .opened,all the cancel circuits of the group
are. operated but if this switch is left closed,
the opening of the individual cancel switches
STR pilot signal (negative) is given less than 15
places only the related cancel circuits in operaseconds after the preceding STR signal, it will
cause the tube B to conduct and drain the con- 5 tion. As respresentative, the control desk cancel
control circuit for ,the MD internal commutator
6.ensers before they can render the tube 3 con(Section 14) is shown in Fig. 77aa. Upon the
ductive. The STR pilot signal is inverted by Ga,
opening of switch CNC or MDcnc, ground is disFIg. 78k, to a positive pulse which is applied via
connected from the grid input of the tube H IBa
a capacitor to the grid of cathode follower tube
lI,a, Fig. 77ft . The tube 3a t...'lereupon renders 10 (also see Fig. 65e), and the potential from the
+150 v. line is effectively applied to the grid intube 8, FIg. na-, effective to drain the 5 mf. conput, causing the tube to conduct. Thereupon,
densers. If this action does not occur in time,
just as when HIB is rendered conductive untbe tube 3 will be made conductive and cause
der control of the M-PREor J).,PRE Signals (see
tubes 9, 9a and II~ to produce reduced potential
on the line Stall. Reduced potential on this line 15 Sections 14a and 14b), tube H24 is cut off and
applies increased potential to the cancel circuit
establishes an energizing circuit through a relay
MDC.Asaresult, the control triggers,except
STL (Fig. 77M). The relay thereupon shifts its
for those in Figs. 65a and b, of the internal comcontacts a, connecting the +150 v. line to the line
m.utator of the MD unit are reset.
stoP. This line connects to point b of star!; and
Similarly, the automatic control of any other
stop trigger 5, Fig. 77a, and when increased po- 20
cancel circuit maybe duplicated manually at
tential is applied to point b of the trigg-er it is
the control desk.
actuated to the "stop" status, shown in Fig. 77a.
Fig. 77aa also shows the manual control for the
Hence, just as when this trigger is brought to this
Proceed signal which isordinarly given by the
status by the operation of the stop key switch
OSP (Fig. 77 aa), the tube I Sa, Fig. 78k, is cut off 25 accumulator unit. If, in a tolerance check
(Section 17c) , the Sign of the result in the acto apply increased potential to a grid of 14, Fig.
cumulator is negative, the Proceed .signal will
78k (see Section 16b, Item 14). If this occurs
not be given automatically, and sequencing will
before the SE signal, then 9, Fig. 78k, still is in
be halted. When it is desired to resume operaturned state and conditioning Iii to conduct when
! Sa is cut off. If the SE signal has already been 30 tions,this may be done by sending out a Proceed
signal under manual control. For this purpose,
gIven, then 9 is in reset state (Section lob, Item
the switch Proceed CD at the control desk is
29). The next STR signal will turn 10 and the
opened, disconnecting ground from the input of
later STRDi signal will return 10, causing it to
tube 8, Fig. ng, and allowing the potential from
turn 9, at which point the tube 14 will conduct
and restore n. As a result, the commutator will 35 the +150 v. line to ,be effective to render this
tube conductive, whereupon the negative Proceed
be unable to respond to the next STR pilot signal
signal is sent to ACC.C (Fig. 78A) .
and the machine will stop because a new STRDI
Fig. 77aa also shows an example of how a .consignal will not appear.
trol signal is applied to electronic storage by
To reset the drain circuit, the start key switch
a switch at the control desk. NorSKS must be closed. The points b of the relay 40 manipulating
mally, tube 1, Fig. 80a, is conductive, so that
SKR close and apply voltage from the +150 v.
tube " Fig. 80a, is cut off and the negative entry
line to the line Drain, causing a cathode follower
signal Out to ES is not present. In the manner
6, Fig. 77a, to render B conductive so as to drain
described in Section 16b, Item 24b, the trigger
the 5 mf. condensers.
'., Fig. 80a, is automatically reversed, during
The control desk (Fig. 1) .-The control desk 45 automatic sequencing, to cut off 1, Fig. 80a,
is a manual switching center at which a dupliwhereupon', Fig. 80a, is made conductive to procate of practically every control circuit in the
duce the entry signal Out to ES. This signal may
machine may be set up by manipulating switches
be produced under manual control by opening the
and keys. The control desk mounts control keys
switch OES at the control desk, thereby removsuch as the start and stop keys (Fig. 77aa.); also 50 ing the +150 v. potential from the input to a
mounts sets of dial storage such as the set degrid of pentode 1, Fig. 80a. This tube is therescribed in Section 8 and shown in Fig. 23, and
by cut off and causes I, Fig. 80a, to produce signal
carries the switches and keys for use in setting
out to ES.
UP the artificial line of sequence (see Section 11
Pluggable storage.-Besides the memory or
and Figs. 39 and 40). A keyboard and connec- 55 storage units described before, the machine protions (not shown) are also carried by the control
vides pluggable storage as a convenient means
desk and operable to apply desired numbers to
for applying constants to the Out bus-sets, to
relay storage.
be entered into electronic storage. Several
Examples of circuits operable from the conpluggable storage units are provided. Ten of
trol desk are shown in Figs. 65e, 71g, 80a, and 60 these are designated by code numbers 610 to
80c and the tube inputs of such circuit are
619, which may occur in subfields r of any Out
marked by letters CD. Cancel circuits for the
fields of a line of sequence. Fig. 89 shows a
MD calculating unit, the accumulator unit, the
typical sequence storage pyramid for bringing
denominational shift unit, electrOnic storage, the
pluggable storage into operation. This pyramid
main commutator, the pilot units and every other 65 is the same as the Dial Storage pyramid shown
unit desired, may be operated from the control
in Fig. 47c as far as the riO's tree, but extends
desk as well as automatically. A group of cancel
through this tree to its "I" output. The "I" outcircuits, such as for the MD unit, accumulator
put is. directed to the top of an r units tree
unit, denominational shift unit, and main com- 70 (see Fig. 88), the ten outputs of which are
mutator may be operated individually or toplugged to ten relays PSG61 0 to 619. As is ungether at the control desk. Fig. 77 aa shows the
derstood, there is a similar pyramid for each
common cancel switch CNC for the group and
of the possible Out fields P, Q, R, T, and U and
the corresponding outputs of the r units trees
10he individual MD and accumulator cancel
pitches MDcnc .and: ACCcnc. If the swUch 75 of :tbese pyramids are commoned. Hence, if any
15 seconds to apply effective voltage toa cathode
follower tube 3 to make this tube conduct. If the

271

272

of these Out fields contains' one of the nUinbers
610 to 619 in its subfield T, the correspondingly
numbered relay PSG is energized.
Upon energization of a relay PSG610 to 619,
it connects twelve relay contactsal to al2 (Fig.
89) of the correspondingly numbered pluggable
storage unit to the +150 v; line. The contacts of
the respective relays PSG61 O. to PSG619 are
wired to plug sockets PSP610 to PSP619. These
sockets are plugged, according to numbers to
be applied to Out bus-sets, to plug sockets PSOP.
There are eight groups of sockets PSOP, one for
each Out bus-set. Each group includes columns
1 to 20 sockets which are wired directly to
columns 1 to 20 buses of the related Out busset; each group also includes a socket 81 wired
to bus 81 of the out. bus-set and plugged for
the Forward signal.
Assume, for. instance, that pluggable storage
unit 610 is to apply the value +787 to Out busset I. Accordingly, as shown in Fig. 89, one
of the sockets PSP 61 0 is plugged to socket 2
of column 1 of group I of sockets PSOP in order
to provide for the + Sign, three of the sockets
PSP610 are plugged, respectively, to sockets 4,
2, and I in column 18 of group I of sockets PSOP,
another of the sockets PSP610 is plugged to
socket 8 of column 19, three of the other sockets
PSP610are plugged to sockets 4, 2, and I in
column 20,. and in order to send the necessary
Forward signal to Out bus I along with the number, one of the sockets PSP610 is plugged to
socket 81 of the PSOP group I. Thus, when the
code number 610 is in a subfield T of an Out field
the related Out sequence storage pyramid (Fig.
88) which receives this number is effective, when
heated just prior to a commutator run, to pick
up relay PSG610. Consequently, the selected
number 181 and a Forward signal are applied to
Out bus-set I.
As further examples, Fig. 89 shows unit 612
plugged to apply number 26 to Out bus-set 2
and unit 614 plugged to apply 5,to Out bus-set 6.
P

quence. Some cases in which modified seQuetlc!E!
is employed are given below.
Case 1. A computed selection of the sequence
path.-Since a line of sequence determines the
5

10

15

20

25

30

calculation path this case also may be referred
to as involving a computed choice between two
or more paths' down which subsequent calculations will follow. The selection of the sequence
path or calculation path is controlled by the SI
and S2 code numbers. This case therefore deals
with the computation of the 81 and 82 code numbers. One application of this case is in problems
including' iteration, and as will be seen, the result
of the iteration operations not only determines
which path of calculation is to follow but also
the length of the calculation program. As an
example, the sequence path for the iteration may
be considered as made up of successive lines of
sequence on tapes. In this iteration program
to be taken as an illustration, only five lines of
sequence are required and this series of five lines
may be repeated twelve or more times on the
tapes. This is done for mechanical expediency
and to save the time which would be used up in
backing the tapes to return to the first line if
only a single series were to be used.
The iteration program is to be repeated until
a stable condition is reached, as is done for instance to obtain a square root by the Newton
formula:

As an Example, suppose it is desired to solve

35

-b+(b2-4ac)~

r=--

,

2a- - - -

where Cb 2 -4ac) is N.
40

Typical sequencing is explained below and constants and plugging will be explained in connection with the sequence lines.
SRI OPI 81

Q

.·b

r
8 b
r
,b r
2 1 010 2 2 010 4 3
(b')

4

15

T

u

V

8br8br8br
32 2 4 012 2 5 013 4 6

SR2 OP2 S2
0

10

31

(4a)

The left half of this line calls for -b in storage
unit 0 I0 to be multiplied by itself, for b2 to be
rounded off and shifted four places to the right
For some problems the course and characteristics of the calculations have no deviations and 55 and for the shifted result to be sent to E83. The
second half of the line calls for multiplication
lines of sequence with prechosen sequence and
of constant 4 in unit 012 by the term a in unit 013
calculation instructions may be used. For other
and for 4a to be sent to E8G. The respective S I
problems the course or character or extent of
and 82 numbers 32 and 31 select the next line of
calCulations varies according to computed results
and completely preselected sequence lines are not 60 main sequencing for the problem.
24. Computed or modified sequence

P
,

b r

2 6

Q.

R

,b rIb.
2101142
(4ac)

SRI

OPI 81

T

u

abr
.br
10222312
(b'-4ac)=N

V

SH2 OP2 82

• b T
4512840421

The left half of the second line instructs the
suitable. Through the use of simple computable
inachine to multiply 4a in E86by the term c in
numbers as sequence instructions and by reason
of other features of this machine, lines of se- 70 storage unit 0 II ,and to take the product and
store it in E82. The right half of the line calls
quence and sequence instructions may be comfor subtraction from b2 now in ES3 of 4ac, and
puted to steer the course, nature or extent of
for half correotion and shift of the result followed
subsequent calculation. A line of sequence in
by its entry into ES5 and transmission to storage
which one or more instructions are obtained by
computation is called here a modified line ofse- 75 unit 128. The result b 2 -4ac is the number N ~

273

274

quence. Thereafter in the same V' Ie step the
si~n' of the result of t-,.a is entered in the left-

the Newton formula, The 81 and 82 n:umbers
call In the iteration ~equence:

ITE'RATION' SEQUENGE FOR SQUARE ROOT.
R

Q
II:b~·~b:r

S.Hl

OPI

2 4. 614 •

5

1~

T

22

~2

1403142034

~.

8H2

~

t

5

OP2

82

8~b"-;;"

Oil.

43,O~

25

22'

1· 100;

5

21:

{X;,-.!IO'r=tolilrance.(t>
02

2221

3;.2
(hd) =

(X;,-\-X;) .. dlff~renCjl (d)·
'Sln2'361341162
(:.406+27).= 32 Of 22

V
r-

(X,+N/X,)

{(Xi+ N/X,)/2}-XiH
'5,

U

~ ~ b

'5.031261284-20328
(.;¥:;)
(]I{)
(NI Xi)
2 3

81

•. b r

02.

22

(l.31579.

+or-

2 2 612 2 5
4,..
(!!6;1::5) = 31. or 2~'
(X;+l

~5!J,

2512945031
to unit ~~

~2

3.1

or

or

22
~I, a first guess, has been preliminarily put illto
storage unit 031. The number N has been cal;;
cula.ted by the. first two run-(lff lines of maiI).
sequence anq. transmitted to storage unit 128.
The first line of the iteration sequence directs
the machine to obtain N / Xl and enter the shifted
result into ES2, then to take Xi from ES5 to
which it has been sent from unit 031 and add
it to t11,e result in ES2, thereby obtaining
X.+N/X. which is put into ES3.
The second line, first half, of the iteration sequence multiplies t1:\e result Xi+N / Xi of the previouS run by 5 taken from pluggable storage (see
Sect.iQn 23) ~nd shifts the product one place to
the right, which is equivalent to dividing by 10,
so that the' result sent to ES5=(Xi+N/Xi) /2.
This is ·the first calculated approximation of the'
square root and is denoted by Xi+l, which is to
be used to obtain a tolerance. The tolerance is
computed in the second half ()f th.e sequence 1'1.1n
by shifting Xi+! five places to the right, wl)ich is
equivalent to dividing it by 105 , and sending the
answer, which is the tolerance t, to ESI.
The third line of the iteration sequence controIs the machine to subtract XI, in storage unit
031, from XI+!, which was PQt into ES5 during
the run-off of the first half of the second line
of the iteration sequence; and to subtract frqm
the tolerance t in ES I the absolute value of the
difference d between Xl+! and XI, then to shift
the result of t-d nineteen places to the right.
This discards the numerical value of the result
and leaves only the sign of the result to be sent
to ES3 from the sign storage triggers 2M and
~M (:rig. 78a). If the difference 4 is within the
tolerance. t, then t-.,d is plus but if d is greater
than t, the res.uIt is minus. The + or - sign is
trans~itted from ES3 to column 1 of relay storage unit 157. This storage unit h.as been pre..,
liminarily plugged for its two halve.s to be rese~
and receive data independently (see Sec.tion 7).
The reset plugging is from socket 82 of 7RS-G:IP3
(see' Figs. 29, 30, and 90) to socket 82 of
lRS-OIPP and from socket 82 oflRS-GI~I, for
example, to socket 84 of lRS-GIPP. The entry
plugging is such as described in Section 7, in this
ease, column 1 sockets 2 and I only, of 7RS-GIP3
Reed b.e plugged to column 1 sockets of 7RS-GIPP
wl.\ile column 20 socke.ts of 1RS-GIPt are plugged
to eQlqmn 20 sockets of 1R.S-GIPP. Only the left
balf of the relay stqrage unit 151 wHl be reset I:>Y
t@ ~eset signal applied to pus 82 o{ In bQs-set. 3
during the :J:C /itep. .of tbe V sp()t(:r~g. 78k) .41 tbe
funning off of the third line of the iteration se-

~~

~a,nd

25

30

35

40

45

5.0.

55

60

65

70

75

e,oltw:m .of tI:\e leftb~f <;If relay storage ~it
157. ID the ~aIlnel? uMerstoQd fl'on:J, Section 17,
Item :?4. Prelim,~na,rily, the constant 5 has been
entered in the right..,hand column of the right
half Of this storliLge unit through the plugging
shown in Fig. 90. Since only the left half of the
storage uJ;lit now has been reset, the right half
remains set. with 5 in the right-hand column ..
Now standing ~n relay storage unit 157 is ±5..
I>lugga,ble stor.age (see Section :m has preliminarily been set tq apply number 21 to ,out busset 3 when called on to dQ so; The Q field of the
fourth line of the itera,ti()ll sequence directs the
mf.l,chine to enter 21: from pluggaple storage to
E.133. 'The F fie~d oJ this line directs the number
in re~ay :;;tora,ge 1,1nit 151 to be ent.ered in
E13~.
The pluggipg between 1RS-GOP5 and
7RS-G;QfP to allow tl)e enUre. rela¥ storage unit
1~1 to be rea,(i ou~ to Out bus..,.set 5 is shown in
:rig. !:l0, It. is Seell tl)a,t il,lthqugh the two halves
of a storage unit may separately r.eceive data,
they may be plugged to apply their data to the
same Out bus-set or to separate Out bus-sets.
The addition of ±5 and 21 occurs in the P OC and
Q OC steps of tl)e fourtl) run in the iteration sequence· In, the following R IC step, the result
32 or 22 is transmitted to relay storage unit 152
(see Section 17, Item 24), In the T OC step
the constant 26 is directed from pluggable stor~
age to ES2 and thence to the accumuhitor, after
which the number ±5, which was sent to ESa
by unit 151 during the P OC step, is applied to
the accumulator during the U OC step. The accumUlation of 26 and ±5 occurs and the result
3J or ~ I ~ traU!!1Oitted. P-urip.g tl)6 V Ie step to
relar stora,ge \.lllit. 5 3 , '
' ..
N:ow present ~ll rela,y,: .!itor~e ullits. 152 anci 15.3
a,re C9W,Puted 131. anci S.2n1lIQbers.
The fifth line ()f t.he itera,tipn sequence pears
tl1eS.1 P\1w.p~r 52 aM t,Qe.$.2 lltlm.ber 5.3. ~qe
SI, S2 pyramids are ~et with the.se number$ dur::'
ing the. fifth cpnunutator rQn of the Iteration seq1Jence , ~ll!'l so.cke;s SGP52 a.n,d.5~ 'a,re. .prE)."
~iminar~ly pluggeci to ~SGP7-2 anel 8,.,.3, rEl-"
spectively, as sh.own in Fig; 53b. The sockets
SUP52 and 53 a.re :\llugged'to $ockets RSUP! 52
and 15a., a,s $pwn in. Fig. &3a. Accordingly, the
r\:llay,s.torage 1,11;1* 152 a,pg 153 arecalle(,i to read
out a lin,E)()f sequel:lce' t() OQ{ bus-sets 7 "and '8'.
This line of Sequence cpnsists of the computed
S.I aI\(,i ~2 n\11Op.ers optained during the iteration.
sequenCI;!. :rn qrder tq apply these' numbers' j;o
tAeSlcol~ 19 aQ,d 20 Of o~~ PIJs.,.set 7 BJlg to
the S2 columns 19 and 20 of Out bus-set 8, plug-

276

275

I, column 19 and socket 2,column 20 of
ging, as shown in Fig. 90, is between columns 19
1RS-GOPB. Socket I, column 1 oflRS-GOPP
and 20 of sockets 2RS-GOPP and 2RS-GOP1
will be plugged to sockets 2 in columns 19 and
and between columns 19 and 20 of 3RS-GOPP
20 of 1RS-GOP1 and to sockets 2 and I in coland 3RS-GOPB "(see Fig. 90). Hence, in the
umns 19 and 20, respectively, of 1RS-GOPB.
fifth commutator run of the iteration sequence,
the next, computed line of sequence is called out 5 AccordinglY, if Unit Out 151 and relay storage
Group Outs 1 and B are operated, storage unit
from relay storage units 152 and 153 and trans151 will apply numbers 11 and 12 to the SI and
mitted to sequence storage (see Sections 16b and
S2 columns of Out bus-sets 1 and B, respectively,
17),
if the storage unit contains the computed +
The computed line of sequence just transmitted to sequence storage comprises S I number 10 sign indicant 2; if the computed sign is -, as
represented by energization of relay I, column
3:'. and S2 number 31 if the first calculated ap1, then the storage unit will apply the SI and
}.Iroximation Xi+1 and the first guess XI do not
S2 numbers 22 and 21 to Out bus-sets 1 and B.
differ from each other by more than the tolerance
The fourth line of the alternate iteration set. 'J:'his means that the square root of N has been
calculated to the required degree of accuracy 15 quence will be the same as the fifth line of the
first iteration sequence but instead of 52 and 53
and so the main sequencing path may be resumed
in SI and S2 will contain 57 in both SI and S2.
for the continuation of the main calculation of T,
The socket SGP51 will be plugged as shown in
Fig. 53b to sockets RSGP1-1 and B-1 and socket
-b+(N)1f
20 SUP51 will be plugged, as shown in Fig. 53a to
2a
socket RSUPI51. Accordingly, in the fourth
On the other hand, if the computed S I and S2
commutator run in the alternate iteration senumbers are 22 and 21, then the difference d
quence, the S I and S2 numbers will be obtained
between the first calculated square root and the
from storage unit 151 and transmitted to sefirst guess is greater than the tolerance t. In 25 quence storage. If the S I and S2 numbers thus
that event, the iteration sequence is repeated.
obtained are 22 and 21, the iteration sequence
During the running off of the fifth line of the
(alternate one) will be repeated, but if the SI
iteration sequence, the first calculated square
and S2 numbers are 11 and 12, the main calcuro"t Xi+!, obtained in the running off of the seclation path will be selected in order to proceed
ond line of the iteration sequence, was trans- 30 with the problem. Continuation of the main
mitted from relay storage unit 129 to unit 031
path of the calculation need not be sequenced
(see Section 17 a), and so has replaced the first
from the same sources which sequenced the calguess for the next iteration sequence.
culations preceding the iteration. Therefore,
In the foregoing manner, the iteration sequence
the S I and S2 numbers in the first part of the
will be run as many times as necessary to obtain 35 problem may be 32 and 31 while the computed
a square root to the required accuracy, and when
SI and 82 numbers for continuation of the probthis has been done, the computed S I and S2 numlem after the iteration may be 11 and 12.
bers will be 32 and 31 and will direct the stream
Case 2.-Computing the calculation instrucof calculation into the main path. Assuming
tion.-This case determines, as a result of a comthis has been done, the line of sequence selected 40 putation, which subsequent arithmetical operaby the computed S I and S2 numbers 32 and 31 is,
tion shall be called for by an OP field of a sefor example:
quence line.

P

Q

b r r b r B b
2 1 010 2 2 031 4 3

8

8H
1

R

OP
1

r

2 3

U

02

32

(a)

4 1 160

20

SH
2

V

b r 8 b r , b
2 4 013 2560346

8

(-b)+(/)2-4ac) If
2 6

T

81

OP
2

82

10

31

r

times (2)

01

The first of the above two lines directs the addition to -b of the square root obtained by the
iteration sequence, and also the multiplication of
the term a by the constant 2 taken from dial
storage. The second of these lines directs the
division of -b+(b 2 -4ac) 1/2 by 2a and the printing of the answer r (see Section 22a) .
An alternate method of computing the sequence
path may be used. The alternate method requires
one less line in the iteration sequence. The first
three lines of the iteration sequence will be the
same but 5 will not be present in relay storage unit
167. Accordingly, at the end of the third commutator run in the iteration sequence, the unit 151
will contain only the + or - sign in column 1.
Preliminary plugging will be, for example, as
shown in Fig. 90a. Column 1 plug socket 2 of
1RS-GOPP will be plugged to sockets I of columns 19 and 20 of 1RS-GOP7 and also to soc,ket

02

60

65

70

75

As an example, the expansion of the series for
the arc tangent function is accurate only to
"Pi/4" (arc tan I). For values lying in the
second octant (X between Pi! 4 and Pi/2) , the
reciprocal of the argument is used, which is
equivalent to computing the arc cotangent. A
computation is made to determine whether the
argument is greater or less than 1. If the argu-:"
ment is less than 1, the sequence instruction for
a multiplication is delivered to sequence storage,
and the argument is multiplied by 1, after which
it is used in the series expansion. If the argument is found to be greater than 1, the sequence
instruction for division of 1 by the argument is delivered to sequence storage, and the reCiprocal
of the argument which is thereby obtained is
used in the series expansion. The final answer,
in the latter event, is adjUsted by Pi/2.

·~--

ZTI

An. illustrative program is explained below.
p

•

b

r

&

b

2 1
2 5 017 2 2
2 5
2 1
2 1 013 2 3
2
2.
2
2
2

2
2
2
2
2

4
4
4

4
4

5
6
1
2
3

8H
1

R

Q
r
610
103
603
612

r
4 4 017
4 6 152
4 5 032
4 3 018 7

8

4
4
616 4
617 4
61 8 4

614
~15

op
1

020
022
024
026
~

2

oP

2 &2

- - -T -

Q. T 8 ~
1 2 011 2 3 013 6 1 017 9
2. 1 1110 1 5
4 1 031. 3

b

5
5
5
5
5

all

V

U

T

81
8

b

f

8.

Q2 01
02 (II
10 52
15 01 2 3

2 4. 1113 4 4 OlQ 7.

Q2 02
(12 02
02
)..Ij 02

25
02
(12
02
02
Q2

2 3.
2 3
2 a2 3
2 fl 032

15 W
15 ·02
15 02'
1~ 02
02 02

or

01
01
01
01
01

2
2
2
2
1

5
5
~

5,
5

4 4 021 7
4' 4,. 023 7

02S

4. ~

';

4 4 027 7
4 1 ~

AU plugging for this problem is standard ex:"
cept that relay storage unit 017 is p~ugged to l'e:ceive entries separately in its two halves and to'
read out data as a unit, in the manner described 20'
for unit 151 in Case 1.
,
The first sequence line, SISeq part, directs
+500 to be transferred from pluggable storage
unit 610 to the right half of unit 0 i 1. The
S2Seq part of theftrst sequence line directs a 25
comparison to be made between X, the argument,
and 1. The argument X is in relay storage unit
DI3 to a known number of decimal places, The
constant 1 is in relay storage unit 011 to the
same number of decimal places. T11e compari- 30
son of X to 1 is made by entering 1 from unit
DII, with a - operational sign, into the accumulator and then algebraicaily adding X. The
algebraic sum is a positive or negative number,
depending on whether X is greater or less than 35
(also equal to) 1. The algebraic sum is shifted
nineteen places to the right to discard the numerical portion and the sign
or - is transmitted to column 1 of the left half of storage
unit 017. Now standing in unit 017 is ±500 40
with
or - in column 1 and 500 in columns 18,
19, and 20.
The second sequence line, S ISeq part, directs
the algebraic addition of ± 500 in unit 017 to the
number taken from relay storage unit 103. The 45
number in unit 103 is the same as the S t Seq
part of the fourth sequence line except for oPt
columns 17 and 18 which are to be computed.
This computation will be pe performed by algebraically adding ± 500 to the number in unit t 03. 50
If X is less than 1, then -&00 stands in unit 011
and when added to tile number takell from unit
ID3, the result is the dataof the SISeq PaJ;t of the
fourth sequence line with 15 in the OP I field.
If X is equal to or greater than 1, + 500 is in unit 55
DU and when added to the number in unit I D3,
the result is the S ISeq part of the fourth sequence line with 25 in the OPI field. Thus,
either of the following computations is effected in
the run-off of the second sequence line:
60

+

+

in the accumulator during the run on the S ISeq
part. ot the sec.ond sequence line is transferred to
relay storage unit 152.
The S2Seq part of the second sequence line
dirE:ctl) the algebraic addition of 500, taken from
pluggable storage unit 610 (also see the Qr subfield afline 1) to ±500 taken from ES5 which
received the latter number from unit 011 during the run on the S ISeq part of the second sequence line. The result is either 0000 or 1000
in the accumulator and is shifted three places
to the right to leave either 0 or 1 in the 20th
column of ESI and relay storage unit D31. The
purpose of this operation is to determine whether or not the ultimate answer of the series expansion is to be corrected by Pi/2. If -500 is
in ES5, as received from unit 011 when X is
found to be less than 1, the result of the run
on the S:ZSeq part of the second sequence line
is 0 and the correction will not be made. But
if X is equal to or greater than 1, ES5 will receive +500 from unit 011, and the calculation
instructed by the S2Seq part of the second line
produces the answer 1 in ESt, as a consequence
of which the correction will be made.
The third sequence line, SISeq part commands the multiplication of the number entered in ES I during the preceding calculation
by Pi/2 which is set in dial storage unit 603. If
0 is in ES I, then the product is 0 but if 1 is in
ESI, the product is Pi/2. The product is transmitted to relay storage unit 032.
The third seqUE:nce line bears the S I code
number 52. The sockets SUP52 and SGP52
(Figs. 53a alld b) will have been plugged, as now
understood, to select relay storage unit 152 as
thE: source for SISeq data. 'Unit 152 is now
storing the computed SISeq data arrived at during the running off Of. the first two lines of the
program, Accordingly, under control of the S I
code number 52 in the third line of sequence,
t.he SISeq data from unit 152 is called out to
serve as the left half of the fourth sequence
line.

Columns

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

(103)

2 1 0 1 3 2 3 6 1

- - - -

2

4

3

0

1

8

7

2

0

0

1

+s o. o.

(017)

2 1 0 1 3

2 3 6 1

2

4

3

0

1

8

7·

2

5

O.

1 01'

Columns

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19, 20

(l03)

2 1 0 1 3 2 3 6 1

2

4

3

0

1

8

7

2

(017)
2 1 0 1 3 2 3 6 1

2

4

3

0

1

8

7'

1

0

0

1

-5

0

0

5

0

1

The computed line of sequence thus has 15
The left half (SISeq part) of the fourth seor 25 in. columns 17 a.nd 18 which are in the OP I
quence line be.ars the computed OP I code numt).eld. This line Of. sequence which is, pxoduced 75. ber 15 if ;X has be~l\ ioup.d.. less. th.anl, but

280

279

Assume, for instance, that the anti-log
bears the computed OP I code number 25 if X
X=5.1231247008109001 is to be calculated, that
has been found greater than 1. In the former
X is stored in relay storage unit 0 I0, and that
situation, X is to be used to form the argument
portion .12 of the number already has been used
in the subsequent calculation, While in the latter situation I/X is to form the argument. 5 as the computed argument in a table look-up operation (see Section 20) and the functional
The SISeq part of the fourth sequence line dianti-log differences, here denoted by Dl and D2
rects X to be read out of its storing unit 013
(also see Ur in line 1) to the MD unit (Section
have been selected from table f. The calculation program continues with:
14) to serve as the multiplicand or divisor. The
, b

P

r

, b

Q

r

,b

R

r

o

3. 010 2 2 281 6 6
2 6
2 1 281 4. 1
5601213
2 1
2 1 0132 5 019 o 2 011
2

2 6

4 1 014
or

8H OP
1

1

81

4

15
02
02
01

01
01
01
01
57
01

6

5

02

B

T
b r

,b

U

r

B

V
b

2 3
6 3
5 5 011
2 3
3 019 2 4. 614 4 4 019
4 157

8H OP
2

6
4
1

2 82

02
02
01
01

02
02
02
02
02

II

number 1 is set in pluggable storage unit 612.
If multiplication is called for (OPI number 15),
then 1 is entered in tne MD unit to serve as the
multiplier factor. If the OPI number is 25,
then 1 is entered in the MD unit to serve as the
dividend. The answer is transmitted to storage
unit 0 I B, after a shift of seven places to the
right, to be used as the argument, now denoted
by y.
The right half of the fourth sequence calls
for multiplying argument y, now in ES3, by a
constant, denoted by A, taken from pluggable
storage unit 613. The product Ay is entered in
ESC and stored in unit 019 for checll:ing purposes.
The fifth line, SISeq part, directs the calculation Ay+B, where B is a constant taken from
pluggable storage unit 614. The sum is entered
in ES5, and also in unit D20 for checking purposes. The fifth line S2Seq part, directs Ay+B,
in ES5, to be multiplied by y, in ES3 (see the
fourth line) and the product Ay2+By is entered
in ESC.
The sixth, seventh, and eighth lines, and the
left half of the ninth line continue the calculation of the series. At the end of this calculation, the result standing in ES5 is:
Ay5+By4+Cy3+D1J2+Ey+F=arc tan Y
The ninth sequence line, right half, directs
the correction of arc tan y if, as a result of X
having been found greater than Or equal to 1,
the value Pi/2 has been stored in unit 0.32 during the run on the left half of the third sequence
line. The computed result arc tan y is entered
in ES5 during the run on the left half of the
ninth sequence line. The right half of this line
directs the subtraction of this computed result
from the value in unit 032. If X was found less
than 1, then 032 stands at zero and the final
result is arc tan X=arc tan y. On the other
hand, if X was greater than or equal to 1, then
032 stands at Pi/2 and the final answer is arc
tan X=Pi/2=arc tan y. The final answer is
transmitted via ES I to relay storage unit 029.

25

30

35

40

~;;

50

55

60

Case 3.-Computation of the shift sequence
instruction.-This case deals with computation 65

of the sequence instructions for the direction
or the amount of shift, or both, to be given by
a line of sequence. Such sequence computation
may be desired, for example, in the calculation
of the anti-log of X. In this calculation, the 70
anti-log of the mantissa is obtained and then
shifted to the left, if the characteristic is positive, or to the right, if the characteristic is negative, the extent of shift being determined by
76
the value of the characteristic.

The first sequence line, Slseq part calls for
multiplication of a number derived from storage unit 0 I 0 by a number read out of table I
of the table look-up unit. During the commutator run on the first sequence line, the II-place
number X in 0 lOis delivered to columns 4 to
20 of ES3 and its sign is delivered, as usual, to
column 1. Also, the first difference D, is delivered from table I to ES2. The MD unit (Section
14) handles factors to a maximum of fourteen
places. These factors are applied by Internal
bus columns 16 to 29 (Figs. 64a and j) which receive them from electronic storage columns 7
to 20 (see Section 6). Accordingly, during the
P oe step, the fourteen places, of X, to the right
of the computed argument are entered in the
MD unit to serve as the multiplicand. During
the Q OC step, the difference Dr, is entered in
the MD unit to serve as the multiplier. The
product, which may be designated XDl, is shifted
fourteen places to the right and then delivered to
ES 6.
The first sequence line, S2Seq part, directs the
machine to isolate the characteristic of X and
store it in column 20 of ES3. At the beginning
of the first commutator run, X was delivered by
unit 0 I0 to columns 4 to 20 of ES3. During tlie
U oe step, X is sent from ES3 to the accumulator unit. In the next, V Ie step, X is sent by
the accumulatcr to the denominational shift unit
and shifted sixteen places to the right (see Section 17) after which the shifted result is brought
into ES3. The shift of sixteen places to the.right
discards the mantissa of X and locates the characteristic in column 20 of ES3.
The second sequence line, left half, directs XDl
in ES6 to be added to D2 which is read out of
table I of the table look-up unit to ES I.Tne
result is the anti-log of the mantissa and may
be deSignated as anti-log Xm. This is delivered
by the accumulator to ES I.
The second sequence line, right half, has as
its purpose the placing of the characteristic of
X in the column position 16 occupied by the SH
sequence field (see Fig. 38). This will complete
the computation of the shift amount which is
determined in this example by the value of the
characteristic. In the first cummutator run, the
characteristic was brought into column 20 of EB3.
In the second commutator run, right half, it is
shifted four places to the left during the V IC
step and then delivered by the shift unit to column 16 of ES5 from which it is transmitted to
relay storage unit 0 I I.
In the third commutator run, P oe step, antilog Xm is sent from ESt to the accumulator. In

a,83e,S.79

282

281

The computation of the shift instruction is
. the next, Q IC step; the anti-log is read out from
completed in the run on the fourth line of sethe accumulator to the shift unit and shifted
quence.
" six places to the .left. The shifted result is deBefore starting the program, relay storage unit
livered to ES6. The purpose of this is to center
the anti-log Xm so that it may be shifted to the ." 5 013 has been set with incomplete S ISeq data.
This data will be totaled during the run on the
right or to the left according to the sign of X
fourth sequence line together with ±500,000,000
and the value of the characteristic. It may be
produced in relay storage unit 019 during the
assumed that the anti-log Xm has been calculated
run on the third sequence line and together with
to seven places and therefore stands in columns
14_ to 20 of ESI. It has been shifted now six 10 the characteristic which has been put into culumn 16 of unit 0 II during the run on the second
places to the left into ES6 and therefore stands
sequence line. The accumulated amount will be
in columns 8 to 14 of ES6. This allows for a posthe computed SISeq half of the sixth sequence
sible shift of six places to the left, if the sign of
line. Assume, first, the sign of X to be positive.
X is + and the characteristic is 6, or a possible
shift of six places to the right, if the sign of X 15 Hence, storage unit 019 will contain +500,000,000
and the accumUlation carried out in the poe,
is negative. and the characteristic is 6.
Relay storage unit· 0 19 . has been preliminarily
Q QQ, and. R OC stePs of the fourth sequence
run will be:
..
plugged, in a manner now clear, to receive entries
Columns

1 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

(013)2 0 0 0
(019)

o· 2 .

6 0 0

0 -4

6

0

1

4

0

0

2

0

1

+5

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0·00

0

0·0- 0'2-- 6-0-'0 -0 5 i

0

1

4

0

1

+5

(011)

2 0

5

2

0

· in its left half from In bus-sets I and 3, to receive
If, instead of a positive sign, X has a negative
entries in its right half from In bus-sets 2 and
sign, then ---,500,000,000 stands in unit 019 and
4, and to read lQut as a single unit to Out bus-sets
the result of the accumUlation differs from the
5 and 6.
above in that the 11th coiumn of the total conThe third sequence line has R as an Out field 30 tains digit 4 instead of 5.
and T as an In field (see Section 17a). ES3 still
In the T IC step of the fourth sequence run,
contains the characteristic in column 20 (see
the computed total is transferred to relay ato=:the right half of the first sequence line) and the
age unit 151.
.
sign, as is now evident, is in column 1. During
The fifth sequence line has the code number
the R OC step for carrying out the sequence direc- 35 57 in S I. In a manner now understood, this
tions given by the Rand OP I fields of the third
code number in S I will call out the computed
· sequence line, the characteristic and its sign in
data from relay storage unit 151 to serve as the
ES3 are entered. into the accumulator unit. In
SISeq part of the sixth sequence line.
the next, T IC step, the characteristic and sign
The computed, sixth sequence line, S ISeq part,
are read out of the accumUlator, the character- 40 directs the number in ES6 to be routed through
istic is discarded by the shift of one place to the
the accumulator to the shift unit to be shifted
right, and the sign is re-entered in column 1 of
to the right or to the left according to w!lether
ES3 from where it is transmitted to column 1 of
the computation of sequence has arrived at 4
split unit 019.
or 5 in subfield Rs, to be shifted 5 places to the
Pluggable storage unit 6! 4 (Section 23) has 45 right as determined by the computed shift numbeen plugged to apply digit 5 to column 12 of
ber in SHI which has been derived from the
Out bus-set 4 which is the equivalent of applying
characteristic of X, and for the shifted resc:t
number 500,000,000 to this Out bus-set. .
to be delivered to relay storage unit 014 (Rr).
The third sequence line, in fields U and V diThe anti-log Xm was brought into columns II
rects the number 500,000,000 to be read out of 50 to 14 of ES6 during the Q IC step of the third
pluggable storage unit S j 4 to ES4, and fieldsSH2
commutator run. During the sixth commutator
andOP2 dire·ct this number to be r{lUted via the
run, it is routed through the accumulator and
, accumulator and denominational shift unit back
the shift unit and the shifted ::mti-Iog is deto ES4. Note that since U is an Out field, the
livered to unit 014. If X is negative, then the
· column shift cancel SHCL will not be suppressed, . &5 computed digit in Rs is 4 and the shift unit has
during the next V IC step: Hence, ES4 then
shifted the anti-log Xm to the right for five
contains number 500,000,000 which is-transmitted
places. This brings the anti-log into columns
to the right half of split unit 019 where it enters
·13 to 19 of unit 014. Assuming the decimal point
columns 12 to -20. Note that since U is an Out
to be between columns 7 and 8, the computed
field, the OP.OC signal will be given in the U OC 60 anti~log X is a decimal position to thirteen
steP to reset 2S-ACC.C (Fig. 78a). Also during
places. If X is positive, then the computed digit
the U OC step, 14-ACC.C will be turned to cause
in Rs is 5 and the anti-log Xm is shifted five
the signal RCC to appeal' (see Section 17),
places to the left and brought into columns 3 to
Hence, during the V IC step, the signals SHCL
9 of unit 014. The computed, anti-log X is then
and ACO-RO will not be suppressed, as would be 65 a number having six places to the left of the
the case if U were an In field following T as an In
de.cimal point and fourteen places to the right
:field (see Section 17bL The descending counter
of the decimal point.
in Fig. 27a has been stt:!pped back to 0 during the
Case 4.-,-Computation of sequence instruc· T IC step, AccordiIlgly. tlwre will be no shift
tions for selection of number S01lrces and rein column relation between the number in E::;4 70 ceiving ¥nits.-This case deals with the compuand the number trallsmitted to the right half of
tatiop of the instruction numbers for subfields r
llnit 019.
of OlltorIn fields. The cpmputation of tne 111Split unit 0 19n.ow contains the sign of X in
. structlon number for Bubflel!i b of In or Otlt
~olumn 1 and. them,llllber500,OOO.,000 in .columns
. fields also will be explained.
1 2 . : t o · a O . ' M One. simple .a.pplication of this. case is .in.&.

2,888,872

283

284

problem of frequency distribution for statistics.
(see Section 6). The "hot" socket is used to
apply the non-computed, pre-chosen portion of
Assume a census is being taken of eight different
categories, arrived at by combinations of three
the SISeq part of a subsequent line of sequence.
out of six sub-categories. The six sub-categories
This is accomplished by plugging socket 2 in
and their code numbers may be, for instance; 5 column 1 of sockets lRS-GOPP to the proper
male (1), female (2), citizen (4), employed (5),
sockets in columns 1 to 3 and 6 to 20 of the lRaunemployed (7), non-citizen (8). The code numGOl group. The remaining two columns, namely
bers for eight categories may be obtained by
columns 4 and 5 or lRS-GOPl are plugged to
addition of the code numbers of the three-subsockets 19 and 20 of lRS-GOPP, so that the comcategories applying to individuals, thus:
10 puted category number will supply the distinctive two right-hand digits of the code number in
male citizen employed
(1+4+5) =10
subfield Pr. The plugging, as shown, supplies
male citizen unemployed
(1 + 4 + 7) =12
the following SISeq data, the computed portion
male non·citizen employed
(1+8+5) =14
male non·clitzen unemployed
(1 + 8 + 7) =16
being denoted by CD.
female
female
female
female

citizen employed
citizen unemployed
non·cltizen employed
non·citizen unemployed

(2+4+5)=11
(2 + 4 + 7) =13
(2 8 5) 15
(2 + 8 + 7) =17

15

P

+ + =

,

Q

b

R
a b' r SRI OPI

a b r

2 1 lCD 2 2 612 4 1

02

51
58

The commutator run on the first line of
The three sub-categories pertaining to each
person may be punched in code into record tapes 20 seq~ence computed the category number and
supplied it to columns 1, 19 and 20 of units 151
and accumulated during a commutator run, such
and 158. The next line of sequence will include
as described in Section 17a. The result of the
the S I code number 57 which in a manner now
accumulation may be entered in two receiving
understood will select relay storage unit 151 as
units. An illustrative line of sequence for con25 the source of the next SISeq data, which is given
trolling such a run is:
,b

P

r

,b

Q

r

a b

R

r

215332255223563

8R OP
1
1
81
01

01

8

b

T

r

, 'b

U

r

4 157

The code number 533 in Pr calls for station I
in bank 2 to be read out via its A selector and
to be moved. Code number 522 in Qr calls for
station 10, bank 2, to be read out via its B selector and to be moved. Code number 563 in Rr
calls for station I in bank 3 to be read out via.
its A selector and to be moved. The code 01 in
OPI and OP2 directs accumulation to be performed and 01 and OP2 also makes T anIn field.
The three sub-categories punched in code in
:tapes I and lOin bank 2 and station I in bank
3 will be accumulated and the sum entered in
both relay storage units 151 and 158 (see Sections 17a and b)' The sum constitutes the code
number of a category.
It is desired to maintain a progressive count
of each category. The computed category code
numbers may be used as computed sequence instruction data for selecting relay storage units
to maintain the progressive counts. The computed category code numbers are 10, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15, 16, and 17 which are the two right-hand
digits of code numbers for relay storage units 0 I 0
to 011 and II 0 to Ill. Either of these two groups
of relay storage units may be used. The common left-hand code digit for the storage units of
each group may be supplied by plugging. Relay
storage unit 151 is chosen to supply sequence
data supplemented by a computed code number
for subfield r of an Out field. Relay storage
unit 158 is to supply sequence data supplemented
by the computed code number for subfield r of an
In field. The computed code number comprises
the category number obtained in the commute,tor
run on the line of sequence discussed before.
During this run, the category number, which in
each case is positive, was transmitted to columns 19 and 20 of storage units 151 and 158 and
the + Sign was stored in relay 2 of column 1 of
each of these storage units.
F'ii'. 91 shows the plugging for reading out of
unit 151 to Out bus-set 1, the SISeq data supplemented by the computed code number for subfield Pro Since the + sign is stored in unit 151,
the ~ocket 2 in column 1 of the sockets' lRS,GOPP will be "hot" when Unit In 157 is operated

a b

V

r

4 5 158

5R OP
2
2 S2
0

01

02

30 above. The Pr number will be determined by the
category number and be one of the numbers 110
to 117. The code number 612 in Qr calls out the
digit 1 set in pluggable storage unit 612 (see Section 23), The code number 02 in OPI calls for
35 accumulation. Accordingly, when the above
SISeq data is carried into effect, the previous
category count in the storage unit selected by the
computed category code number will be increased
by 1. The R field of the above SISeq data in10 structs the accumulator to read the latest count
into ESI. The SI code number is 58 and is used
to select relay storage unit 158 as the next source
of S ISeq data.
Fig. 92 shows the plugging for supplying the
45 next SISeq data. The + sign plug socket 2, in
column 1 of 8RS-GOPP is plugged to supply the
non-computed portion of the SISeq data to columns 1 to 13' and 16 to 20 of the sockets 8RSGOP1. The other two columns, 14 and 15, of
fiO sockets 8RS-GOPl and which correspond to
columns 14 and 15 of subfield Rr are plugged to
receive the computed category number from columns 19 and 20 of sockets 8RS-GOPl. The
S ISeq data read out of unit 158 is shown below,
55 the computed portion being denoted by CD.
P

Q

R

abrabr,b
2 1

60

,4 1 lCD

SRI

OPI 51
02

01

The above data calls for the latest progressive
count, of the computed category, which was obtained in the preceding commutator run and inserted into ES I to be transferred, by way of the
65 accumulator and shift unit, to the relay storage
unit selected by the computed category number.
In this examQ.le, the computed category number
is the same for the Pr subfield of the preceding
S ISeq data and for theRr subfield of the next
70 SISeq data. Therefore, the latest progressive
count of the computed category will be returned
to the same memory unit from which the previous
count was taken.
In the foregoing manner, a category number
'15 may be computed and a memory unit selected

tbef.by to ~int~B

~5

fl;. prQgr~sive eoun1l.o1·,tbe
i:requeno), aoourrence of~ th.e category.
Oas,e 5.-Modification at sequence i~stTueti01£

tor bus-sets.-When the frequence cou,nts of cate-

2M

drecIs,~nd,tens~l'sQfthesumisthe."tdenti1Ying
·CQ4e number ofa relaY lltorage u.nit. 'rbe \lnits
order.digit of the sum is; either (} Qr 5. 'rhe sum
will be entered in stora,getJnits .51 and 1.5S. Unit

a.re not to exceed 9-place numbers, half 5 .151 will be called to read out. the first c.omputed
line of sequence and unit 158 will be called to read
categories may serve to keep the frequency
out the second computed line of sequence. .
counts. Each such unit will then be 'used as a.
Assume each ,category number when obtained
split unit. The computation of the sequence
is sent to storage unit 150 after which the rollowinstructions for selecting the units will involve· loing program may be carried out. For convennot only a determination of the storage unit code'
ience, the program is shown as 'made up of the
number but also of the bus-sets to which the split
S fSeq parts of sequence lines but it is understood
units are plugged. In other words, if both halves
that each line also includ~ an S2Stlqpart.
of a storage unit are to read out stored num08 Qb Qr
Pa Pb Pr
Rs Rb Rr
SR1 OP1 Sl
bc:rsJ!epara1;ely. they must be plugged to. differel:lt 15 ~'2 1 ·l,w
.(
2. '2 ars '
3
HI 01
.02. .III
!.
4:
O\lt; bus-~ts and, it tbey·are to receivenumb.ers
. I ' a:
2 fU! .
S 151'
4
2
5
~
1~
~ .ft!<
ClU&1'a.~b' tllflYPlUst be plugged, to different In
4
b,..,gts.'J;'ne fJelecti.on Qf.tne rela,y storaEeGrouP
2
6 616
4
2 or OPE
O~ "l!!\
fi
Qqt" and OJ;oqp In.lS. ~& determined not only QY
5
4.
:I
6
4 or ':CDE
02 01
tbeJlun\Qer!n subfield r but al/!o by t.ne digit in 20
5
~eld. b of the,saEllefieid (see Section 11) .On
The :f,'i,l7st Hne dlrects the category n.umbe:rin
Uli),other hand, the l!electionof a .relay' storage
150 to be Il1.ultipliedby 5 taken from pluggable
Un.itout or In. i~ qetel7minedonly by tl;le nUmber
storage un~t 612 and for the product to go into
in the subfield r. HenQe, tbe desired. half of 8.
QIoUt unit is ~lected by the number in subfi.eld 25 ES3. By multiplying a category number by 5,
one of the numbers 000 to 995 is obtained. The
T and the digit. in subfield b.
next line directs the addition of the product in
ASSllme, for instance, that the units of relay
EB3 to. 100 obtained from pluggable unit 614.
storage Group It are to be used as split units both
The sum is transmitted to ES5 and unit 151. The
for receiving and reading out numbers, that the
left halves' of the units are to receive numbers ,'W third line directs the same sum, in ES5 to be
transferred to unit 15S. Also, the third line has
.frl)tn In bus.;.set 4 and to read out to OUt bus-set
the S I code number 57 to select unit 151 forap',while the right halves are to receive from In
plying the sequence' data in the fourth line to
bus~set5 and to read out to Out bus-set 5 .. The
Out bus-set 1.
plugging for this will be as follows:
~eferring to Fig. 93, the socket 2<+) of 1RSFor receiving numbers in the left halves; c01- 33
GOPP is plugged to socket 2, column 1 and socket
umns 1 to .10 of sockets ORS-GIPP (Figs. 29 and
4, column 2 of lRS-GOP1. The remaining plug30 and Section 6) to columns 1 and 12 to 20 of
gipg ill the /:lame a.s in tl;le preoeding case (see
Oas.-:GIP4·,and from socket 82 of ORS-GIPP to
Fig. 91) except that socket 2 of 1RS--GOPP is not
socket 82 of ORS--GIP4.
For reading out numbers in the left halves; 40 plugged to col~mn 3 Of lRS':"OOP1. Columns 17,
18, and 19 of 1RS-GO:pP are plugged to columns
columns 1 to 10 of sockets ORS-GOPP to col3, 4, and 5 of 1RS-GOP1. The computed relay
umns 1 and 12 to 20 of ORS-GOP4.
storage. code number (designated by CDE) in
For receiving numbers in the right halves; colcolumns 17, 18, and 19 will thvssupply this code
umns 11 and 12 to 20 of sockets ORS-GIPP to
columns 1 and 12 to 20, respectively, of ORS- 45 number to the subfield Pr of the fourth sequence
line. The 20th column of unit 151 'contains either
GIP5, and from socket 84 of ORS-G!PP to socket
o or 5. If 5 is in this column, then the 1 socket
82 of ORS-GIP5.
in lRS-GOPP will be "hot" when Unit Out 1ST
FOr reading out numbers in the right halves;
is operated. ' This socket is plugged to socket I
columns 11 and 12 to 20 or ORS-GOPP to colum.ns 1 a,nd 12 to 20 of ORS-GOP5, respectively. 50 in column 2 of TRS-GOP1. The 4 socket in column 2 Qf TRS-GOP7 is plugged to socket 2 in
:Ely this plugging, all fifteen units of the 0 relay
column 1 of TRS-GOPP. Hence, if 0 stands in
storage group may be used as split units; Simicolumn 20 of unit 151, t!:le bus number 4 will be
lady, other.s of the t.en relay stora!Se groupS maY
supplied to .subfield Pb of .the fourth sequence
be plugged, to receive numbers ip their left halves
from. In bus-set 4 and in their right halves from 55 line, but..!! 5 stands jncolumn.2 of unit 151,
then the bus number 5 will. be supplied to sub ..
In. bus-set 5 and to read out number/! from the
lett and right halves, Separately, to Qut bus-sets
field Ps of the fourth sequence line. According
4 and' 5.
.
to whether the bus number is 4 or 5, either the
An 'example will be given of the computation
left or right half of the selected unitCDE will be
of sequence in~tructions for Out and In bus- GO selected to read out the category count. The SI
sets and also of the relay storage units. For this
code number 58 in the fourth line calls for relay
example, assume there are 2GO consecutive catestorage unit 158 to supply the next S I Seq data.
gory numbers 000 to 199 for which frequency
The plugging of BRS-GOPP to SRS-GOPT differs
counts are to be kept in left and right halves of
from that shown in Fig. 92 in the same respect
the 100 relay storage units 010 to 019,020 to 029, 6[; as Fig. 93 differs from Fig. 91 and is such as to
038 to 039, 040 to 049, 050 to 059, 060 to 063,
read out the fifth line shown in the above pro"
gram.
OlB to 019, 000 to 089, 090 to 099, and IOQ to 109.
Case 6.-Selection oj operational sign code
The computation of sequence will include the
n1Jmber.--A computation may be performed to
first step of multiplying the category number by
5. The prOduct is one of the numbers 000, 005, 70 find the sign and value of an argument. A function of the argument may be computed, treating
010, 015, 020 : .. 980, 985, 990, and 995. The
the argument as It positive number. The result
next step in the computation is t.he addition of
may then be modified according to the sign of the
100 to the product, giving one of the numbers
argument; For instance,sin-e (-'-X) =;·=sine X.
0100, 01.05, 0110, 0115; 0120 .... 1080, 1085, 1090;
aad.:l095.Th6.num.berin.the- .thousands, .hun.. 75 A·tai)ieofs1nefunctlonal values·tor positive aX..
~Qries

&sc .many. relay storage.· units as the number of

9,638,679

287

288

vention. It is the intention, therefore, to be
guments X may be used to compute sine X. The
limited only as indicated by the scope of the folvalue of sine X may then be modified by treatlowing claims.
ing it as a positive value if the original sign of
What Is claimed is:
the argument is positive and treating it as a
negative value if the original sign of the argu- 5
1. In a computing apparatus; an assemblage,
ment is negative. An illustrative program is:
including means for storing numerical data maniP
Q
R
.br.br.br

o
o
o

6 019 2 4 281 6 5
2 5
6 5
6
6
2 il
6 6

2
or 3 100 2 2 618 4 3 101
1

SHOP
T
U
V
11SI.br.br,br
5 15 01 2 5
3 15 01 2 5
4 15 19 2 5

2 3 281 4 5 000
2 2 281 4 5 000
2 1 281 4 5 100

9 15 01

"It is assumed for the above program that X is
a number with less than ten places and is stored
in the left half of unit 019. It is assumed further that constant I has been entered in column
20 of unit 019. The manner in which a unit
such as 019 may be plugged to receive and read
out entries separately in the left and right halves
has been explained before (see Case 1). It is
also asumed that prior to this program, the desired functional values have been selected in table
1 of the table look-up Uliit.
The first line of the above program directs X
to be read out of unit 019 and into the MD unit
and for the + absolute operational Sign CPs is 0)
to be applied to the factor X. Thus, the positive absolute value of X will be used in the computation of ICX). The other factor D3 in the
first multiplication is taken from table 1 and the
product XD3 is transferred to ES5. The right
half of the first line directs another functional
value D2 from table I to be added to XD3. The
algebraic sum XD3+D2 is stored in ES5.
The second sequence line orders X, now in
ES6 to be treated as a + absolute number
and to be multiplied by XD3+D2. The product
X(XD3+D2) is added to a third functional value
Dl, from table ,. The third sequence line calls
for multiplication of the + absolute value of
X by the previous sum, and for the product
X (X2D3+XD2+Dl) to be added to a fourth
functional value Do from table I. The sum
X(X2D3+XD2+Dl) +Do is transmitted to relay
storage unit 100. The left half of the third sequence line has S I number 19 which, in a manner now understood, selects unit 019 as the next
source of S ISeq data. The plugging between
9RS-GOPP and 9RS-GOPl is shown in Fig. 94.
It is seen that the pre-chosen sequence data is
applied via the plugging between socket I in column 20 of 9RS-GOPP and columns 2 to 20 of
9RS-GOP1. Sockets I and 2 of column 1 in
9RS-GOPP are plugged respectively to sockets I
and 2 of column I in 9R~GOP7. Hence, the operational sign code number in Ps of the fourth
sequence line will be either 1 or 2, depending on
the sign of X.
It is to be understood that in those cases involving the selection of units for reading out
values, as in Cases 4 and 5, it is possible not only
to select relay storage units for this purpose but
also to select others of the units such as tape
storage, banks, the dial storage unit, and the
pluggable storage unit.
While there have been shown and described
and pointed out the fundamental novel features
of the invention as applied to a preferred embodiment, it will be understod that various omissions and substitutions and changes in the form
and details of the device illustrated and in its
operation may be made by those skilled in the
art without departing from the spirit of the in-

SHOP
2

2 S2

02 02
02 02
1 04 02
02

15 festations and a calculator, program means,
means controlled by said program means for controlling variable data manifestation entry from
said storage means into the calculator, means
controlled by said program means for controIling
20 arithmetical operations on the data manifestations and means controlled by said program
means for controlling transmission of calculated
result manifestations to said storage means, said
program means including a plurality of manifes25 tation storage means each storing manifestations
of a set of sequence instructions, a circuit organization including one of said last named storage
means for transmuting a set of manifestations
into related program control potentials for said
30 assemblage, a plurality of concurrently available
sources of sets of sequence instruction manifestations, circuits comprising said one of said above
mentioned last named storage means controlled
according to its stored manifestations of sequence
35 instructions for selecting one of said concurrently
available sources of sets of sequence instruction
manifestations from one of said concurrently
available sources and means including said one
of said above mentioned last named storage
40 means for applying the selected set to another of
said plurality of storage means.
2. In a computing apparatus; an assemblage,
including means for storing numerical data manifestations and a calculator, program means,
45 means controlled by said program means for controlling variable data manifestation entry from
manifestation storage into the calculator, means
controlled by said program means for controlling
arithmetical operations on the data manifesta50 tions, in 'combination with means for storing
program data manifestations, a pair of sequence
data manifestation storage units, circuits including said program means for transferring manifestations of program data from the program
55 data storing means into one of said pair of sequence data manifestation storage units, and a
circuit organization coacting with the respective
one of the pair of sequence storage units to trans60 mute the manifestations of program data in"said
one unit into successive calculation program control potentials for said assemblage.
3. In a computing apparatus including numerical data storing means for storage of all digit
65 values, a calculator, entry circuits for entering
data from the storing means into the calculator,
and readout circuits for delivering data from the
calculator to the storing means, the combination
of, a control circuit network including a signal
70 circuit for applying a common entry timing and
prodUcing signal to the entry circuits to effect
concurrent entry of all digit valUe data into the
calculator, another signal circuit for applying a
calculation start signal to the calculator, and a.
75 third signal circuit for applying a common deUv.,.

289

290

8!I'<'i1mlng ;antl .producing .·signalto;~e ;,~ut
Dr.Qtiueing ,means!fqr :sel1lcii~*, ."appIYlng,~~
dmults .toeifect concurrent 'l'ea:dout Qf ,.all :~ittials:to ;sam:;pUQt ,devioes ,for ;effecUqg ,'oOO:miinat.luedata from,.the ,calculat.or :to ithe storing
ed .fSeleettqn -of :too :pilotuniis ,and !tbe,lI'elated
Dl8aIlS,anda signal.circuit lin the, calculatorlfor
channels, :and 'forward ,~:;i~nals :applied ',by ,said
aJIlllYing' a calculation end Signal ~to i~aii:i control !j stQUl.ge;'tneanSwia:ihe:seleetetll channels ito Jibe,~..
tlircuit .;networkto effectuate:opemtion I.df csaid
latad »llo.t lunitscQnd dlcting . conjointly ,wi~h ',saI,d
tHirdstgnalcircuit.
PlitEmthU prraducing means ;to ,enahle ,a,cSelec.iled
l4. ',In a,computing:appanitUS;including:;numerpilot unit to pilot data repre.senUttions :into!tb:e
teal idata .storing .means 'for 'storage ,pf ,-all :digitH0ei'lling,lDj!Bns.
values, ,a:calcutator, entry [circuits ;stUea,ed lac-- 10 rlt. InlL;,~omPttter,:orltoo lUte; ,a.ot;Uomge,unit-i"for
cording ito· differentvaluc :digits 'in 'uraerscof'nun\llUefic3l ,:data m~Prasentations ,of jall ,digit ·;valm«icaFdata in ,saiel: storage means ii.()'be ienteRtl
ues, [a :x:eceiving "unit· f~ numeriea.lltla1:a,rep~&iJl!the;calculator,.readout circuits selected. aC£07tIaen,ta.tions"circuits .iD:;transfer:the numerroal data
tng:to'I:Ufferentvalue .digits .in:the'orders:df:a:'le~p:te&entationsl:fron1i.the! stOl"dge JuniJ; 1to:-the ,resUlt . in' :the; calculator' to :be '. transmitted ito .'saiD 1:; eeiving '.unit;, and SWitching "connections ·upon. opsioragenreans, thecombina:tion :of,a,~igmL'Cir·e!;1a;tiandlf ':which,:aUtl :via ,whioh ·;.the :-storage :unit
cuit for applying a common,timing.sigm}lto the
awlies:~epre.\1entatioIl&of:nllmerieal,da1ia:therein
mlectedentr.y '-circuits ito '.produce ~simultaneous
.to mw:(tniWer :.circuits, an-entry-.timing ;detV~
.8I1t'Ey ;into the: caleula to;: ,of the :different 'value
fm: ,;applYing:s timing:-8ignal to.:said! transfer etl:d~s ::inorders of 'nume:l'icaLdata '1n IInemo1!Y, ia 20 c~ ,to IIfodu¢e:. a ;!Simultaneous ,:entry ·:thereby
SWlBI.:circuitfor . applying ,a ,'CEilcullttion ,:awt
intoctlle;Teeeiving-unlt:of the.;numeri~aVtlata :ep.s}gnallto:the calcUlator ,acircuikoperated ;QY! too
ntsentattollS.; of all i digit ',values,' means, P1"Gtlucing
careulator fur producing:a :calculation iend;llig"
conditioning potentials, and' means·.producing :eQl'nPuter ,'Or! the like ; m.lttnel'ical ''data
in the orders of !the calculated 'result.~~tation ~stomge :mea~s, ;;numerical ,.to.
~(Uln' a; computer or :.the:like; ,a, number! repre- 30 I:,~lnlelSCnta.t~on"reoeiving :-means" ,~rcuij:,s,to t1i'ansnutation, source '. including number' output ,err{er:.aato.::uwresentat1qns :.from,,stflrage :to"the recUlt <.gates, 'a number 'receiver ,including 'nun'l:~
ceitingmean.s rand ,including :an output :Cil'CUit
iDput'ciTCuitgates, tranSfer 'Circui1;s'e'fieetive,upon
lmte r1lff.~ttV..e upon ,:operation ,ther,eof ,·to ·-QPPly
~QSUreofthe· output, and input -gates 'for ·tmllStue lJl.umeriQll,I ,da;:t;a :'reprellentations ,from 'storfCring a' num ber' relJll'esenta tion 'from' the';\IouNle 35 a:g~ ::1:.0 ',the ~.,tl;ansfer"'Circuits",>g3teomeans, ,'a ,pi~t
to ';the reaei ver, 'closure devices for ·.-.the. outpUt, and
dlW'~ l.contl'oUing .said ,gate ,-means, to . pilot ,·the
input:,gates'respectiveIY"means producingccondi.entr¥ (9f: the.:data ,.representations ,applied.OO
tiGning potentials, and means (for' producing -'R
~., tlranster ,'circuits ! to ; the receiving means, '.s.
forward ,s~gnal by ,the ;number representation
seq~~g :ilkwice;inclu:ding ",means 'produetng
source eomprisingJmeans:o!}erate'd1by:the 'opePa- 40 conditioning potentials and a circuit,·to;opemte
tioniof its output gates for :prodUCing said "forsa;idCQqtgut.Jga~,:a,-eontrol, circuit 'for,the '19ilot
'MI'rti signal and means' controlled 'jointly ,by,'said
devi~, ,:Itlltd;.a ,:signal ·,a-pp1ieti ',by ·'said IStomge
torward·signaland by said ' conditioning lpoteBmea;ns:to ,the Ipilot ,\le"Otitlllus:Qltt:g:ut;8w:iteh.:means~alld: the 'input,switCfr-means
sets and transfer circuits, a pilot dav~~for~
se~ection devic~sffcr sele.ctiveiy'operating~OB.e' of
plying:-a -timing ,signal to the :tramfer'cirouits·, to
iwcaoQ>uks.witeh,.tmeans -'to'apply"the "DUIl'I,t;ler
ttme\theentTY' by, said tranSfer' circu1tsdf"tbe-ap- ,1j:5 I!ei')resentation \.from ;tbe"related,oource - aad --\'"ia
pl1edmumericaldataTepresentations. into' the':r.ethe c~cOlUlecting .-ooeu,lts, ,;to . said vinPllt SWi1ie,h
Geivtng:· unit, 'a :source 6fsignals: for condltiortiDg
maaus :.to '~ll'diti0n ·the' ·latt-er .> for 'entering~ the
sa1d:p1lot device, means operable upon: operation
~r::represenia-tion.-into the-receiVing m.ea-ns,
.obsaid.spplying·meansforproduCing,·,afforwartl
.ASSOUllce:,of . :OOnditi0ning"potentials "a"cil"Cuit-;.to
:5fgnal:ann'.r.out:ing Slliidsign:n~:ie: the:Out'bus ..set 60 'Qe,te.ctcthe~.opel!aj;ionr~f·an' ol'l:1;put's~iteh mell!~,
,to,the':pilotdevlce 'to'cooper.ate with 'said, 5(l)UNe
altd:.>a, 'lieV:1ce i. responsi'¥e'·t;o, said "detecting' cir((uit
nf> signals ito ,con trol1t in 'its ,production; of :~
aw ;:aaid ;' cOOditiQning~tentials -'ror -o~atiIlg
:entry~timingsignaI.
SIi4di:;cQ.lJQitioned; input, switch- means'-lio'effect' the
, 7. tIn ,'a .:coIllPuter, nrthe :'like, .numerical ' data
entry,;of~tke,;nWilber'jnto· the 'receiVing-meall~.
1!epresentationstorage lmeans,'numerical ,tdata ~5 ,:lL.cIIJ1JJa ool;llputeror:the t lilre; "a"bank-of nurepresentation receiving:means, circllits':to':tpans- . mericml!' data ,'repl1esentation ,'storage "units . 're.&'1" .cJata·crepresentations frome stor·a;ge!.to:' the're,eeiy~g;,:meJ,ns 'lor·.the, !numerical, data' ~rep:F~enceiving ::-means ':znd: inciuiling·;a 1 plurality rdf.....
t1W()~,at1)lltl1!ali:ty .otcircuit'obalmels-,{.or--irans_
.lectab1e . circuit :.channels :to . whieh,sard '.storage
fel'll41g ,-1CiIlita;'~Jlresenta tions ':fr-mn 'the bank ,. to
iR4!IU'ls . may' aPPly : numerical . d.ata :r.ePl'esenta- 70 Uilerr:emv~g, ill'la.ans,';a: 'pluvallity ,of·,sets -of· uHlt
,~", gate, means, a :pluI:allty el'at'e i!tnal&.
'8~lying :8. teset sikriil:to:~ne'res6t 'cIrcUit tfot
network 'at the 'stattOn' to ;caU~ +the'l'eeor(I1tftri:!~mg,ttle \ihi't ,fOr irec~t!tion :of inewdata, 'a]"5 tei'ial to feed:thel'eafter,'saidPl'ogram 'dl!iVk!e
~uebcb1g 'deVice iticlitdin'g'me'aiis ~ t6l"'Pt6duclhg
being 'contrdUed :by ahotHer's'eqtfel1e'ei:h$ttUetil'Jh
&fi1aitio~Ilk 'signals ifncludihg'a CPtesetise signal,
f6r "preparIng said, additiblial' 'etitty'61r~Utt's'to
means fdr ''renderirig said 'mihHng-'a ihltrlk i'Sigrial 20 sequimcfng-"d'evfee:fdr:tentlerih'giSaidpTOgl"anr:,ae...
to\t~ pll8t deVice'tb<:ombin'e with ~idc6tldiviee'effect!Veforconnectin'g'Said additiohal'eti~
tioning signals for enabling :the ~pirot ''de'Vfee :'to
cIrcuits :totlie 'CSe:tiSing'sM1iion ~hd 'ltIlplylftg $h
8PVly'the reset !sig'n'a:l:to th'e}t~eircuit.
entry '.timing' sigrialto'sRidifirst ~iitry 'circuit ;1\t.'t1ti
~. ~lh a,lmachirie'sUch'as defiried'ih 'Claim 22,
operating the Iietwork"at'th'e :5tattbn;.t'o','eause
iIlrititJiWt iaevice alSb:iIiclUding mearis ~!O'r'Rp'- 2,) the record material 'to tfeed if 'prepated:;for ~h
J)l:ttng i~n 'entry 'tlirifug ,~rghtil :'4'io it.heehtrY 'Ciraction.
CtiHS ,ootfOOtlng :the 1,reset sigrial.
"29. 'In 'a ;machine 'oper-a,ting:with'teCordfma~.!fh ''8, 'iriailHlrieilu~h '~'s 'l:iefihedln elfiiIh 23,
terianiavingsUceesslve'num~ri\jal :lhdilHa~:tep~ilaid ~ttetiliirig'devwe when iiehaeringoptWQ;tive
serita tionrecords ; 'a seilsing'unlt:ft)r'ljenstftg"Ibhe
1di!oa.pj}lYfng 'said'c!fu.tliti6riing signals 'to ,the 31) recOl'd'!\;t a'time,feea mecHBnism' totfeed 'one
plldttleY!ooto'eoiribiIie 'With the baCk 'signali'n
record afte'l'an6ther l to the 's'emiti'glUhlt, 'a ~:nueilat)ung:the'llilOt devie'e 'to 'produce 'saidentiy
meri'ealdata representation tegis~r, ;~htily;::dtr;.
timing ~8Ighal.
' cui tsconn'erltableto: th'e, 'sett5ing).tirut,to~nter:t1te
25. In a machiIie Jdf'th>e 'cl'tiS8 '(Iescrlbed,a
numerical indieiaofa ''SeIisei:i o.1eeol'n Of : the fe~a ~l1'anI$l1l,,'~
'a ;'SOUrCe'Gfas,m ;tepresenfiEitloRll ''},h, ·!rn a'machl~ coperlttin'g'witb 'itec'otd :m:a'a:cc-6rdin~( to ;tli:e6ondition~of';tHe':'Ml1trol:eii'ctiit.
tltrAU1naV1hg!sucCeSSiveindiciarepresentirig::rec'30. In a :maiehIne G~fu;tizrg\'\'nth l'et!o'td ~
lJ~; ,''9. ~;serisingahd ':f~ri'g;stQtloo [01" sensing GO terialhavirtgSltcce8sive inafcm~1"~pt6S~I1ttng'.'teeone indiciarecol'd ::after 'andther, "i'eadcitit"cirords;a sensing'unltfor-'sensi~g:6I1erndfc!a;.reC'Ord
,i!U!ts~fer:an: ihdieia:rerl'ci'rd isensed:gt the "station,
at 'a" time; fee'd"mechanism.' fCir :fe'edlhg;dne·tMo~d
'a'pi'ogrnfu:devlee'b'ohdi tinned:; by ·oneprogl'am
'aft'eranotMr1to'·.tlie,'sensmg' lIrttt; Intifc1a";!lejil'~lh'Strilctibn: for ~onditiorilrig';tlie"i'ea:dout 'circuits
sentation readOUt :clr.cliits 'fdr:(.laactlrtgl\vitli ,;tHe
to '\)fjerate 'and :'eOndltidliirig'a 'rietwork'at the 65 sensing unit ;toteadout"!..epre~'rl.ta:tirms:"ftdtn',;'a.
'ttati6n ,t'o"caUse'th'e'recorifmat'erlal tb fee(ii'liffi:ir
"sensed indicia' tecotd;programst('ltage' meausT,%Or
th'eteadotitciituits'ha~'r~ad;6Ut ;a:n IncUet'8.stofilig 'either a;'sequehce ,:iI1struct1on ;,fm-the
'npres-ehtitig ;reeord,'said'~rogra:fu 'deVice' being
'reaaout,cil'cuits to:'(jperate:arid :thef,eed,~m:echalidiitrolled 'by 'another' pl'ogram "iriStructi()h'f6r
'nisin to 'feed" the tecotdfiiitte:t1alarunotl'fer
n'dhdftioriing tl1e"reattOtWclrcuits to' operate and '10 "sequence'InstfuctiOn, "for ,the ~l'eatlout "'cil'e'ults
conditioning saidhetw6rkatthe statidn to 'caulle
,to 'operate' but:tHe 'feed 'meCha.ni~!n' to :renrain
the; lnditfa rec"drd t'o'tem'1i.in' fh"trre's'ame"sensing
,Idle;' meahsf rehdering:~aiCI 'stota;g'e'MeQns opevaIldsUtob, 'lihCJ. '~a :~equen:C1hg'ttevice'for "terideriJig
:tive" and cIfctiitsirtclud1ftgcSMd .(lneims:tor 'ren;..
tHe, ;'p'rogram "device' effective tor 'oPl!ra.UIig" the
'derlng 'saI{lo"stdrage::mealls ;i.6pe':Wl,t1ve:al1d' ren'c6n'ditIoried 'cff6wts'to't'ea circuits controlled by the program
64. In a computing machine as defined ',in
device according to said patterns for conditioning
claim 63, said conditioning means including a
the pilot device to produce either signal.
60. In a computing apparatus as defined in 5 program device bearing in and out coding representations, means: connecting said program dechUm 59; in combination with a sequencing circuit
vice and said storage units, circuits connected
network for .. applying out and in timing signals
to said storage units and controlled by said .cod'successively to the pilot device, respectively to
enable it to produce the out or in signal, according representations via said storage units to store
10 an indication thereof, and circuits controlled
Ing to the conditioning of the pilot device.
61. In a computing apparatus; a calculator, a
by said connected circuits and thus settable in
ftrst numerical data manifestation storing
accordance with the respective coding repremeans, a second numerIcal data manifestation
sentations and timed under control of said sestorage means, cIrcuits controlled by an entry
quencing network for selectively conditioning the
signal for transferring data manifestations from 15 pilot units.
said ftrst to said second storage means, circuits
65. In a computing machine, a calculator selectively to perform out or in steps of calcula.controlled by an exit signal for sending the
data from said second storage means to the caltion, the out step involving receipt of numerical
culator, a pilot device having circuits to prodata manifestations and performance of a calduce the entl'y and exit sIgnals, means for con- 20 culation thereon and the in step involving deditloning saId pilot device, a commutator .to
livery of a calculated result manifestation, cirapply a pair of sIgnals to the pilot device, one
cuits for controlling transfer of manifestations
commutator signal acting wIth said conditioning
into or out of said calculator, signal responsive
means to enable the entry signal acting with saId
circuits selectively operating said contrOlling cir.,.
conditioning . means circuit to operate and the in cuits, means for conditioning said respon'other commutator signal to enable the exit sigsive circuits, a main commutator comprising a
nal circuit to operate, and a delay circuit in
series of electronic elements operable' in steps
the pilot device connected to the entry and exit
to perform a round of operations for applying
signal cIrcuits for delaying the operation of the
signals to the signal responsive circuits and actexit sIgnal circuit until after. the entry signal 30 ing with said conditioning means to render them
circuit has operated.
effective in desired sequence, said sequentially
62. In a computing apparatus; a calculator
acting commutator elements, each selectively
including a shIftIng circuit operated to produce
conditioned to produce either out or in step con"
a calculated result manifestation and an attendtrol signals for the circuits, and a program deant calculation complete signal, result mani- 35 vice settable to in and out patterns of condifestation storage means, said shifting circuit
tioning for conditioning the commutator eleconnecting said calculator and said storage
ments and circuits controlled by said program
means, result manifestation receiving means,
device according to said patterns for selectively
circuits controlled by an input signal for transconditioning said elements.
ferring the result manifestation from the cal- 40
66. In a computing apparatus; a data manifestation source, a data manifestation receiver,
culator via said shifting circuit to said storage
.means, circuits controlled by an exit signal for
a data manifestation communicating link between the source and receiver and including intransmitting .the result manifestation from said
put and output gates respectively controlled by
storage means to the receiving means, a pilot
device having circuits to produce said input and Ai, input and output signals for admitting data
exit signals, conditioning means for said input . manifestations from the source into the link
and emitting the data manifestations from the
Signal circuits and said exit signal circuits,
link into the receiver, circuits respectively to
and a commutator operated in response to the
produce and apply the input and output signals,
calculation complete signal for applying input
and exit timing signals successively to act jointly. '-'j means to condition, said last named circuits, a
with said conditioning means to the pilot de- ,." sequencing circuit network producing and applying a control signal to the input signal circuit
vice respectively to enable the input and exit
.' .
signal circuits to operate.
to act with said conditioning means to enable
said circuit to produce the input signal, a cir63. In a cO,mputing machine, a calculator 'tq
receive nume!ical data manifestations and per- Ji;:i cuit connected to the input signal circuit, means
for operating said circuit and effective after the
form a computation thereon to produce a calinput signal circuit, to cause said circuit to proculated result'manifestation, a plurality of data
duce and apply a return signal to the network,
manifestation storage units, means connecting
a circuit in the network, brought into operation
said calculator and said storage units, each of
said units having an out circuit gate responsive ,00 under control of the return signal for applying
to an out signal for sending data to the cal- ' . a control signal to the output signal circuit to
act with said conditioning means to enable it
culator and an in circuit gate responsive to an
to produce the output signal.
in signal for 'receiving via said connecting means
67. In a computing apparatus; a data mania calculated result manifestation from the calculator, a plurality of pilot units, one for each 0;; festation register, a data manifestation source,
data manifestation storage unit and selectively , .. circuits between said source and register and responsive to a transmission signal for transmit ..
conditioned to produce either the out signal or
ting data manifestations from the source to the
the in signal for the storage unit, means for se;'
lectively conditioning the pilot units, each .to
register, a reset device responsive to a reset sIg ..
produce, either signal, and a sequencing networkTp nal for clearing the data register for reception
for:,producing out and in control signals and
of the transmitted data, a circuIt operated to
applYing each of these control signals commonly
prodUce the reset signal, a reset delay circuit
to all the pilot units, with the out control signal
concurrently initiated in operation, a circuit
enabling '. any pilot unit conditioned therefor to
operated to produce the transmission signal, and
J)ro~~~e.:itso~t signal and the in control signal ,7!i a circuit conjointly controlled by the delay clr-

301'

3lD-

2;....,.

3M'

-apparatus ,a& :ratus; a calculator 15 tions from·said storage ,means to the calculator
1:ln;tQpeil'a~ing on, nUlller:cal data manifestations
unit to .beused in. a first mtlcula tion step. by the
~Of ~Qducearesu.lt llla~ifestation, numerical
I;:ll,lqu.lator ,u:p.it, .. means. responsive. to said.·com~~a . s~p.r~ge: llleans:;network including a: 1!eries
plete .. signal for thereafterbr:inging the next
of;·commutatorrelectronvalve.circuits- of whi.ch
el~ctron. valve circuit Into operation to pro¢uce
first one is conditioned for:, ~niout: step:: and 20 either. out or,in signals aCCOrding· to ·the· selective
lhe r~pllewingones· al'e conqltiol1ed selectively
conditioning of. the .·c:rcuit, said. Gireuit.,w:him
f()~.out m:in st~ps, said network jnc!uding. a circondItionedc'for. an·. out step GPeratlng ,tosim11ar
etf€ctas the first cl.-rcuit and whenoond'itioned
IIwti,for bJlinging,said. fi.rlSt electron val'le.cirfoi,an.in st~pproducing in signals, aIld,eircuit,s
Ollit:intoQperation to produce Qut.signals, means
"oduaing"cQnd~tioning·:pptentials,;, cIrcuits con- 2.3 brought into operat~on .by the in signals acting
ktlll!td;Jointlyby said : conditioning potentials
30intly·withsaid controlled cIrcuits for seleotively
and by the out signals, irneanscontrolled·.by said
tran/>ferring
calcmlated, result manifestation
corU;rolleti;. circuits: ,for. transferring data.manifa;om the· calculawr unit ito said storage means.
t~tBlfiiDns !rQmsaid storage means to the calcu-.86. J:na.-signal-controlled.cpmpl1ting appara'latoi':.unit·.to:.be used ,in.a calculation, means ;)0 tus; a·data:-manifestation register,- a".data mani:t\)r' ·thereafterbr·inging. the next commutator
festation.,c:rCllit operated by an entry signal.to
eleottQn'.valve. ,circuit .into. operation to produce
enter·:data' manifestations . into the register,
el,ther,.out .or-,jn.Eignals.·according: to the . selecmeans· producing conditicning potentials,asigmye,conditioniIlg:of;said circuit, saidcir{!uit
nal circuit system conditioned.by said condiwhen conditio'ned for an out step operating simi- il;) .tifming means and includtng.an eleCltroh tube
lQ:r:lYc:tothe"firstcircuit. and ,when conditioned
device having, a limited, switched period initiated
·f:energized drmgnal.
euiUi;:l aUlairtmnaticJ'Sequen.cing, xetrcmt),network
.'99.; Inc 'a: lOMIl})uting.·.appm:utus ;.l.a>nvasse~e,
i:Ddai:ling:ca.cconil'.Ol, 'circuit;" iOT,nBStaiUishing .the
including; ,munericM datai,manifesta:tkm Itomge
enky:;signal:.:cil1Cilit. and'.aifiorwlt1.'a, signaLcirmeans and .. a:;:calei~latOT'; pwgram m.eaos/.;means 10 eu1:t.actitlg::upnn a,pPiieJl.tion uPthe;" va:hle;rfrdata.,_aJi~rm·~ntr.y·f:rom'iRidm.or-far:.Jem\bling.:.said:(COl1tro.lJ c~.ouit;;lIaid~automatic
age: m-eans into:;the, ~QOOr~ :,lMeaIlJl.' ~t1l'nlled
sequencing·circuit. netwPrk' alBoincwding,a ;eil'-

(llliti?:eif.ec.tiY.e. at. Q·.,:va;riable:,t.ime !m::.woOOUcipg.a
j:Oihtb:'fW,ith the.'fDrwar,(i, -siglllal.to
and meang.;; eontrt)tied~iby';said'·JProgram;.lmea1lS
bring :said··controljcircuit into'operation.
for eont;rO'lling!.;tI'&~i1isiurr.,Gf~a: C8i1cUleited: lre.: ':1:0.3;: JIn:a71wtnPutiJlg',dCllie!t:.lts.rdefinedin claim
-sult: :manife&tR tion:.tto:alJ.dI.~r.age .De8l1s/;.aa;id
;1,1);;. said. eotn}?utied.,:result: m.anifestation:· 'inelllding cOne or another nuniber manifestation to desprogram: meaIlS.;tntnsmut=g:-groups iof,.lSBCl1.lflD:Ce
instruction" ;represerJtatiOWlnappll:ed"l$UCcessW:e1y 20 ignate .;the.::pperatinnat ;.sign.
to 'se:id , progralIl';IDeanS 1into:,-sueeessi;ve ;rpr,ogram
.: J.i)4::; .A; ,deviee 'fm" .;storing ,tl,u1iolnatically'; exiraetinR:iand,: 'effecting ,:perftn"EllRWle!,of, ::an', in'cf)JlUrol'potentmls: ,fer ;mid'·i,.aSlgemb1Rge •.;~me&l'lS
storing,.availB;bie·i,~OI:lp.s:bf:.Bequenoe..inStrwit1on
atl'l1ction,·'.romp:rising'.-stor~ge.',mea'LlS· ·ron~illipg
representations,? and ,,·cireliits·; :for,.1 a;JPlyi1'lg ::the
.81 i.plurality;: of; :selectable';"s.oorJlge'looa.tienspeach
groups ;.of;'.BeQl:llKllee~)·iDs1Iructianil'ern:esentatm:ns 25 idmtified\PYI.a number:-ada.tent Office...
Signed and sealed this 16th day of June, A~ D. 19530

THOMAS F.- MURPHY,
A8sistant Oommis~ 01 Pate.nta.



File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2014:11:08 13:31:52-08:00
Modify Date                     : 2014:11:08 14:23:19-08:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37
Metadata Date                   : 2014:11:08 14:23:19-08:00
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat 9.55 Paper Capture Plug-in
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:2c754c8e-252e-8942-aa72-51fd92f49e4a
Instance ID                     : uuid:8b3b2e91-f538-7040-8322-94e6e0aa2480
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Count                      : 346